Yaskawa Motoman DX100 Owner's Manual

DX100
OPERATOR’S MANUAL
FOR SPOT AND ARC WELDING USING MOTOR GUN
Upon receipt of the product and prior to initial operation, read these instructions thoroughly, and retain
for future reference.
MOTOMAN INSTRUCTIONS
MOTOMAN- INSTRUCTIONS
DX100 INSTRUCTIONS
DX100 OPERATOR’S MANUAL
DX100 MAINTENANCE MANUAL
The DX100 operator’s manuals above correspond to specific usage.
Be sure to use the appropriate manual.
YASKAWA ELECTRIC CORPORATION
163543-1CD
6
MANUAL NO. RE-CSO-A044 6
DX100
MANDATORY
•
This manual explains the various components of the DX100 system
and general operations. Read this manual carefully and be sure to
understand its contents before handling the DX100.
•
General items related to safety are listed in Section 1: Safety of the
DX100 Instructions. To ensure correct and safe operation, carefully
read the DX100 Instruction before reading this manual.
CAUTION
•
Some drawings in this manual are shown with the protective covers
or shields removed for clarity. Be sure all covers and shields are
replaced before operating this product.
•
The drawings and photos in this manual are representative
examples and differences may exist between them and the
delivered product.
•
YASKAWA may modify this model without notice when necessary
due to product improvements, modifications, or changes in
specifications. If such modification is made, the manual number will
also be revised.
•
If your copy of the manual is damaged or lost, contact a YASKAWA
representative to order a new copy. The representatives are listed
on the back cover. Be sure to tell the representative the manual
number listed on the front cover.
•
YASKAWA is not responsible for incidents arising from unauthorized
modification of its products. Unauthorized modification voids your
product’s warranty.
ii
DX100
Notes for Safe Operation
Read this manual carefully before installation, operation, maintenance, or
inspection of the DX100.
In this manual, the Notes for Safe Operation are classified as “DANGER”,
“WARNING”, “CAUTION”, “MANDATORY”, or “PROHIBITED”.
DANGER
WARNING
CAUTION
Indicates an imminent hazardous
situation which, if not avoided, could
result in death or serious injury to
personnel.
Indicates a potentially hazardous
situation which, if not avoided, could
result in death or serious injury to
personnel.
Indicates a potentially hazardous
situation which, if not avoided, could
result in minor or moderate injury to
personnel and damage to equipment.
It may also be used to alert against
unsafe practices.
Always be sure to follow explicitly the
MANDATORY items listed under this heading.
PROHIBITED
Must never be performed.
Even items described as “CAUTION” may result in a serious accident in
some situations.
At any rate, be sure to follow these important items.
NOTE
To ensure safe and efficient operation at all times, be sure
to follow all instructions, even if not designated as “DANGER”, “CAUTION” and “WARNING”.
iii
DX100
WARNING
•
Before operating the manipulator, check that servo power is turned
off when the emergency stop buttons on the front door of the DX
100 and programing pendant are pressed.
When the servo power is turned off, the SERVO ON LED on the
programing pendant is turned off.
Injury or damage to machinery may result if the emergency stop circuit
cannot stop the manipulator during an emergency. The manipulator
should not be used if the emergency stop buttons do not function.
Fig. : Emergency Stop Button
•
Once the emergency stop button is released, clear the cell of all
items which could interfere with the operation of the manipulator.
Then turn the servo power ON.
Injury may result from unintentional or unexpected manipulator motion.
Fig. : Release of EM
TURN
•
Observe the following precautions when performing teaching
operations within the P-point maximum envelope of the
manipulator:
– Be sure to use a lockout device to the safeguarding when going
inside. Also, display the sign that the operation is being
performed inside the safeguarding and make sure no one closes
the safeguarding.
– View the manipulator from the front whenever possible.
– Always follow the predetermined operating procedure.
– Keep in mind the emergency response measures against the
manipulator’s unexpected motion toward you.
– Ensure that you have a safe place to retreat in case of
emergency.
Improper or unintended manipulator operation may result in injury.
•
Confirm that no person is present in the P-point maximum envelope
of the manipulator and that you are in a safe location before:
– Turning on the power for the DX100.
– Moving the manipulator with the programming pendant.
– Running the system in the check mode.
– Performing automatic operations.
Injury may result if anyone enters the working envelope of the
manipulator during operation. Always press an emergency stop button
immediately if there are problems.
The emergency stop button is located on the right of the front door of
the DX100 and programing pendant.
iv
DX100
CAUTION
•
Perform the following inspection procedures prior to conducting
manipulator teaching. If problems are found, repair them
immediately, and be sure that all other necessary processing has
been performed.
– Check for problems in manipulator movement.
– Check for damage to insulation and sheathing of external wires.
•
Always return the programming pendant to the hook on the cabinet
of the DX100 after use.
The programming pendant can be damaged if it is left in the
manipulator's work area, on the floor, or near fixtures.
•
Read and understand the Explanation of Warning Labels in the
DX100 Instructions before operating the manipulator.
Definition of Terms Used Often in This Manual
The MOTOMAN is the YASKAWA industrial robot product.
The MOTOMAN usually consists of the manipulator, the controller, the
programming pendant, and supply cables.
In this manual, the equipment is designated as follows.
Equipment
Manual Designation
DX100 controller
DX100
DX100 programming pendant
Programming pendant
Cable between the manipulator and the
controller
Manipulator cable
v
DX100
Descriptions of the programming pendant keys, buttons, and displays are
shown as follows:
Equipment
Programming
Pendant
Manual Designation
Character Keys The keys which have characters printed on
them are denoted with [ ].
ex. [ENTER]
Symbol Keys
The keys which have a symbol printed on
them are not denoted with [ ] but depicted
with a small picture.
GO BACK
ex. page key
PAGE
The cursor key is an exception, and a picture
is not shown.
Axis Keys
Numeric Keys
“Axis Keys” and “Numeric Keys” are generic
names for the keys for axis operation and
number input.
Keys pressed
simultaneously
When two keys are to be pressed
simultaneously, the keys are shown with a
“+” sign between them,
ex. [SHIFT]+[COORD]
Displays
The menu displayed in the programming
pendant is denoted with { }.
ex. {JOB}
Description of the Operation Procedure
In the explanation of the operation procedure, the expression "Select • • • "
means that the cursor is moved to the object item and the SELECT key is
pressed, or that the item is directly selected by touching the screen.
Registered Trademark
In this manual, names of companies, corporations, or products are
trademarks, registered trademarks, or brand names for each company or
corporation. The indications of (R) and TM are omitted.
vi
DX100
1 Introduction ..................................................................................................................................... 1-1
1.1 DX100 Overview................................................................................................................ 1-1
1.2 Programming Pendant....................................................................................................... 1-2
1.2.1 Programming Pendant Overview.......................................................................... 1-2
1.2.2 Key Description .................................................................................................... 1-3
1.2.2.1 Character Keys ....................................................................................... 1-3
1.2.2.2 Symbol Keys ........................................................................................... 1-3
1.2.2.3 Axis Keys and Numeric Keys .................................................................. 1-3
1.2.2.4 Keys Pressed Simultaneously................................................................. 1-3
1.2.3 Programming Pendant Keys................................................................................. 1-4
1.2.4 Programming Pendant Display........................................................................... 1-11
1.2.4.1 Five Display Areas ................................................................................ 1-11
1.2.4.2 General-purpose Display Area .............................................................. 1-12
1.2.4.3 Main Menu Area .................................................................................... 1-13
1.2.4.4 Status Display Area............................................................................... 1-13
1.2.4.5 Human Interface Display Area .............................................................. 1-16
1.2.4.6 Menu Area............................................................................................. 1-16
1.2.5 Screen Descriptions ........................................................................................... 1-17
1.2.6 Character Input Operation .................................................................................. 1-18
1.2.6.1 Character Input ..................................................................................... 1-18
1.2.6.2 Operation .............................................................................................. 1-18
1.2.6.3 Alphanumeric Input ............................................................................... 1-19
1.2.6.4 Symbol Input ......................................................................................... 1-20
1.2.6.5 Register Word Function......................................................................... 1-21
1.3 Mode................................................................................................................................ 1-29
1.3.1 Teach Mode ....................................................................................................... 1-29
1.3.2 Play Mode .......................................................................................................... 1-29
1.3.3 Remote Mode ..................................................................................................... 1-29
1.3.4 Teach Mode Priority ........................................................................................... 1-29
1.4 Security Mode.................................................................................................................. 1-30
1.4.1 Types of Security Modes .................................................................................... 1-30
1.4.2 Changing Security Modes .................................................................................. 1-35
2 Manipulator Coordinate Systems and Operations .......................................................................... 2-1
2.1 Control Groups and Coordinate Systems .......................................................................... 2-1
2.1.1 Control Group ....................................................................................................... 2-1
2.1.2 Types of Coordinate Systems .............................................................................. 2-2
2.2 General Operations ........................................................................................................... 2-3
2.2.0.1 Check Safety ........................................................................................... 2-3
vii
DX100
2.2.0.2 Select Teach Mode ................................................................................. 2-3
2.2.0.3 Select Control Group ............................................................................... 2-3
2.2.0.4 Select Coordinate System ....................................................................... 2-3
2.2.0.5 Select Manual Speed .............................................................................. 2-4
2.2.0.6 Servo ON................................................................................................. 2-4
2.2.0.7 Axis Operation ......................................................................................... 2-4
2.2.0.8 HIGH SPEED .......................................................................................... 2-4
2.3 Coordinate Systems and Axis Operation ........................................................................... 2-5
2.3.1 Joint Coordinates.................................................................................................. 2-5
2.3.2 Cartesian Coordinates .......................................................................................... 2-6
2.3.3 Cylindrical Coordinates......................................................................................... 2-7
2.3.4 Tool Coordinates .................................................................................................. 2-9
2.3.4.1 Selecting Tool........................................................................................ 2-11
2.3.5 User Coordinates................................................................................................ 2-12
2.3.5.1 Selecting User Coordinates................................................................... 2-13
2.3.5.2 Examples of User Coordinate Utilization ............................................... 2-14
2.3.6 External Axis....................................................................................................... 2-14
2.3.7 Control Point Operation ...................................................................................... 2-15
2.3.7.1 Control Point Change ............................................................................ 2-18
3 Teaching ......................................................................................................................................... 3-1
3.1 Preparation for Teaching ................................................................................................... 3-1
3.1.1 Checking Emergency Stop Buttons ...................................................................... 3-1
3.1.2 Setting the Teach Lock ......................................................................................... 3-1
3.1.3 Registering a Job.................................................................................................. 3-2
3.1.3.1 Registering Job Names ........................................................................... 3-2
3.1.3.2 Registering Jobs...................................................................................... 3-2
3.1.3.3 Registering Comments ............................................................................ 3-3
3.1.3.4 Registering Control Groups ..................................................................... 3-3
3.1.3.5 Switching to the Teaching Window.......................................................... 3-4
3.2 Teaching Operation ........................................................................................................... 3-5
3.2.1 Teaching Window ................................................................................................. 3-5
3.2.2 Interpolation Type and Play Speed....................................................................... 3-6
3.2.2.1 Joint Interpolation .................................................................................... 3-6
3.2.2.2 Linear Interpolation.................................................................................. 3-7
3.2.2.3 Circular Interpolation ............................................................................... 3-8
3.2.2.4 Spline Interpolation.................................................................................. 3-9
3.2.3 Teaching Steps................................................................................................... 3-11
3.2.3.1 Registering Move Instructions ............................................................... 3-11
3.2.3.2 Registering Reference Point Instructions .............................................. 3-18
3.2.3.3 Registering Timer Instructions............................................................... 3-19
viii
DX100
3.2.4 Overlapping the First and Last Steps ................................................................. 3-22
3.3 Checking Steps................................................................................................................ 3-23
3.3.1 FWD/BWD Key Operations ................................................................................ 3-23
3.3.1.1 Precautions When Using FWD / BWD Operations................................ 3-24
3.3.1.2 Selecting Manual Speed ....................................................................... 3-26
3.3.1.3 Moving to Reference Point .................................................................... 3-27
3.3.1.4 Test Operations..................................................................................... 3-27
3.3.1.5 Machine Lock Operation ....................................................................... 3-28
3.4 Modifying Steps ............................................................................................................... 3-29
3.4.1 Displaying the JOB CONTENT Window for Editing............................................ 3-33
3.4.1.1 Currently Called Up Job ........................................................................ 3-33
3.4.1.2 Calling Up Other Jobs ........................................................................... 3-33
3.4.2 Inserting Move Instructions................................................................................. 3-34
3.4.3 Deleting Move Instructions ................................................................................. 3-36
3.4.4 Modifying Move Instructions ............................................................................... 3-37
3.4.4.1 Modifying Position Data......................................................................... 3-37
3.4.4.2 Modifying Interpolation Type ................................................................. 3-37
3.4.5 Undo Operation .................................................................................................. 3-38
3.4.6 Modifying Reference Point Instructions .............................................................. 3-39
3.4.6.1 Deleting Reference Point Instructions ................................................... 3-39
3.4.6.2 Modifying Reference Point Instructions................................................. 3-39
3.4.7 Modifying Timer Instructions............................................................................... 3-40
3.4.7.1 Deleting Timer Instructions.................................................................... 3-40
3.4.7.2 Modifying Timer Instructions ................................................................. 3-40
3.5 Modifying Jobs................................................................................................................. 3-41
3.5.1 Calling Up a Job ................................................................................................. 3-41
3.5.2 Windows Related to Job..................................................................................... 3-41
3.5.3 JOB HEADER Window....................................................................................... 3-42
3.5.4 JOB CONTENT Window .................................................................................... 3-43
3.5.4.1 Switching the Address Area .................................................................. 3-44
3.5.5 COMMAND POSITION Window......................................................................... 3-48
3.5.6 JOB CAPACITY Window.................................................................................... 3-49
3.6 Editing Instructions .......................................................................................................... 3-50
3.6.1 Instruction Group ................................................................................................ 3-51
3.6.2 Inserting Instructions .......................................................................................... 3-52
3.6.3 Deleting Instructions ........................................................................................... 3-55
3.6.4 Modifying Instructions......................................................................................... 3-55
3.6.5 Modifying Additional Numeric Data .................................................................... 3-59
ix
DX100
3.6.6 Modifying Additional Items.................................................................................. 3-60
3.6.7 Inserting Additional Items ................................................................................... 3-61
3.6.8 Deleting Additional Items .................................................................................... 3-63
3.7 Editing Jobs ..................................................................................................................... 3-64
3.7.1 Selecting the Range ........................................................................................... 3-66
3.7.2 Copying .............................................................................................................. 3-67
3.7.3 Cutting ................................................................................................................ 3-67
3.7.4 Pasting................................................................................................................ 3-68
3.7.5 Reverse Pasting ................................................................................................. 3-69
3.8 Test Operations ............................................................................................................... 3-70
3.8.1 Test Operation Procedures................................................................................. 3-70
3.9 Other Job-editing Functions............................................................................................. 3-71
3.9.1 Editing Play Speed ............................................................................................. 3-71
3.9.1.1 Modification of Speed Type ................................................................... 3-71
3.9.1.2 Relative Modification ............................................................................. 3-71
3.9.1.3 Modification by TRT (Traverse Time) .................................................... 3-73
3.9.2 Editing Interpolation Type ................................................................................... 3-75
3.9.3 Editing Condition Files ........................................................................................ 3-76
3.9.4 User Variables .................................................................................................... 3-77
3.9.4.1 Setting Byte, Integer, Double Precision Integer, and Real Type
Variables................................................................................................ 3-78
3.9.4.2 Setting Character Type Variables.......................................................... 3-80
3.9.4.3 Registering Variable Name.................................................................... 3-82
3.9.4.4 Displaying Position Variables ................................................................ 3-83
3.9.4.5 Setting Position Variables...................................................................... 3-84
3.9.4.6 Setting Position Variables Using the Numeric Keys .............................. 3-85
3.9.4.7 Setting Position Variables Using the Axis Keys..................................... 3-87
3.9.4.8 Deleting Data Set of Position Variables................................................. 3-88
3.9.4.9 Checking Positions by Position Variables ............................................. 3-88
3.9.4.10 Manipulator Types ............................................................................... 3-89
3.9.5 Flip/No Flip.......................................................................................................... 3-90
3.9.6 R-axis Angle ....................................................................................................... 3-90
3.9.7 T-axis Angle........................................................................................................ 3-91
3.9.8 Front/Back .......................................................................................................... 3-91
3.9.9 Upper Arm/Lower Arm ........................................................................................ 3-93
3.9.10 S-axis Angle...................................................................................................... 3-93
3.9.11 Editing Local Variables ..................................................................................... 3-94
3.9.11.1 Setting the Number of Local Variables ................................................ 3-96
3.9.12 Search .............................................................................................................. 3-98
x
DX100
3.9.12.1 Line Search ......................................................................................... 3-99
3.9.12.2 Step Search ...................................................................................... 3-100
3.9.12.3 Label Search ..................................................................................... 3-101
3.9.12.4 Instruction Search ............................................................................. 3-103
3.9.12.5 Tag Search........................................................................................ 3-105
4 Playback ......................................................................................................................................... 4-1
4.1 Preparation for Playback ................................................................................................... 4-1
4.1.1 Selecting a Job ..................................................................................................... 4-1
4.1.1.1 Calling a Job ........................................................................................... 4-1
4.1.1.2 Registering the Master Job ..................................................................... 4-2
4.1.1.3 Calling the Master Job............................................................................. 4-4
4.1.2 The PLAYBACK Window...................................................................................... 4-6
4.1.2.1 Display of Cycle Time.............................................................................. 4-6
4.1.2.2 Operation Cycle ...................................................................................... 4-7
4.2 Playback .......................................................................................................................... 4-10
4.2.1 Playback Operation ............................................................................................ 4-10
4.2.1.1 Selecting the Start Device ..................................................................... 4-10
4.2.1.2 Servo On ............................................................................................... 4-10
4.2.1.3 Start Operation ...................................................................................... 4-10
4.2.2 Special Playback Operations.............................................................................. 4-11
4.2.2.1 Low Speed Operation ........................................................................... 4-11
4.2.2.2 Limited Speed Operations..................................................................... 4-12
4.2.2.3 Dry-run Speed Operations .................................................................... 4-12
4.2.2.4 Machine Lock Operation ....................................................................... 4-13
4.2.2.5 Check Mode Operation ......................................................................... 4-13
4.2.2.6 Weaving Prohibit Setting during Check Mode Operation ...................... 4-13
4.2.2.7 Cancel All Special Operations............................................................... 4-14
4.3 Stop and Restart.............................................................................................................. 4-15
4.3.1 Hold .................................................................................................................... 4-15
4.3.1.1 Using the Programming Pendant .......................................................... 4-15
4.3.1.2 Using an External Input Signal (System Input)...................................... 4-15
4.3.2 Emergency Stop ................................................................................................. 4-16
4.3.2.1 Restart After Emergency Stop............................................................... 4-17
4.3.3 Stop by Alarm ..................................................................................................... 4-18
4.3.3.1 Restart After Stop by Alarm................................................................... 4-19
4.3.4 Others................................................................................................................. 4-19
4.3.4.1 Temporary Stop by Mode Change ........................................................ 4-19
4.3.4.2 Temporary Stop by the PAUSE Instruction ........................................... 4-19
4.4 Modifying Play Speed ...................................................................................................... 4-20
4.4.1 Speed Override .................................................................................................. 4-20
4.4.1.1 Setting Speed Overrides ....................................................................... 4-21
xi
DX100
4.4.1.2 Modifying Play Speed............................................................................ 4-22
4.4.1.3 Cancelling Speed Override Settings...................................................... 4-22
4.5 Playback with Reserved Start .......................................................................................... 4-23
4.5.1 Preparation for Reserved Start ........................................................................... 4-23
4.5.1.1 Enabling Reserved Start........................................................................ 4-24
4.5.1.2 Registering Reserved Start I/O Signal................................................... 4-26
4.5.1.3 Registering Jobs to Stations.................................................................. 4-28
4.5.1.4 Deleting Registered Jobs from Stations ................................................ 4-30
4.5.2 Playback from Reserved Start ............................................................................ 4-31
4.5.2.1 Start Operation ...................................................................................... 4-31
4.5.2.2 Checking Job Reservation Status ......................................................... 4-32
4.5.2.3 Resetting Job Reservation .................................................................... 4-33
4.5.3 Hold Operation.................................................................................................... 4-34
4.5.3.1 [HOLD] on the Programming Pendant................................................... 4-34
4.5.3.2 Hold by External Input Signal (System Input)........................................ 4-34
4.5.3.3 Hold at the Station ................................................................................. 4-35
4.6 Displaying Job Stack........................................................................................................ 4-36
5 Editing Jobs..................................................................................................................................... 5-1
5.1 Copying Jobs ..................................................................................................................... 5-2
5.1.0.1 Copying Jobs on the JOB CONTENT Window........................................ 5-2
5.1.0.2 Copying Jobs on the JOB LIST Window ................................................. 5-4
5.2 Deleting Jobs ..................................................................................................................... 5-6
5.2.0.1 Deleting Jobs on the JOB CONTENT Window........................................ 5-6
5.2.0.2 Deleting Jobs on the JOB LIST Window ................................................. 5-7
5.3 Modifying Job Names ........................................................................................................ 5-8
5.3.0.1 Modifying Job Names on the JOB CONTENT Window........................... 5-8
5.3.0.2 Modifying Job Names on the JOB LIST Window................................... 5-10
5.4 Editing Comments............................................................................................................ 5-12
5.5 Setting Edit Lock on Individual Job Units......................................................................... 5-14
5.6 Enabling the Modification of Position Data Only .............................................................. 5-15
6 Convenient Functions ..................................................................................................................... 6-1
6.1 One-touch Operation “Direct Open”................................................................................... 6-1
6.2 Job Edit Function During Playback .................................................................................... 6-3
6.2.1 Function ................................................................................................................ 6-3
6.2.2 Job Edit During Playback...................................................................................... 6-3
6.2.2.1 Basic Operation ....................................................................................... 6-3
6.2.2.2 Editing ..................................................................................................... 6-6
6.2.2.3 Editing Multiple Jobs................................................................................ 6-8
6.2.2.4 Canceling Write Request....................................................................... 6-11
xii
DX100
6.3 Parallel Shift Function...................................................................................................... 6-13
6.3.1 Function Overview.............................................................................................. 6-13
6.3.1.1 Parallel Shift of Step.............................................................................. 6-14
6.3.1.2 Parallel Shift of Job ............................................................................... 6-14
6.3.2 Setting the Shift Value ........................................................................................ 6-15
6.3.2.1 Coordinate Systems .............................................................................. 6-15
6.3.2.2 Setting the Shift Value........................................................................... 6-15
6.3.3 Registering Shift Instructions.............................................................................. 6-17
6.3.3.1 SFTON Instruction................................................................................. 6-18
6.3.3.2 SFTOF Instruction ................................................................................. 6-20
6.3.3.3 MSHIFT Instruction ............................................................................... 6-21
6.3.4 Continuation of the Parallel Shift Function ......................................................... 6-23
6.3.5 Examples of Use ................................................................................................ 6-24
6.3.5.1 Example of Use of Shift Addition/Subtraction........................................ 6-24
6.3.5.2 Example of Use of MSHIFT Instruction ................................................. 6-25
6.4 Parallel Shift Job Conversion Function............................................................................ 6-26
6.4.1 Function Overview.............................................................................................. 6-26
6.4.2 Coordinate Systems for Conversion................................................................... 6-27
6.4.3 Executing the Parallel Shift Job Conversion....................................................... 6-31
6.4.3.1 Window Display..................................................................................... 6-31
6.4.3.2 Parallel Shift Job Conversion Operation ............................................... 6-33
6.4.4 Specifying the Shift Value by Position Variables ................................................ 6-39
6.4.4.1 Window Display..................................................................................... 6-39
6.4.4.2 Jobs Targeted for Conversion ............................................................... 6-41
6.4.4.3 Conversion of Coordinated Jobs ........................................................... 6-42
6.4.4.4 Operation Procedure ............................................................................. 6-45
6.5 PAM Function .................................................................................................................. 6-47
6.5.1 Function Overview.............................................................................................. 6-47
6.5.1.1 Input Ranges for Adjustment Data ........................................................ 6-47
6.5.2 Operating Methods ............................................................................................. 6-49
6.5.2.1 Setting Adjustment Data ....................................................................... 6-49
6.5.2.2 Executing the Adjustment ..................................................................... 6-51
6.6 Mirror Shift Function ........................................................................................................ 6-55
6.6.1 Function Overview.............................................................................................. 6-55
6.6.2 Pulse Mirror-shift Function.................................................................................. 6-56
6.6.2.1 Parameter Setting ................................................................................. 6-56
6.6.2.2 Object Job ............................................................................................. 6-56
6.6.2.3 Group Axes Specification ...................................................................... 6-56
6.6.2.4 Position Variables ................................................................................. 6-56
6.6.3 Robot-coordinates Mirror-shift Function ............................................................. 6-57
xiii
DX100
6.6.3.1 Object Job ............................................................................................. 6-57
6.6.3.2 Group Axes Specification ...................................................................... 6-57
6.6.3.3 Position Variables.................................................................................. 6-57
6.6.4 User-coordinates Mirror-shift Function ............................................................... 6-58
6.6.4.1 Object Job ............................................................................................. 6-58
6.6.4.2 Group Axes Specification ...................................................................... 6-58
6.6.4.3 Position Variables.................................................................................. 6-58
6.6.5 Notes on the Mirror Shift Function ...................................................................... 6-59
6.6.6 Operation Procedures......................................................................................... 6-60
6.6.6.1 Calling Up the JOB CONTENT Window................................................ 6-60
6.6.6.2 Mirror Shift Conversion.......................................................................... 6-60
6.6.6.3 Explanation of the Mirror Shift Window ................................................. 6-61
6.7 Multi Window Function..................................................................................................... 6-63
6.7.1 Function Overview .............................................................................................. 6-63
6.7.2 Setting the Dividing Pattern of the General-Purpose Display Area .................... 6-63
6.7.2.1 Calling Up and Operating Methods of the Display Dividing Pattern
Setting Window...................................................................................... 6-64
6.7.3 Displaying the Multi Window............................................................................... 6-68
6.7.3.1 Multi Window Mode and Single Window Mode ..................................... 6-68
6.7.3.2 Displaying the Status of Plural (more than two) Window Dividing
Pattern Setting....................................................................................... 6-68
6.7.3.3 Displaying of Active Window and Non-Active Window .......................... 6-69
6.7.3.4 Limited Matters in Multi Window Mode.................................................. 6-69
6.7.4 Operation of Multi Window.................................................................................. 6-70
6.7.4.1 Switching of Multi Window Mode and Single Window Mode ................. 6-70
6.7.4.2 Switching of Active Window................................................................... 6-72
6.7.5 Switching the Axis Operation Control Group ...................................................... 6-74
6.7.5.1 S2C540 “Choosing Method of Notifying the Change of Axis Operation
Control Group when Switching the Active Window” .............................. 6-74
6.8 Simple Menu Function .................................................................................................... 6-76
6.8.1 Simple Menu....................................................................................................... 6-76
6.8.2 Registering the Layout Patters to User Definition Menu..................................... 6-77
6.8.2.1 Register with {REGIST} Button.............................................................. 6-77
6.8.2.2 Register by Key Operation .................................................................... 6-78
6.8.2.3 Conditions to Register the Layout ......................................................... 6-79
6.8.2.4 The Displayed Layout Name ................................................................. 6-79
6.8.3 Calling Up of the Registered Layout ................................................................... 6-80
6.8.3.1 Calling up .............................................................................................. 6-80
6.8.3.2 Conditions when Calling Up the Layout................................................. 6-81
6.8.4 Editing “USER DEFINITION” Menu .................................................................... 6-81
6.8.4.1 Displaying “UNSER DEFINITION” Window........................................... 6-81
6.8.4.2 Displaying “USER DEFINITION MENU” window Under Main Menu ..... 6-82
xiv
DX100
6.8.4.3 Change the Name of Registered Layout Name .................................... 6-84
6.8.4.4 Deleting the Layout ............................................................................... 6-86
6.8.4.5 Delete All Layout ................................................................................... 6-88
6.8.5 Save/Load (to external memory devices) the User Definition Menu Data.......... 6-90
6.8.5.1 Saving the Data..................................................................................... 6-90
6.8.5.2 Loading the Data ................................................................................... 6-92
6.9 Parameter Setting Function ............................................................................................. 6-94
6.9.1 Parameter Setting Function................................................................................ 6-94
6.9.2 Teaching Condition Setting ................................................................................ 6-96
6.9.3 Operation Condition Setting ............................................................................... 6-99
6.9.4 Operate Enable Setting .................................................................................... 6-102
6.9.5 Function Enable Setting ................................................................................... 6-104
6.9.6 Jog Condition Setting ....................................................................................... 6-106
6.9.7 Playback Condition Setting............................................................................... 6-107
6.9.8 Functional Condition Setting............................................................................. 6-109
6.10 Jog Key Allocation ....................................................................................................... 6-110
6.10.1 Jog Key Allocation Function ........................................................................... 6-110
6.10.2 Jog Key Allocation Setting.............................................................................. 6-111
6.10.2.1 Allocation of the Jog Key................................................................... 6-111
6.10.2.2 Cancellation of Jog Key Allocation .................................................... 6-113
6.10.2.3 Operating Method of Allocated External Axis.................................... 6-114
6.11 Energy-Saving Function .............................................................................................. 6-115
6.11.1 Energy-Saving Function ................................................................................. 6-115
6.11.2 Energy-Saving Setting Method....................................................................... 6-116
6.11.2.1 Valid/Invalid of Energy-Saving Setting .............................................. 6-116
6.11.2.2 Accumulated Energy-Saving Time Clearance................................... 6-118
6.11.3 Energy-Saving Status Confirmation Method .................................................. 6-120
6.11.3.1 Confirmation by the accumulated energy-saving time ...................... 6-120
6.11.3.2 Confirmation by System Signal Output ............................................. 6-120
6.12 Instruction Displaying Color Setting Function .............................................................. 6-121
6.12.1 Setting the Instruction Displaying Color on the Job Window .......................... 6-121
6.13 Present Manipulator Position Output Function ............................................................ 6-123
6.13.1 Outline ............................................................................................................ 6-123
6.13.2 Parameters ..................................................................................................... 6-123
6.14 Softlimit Setting Function ............................................................................................. 6-127
6.14.1 About the Softlimit Setting Function ............................................................... 6-127
6.14.2 The Softlimit Setting Screen ........................................................................... 6-127
6.14.3 Setting the Softlimit by Numerical Value Input ............................................... 6-128
xv
DX100
6.14.4 Set the Current Value to the Softlimit ............................................................. 6-129
6.14.5
Set the Softlimit (+)/ the Softlimit (-) to the Initial Maker Value ...................... 6-131
6.14.6 Change the Coordinate Display of the Softlimit (+)/ the Softlimit (-) ............... 6-132
6.15 Analog Output Function Corresponding to Speed ....................................................... 6-133
6.15.1 Overview......................................................................................................... 6-133
6.15.2 Instructions ..................................................................................................... 6-134
6.15.2.1 Instructions for Analog Output Function Corresponding to Speed .... 6-134
6.15.2.2 Registration of Instructions ................................................................ 6-136
6.15.2.3 Analog Output Display....................................................................... 6-139
6.15.3 Examples ........................................................................................................ 6-140
6.15.3.1 Examples of Output Characteristics .................................................. 6-140
6.15.3.2 Example of Variation of Operating Speed and Analog Output Value
........................................................................................................... 6-141
6.15.4 Filter Process.................................................................................................. 6-142
6.15.4.1 When Parameter is Set to “0” ............................................................ 6-142
6.15.4.2 When Parameter is Set to Values Other Than “0”............................. 6-142
6.15.4.3 Parameter Setting ............................................................................. 6-142
6.15.5 Precautions..................................................................................................... 6-145
6.15.5.1 When Analog Output Corresponding to Speed is Interrupted ........... 6-145
6.15.5.2 When More than One Manipulator is Used ....................................... 6-145
7 External Memory Devices ............................................................................................................... 7-1
7.1 Memory Devices ................................................................................................................ 7-1
7.1.1 Compact Flash (CF Cards)................................................................................... 7-2
7.1.1.1 Recommended Compact Flash Cards .................................................... 7-2
7.1.1.2 Notes on handling Compact Flash .......................................................... 7-2
7.1.1.3 Inserting a Compact Flash....................................................................... 7-3
7.1.2 USB Memory Stick................................................................................................ 7-4
7.1.2.1 Recommended USB Memory Stick ......................................................... 7-4
7.1.2.2 Notes on handling USB Memory Stick .................................................... 7-4
7.1.2.3 Inserting a USB Memory Stick................................................................. 7-5
7.2 Handling Data .................................................................................................................... 7-6
7.2.1 Data Classification ................................................................................................ 7-6
7.2.2 File Existence ....................................................................................................... 7-9
7.2.2.1 Saving by Overwriting............................................................................ 7-10
7.3 Operation Flow................................................................................................................. 7-11
7.3.0.1 Operating a Folder ................................................................................ 7-12
7.3.0.2 Saving Data ........................................................................................... 7-16
7.3.0.3 Loading Data ......................................................................................... 7-28
7.3.0.4 Verifying Data ........................................................................................ 7-38
7.3.0.5 Deleting Data......................................................................................... 7-41
7.3.0.6 Job Selection Mode ............................................................................... 7-43
xvi
DX100
8 Parameter ....................................................................................................................................... 8-1
8.1 Parameter Configuration.................................................................................................... 8-1
8.2 Motion Speed Setting Parameters..................................................................................... 8-2
8.2.0.1 S1CxG000: IN-GUARD SAFE OPERATION MAX. SPEED ................... 8-2
8.2.0.2 S1CxG001: DRY-RUN SPEED ............................................................... 8-2
8.2.0.3 S1CxG002 to S1CxG009: JOINT SPEED FOR REGISTRATION .......... 8-2
8.2.0.4 S1CxG010 to S1CxG017: LINEAR SPEED FOR REGISTRATION ....... 8-3
8.2.0.5 S1CxG018 to S1CxG025: POSITION ANGLE SPEED........................... 8-3
8.2.0.6 S1CxG026 to S1CxG029: JOG OPERATION ABSOLUTE VALUE
SPEED .................................................................................................... 8-3
8.2.0.7 S1CxG030 to S1CxG032: INCHING MOVE AMOUNT........................... 8-4
8.2.0.8 S1CxG033 to S1CxG040: POSITIONING ZONE.................................... 8-4
8.2.0.9 S1CxG044: LOW-SPEED START .......................................................... 8-6
8.2.0.10 S1CxG045 to S1CxG048: JOG OPERATION LINK SPEED ................ 8-6
8.2.0.11 S1CxG056: WORK HOME POSITION RETURN SPEED .................... 8-6
8.2.0.12 S1CxG057: SEARCH MAX. SPEED..................................................... 8-6
8.2.0.13 S2C201: POSTURE CONTROL AT CARTESIAN OPERATION OF
JOG ....................................................................................................... 8-6
8.2.0.14 S2C202: OPERATION IN USER COORDINATE SYSTEM
(WHEN EXTERNAL REFERENCE POINT CONTROL FUNCTION
USED) ................................................................................................... 8-6
8.2.0.15 S2C320: CONTROLLED GROUP JOB TEACHING POSITION
CHANGE ............................................................................................... 8-7
8.2.0.16 S2C422: OPERATION AFTER RESET FROM PATH DEVIATION...... 8-7
8.2.0.17 S2C423: OPERATION AFTER JOB ..................................................... 8-7
8.2.0.18 S2C424: DEVIATED POSITION ........................................................... 8-8
8.2.0.19 S2C425: CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION TOOL POSITION CONTROL
................................................................................................................ 8-9
8.2.0.20 S2C653: EMERGENCY STOP CURSOR ADVANCE CONTROL
FUNCTION ............................................................................................ 8-9
8.2.0.21 S2C654: EMERGENCY STOP CURSOR ADVANCE CONTROL
FUNCTION CONT PROCESS COMPLETION POSITION ................ 8-10
8.2.0.22 S2C655: EMERGENCY STOP ADVANCE CONTROL FUNCTION
WORK START INSTRUCTION STEP MOTION COMPLETION
DELAY TIME ....................................................................................... 8-10
8.2.0.23 S2C698: BASE AXIS OPERATION KEY ALLOCATION SETTING.... 8-10
8.2.0.24 S3C1098 to S3C1102: POSITION CORRECTING FUNCTION
DURING PLAYBACK .......................................................................... 8-11
8.3 Mode Operation Setting Parameters ............................................................................... 8-12
8.3.0.1 S2C195: SECURITY MODE WHEN CONTROL POWER SUPPLY IS
TURNED ON ......................................................................................... 8-12
8.3.0.2 S2C196: SELECTION OF CARTESIAN/CYLINDRICAL....................... 8-12
8.3.0.3 S2C197: COORDINATE SWITCHING PROHIBITED........................... 8-12
8.3.0.4 S2C198: EXECUTION UNITS AT “FORWARD” OPERATION............. 8-12
8.3.0.5 S2C199: INSTRUCTION (EXCEPT FOR MOVE) EXECUTION AT
“FORWARD” OPERATION ................................................................... 8-13
8.3.0.6 S2C203: CHANGING STEP ONLY....................................................... 8-13
8.3.0.7 S2C204: MANUAL SPEED STORING FOR EACH COORDINATE ..... 8-13
xvii
DX100
8.3.0.8 S2C206: ADDITIONAL STEP POSITION ............................................. 8-13
8.3.0.9 S2C207: MASTER JOB CHANGING OPERATION .............................. 8-14
8.3.0.10 S2C208: CHECK AND MACHINE-LOCK KEY OPERATION IN
PLAY MODE........................................................................................ 8-14
8.3.0.11 S2C209: RESERVED WORK JOB CHANGING OPERATION ........... 8-14
8.3.0.12 S2C210: MASTER OR SUBMASTER CALL OPERATION IN
PLAY MODE........................................................................................ 8-14
8.3.0.13 S2C211: LANGUAGE LEVEL ............................................................. 8-15
8.3.0.14 S2C214: INSTRUCTION INPUT LEARNING FUNCTION .................. 8-15
8.3.0.15 S2C215: ADDRESS SETTING WHEN CONTROL POWER IS
TURNED ON ....................................................................................... 8-15
8.3.0.16 S2C216: JOB LIST DISPLAY METHOD AT JOB SELECTION .......... 8-15
8.3.0.17 S2C217: INITIAL OPERATION OF MANIPULATOR .......................... 8-16
8.3.0.18 S2C218: PLAYBACK EXECUTION AT CYCLE MODE “1- STEP” ..... 8-16
8.3.0.19 S2C219: EXTERNAL START.............................................................. 8-16
8.3.0.20 S2C220: PROGRAMMING PENDANT START................................... 8-16
8.3.0.21 S2C221: SPEED DATA INPUT FORM ............................................... 8-17
8.3.0.22 S2C222: RESERVED START ............................................................. 8-17
8.3.0.23 S2C224: JOB SELECTION AT REMOTE FUNCTION
(PLAY MODE) ..................................................................................... 8-17
8.3.0.24 S2C225: EXTERNAL MODE SWITCH................................................ 8-17
8.3.0.25 S2C227: EXTERNAL CYCLE SWITCHING ........................................ 8-17
8.3.0.26 S2C228: PROGRAMMING PENDANT CYCLE SWITCHING............. 8-18
8.3.0.27 S2C229: SERVO ON FROM EXTERNAL PP PROHIBITION............. 8-18
8.3.0.28 S2C230: PROGRAMMING PENDANT OPERATION WHEN “IO” IS
SELECTED FOR REMOTE MODE ..................................................... 8-18
8.3.0.29 S2C234: STEP REGISTRATION AT TOOL NO. CHANGE ................ 8-19
8.3.0.30 S2C293: REMOTE FIRST CYCLE MODE .......................................... 8-19
8.3.0.31 S2C294: LOCAL FIRST CYCLE MODE.............................................. 8-19
8.3.0.32 S2C312: POWER ON FIRST CYCLE MODE ..................................... 8-19
8.3.0.33 S2C313: TEACH MODE FIRST CYCLE MODE ................................. 8-20
8.3.0.34 S2C314: PLAY MODE FIRST CYCLE MODE .................................... 8-20
8.3.0.35 S2C316: START CONDITION AFTER ALARM-4107
(“OUT OF RANGE (ABSO DATA)”)..................................................... 8-20
8.3.0.36 S2C395: SIGNAL NAME ALIAS FUNCTION ...................................... 8-21
8.3.0.37 S2C396: VARIABLE NAME ALIAS FUNCTION.................................. 8-22
8.3.0.38 S2C397: I/O VARIABLE CUSTOMIZE FUNCTION ............................ 8-23
8.3.0.39 S2C410: WORD REGISTRATION FUNCTION / WORD EDITING
FUNCTION SPECIFICATION.............................................................. 8-24
8.3.0.40 S2C413: JOB UNDELETE FUNCTION............................................... 8-24
8.3.0.41 S2C415 to S2C419: TIME RESET ...................................................... 8-26
8.3.0.42 S2C431: TOOL NO. SWITCHING....................................................... 8-27
8.3.0.43 S2C433: POSITION TEACHING BUZZER ......................................... 8-27
8.3.0.44 S2C434: JOB LINKING DESIGNATION (When Twin Synchronous
Function Used) .................................................................................... 8-27
8.3.0.45 S2C437: PLAYBACK OPERATION CONTINUATION FUNCTION .... 8-28
8.3.0.46 S2C544: I/O NAME DISPLAY FUNCTION FOR JOB ......................... 8-29
xviii
DX100
8.3.0.47 S2C684:ALL AXES ANGLE DISPLAY FUNCTION ............................ 8-29
8.3.0.48 S2C713: CONTROL POINT OPERATION SETTING ON THE
SERVO TRACK................................................................................... 8-30
8.4 Parameters According to Interference Area .................................................................... 8-31
8.4.0.1 S1CxG400 to S1CxG415: PULSE SOFT LIMIT.................................... 8-31
8.4.0.2 S2C001: CUBE SOFT LIMIT CHECK ................................................... 8-31
8.4.0.3 S2C002: S-AXIS INTERFERENCE CHECK ......................................... 8-33
8.4.0.4 S2C003 to S2C066: CUBE/AXIS INTERFERENCE CHECK................ 8-34
8.4.0.5 S2C067 to S2C194: CUBE USING METHOD ...................................... 8-36
8.4.0.6 S3C000 to S3C047: CUBE SOFT LIMIT............................................... 8-38
8.4.0.7 S3C048 to S3C063: S-AXIS INTERFERENCE AREA.......................... 8-38
8.4.0.8 S3C064 to S3C1087: CUBIC INTERFERENCE AREA ........................ 8-38
8.4.0.9 S3C1089 to S3C1096: ROBOT INTERFERENCE AREA..................... 8-38
8.4.0.10 S3C1097: A SIDE LENGTH OF WORK-HOME-POSITION CUBE .... 8-38
8.5 Parameters according to Status I/O................................................................................. 8-39
8.5.0.1 S2C235: USER OUTPUT RELAY WHEN CONTROL POWER IS
ON ......................................................................................................... 8-39
8.5.0.2 S4C000 to S4C015: PARITY OF USER INPUT GROUPS ................... 8-39
8.5.0.3 S4C016 to S4C031: PARITY OF USER OUTPUT GROUPS ............... 8-40
8.5.0.4 S4C032 to S4C047: DATA OF USER INPUT GROUPS ...................... 8-41
8.5.0.5 S4C048 to S4C063: DATA OF USER OUTPUT GROUPS .................. 8-42
8.5.0.6 S4C064 to S4C079: USER OUTPUT GROUP TO BE INITIALIZED
AT SWITCHING MODE ........................................................................ 8-43
8.5.0.7 S4C240: USER OUTPUT NO. WHEN MANIPULATOR DROP
ALLOWABLE RANGE ERROR OCCURS ............................................ 8-43
8.6 Parameters according to Coordinated or Synchronized Operation ................................. 8-44
8.6.0.1 S2C212: +MOV or +SMOV INSTRUCTION SPEED INPUT................. 8-44
8.6.0.2 S2C213: +MOV INSTRUCTION INTERPOLATION INPUT.................. 8-44
8.6.0.3 S2C231: OPERATION METHOD AT FWD/BWD OPERATION OR
TEST RUN BY INDEPENDENT CONTROL ......................................... 8-44
8.6.0.4 S2C232: JOB AT CALLING MASTER OF SUBTASK BY
INDEPENDENT CONTROL .................................................................. 8-45
8.6.0.5 S2C264: STATION AXIS CURRENT VALUE DISPLAY FUNCTION ... 8-45
8.6.0.6 S2C265 to S2C288: STATION AXIS DISPLAYED UNIT ...................... 8-45
8.6.0.7 S2C420: POSTURE CONTROL OF SYNCHRONIZED MANIPULATOR
(When Twin Synchronous Function Used) ............................................ 8-46
8.6.0.8 S2C421: POSTURE CONTROL OF MANIPULATOR IN MULTI-JOB
(When Twin Synchronous Function Used) ............................................ 8-46
8.6.0.9 S2C687: OPERATION OF JOB WITHOUT CONTROL GROUP
SPECIFICATION................................................................................... 8-47
8.6.0.10 S2C688: EXECUTION OF “BWD” OPERATION ................................ 8-47
8.6.0.11 S3C1101: MAXIMUM DEVIATION ANGLE OF CURRENT STATION
POSITION (When Twin Synchronous Function Used)........................ 8-47
8.7 Parameters for Other Functions or Applications.............................................................. 8-48
8.7.0.1 S1CxG049 to S1CxG051: SMALL CIRCLE CUTTING ......................... 8-48
8.7.0.2 S1CxG052 to S1CxG053: SMALL CIRCLE CUTTING DIRECTION
LIMIT VALUE ........................................................................................ 8-48
xix
DX100
8.7.0.3 S1CxG054 to S1CxG055: SMALL CIRCLE CUTTING OVERLAP
VALUE................................................................................................... 8-48
8.7.0.4 S1CxG063, S1CxG064: PATTERN CUTTING DIMENSION ................ 8-48
8.7.0.5 S1CxG065: MIRROR SHIFT SIGN INVERSION .................................. 8-48
8.7.0.6 S2C430: RELATIVE JOB OPERATION METHOD ............................... 8-48
8.7.0.7 S3C1111 to S3C1190: ANALOG OUTPUT FILTER CONSTANT
(When analog output corresponding to speed function is used) ........... 8-49
8.7.0.8 S3C1191: CUT WIDTH CORRECTION VALUE
(When form cutting function is used) ..................................................... 8-49
8.8 Hardware Control Parameters ......................................................................................... 8-50
8.8.0.1 S2C646: ANTICIPATOR FUNCTION.................................................... 8-50
8.8.0.2 S4C327 to S4C390: SETTING OF OPERATING RELAY NO............... 8-51
8.8.0.3 S4C391 to S4C454: OPERATING METHOD OF RELAYS................... 8-51
8.8.0.4 S2C786 to S2C788: COOLING FAN ALARM DETECTION.................. 8-51
8.8.0.5 S2C789 to S2C792: COOLING FAN ALARM 1 OPERATION .............. 8-52
8.8.0.6 S2C793 to S2C796: COOLING FAN ALARM 2 OPERATION .............. 8-52
8.8.0.7 S2C797 to S2C800: COOLING FAN ALARM 3 OPERATION .............. 8-52
8.8.0.8 S2C801 to S2C804: FAN ALARM 1 POWER SOURCE STATUS........ 8-52
8.8.0.9 S2C805 to S2C808: FAN ALARM 2 POWER SOURCE STATUS........ 8-52
8.8.0.10 S2C809 to S2C812: FAN ALARM 3 POWER SOURCE STATUS...... 8-53
8.9 TRANSMISSION PARAMETERS.................................................................................... 8-54
8.10 Application Parameters.................................................................................................. 8-54
8.10.1 Arc Welding ...................................................................................................... 8-54
8.10.1.1 AxP000: APPLICATION ...................................................................... 8-54
8.10.1.2 AxP003: WELDING ASSIGNMENT OF WELDING START
CONDITION FILE ................................................................................ 8-54
8.10.1.3 AxP004: WELDING ASSIGNMENT OF WELDING END
CONDITION FILES ............................................................................. 8-54
8.10.1.4 AxP005: WELDING SPEED PRIORITY .............................................. 8-54
8.10.1.5 AxP009: WORK CONTINUING ........................................................... 8-54
8.10.1.6 AxP010: WELDING INSTRUCTION OUTPUT.................................... 8-55
8.10.1.7 AxP011, AxP012: MANUAL WIRE OPERATION SPEED................... 8-55
8.10.1.8 AxP013, AxP014: WELDING CONTROL TIME .................................. 8-55
8.10.1.9 AxP015 to AxP017: NUMBER OF WELDING CONTROL .................. 8-55
8.10.1.10 AxP026 to AxP029: TOOL ON/OFF USER OUTPUT NO.
(Jigless system) ................................................................................. 8-55
8.10.2 Handling Application ......................................................................................... 8-55
8.10.2.1 AxP002, AxP004: f1 KEY FUNCTION................................................. 8-55
8.10.2.2 AxP003, AxP005: f2 KEY FUNCTION................................................. 8-55
8.10.3 Spot Welding .................................................................................................... 8-55
8.10.3.1 AxP003: MAXIMUM NUMBER OF CONNECTED POWER
SOURCES ........................................................................................... 8-55
8.10.3.2 AxP004: GUN FULL OPEN STROKE ON/OFF SIGNAL .................... 8-55
8.10.3.3 AxP005: STROKE CHANGE ANSWER TIME LIMIT .......................... 8-56
8.10.3.4 AxP006: PARITY SPECIFICATION FOR WELDING CONDITIONS .. 8-56
xx
DX100
8.10.3.5 AxP007: ANTICIPATE TIME ............................................................... 8-56
8.10.3.6 AxP015: WELDING ERROR RESET OUTPUT TIME......................... 8-56
8.10.3.7 AxP016, AxP017: ELECTRODE WEAR AMOUNT ALARM VALUE... 8-56
8.10.4 General-purpose Application ............................................................................ 8-56
8.10.4.1 AxP009: WORK CONTINUE PROHIBIT............................................. 8-56
9 Spot Welding Application Using a Motor Gun................................................................................. 9-1
9.1 System Overview............................................................................................................... 9-1
9.2
Function Keys ................................................................................................................... 9-3
9.2.1 Switching of the Function Key .............................................................................. 9-5
9.2.1.1 Two-Robot System.................................................................................. 9-5
9.2.1.2 Single-Robot System............................................................................... 9-6
9.3 Before Teaching ................................................................................................................ 9-8
9.3.1 Manual Welding.................................................................................................... 9-8
9.3.2 Manual Dry Spotting ............................................................................................. 9-8
9.3.3 Open/Close of a Motor Gun.................................................................................. 9-9
9.3.4 Mounting Electrodes........................................................................................... 9-10
9.3.5 Registering the Operation Tool........................................................................... 9-10
9.3.5.1 When Using a Single Gun ..................................................................... 9-10
9.3.5.2 When Using a Double Gun.................................................................... 9-11
9.3.6 Teaching............................................................................................................. 9-12
9.3.6.1 Preparing a Pressure Instruction Job .................................................... 9-12
9.3.6.2 Registering Steps .................................................................................. 9-13
9.3.6.3 Registering the SVSPOT Instruction ..................................................... 9-14
9.4 Setting Welding Conditions.............................................................................................. 9-15
9.4.1 Setting of MANUAL SPOT Window.................................................................... 9-15
9.4.2 Pressure Setting ................................................................................................. 9-17
9.4.3 Welding Current and Welding Time Settings...................................................... 9-20
9.5 Playback (Motor Gun)...................................................................................................... 9-21
9.5.1 Check Run.......................................................................................................... 9-21
9.5.2 Actual Welding ................................................................................................... 9-21
9.6 Dry Spotting (Motor Gun)................................................................................................. 9-22
9.6.1 SVGUNCL (Dry Spotting Motion) Instruction...................................................... 9-22
9.6.2 Dry Spotting Pressure Setting ............................................................................ 9-22
9.7 Electrode Wear Detection and Wear Compensation ....................................................... 9-26
9.7.1 Wear Detection and Wear Compensation Operation Flow Chart....................... 9-26
9.7.2 Wear Detection................................................................................................... 9-27
9.7.2.1 Dry Spotting Touch Motion.................................................................... 9-27
9.7.2.2 Sensor Detection................................................................................... 9-27
xxi
DX100
9.7.2.3 Example of Wear Detection .................................................................. 9-28
9.7.3 SPOT WELD DIAGNOSIS.................................................................................. 9-29
9.7.4 Wear Compensation ........................................................................................... 9-32
9.7.5 Teaching Positions with a Worn Electrode ......................................................... 9-33
9.7.5.1 Teaching Example................................................................................. 9-33
9.7.5.2 Parameters ............................................................................................ 9-33
9.7.6 Wear Amount Loading ........................................................................................ 9-34
9.8 Other Functions Using a Motor Gun ................................................................................ 9-35
9.8.1 Motor Gun Stroke ............................................................................................... 9-35
9.8.1.1 Registering the Full-open/Short-open Position...................................... 9-35
9.8.1.2 Registering the current position............................................................. 9-36
9.8.1.3 Registering by entering a numerical value ............................................ 9-36
9.8.1.4 Moving to Full-open/Short-open Position .............................................. 9-37
9.8.1.5 Moving to Full-open/Short-open Position While Other Window is
Displayed............................................................................................... 9-37
9.8.2 Gun Change ....................................................................................................... 9-38
9.8.2.1 Gun Change Instruction ........................................................................ 9-38
9.8.2.2 Signal Status to Execute a GUNCHG Instruction.................................. 9-38
9.8.2.3
Gun Change Job .................................................................................. 9-40
9.8.2.4 Gun Changing Timing............................................................................ 9-42
9.8.3 Electrode Touch Position Teaching Function ..................................................... 9-43
9.8.3.1 Setting the Workpiece Thickness .......................................................... 9-43
9.8.3.2 Registering and Confirming Positions by Touch Motion Teaching ........ 9-46
9.8.4 Forced Gun-pressurizing Function ..................................................................... 9-47
9.8.4.1 Setting an Input Signal Number............................................................. 9-47
9.8.5 Electrode Wear Compensation for Fixed Gun .................................................... 9-49
9.8.5.1 Setting the User Coordinates ................................................................ 9-49
9.8.5.2 Parameters ............................................................................................ 9-50
9.8.5.3 Example of Wear Compensation........................................................... 9-51
9.8.6 Clearance Teaching Function............................................................................. 9-52
9.8.6.1 Operation Flow Chart ............................................................................ 9-52
9.8.6.2 Setting the Teaching Type .................................................................... 9-53
9.8.6.3 Setting the Clearance Files ................................................................... 9-55
9.8.6.4 Operations for Teaching Welding Points ............................................... 9-57
9.8.6.5 Move Instruction for Clearance.............................................................. 9-58
9.8.6.6 Moving for Clearance ............................................................................ 9-59
9.8.7 Teaching with Gun Pressure .............................................................................. 9-61
9.8.7.1 Operation Flow Chart ............................................................................ 9-61
9.8.7.2 Procedure for Registering the Position.................................................. 9-62
9.8.7.3 Setting the Pressure Conditions ............................................................ 9-62
9.8.8 Gun Pressure Compensation Function............................................................... 9-63
9.8.8.1 Operation Flow Chart ............................................................................ 9-63
xxii
DX100
9.8.8.2 Overview ............................................................................................... 9-64
9.8.8.3 Setting the Pressure Compensation Value ........................................... 9-67
9.8.9 Workpiece Transfer Function Using a Motor Gun .............................................. 9-69
9.8.9.1 Operation Flow Chart ............................................................................ 9-69
9.8.9.2 Setting the Conditions for Grasping/Releasing Workpieces.................. 9-70
9.8.9.3 Instruction for Grasping/Releasing Workpieces .................................... 9-72
9.8.9.4 Manual Operation for Grasping/Releasing Workpieces ........................ 9-75
9.8.10 Individual Reset Function for Wear Amount ..................................................... 9-76
9.8.10.1 Operation Flow Chart .......................................................................... 9-76
9.8.10.2 Procedure for Signal Assignment........................................................ 9-76
9.8.11 Welding Conditions Group Output Function ..................................................... 9-78
9.8.11.1 Operation Flow Chart .......................................................................... 9-78
9.8.11.2 Procedure for Assigning the Group Output Relay ............................... 9-78
9.8.11.3 Setting the Group Output Tag ............................................................. 9-80
9.8.11.4 Group Output ...................................................................................... 9-82
9.8.12 Compensation of Gun Arm Bend for C-Gun and X-Gun
(SINGLE ARM MOTION).................................................................................. 9-83
9.8.12.1 Setting the Gun Bend Compensation Coefficient................................ 9-83
9.8.12.2 Compensation Example ...................................................................... 9-84
9.8.13 Gun Stroke Setting for Welding Start ............................................................... 9-85
9.8.13.1 Setting the Gun Stroke Position .......................................................... 9-85
9.8.13.2 Setting the Gun Stroke Motion Speed................................................. 9-86
9.8.13.3 Motion Example .................................................................................. 9-87
9.8.14 Setting the Gun Pushing Coefficient................................................................. 9-87
9.8.14.1 Setting of gun pushing coefficient ....................................................... 9-88
9.8.14.2 Calculation of Gun Pushing Coefficient............................................... 9-89
9.8.15 tip Mounting Control Function........................................................................... 9-90
9.8.15.1 tip Mounting Error Detection Flow Chart ............................................. 9-91
9.8.15.2 Tip Installation ..................................................................................... 9-92
9.8.15.3 Tip Mounting Error Detection .............................................................. 9-94
9.8.15.4 Job Examples...................................................................................... 9-95
9.8.15.5 Monitoring tip Mounting Errors ............................................................ 9-96
9.8.16 Workpiece Thickness Detection Function ........................................................ 9-97
9.8.16.1 Outline ................................................................................................. 9-97
9.8.16.2 Instruction............................................................................................ 9-98
9.8.16.3 Operational Procedure ...................................................................... 9-100
9.8.16.4 Related Functions ............................................................................. 9-108
9.8.16.5 Notes ................................................................................................. 9-110
9.9 I/O Signals for a Motor Gun ........................................................................................... 9-111
9.9.1 I/O Allocation .................................................................................................... 9-111
9.9.1.1 INPUT ALLOCATION Window ............................................................ 9-111
9.9.1.2 OUTPUT ALLOCATION Window ........................................................ 9-113
xxiii
DX100
9.9.1.3 PSEUDO INPUT SIGNAL Window...................................................... 9-115
9.9.2 Allocated Signals .............................................................................................. 9-116
9.10 System Setting............................................................................................................. 9-118
9.10.1 Gun Condition File .......................................................................................... 9-118
9.10.1.1 Entering Pulse to Stroke Conversion Data ........................................ 9-123
9.10.1.2 Entering Torque to Pressure Conversion Data.................................. 9-123
9.10.2 Power Source Condition File .......................................................................... 9-124
9.10.3
Clearing Reference Position Pulse for Wear Detection ................................. 9-128
9.10.4 Setting the Software Limit Value..................................................................... 9-130
9.10.5 Setting the Lost-electrode Detection Value .................................................... 9-131
9.11
Instruction List............................................................................................................. 9-132
10 Arc Welding Application .............................................................................................................. 10-1
10.1 System Structure Example of Arc Welding System ....................................................... 10-1
10.2 General Descriptions of Instructions and Functions ...................................................... 10-2
10.2.1 Setup ................................................................................................................ 10-2
10.2.2 Teaching Operation .......................................................................................... 10-2
10.2.3 Playback ........................................................................................................... 10-4
10.2.4 Production (Automatic Operation) .................................................................... 10-4
10.3 Function Keys ................................................................................................................ 10-5
10.3.1 Switching of the Function Key .......................................................................... 10-7
10.3.1.1 Two-Robot System .............................................................................. 10-7
10.3.1.2 Single-Robot System........................................................................... 10-8
10.3.2 Wire Inching Function ..................................................................................... 10-10
10.3.3 Gas Flow Control Function ............................................................................. 10-10
10.4 Power Source Condition File ....................................................................................... 10-11
10.4.1 About Power Source Condition File................................................................ 10-11
10.4.2 Specifying Welding Voltage when Synergic Power Supply is Used ............... 10-12
10.4.3 POWER SOURCE CONDITION File.............................................................. 10-14
10.4.3.1 POWER SOURCE CONDITION Window.......................................... 10-14
10.4.3.2 POWER SOURCE CONDITION Window for Current/Voltage Output
............................................................................................................. 10-15
10.4.4 Editing the Power Source Condition Files ...................................................... 10-16
10.4.4.1 Displaying a Power Source Condition File ........................................ 10-16
10.4.4.2 Reading a Power Source Condition File............................................ 10-16
10.4.4.3 Editing a Power Source Condition File .............................................. 10-18
10.4.4.4 Editing a Power Source Condition File for Current/Voltage Output... 10-19
10.4.4.5 Registering the Power Source Condition File Data ........................... 10-20
10.5 Basic Functions............................................................................................................ 10-22
xxiv
DX100
10.5.1 ARCON .......................................................................................................... 10-22
10.5.1.1 Function ............................................................................................ 10-22
10.5.1.2 Syntax ............................................................................................... 10-22
10.5.1.3 Explanation ....................................................................................... 10-23
10.5.1.4 Registering the ARCON Instruction................................................... 10-25
10.5.1.5 Setting Welding Start Conditions....................................................... 10-25
10.5.2 ARCOF ........................................................................................................... 10-34
10.5.2.1 Function ............................................................................................ 10-34
10.5.2.2 Syntax ............................................................................................... 10-34
10.5.2.3 Explanation ....................................................................................... 10-35
10.5.2.4 Registering the ARCOF Instruction ................................................... 10-37
10.5.2.5 Setting Arc Welding End Conditions (Crater Processing) ................. 10-38
10.5.3 ARCSET ......................................................................................................... 10-47
10.5.3.1 Function ............................................................................................ 10-47
10.5.3.2 Syntax ............................................................................................... 10-47
10.5.3.3 Explanation ....................................................................................... 10-48
10.5.3.4 Registering the ARCSET Instruction ................................................. 10-50
10.5.4 Arc Start Condition File................................................................................... 10-56
10.5.4.1 Displayed File Numbers .................................................................... 10-56
10.5.4.2 Tabs .................................................................................................. 10-56
10.5.4.3 Comment........................................................................................... 10-61
10.5.5 Arc End Condition File.................................................................................... 10-63
10.5.5.1 Displayed File Numbers .................................................................... 10-63
10.5.5.2 Tabs .................................................................................................. 10-63
10.5.5.3 Comment........................................................................................... 10-68
10.5.6 Welding Speed Specifications ........................................................................ 10-70
10.5.7 Welding Execution Function During Teach Mode .......................................... 10-71
10.5.8 Notes on Arc Welding..................................................................................... 10-72
10.5.8.1 Notes on Restarting .......................................................................... 10-72
10.6 Arc Retry Function ....................................................................................................... 10-73
10.6.1 Arc Retry Function Setting.............................................................................. 10-74
10.7 Arc Restart Function .................................................................................................... 10-75
10.7.1 Arc Auxiliary Condition File............................................................................. 10-77
10.7.1.1 Arc Restart Function Setting ............................................................. 10-77
10.8 Automatic Wire-stick Release Function ....................................................................... 10-79
10.8.1 Arc Auxiliary Condition File............................................................................. 10-80
10.8.1.1 Automatic Wire Anti-stick Function Setting ....................................... 10-80
10.9 Wire-stick Check Function ........................................................................................... 10-81
10.10 Slope Up/Down Function ........................................................................................... 10-82
10.10.1 ARCCTS....................................................................................................... 10-83
10.10.1.1 Function .......................................................................................... 10-83
xxv
DX100
10.10.1.2 Syntax ............................................................................................. 10-83
10.10.1.3 Explanation...................................................................................... 10-84
10.10.1.4 Registering the ARCCTS Instruction ............................................... 10-87
10.10.2 ARCCTE ....................................................................................................... 10-90
10.10.2.1 Function........................................................................................... 10-90
10.10.2.2 Syntax ............................................................................................. 10-90
10.10.2.3 Explanation...................................................................................... 10-91
10.10.2.4 Registering the ARCCTE Instruction ............................................... 10-94
10.11 Enhanced Welding Condition File Function ............................................................... 10-97
10.11.1 Function Setting............................................................................................ 10-98
10.12 Weaving Condition File ............................................................................................ 10-100
10.12.1 Weaving Basic Coordinate System ............................................................ 10-100
10.12.1.1 Cases that Require the Registration of Reference Points ............. 10-101
10.12.2 WVON......................................................................................................... 10-102
10.12.2.1 Function......................................................................................... 10-102
10.12.2.2 Syntax ........................................................................................... 10-102
10.12.2.3 Explanation.................................................................................... 10-103
10.12.2.4 Registering the WVON instruction................................................. 10-106
10.12.3 WVOF Instruction ....................................................................................... 10-108
10.12.3.1 Function......................................................................................... 10-108
10.12.3.2 Syntax ........................................................................................... 10-108
10.12.3.3 Explanation.................................................................................... 10-109
10.12.3.4 Registering WVOF instruction ....................................................... 10-110
10.12.4 WEAVING CONDITION Window................................................................ 10-111
10.12.4.1 Displaying a Weaving File ............................................................. 10-116
10.12.4.2 Editing the Condition Data............................................................. 10-117
10.12.5 Prohibiting Weaving.................................................................................... 10-118
10.12.5.1 Method to Prohibit Weaving During a “CHECK” operation............ 10-118
10.12.5.2 Method to Prohibit Weaving During the “TEST RUN” or FWD
Operation....................................................................................... 10-119
10.12.5.3 Method to Prohibit Weaving by Means of a System Input Signal.. 10-120
10.13 Changing Welding Conditions During Playback ...................................................... 10-121
10.13.1 ARC COND ADJUSTMENT Window.......................................................... 10-121
10.13.1.1 Displaying the ARC COND ADJUSTMENT Window..................... 10-122
10.13.2 Notes on Modification of Welding Conditions ............................................. 10-124
10.13.2.1 When Condition Data cannot be Modified ..................................... 10-124
10.13.2.2 ARCON Instruction ........................................................................ 10-125
10.13.2.3 ARCOF Instruction ........................................................................ 10-125
10.13.2.4 ARCCTS and ARCCTE Instructions.............................................. 10-125
10.14 Displaying Welding Alarm History............................................................................ 10-126
10.14.1 Alarm History Windows............................................................................... 10-126
xxvi
DX100
10.15 Arc Welding Management and Maintenance........................................................... 10-128
10.15.1 ARC WELD DIAGNOSIS Window.............................................................. 10-128
10.15.2 Editing the ARC WELD DIAGNOSIS Window............................................ 10-129
10.16 Arc Monitor Function................................................................................................ 10-131
10.16.1 Hardware Specification............................................................................... 10-132
10.16.1.1 Signal Specifications of JANCD-YEW02 Board
(Analog Input/Output) .................................................................... 10-132
10.16.1.2 Connection .................................................................................... 10-132
10.16.2 Arc Monitor (Sampling) Window ................................................................. 10-132
10.16.3 ARCMONON .............................................................................................. 10-133
10.16.3.1 Function ........................................................................................ 10-133
10.16.3.2 Syntax ........................................................................................... 10-133
10.16.3.3 Explanation ................................................................................... 10-133
10.16.4 ARCMONOF............................................................................................... 10-134
10.16.4.1 Function ........................................................................................ 10-134
10.16.4.2 Syntax ........................................................................................... 10-134
10.16.4.3 Explanation ................................................................................... 10-134
10.16.5 GETFILE .................................................................................................... 10-135
10.16.5.1 Function ........................................................................................ 10-135
10.16.5.2 Syntax ........................................................................................... 10-135
10.16.5.3 Explanation ................................................................................... 10-136
10.16.5.4 Registering the GETFILE instruction............................................. 10-137
10.16.5.5 File Data and Element Number ..................................................... 10-138
10.16.6 Arc Monitor File .......................................................................................... 10-139
10.16.6.1 Function ........................................................................................ 10-139
10.16.6.2 Arc Monitor File ............................................................................. 10-139
10.16.6.3 Displaying the File ......................................................................... 10-140
10.16.7 Parameter................................................................................................... 10-142
10.17 Appendix 1............................................................................................................... 10-144
10.17.1 Table of Work Instructions.......................................................................... 10-144
10.18 Appendix 2............................................................................................................... 10-147
10.18.1 Power Source Condition File Initial Value .................................................. 10-147
10.18.2 Contents of 24 Welder Condition Files ....................................................... 10-148
11 Table of Basic Instructions.......................................................................................................... 11-1
11.1 Move Instructions........................................................................................................... 11-1
11.2 I/O Instructions............................................................................................................... 11-4
11.3 Control Instructions........................................................................................................ 11-6
11.4 Shift Instructions ............................................................................................................ 11-8
11.5 Operating Instructions.................................................................................................... 11-9
xxvii
1
1.1
DX100
1
Introduction
DX100 Overview
Introduction
1.1
DX100 Overview
The main power switch and the door lock are located on the front of the
DX100 controller. The emergency stop button is installed in the upper
right corner of the cabinet door and the programming pendant hangs from
a hook below the button.
For information on setup, installation, and connection of the DX100
system, refer to the “DX100 INSTRUCTIONS”.
Fig. 1-1: DX100 Front View
Main power switch
Door lock
Door lock
1-1
1
1.2
DX100
1.2
1.2.1
Introduction
Programming Pendant
Programming Pendant
Programming Pendant Overview
The programming pendant is equipped with the keys and buttons used to
conduct manipulator teaching operations and to edit jobs.
Fig. 1-2: PP Overview
Start button
Mode switch
START
REMOTE
Menu area
General-purpose
display area
PLAY
Hold button
Emergency
stop button
HOLD
TEACH
JOB
EDIT
DISPLAY
JOB CONTENT
J:TEST01
CONTROL GROUP:R1
0000 NOP
0001 SET B000 1
0002 SET B001 0
0003 MOVJ VJ=80.00
0004 MOVJ VJ=80.00
0005 DOUT OT#(10) ON
0006 TIMER T=3.00
0007 MOVJ VJ=80.00
0008 MOVJ VJ=100.00
0009 MOVJ VJ=100.00
0010 MOVJ VJ=100.00
0011 MOVJ VJ=100.00
UTILITY
S:0000
TOOL:
Insertion slot for
Compact Flash
MOVJ VJ=0.78
Main Menu
TOOL SEL
LAYOUT
GO BACK
DIRECT
OPEN
COORD
Cursor key
PAGE
Multi
ENTRY
MAIN
MENU
X-
S-
Y-
L-
ASSIST
HIGH
SPEED
Y+
Select key
CANCEL
SERVO ON
S+
AREA
SELECT
SERVO
ON
READY
SIMPLE
MENU
X+
Page key
Turn on servo power
Short Cut
L+
X-
X+
R-
R+
Y-
Y+
Z-
Z+
T-
T+
8-
8+
B-
B+
FAST
Z-
U-
Z+
MANUAL SPEED
U+
Manual speed keys
SLOW
E-
Enable switch
Located on the back of
the programming pendant.
When you lightly squeeze it,
the power turns ON.
When you firmly squeeze it,
the power turns OFF.
E+
SHIFT
INTER
LOCK
7
8
9
ROBOT
INFORM
LIST
4
5
EX.AXIS
WELD
ON/OFF
1
0
AUX
MOTION
TYPE
TEST
START
SHIFT
6
BWD
FWD
2
3
DELETE
INSERT
.
-
MODIFY
ENTER
Axis keys
Enable switch (option)
Enter key
Motion
Numeric keys / Function keys
Type key Press to input numbers.
These keys are also used as function keys
to input instructions, etc. Key’s function is
automatically switched when function keys
are available.
1-2
1
1.2
DX100
1.2.2
Key Description
1.2.2.1
Character Keys
Introduction
Programming Pendant
The keys which have characters printed on them are denoted with [ ]. For
example, ENTER is shown as [ENTER].
The Numeric keys have additional functions along with their number
values. Dual function keys are used in the context of the operation being
1
performed. For example: TIMER may be described in the text as [1] or
[TIMER].
1.2.2.2
Symbol Keys
The keys which have a symbol printed on them are not denoted with [ ] but
depicted with a small picture, with the exception of the cursor key, which is
not shown with a picture.
Cursor
Emergency Stop button
DIRECT
OPEN
GO BACK
PAGE
1.2.2.3
Direct Open key
Page key
Axis Keys and Numeric Keys
The keys pictured in the following are referred to as the axis keys and
Numeric keys when described.
X-
X+
S-
S+
Y-
Y+
L-
L+
Z-
Z+
U-
U+
E-
E+
7
X+
R-
R+
Y-
Y+
Z-
Z+
1
T-
T+
TIMER
8-
8+
0
B-
Axis Keys
1.2.2.4
SYNCRO
SINGLE
X-
B+
4
SMOV
REFP
8
9
ARCON
FEED
5
6
ARCOFF
RETRACT
2
3
.
-
GAS
TOOL1
ON
TOOL1
OFF
TOOL2
ON
TOOL2
OFF
Numeric Keys
Keys Pressed Simultaneously
When two keys are to be pressed simultaneously, the keys are shown with
a “+” sign between them, such as [SHIFT]+[COORD].
1-3
DX100
1.2.3
1
1.2
Introduction
Programming Pendant
Programming Pendant Keys
[START]
Starts the manipulator motion in playback
operation.
• The lamp on this button is lit during the play
operation.
The lamp also lights when the playback operation is
started by the system input START signal.
The lamp turns OFF when the playback operation is
stopped by alarm occurrence, HOLD signal, or mode
change.
[HOLD]
Holds the manipulator motion.
• This button is enabled in any mode.
• The lamp on this button is lit only while the button is being pressed. Although the lamp turns
OFF when the button is released, the manipulator stays stopped until a START command is
input.
• The HOLD lamp automatically lights in the following cases to indicate that the system is in
HOLD status. The start and axis operations are
disabled while the lamp is lit.
1. The HOLD signal of system input is ON.
2. The HOLD request is being sent from an
external device in remote mode.
3. In the HOLD status caused by an error
occurred in working process such as wire
sticking at arc welding.
E.STOP Button
Turns OFF the servo power.
• When the servo power is turned OFF, the
SERVO ON LED on the programing pendant will
extinguish.
• An emergency stop message is displayed on the
screen.
[MODE]
REMOTE
PLAY
TEACH
Selects the Play mode, Teach mode, or Remote
mode.
PLAY: Play Mode
The playback of taught job is enabled.
The START signal from an external device is disabled.
TEACH: Teach Mode
The axis operation and edition from the programming
pendant are enabled.
The START signal from an external device is disabled.
REMOTE: Remote Mode
The operation by external signals is enabled.
[START] is invalid during the remote mode.
1-4
DX100
1
1.2
Introduction
Programming Pendant
Enable Switch
[SELECT]
Turns ON the servo power.
When the Enable switch is lightly squeezed while the
SERVO ON LED is blinking and the Mode Switch is set
to “TEACH”, the power is turned ON.
And when this switch is released or firmly squeezed
while the power is turned ON, the power turns OFF.
Works as described below.
• Selects menu items in the main menu area and
the pull-down menu area.
SELECT
• Makes the selected item ready to be set in the
general-purpose display area.
• Displays multiple messages in the message
area.
Cursor
Moves the cursor in the direction of the arrow.
• The size of the cursor and the range/place
where the cursor can move will vary depending
on the window.
• If the UP cursor button is pressed when the cursor is on the first line, the cursor will move to the
last line of the job. Conversely, if the cursor is
on the last line of the job and the DOWN cursor
button is pressed, the cursor will jump to the first
line of the job.
[SHIFT] + UP
Scrolls the screen upward.
[SHIFT] + DOWN
Scrolls the screen downward.
[SHIFT] + RIGHT
Scrolls the screen to the right.
[SHIFT] + LEFT
Scrolls the screen to the left.
[MAIN MENU]
MAIN
MENU
[SIMPLE MENU]
ENTRY
Displays the main menu.
If this button is pressed while the main menu is
displayed, the main menu disappears.
[MAIN MENU] + UP
Increases the brightness of the screen.
[MAIN MENU] + DOWN
Decreases the brightness of the screen.
Displays the simple menu.
If this button is pressed while the simple menu is
displayed, the simple menu disappears.
SIMPLE
MENU
1-5
DX100
1
1.2
Introduction
Programming Pendant
[SERVO ON READY]
SERVO
ON
READY
Enables the servo power supply to be turned ON.
Press this button to enable the servo power supply to
be turned ON if the servo power supply is shut OFF by
the emergency stop or overrun signal.
When this button is pressed:
• In the play mode, the servo power supply is
turned ON if the safeguarding is securely
closed.
• In the teach mode, the SERVO ON lamp flashes
and the servo power supply is turned ON when
the Enable switch is ON.
• The SERVO ON lamp is lit while the servo
power is ON.
[ASSIST]
Displays the menu to assist the operation for the
currently displayed window.
Pressing this button with [SHIFT] or [INTERLOCK]
displays the help guidance for the operation.
ASSIST
• [SHIFT] + [ASSIST]
The function list of key combinations with
[SHIFT] appears.
• [INTERLOCK] + [ASSIST]
The function list of key combinations with
[INTERLOCK] appears.
[CANCEL]
Cancels the current status.
• Deletes the sub menu in the main menu area
and the pull-down menu area.
CANCEL
• Cancels the input data or the input status in the
general-purpose display area.
• Cancels the multiple views in the message area.
• Cancels the occurred error.
[MULTI]
Multi
Works for the multi mode.
If this button is pressed when the multi mode is ON, the
active window switches.
LAYOUT
[SHIFT] + [MULTI]
Switches between the multi-window display and the
single-window display when the multi mode is ON.
[COORD]
Select the operation coordinate system when the
manipulator is operated manually.
TOOL SEL
TOOL
• Five coordinate systems (joint, cartesian, cylin-
COORD
drical, tool and user) can be used. Each time
this key is pressed, the coordinate system is
switched in the following order: "JOINT""WLD/
CYL""TOOL""USER"
• The selected coordinate system is displayed on
the status display area.
[SHIFT] + [COORD]
The coordinate number can be changed when the
"TOOL" or "USER" coordinate system is selected.
1-6
DX100
1
1.2
Introduction
Programming Pendant
[DIRECT OPEN]
DIRECT
OPEN
Displays the content related to the current line.
• To display the content of a CALL job or condition
file, move the cursor to the next line and press
[DIRECT OPEN]. The file will be displayed for
the selected line. Display content will vary
depending on the type of instruction used in the
job.
Example:
For a CALL instruction, the content of the called job will
be displayed.
For a work instruction, the content of the condition file
will be displayed.
For Input/output instructions, the input/output condition
will be displayed.
• The lamp on this button is lit while the direct
open is ON. Press this button while the lamp is
lit to return to the previous window.
[PAGE]
GO BACK
PAGE
[AREA]
Displays the next page.
The page can be switched only when the lamp on this
button is lit.
[SHIFT] + [PAGE]
Switches to the previous page.
Moves the cursor in the following order : “Menu
Area””General-Purpose Display
Area””Message Area””Main Menu Area”. If no
item is displayed, the cursor does not move.
AREA
[SHIFT] + [AREA]
The language can be switched when the bilingual
function is valid. (Bilingual function is optional.)
[AREA] + DOWN
Moves the cursor from the general-purpose display
area to the operation button when the operation button
is displayed.
[AREA] + UP
Moves the cursor to the general-purpose display area
when the cursor is on the operation button.
[SHIFT]
SHIFT
[INTERLOCK]
INTER
LOCK
Changes the functions of other keys by pressing
together.
Can be used with [ASSIST], [COORD], [AREA],
[MOTION TYPE], [ROBOT], [EX. AXIS], cursor key or
Numeric key to access alternate functions.
Refer to the description of each key for the alternate
[SHIFT] functions.
Changes the functions of other keys by pressing
together.
Can be used with [ASSIST], [MULTI], [TEST START],
[FWD], or Numeric key (Numeric key customize
function), [ROBOT].
Refer to the description of each key for the alternate
[INTERLOCK] functions.
1-7
DX100
1
1.2
Introduction
Programming Pendant
[INFORM LIST]
Displays instruction lists of commands available
for job editing.
INFORM
LIST
[ROBOT]
Enables the robot axis operation.
ROBOT
[ROBOT] is active for the system where multiple
manipulators are controlled by one DX100 or the
system with external axes.
[SHIFT] + [ROBOT]
The robot under axis operation can be switched to a
robot axis which is not registered to the currently
selected job.
[INTERLOCK] + [ROBOT]
Switches the application when several applications are
set to a robot.
[EX. AXIS]
Enables the external axis (base axis or station axis)
operation.
EX.AXIS
[EX.AXIS] is active for the system with external axes.
[SHIFT] + [EX. AXIS]
The external axis under axis operation can be switched
to an external axis which is not registered to the
currently selected job.
[MOTION TYPE]
MOTION
TYPE
Selects the interpolation type for playback
operation.
The selected interpolation type is shown in the status
display area on the screen.
• Each time this key is pressed, the interpolation
type changes in the following order:
"MOVJ"" MOVL""MOVC""MOVS"
[SHIFT] + [MOTION TYPE]
The interpolation mode changes in the following order:
"STANDARD"" EXTERNAL REFERENCE
POINT"*" CONVEYOR"*
Interpolation type can be changed in any mode.
*: These modes are purchased options.
[TEST START]
TEST
START
Moves the manipulator through taught steps in a
continuous motion when [TEST START] and
[INTERLOCK] are simultaneously pressed.
The manipulator can be moved to check the path of
taught steps. Operation stops immediately when this
key is released.
• The manipulator operates according to the currently selected operation cycle: "AUTO", "1CYCLE", or "STEP".
• The manipulator operates at the taught speed.
However, if the taught speed exceeds the maximum teaching speed, the operation proceeds at
the maximum teaching speed.
1-8
DX100
1
1.2
Introduction
Programming Pendant
[FWD]
Moves the manipulator through the taught steps
while this key is pressed.
• Only move instructions are executed (one
FWD
instruction at a time, no welding instructions).
[INTERLOCK] + [FWD]
All instructions are executed.
[REFP] + [FWD]
Moves to the reference point of the cursor line. See
chapter 3.3.1.3 "Moving to Reference Point" at
page 3-27 .
The manipulator operates at the selected manual
speed. Make sure that the selected manual speed is
the desired one before starting operation.
[BWD]
Moves the manipulator through the taught steps in
the reverse direction while this key is pressed.
• Only move instructions are executed (no weld
BWD
commands).
The manipulator operates at the selected manual
speed. Make sure that the selected manual speed is
the desired one before starting operation.
[DELETE]
Deletes the registered instruction.
• Deletion completes when [ENTER] is pressed
while this key lamp is lit.
DELETE
[INSERT]
Inserts a new instruction.
• Insertion completes when [ENTER] is pressed
while this key lamp is lit.
INSERT
[MODIFY]
Modifies the taught position data or instruction.
• Modification completes when [ENTER] is
pressed while this key lamp is lit.
MODIFY
[ENTER]
Registers instructions, data, current position of the
manipulator, etc.
• When [ENTER] is pressed, the instruction or
ENTER
data displayed in the input buffer line moves to
the cursor position to complete a registration,
insertion, or modification.
1-9
DX100
1
1.2
Introduction
Programming Pendant
MANUAL SPEED
keys
Sets the speed for manual operation. This speed is
also valid for operations with [FWD] and [BWD].
• There are four speed levels (slow, medium, fast,
and inching). The speed changes as described
FAST
below. The selected speed is displayed on the
MANUAL SPEED
status area.
SLOW
Each time [FAST] is pressed, manual speed changes in
the following order:
"INCH"" SLOW""MED""FST".
Each time [SLOW] is pressed, manual speed changes
in the following order:
"FST""MED""SLOW""INCH"
[HIGH SPEED]
Makes the manipulator move at high speed while
this button and one of the axis keys are pressed
simultaneously during manual operation. No need
to change the setting of speed.
HIGH
SPEED
• The speed for [HIGH SPEED] is specified in
advance.
Axis Keys
Moves specified axes on manipulator.
• The manipulator axes only move while the key is
X-
X+
S-
X-
X+
R-
R+
Y-
Y+
Z-
Z+
T-
T+
8-
8+
S+
Y-
Y+
L-
L+
Z-
B-
Z+
U-
U+
E-
E+
pressed.
• Multiple axes can be operated simultaneously by
B+
pressing two or more keys at the same time.
The manipulator operates in the selected coordinate
system at the selected manual speed. Make sure that
the selected coordinate system and the manual speed
are the desired ones before starting the axis operation.
It is possible to allocate any external axes to [E-] + [E+],
[8-] + [8+] keys to operate them. Refer to chapter 6.10
Jog Key Allocation at page 6-110.
Numeric Keys
Enters the number or symbol when the ">" prompt
appears on the input line.
7
• “.” is the decimal point. “-” is a minus sign or
SYNCRO
SINGLE
4
SMOV
1
TIMER
0
REFP
8
9
ARCON
FEED
5
6
ARCOFF
RETRACT
2
3
.
-
GAS
TOOL1
ON
TOOL1
OFF
TOOL2
ON
hyphen.
The Numeric keys are also used as function keys.
Refer to the explanation of each function for details.
TOOL2
OFF
1-10
1
1.2
DX100
1.2.4
Introduction
Programming Pendant
Programming Pendant Display
The programming pendant display is a 5.7 inch color display.
Alphanumeric characters can be used.
1.2.4.1
Five Display Areas
The general-purpose display area, menu area, human interface display
area, and main menu area among the following five areas can be moved
by pressing [AREA], or can be selected by directly touching the screen.
Menu area
Status display area
Main menu area
General-purpose display area
Human interface
display area
Each window displayed during operations is provided with its name on the
upper left of the general-purpose display area.
1-11
1
1.2
DX100
1.2.4.2
Introduction
Programming Pendant
General-purpose Display Area
On the general-purpose display area, various settings and contents such
as jobs and characteristics files can be displayed and edited.
The operation buttons are also displayed at the bottom of the window
according to the window contents.
• To move the cursor to the operation button, press [AREA] + DOWN
cursor key.
• To move the cursor to the general-purpose display area, press
[AREA] + UP cursor key or press [CANCEL].
• To move the cursor between the operation buttons, use the RIGHT
or LEFT cursor key.
• To execute the operation button, move the cursor to the button and
press [SELECT].
EXECUTE
: Continues operation with the displayed contents.
CANCEL
: Cancels the displayed contents and returns to the previous window.
COMPLETE
: Completes the setting operation displayed on the general-purpose display
STOP
: Stops operation when loading, saving, or verifying with an external memory
area.
device.
RELEASE
: Releases the overrun and shock sensor function.
RESET
: Resets an alarm. (Cannot reset major alarms.)
PAGE
: Jumps to the appropriate page if the page can be switched.
• When the page can be switched by specifying the page number, the following input box appears when “DIRECT PAGE” is selected. Directly type
the desired page number and press [ENTER].
General-purpose
display area
Operation buttons
JUMP TO:
PAGE
• When the page can be switched by selecting an item, the following selection list appears when “DIRECT PAGE” is selected. Select a desired item
using the UP and DOWN cursor key and press [ENTER].
PAGE
1-12
1
1.2
DX100
1.2.4.3
Introduction
Programming Pendant
Main Menu Area
Each menu and submenu are displayed in the main menu area. Press
[MAIN MENU] or touch {Main Menu} on the left bottom of the window to
display the main menu.
1.2.4.4
Status Display Area
The Status Display area shows controller status. The displayed
information will vary depending on the controller mode (Play/Teach).
T
L. Saving Data
K. Weak battery
J. Multi Mode
I. Page
H. Tool number
G. Mode
F. State under execution
E. Operation cycle
D. Security mode
A. Group operation axis
B. Operation coordinate system
C. Manual speed
A. Control Group
Displays the active control group for systems equipped with station axes
or several robot axes.
to
: Robot Axes
to
: Base Axes
to
: Station Axes
1-13
DX100
1
1.2
Introduction
Programming Pendant
B. Operation Coordinate System
Displays the selected coordinate system. Switched by pressing
[COORD].
: Joint Coordinates
: Cartesian Coordinates
: Cylindrical Coordinates
: Tool Coordinates
: User Coordinates
C. Manual Speed
Displays the selected speed. For details, refer to chapter 2.2.0.5
"Select Manual Speed" at page 2-4.
: Inching
: Low Speed
: Medium Speed
: High Speed
D. Security Mode
: Operation Mode
: Edit Mode
: Management Mode
E. Operation Cycle
Displays the present operation cycle.
: Step
: Cycle
: Continuous
1-14
DX100
1
1.2
Introduction
Programming Pendant
F. State Under Execution
Displays the present system status (STOP, HOLD, ESTOP, ALARM, or
RUN).
: Stop Status
: Hold Status
: Emergency Stop Status
: Alarm Status
: Operating Status
G. Mode
T
: Teach mode
P
: Play mode
H. Tool Number
From
to
: Displayed the tool No. which is chosen by a robot
when the tool No. switch function is valid.
(S2C431=1).
I. Page
: Displayed when the page can be switched.
J. Multi Mode
: Displayed when the multi window mode is set.
K. Weak Battery of Memory
: Displayed when the battery of memory is weak.
L. Saving Data
: Displayed while saving the data.
1-15
1
1.2
DX100
1.2.4.5
Introduction
Programming Pendant
Human Interface Display Area
An error(s) or a message(s) is displayed in the human interface display
area.
Turn on servo power
When an error is displayed, operations cannot be performed until the error
is canceled. Press [CANCEL] to allow for operations.
When two or more errors occur,
appears in the message display area.
Activate the message display area and press [SELECT] to view the list of
current errors.
5/9
Cannot load macro job at current security mode
Cannot insert/modify/delete for group axis detachment
Cannot insert/modify/delete for axis detachment
HELP
CLOSE
To close the error list, select "CLOSE" or press [CANCEL].
1.2.4.6
Menu Area
The menu area is used to edit a job, manage jobs, and execute various
utilities.
1-16
DX100
1.2.5
1
1.2
Introduction
Programming Pendant
Screen Descriptions
• The menu displayed in the programming pendant is denoted with { }.
The above menu items are denoted with {DATA}, {EDIT}, {DISPLAY},
AND {UTILITY}.
• The window can be displayed according to the view desired.
Full Window View
Upper Window View
Middle Window View
Lower Window View
1-17
1
1.2
DX100
1.2.6
Introduction
Programming Pendant
Character Input Operation
Move the cursor to the data for which characters are to be input, and press
[SELECT] to display the software keypad.
1.2.6.1
Character Input
To input characters, the software keypad is shown on the programming
pendant display.
There are three types of software keypads: the alphanumeric keypads
each for upper-case and lower-case characters and the symbol keypad.
To switch between the alphanumeric keypads and the symbol keypad,
touch the button tab on the screen or press [PAGE]. To switch the
alphanumeric keypads between upper-case and lower-case characters,
touch “CapsLock OFF” or “CapsLock ON”.
1.2.6.2
Operation
Keypad
Button on the
Programming
Pendant
Explanation
Cursor
Moves the cursor (focus).
[SELECT]
Selects a character.
SELECT
[CANCEL]
CANCEL
Clears all the characters being
typed.
Pressing this second time cancels
the software keypad.
Enters the input characters.
[ENTER]
ENTER
Button Tab
GO BACK
Switches the keypads displayed on
the programming pendant.
PAGE
Closes the software keypad.
MAIN
MENU
Enters numbers.
Numeric Keys
0
to
9
1-18
1
1.2
DX100
1.2.6.3
Introduction
Programming Pendant
Alphanumeric Input
Number input is performed with the Numeric keys or on the following
alphanumeric input window. Numbers include 0 to 9, the decimal point (.),
and the minus sign/hyphen (-).
Note however, that the decimal point cannot be used in job names.
GO BACK
Press the page key
to display the alphanumeric input window. Move
the cursor to the desired letter and press [SELECT] to enter the letter.
PAGE
For Numbers and Upper-case Characters
For Numbers and Lower-case Characters
1-19
1
1.2
DX100
1.2.6.4
Introduction
Programming Pendant
Symbol Input
GO BACK
Press the page key
PAGE
to display the symbol input window.
Move the cursor to the desired symbol and press [SELECT] to enter the
symbol.
Note that only some symbols are available for naming jobs.
For Symbols
SUPPLEMENT
When the focus is in a text field of [Result], it is able to move
a cursor position by pressing [Shift]+[ → ] or [Shift]+[ ← ].
1-20
DX100
1
1.2
Introduction
Programming Pendant
1.2.6.5
Register Word Function
This function enables to use the registered word when input a character
by registering the word (character string) in advance.
To use this function simplifies to input the same character strings.
It is able to register the 32 words of eight characters.
SUPPLEMENT
There is a limit to enter the character by input contents. If a
registered word includes a limited character, it is unable to
use the word.
e.g. Unable to use the lower case characters, a decimal
point and symbols to the job name.
Select {SET WORD} from {SETUP} in the main menu.
– Register word window is displayed
– The registered words are displayed in the word area.
– If there is not any registered word, unable to select [Name order],
[Delete] and [Delete All] in the button area.
Word area
1-21
Button area
1
1.2
DX100

Introduction
Programming Pendant
Word Registration
It is able to register the 32 words of eight characters.
Register a word by selecting [REGISTER WORD] button while the word
editing is valid (S2C410=1) during using the keyboard, or register the
word in the word register screen.
e.g. Register the word “TEST”.
Select [KEYBORD].
Enter [TEST] by using the keyboard, and select [Regist].
– The dial box appears.
1-22
1
1.2
DX100
Introduction
Programming Pendant
Select [REGISTER WORD].
– The word area appears.
– Confirm that [TEST] is in the word area.

Back Space
Delete the last character of the input character string.
Select [Back space] in the word register screen.
– Delete the last character of the input character string.

Cancel
Cancel the input character string.
Select [Cancel] in the word register screen.
– Cancel the character string if there is a character string is input.
– End the word register screen if there is not any character string.
1-23
1
1.2
DX100

Introduction
Programming Pendant
Use of Words
e.g. Use the registered word [TEST].
Select [REGISTER WORD].
– The word area is displayed.
SUPPLEMENT
There is a limit to enter the character by input contents. If a
registered word includes a limited character, it is unable to
use the word.
e.g. Unable to use the lower case characters, a decimal
point and symbols to the job name.
Select [TEST] in the word area.
– The registered word [TEST] appears in the input area.
1-24
DX100
1
1.2
Introduction
Programming Pendant
Select [KEYBORD].
Move the focus to “1” by the programming pendant, and press [Select].
– The “1” is added after [TEST] in the [Result].
While [TEST1] is displayed in the [Result], select [Regist].
The dial box, which says {“TEST1” Word registration succeeded. }
apperas, and the registration is completed.
1-25
1
1.2
DX100

Introduction
Programming Pendant
Change the Arrangement of the Words to Display
Able to change the arrangement of the words to display.
1. Name order display
Select [Name order] in the button area.
– Displayed by the name order of the words.
– [Name order] button changes to [Register order] button.
2. Register order display
Select [Register order] in the button area.
– Displayed by the register order of the words.
– [Register order] button changes to [Name order] button.
1-26
1
1.2
DX100

Introduction
Programming Pendant
Delete the Word
Able to delete the registered words.
Delete the words while the word editing is valid (S2C410=1) during using
the keyboard, or delete the word in the word register screen.
e.g. Delete registered word “TEST”.
Select [REGISTER WORD].
The word area appears.
Select [TEST] in the word area, and select [Delete] in the button area.
– The dialog box, which asks {“TEST” Do you delete a word?},
appears.
Select [Yes].
[TEST] in the word area is deleted.
1-27
1
1.2
DX100

Introduction
Programming Pendant
Delete All Words
Able to delete all registered words.
Delete while the word editing is valid (S2C410=1) during using the
keyboard, or delete the word in the word register screen.
• Delete all registered words.
Select [Delete All] in the button area.
– The dialog box, which asks {Do you delete all words?}, appears.
Select [Yes].
– The all words are deleted.
1-28
1
1.3
DX100
1.3
Introduction
Mode
Mode
The following three modes are available for DX100.
• Teach Mode
• Play Mode
• Remote Mode
1.3.1
Teach Mode
In the teach mode, the following can be done.
• Preparation and teaching of a job
• Modification of a registered job
• Setting of various characteristic files and parameters
1.3.2
Play Mode
In the play mode, the following can be done.
• Playback of a taught job
• Setting, modification, or deletion of various condition files
1.3.3
Remote Mode
In the remote mode, the operations such as Servo ON Ready, Start, Cycle
Change, Call Master Job can be commanded by external input signals.
The operations by external input signals become enabled in the remote
mode, while [START] on the programming pendant becomes disabled.
The data transmission function (optional function) is also available in the
remote mode.
The following table shows how each operation is input in each mode.
Mode Teach Mode
Play Mode
Remote Mode
Operation
Servo ON Ready
PP
PP
External input signal
Start
Invalid
PP
External input signal
Cycle Change
PP
PP
External input signal
Call Master Job
PP
PP
External input signal
Note: “PP” indicates the programming pendant.
1.3.4
Teach Mode Priority
In the teach mode, following operations are disabled:
1. Playback using [START].
2. Playback from external input signals.
1-29
1
1.4
DX100
1.4
1.4.1
Introduction
Security Mode
Security Mode
Types of Security Modes
The following three types of security modes are available for DX100.
Any operation in the edit mode and the management mode requires a
password. The password must contain between 4 and 8 letters, numbers,
or symbols.
• Operation Mode
The operator can monitor the line operation and start and stop the
manipulator. Repairs, etc. can be performed if any abnormalities are
detected.
• Edit Mode
Teaching, robot jog operations, and editing of jobs and various condition files can be performed in addition to the operations enabled in
the operation mode.
• Management Mode
The operator who performs setup and maintenance for the system
can set the machine control parameter, set the time, change the
password, etc. in addition to the operations enabled in the edit mode.
1-30
DX100
1
1.4
Introduction
Security Mode
Table 1-1: Menu & Security Mode (Sheet 1 of 4)
Main Menu
JOB
Sub Menu
Allowed Security Mode
DISPLAY
EDIT
JOB
Operation
Edit
SELECT JOB
Operation
Operation
CREATE NEW JOB1)
Edit
Edit
MASTER JOB
Operation
Edit
Operation
-
JOB CAPACITY
Edit
Edit
RES. STATUS2)
Operation
-
CYCLE
Operation
Operation
BYTE
Operation
Edit
RES. START (JOB)
VARIABLE
IN/OUT
1)
INTEGER
Operation
Edit
DOUBLE
Operation
Edit
REAL
Operation
Edit
STRING
Operation
Edit
POSITION (ROBOT)
Operation
Edit
POSITION (BASE)
Operation
Edit
POSITION (ST)
Operation
Edit
LOCAL VARIABLE
Operation
-
EXTERNAL INPUT
Operation
Edit
EXTERNAL OUTPUT
Operation
Edit
UNIVERSAL INPUT
Operation
Operation
UNIVERSAL OUTPUT
Operation
Operation
SPECIFIC INPUT
Operation
-
SPECIFIC OUTPUT
Operation
-
RIN
Operation
-
CPRIN
Operation
-
REGISTER
Operation
Management
AUXILIARY RELAY
Operation
-
CONTROL INPUT
Operation
-
PSEUDO INPUT SIG
Operation
Management
NETWORK INPUT
Operation
-
NETWORK OUTPUT
Operation
-
ANALOG OUTPUT
Operation
-
SV POWER STATUS
Operation
-
LADDER PROGRAM
Management Management
I/O ALARM
Management Management
I/O MESSAGE
Management Management
1-31
DX100
1
1.4
Introduction
Security Mode
Table 1-1: Menu & Security Mode (Sheet 2 of 4)
Main Menu
ROBOT
Sub Menu
Allowed Security Mode
DISPLAY
EDIT
Operation
-
COMMAND POSITION
Operation
-
SERVO MONITOR
Management -
WORK HOME POS
Operation
Edit
SECOND HOME POS
Operation
Edit
DROP AMOUNT
Management Management
POWER ON/OFF POS
Operation
-
TOOL
Edit
Edit
INTERFERENCE
Management Management
CURRENT POSITION
SHOCK SENS LEVEL
Operation
Edit
USER COORDINATE
Edit
Edit
HOME POSITION
Management Management
MANIPULATOR TYPE
Management -
ANALOG MONITOR
Management Management
OVERRUN&S-SENSOR1)
Edit
Edit
1)
Edit
Edit
1)
ARM CONTROL
Management Management
SHIFT VALUE
Operation
-
VERSION
Operation
-
MONITORING TIME
Operation
Management
ALARM HISTORY
Operation
Management
I/O MSG HISTORY
Operation
Management
SECURITY
Operation
Operation
LOAD
Edit
-
SAVE
Operation
-
LIMIT RELEASE
SYSTEM INFO
FD/CF
VERIFY
Operation
-
DELETE
Operation
-
DEVICE
Operation
Operation
Edit
Management
Operation
-
FOLDER
1)
INITIALIZE
1-32
DX100
1
1.4
Introduction
Security Mode
Table 1-1: Menu & Security Mode (Sheet 3 of 4)
Main Menu
Sub Menu
Allowed Security Mode
DISPLAY
PARAMETER
SETUP
S1CxG
Management Management
S2C
Management Management
S3C
Management Management
S4C
Management Management
A1P
Management Management
A2P
Management Management
A3P
Management Management
A4P
Management Management
A5P
Management Management
A6P
Management Management
A7P
Management Management
A8P
Management Management
RS
Management Management
S1E
Management Management
S2E
Management Management
S3E
Management Management
S4E
Management Management
S5E
Management Management
S6E
Management Management
S7E
Management Management
S8E
Management Management
TEACHING COND.
Edit
OPERATE COND.
Management Management
OPERATE ENABLE
Management Management
FUNCTION ENABLE
Management Management
JOG COND.
Management Management
PLAYBACK COND.
Management Management
FUNCTION COND.
Management Management
DATE/TIME
Edit
Management Management
2)
DISPLAY
SETUP
EDIT
GRP COMBINATION
Management Management
RESERVE JOB NAME
Edit
Edit
USER ID
Edit
Edit
SET SPEED
Management Management
KEY ALLOCATION
Management Management
JOG KEY ALLOC.
Edit
RES. START (CNCT)
Management Management
AUTO BACK SET
Management Management
WRONG DATA LOG
Edit
Management
ENERGY SAVING FUNCTION
Edit
Management
CHANGE FONT
Operation
Operation
CHANGE BUTTON
Operation
Operation
Management
INITIALIZE LAYOUT
Operation
Operation
CHANGE WINDOW PATTERN
Operation
Operation
1-33
DX100
1
1.4
Introduction
Security Mode
Table 1-1: Menu & Security Mode (Sheet 4 of 4)
Main Menu
Sub Menu
ARC WELDING ARC START COND.
Allowed Security Mode
DISPLAY
EDIT
Operation
Edit
ARC END COND.
Operation
Edit
ARC AUX COND.
Operation
Edit
POWER SOURCE COND.
Operation
Edit
ARC WELD DIAG.
Operation
Edit
WEAVING
Operation
Edit
ARC MONITOR
Operation
Edit
ARC MONITOR (SAMPL)
Operation
-
HANDLING
HANDLING DIAGNOSIS
Operation
Edit
SPOT
WELDING
WELD DIAGNOSIS
Operation
Edit
I/O ALLOCATION
Management Management
GUN CONDITION
Management Management
SPOT POWER SOURCE
COND.
Management Management
APPLICATION CONDITION
SETTING
Management Management
WELD DIAGNOSIS
Operation
Edit
SPOT
WELDING
(MOTOR GUN)
GENERAL
COMMON TO
ALL
APPLICATIONS
GUN PRESSURE
Edit
Edit
PRESSURE
Edit
Edit
I/O ALLOCATION
Management Management
GUN CONDITION
Management Management
CLEARANCE SETTING
Operation
SPOT POWER SOURCE
COND.
Management Management
TIP INSTALLATION
Operation
Edit
Management
APPLICATION SETTING
Management Management
WEAVING
Operation
Edit
GENERAL DIAG.
Operation
Edit
I/O VARIABLE CUSTOMIZE
Operation
Operation
1 Displayed in the teach mode only.
2 Displayed in the play mode only.
1-34
DX100
1.4.2
1
1.4
Introduction
Security Mode
Changing Security Modes
The security mode can be changed only when the main menu is
displayed.
1. Select {SYSTEM INFO} under the main menu.
– The sub menu appears.
2. Select {SECURITY}.
– The security of the main menu is shown.
– The security mode can be selected from operation mode, edit mode,
or management mode.
1-35
DX100
1
1.4
Introduction
Security Mode
3. Select the desired security mode.
– When the selected security mode is higher than the currently set
mode, the user ID input status window appears.
4. Input the user ID as required.
– At the factory, the user ID number is preset as follows:
Edit Mode: [00000000]
Management Mode: [99999999]
5. Press [ENTER].
– The selected security mode’s input ID is checked. If the correct user
ID is input, the security mode is changed.
1-36
2
2.1
DX100
2
Manipulator Coordinate Systems and Operations
2.1
2.1.1
Manipulator Coordinate Systems and Operations
Control Groups and Coordinate Systems
Control Groups and Coordinate Systems
Control Group
For the DX100, a group of axes to be controlled at a time is called “Control
Group”, and the group is classified into three units: “ROBOT” as a
manipulator itself, “BASE” that moves the manipulator in parallel, and
“STATION” as jigs or tools other than “ROBOT” and “BASE”. BASE and
STATION are also called external axes.
Robot
This is the axis for the
manipulator itself.
Station
Base
This is the axis that moves the entire manipulator.
It corresponds to the servo track.
It controls the path of traveling manipulators.
2-1
This is any axis other than the robot and base. It indicates the
tilt or rotating axis of the fixture.
DX100
2.1.2
2
2.1
Manipulator Coordinate Systems and Operations
Control Groups and Coordinate Systems
Types of Coordinate Systems
The following coordinate systems can be used to operate the manipulator:
• Joint Coordinates
Each axis of the manipulator moves independently.
• Cartesian Coordinates
The tool tip of the manipulator moves parallel to any of the X-, Y-,
and Z-axes.
• Cylindrical Coordinates
The θ axis moves around the S-axis. The R-axis moves parallel to
the L-axis arm. For vertical motion, the tool tip of the manipulator
moves parallel to the Z-axis.
• Tool Coordinates
The effective direction of the tool mounted in the wrist flange of the
manipulator is defined as the Z-axis. This axis controls the coordinates of the end point of the tool.
• User Coordinates
The XYZ-cartesian coordinates are defined at any point and angle.
The tool tip of the manipulator moves parallel to the axes of them.
U-axis
R-axis
B-axis
T-axis
E-axis
Z-axis
Z-axis
L-axis
Y-axis
S-axis
r-axis
-axis
X-axis
Joint Coordinates
Cartesian Coordinates
Z-axis
Y-axis
X-axis
X-axis
Y-axis
Z-axis
Tool Coordinates
User Coordinates
2-2
r-axis
Cylindrical Coordinates
2
2.2
DX100
2.2
2.2.0.1
Manipulator Coordinate Systems and Operations
General Operations
General Operations
Check Safety
Before any operation of the DX100, read Section 1 “Safety” of “DX100
INSTRUCTIONS” again and keep safe around the robot system or
peripherals.
2.2.0.2
Select Teach Mode
Set the mode switch on the programming pendant to “teach”.
2.2.0.3
Select Control Group
If the DX100 has several Control Groups or Coordinate Control Systems
(optional function), select control group first.
If two or more ROBOT, BASE, STATION are registered, switch control
group by pressing [SHIFT] + [ROBOT] or [SHIFT] + [EX. AXIS].
After selecting a job, the control group registered in the selected job is
enabled. The control group registered in the edit job can be switched by
pressing [ROBOT] or [EX. AXIS].
Check the selected control group at the status display area on the
programming pendant.
2.2.0.4
Select Coordinate System
Select a coordinate system by pressing [COORD] key.
Each time [COORD] key is pressed, the coordinate system switches in the
following order:
JointCartesian (Cylindrical)ToolUser.
Check the selected coordinate on the status display area on the
programming pendant.
2-3
DX100
2
2.2
2.2.0.5
Select Manual Speed
Manipulator Coordinate Systems and Operations
General Operations
Select manual speed of operation by pressing [FAST] or [SLOW]. The
selected speed is effective not only for axis operation but [FWD] or [BWD]
operation.
NOTE
In operating the manipulator manually by the programming
pendant, the maximum speed of center point is limited at
250 mm/s.
• Each time [FAST] is pressed, the speed switches in the order of
“INCH””SLOW””MED””FAST”.
FAST INCH
SLW
MED
FST
• Each time [SLOW] is pressed, the speed switches in the order of
“FAST””MED””SLOW””INCH”.
SLOW FST
MED
SLW
INCH
Check selected manual speed on the status area of Programming
Pendant.
2.2.0.6
Servo ON
Press [SERVO ON READY], then SERVO ON LED starts blinking.
Squeeze the Enable switch, then SERVO ON LED starts lighting.
2.2.0.7
Axis Operation
Make sure of safety around the manipulator. Press axis key, then axis
moves according to the selected control group, coordinates, and manual
speed. See chapter 2.3 "Coordinate Systems and Axis Operation" at
page 2-5.
2.2.0.8
HIGH SPEED
Press [HIGH SPEED] while pressing an axis key to make the manipulator
move faster than the usual speed.
SUPPLEMENT
The [HIGH SPEED] key is disabled when “INCH” is selected
for the manual speed.
2-4
2
2.3
DX100
2.3
2.3.1
Manipulator Coordinate Systems and Operations
Coordinate Systems and Axis Operation
Coordinate Systems and Axis Operation
Joint Coordinates
When operating in joint coordinates mode, the S, L, U, R, B, and T-axes of
the manipulator move independently. The motion of each axis is
described in the table below.
Table 2-1: Axis Motion in Joint Coordinates
Axis Name
Major
Axes
Axis Operation Key
S-axis
Main unit rotates right and left.
X-
X+
Y-
Y+
Z-
Z+
X-
X+
R-
R+
Y-
Y+
Z-
Z+
T-
T+
S-
S+
L-axis
L-
Upper are moves up and down.
U-
U+
R-axis
Wrist rolls right and left.
B-axis
Wrist moves up and down.
B-
B+
T-axis
Wrist turns right and left.
E-axis
Lower arm turns right and left.
E-
SUPPLEMENT
Lower arm moves forward and
backward.
L+
U-axis
Wrist
Axes
Motion
E+
• When two or more axis keys are pressed at the same time,
the manipulator will perform a compound movement.
However, if two different directional keys (such as [S -] + [S
+]) for the same axis are pressed at the same time, the
axis will not operate.
(When [S -] + [S +] + [L +] are pressed, only the axis corresponding to [L +] will operate.)
2-5
DX100
2
2.3
Manipulator Coordinate Systems and Operations
Coordinate Systems and Axis Operation
U-axis Z+
U+
R-axis
X+
R+
B-axis
Y+
B+
T-axis
Z+
X-
Z-
T+
R-
U-
Y-
B-
E-axis E-
Z-
E+
T-
Y-
L-axis
L-
Y+
L+
S-axis
2.3.2
X-
X+
S-
S+
Cartesian Coordinates
In the cartesian coordinates, the manipulator moves parallel to the X-, Y-,
or Z-axes. The motion of each axis is described in the table below.
Table 2-2: Axis Motion in Cartesian Coordinates
Axis Name
Basic
Axes
Axis Operation Key
X-axis
Moves parallel to X-axis.
X-
X+
Y-
Y+
Z-
Z+
S-
S+
Y-axis
Moves parallel to Y-axis.
L-
Z-axis
U-
Wrist Axes
SUPPLEMENT
Motion
L+
Moves parallel to Z-axis.
U+
Motion about TCP is executed. See chapter 2.3.7
"Control Point Operation" at page 2-15.
• When two or more axis keys are pressed at the same time,
the manipulator will perform compound movement.
However, if two different directional keys (such as [X -] + [X
+]) for the same axis are pressed at the same time, the
axis will not operate.
(When [X -] + [X +] + [Y +] are pressed, only the axis corresponding to [Y +] will operate.)
2-6
2
2.3
DX100
Manipulator Coordinate Systems and Operations
Coordinate Systems and Axis Operation
Z-axis
Y-axis
X-axis
Fig. 2-1: Moves parallel to X- or Y-axis
Fig. 2-2: Moves parallel to Z-axis
Z-axis
Y-axis
X-
X+
S-
Z+
S+
U+
Y+
L+
Z-
X-axis
U-
Y-
L-
2.3.3
Cylindrical Coordinates
In the cylindrical coordinates, the manipulator moves as follows. The
motion of each axis is described in the table below.
Table 2-3: Axis Motion in Cylindrical Coordinates
Axis Name
Basic
Axes
Axis Operation Key
θ-axis
Main unit rolls around S-axis.
X-
X+
Y-
Y+
Z-
Z+
S-
S+
r-axis
L-
Z-axis
U-
Wrist Axes
Motion
Moves perpendicular to Zaxis.
L+
Moves parallel to Z-axis.
U+
Motion about TCP is executed. See chapter 2.3.7
"Control Point Operation" at page 2-15.
2-7
DX100
2
2.3
Manipulator Coordinate Systems and Operations
Coordinate Systems and Axis Operation
SUPPLEMENT
• When two or more axis keys are pressed at the same time,
the manipulator will perform compound movement.
However, if two different directional keys (such as [Z -] + [Z
+]) for the same axis are pressed at the same time, the
axis will not operate.
(When [Z -] + [Z +] + [Y +] are pressed, only the axis corresponding to [Y +] will operate.)
Z-axis
r-axis
-axis
r-axis
Fig. 2-3: Rolls around q-axis
Fig. 2-4: Moves perpendicular to r-axis
r-axis
X+
S+
Y+
L+
Y-
L-
r-axis
Y-
X-
L-
S-
2-8
Y+
L+
2
2.3
DX100
2.3.4
Manipulator Coordinate Systems and Operations
Coordinate Systems and Axis Operation
Tool Coordinates
In the tool coordinates, the manipulator moves parallel to the X-, Y-, and Zaxes, which are defined at the tip of the tool. The motion of each axis is
described in the table below.
Table 2-4: Axis Motion in Tool Coordinates
Axis Name
Basic
Axes
Axis Operation Key
X-axis
Moves parallel to X-axis.
X-
X+
Y-
Y+
Z-
Z+
S-
S+
Y-axis
Moves parallel to Y-axis.
L-
L+
Z-axis
Moves parallel to Z-axis.
U-
Wrist Axes
SUPPLEMENT
Motion
U+
Motion about TCP is executed. See chapter 2.3.7
"Control Point Operation" at page 2-15.
• When two or more axis keys are pressed at the same time,
the manipulator will perform compound movement.
However, if two different directional keys (such as [X -] + [X
+]) for the same axis are pressed at the same time, the
axis will not operate.
(When [X -] + [X +] + [Y +] are pressed, only the axis corresponding to [Y +] will operate.)
X-axis
X-axis
Z-axis
Y-axis
Y-axis
Y-axis
Z-axis
Z-axis
X-axis
The tool coordinates are defined at the tip of the tool, assuming that the
effective direction of the tool mounted on the manipulator wrist flange is
the Z-axis. Therefore, the tool coordinates axis direction moves with the
wrist.
In the tool coordinates motion, the manipulator can be moved using the
effective tool direction as a reference regardless of the manipulator
position or orientation. These motions are best suited when the
manipulator is required to move parallel while maintaining the tool
orientation with the workpieces.
2-9
DX100
2
2.3
Manipulator Coordinate Systems and Operations
Coordinate Systems and Axis Operation
Z-
U-
Z+
U+
X+
S+
X-
S-
SUPPLEMENT
For tool coordinates, the tool file should be registered in
advance. For further details, refer to “8.3 Tool Data Setting”
of coordinates “DX100 INSTRUCTIONS” (RE-CTO-A215).
2-10
2
2.3
DX100
2.3.4.1
Manipulator Coordinate Systems and Operations
Coordinate Systems and Axis Operation
Selecting Tool
Tool numbers are used to specify a tool when more than one tool is used
on the system.
You may select from the registered tool files when you switch tools on the
manipulator.
SUPPLEMENT
This operation can be performed only when the number of
tool is more than one.
To use several tool files with one manipulator, set the following parameter.
S2C431: Tool number switch specifying parameter
1: Can be switched
0: Cannot be switched
1. Press the [COORD] key and select the tool coordinates
.
– Each time [COORD] key is pressed, the coordinate system switches
in the following order:
JointCartesian (Cylindrical)ToolUser.
Check the change on the status display area.
2. Press [SHIFT] + [COORD].
– The TOOL NO. SELECT window appears.
3. Move the cursor to the tool to use.
– The TOOL NO. SELECT window above shows an example; “TOOL
NO. 0 TORCH MT-3501” is selected.
4. Press [SHIFT] + [COORD].
– The window goes back to the previous window.
2-11
2
2.3
DX100
2.3.5
Manipulator Coordinate Systems and Operations
Coordinate Systems and Axis Operation
User Coordinates
In the user coordinates, the manipulator moves parallel to each axis of the
coordinates which are set by the user. Up to 24 coordinate types can be
registered. Each coordinate has a user number and is called a user
coordinate file.
The figure and the table below describe the motion of each axis when the
axis key is pressed.
Table 2-5: Axis Motion in User Coordinates
Axis Name
Basic
Axes
Axis Operation Key
X-axis
Motion
Moves parallel to X-axis.
X-
X+
Y-
Y+
Z-
Z+
S-
S+
Y-axis
Moves parallel to Y-axis.
L-
L+
Z-axis
Moves parallel to Z-axis.
U-
Wrist Axes
U+
Motion about TCP is executed. See chapter 2.3.7
"Control Point Operation" at page 2-15.
• When two or more axis keys are pressed at the same time,
the manipulator will perform compound movement.
However, if two different directional keys (such as [X -] + [X
+]) for the same axis are pressed at the same time, the
axis will not operate.
(When [X -] + [X +] + [Y +] are pressed, only the axis corresponding to [Y +] will operate.)
SUPPLEMENT
Fig. 2-5: Moves parallel to X or Y-axis
Y-axis
X-
X+
S-
S+
Y+
L+
X-axis
Y-
L-
Z-axis
Z-axis
Y-axis
Fig. 2-6: Moves parallel to Z-axis
X-axis
Z-axis
X-axis
Z+
Y-axis
U+
Station, etc.
Z-
U-
Y-axis
2-12
DX100
2.3.5.1
2
2.3
Manipulator Coordinate Systems and Operations
Coordinate Systems and Axis Operation
Selecting User Coordinates
Follow these procedures to select the desired coordinate system from
among the registered user coordinates.
1. Press [COORD] to select the user coordinates
.
– Each time [COORD] key is pressed, the coordinate system switches
in the following order:
JointCartesian (Cylindrical)ToolUser.
Check the change on the status display area.
2. Press [SHIFT] + [COORD].
– The USER COORD SELECT window appears.
SUPPLEMENT
For more information on registration of the user coordinates,
refer to “8.8 User Coordinate Setting” of “DX100 INSTRUCTIONS” (RE-CTO-A215).
3. Select the desired user number.
2-13
DX100
2
2.3
Manipulator Coordinate Systems and Operations
Coordinate Systems and Axis Operation
2.3.5.2
Examples of User Coordinate Utilization
The user coordinate settings allow easy teaching in various situations.
For example:
• When multiple positioners are used,
manual operation can be simplified by setting the user coordinates
for each fixture.
Fixture
User coordinates
Fixture
Fixture
User coordinates
• When performing arranging or stacking operations,
the incremental value for shift can be easily programmed by setting
user coordinates on a pallet.
• When performing conveyor tracking operations,
the moving direction of the conveyor is specified.
Conveyor
2.3.6
External Axis
The external axis can be operated by selecting “BASE” or “STATION” for
the control group. The motion of each axis is described in the table below.
Axis Name
BASE or
STATION
Axis Operation Key
1st axis
The 1st axis moves.
X-
X+
Y-
Y+
Z-
Z+
S-
S+
2nd axis
The 2nd axis moves.
L-
3rd axis
U-
2-14
Motion
L+
U+
The 3rd axis moves.
DX100
2.3.7
2
2.3
Manipulator Coordinate Systems and Operations
Coordinate Systems and Axis Operation
Control Point Operation
Motion about TCP (Tool Center Point) can only change the wrist
orientation at a fixed TCP position in all coordinate systems except the
joint coordinates. The motion of each axis is described in the table below.
Table 2-6: Axis Motion in Motion about TCP
Axis Name
Axis Operation Key
Major Axes
X-
X+
Y-
Y+
Z-
Z+
X-
X+
R-
R+
Y-
Y+
Z-
Z+
T-
T+
E-
E+
S-
L-
U-
S+
U+
Wrist axes move with the TCP
fixed. These movements differ
depending on cartesian,
cylindrical, tool and user
coordinates.
B+
E-axis
SUPPLEMENT
TCP moves. These movements
differ depending on cartesian,
cylindrical, tool and user
coordinates.
L+
Wrist Axes
B-
Motion
* Available only for the manipulator
with seven axes
The posture of arm changes while
the position and posture of the tool
remain fixed. (The Re degree
changes.)
• When two or more axis keys are pressed at the same time,
the manipulator will perform compound movement.
However, if two different directional keys (such as [X -] + [X
+]) for the same axis are pressed at the same time, the
axis will not operate.
(When [X -] + [X +] + [Y +] are pressed, only the axis corresponding to [Y +] will operate.)
2-15
DX100
2
2.3
Manipulator Coordinate Systems and Operations
Coordinate Systems and Axis Operation
Re is an element to indicate the posture of the manipulator
with seven axes and does not change by the specified coordinates.
The definition of Re is shown below.
SUPPLEMENT
Fig. 2-7: Torch Welding
Fig. 2-8: Gun Spot Welding
TCP
2-16
DX100
2
2.3
Manipulator Coordinate Systems and Operations
Coordinate Systems and Axis Operation
Turning of each wrist axis differs in each coordinate system.
• In cartesian or cylindrical coordinates, wrist axis rotations are based
on the X-, Y-, or Z-axis.
Z-axis
+
Y-axis
+
Z-axis
+
X-axis
Y-axis
X-axis
• In tool coordinates, wrist axis rotations are based on X-, Y-, or Z-axis
of the tool coordinates.
X-axis
+
Z-axis
+
+
Y-axis
2-17
DX100
2
2.3
Manipulator Coordinate Systems and Operations
Coordinate Systems and Axis Operation
• In user coordinates, wrist axis rotations are based on X-, Y-, or Z-axis
of the user coordinates.
Z-axis
+
Y-axis
+
X-axis
+
Z-axis
Y-axis
X-axis
2.3.7.1
Control Point Change
The tool tip position (TCP) is the target point of axis operations and is set
as the distance from the flange face. The control point change operation
is an axis operation that involves selecting a tool from the list of registered
tools (Refer to chapter 2.3.4.1 "Selecting Tool" at page 2-11), and then
manipulating the axes while changing the TCP. This can be performed
with all coordinates except the joint coordinates. The axis operation is the
same as that of the motion about TCP.
<Example 1>TCP Change Operation with Multiple Tools
(1) Set the TCPs for Tool 1 and Tool 2 as P1 and P2, respectively.
(2) When Tool 1 is selected to perform an axis operation, P1 (Tool 1’s
TCP) is the target point of the operation. Tool 2 follows Tool 1 and
is not controlled by the axis operation.
(3) On the other hand, When Tool 2 is selected to perform an axis
operation, P2 (Tool 2’s TCP) is the target point of the axis operation. In this case, Tool 1 just follows Tool 2.
Fig. 2-9: Selection of Tool 1 and axis Fig. 2-10: Selection of Tool 2 and
operations with controlling P1
axis operations with controlling P2
Tool 2
Tool 1
P1
P2
P1
Workpiece
Workpiece
2-18
P2
2
2.3
DX100
Manipulator Coordinate Systems and Operations
Coordinate Systems and Axis Operation
<Example 2>TCP Change Operation with a Single Tool
(1) Set the two corners of the workpiece that the tool is holding as
TCP P1 and P2 respectively.
(2) By selecting two TCPs alternately, the workpiece can be moved as
shown below:
Fig. 2-11: Motion about TCP with P1
selected
Fig. 2-12: Motion about TCP with P2
selected
Workpiece
Workpiece
P1
P1
P2
P2
SUPPLEMENT
For registration of the tool file, refer to “8.3 Tool Data Setting”
of “DX100 INSTRUCTIONS” (RE-CTO-A215).
2-19
3
3.1
DX100
3
Teaching
Preparation for Teaching
Teaching
3.1
Preparation for Teaching
To ensure safety, the following operations should always be performed
before teaching:
• Check the emergency stop buttons to be sure they function properly.
• Set the mode switch to “TEACH”.
Then,
• Register a job.
3.1.1
Checking Emergency Stop Buttons
The Servo ON button on the programming pendant should be lit while the
power is ON for the servo system. Perform the following operation to
ensure that the emergency stop buttons on both the DX100 and the
programming pendant are functioning correctly before operating the
manipulator.
1. Press E. STOP button.
– Press the emergency stop button on the DX100 or the programming
pendant.
2. Confirm the servo power is turned OFF.
– The SERVO ON button on the programming pendant lights while
servo supply is turned ON.
– When the emergency stop button is pressed and the servo power is
turned OFF, the SERVO ON lamp will turn OFF.
3. Press [SERVO ON READY] of the programming pendant.
– After confirming correct operation, press [SERVO ON READY]. The
servo power will be ready to turn ON.
– The servo power can be turned ON while the SERVO ON button
lamp blinks.
3.1.2
Setting the Teach Lock
For safety purposes, always set the mode switch to “TEACH” before
beginning to teach.
While the teach lock is set, the mode of operation is tied to the teach mode
and the machines cannot be played back using either [START] or external
input.
3-1
3
3.1
DX100
3.1.3
Teaching
Preparation for Teaching
Registering a Job
Specify the name, comments (as required), and control group to register a
job.
3.1.3.1
Registering Job Names
Job names can use up to 32 alphanumeric and symbol characters. These
different types of characters can coexist within the same job name.
The following rules apply to the designation of job names:
• A maximum of 32 characters can be used for a job name.
• If the job name is already used, an input error is caused.
<Example>
0 0 1
3.1.3.2
JO B - 1
Registering Jobs
1. Select {JOB} under the main menu.
– The sub-menu appears.
2. Select {CREATE NEW JOB}.
3-2
WO R K - A
DX100
3
3.1
Teaching
Preparation for Teaching
– The NEW JOB CREATE window appears.
3. Input job name.
– Move the cursor to JOB NAME, and press [SELECT]. Input job
names using the character input operation. For information on
character input operation, refer to chapter 1.2.6 "Character Input
Operation" at page 1-18.
4. Press [ENTER].
3.1.3.3
Registering Comments
Register a comment using up to 32 alphanumeric and symbol characters
as required.
1. Enter a comment.
– In the NEW JOB CREATE window, move the cursor to the comment
and press [SELECT]. For information on character input operation,
refer to chapter 1.2.6 "Character Input Operation" at page 1-18.
2. Press [ENTER].
3.1.3.4
Registering Control Groups
Select the control group that has been registered in advance. If external
axes (BASE or STATION) or multiple robot systems are not used, the
registration of control groups is not required.
3-3
DX100
3.1.3.5
3
3.1
Teaching
Preparation for Teaching
Switching to the Teaching Window
After the name, comments (can be omitted), and the control groups have
been registered, switch the window to the teaching window as follows.
1. In the NEW JOB CREATE window, press [ENTER] or select
“EXECUTE”.
– Job name, comments, and control groups are all registered. Then,
the JOB CONTENT window appears. NOP and END instructions
are automatically registered.
3-4
3
3.2
DX100
3.2
3.2.1
Teaching
Teaching Operation
Teaching Operation
Teaching Window
Teaching is conducted in the JOB CONTENT window. The JOB
CONTENT window contains the following items:
B. Cursor
C. Instruction, additional
items, comments, etc.
A. Line numbers
A. Line Numbers
The number of the job line is automatically displayed. Line numbers are
automatically updated if lines are inserted or deleted.
B. Cursor
The cursor for manipulator control. For the FWD, BWD, and test operation, the manipulator motion starts from the line this cursor points.
C. Instructions, Additional Items, Comments, Etc.
MOVJ
VJ = 50.00
Tag Numerical Data
Instruction
Additional Item
Instructions
: These are instructions needed to process or perform an
operation. In the case of MOVE instructions, the
instruction corresponding to the interpolation type is
automatically displayed at the time position is taught.
Additional items
: Speed and time are set depending on the type of
instruction. When needed, numerical or character data
is added to the condition-setting tags.
3-5
3
3.2
DX100
3.2.2
Teaching
Teaching Operation
Interpolation Type and Play Speed
Interpolation type determines the path along which the manipulator moves
between playback steps. Play speed is the rate at which the manipulator
moves.
Normally, the position data, interpolation type, and play speed are
registered together for a robot axis step. If the interpolation type or play
speed settings are omitted during teaching, the data used from the
previously taught step is automatically used.
3.2.2.1
Joint Interpolation
The joint interpolation is used when the manipulator does not need to
move in a specific path toward the next step position. When the joint
interpolation is used for teaching a robot axis, the move instruction is
MOVJ. For safety purposes, use the joint interpolation to teach the first
step.
When [MOTION TYPE] is pressed, the move instruction on the input
buffer line changes.
<Play Speed Setting Window>
• Speeds are indicated as percentages of the maximum rate.
• Setting “0:Speed Omit” sets the same speed as the previous determination.
1. Move the cursor to the play speed.
2. Set the play speed by pressing [SHIFT] + the cursor key.
– The joint speed value increases or decreases.
Fast
100.00
50.00
25.00
12.50
6.25
3.12
1.56
Slow
0.78 (%)
3-6
3
3.2
DX100
3.2.2.2
Teaching
Teaching Operation
Linear Interpolation
The manipulator moves in a linear path from one taught step to the next.
When the linear interpolation is used to teach a robot axis, the move
instruction is MOVL. Linear interpolation is used for work such as
welding. The manipulator moves automatically changing the wrist position
as shown in the figure below.
<Play Speed Setting Window (same for circular and spline interpolation)>
• There are two types of displays, and they can be switched depending on the application.
1. Move the cursor to the play speed.
2. Set the play speed by pressing [SHIFT] + the cursor key.
– The play speed value increases or decreases.
Fast 1500.0
750.0
375.0
187.0
93.0
46.0
23.0
Slow
11 (mm/s)
3-7
Fast 9000
4500
2250
1122
558
276
138
Slow
66 (cm/min)
3
3.2
DX100
3.2.2.3
Teaching
Teaching Operation
Circular Interpolation
The manipulator moves in an arc that passes through three points. When
circular interpolation is used for teaching a robot axis, the move instruction
is MOVC.

Single Circular Arc
When a single circular movement is required, teach the circular
interpolation for three points, P1 to P3, as shown in the following figure. If
joint or linear interpolation is taught at P0, the point before starting the
circular operation, the manipulator moves from P0 to P1 in a straight line.
Table 3-1: Interpolation Type for Single Circular Arc
Point Interpolation Instruction
Type
Automatically becomes
a straight line.
P0

P0
Joint or
Linear
MOVJ
MOVL
P1
P2
P3
Circular
MOVC
P4 P4
Joint or
Linear
MOVJ
MOVL
P2
P1
P3
Continuous Circular Arcs
As shown below, when two or more successive circular movements with
different curvatures are required, the movements must be separated from
each other by a joint or linear interpolation step. This step must be
inserted between the steps at an identical point. The step at the end point
of the preceding circular movement must coincide with the beginning point
of the following circular movement.
Table 3-2: Interpolation Type for Continuous Circular Arcs
Point Interpolation Instruction
Type
Joint or linear
motion type
P2
P0
P1
P7
P3
P4
P5
P6
3-8
P8
P0
Joint or
Linear
MOVJ
MOVL
P1
P2
P3
Circular
MOVC
P4
Joint or
Linear
MOVJ
MOVL
P5
P6
P7
Circular
MOVC
P8
Joint or
Linear
MOVJ
MOVL
3
3.2
DX100
Teaching
Teaching Operation
Alternatively, to continue movements without adding an extra joint or linear
interpolation step in between, add “FPT” tag to the step whose curvature
is needed to be changed.
Point Interpolation Instruction
Type
P2
P5
P3
P0
P6
P0
Joint or
Linear
MOVJ
MOVL
P1
P2
Circular
MOVC
P3
Circular
MOVC
FPT
P4
P5
Circular
MOVC
P6
Joint or
Linear
MOVJ
MOVL
P1
P4
<Play Speed>
• The play speed set display is identical to that for the linear interpolation.
• The speed taught at P2 is applied from P1 to P2. The speed taught
at P3 is applied from P2 to P3.
• If a circular operation is taught at high speed, the actual arc path has
a shorter radius than that taught.
3.2.2.4
Spline Interpolation
When performing operations such as welding, cutting, and applying
primer, using the spline interpolation makes teaching for workpieces with
irregular shapes easier. The path of motion is a parabola passing through
three points. When spline interpolation is used for teaching a robot axis,
the move instruction is MOVS.

Single Spline Curve
When a single spline curve movement is required, teach the spline
interpolation for three points, P1 to P3, as shown in the figure below. If
joint or linear interpolation is taught at point P0, the point before starting
the spline interpolation, the manipulator moves from P0 to P1 in a straight
line.
Table 3-3: Interpolation Type for Single Spline Curve
Point Interpolation Instruction
Type
P0
Joint or
Linear
MOVJ
MOVL
P1
P2
P3
Spline
MOVS
P4
Joint or
Linear
MOVJ
MOVL
P2
Automatically becomes
a straight line.
3-9
3
3.2
DX100

Teaching
Teaching Operation
Continuous Spline Curves
The manipulator moves through a path created by combining parabolic
curves. This differs from the circular interpolation in that steps with
identical points are not required at the junction between two spline curves.
Table 3-4: Interpolation Type for Continuous Spline Curves
Point Interpolation Instruction
Type
P2
Identical-point
step not required
P5
P6
P3
P0
P1
P0
Joint or
Linear
MOVJ
MOVL
P1
to
P5
Spline
MOVS
P6
Joint or
Linear
MOVJ
MOVL
P4
When the parabolas overlap, a composite motion path is created.
Start path
End path
<Play Speed>
• The play speed setting window is identical to that for the linear interpolation.
• As with the circular interpolation, the speed taught at P2 is applied
from P1 to P2, and the speed taught at P3 is applied from P2 to P3.
NOTE
Teach points so that the distances between the three points
are roughly equal. If there is any significant difference, an
error will occur on playback and the manipulator may operate in an unexpected, dangerous manner. Ensure that the
ratio of distances between steps m:n is within the range of
0.25 to 0.75.
P2
P1
3-10
n
m
P3
3
3.2
DX100
3.2.3
3.2.3.1
Teaching
Teaching Operation
Teaching Steps
Registering Move Instructions
Whenever one step is taught, one move instruction is registered. There
are two ways to teach a step. Steps can be taught in sequence as shown
in the following left figure fig. 3-1 "Registering Move Instructions" or they
can be done by inserting steps between already registered steps, as
shown in the right figure fig. 3-2 "Inserting Move Instructions"
This paragraph explains the teaching of fig. 3-1 "Registering Move
Instructions", the operations involved in registering new steps.
Fig. 3-1: Registering Move Instructions
Step 1
Fig. 3-2: Inserting Move Instructions
Step Insertion
P1
Step 2
Step 2
Step 3
Step 1
Step 3
Teaching of fig. 3-2 "Inserting Move Instructions" is called “Inserting move
instruction”, to distinguish it from the method shown in fig. 3-1 "Registering
Move Instructions". For more details on this operation, see
chapter 3.4.2 "Inserting Move Instructions" at page 3-34. The basic
operations for registration and insertion are the same. The only difference
is pressing [INSERT] in the case of insertion. For registration (fig. 3-1
"Registering Move Instructions"), the instruction is always registered
before the END instruction. Therefore, it is not necessary to press
[INSERT]. For insertion (fig. 3-2 "Inserting Move Instructions"), [INSERT]
must be pressed.
3-11
3
3.2
DX100

Teaching
Teaching Operation
Setting the Position Data
1. Select {JOB} under the main menu.
– The sub-menu appears.
2. Select {JOB}.
– The contents of the currently-selected job is displayed.
3. Move the cursor on the line immediately before the position where a
move instruction to be registered.
4. Grip the Enable switch.
– Grip the Enable switch to turn the servo power ON.
5. Move the manipulator to the desired position using the axis key.
– Use the axis operation key to move the manipulator to the desired
position.
3-12
3
3.2
DX100

Teaching
Teaching Operation
Selecting the Tool Number
1. Press [SHIFT] + [COORD].
– When selecting the “JOINT”, “XYZ/CYLINDRICAL”, or “TOOL”
coordinates, press [SHIFT] + [COORD] and the TOOL NO. SELECT
window will be shown.
2. Move the cursor to the desired tool number.
– The currently-selected tool number by the cursor is displayed.
3. Press [SHIFT] + [COORD].
– The JOB CONTENT window appears.
Using Multiple Tools with One Manipulator
SUPPLEMENT
• When multiple tools are to be used with one manipulator,
set parameter S2C431 to 1.
• See chapter 2.3.4 "Tool Coordinates" at page 2-9 for
details on this operation.

Setting the Interpolation Type
1. Press [MOTION TYPE].
2. Select the desired interpolation type.
– When [MOTION TYPE] is pressed, MOVJ  MOVL  MOVC 
MOVS are displayed in order in the input buffer line.
3-13
3
3.2
DX100

Teaching
Teaching Operation
Setting the Play Speed
1. Move the cursor to the instruction.
2. Press [SELECT].
– The cursor moves to the input buffer line.
3. Move the cursor to the play speed to be set.
4. Press [SHIFT] + the cursor key [↑] or [↓] simultaneously.
– The joint speed moves up and down.
5. Press [ENTER].
– The MOV instruction is registered.
Move instruction
is registered.
Follow the above instructions when conducting teaching. (Tool number,
interpolation type, or play speed does not need to be set if it is same as
the previous step.)
SUPPLEMENT
To make the setting so that the play speed tag is not displayed as a default, select {EDIT} from the menu and then
select “ENABLE SPEED TAG” to delete “∗”.
• The position level can be set at the same time that the
move instruction is registered.
SUPPLEMENT
• To display the position level tag as a default, select {EDIT}
from the menu and then select “ENABLE POS LEVEL
TAG”.
Position Level: The position level is the degree of approximation of the
manipulator to a taught position.
The position level can be added to move instructions MOVJ (joint
interpolation) and MOVL (linear interpolation).
If the position level is not set, the precision depends on the operation
speed. Setting an appropriate level moves the manipulator in a path
suitable to circumferential conditions and the workpiece.
3-14
3
3.2
DX100
Teaching
Teaching Operation
The relationship between path and accuracy for position levels is as
follows.
Position level 0
P2
P3
Position level 1
Position level 2
Position level 3
Position level 4
Position Levels
Accuracy
0
Teaching position
1
to
8
Fine
|
Rough
Positioning level 8
P1

Setting the Position Level
1. Select move instruction.
– The DETAIL EDIT window appears.
2. Select the position level “UNUSED”.
– The selection dialog box appears.
3-15
DX100
3
3.2
Teaching
Teaching Operation
3. Select “PL”.
– The position level is displayed. The position initial value is 1.
4. Press [ENTER].
– To change the position level, select the level in the input buffer line,
type the value using the Numeric keys, and press [ENTER]. The
position level’s move instruction is registered.
5. Press [ENTER].
3-16
DX100
3
3.2
Teaching
Teaching Operation
For example, to perform the movement steps shown below, set as follows:
P1
P2 P4
P5
P3
P6
Steps P2, P4, and P5 are simple passing points, and do not require
accurate positioning. Adding PL=1 to 8 to the move instructions of these
steps moves the manipulator around the inner corners, thereby reducing
the cycle time.
If complete positioning is necessary as P3 or P6, add PL=0.
<EXAMPLE>
Passing points P2, P4, and P5:
MOVL V=138 PL=3
Positioning point P3 and P6:
MOVL V=138 PL=0
3-17
DX100
3
3.2
Teaching
Teaching Operation
3.2.3.2
Registering Reference Point Instructions
Reference point instructions (REFP) set an auxiliary point such as a wall
point for weaving. Reference point Nos. 1 to 8 are assigned for each
application. Follow these procedures to register reference point
instructions.
1. Select {JOB} under the main menu.
2. Select {JOB}.
3. Move the cursor.
– Move the cursor to the line immediately before the position where
the reference point to be registered.
Place immediately
before where
reference point is
to be registered.
4. Grip the Enable switch.
– The servo power is turned ON.
5. Press the axis operation key.
– Move the manipulator to the position to be registered as the
reference point.
6. Press [REFP] or select “REFP” from the inform list.
– The reference point instruction is displayed in the input buffer line.
7. Change the reference point number in one of the following ways.
– Move the cursor to the reference point number, and press [SHIFT] +
the cursor key to change the reference point number; or
– Press [SELECT] when the cursor is on the reference point number.
Then, the data input buffer line appears. Input the number and
press [ENTER].
8. Press [INSERT].
– The [INSERT] key lamp lights.
When registering before the END instruction, pressing [INSERT] is
not needed.
9. Press [ENTER].
– The REFP instruction is registered.
Reference point
is registered.
SUPPLEMENT
The programming pendant does not have the [REFP] key for
the application of spot welding, motor gun, and of material
handling, assembling, and cutting.
3-18
DX100
3.2.3.3
3
3.2
Teaching
Teaching Operation
Registering Timer Instructions
The timer instruction stops the manipulator for a specified time. Follow
these procedures to register timer instructions.
1. Select {JOB} under the main menu.
2. Select {JOB}.
3. Move the cursor.
– Move the cursor to one line before the position where the timer
instruction is to be registered.
One line before
where timer
instruction is
to be registered.
4. Press [TIMER].
– The TIMER instruction is displayed on the input buffer line.
5. Change the timer value.
– Move the cursor to the timer value and change it by pressing
[SHIFT] + the cursor key. The timer unit of adjustment is 0.01
seconds.
– If you use the Numeric keys to input the timer value, press
[SELECT] when the cursor is on the timer value. The data input line
appears. Input the value and press [ENTER].
6. Press [INSERT].
– The [INSERT] key lamp lights.
– When registering before the END instruction, pressing [INSERT] is
not needed.
7. Press [ENTER].
– The TIMER instruction is registered.
3-19
3
3.2
DX100

Teaching
Teaching Operation
Changing Timer Value
1. Press [TIMER].
2. Press [SELECT].
– The DETAIL EDIT window for the TIMER instruction appears.
3. Input the timer value on the instruction DETAIL EDIT window.
(1) When
is selected, the items available to be changed are displayed in the dialog box.
(2) Select the particular item to be changed.
– When a number is to be changed, move the cursor to the number
and press [SELECT]. Input the desired value using the Numeric
keys, and press [ENTER].
3-20
DX100
3
3.2
Teaching
Teaching Operation
4. Press [ENTER].
– The DETAIL EDIT window is closed and the JOB CONTENT window
appears again. Modified content is displayed in the input buffer line.
5. Press [INSERT].
– The [INSERT] key lamp lights.
– When registering before the END instruction, pressing [INSERT] is
not needed.
6. Press [ENTER].
– The TIMER instruction is registered.
3-21
DX100
3.2.4
3
3.2
Teaching
Teaching Operation
Overlapping the First and Last Steps
Why is overlapping the first and last step necessary?
Assume that the job shown below is to be repeated. The
manipulator moves from the last step (Step 6) to the first
step (Step 1). If Step 6 and Step 1 are the same position, the
manipulator moves directly Step 5 to Step 1, thereby improving work efficiency.
Step 6
SUPPLEMENT
Step 6 after
change
Step 5
Step 1
The position of step 6 is
changed to overlap with
step 1.
Step 2
Step 4
Step 3
1. Move the cursor to the first step line.
2. Press [FWD].
– The manipulator moves to the first step position.
3. Move the cursor to the last step line.
– The cursor starts blinking.
– When the cursor line position and the manipulator position are
different in the JOB CONTENT window, the cursor blinks.
4. Press [MODIFY].
– The key lamp lights.
5. Press [ENTER].
– The position data for the first step is registered on the line of the last
step.
– At this time, only the position data can be changed in the last step.
Interpolation type and play speed do not change.
3-22
3
3.3
DX100
3.3
3.3.1
Teaching
Checking Steps
Checking Steps
FWD/BWD Key Operations
Check whether the position of the taught steps is appropriate using [FWD]
or [BWD] on the programming pendant. Each time [FWD] or [BWD] is
pressed, the manipulator moves by a single step.
[FWD]: Moves the manipulator ahead in step number sequence.
Only the move instruction is executed when [FWD] is pressed.
[INTERLOCK] + [FWD]: All instructions are executed alternately.
[BWD]: Moves the manipulator backward a step at a time in reverse step
number sequence. Only the move instruction is executed.
NOTE
For safety, set manual speed at
or below.
1. Move the cursor to the step to be checked.
2. Press [FWD] or [BWD].
– The manipulator reaches the following / previous step and stops.
3-23
3
3.3
DX100
3.3.1.1
Teaching
Checking Steps
Precautions When Using FWD / BWD Operations

FWD Movements
• The manipulator moves in step number sequence. Only move
instructions are executed when [FWD] is pressed. To execute all
instructions, press [INTERLOCK] + [FWD].
• The manipulator stops after playing a single cycle. It does not move
after the END instruction is reached, even if [FWD] is pressed. However, at the end of a called job, the manipulator moves the instruction
next to the CALL instruction.
Called Jobs
Step 4
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
(RET instruction)
(END instruction)
Manipulator stops.
Step 4
Step 3
Step 5
Step 6
(CALL instruction)

Step 7
(END instruction)
BWD Movements
• The manipulator moves in reverse step number sequence. Only
move instructions are executed.
• The manipulator does not move after the first step is reached, even if
[BWD] is pressed. However, at the beginning of a called job, the
manipulator moves to the instruction immediately before the CALL
instruction.
Called Jobs
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
Manipulator stops.
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
(CALL instruction)

Circular Movements with FWD/BWD Key Operations
• The manipulator moves in a straight line to the first step of the circular interpolation.
• There must be three circular interpolation steps in a row to move the
manipulator in an arc.
• If [FWD] or [BWD] operation is restarted after being stopped to move
the cursor or to perform search, the manipulator moves in a straight
line to the next step.
• If [FWD] or [BWD] operation is restarted after being stopped to move
the axis as shown below, the manipulator moves in a straight line to
P2, the next circular interpolation. Circular motion is restored from
P2 to P3.
Moves with linear interpolation.
: Motion path for FWD/BWD key operation
P2
: Motion using axis keys
: Motion path during playback
P1
P3
3-24
3
3.3
DX100

Teaching
Checking Steps
Spline Curve Movements with FWD/BWD Operations
• The manipulator moves in a straight line to the first step of spline
interpolation.
• There must be three spline curve motion steps in a row to perform a
spline curve operation.
• Depending on the position where the [FWD] / [BWD] operation is
performed, the alarm “IRREGULAR DISTANCES BETWEEN
TEACHING POINTS” may occur.
• Note that FWD/BWD inching operations change the path of the
manipulator and caution is therefore required. Performing
these operations also increases the likelihood that the “IRREGULAR
DISTANCES BETWEEN TEACHING POINTS” will occur.
• If the [FWD] or [BWD] operation is restarted after being stopped to
move the cursor or perform a search, the manipulator moves in a
straight line to the next step.
• If the [FWD] or [BWD] operation is restarted after being stopped to
move the axis as shown below, the manipulator moves in a straight
line to P2, the next spline curve motion step. Spline curve motion is
restored from P2 onward. However, the path followed between P2
and P3 is somewhat different from the path followed at playback.
Linear motion
: Motion path for FWD/BWD key operation
P2
: Motion using axis keys
: Motion path during playback
P1
P3
• If the manipulator is moved to P3 with [FWD], stopped, and then
returned to P2 with [BWD], the path followed between P2 and P3 is
different for each of the following: the first FWD operation, the BWD
operation, and the consequent FWD operation.
P2
P4
P1
P3
3-25
DX100
3.3.1.2
3
3.3
Teaching
Checking Steps
Selecting Manual Speed
When [FWD] or [BWD] is pressed, the manipulator moves at the
manual speed selected at that time. Selected manual speed can
be checked by the manual speed indication on the programming
pendant.
Manual speed is set with [FAST] and [SLOW]. FWD operation can be
performed at a high speed by pressing [HIGH SPEED]. Follow these
procedures to select a manual speed.
• Each time [FAST] is pressed, the speed switches in the order of
“INCH””SLOW””MED””FAST”.
FAST
INCH
SLW
MED
FST
• Each time [SLOW] is pressed, the speed switches in the order of
“FAST”“MED”“SLOW”“INCH”.
SLOW FST
MED
SLW
INCH
• FWD/BWD operation is performed with SLW speed even if
NOTE
INCH is selected.
• [HIGH SPEED] is available only for the FWD operation but
not for BWD operation.
3-26
3
3.3
DX100
3.3.1.3
Teaching
Checking Steps
Moving to Reference Point
To check the position of a taught reference point, follow these procedures
to move the manipulator to the reference point.
1. Move the cursor to the reference point instruction line to be checked.
2. Press [REFP] + [FWD].
– The manipulator moves to the reference point of the cursor line.
SUPPLEMENT
3.3.1.4
The programming pendant does not have the [REFP] key for
the application of spot welding, general purposes (= material
handling, assembling, cutting) or motor gun.
Test Operations
Playback operations can be simulated in the teach mode with test
operations. This function is convenient for checking continuous paths and
operation instructions.
Test operation differs in the following ways from actual playback in the
play mode.
• Operation speeds greater than the maximum teaching
NOTE
speed are reduced to the maximum teaching speed.
• Work instruction output, such as arc output, is not executed.
Note that the motion path for the playback operation is replayed during the
test operation. Therefore, make sure that there is no obstacle around the
manipulator and great caution should be exercised when the test
operation is performed.
Motion Path for Test Operation
C
B
Motion Path for Playback Operation
Motion Path for Test Operation
Job Example
NOP
MOVJ VJ=50.0
MOVL V=1500.0
MOVL V=1500.0
:
A
NOTE
A
B
C
There may be a slight difference between the motion path
for the test operation and the motion path for the playback
operation due to a mechanical error or control delay, etc.
3-27
DX100
3
3.3
Teaching
Checking Steps
Test operation is performed by pressing [INTERLOCK] and [TEST
START]. For safety purposes, these keys will only function while the keys
are held down.
1. Select {JOB} under the main menu.
2. Press {JOB}.
– The test operation JOB CONTENT window appears.
3. Press [INTERLOCK] + [TEST START].
– The manipulator starts the test cycle operation.
– However, after the operation starts, the motion continues even if
[INTERLOCK] is released.
– The manipulator moves only while these keys are held down.
– The manipulator stops immediately when [TEST START] is
released.
NOTE
3.3.1.5
Always check safety conditions before pressing [INTERLOCK] + [TEST START] to start the manipulator in motion.
Machine Lock Operation
When “MACHINE LOCK” is enabled, the [FWD] / [BWD] operation or the
test operation can be performed to check the status of input and output
without moving the manipulator.
1. Press [AREA].
2. Select {UTILITY}.
3. Select {SETUP SPECIAL RUN}.
– The SPECIAL TEACH window appears.
4. Select “MACHINE LOCK”.
– Press [SELECT] to switch “VALID” and “INVALID”.
NOTE
• The setting of “MACHINE LOCK” is maintained even after
the mode is switched: If the machine lock is set to “VALID”
in the teach mode, it is still “VALID” after switching to the
play mode.
The same applies when the mode is switched from the
play mode to the teach mode.
• Note that the machine lock becomes “INVALID” if the following operation is performed.
• Execution of “CANCEL ALL SELECT” in the SPECIAL
PLAY window.
• Turning off the main power.
3-28
3
3.4
DX100
3.4
Teaching
Modifying Steps
Modifying Steps
Begin move instruction
insertion.
Begin move instruction
deletion.
Move step cursor to
location where you want
to insert the instruction.
Move cursor to location
of instruction to be
deleted.
Perform axis operations.
Press [DELETE].
Set interpolation type.
Press [ENTER].
Set play speed.
Deletion completed.
Set position level when
necessary.
Press [INSERT].
Press [ENTER].
Insertion completed.
3-29
DX100
3
3.4
Teaching
Modifying Steps
Move step cursor to
step to be modified.
Modifying position data
Modifying interpolation type
Move to position to be
modified using the
axis operation keys.
Perform axis
operations to position
to be modified.
Press [MODIFY].
Delete MOV
instruction.
Press [ENTER].
Press [MOTION TYPE]
and select motion
type.
Modification
completed.
Insert MOV
instruction.
Modification
completed.
NOTE
It is not possible to change a move instruction to a reference point instruction and vice versa.
3-30
DX100
3
3.4
Teaching
Modifying Steps
Begin REFP instruction
modification.
Deletions
Modifications
Move step cursor to the
REFP instruction to be
deleted, and move the
manipulator to the
position.
Move step cursor to the
REFP instruction to be
modified.
Perform axis operations.
Press [DELETE].
Press [REFP].
Press [ENTER].
Press [MODIFY].
Deletion completed.
Press [ENTER].
Modification completed.
3-31
DX100
3
3.4
Teaching
Modifying Steps
Begin TIMER Instruction
Modification.
Deletions
Modifications
Move edit cursor to the
TIMER instruction to be
deleted.
Move edit cursor to the
TIMER instruction to be
modified.
Press [DELETE].
Press [TIMER].
Press [ENTER].
Enter timer value.
Deletion completed.
Press [MODIFY].
Press [ENTER].
Modification completed.
3-32
DX100
3.4.1
3.4.1.1
3
3.4
Teaching
Modifying Steps
Displaying the JOB CONTENT Window for Editing
Currently Called Up Job
1. Select {JOB} under the main menu.
2. Select {JOB}.
– The JOB CONTENT window appears.
3.4.1.2
Calling Up Other Jobs
NOTE
In any other than the teach mode, set the mode switch to
“TEACH”.
1. Select {JOB} under the main menu.
2. Select {SELECT JOB}.
– The JOB LIST window appears.
3. Select the job name to be called.
3-33
DX100
3.4.2
3
3.4
Teaching
Modifying Steps
Inserting Move Instructions
NOTE
Move instructions cannot be inserted when the servo power
is OFF.
Step where move instruction is to be inserted
Path after insertion
Path before insertion
1. Move the cursor to the line immediately before the insert position.
The line immediately
before where the
move instruction
is to be added.
0006
0007
0008
0009
MOVL V=276
TIMER T=1.00
DOUT OT#(1) ON
MOVJ VJ=100.0
2. Press the axis operation key.
– Turn ON the servo power and press the axis operation key to move
the manipulator to the position to be inserted.
NOTE
Confirm the move instruction on the input buffer line and set
desired interpolation type and play speed.
3. Press [INSERT].
– The key lamp will light.
NOTE
When the inserting position is immediately before the END
instruction, pressing [INSERT] is not needed.
4. Press [ENTER].
– The move instruction is inserted after the cursor line.
The move instruction
is added.
0006
0007
0008
0009
0010
MOVL V=276
TIMER T=1.00
DOUT OT#(1) ON
MOVL V=558
MOVJ VJ=100.0
5. Press [ENTER].
– <Examples of Inserting a Move Instruction>
• When a move instruction is inserted in the following job, it is
placed on different lines according to the setting in the
3-34
DX100
3
3.4
Teaching
Modifying Steps
TEACHING CONDITION window.
Before inserting the move instruction
Cursor line
0006 MOVL V=276
0007
0008
0009
TIMER T=1.00
DOUT OT#(1) ON
MOVJ VJ=100.0
After the insertion: when inserting before the next step After the insertion: when inserting after the cursor line
Added
instruction
0006
0007
0008
0009
0010
MOVL V=276
TIMER T=1.00
DOUT OT#(1) ON
MOVL V=558
MOVJ VJ=100.0
0006
Added
0007
instruction 0008
0009
0010
MOVL V=276
MOVL V=558
TIMER T=1.00
DOUT OT#(1) ON
MOVJ VJ=100.0
Positions where the move instructions are inserted.
NOTE
The default location for insertions is “before the next step”,
but it is also possible to insert “after the cursor line”. This
setting is made in the “Move Instruction Register Method” in
the TEACHING CONDITION window.
3-35
DX100
3.4.3
3
3.4
Teaching
Modifying Steps
Deleting Move Instructions
Step where move instruction is to be deleted
Path before deletion
Path after deletion
1. Move the cursor to the move instruction to be deleted.
0003
0004
0005
Move instruction
to be deleted
MOVL V=138
MOVL V=558
MOVJ VJ=50.00
If the manipulator position differs from the cursor position on
the window, the cursor blinks. Stop the blinking by either of
the following procedures.
NOTE
1. Press [FWD] and move the manipulator to the position
where the move instruction is to be deleted.
2. Press [MODIFY] [ENTER] to change the position data
of the blinking cursor position to the current manipulator
position.
2. Press [DELETE].
– The key lamp will blink.
3. Press [ENTER].
– The step indicated by cursor line is deleted.
0003
0004
MOVL V=138
MOVJ VJ=50.00
3-36
DX100
3.4.4
3.4.4.1
3
3.4
Teaching
Modifying Steps
Modifying Move Instructions
Modifying Position Data
1. Move the cursor to the MOV instruction to be modified.
– Display the JOB CONTENT window and move the cursor to the
move instruction to be changed.
2. Press the axis operation key.
– Turn ON the servo power and press the axis operation key to move
the manipulator to the desired position.
3. Press [MODIFY].
– The key lamp will blink.
4. Press [ENTER].
– The position data in the present position is registered.
SUPPLEMENT
3.4.4.2
For MOV instructions for which position variables have been
set, the position variables will not be changed.
Modifying Interpolation Type
NOTE
Modifying only interpolation type is impossible. The interpolation type can be modified as a choice for modifying the
position data.
1. Move the cursor to the move instruction to be modified.
– Display the JOB CONTENT window, and move the cursor to the
move instruction for which interpolation type is to be changed.
2. Press [FWD].
– Turn ON the servo power and press [FWD] to move the manipulator
to the position of the move instruction.
3. Press [DELETE].
– The key lamp will blink.
4. Press [ENTER].
– The cursor line step is deleted.
5. Press [MOTION TYPE].
– Press [MOTION TYPE] to change the interpolation type.
– Each time [MOTION TYPE] is pressed, the input buffer line
instruction alternates.
6. Press [INSERT].
7. Press [ENTER].
– The interpolation type and position data are changed at the same
time.
3-37
3
3.4
DX100
3.4.5
Teaching
Modifying Steps
Undo Operation
After inserting, deleting, or modifying an instruction, the operation can be
undone.
The UNDO operation becomes enabled by selecting {EDIT}{ENABLE
UNDO}, and becomes disabled by selecting {EDIT}{∗ENABLE UNDO}
while editing a job.
NOTE
• The undo operation can be performed even after the
manipulator is moved by the FWD or BWD operation or
test operation after inserting, deleting, or modifying a
move instruction. However, the undo operation cannot be
performed if other instructions are edited or a job is executed in the play mode after editing the move instruction.
• The undo operation works only for the last five edited
instructions only.
1. Press [ASSIST].
– The assist menu appears.
UNDO
REDO
2. Select {UNDO}.
– The last operation is undone.
3. Select {REDO}.
– The last UNDO operation is undone.
3-38
DX100
3
3.4
Teaching
Modifying Steps
3.4.6
Modifying Reference Point Instructions
3.4.6.1
Deleting Reference Point Instructions
If the manipulator position differs from the cursor position,
an error message is displayed. If this occurs, follow either
of the procedures below.
NOTE
• Press [REFP] + [FWD] to move the manipulator to the
position to be deleted.
• Press [MODIFY] then [ENTER] to change the reference
point position data to the current position of the manipulator.
1. Move the cursor to the reference point instruction to be deleted.
2. Press [DELETE].
– The key lamp will blink.
3. Press [ENTER].
– The reference point instruction at the cursor line is deleted.
3.4.6.2
Modifying Reference Point Instructions
1. Move the cursor to the reference point instruction to be modified.
2. Move the manipulator with the axis operation keys.
– Turn ON the servo power and use the axis operation keys to move
the manipulator to the desired position.
3. Press [REFP].
4. Press [MODIFY].
– The key lamp will light.
5. Press [ENTER].
– The reference point instruction at the cursor line is changed.
3-39
DX100
3
3.4
Teaching
Modifying Steps
3.4.7
Modifying Timer Instructions
3.4.7.1
Deleting Timer Instructions
1. Move the cursor to the timer instruction to be deleted.
0003
0004
0005
Timer instruction
to be deleted
MOVJ VJ=50.00
TIMER T=1.00
MOVL V=138
2. Press [DELETE].
– The key lamp will light.
3. Press [ENTER].
– The timer instruction at the cursor line is deleted.
0003
0004
3.4.7.2
MOVJ VJ=50.00
MOVL V=138
Modifying Timer Instructions
1. Move the cursor to the timer instruction to be modified.
0003
0004
0005
MOVJ VJ=50.00
TIMER T=1.00
MOVL VJ=138
2. Press [SELECT].
3. Move the cursor to the input buffer line timer value.
– Move the cursor to the input buffer line timer value and press
[SHIFT] + the cursor key to set the data.
– To use the Numeric keys to input data, move the cursor to the input
buffer line timer value and press [SELECT].
TIMER T=1.00
4. Change the timer value.
5. Press [MODIFY].
6. Press [ENTER].
– This key lamp will light.
3-40
3
3.5
DX100
3.5
3.5.1
Teaching
Modifying Jobs
Modifying Jobs
Calling Up a Job
1. Select {JOB} under the main menu.
2. Select {SELECT JOB}.
– The JOB LIST window appears.
3. Select the desired job.
3.5.2
Windows Related to Job
There are five types of job windows. Jobs can be checked and edited in
these windows.
• JOB HEADER Window
Comments, data and time of registration, edit prohibit status, and so
on are displayed and edited.
• JOB CONTENT Window
The content of the registered job can be displayed and edited.
• COMMAND POSITION Window
The taught data is displayed.
• JOB LIST Window
The registered job is sorted alphabetically, then displayed, and the
job is selected.
• JOB CAPACITY Window
The number of registered jobs, amount of memory, number of steps
used, etc. is shown.
3-41
DX100
3.5.3
3
3.5
Teaching
Modifying Jobs
JOB HEADER Window
1. Select {JOB} under the main menu.
2. Select {JOB}.
3. Select {DISPLAY} under the menu.
4. Select {JOB HEADER}.
– The JOB HEADER window appears. Scroll the window using the
cursor.
A
B
C
D
E, F
G
H
I
J
A. JOB NAME
Displays the name of the current job.
B. COMMENT
Displays the comments attached to the current job. This can be edited
in this window.
C. DATE
Displays the date and time of the last editing of the job.
D. CAPACITY
Displays the amount of memory that is being used to register this job.
E. LINES
Displays the total number of instructions registered in this job.
F. STEPS
Displays the total number of move instructions registered in this job.
G. EDIT LOCK
Displays whether the edit prohibit setting for this job is ON or OFF. This
can be changed in this window.
H. TO SAVE TO FD
Displays “DONE” if the contents of the job have already been saved to
an external memory after the date and time of the last editing operation,
and displays “NOT DONE” if they have not been saved. The job is
marked as “DONE” only if it is saved as an independent job or as a
related job. If it is saved in a CMOS batch operation, it is not marked as
“DONE”.
I. GROUP SET
Displays the control group that this job controls. If the master axis is
specified, the master axis is highlighted.
J. JOB KIND
Displays the kind of this job.
SUPPLEMENT
To return to the JOB CONTENT window from the JOB
HEADER window, select {DISPLAY} from the menu and
then select {JOB CONTENT}.
3-42
DX100
3.5.4
3
3.5
Teaching
Modifying Jobs
JOB CONTENT Window
1. Select {JOB} under the main menu.
2. Select {JOB}.
– The JOB CONTENT window appears.
–
 (Left) : The cursor is moved to the address area.
–
 (Right): The cursor is moved to the instruction area.
A
B
A. Address Area
Displays the line numbers, the step numbers and the tool numbers
which are registered in the each step.
B. Instruction Area
Displays instructions, additional items, and comments. Line editing is
possible.
3-43
DX100
3.5.4.1
3
3.5
Teaching
Modifying Jobs
Switching the Address Area
Able to switch a state of the display (to hide or show) of the following
numbers in the address area.
•
Step numbers
•
Tool numbers in the each step
1. Select the {JOB} under the main menu.
2. Select {JOB CONTENT}.
– Job content appears.
3. Select {DISPLAY} in the menu area.
– A pull down menu appears.
4. Select {ENABLE STEP NO}.
– Step numbers appear in the address area.
– In the pull down menu, {ENABLE STEP NO} changes to
{ ✻ ENABLE STEP NO}.
STEP NO.
3-44
DX100
3
3.5
Teaching
Modifying Jobs
5. Select { ✻ ENABLE STEP NO}.
– Step numbers in the address area disappear.
– In the pull down menu, { ✻ ENABLE STEP NO} changes to
{ENABLE STEP NO}.
6. Select {ENABLE TOOL NO}.
– Tool numbers appear in the address area.
– In the pull down menu, {ENABLE TOOL NO} changes to
{ ✻ ENABLE TOOL NO}.
Tool numbers only appear in the line during the move instruction and
also appear under the teach mode.
TOOL NO.
3-45
DX100
3
3.5
Teaching
Modifying Jobs
7. Select { ✻ ENABLE TOOL NO}.
– Step numbers in the address area disappear.
– In the pull down menu, { ✻ ENABLE TOOL NO} changes to
{ENABLE TOOL NO}.
8. Select both {ENABLE STEP NO} and {ENABLE TOOL NO}.
– The both step numbers and tool numbers appear in the address
area.
– In the pull down menu, {ENABLE STEP NO} changes to
{ ✻ ENABLE STEP NO}.
– In the pull down menu, {ENABLE TOOL NO} changes to
{ ✻ ENABLE TOOL NO}.
Tool numbers only appear in the line during the move instruction and
also appear under the teach mode.
STEP NO.
TOOL NO.
3-46
DX100
3
3.5
Teaching
Modifying Jobs
9. Select both { ✻ ENABLE STEP NO} and { ✻ ENABLE TOOL NO}.
– The both step numbers and tool numbers disappear in the address
area.
– In the pull down menu, { ✻ ENABLE STEP NO} changes to
{ENABLE STEP NO}.
– In the pull down menu, { ✻ ENABLE TOOL NO} changes to
{ENABLE TOOL NO}.
3-47
DX100
3.5.5
3
3.5
Teaching
Modifying Jobs
COMMAND POSITION Window
1. Select {ROBOT} under the main menu.
2. Select {COMMAND POSITION}.
– Edit operations cannot be conducted on this window, but the taught
play speed and position data can be viewed on this window.
A
B
C
D
A. Interpolation
Displays the interpolation type.
B. Speed
Displays the play speed.
C. Command Position
Displays the tool file number and position data that has been taught for
this job. Steps which have no position data, such as move instructions
which use position variables, are marked with an asterisk (*).
D. Current Data
Displays the current tool file number and position of the manipulator.
3-48
DX100
3.5.6
3
3.5
Teaching
Modifying Jobs
JOB CAPACITY Window
1. Select {JOB} under the main menu.
2. Select {JOB CAPACITY}.
A
B
C
D
A. NUMBER OF JOBS
Displays the total number of jobs currently registered in the memory of
DX100.
B. USED MEMORY
Displays the total amount of memory used in the DX100.
C. STEPS
Displays the total number of used steps.
D. EDITING BUFFER
Displays editing buffer use.
3-49
3
3.6
DX100
3.6
Teaching
Editing Instructions
Editing Instructions
The editable content differs depending on whether the cursor is in the
address area or instruction area.
A
B
A. When the cursor is in the address area
Instructions can be inserted, deleted, or modified.
B. When the cursor is in the instruction area
The data of additional items of already-registered instructions can be
modified, inserted, or deleted.
Editing only additional items is called “line editing”.
When inserting or modifying instructions, input the instruction with the
function keys such as [TIMER], etc. or by using the instruction list dialog
box.
The selected instruction is displayed on the input buffer line with the same
additional items as registered previously.
If the addition, deletion or modification of additional item is needed, edit on
the instruction DETAIL EDIT window. If it is not needed, continue the
registration process.
3-50
3
3.6
DX100
3.6.1
Teaching
Editing Instructions
Instruction Group
The instructions are divided into eight groups by processing or each work.
Display
Instruction Group
Content
Example
IN/OUT
I/O Instruction
Controls input and output
DOUT, WAIT
CONTROL
Control Instruction
Controls processing and each work
JUMP, TIMER
MOTION
Move Instructions
Moves the manipulator
MOVJ, REFP
DEVICE
Work Instructions
Operates arc welding, spot welding, handling,
painting, etc.
ARCON, WVON,
SVSPOT, SPYON
ARITH
Operating
Instructions
Performs arithmetic calculation
ADD, SET
SHIFT
Shift Instructions
Shifts the teaching point
SFTON, SFTOF
SENS (Option)
Sensor Instructions Instructions related to the sensor
(Option)
COMARCON
OTHER
Other Instructions
Instructions for functions other than above
SHCKSET
SAME
-
Specifies the instruction where the cursor is.
PRIOR
-
Specifies the previously-registered instruction.

Instruction List
By pressing [INFORM LIST]
INFORM
LIST
, the instruction group list dialog box
appears.
By selecting a group, the instruction list dialog box of the selected group
appears.
3-51
DX100
3.6.2
3
3.6
Teaching
Editing Instructions
Inserting Instructions
1. Move the cursor to the address area in the JOB CONTENT window.
– Move the cursor to the line immediately before where the instruction
is to be inserted, in the teach mode.
Line before
where instruction
is to be added.
2. Press [INFORM LIST].
– The INFORM command list appears, and an underline is displayed
beneath the line number in the address area.
3. Select the instruction group.
– The instruction list dialog box appears. The selected instruction is
displayed on the input buffer line with the same additional items as
registered previously.
4. Select the instruction.
5. Change the data of additional items or variables as required.
– <When Nothing is to be Changed>
(1) Proceed to Step 6.
3-52
DX100
3
3.6
Teaching
Editing Instructions
– <When Additional Items are to be edited>
1. Changing numeric data
(1) Move the cursor to the desired item and press [SHIFT] + the cursor key to increase or decrease the value.
(2) To directly input the value using Numeric keys, press [SELECT] to
display the input buffer line.
(3) Type the value and press [ENTER]. The value on the input buffer
line is changed.
2. Adding, modifying, or deleting an additional item
(1) To add, modify, or delete an additional item, move the cursor to the
instruction on the input buffer line and press [SELECT]. The
DETAIL EDIT window appears.
– To add an item, move the cursor to “UNUSED” and press [SELECT].
The selection dialog box appears.
(2) Move the cursor to the desired item and press [SELECT].
To delete an item, move the cursor to the item to be deleted and
select “UNUSED”.
3-53
DX100
3
3.6
Teaching
Editing Instructions
3. Changing the data type
(1) To change the data type of an additional item, move the cursor to
of the item and press [SELECT]. The data type list appears.
Select the desired data type.
(2) After additional items have been added, modified or deleted as
required, press [ENTER]. The DETAIL EDIT window closes and
the JOB CONTENT window appears.
6. Press [INSERT] and [ENTER].
– The instruction displayed in the input buffer line is inserted.
3-54
DX100
3.6.3
3
3.6
Teaching
Editing Instructions
Deleting Instructions
1. Move the cursor to the address area in the JOB CONTENT window.
– Move the cursor to the instruction line to be deleted, in the teach
mode.
The line to be
deleted
2. Move the cursor to the deleting line in the address area.
3. Press [DELETE] and [ENTER].
– The instruction is deleted and the following lines move up.
The following
lines move up.
3.6.4
Modifying Instructions
1. Move the cursor to the address area in the JOB CONTENT window.
– Move the cursor to the instruction line to be modified, in the teach
mode.
Instruction line
to be changed
2. Press [INFORM LIST].
– The INFORM command list appears and the cursor moves to the
INFORM command list.
3. Select the instruction group.
– The instruction list dialog box appears. The selected instruction is
displayed on the input buffer line with the same additional items as
registered previously.
3-55
DX100
3
3.6
Teaching
Editing Instructions
4. Move the cursor key to the instruction to be modified and press
[SELECT].
5. Change the data of additional items or variables as required.
– <Editing Additional Items>
1. Changing numeric data
(1) Move the cursor to the desired item and press [SHIFT] + the
cursor key to increase or decrease the value.
– To directly input the value using Numeric keys, press [SELECT] to
display the input buffer line for the numeric values.
(2) Type the value and press [ENTER]. The value on the input buffer
line is changed.
2. Adding, modifying, or deleting an item
(1) To add, modify or delete an additional item, move the cursor to the
instruction on the input buffer line and press [SELECT]. The
DETAIL EDIT window appears.
(2) To add an item, move the cursor to “UNUSED” and press
[SELECT]. The selection dialog box appears.
3-56
DX100
3
3.6
Teaching
Editing Instructions
(3) Move the cursor to the desired item and press [SELECT].
To delete an item, move the cursor to the item to be deleted and
select “UNUSED”.
3. Changing the data type
(1) To change the data type of an additional item, move the cursor to
of the item and press [SELECT]. The data type list appears.
Select the desired data type.
(2) After additional items have been added, modified or deleted as
required, press [ENTER]. The DETAIL EDIT window closes and
the JOB CONTENT window appears.
6. Press [MODIFY] and [ENTER].
3-57
DX100
3
3.6
Teaching
Editing Instructions
– The instruction is modified to the instruction displayed in the input
buffer line.
3-58
DX100
3.6.5
3
3.6
Teaching
Editing Instructions
Modifying Additional Numeric Data
1. Move the cursor to the instruction area in the JOB CONTENT window.
– Move the cursor to the instruction area if it is in the address area.
– Press [SELECT] to change the mode to line editing mode.
2. Select the line where the number data is to be modified.
– The selected line can now be edited.
Number data
to be modified
3. Move the cursor to the numeric data to be modified.
4. Input the desired number.
– Press [SHIFT] + the cursor key to increase or decrease the value.
To directly input the number, press [SELECT]. The input buffer line
appears. Type the number and press [ENTER].
5. Press [ENTER].
– The numeric data is modified.
Instruction line
for which
numeric data
was changed.
3-59
DX100
3.6.6
3
3.6
Teaching
Editing Instructions
Modifying Additional Items
1. Move the cursor to the instruction area in the JOB CONTENT window.
2. Select the instruction line for which the additional item is to be
modified.
– Move the cursor to the instruction area if it is in the address area
– Press [SELECT] to change the mode to line editing mode.
Instruction line for
which additional
item is to be modified.
3. Select the instruction.
– Move the cursor key to a instruction, the press [SELECT] to display
DETAIL EDIT window.
4. Select the additional item to be modified.
– The selection dialog box appears.
5. Select the desired additional item.
– The modified additional item is displayed on the DETAIL EDIT
window.
6. Press [ENTER].
– The DETAIL EDIT window closes, and the JOB CONTENT window
appears.
7. Press [ENTER].
– Contents of the input buffer line are registered on the cursor line of
the instruction area.
Instruction line
for which additional
item was modified.
3-60
DX100
3.6.7
3
3.6
Teaching
Editing Instructions
Inserting Additional Items
1. Move the cursor to the instruction area in the JOB CONTENT window.
2. Select the instruction line for which the additional item is to be
inserted.
– The selected line can now be edited.
Instruction line
for which additional
item is to be added.
3. Select the instruction.
– Move the cursor key to [SELECT] and press, then DETAIL EDIT
window appears.
4. Select the additional item to be inserted on DETAIL EDIT window.
– The selection dialog box appears.
5. Select inserting additional item.
– The item to be added appears.
– When the additional item needs the numeric data, move the cursor
to the number and press [SELECT]. The input buffer line appears.
Type the number and press [ENTER].
3-61
DX100
3
3.6
Teaching
Editing Instructions
6. Press [ENTER].
– DETAIL EDIT window closes and JOB CONTENT window appears.
7. Press [ENTER].
– Contents of the input buffer line are registered on the cursor line of
the instruction area.
Instruction line for
which additional
item was added.
3-62
DX100
3.6.8
3
3.6
Teaching
Editing Instructions
Deleting Additional Items
NOTE
This operation cannot be used for the additional item which
is locked.
1. Move the cursor to the instruction area in the JOB CONTENT window.
2. Select the line where the additional item is to be deleted.
– Move the cursor to the instruction area when it is in the address
area.
– Press [SELECT] to change the mode to line editing mode.
Instruction line for
which additional
item is to be deleted.
3. Select the instruction.
– Move the cursor to the instruction and press [SELECT], then
DETAIL EDIT window appears.
4. Select the additional item to be deleted.
– The selection dialog box appears.
5. Select “UNUSED”.
– “UNUSED” is displayed ton the DETAIL EDIT window.
6. Press [ENTER].
– The DETAIL EDIT window closes, and the JOB CONTENT window
appears.
7. Press [ENTER].
– Contents of the input buffer line are registered on the cursor line of
the instruction area.
Instruction line for
which the additional
item was deleted.
3-63
3
3.7
DX100
3.7
Teaching
Editing Jobs
Editing Jobs
The following five operations are to edit jobs.
Copy
:Copies a specified range to the buffer.
Cut
:Copies a specified range from a job to the buffer, and deletes
it in a job.
Paste
:Inserts the contents of the buffer into a job.
Reverse Paste
:Reverses the order of the contents of the buffer, and inserts
them into a job.
(Refer to the following figure.)
Base Reverse
Paste
:Reverses the order of the contents of the buffer and adjusts
the to-and-from speeds same, and inserts them into a job.
(Refer to the following figure.)
V=100
V=50
2
V=80
:
MOVL V=100
MOVL V=50
MOVL V=80
MOVL V=30
MOVL V=70
;Move to
;Move to
;Move to
;Move to
;Move to
at V=100
t V= 50
at V=80
t V=30
at V=30
V=30
1
4
:
V=70
Excute Reverse Paste
5
:
2
MOVL V=100
MOVL V=50
MOVL V=80
MOVL V=30
MOVL V=70
MOVL V=30
MOVL V=80
MOVL V=50
MOVL V=100
:
;Move to
;Move to
;Move to
;Move to
;Move to
;Move to
;Move to
;Move to
;Move to
V=100 V=50
at V=100
V=80
t V= 50 V=??
V=50
at V=80
V=100
at V=30
1
t V=70
at V=30
The speed and interpolation are
at V=80
different going and returning.
at V= 50
at V=100
3
V=30
V=80
4
V=30
V=70
5
Execute Base Reverse Paste
2
:
MOVL V=100
MOVL V=50
MOVL V=80
MOVL V=30
MOVL V=70
;Move to
;Move to
;Move to
;Move to
;Move to
at V=100
t V= 50
at V=80
at V=30
t V=70
MOVL V=70
MOVL V=30
MOVL V=80
MOVL V=50
;Move to
;Move to
;Move to
;Move to
at V=70
at V=30
at V= 80
at V=50
V=100
V=50
V=80
3
V=50
V=80
V=30
1
V=30
The speed and interpolation are
4
the same going and returning.
V=70
:
V=70
5
3-64
DX100
3
3.7
Teaching
Editing Jobs
MOVJ VJ=50.00
TIMER T=1.00
MOVL V=100
Copy
Cut
Paste
The buffer content is inserted.
Reverse paste
Buffer content order is reversed and inserted.
3-65
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
NOP
’TEST JOB
MOVJ VJ=50.00
TIMER T=1.00
MOVL V=100
MOVL V=100
0000
0001
NOP
’TEST JOB
0005
MOVL V=100
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
NOP
’TEST JOB
MOVJ VJ=50.00
TIMER T=1.00
MOVL V=100
MOVL V=100
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
NOP
’TEST JOB
MOVL V=100
TIMER T=1.00
MOVJ VJ=50.00
MOVL V=100
DX100
3.7.1
3
3.7
Teaching
Editing Jobs
Selecting the Range
After setting the range, Copy and Delete can be performed.
1. Move the cursor to the instruction area in the JOB CONTENT window.
Move the cursor to
instruction area.
2. Move the cursor to the start line and press [SHIFT] + [SELECT].
– The range specification begins, and the address is displayed in
reverse.
Start line
3. Move the cursor to the end line.
– The range is varied by moving the cursor. Up to the line specified by
the cursor is the range.
End line
3-66
3
3.7
DX100
3.7.2
Teaching
Editing Jobs
Copying
Before copying, the range to be copied has to be specified.
1. Select {EDIT} under the menu.
– The pull-down menu appears.
2. Select {COPY}.
– The specified range is copied to the buffer.
3.7.3
Cutting
Before cutting, the range to be cut has to be specified.
1. Select {EDIT} under the menu.
– The pull-down menu appears.
2. Select {CUT}.
– The confirmation dialog box appears. When “YES” is selected, the
specified range is deleted and copied to the buffer.
– When “NO” is selected, the cutting operation is cancelled.
3-67
3
3.7
DX100
3.7.4
Teaching
Editing Jobs
Pasting
Before pasting, the range to be pasted has to be stored in the buffer.
1. Move the cursor to the line immediately before the desired position in
the JOB CONTENT window.
– The pull-down menu appears.
2. Select {EDIT} under the menu.
3. Select {PASTE}.
– The confirmation dialog box appears.
– When “YES” is selected, the contents of the buffer are inserted to
the job.
– When “NO” is selected, the pasting operation is cancelled.
3-68
3
3.7
DX100
3.7.5
Teaching
Editing Jobs
Reverse Pasting
Before pasting, the range to be pasted has to be stored in the buffer.
1. Move the cursor to the line immediately before the desired position in
the JOB CONTENT window.
2. Select {EDIT} under the menu.
– The pull-down menu appears.
3. Select {REVERSE PASTE}.
– The confirmation dialog box appears.
– When “YES” is selected, the contents of the buffer are reverse
pasted to the job.
– When “NO” is selected, the reverse-pasting operation is cancelled.
3-69
3
3.8
DX100
3.8
Teaching
Test Operations
Test Operations
Playback operations can be simulated in the teach mode with test
operations. This function is convenient for checking continuous paths and
operation instructions.
Test operation differs in the following ways from actual playback in the
play mode.
• Operation speeds greater than the maximum teaching
speed are reduced to the maximum teaching speed.
NOTE
• Only machine lock is available among special operations
for playback in the play mode.
• Work instruction output, such as arc output, is not executed.
3.8.1
Test Operation Procedures
Test operation is performed by pressing [INTERLOCK] and [TEST
START]. For safety purposes, these keys will only function while the keys
are held down.
1. Select {JOB} under the main menu.
2. Press {JOB}.
– The test operation JOB CONTENT window appears.
3. Press [INTERLOCK] + [TEST START].
– The manipulator starts the test cycle operation.
– The manipulator moves only while these keys are held down.
However, after the operation starts, the motion continues even if
[INTERLOCK] is released.
– The manipulator stops immediately when [TEST START] is
released.
NOTE
Always check safety conditions before starting the manipulator in motion.
3-70
3
3.9
DX100
3.9
3.9.1
Teaching
Other Job-editing Functions
Other Job-editing Functions
Editing Play Speed
There are two ways to modify play speed:
• Modification of Speed Type
• Relative Modification
3.9.1.1
Modification of Speed Type
This method is used to modify the speed type (such as VJ, V, VR, etc.)
0005
0006
0007
MOVJ VJ=25.00
MOVL V=138
MOVJ VJ=50.00
Only VJ is changed to 100.
0005
0006
0007
3.9.1.2
MOVJ VJ=100.00
MOVL V=138
MOVJ VJ=100.00
Type of
Play Speed
Explanation
VJ
Joint Speed
V
TCP Speed
VR
Posture Angle Speed
VE
Base Axis Speed
Normal robot axes
Relative Modification
All steps are selected regardless of the play speed type. This method is
used to change all steps by a specified percentage (1% to 200%). This is
called relative modification.
0005
0006
0007
MOVJ VJ=25.00
MOVL V=138
MOVJ VJ=50.00
Speed is doubled.
0005
0006
0007
MOVJ VJ=50.00
MOVL V=276
MOVJ VJ=100.00
The speed of the entire job or specified section can be changed.
1. Select {JOB} under the main menu.
2. Select {JOB}.
– The JOB CONTENT window appears.
3. Move the cursor to the instruction area.
4. Press [SHIFT] + [SELECT] in the speed modify start line.
– If the section is not specified, the speed of the entire job will be
changed.
– Move the cursor to the end line. The line numbers of the selected
lines are highlighted.
3-71
DX100
3
3.9
Teaching
Other Job-editing Functions
5. Select {EDIT} under the menu.
6. Select {CHANGE SPEED}.
– The SPEED MODIFICATION window appears.
A
B
C
D
E
7. Set desired items.
A. START LINE NO.
Displays the first line number of the section to be modified.
B. END LINE NO.
Displays the last line number of the section to be modified.
C. MODIFICATION TYPE
Selects the confirmation before changing: “CONFIRM” or “NO CONFIRM”.
Each time [SELECT] is pressed when the cursor is on this item, the setting alternates between “CONFIRM” and “NO CONFIRM”.
D. SPEED KIND
Selects the speed type.
When [SELECT] is pressed when the cursor is on this item, selection
dialog box appears. Select the speed type to be changed.
E. SPEED
Specifies the speed value.
When [SELECT] is pressed when the cursor is on this item, the mode
changes to the number input mode. Input the speed value and press
[ENTER].
8. Select “EXECUTE”.
– The speed begins to change.
– If “MODIFICATION TYPE” is set to “CONFIRM”, the confirmation
dialog box “Modifying speed” is displayed. Press [ENTER] to
change the speed on the first line and search for the next speed.
Press the UP/DOWN cursor button to keep the speed on the first
line and search for the next speed. To cancel the speed
modification, press [CANCEL].
– If “MODIFICATION TYPE” is set to “NOT CONFIRM”, all the speeds
of the specified section are changed.
3-72
DX100
3.9.1.3
3
3.9
Teaching
Other Job-editing Functions
Modification by TRT (Traverse Time)
Modifications made by TRT have the following characteristics:
• By setting the time required to execute a move instruction (moving
time) to a desired value, the speeds can be modified.
• It is possible to measure the moving time without actually moving the
manipulator.
For example, when the movement from lines 5 through 20 currently
requires 34 seconds, and you want to reduce it to 15 seconds or extend it
to 50 seconds, this function is used.
1. Select {JOB} under the main menu.
2. Select {JOB}.
– The JOB CONTENT window appears.
3. Move the cursor to the instruction area.
4. Press [SHIFT] + [SELECT] in the weaving time measure start line.
– Move the cursor to the end line. The line numbers of the selected
lines are highlighted.
5. Select {EDIT} under the menu.
6. Select {TRT}.
– The TRT window appears.
A
B
C
D
7. Set the desired items.
A. START LINE NO.
Displays the first line number of the section to be measured and modified.
B. END LINE NO.
Displays the last line number of the section to be measured and modified.
C. MOVING TIME
The weaving time needed to move from the first number to last number
is measured and displayed.
D. SETTING TIME
Set the desired weaving time.
When [SELECT] is pressed when the cursor is on this item, the input
buffer line appears. Input the desired weaving time and press [ENTER].
3-73
DX100
3
3.9
Teaching
Other Job-editing Functions
8. Select “EXECUTE”.
– The speed is changed according to the setting.
NOTE
• If instructions that include specific speed data such as
SPEED or ARCON instructions (including speed data of
the welding condition file) exist in the specified section, the
speed data for those steps are not changed. Therefore, in
such cases, the set time and the actual time required are
not same.
• If the speed data is limited by the maximum value, the following message is displayed.
!Limited to maximum speed
3-74
DX100
3.9.2
3
3.9
Teaching
Other Job-editing Functions
Editing Interpolation Type
1. Select {JOB} under the main menu.
2. Select {JOB}.
– The JOB CONTENT window appears.
3. Move the cursor to the instruction area.
4. Select the line to be modified.
– The instruction on the cursor is displayed in the input buffer line.
5. Press [SHIFT] + the cursor key simultaneously.
– The interpolation type in the input buffer line changes.
– The modification of the speed according to the modification of the
interpolation type is calculated by the ratio to maximum speed at
each speed.
– Joint Speed: MAX=100.0%
Linear Speed: MAX=9000cm/min
(e.g.)
Joint Speed: 50% = Linear Speed: 4500cm/min
Linear Speed: 10% = Linear Speed: 900cm/min
6. Press [ENTER].
– The instruction on the cursor line is replaced with one on the input
buffer line.
3-75
DX100
3.9.3
3
3.9
Teaching
Other Job-editing Functions
Editing Condition Files
Condition files are prepared in order to set the conditions for the
manipulator to execute instructions.
Multiple condition files are provided for each application. More than one
pattern can be set up in each condition file. The patterns are listed by
“condition numbers”. This number is specified by the work instruction in a
job.
NOTE
Refer to DX100 Operator’s Manual of each application for
information regarding the contents and editing methods of
the condition file.
Condition Files
Application A
Application B
Application C
Condition
Condition
Condition
Number 1
Number 2
Number 3
Condition
Condition
Number 1
Number 2
Condition
Condition
Number 1 Condition
Condition
Number 2
Number 3
Number 4
3-76
3
3.9
DX100
3.9.4
Teaching
Other Job-editing Functions
User Variables
User variables are used for jobs to store counters, calculation results or
input signals. Since the same user variable can be used in multiple jobs,
save the numerical values as common references for the jobs and the
user variables are maintained even when the power is turned OFF.
User variables have the following applications:
• Controlling of the number of workpieces
• Controlling of the number of jobs
• Sending/receiving of information between jobs
The data formats for user variables are described in the following table:
Table 3-5: User Variables
Data
Format
Variable No.
(pcs)
Functions
Byte Type
B000 to B099
(100)
Range of storable values is from
0 to 255.
Can store I/O status.
Can perform logical operations
(AND, OR, etc.)
Integer
Type
1000 to 1099
(100)
Range of storable values is from 32768 to 32767.
Double
Precision
Integer
Type
D000 to D099
(100)
Range of storable values is from 2147483648 to 2147483647.
Real Type
R000 to R099
(100)
Range of storable values is from 3.4E+38 to 3.4E38.
Accuracy: 1.18E-38 < x ≤ 3.4E38
Character
Type
S000 to S099
(100)
Maximum storable number of
characters is 16.
Position
Type
P000 to P127
(128)
Can store position data in pulse
form or in XYZ form.
XYZ type variable can be used as
target position data for move
instructions, and as incremental
values for parallel shift
instructions.
BP000 to BP127
(128)
EX000 to EX127
(128)
3-77
DX100
3
3.9
Teaching
Other Job-editing Functions
• Play Speed V:
MOVL V=I000
The variable I000 is used for speed V with this move
instruction.
The unit for V is 0.1mm per second.
For example, if I000 were set as 1000, the following would
be true:
I000=1000  unit for V is 0.1mm/s  V=100.0mm/s
Note that, depending on the unit being used, the value of
the variable and the value of the actual speed on occasion
might not match.
NOTE
• Play Speed VJ:
MOVL VJ=I000
The unit for VJ is 0.01%.
For example, if I000 were set as 1000, the following would
be true:
I000=1000  unit for VJ is 0.01%  VJ=10.00%.
• Timer T:
TIMER T=I000
The unit for T is 0.01 seconds.
For example, if I000 were set as 1000, the following would
be true:
I000=1000  unit for T is 0.01 seconds  T=10.00 seconds.
3.9.4.1
Setting Byte, Integer, Double Precision Integer, and Real Type Variables
1. Select {VARIABLE} under the main menu.
– {BYTE}, {INTEGER}, {DOUBLE}, and {REAL} are displayed for the
sub menu.
2. Select desired variable type.
– The BYTE VARIABLE window appears. (Following is a case that
{BYTE} is selected.)
3-78
DX100
3
3.9
Teaching
Other Job-editing Functions
3. Move the cursor to the desired variable No.
– When the desired variable number is not displayed, move the cursor
with either of the following operations.
• Move the cursor on the variable No. and press [SELECT]. Then
input the variable No. using the Numeric keys and press
[ENTER].
• Move the cursor to the menu area and select {EDIT} 
{SEARCH}. Then input the variable No. with the Numeric keys
and press [ENTER]
Cursor is moved
to desired variable
number.
4. Move the cursor to the data of the variable.
– The number can be directly typed.
5. Input the desired number.
6. Press [ENTER].
– Input value is set to the variable on the cursor position.
3-79
DX100
3.9.4.2
3
3.9
Teaching
Other Job-editing Functions
Setting Character Type Variables
1. Select {VARIABLE} under the main menu.
2. Select {STRING}.
– The STRING VARIABLE window appears.
3. Move the cursor to the desired variable No.
– When the desired variable number is not displayed, move the cursor
with either of the following operations.
• Move the cursor on the variable No. and press [SELECT]. Then
input the variable No. using the Numeric keys and press [ENTER].
• Move the cursor to the menu area and select {EDIT}  {SEARCH}.
Then input the variable No. with the Numeric keys and press
[ENTER]
The cursor is
moved to
desired variable
number.
3-80
DX100
3
3.9
Teaching
Other Job-editing Functions
4. Move the cursor to the data of the variable.
– The characters can be directly typed.
5. Input the desired characters.
– For information on character input operation, refer to
chapter 1.2.6 "Character Input Operation" at page 1-18.
6. Press [ENTER].
– The input characters are set to the variable on the cursor position.
3-81
DX100
3.9.4.3
3
3.9
Teaching
Other Job-editing Functions
Registering Variable Name
1. Select {VARIABLE} under the main menu.
2. Select desired variable.
– Select any variable type from among byte type, integer type, double
precision integer type, real type, robot position type, base position
type, and station position type.
3. Move the cursor to desired variable number.
– If desired variable number is not displayed, move the cursor by
either of following operations.
• Select the variable number, input desired variable number and press
[ENTER]. The cursor moves to the variable number to be input.
• Move the cursor to the menu area and select {EDIT}{SEARCH}.
Input desired variable number and press [ENTER]. The cursor
moves to the variable number to be input.
4. Select “NAME”.
– The input buffer line appears.
SUPPLEMENT
Refer to chapter 1.2.6 "Character Input Operation" at
page 1-18 for the character input operation.
5. Input name.
6. Press [ENTER].
– The variable name is registered.
3-82
DX100
3.9.4.4
3
3.9
Teaching
Other Job-editing Functions
Displaying Position Variables
1. Select {VARIABLE} under the main menu.
2. Select desired position variable type.
– The POSITION VARIABLE window of desired type among robot
type, base type, and station type appears.
3. Move to a page with the objective variable number.
– When the desired variable number is not displayed, move the cursor
with either of the following operations.
GO BACK
• Press the page key
PAGE
GO BACK
or [SHIFT] + page key
PAGE
.
• Press page button, then input the variable No. using the Numeric
keys and press [ENTER].
• Move the cursor to the menu area and select {EDIT}  {SEARCH}.
Then input the variable No. with the Numeric keys and press
[ENTER].
Move to desired
variable number
page.
3-83
3
3.9
DX100
3.9.4.5
Teaching
Other Job-editing Functions
Setting Position Variables
The following table shows the types of position variables and setting
methods.
NOTE
• The setting of position variables is done in the teach
mode.
• Turn the servo power ON when setting the variables with
the axis keys.
Table 3-6: Types of Position Variables and Setting Method
Pxxx
(Robot)
Type
Pulse Type
BPxxx
(Base)
XYZ Type
Pulse Type
EXxxx
(Station)
XYZ Type
Pulse Type
Select coordinates
from base, robot,
user, tool.
Z-axis
Setting Method
Using the numeric keys
45000
7
8
9
4
5
6
1
2
3
0
.
-
X-axis
Using the axis keys
X-
X+
XR-
R+
Y-
Y+
Y-
Y+
Z-
Z+
Z-
Z+
T-
T+
E-
E+
8-
8+
S-
L-
U-
S+
L+
U+
3-84
B-
X+
B+
Y-axis
3
3.9
DX100
3.9.4.6
Teaching
Other Job-editing Functions
Setting Position Variables Using the Numeric Keys

Pulse Type
1. Select {VARIABLE} under the main menu.
2. Select desired position variable type.
– The desired variable window appears (robot, base, or station). (The
POSITION VARIABLE window is used for this example.)
3. Select the variable data type.
– The selection dialog box appears.
– If the position variable was set before, confirmation dialog box
appears for data clear. If “YES” is selected, the data is cleared.
4. Select {PULSE}.
5. Move the cursor to desired data to be input and press [SELECT].
6. Input the value.
7. Press [ENTER].
– The value is set in the cursor position.
3-85
3
3.9
DX100

Teaching
Other Job-editing Functions
XYZ Type
1. Select {VARIABLE} under the main menu.
2. Select desired position variable type.
3. Select the variable data type.
– The selection dialog box appears.
4. Select desired coordinates except PULSE.
5. Move the cursor to desired data to be input and press [SELECT].
6. Input the value.
7. Press [ENTER].
– The value is set in the cursor position.
(1) Setting of “<TYPE>”
– Each time [SELECT] is pressed when the cursor is on the setting
data in the input buffer line, the settings alternate.
About “<TYPE>”
• It is not necessary to set a type if the position variable is to be used
for parallel shift operations.
• When the position variable is used with a move instruction such as
“MOVJ P001”, it is necessary to set a type. For details on types,
refer to chapter 3.9.4.10 "Manipulator Types" at page 3-89.
Current Position Window (XYZ) shows the current setting of a type.
3-86
3
3.9
DX100
3.9.4.7
Teaching
Other Job-editing Functions
Setting Position Variables Using the Axis Keys

Pulse Type
1. Select {VARIABLE} under the main menu.
2. Select desired position variable type.
– The desired variable window appears (robot, base, or station).
3. Press [SHIFT] + [ROBOT]. When you need an external axis position,
press [SHIFT]+[EX.AXIS].
(1) When there are two or more robot, base, or a station, specify the
axis with following operation.
• Robot
Each time [SHIFT] + [ROBOT] is pressed, the axis displayed on the
status line changes:
R1  R2  ...  R8.
• Base or Station
Each time [SHIFT]+[EX.AXIS] is pressed, the axis displayed on the
status line changes:
B1 B2  ...  B8  S1  S2  ......  S24.
(2) Check the selected axis on the status line.
4. Move the manipulator with the axis keys.
– Move the manipulator or the external axis to the desired position to
be set to position variable.
5. Press [MODIFY].
6. Press [ENTER].

XYZ Type
1. Select {VARIABLE} under the main menu.
2. Select desired position variable type.
(1) When there are two or more robot, base, or a station, specify the
axis with following operation.
• Robot
Each time [SHIFT] + [ROBOT] is pressed, the axis displayed on the
status line changes:
R1  R2  ...  R8.
• Base or Station
Each time [SHIFT]+[EX.AXIS] is pressed, the axis displayed on the
status line changes:
B1 B2  ...  B8  S1  S2  ......  S24.
(2) Check the selected axis on the status line.
3. Move the manipulator with the axis keys.
– Move the manipulator or the external axis to the desired position to
be set to position variable.
4. Press [MODIFY].
5. Press [ENTER].
3-87
DX100
3.9.4.8
3
3.9
Teaching
Other Job-editing Functions
Deleting Data Set of Position Variables
1. Select {VARIABLE} under the main menu.
2. Select desired position variable type.
3. Select {DATA} under the menu.
– The pull-down menu appears.
4. Select {CLEAR DATA}.
– The position variable data on the displayed page are deleted.
3.9.4.9
Checking Positions by Position Variables
1. Select {VARIABLE} under the main menu.
2. Select desired position variable type.
(1) When there are two or more robot, base, or a station, specify the
axis with following operation.
• Robot
Each time [SHIFT] + [ROBOT] is pressed, the axis displayed on the
status line changes:
R1  R2  ...  R8.
• Base or Station
Each time [SHIFT]+[EX.AXIS] is pressed, the axis displayed on the
status line changes:
B1 B2  ...  B8  S1  S2  ......  S24.
(2) Check the selected axis on the status line.
3. Press [FWD].
– Selected axis moves to the position specified by the variable.
NOTE
The selected axis (manipulator, base, or station) moves
directly to the set variable position.
Before pressing [FWD], check that the surrounding area is
safe.
3-88
DX100
3
3.9
Teaching
Other Job-editing Functions
3.9.4.10 Manipulator Types
When the position data of the job data are described using the XYZ
format, several postures may be taken according to the manipulator’s
structure when moving it to the described position.
Although these postures have the same coordinates for TCP, they vary in
pulse for each axis.
Thus, the manipulator’s posture cannot be uniquely defined only by the
coordinate value, and it is necessary to specify the data other than the
coordinate value to define the manipulator’s posture.
This is called “Type”.
Type varies according to the manipulator model.
For the manipulator with seven axes, X, Y, Z, Rx, Ry, Rz, Re
and Type are used.
Re is an element to indicate the posture of the manipulator
with seven axes and does not change by the specified coordinates.
The definition of Re is shown below.
NOTE
3-89
3
3.9
DX100
3.9.5
Teaching
Other Job-editing Functions
Flip/No Flip
When the angle of B-axis is within (+) range (θB ≥ 0°), it is called “Flip”,
and when within (-) range (θB < 0°), “No Flip”.
3.9.6
R-axis Angle
This specifies whether the R-axis angle is less than ±180° or greater than
±180°.
R < 180°
R ≥ 180°
0°
0°
360° -360°
-180° 180°
-180° < θ R <= 180°
NOTE
180° < θ R
θ R <= -180°
θ R is the angle when the R-axis home position is 0 °.
3-90
3
3.9
DX100
3.9.7
Teaching
Other Job-editing Functions
T-axis Angle
This specifies positions of the R-, B-, and T-axis.
For manipulators with wrist axes (three axes), this specifies whether the Taxis angle is less than ±180° or greater than ±180°.
T <180°
T ≥ 180°
0°
0°
360° -360°
-180° 180°
-180° < θ T <= 180°
NOTE
3.9.8
180° < θ T
θ T <= -180°
θ T is the angle when the T-axis home position is 0°.
Front/Back
This specifies where in the S-axis rotation center the B-axis rotation center
locates when viewing the L-axis and U-axis from the right-hand side.
When viewed from the right-hand side, the right of the S-axis rotation
center is called the front, and the left is called the back.
Right-hand side
(S-axis 0°)
3-91
DX100
3
3.9
Teaching
Other Job-editing Functions
The diagram below shows the S-axis at 0° and at 180°. This is the
configuration when the L-axis and the U-axis are viewed from the righthand side.
S-axis 0°
Back
S-axis 180°
Front
Front
Back
For the manipulator with seven axes, this specifies where in the S-axis
rotation center the U-axis rotation center locates when viewing the L-axis
and U-axis from the right-hand side.
When viewed from the right-hand side, the right of the S-axis rotation
center is called the front, and the left is called the back.
Back
3-92
Front
3
3.9
DX100
3.9.9
Teaching
Other Job-editing Functions
Upper Arm/Lower Arm
This specifies a type comprised of L-axis and U-axis when the L-axis and
U-axis are viewed from the right-hand side.
Right-hand side
Upper Arm
Lower Arm
3.9.10 S-axis Angle
This designation is required for the manipulators which have working
envelopes greater than ±180°.
This specifies whether the S-axis angle is less than ±180° or greater than
±180°.
S<180°
S ≥ 180°
0°
0°
360°
-180°
180°
-180° < θ S <= 180°
NOTE
-360°
180° < θ S
θ S <= -180°
θ S is the angle when the S-axis home position is 0°.
3-93
DX100
3
3.9
Teaching
Other Job-editing Functions
3.9.11
Editing Local Variables
As well as user variables, local variables can be used for the storage of
counters, calculations, and input signals. The data format is the same as
that of user variables. As shown in the following table, the letter L is
affixed to the variable number to indicate a local variable.
Table 3-7: Local Variables
Data Format
Variable No.
Byte Type
Functions
LB000 to
LB
Range of storable values is
from 0 to 255.
Can store I/O status.
Can perform logical operations (AND, OR, etc.)
Ll000 to
LI
Range of storable values is
from -32768 to 32767.
LD000 to
LD
Range of storable values is
from -2147483648 to
2147483647.
LR000 to
LR
Range of storable values is
from -3.4E+38 to 3.4E+38
Accuracy: 1.18E-38 < x ≤
3.4E+38
Character Type
LS000 to
LS
Maximum storable number of
characters is 16.
Position Robot Axes
Type
LP000 to
LP
Base Axes
LBP000 to
LBP
Station Axes
LEX000 to
LEX
Can store position data in
pulse form or in XYZ form.
XYZ type variables can be
used as target position data
for move instructions, and as
incremental values for parallel
shift instructions.
Integer Type
Double Precision
Integer Type
Real Type
Local variables differ from user variables in the following four ways:
• Used in One Job Only
With user variables it is possible to define and use one variable in
multiple jobs, but local variables are used only in the job in which
they are defined, and cannot be read from other jobs.
Accordingly, local variables do not affect other jobs, so it is possible
to define a variable number (such as LB001) separately in different
jobs, and use it in different ways in each of these jobs.
User Variable
B001
Job 1
Job 2
Job 3
User Variables
Job 1
Job 2
Job 3
Local Variable
Local Variable
Local Variable
LB001
LB001
LB001
Local Variables
• Able to Use Any Number of Variables
The number is set in the JOB HEADER window. When the number
is set, the area for the value is saved in memory.
3-94
DX100
3
3.9
Teaching
Other Job-editing Functions
• Not Able to Display the Variable Contents
To display the local variable contents, user variables are needed.
For example, to view the contents of local variable LP000, save it
temporarily as user variable P001. Then execute the instruction
SET P001 LP000, and view the POSITION VARIABLE window for
P001.
• Enabled Only During the Execution of the Defined Job
The contents of the local variables are enabled only during the execution of the defined job.
The local variable field is assured when the defined job is called
(when the job is executed by a CALL or JUMP instruction, or the job
is selected by the menu). Once the job is completed by the execution of a RET, END, or JUMP instruction, the local variable data that
was set is disabled. However, if a job which uses local variables
itself calls a separate job, then is returned by use of a RET instruction, the data that was present prior to the CALL instruction remains
in effect and can be used.
NOTE
Precautions for Variables and Units
As was the case with user variables, note that, depending
on the value of the unit being used, the value of the variable
and the value of the actual speed or time an occasion might
not match. Refer to chapter 3.9.4 "User Variables" at
page 3-77.
3-95
DX100
3
3.9
Teaching
Other Job-editing Functions
3.9.11.1
Setting the Number of Local Variables
The number of local variables used in a job is set in the JOB HEADER
window. When the number of local variables is set, memory is allocated
for those variables.
NOTE
Only when expanding the “INSTRUCTION LEVEL”, it is
possible to use local variables. Refer to “8.12 Instruction
Level Setting” of “DX100 INSTRUCTIONS” (RE-CTO-A215)
for details on setting the language level.
1. Select {JOB} under the main menu.
2. Select {JOB}.
3. Select {DISPLAY} under the menu.
4. Select {JOB HEADER}.
– The JOB HEADER window appears. Scroll the window using the
cursor.
5. Select the number of local variables to be set.
– The input buffer line appears.
3-96
DX100
3
3.9
Teaching
Other Job-editing Functions
6. Input the number of variables.
7. Press [ENTER].
– The number of local variables are set.
3-97
3
3.9
DX100
3.9.12
Teaching
Other Job-editing Functions
Search
When editing or checking, jobs and steps can be searched for. Search
can be done when the cursor is in either the address or instruction area on
the JOB CONTENT window.
1. Select {JOB} under the main menu.
2. Select {JOB}.
– The JOB CONTENT window appears.
3. Select {EDIT} under the menu.
– The pull-down menu appears.
4. Select {SEARCH}.
– The selection dialog box appears.
5. Select the search type.
Search is an operation by which the cursor is moved to a specific step or
instruction in the edit job. The desired item can be instantly searched for
without using the cursor.
3-98
DX100
3
3.9
Teaching
Other Job-editing Functions
3.9.12.1 Line Search
This function moves the cursor to the desired line number.
1. Select {EDIT], {SEARCH} and “LINE SEARCH”.
– The number can be entered.
2. Input desired line number.
3. Press [ENTER].
– The cursor is moved to the line number and the window appears.
3-99
3
3.9
DX100
3.9.12.2
Teaching
Other Job-editing Functions
Step Search
This function moves the cursor to the desired step number (move
instruction).
1. Select {EDIT], {SEARCH} and “STEP SEARCH”.
– The number can be entered.
2. Input desired step number.
3. Press [ENTER].
– The cursor is moved to the input step and the window appears.
3-100
DX100
3
3.9
Teaching
Other Job-editing Functions
3.9.12.3 Label Search
This function searches for the desired label and the instruction using that
label.
1. Select {EDIT}, {SEARCH} and “LABEL SEARCH”.
– The characters can be entered.
2. Input desired label name.
– For information on character input operation, refer to
chapter 1.2.6 "Character Input Operation" at page 1-18.
– At this time, search can be conducted by entering any one character
of the label. For example, to search for the “START” label, enter
only “S”, and the search can be done.
3. Press [ENTER].
– The cursor is moved to the desired label and the window appears.
3-101
DX100
3
3.9
Teaching
Other Job-editing Functions
4. Use the cursor to continue search.
– While searching, forward search and backward search are possible
by pressing the cursor key.
– To end search, select {EDIT}  {END SEARCH} on the menu and
press [SELECT].
3-102
DX100
3
3.9
Teaching
Other Job-editing Functions
3.9.12.4 Instruction Search
This function moves the cursor to a desired instruction.
1. Select {EDIT}, {SEARCH} and “INSTRUCTION SEARCH”.
– The INFORM command list appears.
2. Select desired instruction group.
3. Select desired instruction.
– The cursor is moved to the selected instruction and the window
appears.
3-103
DX100
3
3.9
Teaching
Other Job-editing Functions
4. Use the cursor to continue search.
– While searching, forward search and backward search are possible
by pressing the cursor key.
– To end search, select {EDIT}  {END SEARCH} on the menu and
press [SELECT], or press [CANCEL].
3-104
DX100
3
3.9
Teaching
Other Job-editing Functions
3.9.12.5 Tag Search
This function moves the cursor to the desired tag.
1. Select {EDIT}, {SEARCH} and “TAG SEARCH”.
– The instruction list dialog box appears.
2. Select desired instruction group.
3. Select desired instruction for which the tag is to be searched.
– The tag list dialog box for selected instruction appears.
3-105
DX100
3
3.9
Teaching
Other Job-editing Functions
4. Select the desired tag.
– The cursor is moved to the selected tag and the window appears.
5. Use the cursor to continue search.
– While searching, forward search and backward search are possible
by pressing the cursor key.
– To end search, select {EDIT}  {END SEARCH} on the menu and
press [SELECT], or press [CANCEL].
3-106
4
4.1
DX100
4
Playback
Preparation for Playback
Playback
4.1
4.1.1
Preparation for Playback
Selecting a Job
Playback is the act of executing a taught job. Before playback operation,
first call the job to be executed.
4.1.1.1
Calling a Job
1. Select {JOB} under the main menu.
2. Select {SELECT JOB}.
– The JOB LIST window appears.
3. Select the desired job.
4-1
DX100
4.1.1.2
4
4.1
Playback
Preparation for Playback
Registering the Master Job
If a particular job is played back frequently, it is convenient to register that
job as a master job (master registration). A job registered as the master
job can be called more easily than the method described on the preceding
page.
NOTE
Only one job can be registered as the master job. Registering a master job automatically cancels the previously registered master job.
Be sure to register a master job in the teach mode.
1. Select {JOB} under the main menu.
2. Select {MASTER JOB}.
– The MASTER JOB window appears.
3. Press [SELECT].
– The selection dialog box appears.
4-2
DX100
4
4.1
Playback
Preparation for Playback
4. Select {CALL MASTER JOB}.
– The JOB LIST window appears.
5. Select a job to be registered as a master job.
– The selected job is registered as the master job.
4-3
DX100
4
4.1
4.1.1.3
Calling the Master Job
Playback
Preparation for Playback
This operation is to call a master job. The job can be called in the JOB
CONTENT window, PLAYBACK window, JOB SELECT window, or the
MASTER JOB window.

Calling from the JOB CONTENT, PLAYBACK, JOB SELECT Window
1. Select {JOB} under the menu.
2. Select {MASTER JOB}.
– The master job is called, and the JOB CONTENT window appears.
4-4
4
4.1
DX100

Playback
Preparation for Playback
Calling from the MASTER JOB Window
1. Select {JOB} under the main menu.
2. Select {MASTER JOB}.
– The MASTER JOB window appears.
3. Press [SELECT].
– The selection dialog box appears.
4. Select {CALL MASTER JOB}.
– The master job is called, and the JOB CONTENT window (during
the teach mode), or the PLAYBACK window (during the play mode)
appears.
4-5
DX100
4.1.2
4
4.1
Playback
Preparation for Playback
The PLAYBACK Window
When the mode switch on the programming pendant is switched to
“PLAY” while displaying the JOB CONTENT window, the PLAYBACK
window appears.
A
B
D
C, E
F
A. Job Content
The cursor moves according to the playback operation. The contents
are automatically scrolled as needed.
B. Override Speed Settings
Displayed when override speed setting is performed.
C.Cycle Time
Displays the operating time of the manipulator. Each time the manipulator is started, the previous cycle time is reset, and a new measurement
begins. Either showing or hiding the cycle time display is selectable.
D. Start No.
First step in the measurement. Measurement starts when the start button lamp lights and the playback starts.
E. Motion Time
Displays the weaving time of the manipulator.
F. Playback Time
Displays the time from the beginning to the end of the measurement.
Measurement ends when the manipulator stops and the start button
lamp goes off.
4.1.2.1
Display of Cycle Time
Follow the procedure below to set whether or not to display the cycle time
on the PLAYBACK window.
1. Select {DISPLAY} under the menu.
2. Select {CYCLE TIME}.
– The cycle time is displayed.
– Repeat the same operation to hide the cycle time display.
4-6
4
4.1
DX100
4.1.2.2
Playback
Preparation for Playback
Operation Cycle
There are three types of manipulator operation cycles:
• AUTO : Repeats a job continuously.
• 1 CYCLE : Executes a job once. If there is a called job during execution, it is performed, after which the execution processing returns
to the original job.
• 1 STEP : Executes one step (instruction) at a time.
The operation cycle can be changed as follows:
1. Select {JOB} under the main menu, and then select {CYCLE}.
2. Select the operation cycle to be changed.
– The operation cycle is changed.
4-7
4
4.1
DX100

Playback
Preparation for Playback
Automatic Setting for Operation Cycle
Automatic setting of the operation cycle can be changed by the following
operation.
This can be done in the management mode only.
1. Select {SETUP} under the main menu.
2. Select {OPERATE COND}.
– The OPERATING CONDITION window appears. Use the cursor to
scroll the screen.
3. Select the desired operation.
– The selection dialog box appears.
“NONE” setting
SUPPLEMENT
The operation cycle is not changed when “NONE” is set.
For example, if the setting is “CYCLE SWITCH IN PLAY
MODE = NONE”, the operation cycle is maintained even
after switching to the play mode.
4. Select a cycle.
4-8
DX100
4
4.1
Playback
Preparation for Playback
– The operation cycle when switching modes is set.
4-9
4
4.2
DX100
4.2
4.2.1
Playback
Playback
Playback
Playback Operation
NOTE
After checking to be sure there is no one near the manipulator, start the playback operation by following the procedures
below.
Playback is the operation by which the taught job is played back. Follow
the procedures below to start the playback operation.
• Programming pendant (start button)
• Peripheral device (external start input)
Which is used to start playback is specified by the mode switch on the
programming pendant.
Mode Switch on Programming
Pendant
Job is started up by
[PLAY]
[START] button on
programming pendant
[REMOTE]
Peripheral device
For playback using the programming pendant, follow the procedures
below.
4.2.1.1
Selecting the Start Device
1. Set the mode switch on the programming pendant to “PLAY”.
– The remote mode is disabled and the play mode is enabled so the
machines are to be started up by the programming pendant.
4.2.1.2
Servo On
1. Press [Servo ON Ready].
– DX100 servo power is ON and the Servo ON lamp on the
programming pendant lights.
4.2.1.3
Start Operation
1. Press [START].
– The start button lamp lights and the manipulator begins operation.
4-10
DX100
4.2.2
4
4.2
Playback
Playback
Special Playback Operations
The following special operations can be performed during playback:
• Low speed operation
• Limited speed operation
• Dry run speed operation
• Machine lock operation
• Check mode operation
Two or more special operations can be performed at the same time. If
multiple operations are selected, the speed during playback is limited to
the speed of the slowest operation. Settings for special operations are
done in the SPECIAL PLAY window.
When the PLAYBACK window is displayed, move the cursor to the menu
area and select {UTILITY}  {SETUP SPECIAL RUN}. The SPECIAL
PLAY window appears.
4.2.2.1
Low Speed Operation
The manipulator moves at low speed during the first step after starting.
After the operation of this step, the manipulator stops regardless of the
selection of the operation cycle and then low speed operation is canceled.
Even if the manipulator is stopped its motion during the low speed
operation, the low speed status would not be canceled before it reaches
the first step.
After one step operation, pressing [START] allows the manipulator to
move at the taught speed.
1. Select “LOW SPEED START” on the SPECIAL PLAY window.
– The setting alternates between “VALID” and “INVALID”.
2. Select “COMPLETE”.
– The window returns to the PLAYBACK window.
4-11
DX100
4.2.2.2
4
4.2
Playback
Playback
Limited Speed Operations
The manipulator operates within the limited speed for the teach mode.
Usually, the limited speed is set to 250mm/s. However, operation is
performed at actual playback speeds for steps in which the set speed is
under this limit.
1. Select “SPEED LIMIT” under the SPECIAL PLAY window.
– The setting alternates between “VALID” and “INVALID”.
2. Select “COMPLETE”.
– The window returns to the PLAYBACK window.
4.2.2.3
Dry-run Speed Operations
The dry-run speed is a constant speed that is independent of the teaching
speeds. The manipulator executes all the steps at a constant speed,
which is convenient for quick check of a job consisting of slow operations.
The dry-run speed is 10% of maximum speed.
NOTE
Be careful of steps programmed at lower speeds than the
dry-run speed, because they are executed at greater
speeds than programmed.
1. Select the “DRY-RUN SPEED” under the SPECIAL PLAY window.
– The setting alternates between “VALID” and “INVALID”.
2. Select “COMPLETE”.
– The window returns to the PLAYBACK window.
Fig. 4-1: Safety Speed and Dry-run Speed
Speed
Play speed
Safety speed
Dry-run speed
Step
4-12
DX100
4.2.2.4
4
4.2
Playback
Playback
Machine Lock Operation
A job is played back without moving the manipulator to check the status of
input and output.
1. Select “MACHINE LOCK” under the SPECIAL PLAY window.
– The setting alternates between “VALID” and “INVALID”.
2. Select “COMPLETE”.
– The window returns to the PLAYBACK window.
NOTE
• The setting of “MACHINE LOCK” is maintained even after
the mode is switched: If the machine lock is set to “VALID”
in the teach mode, it is still “VALID” after switching to the
play mode.
The same applies when the mode is switched from the
play mode to the teach mode.
• Note that the machine lock becomes “INVALID” if the following operation is performed.
• Execution of “CANCEL ALL SELECT” in the SPECIAL
PLAY window.
• Turning off the main power.
4.2.2.5
Check Mode Operation
The machine runs without issuing work instructions, such as the ARCON
instruction. It is used primarily to check the path of the program.
1. Select “CHECK-RUN” under the SPECIAL PLAY window.
– The setting alternates between “VALID” and “INVALID”.
2. Select “COMPLETE”.
– The window returns to the PLAYBACK window.
4.2.2.6
Weaving Prohibit Setting during Check Mode Operation
The weaving operation is not executed in the weaving section of the job.
1. Select “WEAV PROHIBIT IN CHK-RUN” under the SPECIAL PLAY
window.
– The setting alternates between “VALID” and “INVALID”.
2. Select “COMPLETE”.
– The window returns to the PLAYBACK window.
4-13
DX100
4.2.2.7
4
4.2
Playback
Playback
Cancel All Special Operations
All special operations are disabled by the following operation.
1. Select {EDIT} from the menu.
2. Select “CANCEL ALL SELECT”.
– The message “All special functions canceled” appears.
NOTE
Special operations are also automatically cancelled if the
main power is shut OFF.
4-14
4
4.3
DX100
4.3
Playback
Stop and Restart
Stop and Restart
The manipulator stops in the following conditions:
• Hold
• Emergency stop
• Stop by alarm
• Others
4.3.1
Hold
Hold operation causes the manipulator to stop all motion.
SUPPLEMENT
4.3.1.1
[HOLD] lamp lights while it is held down. At the same time,
[START] lamp goes OFF.
Using the Programming Pendant

Hold
1. Press [HOLD] on the programming pendant.
2. The manipulator stops. The [HOLD] lamp lights while the [HOLD]
button is held down.

Release
1. Press [START] on the programming pendant.
2. The manipulator restarts its operation from the position where it was
stopped.
4.3.1.2
Using an External Input Signal (System Input)

Hold
1. Turn ON the hold signal from an external input (system input).
– The manipulator stops temporarily.
External holding
– The output signal “HOLD” turns ON.
– The programming pendant [HOLD] lamp lights.

Release
1. Turn off the hold signal from an external input (system input).
– Hold is released.
– To continue the operation, press [START] or turn ON the external
input signal (system input). The manipulator restarts its operation,
beginning from the position where it was stopped.
4-15
4
4.3
DX100
4.3.2
Playback
Stop and Restart
Emergency Stop
At an emergency stop, the servo power supply that drives the manipulator
is turned OFF and the manipulator stops immediately. An emergency stop
can be performed by using either of the following:
• Button on the Front Door of the DX100
• Programming pendant
• External input signal (system input)

Emergency Stop
1. Press the emergency stop button
.
– The servo power turns OFF and the manipulator stops immediately.
– On the front door of the DX100:
– On the programming pendant:
Using the Emergency Stop Button on the Programming Pendant
Robot stops by P.P. emergency stop
Using the External Input Signal (System Input)
Robot stops by external emergency stop

Release
1. Turn the emergency stop button
in the direction of the arrows.
TURN
– On the front door of the DX100:
TURN
– On the programming pendant:
– To turn ON the servo power supply again, press [SERVO ON
READY] and then grip the Enable switch of the programming
pendant.
SERVO
ON
READY
4-16
DX100
4.3.2.1
4
4.3
Playback
Stop and Restart
Restart After Emergency Stop
CAUTION
•
Prior to restarting after an emergency stop, confirm
the position for the next operation and make sure
there is no interference with the workpiece or fixture.
•
The application of an emergency stop during high speed
operations on continuous steps can result in the manipulator
stopping two or three steps prior to the step that is being
displayed. There is a risk of interference with the workpiece
or fixture when the manipulator is restarted under such
conditions.
4-17
4
4.3
DX100
4.3.3
Playback
Stop and Restart
Stop by Alarm
If an alarm occurs during operation, the manipulator stops immediately
and the ALARM window appears on the programming pendant indicating
that the machine was stopped by an alarm.
– If more than one alarm occurs simultaneously, all alarms can be
viewed on the window. Scroll down the viewing area of the window
when necessary.
The following operations are available in the alarm status:
window change, mode change, alarm reset, and emergency stop.
To display the ALARM window again when the window is changed during
alarm occurrence, select {SYSTEM INFO} and then {ALARM HISTORY}.

Releasing Alarms
<Minor Alarms>
1. Press [SELECT].
– Select “RESET” under the ALARM window to release the alarm
status.
– When using an external input signal (system input), turn ON the
“ALARM RESET” setting.
<Major Alarms>
1. Turn OFF the main power supply and remove the cause of the alarm.
– If a severe alarm such as hardware failure alarm occurs, the servo
power is automatically shut off and the manipulator stops. If
releasing does not work, turn OFF the main power and correct the
cause of the alarm.
4-18
4
4.3
DX100
4.3.3.1
Playback
Stop and Restart
Restart After Stop by Alarm
CAUTION
4.3.4
4.3.4.1
•
Prior to restarting the manipulator's operation after it has been
stopped by an alarm, confirm the position of the manipulator by
using FWD, etc., and make sure that there is no interference
between the manipulator and the workpiece or fixture.
•
When an alarm occurs and stops the manipulator during a highspeed operation of consecutive steps, the manipulator may stop
two or three steps before the displayed step. If the manipulator's
operation is restarted under such conditions, the manipulator may
interfere with the workpiece or fixture.
Others
Temporary Stop by Mode Change
When the play mode is switched to the teach mode during playback, the
manipulator stops immediately.
!Stopped by switching mode
To restart the operation, return to the play mode and perform a start
operation.
4.3.4.2
Temporary Stop by the PAUSE Instruction
When the PAUSE instruction is executed, the manipulator stops
operating.
!Robot stops by execution PAUSE command
To restart the operation, perform a start operation. The manipulator
restarts from the next instruction.
4-19
4
4.4
DX100
4.4
4.4.1
Playback
Modifying Play Speed
Modifying Play Speed
Speed Override
Speed modifications using the speed override have the following features:
• Speed can be modified during playback.
The job can be played back at various speeds until the play speed is
properly adjusted.
• Speed can be increased or decreased by a ratio of the current play
speed.
The ratio settings range from 10% to 150% in increments of 1%.
Therefore, it is convenient when, for example, all play speed settings
are to be increased by 150% at the same time.
The operation flow is shown below.
Start speed override
Call job to perform speed override
Set speed override
(Speed data modify :OFF,specify the ratio)
Start playback
Changes experimentally,
without modifying registered
speed
Adjust the ratio during playback if needed
(1cycle completed)
YES
Reset and playback?
NO
NO
Modify?
YES
Call job to perform speed override
Set speed override
(Speed data modify: ON,specify the ratio)
Start playback
Modify play speed simultaneously
(1cycle completed)
End
4-20
Modifies play speed
DX100
4.4.1.1
4
4.4
Playback
Modifying Play Speed
Setting Speed Overrides
1. Select {UTILITY} under the menu in the PLAYBACK window.
2. Select {SPEED OVERRIDE}.
– The PLAYBACK window shows the speed override status.
3. Select “ON” or “OFF”.
– Each time [SELECT] is pressed, “ON” and “OFF” alternate.
– Select “ON” to modify the registered play speed during playback.
– When “OFF” is selected, the registered play speed is not modified.
To change the play speed temporarily (for example, to experiment
with various speeds), select “OFF”.
4. Line up the cursor with the override ratio and move the cursor up and
down to change the ratio.
If you want to input the ratio number directly, move the cursor to the
override ratio and press [SELECT].
– The number input line appears. Input the override ratio using the
Numeric keys.
4-21
DX100
4
4.4
4.4.1.2
Modifying Play Speed
Playback
Modifying Play Speed
1. Set speed override.
2. Playback the manipulator.
– The play speed is increased or decreased in the set ratio.
– When setting “MODIFY” to “ON”, the step’s play speed is modified
when each step is reached.
– When one cycle is completed by the END instruction, the speed
override setting is cancelled.
• Assuming that the manipulator moves from step 1 to step
2, the play speed of step 2 is not modified if the speed
override is cancelled before reaching step 2.
NOTE
• The play speed after the modification by the speed override is limited by the maximum and the minimum speed of
manipulator.
• When the safety speed operation is commanded with the
setting of “MODIFY: ON”, the manipulator operates at the
safety speed. However, the play speed in memory is
modified as set by the speed override.
• Play speed set by the SPEED instruction is not modified.
4.4.1.3
Cancelling Speed Override Settings
1. Select {UTILITY} under the menu in the PLAYBACK window.
2. Select {SPEED OVERRIDE}.
– The setting of the speed override ratio is cancelled.
– If cancelled, the speed ratio setting is not displayed on the
PLAYBACK window.
The speed override settings are automatically cancelled in
the following cases:
• When dry-run speed operation is set.
NOTE
• When the mode is changed to any mode other than the
play mode.
• When an alarm or error occurs.
• When one cycle operation is completed with the END
instruction.
• When the power supply is turned OFF.
4-22
4
4.5
DX100
4.5
4.5.1
Playback
Playback with Reserved Start
Playback with Reserved Start
Preparation for Reserved Start
In the reserved start function, jobs registered at different stations are
played back in the reserved order using the start buttons on the stations.
Station 3
(Job 3 registered)
Station 1
(Job 1 registered)
Station 2
(Job 2 registered)
For example, in the case where three stations handle three different
workpieces, as shown in the illustration above, the jobs would be
registered as follows:
• Job 1 is registered to process workpiece 1 at Station 1
• Job 2 is registered to process workpiece 2 at Station 2
• Job 3 is registered to process workpiece 3 at Station 3
To play back the jobs, prepare workpiece 1 and press the start button on
Station 1. The manipulator executes Job 1. Prepare workpieces 2 and 3
while Job 1 is being executed, and press the start buttons on Stations 2
and 3. Even if Job 1 is being executed at that time, jobs on different
stations are reserved in the order that the start buttons have been
pressed, and will be executed in that order.
During playback, the status of the reservation can be checked on the start
reservation window.
4-23
DX100
4.5.1.1
4
4.5
Playback
Playback with Reserved Start
Enabling Reserved Start
The start button on the station is operative when the reserved start
function is enabled, and the following start operations are disabled.
• [START] on the programming pendant
• Start operation from external input signal (system input)
NOTE
The OPERATING CONDITION window is shown only when
the security mode is management mode.
1. Select {SETUP} under the main menu.
2. Select {OPERATE COND}.
– The OPERATING CONDITION window appears.
– The screen is scrolled up/down by the cursor key when it locates at
the top/bottom of the items.
3. Select “RESERVED START”.
– Each time [SELECT] is pressed, “PERMIT” and “PROHIBIT”
alternate. Select “PERMIT”.
4-24
DX100
4
4.5
Playback
Playback with Reserved Start
NOTE
When the reserved start is enabled, the external start and
the programming pendant start are prohibited even if setting
is “PERMIT”.
Regardless of the operation cycle selected, it is automatically set to 1 CYCLE.
4-25
DX100
4.5.1.2
4
4.5
Playback
Playback with Reserved Start
Registering Reserved Start I/O Signal
Register the start I/O signal as a preparation to perform the start operation
from the station.
NOTE
This operation can be done only when the operation mode
is the teach mode and the security mode is the management mode, and only when the setting of “RESERVED
START JOB CHANGE” is “PERMIT” in the OPERATING
CONDITION window.
1. Select {SETUP} under the main menu.
2. Select {RES. START(CNCT)}.
– The RESERVED START (CNCT) window appears.
3. Select “START IN” or “START OUT” for each station.
– The number can now be entered.
4. Input signal number and press [ENTER].
4-26
DX100
4
4.5
Playback
Playback with Reserved Start
– The input/output signal number is registered.
4-27
DX100
4.5.1.3
4
4.5
Playback
Playback with Reserved Start
Registering Jobs to Stations
Register the starting job of each station.
NOTE
This operation can be done only when the operation mode
is the teach mode and the setting of “RESERVED START
JOB CHANGE” is “PERMIT” in the OPERATING CONDITION window.
1. Select {JOB} under the main menu.
2. Select {RES. START(JOB)}.
– The RESERVED START (JOB) window appears.
–  indicates that the input/output number is registered.
–  indicates that the input/output number is not registered.
3. Select the job name for each station.
– The selection dialog box appears.
4. Select “SETTING START JOB”.
– The JOB LIST window appears.
5. Select a job.
4-28
DX100
4
4.5
Playback
Playback with Reserved Start
– The starting job is registered.
4-29
DX100
4.5.1.4
4
4.5
Playback
Playback with Reserved Start
Deleting Registered Jobs from Stations
Delete the registered job of each station.
NOTE
This operation can be done only when the operation mode
is the teach mode and the setting of “RESERVED START
JOB CHANGE” is “PERMIT” in the operation condition display.
1. Select {JOB} under the main menu.
2. Select {RES. START(JOB)}.
– The RESERVED START (JOB) window appears.
3. Select the job name of the station to be deleted.
– The selection dialog box appears.
4. Select “CANCEL START JOB”.
– The registered job is deleted.
4-30
4
4.5
DX100
4.5.2
4.5.2.1
Playback
Playback with Reserved Start
Playback from Reserved Start
Start Operation
1. Set the mode switch to “PLAY”.
2. Press start button on the station.
– The job registered for the station starts up and the manipulator
performs one cycle operation.
• While the job is being executed, the start button lamp on
the station lamps.
• If the workpiece must be prepared at the station, prepare it
before pressing the start button.
NOTE
• During the execution of a job for one station, if the start
button of another station is pressed, the job of the latter
station is reserved and prepared to start. Jobs are
reserved and executed in the order that the start buttons
have been pressed.
• When a job is reserved, the start button lamp on the station blinks.
• No station job is reserved when it is being executed even if
its start button is pressed.
• To suspend a job being executed, perform the Hold operation.
SUPPLEMENT
Reservations are cancelled when the start button is pressed
again during the job reservation operation.
4-31
DX100
4.5.2.2
4
4.5
Playback
Playback with Reserved Start
Checking Job Reservation Status
The job reservation status during playback can be checked.
1. Select {JOB} under the main menu.
2. Select {RES. STATUS}.
– The RESERVATION STATUS window appears.
A
B
A. STATUS
Reservation status is displayed.
STARTING: Indicates the station currently working.
STOP: Indicates any station where work has been temporarily stopped
by a hold operation.
RESERVE1,RESERVE2,...: Indicates the order in which jobs have
been reserved for start.
B.START IN
Input signal status is displayed.
“”: Input signal ON
“”: Input signal OFF
4-32
DX100
4.5.2.3
4
4.5
Playback
Playback with Reserved Start
Resetting Job Reservation
NOTE
If “STARTING” is displayed, the job cannot be reset.
1. Select {JOB} on the RESERVATION STATUS window.
2. Select {RESET RESERVATION} or {RESET ALL}.
– When {RESET RESERVATION} is selected, job reservation
stated to “RESERVE” is reset.
– When {RESET ALL} is selected, job reservation stated to “STOP”
and “RESERVE” is reset.
– The confirmation dialog box appears.
3. Select “YES”.
All job reservations are reset automatically in the following
conditions:
NOTE
• When the reserved start sets to “PROHIBIT”. (When
“RESERVED START” is set to “PROHIBIT” on the OPERATING CONDITION window.)
• When another job is called or an edit operation is performed.
4-33
4
4.5
DX100
4.5.3
Playback
Playback with Reserved Start
Hold Operation
Hold operation causes the manipulator to stop all motion. It can be
performed by the following buttons or signal.
• [HOLD] on the programming pendant
• External Input Signal (system input)
• Hold button for the station axis
SUPPLEMENT
4.5.3.1
[HOLD] lamp lights while it is held down. At the same time,
[START] lamp goes OFF.
[HOLD] on the Programming Pendant

Hold
1. Press [HOLD] on the programming pendant.
– The manipulator stops temporarily.
– The [HOLD] lamp lights while the [HOLD] button is held down.

Release
1. Press the start button on the suspended station.
– The manipulator restarts its operation from the position where it was
stopped.
4.5.3.2
Hold by External Input Signal (System Input)

Hold
1. Input ON signal to the external input (system input) specified for the
hold operation.
– The manipulator stops temporarily.
External holding
– The hold lamp for the external output signal lights.
– The [HOLD] lamp on the programming pendant lights and the
[START] lamp turns OFF.

Release
1. Input OFF signal to the external input (system input) specified for the
hold operation.
– Hold is released.
2. To continue the operation, press the start button on the suspended
station.
– The manipulator restarts its operation from the position where it was
stopped.
4-34
4
4.5
DX100
4.5.3.3
Playback
Playback with Reserved Start
Hold at the Station

Hold
1. Press the hold button on the station.
– The manipulator stops temporarily.
External holding

Release
1. Press the hold button on the suspended station.
– Hold is released.
– Press the start button on the station, then the manipulator restarts its
operation from the position where it was stopped.
SUPPLEMENT
Pressing the start button on a station that is not in the Hold
status does not start manipulator operation. The job registered for the station is reserved or the reservation, if it has
been made, is canceled.
4-35
4
4.6
DX100
4.6
Playback
Displaying Job Stack
Displaying Job Stack
During the execution of the series of jobs that combined with CALL or
JUMP instructions, the job stack can be displayed to check where the
current job is and how many jobs are left.
Stack Level 3
Stack Level 2
Stack Level 1
Stack Level 4
Job call
Job A
Job call
Job B
Job call
Job C
Return
Return
Job D
Return
SUPPLEMENT
Job calls can be used for up to 12 stack levels.
4-36
Job call
DX100
4
4.6
Playback
Displaying Job Stack
1. Select {DISPLAY} under the menu on the PLAYBACK window.
– The pull-down menu appears.
2. Select {JOB STACK}.
– The job stack status dialog box appears.
– To close the job stack status dialog box, select {DISPLAY} and then
{JOB STACK} under the menu again.
– For above example, the playback of Job C is being executed and
the Job C is called from Job B. Also, the Job B is called from Job A.
4-37
5
Editing Jobs
DX100
5
Editing Jobs
This section explains how to manage the jobs without moving the
manipulator. Copying, deleting, and modifying of the jobs can be done
only in the teach mode. Other operations can be done in any mode.
NOTE
Edit operations are restricted when the edit lock is applied.
Editing Move Instructions
See chapter 3 "Teaching" at page 3-1 for basic information
on editing move instructions.
• It is not possible to add, delete, or modify move instructions which have position data. See chapter 3.4 "Modifying
Steps" at page 3-29 for details.
• The following MOV instruction edit operations are
explained in this section:
NOTE
For move instructions:
• Insertion, deletion, or modification of additional items
• Modification of interpolation type or play speed for
move instructions
• Setting, modification, or deletion of UNTIL statements
(interruption conditions based on input signals)
• Setting and deletion of NWAIT instructions
For move instructions using position variables:
• Insertion and deletion of move instruction.
SUPPLEMENT
Refer to chapter 1.2.6 "Character Input Operation" at
page 1-18 for the character input operation.
5-1
5
5.1
DX100
5.1
Editing Jobs
Copying Jobs
Copying Jobs
This operation is used to copy registered jobs and use them to create new
jobs. It can be done using either the JOB CONTENT window or the JOB
LIST window.
5.1.0.1
Copying Jobs on the JOB CONTENT Window
On the JOB CONTENT window, the current edit job becomes the copy
source job.
1. Select {JOB} under the main menu.
2. Select {JOB}.
– The JOB CONTENT window appears.
3. Select {JOB}  {COPY JOB} under the pull-down menu.
4. Input the job name.
– Input the new job name.
– The name of the copy source job is displayed on the input area. It is
possible to partially change this name to enter a new name.
5-2
DX100
5
5.1
Editing Jobs
Copying Jobs
SUPPLEMENT
See chapter 1.2.6 "Character Input Operation" at page 118 for information on letter input operations.
5. Press [ENTER].
– The confirmation dialog box appears.
– If “YES” is selected, the job is copied and the new job appears.
– If “NO” is selected, the job copy is not executed, and the process is
cancelled.
5-3
DX100
5
5.1
Editing Jobs
Copying Jobs
5.1.0.2
Copying Jobs on the JOB LIST Window
On the JOB LIST window, select the copy source job from the registered
jobs and specify the copy destination directory.
1. Select {JOB}  {SELECT JOB} under the main menu.
– The JOB LIST window appears.
2. Move the cursor to the copy source job.
3. Select {JOB}  {COPY JOB} under the pull-down menu.
5-4
DX100
5
5.1
Editing Jobs
Copying Jobs
4. Input the job name.
– Input the new job name.
– The name of the copy source job is displayed on the input area. It is
possible to partially change this name to enter a new name.
SUPPLEMENT
See chapter 1.2.6 "Character Input Operation" at page 118 for information on letter input operations.
5. Press [ENTER].
– The confirmation dialog box appears.
– If “YES” is selected, the job is copied and the new job appears.
– If “NO” is selected, the job copy is not executed, and the process is
cancelled.
5-5
5
5.2
DX100
5.2
Editing Jobs
Deleting Jobs
Deleting Jobs
This operation is used to delete jobs that are registered on the DX100. It
can be performed in either the JOB CONTENT window or the JOB LIST
window.
5.2.0.1
Deleting Jobs on the JOB CONTENT Window
On the JOB CONTENT window, the current edit job is deleted.
1. Select {JOB} under the main menu.
2. Select {JOB}.
– The JOB CONTENT window appears.
3. Select {JOB}  {DELETE JOB} under the pull-down menu.
4. Press “YES”.
– The confirmation dialog box appears.
– When “YES” is selected, the edit job is deleted. When deletion is
completed, the JOB LIST window appears.
– When “NO” is selected, the job deletion is cancelled.
5-6
DX100
5
5.2
Editing Jobs
Deleting Jobs
5.2.0.2
Deleting Jobs on the JOB LIST Window
On the JOB LIST window, select the job to be deleted from the list of the
registered jobs.
1. Select {JOB}  {SELECT JOB} under the main menu.
– The JOB LIST window appears.
2. Move the cursor to the job to be deleted.
3. Select {JOB}  {DELETE JOB} under the pull-down menu.
4. Press “YES”.
– The confirmation dialog box appears.
– When “YES” is selected, the selected job is deleted. When deletion
is completed, the JOB LIST window appears.
– If “NO” or [CANCEL] is selected, the job deletion is cancelled and
the JOB LIST window appears.
SUPPLEMENT
To select all the registered jobs at a time, select {EDIT} from
the menu and then select “SELECT ALL”.
5-7
5
5.3
DX100
5.3
Editing Jobs
Modifying Job Names
Modifying Job Names
This operation is used to modify the name of a job that is registered. The
operation can be performed in either the JOB CONTENT window or the
JOB LIST window.
5.3.0.1
Modifying Job Names on the JOB CONTENT Window
1. Select {JOB} under the main menu.
2. Select {JOB}.
– The JOB CONTENT window appears.
3. Select {JOB}  {RENAME JOB} under the pull-down menu.
4. Input the job name.
– Input the new job name.
– The name of the source job is displayed on the input area. It is
possible to partially change this name to enter a new name.
SUPPLEMENT
See chapter 1.2.6 "Character Input Operation" at page 118 for information on letter input operations.
5-8
DX100
5
5.3
Editing Jobs
Modifying Job Names
5. Press [ENTER].
– The confirmation dialog box appears.
– When “YES” is selected, the job name is changed and a new job
name is displayed.
– When “NO” is selected, the job name is not changed, and the
process is cancelled.
5-9
DX100
5.3.0.2
5
5.3
Editing Jobs
Modifying Job Names
Modifying Job Names on the JOB LIST Window
On the JOB LIST window, select the job whose name is to be modified
from the list of the registered jobs.
1. Select {JOB}  {SELECT JOB} under the main menu.
– The JOB LIST window appears.
2. Move the cursor to the name to be changed.
3. Select {JOB}  {RENAME JOB} under the pull-down menu.
4. Input the job name.
– Input the new job name.
– The name of the source job is displayed on the input area. It is
possible to partially change this name to enter a new name.
SUPPLEMENT
See chapter 1.2.6 "Character Input Operation" at page 118 for information on letter input operations.
5. Press [ENTER].
– The confirmation dialog box appears.
– When “YES” is selected, the job name is changed and a new job
name is displayed.
5-10
DX100
5
5.3
Editing Jobs
Modifying Job Names
– When “NO” is selected, the job name is not changed, and the
process is cancelled.
5-11
5
5.4
DX100
5.4
Editing Jobs
Editing Comments
Editing Comments
Comments of up to 32 characters can be added to each job to identify
each job more specifically. Comments are displayed and edited on the
JOB HEADER window.
1. Select {JOB} under the main menu.
2. Select {JOB}.
3. Select {DISPLAY} under the pull-down menu.
4. Select {JOB HEADER}.
– The JOB HEADER window appears.
5. Select “COMMENT”.
– The window for character input appears.
6. Input comments.
– Input comments.
– For the jobs that are already registered, comments are displayed on
the input area. It is possible to partially change comments to enter
new comments.
SUPPLEMENT
See chapter 1.2.6 "Character Input Operation" at page 118 for information on letter input operations.
5-12
DX100
5
5.4
Editing Jobs
Editing Comments
7. Press [ENTER].
– The comment on the input area is registered and is displayed on the
“COMMENT” area in the JOB HEADER window.
5-13
5
5.5
DX100
5.5
Editing Jobs
Setting Edit Lock on Individual Job Units
Setting Edit Lock on Individual Job Units
In order to prevent inadvertent changes in the registered jobs or data, it is
possible to set the edit lock to each job. When the edit lock is ON, the job
cannot be edited or deleted.
The edit lock can be set and cancelled on the JOB HEADER window.
SUPPLEMENT
Setting of the edit lock can be changed only when the security mode is management mode.
1. Select {JOB} under the main menu.
2. Select {JOB}.
3. Select {DISPLAY} under the pull-down menu.
4. Select {JOB HEADER}.
– The JOB HEADER window appears.
5. Select “EDIT LOCK” and set the edit prohibit.
– Each time [SELECT] is pressed, the setting alternates between
“ON” (edit disabled) and “OFF” (edit enabled).
5-14
5
5.6
DX100
5.6
Editing Jobs
Enabling the Modification of Position Data Only
Enabling the Modification of Position Data Only
Even in the edit-locked job, the position data can be modified.
1. Select {SETUP} under the main menu.
2. Select {TEACHING CONDITION SETTING}.
– The TEACHING CONDITION SETTING window appears.
SUPPLEMENT
TEACHING CONDITION SETTING window is shown only
when the security mode is edit mode or management mode.
3. Select “STEP ONLY CHANGING” and press [SELECT].
– Each time [SELECT] is pressed, the setting alternates between
“PROHIBIT” and “PERMIT”.
5-15
6
6.1
DX100
6
Convenient Functions
One-touch Operation “Direct Open”
Convenient Functions
6.1
One-touch Operation “Direct Open”
The direct open function immediately shows the JOB CONTENT window
or condition file contents of a job called by the CALL instruction. Move the
cursor to the desired job name or condition file name and simply press the
DIRECT
OPEN
direct open key
to display the contents of the file. This function can
be used for the following window:
• JOB CONTENT window for a job name directly specified by a CALL
instruction
• CONDITION FILE window for a file name directly specified by a work
instruction
• COMMAND POS window for a move instruction
• I/O window with an I/O instruction (when I/O numbers are specified)
<Example> Example Using Direct Open
In the 8th line
DIRECT
OPEN
COMMAND POS window
In the 9th line
DIRECT
OPEN
In the 10th line
DIRECT
OPEN
USER OUTPUT window
In the 11th line
DIRECT
OPEN
WEAVING CONDITION window
JOB CONTENT window for "JOB-C"
6-1
DX100
6
6.1
Convenient Functions
One-touch Operation “Direct Open”
1. In the JOB CONTENT window, move the cursor to the job name or the
condition file for which the window is to be displayed.
2. Press the direct open key
DIRECT
OPEN
.
– This key lamp lights and the JOB CONTENT window or the
condition file window appears.
DIRECT
OPEN
– When the direct open key
is pressed once again, the key lamp
turns OFF, and the window returns to the former JOB CONTENT
window.
• The direct open function cannot be used again while a
directly opened window is shown.
NOTE
• If another window is selected while the direct open function is effective, the function is automatically cancelled and
the lamp on the direct open key goes out.
• Once another JOB CONTENT window is opened by the
direct open function, the former job cannot be continuously operated. (Stopped until the opened JOB CONTENT
window is closed.)
6-2
6
6.2
DX100
6.2
6.2.1
Convenient Functions
Job Edit Function During Playback
Job Edit Function During Playback
Function
Jobs can be edited during playback, including during the play mode.
6.2.2
6.2.2.1
<Editable>
user job
<Not Editable>
macro job and system job
Job Edit During Playback
Basic Operation
The job edit operation during playback is described below.
1. During playback, select the main menu {JOB}, then select the
submenu {SELECT JOB}.
– JOB LIST display appears.
2. Select {EDITING} under the pull-down menu {JOB}.
6-3
DX100
6
6.2
Convenient Functions
Job Edit Function During Playback
3. Select the job to be edited from JOB LIST.
– The selected job will be registered in the display of the submenu
“PLAY EDIT JOB LIST”.
4. Edit the selected job.
– Edit the job selected in the above step in the same manner as the
teach mode.
– Regarding restrictions on editing, refer to chapter 6.2.2.2
at page 6-6.
6-4
"Editing"
DX100
6
6.2
Convenient Functions
Job Edit Function During Playback
5. Select {WRITING} under the pull-down menu {JOB} to reflect the
edited data.
– If the job to be written to is listed in “JOB LIST”, a confirmation dialog
“Overwrite?” appears. Select “YES” to reflect the edited data. Refer
to the “SUPPLEMENT” on the next page.
– If the job with the same name is not listed in “JOB LIST”, the job to
be written to will be added to “JOB LIST”. Refer to the
“SUPPLEMENT” on the next page.
6-5
6
6.2
DX100
Convenient Functions
Job Edit Function During Playback
If data is reflected during playback, the message “Requesting playback edit JOB writing” appears, and the status
becomes a write request. To write the job, execute the
instruction “LATESTJOB” in the write request status or end
playback. If data is reflected in the play mode but not during
playback, the job will be written immediately.
SUPPLEMENT
However, if the job to be written to is being executed (including jobs in the call stack),
“Error 5240: Cannot write in the JOB in execution.”
appears, and the edited data will not be reflected.
If a job in the call stack is written to in the play mode but not
during playback,
“Error 5241: Cannot write in the JOB in JOB STACK.”
appears, and the edited data will not be reflected.
If data is reflected during teaching, the job will be written
immediately.
6.2.2.2
Editing
The data of the selected job (see the step 4 of chapter 6.2.2.1 "Basic
Operation" at page 6-3) can be edited in the same manner as the normal
teach mode.
However, the functions that affect the manipulator motion are restricted as
follows:
• Position teaching cannot be edited.
• The pull-down menu during editing is restricted as shown in fig. "6-1Pull-down Menu (EDIT) * Cursor Is on Line No." to "fig. 6-4 Pulldown Menu (UTILITY)" at page 6-7.
Fig. 6-1: Pull-down Menu (EDIT) * Cursor Is on Line No.
6-6
DX100
6
6.2
Convenient Functions
Job Edit Function During Playback
Fig. 6-2: Pull-down Menu (EDIT) * Cursor Is on Instruction
Fig. 6-3: Pull-down Menu (DISPLAY)
Fig. 6-4: Pull-down Menu (UTILITY)
In addition to the job edit operation described above, {CREATE NEW
JOB}, {RENAME JOB}, {COPY JOB}, and {DELETE JOB} under the pulldown menu {JOB} are also available.
All of the above operations are performed for the jobs listed in “PLAY EDIT
JOB LIST”.
6-7
6
6.2
DX100
Convenient Functions
Job Edit Function During Playback
To reflect the edited data in the job listed in JOB LIST, {WRITING} must be
done.
Regarding {DELETE JOB}, only the jobs listed in “PLAY EDIT JOB LIST”
can be deleted. The jobs in “JOB LIST” will not be deleted.
SUPPLEMENT
6.2.2.3
The above {WRITING}, {DELETE JOB}, {RENAME JOB},
and {COPY JOB} can be done in the same manner on the
“PLAY EDIT JOB LIST” display.
Editing Multiple Jobs
The procedure to delete or write multiple jobs at once on the PLAY EDIT
JOB LIST display is described below.

Deleting Multiple Jobs
1. Select the main menu {JOB}, then select the submenu {PLAY EDIT
JOB LIST}.
2. Select the job to be deleted by [SHIFT] + [SELECT].
– “●“ appears on the left of the selected job.
6-8
6
6.2
DX100
Convenient Functions
Job Edit Function During Playback
3. Select {DELETE JOB} under the pull-down menu {JOB}.
– A confirmation dialog box appears for each selected job. Select
“YES” to delete the job from the PLAY EDIT JOB LIST display.

Writing to Multiple Jobs
1. Select the main menu {JOB}, then select the submenu {PLAY EDIT
JOB LIST}.
2. Select the job to be written to by [SHIFT] + [SELECT].
– “●“ appears on the left of the selected job.
6-9
DX100
6
6.2
Convenient Functions
Job Edit Function During Playback
3. Select {WRITING} under the pull-down menu {JOB}.
– If the job to be written to is listed in JOB LIST, a confirmation dialog
“Overwrite?” appears. Select “YES” to reflect the edited data. If
“NO” is selected, the edited data will not be reflected. To cancel
writing, press [CANCEL] while the confirmation dialog appears.
If the job with the same name is not listed in “JOB LIST”, the job to
be written to will be added to “JOB LIST”. Refer to the
“SUPPLEMENT” below.
If data is reflected during playback, the message “Requesting playback edit JOB writing” appears, and the status
becomes a write request. To write the job, execute the
instruction “LATESTJOB” in the write request status or end
playback. If data is reflected in the play mode but not during
playback, the job will be written immediately.
SUPPLEMENT
However, if the job to be written to is being executed (including jobs in the call stack),
“Error 5240: Cannot write in the JOB in execution.”
appears, and the edited data will not be reflected.
If a job in the call stack is written to in the play mode but not
during playback,
“Error 5241: Cannot write in the JOB in JOB STACK.”
appears, and the edited data will not be reflected.
If data is reflected during teaching, the job will be written
immediately.
6-10
6
6.2
DX100
6.2.2.4
Convenient Functions
Job Edit Function During Playback
Canceling Write Request
The procedure to cancel a write request is described below.

Canceling Write Request
1. Select the main menu {JOB}, then select the submenu {PLAY EDIT
JOB LIST},
or
select the main menu {JOB}, then select the submenu {JOB EDIT
(PLAY)}.
2. Select {WRITING CANCEL} under the pull-down menu {JOB}.
6-11
DX100
6
6.2
Convenient Functions
Job Edit Function During Playback
CAUTION
•
When the mode switch is changed to the teach mode during job editing
Even if the mode switch is changed to the teach mode without reflecting
or canceling the edited data, the changed data will be saved. In this
case, select the main menu {JOB}, then select the submenu {SELECT
JOB} or {PLAY EDIT JOB LIST} to edit data in the same manner as in
the play mode. However, position teaching cannot be done.
SUPPLEMENT
•
Regarding the job edited in the play mode, even after
the mode is changed to the teach mode, the edited data
will not be reflected if {WRITING} is not done.
Writing a job
{WRITING} operates differently depending on the status of the robot.
Select {JOB}, then select {WRITING} to reflect the edited data in the
job. The data is reflected as described below depending on whether
the job is being executed or not.
1. When the job is NOT being executed: The data is reflected immediately.
2. When the job is being executed: The data is reflected when the
instruction “LATESTJOB” is executed or when the job execution is
completed.
“Requesting playback edit JOB writing” appears while waiting for reflect
operation (during a write request).
• The executing job cannot be written to even by the
instruction “LATESTJOB”.
SUPPLEMENT
•
• If a power failure occurs during a write request, the
write request will be canceled upon restarting, and the
job will not be reflected.
During a file transfer
{WRITING} cannot be done during file transfer (i.e. external memory
operation or data transmission).
In addition, a file cannot be transferred during a write request.
•
During a write request
Editing is inhibited during a write request (while “Requesting playback
edit JOB writing” appears).
To edit data, wait for the writing to be completed or cancel the write
request.
6-12
6
6.3
DX100
6.3
6.3.1
Convenient Functions
Parallel Shift Function
Parallel Shift Function
Function Overview
Parallel shift refers to the shifting of an object from a fixed position in such
a way that all points within the object move an equal distance. In the
model for parallel shift shown in the following, the shift value can be
defined as the distance L (three-dimensional coordinate displacement).
The parallel shift function is relevant to the actual operation of the
manipulator because it can be used to reduce the amount of work
involved in teaching by shifting a taught path (or position).
L
In the example in the figure below, the taught position A is shifted in
increments of the distance L (this is actually a three-dimensional XYZ
displacement that can be recognized by the robot) in order to enable the
operation that was taught at position A to also be performed at positions B
through G.
B
A
L
Teaching position
6-13
C
D
E
F
G
6
6.3
DX100
6.3.1.1
Convenient Functions
Parallel Shift Function
Parallel Shift of Step
The block from the SFTON to the SFTOF instructions is subject to the shift
operation.
Line (Step)
Instruction
0000
NOP
0001(001)
MOVJ VJ=50.00
0002(002)
MOVL V=138
0003
SFTON PUF# (1)
0004(003)
MOVL V=138
0005(004)
MOVL V=138
0006(005)
MOVL V=138
0007
SFTOF
0008(006)
MOVL V=138
1
6.3.1.2
2
Shifted block
3
4
5
6
Parallel Shift of Job
When shifting an entire series of operations, the range to be shifted by the
shift instruction can be set using the method indicated above, but the
method shown in the following, in which just the part to be shifted is made
into a separate job, can also be used.
SFTON P 
Job to perform the shifting
CALL JOB: 
SFTOF
6-14
DX100
6
6.3
6.3.2
Setting the Shift Value
6.3.2.1
Coordinate Systems
Convenient Functions
Parallel Shift Function
The shift value for parallel shift is X, Y, and Z increment in each
coordinates. There are four coordinates: base coordinates, robot
coordinates, tool coordinates, and user coordinates. In systems with no
servo track, the base coordinates and robot coordinates are the same.
Tool coordinates
Robot coordinates
User coordinates
Base coordinates
User
coordinates
6.3.2.2
Setting the Shift Value
When setting the shift value for the position variables, use the current
position (coordinates) of the manipulator in the window.
DATA
EDIT
DISPLAY
CURRENT POSITION
COORDINATE USER#01
5.360 mm
R1:X
66.080 mm
Y
316.940 mm
Z
UTILITY
DATA
EDIT
DISPLAY
CURRENT POSITION
COORDINATE USER#01
R1:X
105.360 mm
Y
66.080 mm
Z
416.940 mm
TOOL:00
Rx
-179.91 deg.
Ry
-2.17 deg.
Rz
-102.89 deg.
Re
-53.6863 deg.
<ROBOT TYPE>
S>=180
FRONT UP
R>=180
UP
NO FLIP
T<180
UTILITY
TOOL:00
Rx
-179.91 deg.
Ry
-2.17 deg.
Rz
-102.89 deg.
Re
-53.6863 deg.
<ROBOT TYPE>
S>=180
FRONT UP
R>=180
UP
NO FLIP
T<180
Position to be shifted
(Move the manipulator using the
programming pendant.)
Differences are assumed to be shift amounts.
Teaching position
DATA
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
POSITION VARIABLE
#P000
R1:X
Y
Z
Rx
Ry
Rz
Re
Main Menu
ROBOT
-100.000
0.000
-100.000
0.0000
0.0000
0.0000
0.0000
NAME
TOOL: 00
<TYPE>
FRONT
UP
FLIP
S>=180
R>=180
T<180
Simple Menu
The shift value is the X, Y, and Z difference between the shift position and
teaching position and the difference in angular displacement RX, RY, And
RZ (normally set at “0”). If shifting is executed at equal pitch intervals, for
example for palletizing, find the difference between the teaching position
6-15
DX100
6
6.3
Convenient Functions
Parallel Shift Function
and the final shift position, then divide by the number of pitch intervals
(number of divisions) to calculate the shift value per pitch.
L1
L2
L2=
L1
Number of pitches
Final shift position
Teaching position
The posture of the wrist is defined by the angular displacement of the
coordinates of the wrist axes. Consequently, if the shift value is specified
with X, Y, and Z only (RX, RY, RZ=0), the wrist is shifted while maintaining
the same posture as at the teaching point. Since shifting is normally
performed without changing the posture, there is no need to specify an
angular displacement for the wrist. The motion when a parallel shift is
performed is shown in the following:
Shift without changing the wrist posture
(RX,RY,RZ=0)
Teaching posture
Shift with wrist posture change
(RX,RY,RZ 0)
Shift value
The shift value is calculated on the position data window for the
coordinates in which the shift is performed. Since this is normally
performed in the user coordinates, the position data window for the user
coordinates is used.
6-16
DX100
6.3.3
6
6.3
Convenient Functions
Parallel Shift Function
Registering Shift Instructions
To register the instruction, move the cursor to the address area in the JOB
CONTENT window during teach mode as follows:
1. Select {JOB} under the main menu.
2. Select {JOB}.
– The JOB CONTENT window appears.
Address area
Instruction area
3. Move the cursor to the address area.
6-17
6
6.3
DX100
6.3.3.1
Convenient Functions
Parallel Shift Function
SFTON Instruction
This is the instruction that starts a parallel shift.
1. Move the cursor to the line immediately before where the SFTON
instruction is to be registered.
Line immediately
before where
SFTON instruction
is to be registered.
0001
0002
0003
MOVJ VJ=50.00
MOVL V=138
MOVL V=138
2. Press [INFORM LIST].
– The instruction list dialog box appears.
IN/OUT
CONTROL
DEVICE
MOTION
ARITH
SFTON
SHIFT
SFTOF
OTHER
MSHIFT
SAME
PRIOR
3. Select {SHIFT}.
4. Select the SFTON instruction.
– The SFTON instruction is displayed in the input buffer line.
5. Modify the additional items or number values as required.
– <When Nothing is to be Changed>
Proceed to Step 6.
– <When Editing Additional Items>
• Adding or modifying additional items
To change the position variable number, move the cursor to the position variable number and press [SHIFT] + the cursor key to increase
or decrease the value.
SFTON P000
To directly input the value using the Numeric keys, press [SELECT]
to display the input buffer line.
P=
SFTON
After the number is input, press [ENTER] to modify the number
value in the input buffer line.
• Adding the coordinate system in which the shift is performed
Move the cursor to the instruction in the input buffer line and press
[SELECT]. The DETAIL EDIT window appears.
SFTON P001
6-18
DX100
6
6.3
Convenient Functions
Parallel Shift Function
– Line up the cursor with”UNUSED” and press [SELECT]. The
selection dialog box appears. Line up the cursor with the coordinate
system to be added, and press [SELECT].
– After the coordinate system addition is completed, press [ENTER].
The DETAIL EDIT window closes and the JOB CONTENT window
appears.
6. Press [INSERT] and then [ENTER].
– The instruction displayed in the input buffer line is registered.
Line where SFTON
instruction is
registered.
0002
0003
0004
6-19
MOVL V=138
SFTON P000 BF
MOVL V=138
6
6.3
DX100
6.3.3.2
Convenient Functions
Parallel Shift Function
SFTOF Instruction
This is the instruction that ends a parallel shift.
1. Move the cursor to the line immediately before where the SFTOF
instruction is to be registered.
Line immediately
before where
SFTOF instruction
is to be registered.
0006
0007
0008
MOVL V=138
DOUT OT#(1) ON
TIMER T=1.00
2. Press [INFORM LIST].
– The instruction list dialog box appears.
3. Select {SHIFT}.
4. Select the SFTOF instruction.
– The SFTOF instruction is displayed in the input buffer line.
SFTOF
5. Press [INSERT] and then [ENTER].
– The SFTOF instruction is registered.
0006
0007
0008
MOVL V=138
SFTOF
DOUT OT#(1) ON
6-20
6
6.3
DX100
6.3.3.3
Convenient Functions
Parallel Shift Function
MSHIFT Instruction
When a parallel shift of the wrist posture is attempted, the manipulator
may not be shifted to the target posture in the following cases.
• Posture displacement (Rx, Ry, Rz) is specified to the shift value set
by the user.
• When a displacement between two points is calculated using an
INFORM operating instruction (ADD instruction, SUB instruction,
etc.), and a posture displacement (Rx, Ry, Rz) is specified in the shift
value.
In such cases, the MSHIFT instruction can be used to automatically
calculate the optimum shift value for an operation to reach the target shift
position and posture. With an MSHIFT instruction, the shift value between
the reference position and the target position (shift position) when the
parallel shift is performed is determined in the specified coordinate
system, and set as the specified position variable.
1. Move the cursor to the line immediately before where the MSHIFT
instruction is to be registered.
Line immediately
before where
MSHIFT instruction
is registered.
0005
0006
0007
MOVJ V=138
GETS PX001 $PX000
DOUT OT#(1) ON
2. Press [INFORM LIST].
– The instruction list dialog box appears.
IN/OUT
CONTROL
DEVICE
MOTION
ARITH
SFTON
SHIFT
SFTOF
OTHER
MSHIFT
SAME
PRIOR
3. Select {SHIFT}.
4. Select the MSHIFT instruction.
– The MSHIFT instruction is displayed in the input buffer line.
5. Change the number data or additional items as required.
– <When Nothing is to be Changed>
Proceed to Step 6.
– <When Editing Additional Items>
– Adding or modifying additional items
To change the position variable number, move the cursor to the
position variable number and press [SHIFT] + the cursor key to
increase or decrease the value.
MSHIFT PX000 BF PX001 PX002
6-21
DX100
6
6.3
Convenient Functions
Parallel Shift Function
– To directly input the value using the Numeric keys, press [SELECT]
to display the input buffer line.
PX =
MSHIFT
0 BF PX001 PX002
– After the number is input, press [ENTER] to modify the number
value in the input buffer line.
– Changing the coordinate system in which the shift is performed
Move the cursor to the instruction in the input buffer line and press
[SELECT]. The DETAIL EDIT window appears.
MSHIFT PX000 BF PX001 PX002
– Line up the cursor with “BF” and press [SELECT]. The selection
dialog box appears. Line up the cursor with the coordinate system
to be changed, and press [SELECT].
– After the coordinate system modification is complete, press
[ENTER]. The DETAIL EDIT window closes and the JOB
CONTENT window appears.
6. Press [INSERT] and then [ENTER].
– The instruction displayed in the input buffer line is registered.
Line where
MSHIFT is
registered.
0006
0007
0008
6-22
GETS PX000 $PX000
MSHIFT PX000 RF PX001 PX002
DOUT OT#(1) ON
DX100
6
6.3
Convenient Functions
Parallel Shift Function
6.3.4
Continuation of the Parallel Shift Function
CAUTION
•
If the shift function is cancelled through a job editing operation after
the execution of a parallel shift instruction, the job must be started
again from the beginning.
•
Because no shift is performed when the operation is restarted, there
is a possibility of interference between the workpiece and fixture.
If any of the following operations are performed after executing a parallel
shift instruction, the shift function is cancelled.
• Job editing operation (changing, deleting, adding)
• Job copy, job name change
• Registering a new job, deleting a job, or modifying a selected job
• Restart after the alarm occurs
• When control power is turned OFF
NOTE
With any operation other than those listed above, the parallel shift function remains in effect.
6-23
6
6.3
DX100
6.3.5
6.3.5.1
Convenient Functions
Parallel Shift Function
Examples of Use
Example of Use of Shift Addition/Subtraction
Table 6-1: Workpiece Stacking Operation
Line
Instruction
0000
NOP
0001
SET B000 0
0002
SUB P000 P000
0003
*A
Make the first shift value zero.
0004
MOVJ
Step 1
0005
MOVL
Step 2
0006
’Gripping workpiece
0007
MOVL
Step 3
0008
MOVL
Step 4
0009
SFTON P000 UF#(1)
Shift start
0010
MOVL
Shift position Step 5
0011
’Releasing workpiece
0012
SFTOF
Shift end
0013
ADD P000 P001
Add the shift value for the next
operation.
0014
MOVL
Step 6
Step 7
0015
MOVL
0016
INC B000
0017
JUMP *A IF B00<6

0018
SFTON P000 UF#(1)
SFTOF
SUB P000 P001
Since the shift data is retained
in memory, the same data can
be used (with subtraction
instead of addition) to perform
a workpiece unloading
operation.

1,7
3
4,6
2
Workpiece
5
6-24
DX100
6.3.5.2
6
6.3
Convenient Functions
Parallel Shift Function
Example of Use of MSHIFT Instruction
Line
Instruction
0000
NOP
0001
MOVJ VJ=20.00
Move the manipulator to the
reference position.
0002
GETS PX000 $PX000
Set the reference position as
position variable P000.
0003
MOVJ VJ=20.00
Move the manipulator to the
target position.
0004
GETS PX001 $PX000
Set the target position as position
variable P001.
0005
MSHlFT PX010 BF PX000 PX001 Set shift value and set it as
position variable P010.
0006
END
6-25
Explanation
6
6.4
DX100
6.4
6.4.1
Convenient Functions
Parallel Shift Job Conversion Function
Parallel Shift Job Conversion Function
Function Overview
If the manipulator and base positions are moved after a job has been
taught, the entire job has to be modified. The parallel shift conversion
function shortens the modification time required in cases like this by
shifting all steps of the job by the same value to create a new job.
When the parallel shift conversion is performed, all job steps are shifted by
the same value.
Steps Outside the P-point Maximum Envelope
• “/OV” is displayed for the steps which result in a position
outside the P-point maximum envelope of the manipulator.
When the position is corrected, “/OV” display disappears.
Position Variable
NOTE
• Position variables are not subject to the parallel shift job
conversion.
Not Converted Job
• The following jobs cannot be converted. If conversion is
attempted, no operation is performed.
• Jobs without any group axes
• Concurrent jobs (optional)
CAUTION
•
If a job name after conversion is not specified when executing the
parallel shift job conversion, the position data of the job is shifted
and converted, then the data is overwritten with a new position data
after the shift. Be sure to save the job in the external memory
device or create the same job by copying before executing
conversion.
6-26
DX100
6.4.2
6
6.4
Convenient Functions
Parallel Shift Job Conversion Function
Coordinate Systems for Conversion
When performing the parallel shift job conversion, it is necessary to
specify the coordinate systems in which the conversion is to be
performed. The coordinate system can be selected from the following:
• Base coordinates
• Robot coordinates
• Tool coordinates
• User coordinates (64 types)
• Master tool coordinates (R*+R* job)
• Pulse coordinates
In the case of an ordinary job for which group axes are registered, shift
conversion is performed in accordance with the selected coordinate
system. The relationship between group combinations and coordinates
are shown in the following table.
1 to 4 in the table are followed by their explanations.
Table 6-2: Relationship Between Group Combinations and Coordinates at
Conversion
Group
Combination
in Job
Explanation
R
Shift is performed on the basis of selected coordinates.
Usable Coordinate System
Base coordinates, robot coordinates, tool coordinates, user
coordinates, pulse coordinates
R(B)
S
Shift is performed on the basis of selected coordinates.
1. Base
Coordinates
The base axis is shifted by the
specified amount and the TCP of the
manipulator is shifted by the specified
amount in the base coordinates.
2. Robot
Coordinates
The base axis is shifted by the
specified amount.
The TCP of the manipulator is shifted
by the specified amount in the robot
coordinates. These shifts are carried
out independently.
3. Tool
Coordinates
The base axis is shifted by the
specified amount.
The TCP of the manipulator is shifted
by the specified amount in the tool
coordinates. These shifts are carried
out independently.
4. User
Coordinates
The base axis is shifted by the
specified amount and the TCP of the
manipulator is shifted by the specified
amount in the user coordinates.
5. Pulse
Coordinates
The taught position of each axis is
shifted by the specified amount on the
basis of pulse values.
Shift is performed on the basis of pulse values regardless of the
coordinates.
6-27
6
6.4
DX100
Convenient Functions
Parallel Shift Job Conversion Function
Table 6-2: Relationship Between Group Combinations and Coordinates at
Conversion
R+S
The manipulator is shifted in the selected coordinates.
The station axis is shifted on the basis of pulse values regardless
of the coordinates.
Base coordinates, robot coordinates, tool coordinates, user
coordinates, pulse coordinates
R(B)+S
The manipulator is shifted in the selected coordinates, as in 1 to
5 above.
The station axis is shifted on the basis of pulse values regardless
of the coordinates.
R+R
Two manipulators are shifted in the selected coordinates.
Base coordinates, robot coordinates, tool coordinates, user
coordinates, master tool coordinates 1), pulse coordinates
R(B)+R(B)
Two manipulators are shifted in the selected coordinate system,
as in 1 to 5 above. Two base axes are also shifted.
1 In the master tool coordinates, conversion only occurs at the “slave” from the
standpoint of the SMOV instruction.

About 1 to 4 in the Table
1. Base Coordinates
The base axis is shifted by B and the TCP of the manipulator is shifted
by A in the base coordinates.
Base coordinates
A
B
Base
6-28
DX100
6
6.4
Convenient Functions
Parallel Shift Job Conversion Function
2. Robot Coordinates
The base axis is shifted by B. The TCP of the manipulator is shifted by
A in the robot coordinates. These shifts are carried out independently.
Robot coordinates
Base coordinates
A
B
3. Tool Coordinates
The base axis is shifted by B and the TCP of the manipulator is shifted
by A in the tool coordinates. These shifts are carried out independently.
Base coordinates
Tool coordinates
A
B
4. User Coordinates
The base axis is shifted by B and the TCP of the manipulator is shifted
by A in the user coordinates. These shifts are carried out independently.
User coordinates
Base coordinates
A
B
6-29
6
6.4
DX100

Convenient Functions
Parallel Shift Job Conversion Function
Converting R*+R* Jobs with Master Tool Coordinates
R*+R* coordinated jobs can be subjected to the parallel shift job
conversion in the master tool coordinates. Only the steps taken at the
“slave” from the standpoint of the SMOV instruction are subject to
conversion (i.e. the steps of R2 in the figure below).
R2 (Slave)
R1 (Master)
X-axis
Y-axis
Master tool coordinates
Z-axis
1
Displays R2
Displays R1
0001 MOV
+MOV
0002 MOV
+MOV
0003 SMOV
+MOV
0004 SMOV
+MOV
0005 SMOV
+MOV
0006 MOV
+MOV
6-30
6
5
2
3
4
Motion path
after conversion
DX100
6
6.4
6.4.3
Executing the Parallel Shift Job Conversion
6.4.3.1
Convenient Functions
Parallel Shift Job Conversion Function
Window Display
A
B
C
D
E
F
A. SOURCE JOB
Selects the job before conversion. The job which is shown in the JOB
CONTENT window is set initially. To change the job, perform the following procedure.
Move the cursor to the job name and press [SELECT]. The JOB LIST
window appears. Select the desired job.
B. STEP SECTION (Start Step  End Step)
Specifies the step section of the source job. All the steps are set initially.
If there is no step in the source job, “***” is displayed. To change the
section, perform the following procedure.
Move the cursor to the step section indication and press [SELECT].
The input buffer line appears. Input the step number and press
[ENTER].
C. DESTINATION JOB
Specifies the converted job. If this is not specified ( “********” is displayed), the source job is overwritten with a job after conversion. If the
converted job is specified, the source job is copied and converted. To
change the job, perform the following procedure.
Move the cursor to the converted job name indication and press
[SELECT]. The character input line appears. The source job name is
displayed in the input line. To enter a job name without using the source
job name, press [CANCEL] and then input a job name.
D. COORDINATES
Selects the conversion coordinates. Move the cursor to the coordinates
name and press [SELECT]. The selection dialog box appears. Select
the desired coordinates.
When the user coordinates are selected, the input buffer line appears.
Input the desired user coordinate number and press [ENTER].
E. BASE POINT
Calculates the difference by the two teaching points as a shift value.
6-31
DX100
6
6.4
Convenient Functions
Parallel Shift Job Conversion Function
F. SHIFT VALUE
The axis shown is varied according to the setting of “4. coordinates”
above.
Move the cursor to the input box and press [SELECT] to directly input
the shift value.
If the shift value is calculated by the two teaching points, the difference
is shown as a shift value.
6-32
DX100
6
6.4
Convenient Functions
Parallel Shift Job Conversion Function
6.4.3.2
Parallel Shift Job Conversion Operation
There are two methods for specifying the shift value.
• Directly input the shift value by numerical value.
• Calculate the shift value by teaching the original base point and converted base point.
SUPPLEMENT
The method using position variables by parameter setting is
described in chapter 6.4.4 "Specifying the Shift Value by
Position Variables" at page 6-39 other than above two methods.
The following are the operation procedures by each setting of shift value
for parallel shift job conversion.

Numerical Value Input
1. Select {JOB} under the main menu.
2. Select {JOB}.
– The JOB CONTENT window appears.
3. Select {UTILITY} under the pull-down menu.
4. Select {PARALLEL SHIFT JOB}.
– The PARALLEL SHIFT JOB window appears.
5. Specify the conversion items.
– Specify each item.
6-33
DX100
6
6.4
Convenient Functions
Parallel Shift Job Conversion Function
6. Select the shift value to be set.
– The number can be entered.
7. Type the shift value using the Numeric keys.
8. Press [ENTER].
– The shift value is set.
9. Display the PARALLEL SHIFT JOB window. Select “EXECUTE”.
– The confirmation dialog box appears when the converted job is not
specified. Select “YES” then the conversion is executed.
– The JOB CONTENT window appears when the conversion is
completed.
6-34
DX100
6
6.4
Convenient Functions
Parallel Shift Job Conversion Function
– When “CANCEL“ is selected, the display goes back to the JOB
CONTENT window without executing conversion.
NOTE
If an alarm occurs during conversion, conversion is suspended.
6-35
6
6.4
DX100

Convenient Functions
Parallel Shift Job Conversion Function
Calculation by Teaching
1. Select {JOB} under the main menu.
2. Select {JOB}.
– The JOB CONTENT window appears.
3. Select {UTILITY} under the pull-down menu.
4. Select {PARALLEL SHIFT JOB}.
– The PARALLEL SHIFT JOB window appears.
5. Specify the conversion items.
– Specify each item.
6. Display the PARALLEL SHIFT JOB window. Select “TEACH
SETTING” in the item of “BASE POINT”.
– The BASE POINT window appears.
7. Select “BASE POINT(SRC)”.
8. Move the manipulator to the original base point by the axis keys.
6-36
DX100
6
6.4
Convenient Functions
Parallel Shift Job Conversion Function
9. Press [MODIFY] and [ENTER].
– The original base point is set.
10. Select “BASE POINT(DEST)”.
11. Move the manipulator to the converted base point by the axis keys.
12. Press [MODIFY] and [ENTER].
– The conversion base point is set.
13. Touch “EXECUTE”.
– The difference is calculated by the two teaching points and set as a
shift value.
6-37
DX100
6
6.4
Convenient Functions
Parallel Shift Job Conversion Function
14. Display the PARALLEL SHIFT JOB window. Select “EXECUTE”.
– The confirmation dialog box appears when the converted job is not
specified. Select “YES” then the conversion is executed.
– The JOB CONTENT window appears when the conversion is
completed.
– When “CANCEL“ is selected, the display goes back to the JOB
CONTENT window without executing conversion.
NOTE
If an alarm occurs during conversion, conversion is suspended.
6-38
6
6.4
DX100
6.4.4
Convenient Functions
Parallel Shift Job Conversion Function
Specifying the Shift Value by Position Variables
The shift value can be specified using position variables by parameter
settings.
Parameter S2C652: SHIFT VALUE FOR PARALLEL SHIFT JOB
CONVERSION
0: Shift value by numeral/teaching (Initial setting)
1: Position variable shift value
6.4.4.1
Window Display
A
B
C
D
E
A. FILE NO.
Specifies position variables.
B. SHIFT JOB NAME
The job which was shown in the JOB CONTENT window is set initially.
To change the job, perform the following procedure.
Move the cursor to the conversion job name and press [SELECT]. The
JOB LIST window appears. Move the cursor to the desired job and
press [SELECT]. The PARALLEL SHIFT JOB window reappears, and
the job name which was selected is shown.
C. MODE
Specifies the conversion mode.
SINGLE (INDEPENDENT JOB CONVERSION)
Only the selected job is converted even if the selected job includes the
jobs called by JUMP or CALL instructions. Related jobs are not converted.
RELATIVE (RELATIVE JOB CONVERSION)
Both the selected job and all the related jobs (the jobs called by JUMP
or CALL instructions) are converted.
For details of each conversion mode, refer to chapter 6.4.4.2 "Jobs
Targeted for Conversion" .
D. COORDINATES
Selects the conversion coordinates.
Move the cursor to the coordinates name and press [SELECT]. The
selection dialog box appears. Select the desired coordinates.
6-39
DX100
6
6.4
Convenient Functions
Parallel Shift Job Conversion Function
When the user coordinates are selected, the input buffer line appears.
Input the desired user coordinate number and press [ENTER].
E. CONV. METHOD
Specifies the conversion methods of related jobs such as a coordinated
job with two manipulators or the system with multiple stations.
COMMON (COMMON SHIFT)
All the manipulators (or all the bases, or all the stations) are converted
by the same shift value.
EACH (INDIVIDUAL SHIFT)
Each manipulator (or each base, or each station) is converted separately by different shift values.
For details of each conversion method, refer to chapter 6.4.4.3 "Conversion of Coordinated Jobs" at page 6-42.
6-40
6
6.4
DX100
6.4.4.2
Convenient Functions
Parallel Shift Job Conversion Function
Jobs Targeted for Conversion
There are two ways to specify the job to be converted as described in the
following:
• Independent Job Conversion
Only the selected job is converted even if the selected job includes
the jobs called by JUMP or CALL instructions. Related jobs are not
converted.
Converted
SELECTED JOB
(EDIT JOB)
JOB
JOB
JOB
JOB
JOB
Related jobs are
not converted.
JOB
• Related Job Conversion
Both the selected job and all the related jobs (the jobs called by
JUMP or CALL instructions) are converted.
SELECTED JOB
(EDIT JOB)
JOB
JOB
Converted
JOB
JOB
JOB
6-41
JOB
6
6.4
DX100
6.4.4.3
Convenient Functions
Parallel Shift Job Conversion Function
Conversion of Coordinated Jobs
There are two ways to convert a related job such as a coordinated job with
two manipulators or the system with multiple stations as described in the
following:

Common Shift
All the manipulators (or all the bases, or all the stations) are converted by
the same shift value.
Coordinated job with R1+R2
The system with multiple stations

Individual Shift
Each manipulator (or each base, or each station) is converted separately
by different shift values.
Coordinated job with R1+R2
6-42
6
6.4
DX100
Convenient Functions
Parallel Shift Job Conversion Function
The system with multiple stations

Variables used in an individual shift
NOTE
Be sure to use the variables of which numbers are consecutive after the selected number. The variables of which
numbers are not consecutive are unable to be selected.
Example 1) When selecting P010 for a coordinated job with R1 + R2:
Use P010 for R1.
Use P011 for R2.
JOB R1
JOB R2
P010
P011
Example 2) When selecting EX005 for multiple jobs with four stations:
Use EX005 for S1.
Use EX006 for S2.
Use EX007 for S3.
Use EX008 for S4.
6-43
6
6.4
DX100
Convenient Functions
Parallel Shift Job Conversion Function
JOB S1
JOB S2
JOB S3
JOB S4
EX005
EX006
EX007
EX008

Relation between variables and jobs for conversion in an individual
shift

In the case of independent job conversion:
• Coordinated job with R1 + R2
Different shift values can be set for each manipulator and base.
Variables
JOB
P001
BP001
For R1
For base R1
R1 + R2
P002
P002
For base R2
For R2
• Job with R (+ S)
Use one variable for a job with one manipulator.
JOB
R

Variables
P001
For R1
BP001
For base R1
In the case of related job conversion:
• Different shift values can be set for each manipulator, base, and station.
6-44
6
6.4
DX100
Convenient Functions
Parallel Shift Job Conversion Function
In a system with R1, R2, and S1 to S12:
Variables
P001
For R1
Job without
group axes
P002
For R2
R1 + R2
R1
R2
S1
S12
BP001
For base R1
P002
For base R2
EX001
For S1
EX002
For S1
EX0012
For S1
6.4.4.4
Operation Procedure
The following is the operation procedure for the parallel shift job
conversion using position variables.
1. Set the parameter.
– Set the parameter S2C652 (SHIFT VALUE FOR PARALLEL SHIFT
JOB CONVERSION) to 1 (Position variable shift value).
2. Set the position variable.
– Specify a position variable in advance when setting a shift value by
position variables.
– For the setting of position variables, refer to chapter 3.9.4
Variables" at page 3-77.
3. Select {JOB} under the main menu.
4. Select {JOB}.
– The JOB CONTENT window appears.
5. Select {UTILITY} under the pull-down menu.
6. Select {PARALLEL SHIFT JOB}.
6-45
"User
DX100
6
6.4
Convenient Functions
Parallel Shift Job Conversion Function
– The PARALLEL SHIFT JOB window appears.
7. Specify the conversion items.
– Specify each item.
8. Select “EXECUTE”.
– Select “EXECUTE” then the parallel shift job conversion is executed.
The JOB CONTENT window appears when the conversion is
completed.
– When “CANCEL“ is selected, the display goes back to the JOB
CONTENT window without executing conversion.
NOTE
If an alarm occurs during conversion, conversion is suspended.
NOTE
Specify the position variable in advance when using the setting value as a shift value.
6-46
6
6.5
DX100
6.5
6.5.1
Convenient Functions
PAM Function
PAM Function
Function Overview
The function for position adjustment during playback (PAM: Position
Adjustment by Manual) allows position adjustment by simple operations
while observing the motion of the manipulator and without stopping the
manipulator. Positions can be adjusted in both teach mode and play
mode.
The following data can be adjusted by key input from the programming
pendant.
• Teaching Point (Position)
• Teaching Point (Posture angle)
• Operation Speed
• Position Level
6.5.1.1
Input Ranges for Adjustment Data
The input ranges for adjustment data are indicated in the following table.
Data
Input Range
Number of Steps for Adjustment
Up to 10 steps can be adjusted at the same
time.
Position Adjustment Range
(X, Y, Z)
Unit: mm, valid to two decimal places,
maximum ±10 mm
Posture Angle Adjustment Range
(Rx, Ry, Rz)
Unit: deg, valid to two decimal places,
maximum ±10 deg
Speed Adjustment Range (V)
Unit: %, valid to two decimal places,
maximum ±50%
PL Adjustment Range
0 to 8
Adjustment Coordinates
Robot coordinates, base coordinates, tool
coordinates, user coordinates (Default
coordinates: robot coordinates)
The input ranges for adjustment data can be changed by the
following parameters:
• S3C1098: Position adjustment range (unit: 0.001 mm)
SUPPLEMENT
• S3C1099: Speed adjustment range (unit: 0.01%)
• S3C1100: Adjustment coordinate specification
• S3C1102: Posture angle adjustment range (unit: 0.01 deg)
For details, refer to chapter 8 "Parameter" at page 8-1.
6-47
DX100
6
6.5
Convenient Functions
PAM Function
• Base axis and station axis data cannot be adjusted.
• Adjustment when a TCP instruction is executed is performed by adjusting the data of the selected tool.
NOTE
• When the coordinates for adjustment are user coordinates, an error occurs if teaching has not been performed
in the user coordinates.
• If an attempt is made to adjust “PL” when there is no “PL”
in the step subject to the adjustment, an error occurs.
• Position variable and reference point steps cannot be
adjusted. An error occurs if adjustment is attempted.
• An attempt to adjust the speed at the step that has no
speed tag causes an error.
6-48
6
6.5
DX100
6.5.2
6.5.2.1
Convenient Functions
PAM Function
Operating Methods
Setting Adjustment Data
1. Select {JOB} under the main menu.
2. Select {JOB}.
– The JOB CONTENT window (in the teach mode) or the PLAYBACK
window (in the playback mode) appears.
3. Select {UTILITY} under the pull-down menu.
4. Select {PAM}.
– The PAM window appears.
A
B
C
G
D
H
E
F
5. Set adjustment data.
– Set adjustment data.
– A. Job
Set the job name to be adjusted.
Line up the cursor and press [SELECT] to display the JOB LIST
window.
Move the cursor to the desired job and press [SELECT] to set the
adjusted job.
– B. Status
Shows the status of adjustment in the PAM function.
“NOT DONE” appears when adjustment is not executed. “DONE”
appears when the execution of adjustment is completed.
– C. Input Coord
Set the desired coordinates.
Line up the cursor and press [SELECT] to display the selection
dialog box.
Move the cursor to the desired coordinate system and press
[SELECT] to set the input coordinates.
– D. Step Number
Set the step number to be adjusted.
Line up the cursor and press [SELECT] to display the number input
buffer line.
Input the step number and press [ENTER] to set the value.
– E. XYZ Coordinate Adjustment
Set the direction and amount of the X, Y, and Z coordinates.
Line up the cursor with the data to be adjusted and press [SELECT]
6-49
DX100
6
6.5
Convenient Functions
PAM Function
to display the number input buffer line.
Input the number data and press [ENTER] to set the adjusted data.
– F. Rx, Ry, Rz Coordinate Adjustment
Set the direction and amount of the Rx, Ry and Rz posture
angles.
Line up the cursor with the data to be adjusted and press [SELECT]
to display the number input buffer line.
Input the number data and press [ENTER] to set the adjusted data.
– G. V Coordinate Adjustment
Set the speed.
Line up the cursor and press [SELECT] to display the number input
buffer line.
Input the number data and press [ENTER] to set the adjusted data.
– H. PL
The position level of the job to be adjusted for the step set in “4. Step
Number” is displayed, and the data can be modified.
When the position level is not decided, [-] is displayed, and cannot
be set.
To modify the position level, line up the cursor, press [SELECT],
input the number value and press [ENTER].
6-50
6
6.5
DX100
6.5.2.2
Convenient Functions
PAM Function
Executing the Adjustment

Executing the Adjustment
1. Touch “COMPLETE” on the screen.
– The confirmation dialog box appears.
2. Select “YES”.
– In the teach mode, the job adjustment can be immediately executed.
In the play mode, the job can be adjusted just before execution
(move operation).
– When the job adjustment is completed, the set data shown in the
PAM window is cleared. However, if the step’s adjusted position
exceeds the software limit, an error occurs, and the data in only that
step cannot be cleared on the window.
6-51
6
6.5
DX100

Convenient Functions
PAM Function
Cancelling the Execution
In the play mode, during the adjustment wait status, “STOP” is displayed
in the PAM window. To cancel the adjustment process, touch “STOP” on
the screen. Also, if the following occurs before executing, the process is
automatically cancelled.
• If the mode is changed
• If an alarm occurs
• If the power is turned OFF
6-52
6
6.5
DX100

Convenient Functions
PAM Function
Clearing Data
If there is a mistake made when adjusting the data, or if the adjustment of
the step becomes unnecessary, the data can be cleared.
1. Move the cursor to the step of the data to be cleared.
Steps in which
data is to be
cleared.
2. Select {EDIT} under the pull-down menu.
3. Select {LINE CLEAR}.
– The line data is cleared.

Copying Data
To input the same data as those set previously, perform the following
operation.
1. Move the cursor to the line to be copied.
2. Select {EDIT} under the menu.
– The pull-down menu appears.
3. Select {LINE COPY}.
4. Move the cursor to the line where the item is to be copied.
5. Select {EDIT} under the menu.
6. Select {LINE PASTE}.
– The desired data is copied to the line.
6-53
6
6.5
DX100
Convenient Functions
PAM Function
– However, if the line where the data is to be copied does not have a
speed value or PL value, it cannot be copied.

Canceling the Adjustment
After the position adjustment in the PAM function, the job can be returned
to the status before adjustment only during teaching. In this case, follow
the procedures below.
Note that the job cannot be undone during playback.
1. Move the cursor to the line to be copied.
– After the position adjustment, the status shows “DONE”.
2. Select {EDIT} under the menu.
– The pull-down menu appears.
3. Select {UNDO} under the pull-down menu.
– The confirmation dialog box appears.
4. Select “YES“
– The status turns “NOT DONE“ and the job is undone when selecting
“YES“. The status does not change and the job is not undone when
selecting “NO”.
6-54
6
6.6
DX100
6.6
6.6.1
Convenient Functions
Mirror Shift Function
Mirror Shift Function
Function Overview
With the mirror shift function, a job is converted to the job in which the path
is symmetrical to that of the original job. This conversion can be
performed for the specified coordinate among the X-Y, X-Z, or Y-Z
coordinate of the robot coordinates and the user coordinates.
The mirror shift function is classified into the following three: the pulse
mirror-shift function, the robot-coordinates mirror-shift function, and the
user-coordinates mirror-shift function.
Mirror shift
The original path
before the mirror shift
6-55
The converted path
after the mirror shift
6
6.6
DX100
6.6.2
Convenient Functions
Mirror Shift Function
Pulse Mirror-shift Function
With the pulse mirror-shift function, the mirror shift is performed by
reversing the sign (+/-) for the axes which are specified with the parameter
in advance.
R-ax is
R-axi s
T-axi s
T-axis
S-axi s
S -axi s
6.6.2.1
Parameter Setting
Using the following parameter, specify the axes for which the sign is to be
reversed.
S1CxG065: Mirror Shift Sign Reversing Axis Specification
The 1st axis (0:Not reversed, 1:Reversed)
The 7th axis
6.6.2.2
Object Job
Jobs without group axes and relative jobs cannot be converted.
6.6.2.3
Group Axes Specification
When specifying the group axes for the converted job in a multiple group
axes system, the group axes specified in the original and converted jobs
must be the same.
• Robot Axis: Same model
• Base Axis: Same configuration
• Station Axis: Same configuration
6.6.2.4
Position Variables
Position variables are not converted by the mirror shift function.
6-56
6
6.6
DX100
6.6.3
Convenient Functions
Mirror Shift Function
Robot-coordinates Mirror-shift Function
With the robot-coordinates mirror-shift function, the mirror shift is
performed on the X-Z coordinate of the robot coordinates.
Z
Z
Y
X
6.6.3.1
Y
X
Object Job
Jobs without group axes cannot be converted.
6.6.3.2
Group Axes Specification
When specifying the group axes for the converted job in a multiple group
axes system, the group axes specified in the original and converted jobs
must be the same.
• Robot Axis: Same model
• Base Axis: Same configuration
• Station Axis: Same configuration
6.6.3.3
Position Variables
Position variables are not converted by the mirror shift function.
• Mirror shift conversion for the base axis is not performed
with the robot-coordinates mirror shift function.
NOTE
• With the robot-coordinates mirror shift function, mirror shift
conversion for the station axis is performed by reversing
the sign for the axes specified with the parameter
S1CxG065 "Mirror Shift Sign Reversing Axis Specification" .
6-57
6
6.6
DX100
6.6.4
Convenient Functions
Mirror Shift Function
User-coordinates Mirror-shift Function
With the user-coordinates mirror-shift function, the mirror shift is
performed on the X-Z, X-Y, or Y-Z coordinate of the specified user
coordinates.
Z
6.6.4.1
Z
Y
Y
X
X
Object Job
Jobs without group axes cannot be converted.
6.6.4.2
Group Axes Specification
When specifying the group axes for the converted job in a multiple group
axes system, the group axes specified in the original and converted jobs
must be the same.
• Robot Axis: Same model
• Base Axis: Same configuration
• Station Axis: Same configuration
6.6.4.3
Position Variables
Position variables are not converted by the mirror shift function.
NOTE
With the user-coordinates mirror shift function, mirror shift
conversion for the station axis is performed by reversing the
sign for the axes specified with the parameter S1CxG065
"Mirror Shift Sign Reversing Axis Specification".
6-58
DX100
6.6.5
6
6.6
Convenient Functions
Mirror Shift Function
Notes on the Mirror Shift Function
For manipulators, such as a polishing wrist, whose center of S-axis
rotation and T-axis rotation are offset in the X-coordinate direction, the
mirror shift cannot correctly be performed by the pulse mirror-shift
function. Be sure to use the robot-coordinates mirror-shift function or use
the user-coordinates mirror-shift function with the user coordinates
specified on the center of the T-axis rotation.
(1) Using the Robot-coordinates Mirror-shift Function
When the robot-coordinates mirror-shift function is performed, the
mirror shift is performed on the X-Z coordinate of the robot coordinates. The path of the converted job is as follows:
Robot-coordinates Mirror-shift Conversi on
After conversion
Before conversion
(2) Using the User-coordinates Mirror-shift Function
To use the user-coordinates mirror-shift function, specify the user
coordinates on the center of T-axis rotation in advance.
User-coordi nates Mirror-shift Conversi on
User coordi nates
After conversi on
6-59
Before conversi on
6
6.6
DX100
6.6.6
6.6.6.1
Convenient Functions
Mirror Shift Function
Operation Procedures
Calling Up the JOB CONTENT Window
Call up the JOB CONTENT window of the job to be converted as follows:

For Current Job
1. Select {JOB} under the main menu.
2. Select {JOB}.

For Another Job
1. Select {JOB} under the main menu.
2. Select {SELECT JOB}.
– The JOB LIST window appears.
3. Select the desired job.
6.6.6.2
Mirror Shift Conversion
1. Display the JOB CONTENT window.
2. Select {UTILITY} under the pull-down menu.
– The MIRROR SHIFT window appears.
3. Select {MIRROR SHIFT}.
– The MIRROR SHIFT window appears.
6-60
DX100
6.6.6.3
6
6.6
Convenient Functions
Mirror Shift Function
Explanation of the Mirror Shift Window
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
A. SOURCE JOB
Selects the conversion source job.
To select another job to be converted, move the cursor to the name and
press [SELECT] to call up the list of jobs. Select the desired job and
press [SELECT].
B. SOURCE CTRL GROUP
Displays the control group of the conversion source job.
C. STEP SELECTION
Specifies the steps to be converted. From the first step to the last step
of the selected job are specified as initial value.
D. DESTINATION JOB
Specifies the converted job name. To enter the name, move the cursor
to the name and press [SELECT]. The name of the conversion source
job is displayed in the input line as initial value. When "***" is displayed,
the name for the converted job is to be the same as that of the conversion source job.
E. DEST CTRL GROUP
Selects the control group for the converted job. When the destination
job name is entered, the same control group as the conversion source
job is automatically set. To change it, move the cursor to the control
group and press [SELECT] to call up the selection dialog box.
F. COORDINATES
Specifies the coordinates used for conversion.
"PULSE": Executes the pulse mirror-shift conversion.
"ROBOT": Executes the mirror-shift conversion on the basis of the cartesian coordinates.
"USER": Executes the mirror-shift conversion on the basis of the specified user coordinates.
6-61
DX100
6
6.6
Convenient Functions
Mirror Shift Function
G. USER COORD NO.
Specifies the user coordinates number when "USER" is selected in “6.
COORDINATES”.
This item cannot be set when "PULSE" or "ROBOT" is selected in “6.
COORDINATES”.
H. TARGET
Specifies the coordinate where conversion is to be done when "ROBOT"
or "USER" is selected in “6. COORDINATES”. "XY", "XZ", or "YZ" can
be selected. Always specify "XZ" for "ROBOT".
I. EXECUTE
Mirror shift conversion is executed when pressing “EXECUTE” or
[ENTER]. A job is created with the name of conversion source job when
a job after conversion is not entered.
6-62
6
6.7
DX100
6.7
6.7.1
Convenient Functions
Multi Window Function
Multi Window Function
Function Overview
Multi window function divides the general-purpose display area up to 4
windows and shows them simultaneously.
There are seven dividing patterns to be optionally choose as necessary.
6.7.2
Setting the Dividing Pattern of the General-Purpose Display Area
The dividing pattern of the general purpose display area can be changed
in the window exclusive for setting.
Table 6-3: Display the dividing Pattern (Sheet 1 of 2)
Number of the window
1
Dividing Pattern
1 window
1
2
2 windows
2
1
3
2 windows
1
2
4
3 windows
1
2
6-63
3
DX100
6
6.7
Convenient Functions
Multi Window Function
Table 6-3: Display the dividing Pattern (Sheet 2 of 2)
Number of the window
5
6
Dividing Pattern
3 windows
1
2
3
1
2
3 windows
3
7
4 windows
1
3
6.7.2.1
2
4
Calling Up and Operating Methods of the Display Dividing Pattern Setting Window
Call up the dividing pattern setting window.
1. Select [DEIPLAY SETUP] -[CHANGE WINDOW PATTERN] under the
main menu.
2. Dividing pattern setting window appears in the center of the display.
6-64
DX100
6
6.7
Convenient Functions
Multi Window Function
In the dividing pattern setting window, set the dividing pattern of the
general-purpose display area.
1. Key operation 1:
When “Window Pattern” is focused in the window, the option of the
dividing pattern shifts as cursor moves upper or lower.
– Choose the desired dividing patter from the “Window Pattern”.
2. Key operation 2:
Press Select key when “Window Pattern” is focused. The list of the
dividing patterns appears. The list closes and a pattern is set after
choosing the desired pattern and press “Select” key.
6-65
DX100
6
6.7
Convenient Functions
Multi Window Function
3. Touching operation:
The desired pattern can be chosen by touching a pattern in the
window.
– Choose a pattern from the dividing pattern buttons.
4. Touch [OK] button or move the cursor to it and press [SELECT] key.
– The dividing pattern setting window closes and the chosen pattern
(chosen with the procedure either 1, 2 or 3) appears.
6-66
DX100
6
6.7
Convenient Functions
Multi Window Function
Cancel the setting
1. Touch [CANCEL] button or move the cursor to it and press [SELECT]
key.
– Dividing pattern setting window closes. The dividing pattern in the
general-purpose display area doesn’t change.
SUPPLEMENT
The cursor moves by pressing [AREA] key in the dividing
pattern setting window.
6-67
DX100
6.7.3
6.7.3.1
6
6.7
Convenient Functions
Multi Window Function
Displaying the Multi Window
Multi Window Mode and Single Window Mode
Specifying more than two-window pattern in the dividing pattern setting
window shows plural windows simultaneously in the general-purpose
display area.
This is called multi window mode.
On the other hand, a single active window can be displayed with pressing
[SHIFT] + [MULTI] key operation.
This is called single window mode.
Pressing [SHIFT] + [MULTI] key operation switches the display from single
window mode to multi window mode. The mode can be changed as
necessary.
6.7.3.2
Displaying the Status of Plural (more than two) Window Dividing Pattern Setting
When more than two windows are displayed as a desired pattern,
appears on the upper part of the window whereas it doesn't appear when
a single window is displayed.
6-68
DX100
6.7.3.3
6
6.7
Convenient Functions
Multi Window Function
Displaying of Active Window and Non-Active Window
When a display is in the multi window mode, one window should be active
and the rest is (are) non-active. The title of the active window is displayed
in deep blue and non-active window is in light blue.
The active window is the subject of key operation.
Also, the menu area or the operational buttons under the general-purpose
displaying area are displayed for the operation of the active window.
6.7.3.4
Limited Matters in Multi Window Mode
The content of window when it is in multi window mode can be different
from the same window when it is in single window mode because of its
limited size. The content becomes normal when the window is displayed
in the single window mode.
• The input buffer in the JOB window is displayed only when the window is active.
• No auxiliary window appears.
6-69
DX100
6.7.4
6.7.4.1
6
6.7
Convenient Functions
Multi Window Function
Operation of Multi Window
Switching of Multi Window Mode and Single Window Mode
When more than two windows are displayed as a dividing pattern of the
multi window, it is possible to switch multi window mode to single window
mode.
1. Set the mode of the general-purpose displaying area to multi window
mode.
2. Press [SHIFT]+[MULTI] keys.
– Active window is displayed under single window mode in the
general-purpose window displaying area.
6-70
DX100
6
6.7
Convenient Functions
Multi Window Function
3. Press [SHIFT]+[MULTI] keys in step 2 status.
– The general-purpose display area changes to already set pattern in
multi window mode.
6-71
DX100
6.7.4.2
6
6.7
Convenient Functions
Multi Window Function
Switching of Active Window
Switch the active window in the multi window displaying mode.
1. Set the mode of the general-purpose displaying area to multi window
mode.
2. Key Operation:
Press [MULT] key
– The window to be active shifts. The active window shifts in the order
mentioned in chapter 6.7.2 "Setting the Dividing Pattern of the
General-Purpose Display Area" at page 6-63.
(12341······)
3. Touching Operation:
Touch the window to be active.
– The touched window becomes active.
6-72
DX100
6
6.7
Convenient Functions
Multi Window Function
Switch the active window in the single window mode.
1. Set the mode of the general-purpose displaying area to single window
mode.
2. Press [MULT] key
– The following windows are displayed in the order mentioned in
chapter 6.7.2 "Setting the Dividing Pattern of the GeneralPurpose Display Area" at page 6-63. (12341······)
NOTE
During the period before menu is selected when alarm
occurred, the active window cannot be switched if alarm
window is displayed, direct open is ON or a window is displayed by key allocation operation.
6-73
DX100
6
6.7
Convenient Functions
Multi Window Function
6.7.5
Switching the Axis Operation Control Group
The appropriate control group for axis operation is automatically selected
in accordance with the window status or its operation in the active window.
Due to this function, when the general-purpose display area is in multi
window mode, the control group for axis operation can vary depending on
the window which is active at the time.
To avoid unexpected control group to function and for the better safeness,
the change of the control group with the [MULTI] key operation or touching
operation when switching the active window is notified to the user.
SUPPLEMENT
6.7.5.1
The change of the control group for axis operation due to
other than [MULTI] key operation or touching operation; due
to the switch of the window by selecting main menu, is not
notified to the user.
S2C540 “Choosing Method of Notifying the Change of Axis Operation Control Group when
Switching the Active Window”
The method to notify the change of control group for axis operation due to
the switch of active window can be changed with parameter.
• Setting Value:0
– Keep displaying the message in the human interface display area
for three seconds.
– Message “Control group switched by switching the active window” is
displayed.
6-74
DX100
6
6.7
Convenient Functions
Multi Window Function
• Setting Value:1
– Call up the confirmation dialog box to confirm the switch of the
active window.
– Message “Control group will be changed. Switch the active
window?” is displayed
– “Yes” ······ After switching the window to be active, a message
appears in the human interface display area.
– “No” ······ Cancel the window to be active.
• Setting Value:2
– Do not notify the control group change.
6-75
6
6.8
DX100
6.8
6.8.1
Convenient Functions
Simple Menu Function
Simple Menu Function 1)
Simple Menu
This function enables users to create “USER DEFINITION” menu by
registering the layouts (screen dividing patterns and screen to be
displayed) on the general-purpose display area.
Eight layout patterns can be registered to the user definition menu at
maximum.
The registered layout patterns can be easily called up with the buttons of
simple menu.
1 Simple menu function is available in DS1.50-00 version or later.
6-76
DX100
6.8.2
6.8.2.1
6
6.8
Convenient Functions
Simple Menu Function
Registering the Layout Patters to User Definition Menu
Register with {REGIST} Button
Register the layout patterns by using {RESIST} button which is in “USER
DEFINITION” menu.
1. Press [SIMPLE MENU] key or select {Simple Menu} button on the
display while the layout pattern to be registered is on the generalpurpose display area.
– “USER DEFINITION” menu appears.
2. Press {REGIST} button.
– “USER DEFINITION” menu closes.
– The message “Do you register a current layout?” appears in the
confirmation dialog box.
3. Select {YES}.
– The layout is registered and the dialog box closes.
*It will not be registered when {NO} is selected.
6-77
DX100
6.8.2.2
6
6.8
Convenient Functions
Simple Menu Function
Register by Key Operation
Use the programming pentad keys to register the layout patterns to
“USER DEFINITION” menu.
1. Press [SHIFT] + [SIMPLE MENU] keys while the layout pattern to be
registered is on the general-purpose display area.
– The message “Do you register a current layout?” appears in the
confirmation dialog box.
2. Select {YES}.
– The layout is registered and the dialog box closes.
*It will not be registered when {NO} is selected.
6-78
DX100
6.8.2.3
6
6.8
Convenient Functions
Simple Menu Function
Conditions to Register the Layout
There are some cases that the layout patterns cannot be registered to
“USER DEFINITION” menu.
Followings are the conditions and the messages that the layout is refused
to register.
Condition
Message
1
when the layout is already
registered.
This layout is already registered.
2
when eight layouts are already
registered.
There is not an undefined domain.
3
When the registering layout
The screen which I cannot register is
includes the window which cannot included [W1W2W3W4]
be started up from the main menu.
(The number W1 to W4 indicates the
windows which are actually displayed
on the general-purpose display area,
however, the highlighted numbered
window cannot be registered.
*For the layout of 1 to 4,refer to
table 6-3 Display the dividing Pattern
at page 6-63.
4
When a single window is displayed
under the multi window mode.
SUPPLEMENT
6.8.2.4
Cannot register at current operation
mode.
The screens which cannot be started up from the main menu
are impossible to register.
Also, the layout of the screens that are called up from {FD/
PC CARD} or ladder editor (optional function) cannot be registered.
The Displayed Layout Name
After a layout pattern is registered to “USER DEFINITION” menu, it is
named in accordance with the status of the general-purpose display area
when the layout pattern is created.
Refer to the followings for the details.
Status of generalpurpose display area
Name registered to “USER DEFINITION”
Menu
1
Single window mode
(Same as the sub menu in main menu)
2
Multi window mode
Layout -n (“n” should be a number from 0 to 7)
It is possible to change the name even after the name is registered. Refer
to chapter 6.8.4.3 "Change the Name of Registered Layout Name" at
page 6-84.
6-79
6
6.8
DX100
6.8.3
6.8.3.1
Convenient Functions
Simple Menu Function
Calling Up of the Registered Layout
Calling up
Call up the registered layout with the following procedures.
1. Press [SIMPLE MENU] key or select {Simple Menu} button at the
lower-left on the display.
– “USER DEFINITION” menu appears.
2. Select and press a button on “USER DEFINITION” menu to display a
layout to be called up.
– “USER DEFINITION” menu closes.
– The selected layout appears on the general-purpose display area.
6-80
DX100
6.8.3.2
6
6.8
Convenient Functions
Simple Menu Function
Conditions when Calling Up the Layout
There are some cases where the layout cannot be called up depending on
the conditions when calling up.
Followings are the conditions and the messages that the layout is refused
to be called up.
Condition
Message
1 When all the
registered layout
windows cannot be
displayed due to
security mode or its
purpose of use.
There are no windows to display within the chosen
layout.
When undisplayed screen is included in the layout to be called up due to
above mentioned reasons, the message, “Please selected a Main Menu”
appears to the said screen.
6.8.4
Editing “USER DEFINITION” Menu
Editing procedures of “changing the registered name” and “deleting the
registered item” are possible to the items registered to “USER
DEFINITION MENU” window.
Those editions are executed on “USER DEFINITION MENU” window.
Displaying of “USER DEFINITION MENU” window is possible in the
operation mode or more and editing of this menu is possible in the editing
mode or more.
6.8.4.1
Displaying “UNSER DEFINITION” Window
Displays “UNSER DEFINITION MENU” Window with {EDIT} button.
1. Press [SIMPLE MENU] key or select {Simple Menu} button at the
lower-left on the display.
– “USER DEFINITION MENU” menu appears.
6-81
DX100
6
6.8
Convenient Functions
Simple Menu Function
2. Press {EDIT} button.
– “USER DEFINITION” menu closes.
– “USER DEFINITION MENU” window appears on the active window
in the general-purpose display area.
6.8.4.2
Displaying “USER DEFINITION MENU” window Under Main Menu
Displays “USER DEFINITION MENU” window under main menu.
1. Select {SYSTEM INFO} under the main menu.
– {SYSTEM INFO} sub menu appears.
6-82
DX100
6
6.8
Convenient Functions
Simple Menu Function
2. Select {USER DEFINITION}.
– “USER DEFINITION MENU” window appears on the active window
in the general-purpose display area.
6-83
DX100
6.8.4.3
6
6.8
Convenient Functions
Simple Menu Function
Change the Name of Registered Layout Name
The registered layout names can be changed.
1. Display “USER DEFINITION MENU” window.
2. Move the cursor key to the layout name to be changed and press
[SELECT] key.
– The software key pad for inputting letters appears.
6-84
DX100
6
6.8
Convenient Functions
Simple Menu Function
3. Input the layout name, then press [ENTER] key or {ENTER} button.
– The software key pad closes.
– The name changes.
* If complete the software key pad operation with [CANCEL] key or
{CANCEL} button, the name editing operation is also canceled.
SUPPLEMENT
When the bilingual function is valid, name in each
language can be set.
6-85
6
6.8
DX100
6.8.4.4
Convenient Functions
Simple Menu Function
Deleting the Layout
The layout registered to “USER DEFINITION” menu can be deleted.
1. Display “USER DEFINITION MENU” window.
2. Move the cursor key to the layout to be deleted and press [SHIFT] +
[SELECT] keys. (multiple selection possible)
– “●” mark is indicated at the head of the selected line.
3. Select {DATA} in the menu.
– A pull down menu appears.
6-86
DX100
6
6.8
Convenient Functions
Simple Menu Function
4. Select {DELETE MENU}.
– The confirmation dialog box with a message “Delete? Layout -4
(layout name)” appears to the line marked with “●”.
5. Select {YES} in the dialog box.
– The marked layout is deleted.
* The layout will not be deleted if {NO} in the dialog box is selected.
6-87
6
6.8
DX100
6.8.4.5
Convenient Functions
Simple Menu Function
Delete All Layout
All layouts registered to “USER DEFINITION” menu can be deleted at a
time.
1. Display “USER DEFINITION MENU” window.
2. Select {EDIT} in the menu.
– A pull down menu appears.
3. Select {SELECT ALL}.
– “●” mark is indicated to all the registered layouts.
6-88
DX100
6
6.8
Convenient Functions
Simple Menu Function
4. Select {DATA} in the menu.
– A pull down menu appears.
5. Select {DELETE MENU}.
– The confirmation dialog box with a message “Delete? Layout -0
(layout name)” appears to the lines marked with “●”.
6. Select {YES} in the dialog box.
– The marked layouts are deleted.
* The layout will not be deleted if {NO} in the dialog box is selected.
SUPPLEMENT
Move the cursor to the line with “●” mark, and press [SHIFT] +
[SELECT] keys to disappear “●” mark.
When select {EDIT} - {CANCEL SELECT} under the pull down
menu to cancel select and “●” marks disappear.
6-89
6
6.8
DX100
6.8.5
Convenient Functions
Simple Menu Function
Save/Load (to external memory devices) the User Definition Menu Data
The data registered to “USER DEFINITION” menu (user menu data) can
be saved to and loaded from the external memory device.
In this case, the name of the file is “USERMENU.DAT”.
6.8.5.1
Saving the Data
User menu data can be saved at the security level of operation mode or
more.
1. Select {EX. MOMORY} under the main menu.
– {EX. MOMORY} sub menu appears.
2. Select {SAVE}.
– {SAVE} window of external memory device appears.
3. Select {FILE/GENERAL DATA}.
– {FILE/GENERAL DATA} window of external memory device
appears.
6-90
DX100
6
6.8
Convenient Functions
Simple Menu Function
4. Select {USER MENU DATA}.
– “” mark is indicated at the head of {USER MENU DATA}.
5. Press [ENTER].
– The confirmation dialog box with a message “SAVE” appears.
6. Select {YES} in the dialog box.
– {USER MENU DATA} is saved.
* It will not be saved if {NO} in the dialog box is selected.
6-91
6
6.8
DX100
6.8.5.2
Convenient Functions
Simple Menu Function
Loading the Data
User menu data can be loaded at the security level of editing mode or
more.
1. Select {EX. MOMORY} under the main menu.
– {EX. MOMORY} sub menu appears.
2. Select {LOAD}.
– {LOAD} window of external memory device appears.
3. Select {FILE/GENERAL DATA}.
– {FILE/GENERAL DATA} window of external memory device
appears.
6-92
DX100
6
6.8
Convenient Functions
Simple Menu Function
4. Select {USER MENU DATA}.
– “” mark is indicated at the head of {USER MENU DATA}.
5. Press [ENTER].
– The confirmation dialog box with a message “LOAD?” appears.
6. Select {YES} in the dialog box.
– {USER MENU DATA} is loaded.
* It will not be loaded if {NO} in the dialog box is selected.
6-93
6
6.9
DX100
6.9
6.9.1
Convenient Functions
Parameter Setting Function
Parameter Setting Function
Parameter Setting Function
Among the parameters explained in chapter 8 "Parameter" at page 8-1,
frequently used parameters’ settings can be changed from the exclusive
windows. Those windows are sorted out depending on the parameters’
function as shown below.
• TEACHING CONDITION SETTING
Teaching-relevant parameters are displayed.
• OPERATE CONDITION SETTING
Mode switching/power-relevant parameters are displayed.
• OEPRATE ENABLE SETTING
ON/OFF of the manipulator-relevant parameters are displayed.
• FUNCTION ENABLE SETTING
Enable/unable of optional function-relevant parameters settings are
displayed.
• JOG CONDITION SETTING
Operation of the jog-relevant parameters are displayed.
• PLAYBACK CONDITION SETTING
Playback operation-relevant parameters are displayed.
• FUNCTIONAL CONDITION SETTING
Execution of each function-relevant parameters are displayed.
Select above mentioned menu from {SETUP} window under main menu.
6-94
DX100
6
6.9
Convenient Functions
Parameter Setting Function
Move the cursor key to select a menu, then the settings of the desired
parameters can be changed by one of the following three methods
according to its content.
• When there are two options.
The options alternate every time the select key is pressed.
• When there are three or more options.
A dialog box with the options appears. Select one to change the
settings.
• When it requires to input a value.
Input a value using the Numeric keys and press [ENTER] to change
the settings.
6-95
DX100
6.9.2
6
6.9
Convenient Functions
Parameter Setting Function
Teaching Condition Setting
Select {SETUP}  {TEACHING CONDITION SETTING} to display the
following window.
• LANGUAGE LEVEL (S2C211)
Refer to chapter 8.3.0.13 "S2C211: LANGUAGE LEVEL" at
page 8-15.
Setting
Parameter Value
Subset
0
Standard
1
Expanded
2
• INSTRUCTION INPUT LEARING (S2C214)
Refer to chapter 8.3.0.14 "S2C214: INSTRUCTION INPUT
LEARNING FUNCTION" at page 8-15.
Setting
Parameter Value
Valid
0
Invalid
1
• MOVE INSTRUCTION SET POSITION (S2C206)
Refer to chapter 8.3.0.8 "S2C206: ADDITIONAL STEP POSITION" at page 8-13.
Setting
Parameter Value
Step
0
Line
1
6-96
DX100
6
6.9
Convenient Functions
Parameter Setting Function
• BUZZER WHEN POSITION TEACHING (S2C433)
Refer to chapter 8.3.0.43 "S2C433: POSITION TEACHING
BUZZER" at page 8-27.
Setting
Parameter Value
Consider
0
Not
Consider
1
• STEP ONLY CHANGING (S2C203)
Refer to chapter 8.3.0.6 "S2C203: CHANGING STEP ONLY" at
page 8-13.
Setting
Parameter Value
Permit
0
Prohibit
1
• RECT/CYL INDRICAL (S2C196)
Refer to chapter 8.3.0.2 "S2C196: SELECTION OF CARTESIAN/
CYLINDRICAL" at page 8-12.
Setting
Parameter Value
Cyl.
0
Rectangle
1
• TOOL NO. SWITCH (S2C431)
Refer to chapter 8.3.0.42 "S2C431: TOOL NO. SWITCHING" at
page 8-27.
Setting
Parameter Value
Prohibit
0
Permit
1
• TOOL NO. INTERLOCK FOR STEP ENTRY(S2C234)
Refer to chapter 8.3.0.29 "S2C234: STEP REGISTRATION AT
TOOL NO. CHANGE" at page 8-19.
Setting
Parameter Value
Permit
0
Prohibit
1
• POS. TEACH ONLY JOG CONTROL GROUP (S2C320)
Refer to chapter 8.2.0.15 "S2C320: CONTROLLED GROUP JOB
TEACHING POSITION CHANGE" at page 8-7.
Setting
Parameter Value
Prohibit
0
Permit
1
6-97
DX100
6
6.9
Convenient Functions
Parameter Setting Function
• JOB UNDELETE FUNCTION(S2C413)
Refer to chapter 8.3.0.39 "S2C410: WORD REGISTRATION
FUNCTION / WORD EDITING FUNCTION SPECIFICATION" at
page 8-24.
Setting
Parameter Value
Invalid
0
Valid
1
• INDEPENDENT :MOTION OF NEXT/TEST(S2C231)
Refer to chapter 8.6.0.3 "S2C231: OPERATION METHOD AT
FWD/BWD OPERATION OR TEST RUN BY INDEPENDENT CONTROL" at page 8-44.
This appears only when the independent control is valid.
Setting
Parameter Value
Single
0
All
1
• BWD OPERATION NO GROUP AXIS (S2C688 d0 bit)
• BWD OPERATION CONCURRENT JOB (S2C688 d1 bit)
Refer to chapter 8.6.0.10 "S2C688: EXECUTION OF “BWD”
OPERATION" at page 8-47.
This appears only when the independent control is valid.
Setting
Bit Status
Permit
0
Prohibit
1
• STATION TWIN (S2C434)
Refer to chapter 8.3.0.44 "S2C434: JOB LINKING DESIGNATION
(When Twin Synchronous Function Used)" at page 8-27.
This appears only when the STATION TWIN SYNCHRONOUS
JOB is valid.
Setting
Parameter Value
Invalid
0
Valid
1
• CLEARANCE TEACHING METHOD (S2C612)
This appears only when it is for motor gun use.
Setting
Parameter Value
Upper Tip
0
Lower Tip
1
Gun Close 2
6-98
DX100
6.9.3
6
6.9
Convenient Functions
Parameter Setting Function
Operation Condition Setting
Select {SETUP}  {OPERATE CONDITION SETTING} to display the
following window.
• SPEED DATA INPUT FORM (S2C221)
Refer to chapter 8.3.0.21 "S2C221: SPEED DATA INPUT FORM"
at page 8-17.
Setting
Parameter Value
mm/sec
0
cm/min
1
inch/min
2
mm/min
3
• CYCLE SWITCH IN TEACH MODE (S2C313)
Refer to chapter 8.3.0.33 "S2C313: TEACH MODE FIRST CYCLE
MODE" at page 8-20.
Setting
Parameter Value
Step
0
Cycle
1
Auto
2
None
3
6-99
DX100
6
6.9
Convenient Functions
Parameter Setting Function
• CYCLE SWITCH IN PLAY MODE (S2C314)
Refer to chapter 8.3.0.34 "S2C314: PLAY MODE FIRST CYCLE
MODE" at page 8-20.
Setting
Parameter Value
Step
0
Cycle
1
Auto
2
None
3
• CYCLE SWITCH IN LOCAL MODE (S2C294)
Refer to chapter 8.3.0.31 "S2C294: LOCAL FIRST CYCLE
MODE" at page 8-19.
Setting
Parameter Value
Step
0
Cycle
1
Auto
2
None
3
• CYCLE SWITCH IN REMOTE MODE (S2C293)
Refer to chapter 8.3.0.30 "S2C293: REMOTE FIRST CYCLE
MODE" at page 8-19.
Setting
Parameter Value
Step
0
Cycle
1
Auto
2
None
3
• SET SYCLE ON POWER ON (S2C312)
Refer to chapter 8.3.0.32 "S2C312: POWER ON FIRST CYCLE
MODE" at page 8-19.
Setting
Parameter Value
Step
0
Cycle
1
Auto
2
None
3
6-100
DX100
6
6.9
Convenient Functions
Parameter Setting Function
• SECURITY MODE WHEN POWER ON (S2C195)
Refer to chapter 8.3.0.1 "S2C195: SECURITY MODE WHEN
CONTROL POWER SUPPLY IS TURNED ON" at page 8-12.
Setting
Parameter Value
Operation
Mode
0
Editing Mode
1
Management
Mode
2
• JOB STEP WHEN POWER ON (S2C215)
Refer to chapter 8.3.0.15 "S2C215: ADDRESS SETTING WHEN
CONTROL POWER IS TURNED ON" at page 8-15.
Setting
Parameter Value
Power OFF 0
Initial
1
• GENERAL OUT KEEP WHEN POWER ON (S2C235)
Refer to chapter 8.5.0.1 "S2C235: USER OUTPUT RELAY WHEN
CONTROL POWER IS ON" at page 8-39.
Setting
Parameter Value
Power OFF 0
Initial
1
6-101
DX100
6.9.4
6
6.9
Convenient Functions
Parameter Setting Function
Operate Enable Setting
Select {SETUP}  {OPERATE ENABLE SETTING} to display the
following window.
• EXTERNAL START (S2C219)
Refer to chapter 8.3.0.19 "S2C219: EXTERNAL START" at
page 8-16.
Setting
Parameter Status
Permit
0
Prohibit
1
• PP START (S2C220)
Refer to chapter 8.3.0.20
START" at page 8-16.
"S2C220: PROGRAMMING PENDANT
Setting
Parameter Status
Permit
0
Prohibit
1
• EXTERNAL MODE SWITCH (S2C225)
Refer to chapter 8.3.0.24 "S2C225: EXTERNAL MODE SWITCH"
at page 8-17.
Setting
Parameter Status
Permit
0
Prohibit
1
6-102
DX100
6
6.9
Convenient Functions
Parameter Setting Function
• EXTERNAL CYCLE SWITCH (S2C227)
Refer to chapter 8.3.0.25 "S2C227: EXTERNAL CYCLE SWITCHING" at page 8-17.
Setting
Parameter Status
Permit
0
Prohibit
1
• PP CYCLE SWITCH (S2C228)
Refer to chapter 8.3.0.26 "S2C228: PROGRAMMING PENDANT
CYCLE SWITCHING" at page 8-18.
Setting
Parameter Status
Permit
0
Prohibit
1
• EXTERNAL SERVO ON (S2C229 d0 bit)
• PP SERVO ON (S2C229 d1 bit)
• DSW SERVO ON (S2C229 d2 bit)
Refer to chapter 8.3.0.27 "S2C229: SERVO ON FROM EXTERNAL PP PROHIBITION" at page 8-18.
Setting
Bit Status
Permit
0
Prohibit
1
6-103
DX100
6.9.5
6
6.9
Convenient Functions
Parameter Setting Function
Function Enable Setting
Select {SETUP}  {FUNCTION ENABLE SETTING} to display the
following window.
• MASTER JOB CHANGE (S2C207)
Refer to chapter 8.3.0.9 "S2C207: MASTER JOB CHANGING
OPERATION" at page 8-14.
Setting
Parameter Status
Permit
0
Prohibit
1
• RESERVED START (S2C222)
Refer to chapter 8.3.0.22 "S2C222: RESERVED START" at
page 8-17.
Setting
Parameter Status
Permit
0
Prohibit
1
• RESERVED START JOB CHANGE (S2C209)
Refer to chapter 8.3.0.11 "S2C209: RESERVED WORK JOB
CHANGING OPERATION" at page 8-14.
Setting
Parameter Status
Permit
0
Prohibit
1
6-104
DX100
6
6.9
Convenient Functions
Parameter Setting Function
• JOB SELECT WHEN REMOTE OR PLAY (S2C224)
Refer to chapter 8.3.0.23 "S2C224: JOB SELECTION AT
REMOTE FUNCTION (PLAY MODE)" at page 8-17.
Setting
Parameter Status
Permit
0
Prohibit
1
• I/O-VARIABLE CUSTOMIZE FUNCTION (S2C397)
Refer to chapter 8.3.0.38 "S2C397: I/O VARIABLE CUSTOMIZE
FUNCTION" at page 8-23.
Setting
Parameter Status
Invalid
0
Valid
1
• GENERAO I/O NAME DISP. ON JOB (S2C544)
Refer to chapter 8.3.0.46 "S2C544: I/O NAME DISPLAY FUNCTION FOR JOB" at page 8-29.
Setting
Parameter Status
Invalid
0
Valid
1
• ANTICIPATION FUNCTION (S2C646)
Refer to chapter 8.8.0.1 "S2C646: ANTICIPATOR FUNCTION" at
page 8-50.
Setting
Parameter Status
Invalid
0
Valid
1
• ALL AXES ANGLE DISP FUNCTION (S2C684 d0 bit)
Refer to chapter 8.3.0.47 "S2C684:ALL AXES ANGLE DISPLAY
FUNCTION" at page 8-29.
Setting
Parameter Status
Invalid
0
Valid
1
6-105
DX100
6.9.6
6
6.9
Convenient Functions
Parameter Setting Function
Jog Condition Setting
Select {SETUP}  {JOG CONDITION SETTING} to display the following
window.
• COORD SWITCH WHEN JOG OPERATION (S2C197)
Refer to chapter 8.3.0.3 "S2C197: COORDINATE SWITCHING
PROHIBITED" at page 8-12.
Setting
Parameter Status
Tool & User OK
0
Tool NG
1
User NG
2
Tool & User NG
3
• MANUAL SPEED SAVE EVERY COORDS (S2C204)
Refer to chapter 8.3.0.7 "S2C204: MANUAL SPEED STORING
FOR EACH COORDINATE" at page 8-13.
Setting
Parameter Status
Invalid
0
Valid
1
6-106
DX100
6.9.7
6
6.9
Convenient Functions
Parameter Setting Function
Playback Condition Setting
Select {SETUP}  {PLAYBACK CONDITION SETTING} to display the
following window.
• CHECK/MACHINE LOCK (S2C208)
Refer to chapter 8.3.0.10 "S2C208: CHECK AND MACHINELOCK KEY OPERATION IN PLAY MODE" at page 8-14.
Setting
Parameter Status
Permit
0
Prohibit
1
• MASTER CALLING UP (S2C210)
Refer to chapter 8.3.0.12 "S2C210: MASTER OR SUBMASTER
CALL OPERATION IN PLAY MODE" at page 8-14.
Setting
Parameter Status
Permit
0
Prohibit
1
• INITIAL MOVE SPEED OF ROBOT (S2C217)
Refer to chapter 8.3.0.17 "S2C217: INITIAL OPERATION OF
MANIPULATOR" at page 8-16.
Setting
Parameter Status
Special Play 0
Low Speed
1
6-107
DX100
6
6.9
Convenient Functions
Parameter Setting Function
• START METHOD AFTER ABSO OVER (S2C316)
Refer to chapter 8.3.0.35 "S2C316: START CONDITION AFTER
ALARM-4107 (“OUT OF RANGE (ABSO DATA)”)" at page 8-20.
Setting
Parameter Status
Pos. Check
0
Low Speed
1
• SIGNAL NO. WHEN DROP VALUE OVER (S2C240)
Refer to chapter 8.5.0.7 "S4C240: USER OUTPUT NO. WHEN
MANIPULATOR DROP ALLOWABLE RANGE ERROR OCCURS"
at page 8-43.
6-108
DX100
6.9.8
6
6.9
Convenient Functions
Parameter Setting Function
Functional Condition Setting
Select {SETUP}  {FUNCTIONAL CONDITION SETTING} to display the
following window.
• COORDINATE (PAM) (S2C1100)
Refer to chapter 8.2.0.24 "S3C1098 to S3C1102: POSITION
CORRECTING FUNCTION DURING PLAYBACK" at page 8-11.
Setting
Parameter Status
Base
0
Robot
1
Tool
2
User #1
3
:
User #63
65
• POSITION ADJUST RANGE (PAM) (S2C1098)
• SPEED ADJUST RANGE (PAM) (S2C1099)
• POSTURE ANGLE ADJUST RANGE (PAM) (S2C1102)
Refer to chapter 8.2.0.24 "S3C1098 to S3C1102: POSITION
CORRECTING FUNCTION DURING PLAYBACK" at page 8-11.
6-109
6
Convenient Functions
6.10 Jog Key Allocation
DX100
6.10
6.10.1
Jog Key Allocation
Jog Key Allocation Function
This function enables to operate external axis without switching control
groups by using operation keys of 7th-axis (E+, E-) and 8th-axis (8+,8-) on
the programing pendant after setting any external axis to them.
CAUTION
•
Operation of external axis by using the allocated operation keys of
7th-axis and 8th-axis are valid only when operating a robot.
In the case where operating external axes, operate them by using
keys from the key for 1st -axis.
Furthermore, when the robot is equipped with 7th and 8th axes,
keys on the pendant are used to operate existing axes on a priority
basis.
For example, when the robot is equipped with 7 axes, E-axis will
move even if the external axis operation is allocated to 7th-axis (E+,
E-) operational key.
This function can operate other control group than displayed in the upper part of the programming pendant (Status display area or the LED of [ROBOT] or [EX.AXIS] keys).
NOTE
Also, the simultaneous operation of the robot and the external axes is possible by pressing several axis operational
keys at a time. Please be careful to the axes movements
when pressing them.
6-110
DX100
6
Convenient Functions
6.10 Jog Key Allocation
6.10.2 Jog Key Allocation Setting
6.10.2.1 Allocation of the Jog Key
CAUTION
a
•
Allocation of the jog keys is valid only in the management mode
while only confirmation of allocated axes is valid in the operation
mode and edit mode.
NOTE
The setup conditions are saved in the following parameters.
Even if the same numbered external axes are allocated to a
key (example:S1 for the 1st-axis), the value of the parameter to be saved varies depending on the composition of the
control group of the system. In this consequence, when
loading the parameter file (ALL.PRM or AC.PRM), please
make sure to confirm the allocating status before executing
the function.
Parameters for saving the setup conditions of jog key allocation.
S2C739 7th-axis
S2C740 8th-axis
1. Select {SETUP} under main menu.
2. Select {JOG KEY ALLOCATION}.
– Jog key allocation window appears.
6-111
DX100
6
Convenient Functions
6.10 Jog Key Allocation
3. Move the cursor key to “GROUP” and press down [SELECT] key.
– The list of allocatable external axes appears.
4. Select an external axis to be allocated.
– The selected external axis is indicated in “GROUP” and “1” is
indicated in “AXIS NO”.
5. (In the cases where the external axis is composed of more than two
axes and the axis from the 2nd-axis are operated)
Move the cursor key to “AXIS NO”. and press down [SELECT] key.
– The list of selected external axes appears.
6. Select a desired axis number.
– The selected axis is indicated in “AXIS NO”.
6-112
DX100
6
Convenient Functions
6.10 Jog Key Allocation
6.10.2.2 Cancellation of Jog Key Allocation
1. Select {SETUP} under main menu.
2. Select {JOG KEY ALLOCATION}.
– Jog key allocation window appears.
3. Move the cursor key to “GROUP” and press down [SELECT] key.
– The list of allocatable external axes appears.
4. Select “NONE”.
– “******” is indicated in “GROUP” and “AXIS NO”.
6-113
DX100
6.10.2.3
6
Convenient Functions
6.10 Jog Key Allocation
Operating Method of Allocated External Axis
CAUTION
•
When the same external axis (same group and axis number) is
allocated to 7th- and 8th-axis keys, it won’t move even both keys
are pressed individually. In the case like this, the message “Check
the setting of JOG KEY ALLOCATION(7th and 8th)” is indicated to
alarm that the same external axis is allocated to two different keys.
Please cancel the allocation setting or allocate another external axis
to either of the key.
1. Press [ROBOT] key.
– A mark of robot is indicated at the left side of the status area on the
programming pendant, and this expresses that the robot is selected
to be the object of operation.
Also, the LED of [ROBOT] key lights.
2. Press 7th(E+,E-)-axis or 8th(8+,8-)-axis operation key.
– The allocated external axes moves if there are no 7th- and 8th-axes
and the allocation setting was done properly.
6-114
6
Convenient Functions
6.11 Energy-Saving Function
DX100
6.11
6.11.1
Energy-Saving Function
Energy-Saving Function
Energy-saving function is a function to save power by halting the power to
the robot after applying brake to the motor when robot’s all axes won’t
move for a designated period of time while servo is turned ON in play
mode. The initial designated period of time is 10 minutes.
This energy-saving function is valid when all the following condition met.
1. Energy-saving function is valid.
2. The system input signal (signal to prohibit on energy-saving mode
#40580) is turned OFF.
Followings are the status of the robot while this function is valid.
1. The message “On energy saving mode” is indicated on the
programming pendant.
2. The servo is turned ON.
3. The jobs under execution are continuously executed.
4. The system output signal (ENERGY-SAVING:SOUT#0576(#50727))to
indicate that it is in energy-saving status is turned ON while other
signals won’t change.
CAUTION
This function is cancelled in the following cases.
– When the programming pendant mode is switched to teach
mode.
– When the system input signal of external servo OFF(1,2,3) is
input.
– When the axis, which belongs to the subject control group of the
executing job, is about to move while energy-saving function is
valid.
– In the cases where emergency stop or servo OFF is executed
when alarming.
NOTE
This function will not be cancelled if the system input signal
(signal to prohibit energy-saving #40580) is turned ON.
This signal merely prohibits to shift the status to energy-saving status.
6-115
DX100
6.11.2
6.11.2.1
6
Convenient Functions
6.11 Energy-Saving Function
Energy-Saving Setting Method
Valid/Invalid of Energy-Saving Setting
CAUTION
•
Valid/invalid of the energy-saving function is available only in the
management mode while only confirmation of this function is
available in the operation mode and edit mode.
1. Select {SETUP} under main menu.
2. Select {ENERGY SAVING FUNCTION}.
– Energy-saving function window appears.
6-116
DX100
6
Convenient Functions
6.11 Energy-Saving Function
3. Move the cursor key to “ENERGY SAVING FUNCTION” and press
[SELECT].
– Valid and invalid alternate at each press of select key.

Press [SELECT] key

6-117
DX100
6
Convenient Functions
6.11 Energy-Saving Function
4. Move the cursor key to {SETTING TIME} and press [SELECT] key.
– Input the time you want to start energy-saving after the robot is
stopped into {SETTING TIME} section (unit: min.). The initial value
is set to 10 min. and the range of the inputting value is from 1 to 60.
6.11.2.2
Accumulated Energy-Saving Time Clearance
1. Select {SETUP} under main menu.
2. Select {ENERGY SAVING FUNCTION}.
– Energy-saving function window appears.
3. Move the cursor key to {ACCUMULTED ENERGY-SAVING TIME}.
4. Move the cursor key to {DATA} and press [SELECT] key.
– “CLEAR ACCUMULTED” appears in the pull-down menu.
6-118
DX100
6
Convenient Functions
6.11 Energy-Saving Function
5. Select {CLEAR ACCUMULTED}
– The confirmation dialog box appears.
6. Select “YES” on the dialog box,
– The accumulated energy-saving time is cleared.
6-119
DX100
6.11.3
6.11.3.1
6
Convenient Functions
6.11 Energy-Saving Function
Energy-Saving Status Confirmation Method
Confirmation by the accumulated energy-saving time
1. Select {SETUP} under main menu.
2. Select {ENERGY SAVING FUNCTION}.
– Energy-saving function window appears.
The accumulated energy-saving time is being counted up while the
status is in the energy-saving mode.
6.11.3.2
Confirmation by System Signal Output
1. Select {IN/OUT} under main menu.
2. Select {SPECIFIC OUTPUT}.
– The specific output window appears.
3. Press [PAGE] or [SELECT] key to display SOUT#0576 (#50727).
– The system output status during the energy-saving status is
indicated.
This signal is turned ON while in the energy-saving mode.
– This signal is turned OFF after the energy-saving mode is released.
6-120
6
Convenient Functions
6.12 Instruction Displaying Color Setting Function
DX100
6.12
Instruction Displaying Color Setting Function
6.12.1 Setting the Instruction Displaying Color on the Job Window1)
With this function, each instruction can be displayed on a color to color
basis on the job window.
The following instructions are the subject of this function.
• Move instruction
• DEVICE instruction
• Comment instruction
• Label instruction
• Macro instruction (when the macro function is effective)
• I/O instruction
• All the instructions other than listed above
The color of each instruction in the job window can be set on the DISPLAY
COLOR CONDITION SETTING window.
1. Select {SETUP} under the main menu.
2. Select {DISPLAY COLOR CONDITION SETTING}.
– The display color condition setting window appears.
1 Instruction displaying color setting function on the job window is available from
version DS2.00-00.
6-121
DX100
6
Convenient Functions
6.12 Instruction Displaying Color Setting Function
3. Move the cursor to the instruction to be changed and press [SELECT].
– The list of the candidate colors for the instruction is displayed.
4. Select a color.
– The color of each instruction is fixed.
5. Select JOB window.
– Each instruction is displayed in the selected colors on the job
window.
6-122
6
Convenient Functions
6.13 Present Manipulator Position Output Function
DX100
6.13
Present Manipulator Position Output Function
6.13.1 Outline
Output the present manipulator’s cartesian position (base coordinate) to
the specified register.
6.13.2 Parameters
The following parameters specify the function and output register number.
S1CxG
Meaning
208
Specify a function which outputs a specified value of the present cartesian position
(base coordinate) to the register
0: invalid
1: Valid
209
Specify the output size to the register
0: 2 bytes output
1: 4 bytes output
210
Cartesian position (command value) X
register number of output destination
211
Cartesian position (command value) Y
register number of output destination
212
Cartesian position (command value) Z
register number of output destination
213
Cartesian position (command value) Rx
register number of output destination
214
Cartesian position (command value) Ry
register number of output destination
215
Cartesian position (command value) Rz
register number of output destination
216
Cartesian position (command value) Re
register number of output destination
217
Specify a function which outputs a FB value of the present cartesian position (base
coordinate) to the register
0: invalid
1: Valid
218
Specify the output size to the register
0: 2 bytes output
1: 4 bytes output
219
Cartesian position (FB value) X
220
Cartesian position (FB value) Y
register number of output destination
221
Cartesian position (FB value) Z
register number of output destination
222
Cartesian position (FB value) Rx
register number of output destination
223
Cartesian position (FB value) Ry
register number of output destination
224
Cartesian position (FB value) Rz
register number of output destination
224
Cartesian position (FB value) Re
register number of output destination
6-123
register number of output destination
DX100
6
Convenient Functions
6.13 Present Manipulator Position Output Function
(Example 1)
S1C1G
Setting value
208
1
209
0
210
10
211
11
212
12
213
13
214
14
215
15
216
16
When setting the parameter as above, the manipulator’s present cartesian
position is output to the registers as follows.
M010 = Manipulator’s present cartesian position (command value)
X
[unit: mm]
M011 = Manipulator’s present cartesian position (command value)
Y
[unit: mm]
M012 = Manipulator’s present cartesian position (command value)
Z
[unit: mm]
M013 = Manipulator’s present cartesian position (command value)
Rx [unit: deg]
M014 = Manipulator’s present cartesian position (command value)
Ry [unit: deg]
M015 = Manipulator’s present cartesian position (command value)
Rz [unit: deg]
M016 = Manipulator’s present cartesian position (command value)
Re [unit: deg]
6-124
DX100
6
Convenient Functions
6.13 Present Manipulator Position Output Function
(Example 2)
S1C1G
Setting value
217
1
218
1
219
10
220
12
221
14
222
16
223
18
224
20
225
22
When setting the parameter as above, the manipulator’s present cartesian
position is output to the registers as follows
M010= Lower 2 bytes of the manipulator’s present cartesian position (FB value)
X
[unit: µmm]
M011= Upper 2 bytes of the
manipulator’s present cartesian position (FB value)
X
[unit: µmm]
M012= Lower 2 bytes of the
manipulator’s present cartesian position (FB value)
Y
[unit: µmm]
M013= Upper 2 bytes of the
manipulator’s present cartesian position (FB value)
Y
[unit: µmm]
M014= Lower 2 bytes of the
manipulator’s present cartesian position (FB value)
Z
[unit: µmm]
M015= Upper 2 bytes of the
manipulator’s present cartesian position (FB value)
Z
[unit: µmm]
M016= Lower 2 bytes of the
manipulator’s present cartesian position (FB value)
Rx [unit: 0.001deg]
M017= Upper 2 bytes of the
manipulator’s present cartesian position (FB value)
Rx [unit: 0.001deg]
M018= Lower 2 bytes of the
manipulator’s present cartesian position (FB value)
Ry [unit: 0.001deg]
M019= Upper 2 bytes of the
manipulator’s present cartesian position (FB value)
Ry [unit: 0.001deg]
M020= Lower 2 bytes of the
manipulator’s present cartesian position (FB value)
Rz [unit: 0.001deg]
M021= Upper 2 bytes of the
manipulator’s present cartesian position (FB value)
Rz [unit: 0.001deg]
M022= Lower 2 bytes of the
manipulator’s present cartesian position (FB value)
Re [unit: 0.001deg]
M023= Upper 2 bytes of the
manipulator’s present cartesian position (FB value)
Re [unit: 0.001deg]
6-125
DX100
6
Convenient Functions
6.13 Present Manipulator Position Output Function
• When validating the command value register output function (S1CxG208=1), never fail to set the output register
number (S1CxG210 to 216) of each coordinate value.
• When validating the FB value register output function
(S1CxG217=1), never fail to set the output register number (S1CxG219 to 225) of each coordinate value.
NOTE
• In case 2 bytes is set as the register output size
(S1CxG209=1 or S1CxG218=1), the unit of X,Y and Zaxes coordinate value becomes “mm” and that of Rx, Ry,
Rz and Re coordinate value becomes “deg”. In both
cases, only the lower 2 bytes are output.
• When setting 4 bytes to the register output size
(S1CxG209=1 or S1CxG218=1), the unit of X,Y and Zaxes coordinate value becomes “µmm” and that of Rx, Ry,
Rz and Re coordinate value becomes “0.0001deg”.
• When setting 4 bytes to the register output size
(S1CxG209=1 or S1CxG218=1), upper byte of the coordinate value is output to the following register number to the
specified output register number. In this consequence,
confirm the register’s status of use before setting the output size to the register.
6-126
6
Convenient Functions
6.14 Softlimit Setting Function
DX100
6.14
Softlimit Setting Function
6.14.1 About the Softlimit Setting Function
The softlimit setting function is a function to set the softlimit to limit the
range of the manipulator motion in software.
6.14.2 The Softlimit Setting Screen
CAUTION
•
The softlimit setting screen is displayed at the teach mode and the
management mode.
1. Select {ROBOT} in the main menu.
2. Select {SOFTLIMIT SETTING}.
– The softlimit setting screen is displayed.
6-127
DX100
6
Convenient Functions
6.14 Softlimit Setting Function
3. Set the control group as desired.
GO BACK
– Switch to the desired control group by the page key
selection dialog.
PAGE
or the
– As for the selection dialog, select [PAGE] on the screen and move
the cursor to desired control group. Press [SELECT].
6.14.3
Setting the Softlimit by Numerical Value Input
1. Move the cursor to the desired axis of the softlimit (+) or the softlimit (-),
and press [SELECT].
2. Enter the values of the softlimit (+)/ the softlimit (-), and press
[ENTER].
– The softlimit is set.
6-128
DX100
6
Convenient Functions
6.14 Softlimit Setting Function
6.14.4 Set the Current Value to the Softlimit
1. Move the manipulator by the axis key.
– Move the manipulator to the position of which value is maximum
number or minimum number of the softlimit by the axis key.
2. Move the cursor to the desired axis of the softlimit (+) or the softlimit (-).
– When change the maximum number of the first softlimit,
move the cursor to the first axis of the softlimit (+).
– When change the minimum number of the first softlimit,
move the cursor to the first axis of the softlimit (-).
3. Press [MODIFY].
– The message [Update the data with <ENTER>.] appears.
– If perform the one of the following operations, the modify operation
will be canceled.
• Press [MODIFY] key.
• Press [SELECT] key.
• Press the one of [ ↑ ] [ ↓ ] [ ← ] [ → ] keys.
• Press [PAGE] key.
• Press [DIRECT OPEN] key.
• Press a ten key.
• Select the reserved display.
• Switch the screen.
• Switch the mode.
6-129
DX100
6
Convenient Functions
6.14 Softlimit Setting Function
– The message [Update operation with <CHANGE> was canceled.]
appears.
4. Press [ENTER].
– The current position is set as the softlimit.
6-130
DX100
6.14.5
6
Convenient Functions
6.14 Softlimit Setting Function
Set the Softlimit (+)/ the Softlimit (-) to the Initial Maker Value
1. Select {DATA} in the pull-down menu.
– {Initial Maker Value} appears.
2. Select {Initial Maker Value}.
– The confirmation dialog appears.
3. Select [YES].
– The initial maker value is set for all displayed axes.
The operation is canceled when select [NO].
NOTE
The initial maker value limits the range of the mechanical
motion of the manipulator, and it varies according to the
model of the robot.
It is different from the motion range which was set to add
the base station axis.
6-131
DX100
6
Convenient Functions
6.14 Softlimit Setting Function
6.14.6
Change the Coordinate Display of the Softlimit (+)/ the Softlimit (-)
1. Select {DISPLAY} in the pull-down menu.
– {Coordinate Change} appears.
2. Select {Coordinate Change}.
– When the displaying coordinate is a pulse,
the robot axis is changed to the angle display;
the base axis is changed to the distance display; and
the station axes is changed for each axis by the value of the station
axis display parameter (S2C265 to 288).
When the first bit is OFF, the first axis is changed to the angle
display.
When the second bit is ON, the second axis is changed to the
distance display.
When the display coordinate is angle/distance, the all axes are
changed to the pulse display.
•
When the display of the softlimit value is the angle
display, the pulse display and the sign may be different.
•
Be sure to confirm the motion range by the jog operation
after changing the softlimit value.
NOTE
6-132
6
Convenient Functions
6.15 Analog Output Function Corresponding to Speed
DX100
6.15
Analog Output Function Corresponding to Speed
6.15.1 Overview
The analog output function corresponding to speed changes the analog
output value automatically, according to the manipulator operating speed.
This function does not need resetting of the analog output value according
to the operating speed, so that the time required for job teaching can be
reduced.
For example, when the thickness of sealing or painting should be
constant, the discharged amount of seals or paints can be controlled by
the manipulator operating speed.
Speed : slow
Discharged amount : small
Speed : fast
Discharged amount : large
NOTE
For the analog output function corresponding to speed, the
following board is needed.
• Analog output expansion board: JANCD-YEW02-E
6-133
6
Convenient Functions
6.15 Analog Output Function Corresponding to Speed
DX100
6.15.2
6.15.2.1
Instructions
Instructions for Analog Output Function Corresponding to Speed
The instructions, ARATION and ARATIOF, are used for the analog output
function corresponding to speed.

ARATION
The analog output function corresponding to speed is performed after
executing ARATION instruction. This instruction is valid during circular
interpolation, linear interpolation or spline interpolation. It is executed only
at playback or FWD key operation; it is not executed during axis
operation.
This instruction is also used when each set value for the analog output
function corresponding to speed is to be changed.
ARATION AO#(1) BV=10.00 V=200.0 OFV=2.00

Output port number
General analog output port to execute the analog output corresponding
to speed
Setting range : 1 to 40
Basic voltage
Voltage to be output at the speed set with the basic speed.
Setting range : -14.00 to +14.00V
Basic speed
Operating speed which becomes the basis for when the set voltage is
output.
Setting range : 0.1 to 1500.0mm/sec
1 to 9000cm/min
Offset voltage
Analog voltage when the operating speed is 0.
Setting range : -14.00 to +14.00V
6-134
6
Convenient Functions
6.15 Analog Output Function Corresponding to Speed
DX100
According to the set value of the ARATION instruction, the output
characteristics for the relation between the operating speed and the
analog voltage are calculated. The analog output function corresponding
to speed is executed depending on these output characteristics.
The following graph shows the output characteristics.
Fig. 6-5: Output Characteristics When Analog Output Function Corresponding to
Speed is Used
Analog voltage
14V
Basic
voltage
Offset
voltage
0
NOTE

Basic
speed
Operating
speed
When the analog output value exceeds ± 14.00 V because
of the operating speed, the value is limited within ± 14.00 V.
ARATIOF
When the ARATIOF instruction is executed, the analog output
corresponding to speed is completed, and the set offset voltage becomes
the fixed output.
ARATIOF AO#(1)

Output port number
General analog output port to end the analog output corresponding to
speed
Setting range : 1 to 40
6-135
6
Convenient Functions
6.15 Analog Output Function Corresponding to Speed
DX100
6.15.2.2
Registration of Instructions
The instructions can be registered when the cursor is in the address area
on the job content display in teach mode. Perform the following
operations before registering an instruction.
1. Select {JOB} under the main menu
2. Select {JOB CONTENT}
3. Move the cursor to the address area
Address
area

Instruction
area
ARATION
1. Move the cursor to one line above the place to register the ARATION
instruction
The line above the
place to register
ARATION instruction.
2. Press [INFORM LIST]
3. Select [IN/OUT]
– The instruction list dialog appears.
4. Select “ARATION”
– The ARATION instruction is indicated in the input buffer line.
6-136
DX100
6
Convenient Functions
6.15 Analog Output Function Corresponding to Speed
5. Change any additional items and numerical values
– <Register without changes>
To register without changes, perform operation of step 6.
– <Register with addition or change of the additional items>
• To change the output port number
In case of using [SHIFT] and the cursor key, move the cursor to
the output port number, and then press [SHIFT] and the cursor
key simultaneously, to change the output port number.
In case of using the number keys, move the cursor to the output
port number, and press [SELECT] to display an input buffer line.
Enter the number, and then press [ENTER] to change the number
displayed.
• To change the basic voltage, the speed, and the offset voltage
Move the cursor to the instruction in the input buffer line, and then
press [SELECT]. The detail edit display is shown.
Move the cursor to “UNUSED” of the additional item to be
changed, and then press [SELECT]. The selection dialog is displayed.
Move the cursor to the additional item to be changed, and press
[SELECT].
6-137
6
Convenient Functions
6.15 Analog Output Function Corresponding to Speed
DX100
When the additional item is changed, press [ENTER]. The detail
edit window closes, and the job content window appears.
6. Press [INSERT] and [ENTER]
– The instruction indicated in the input buffer line is registered.
The line where
ARATION
instruction is
registered.

ARATIOF
1. Move the cursor to one line above the place to register ARATIOF
instruction
The line above the
place to register
ARATIOF instruction.
2. Press [INFORM LIST]
3. Select [IN/OUT]
– The instruction list dialog appears.
4. Select “ARATIOF”
– The ARATIOF instruction is indicated in the input buffer line.
5. Press [INSERT] and [ENTER]
– The ARATIOF instruction is registered.
6-138
DX100
6
Convenient Functions
6.15 Analog Output Function Corresponding to Speed
6.15.2.3 Analog Output Display
The current settings can be confirmed on the analog output window.
Terminal
General analog output port
OUTPUT (V)
Indicates the voltage which is currently output.
BASIC (V)
Indicates the basic voltage used for the analog output corresponding to
speed.
This value is used until a new value is set by ARATION instruction.
TRAIT
Indicates the current output characteristics of the output port.
SP RAT : during execution of the analog output corresponding to speed
STATIC : fixed output status
OFFSET (V)
Indicates the offset voltage used for the analog output corresponding to
speed.
This value is used until a new value is set by ARATION instruction.
BASIC SPD
Indicates the basic speed used for the analog output corresponding to
speed.
This value is used until a new value is set by ARATION instruction.
ROBOT
Indicates the manipulator number for the analog output corresponding
to speed.
1. Select {IN/OUT} from the main menu
2. Select {ANALOG OUTPUT}
– The analog output window appears.
The output terminal numbers which follow
the AOUT4 can be switched and displayed by pressing the page key.
6-139
6
Convenient Functions
6.15 Analog Output Function Corresponding to Speed
DX100
6.15.3
6.15.3.1
Examples
Examples of Output Characteristics
The graph below shows the change in the output characteristics when the
following job is done.
Output Voltage (V)
MOVJ VJ=50.00
ARATION AO#(1) BV=7.00 V=150.0 OFV=-10.00
7.00
MOVL V=50.0
-4.33
MOVC V=100.0
1.33
MOVC V=100.0
1.33
MOVC V=100.0
1.33
MOVL V=200.0
12.67
Analog voltage
(V)
14V
Basic
voltage
10
7
5
0
50
-5
Offset
-10
voltage
6-140
100
150
Basic
speed
200
Operating speed
(mm/s)
DX100
6
Convenient Functions
6.15 Analog Output Function Corresponding to Speed
6.15.3.2 Example of Variation of Operating Speed and Analog Output Value
The following graph shows the change of the analog output according to the speed variation.
MOVL V=200.0    
ARATION AO#(1) BV=10.00 V=200.0 OFV=-2.00
MOVC V=150.0    
MOVC VR=20.0     (When the tool center point speed is 100 mm/s)
MOVC V=150.0    
MOVL V=180.0    
MOVL     (When the tool center point speed is 180 mm/s)
AOUT AO#(1) 10.00    
Fig. 6-6: Analog Voltage according to Speed
Analog
voltage (V)
Operating
speed (mm/s)
10
7
1
8.8
200
5
6
7
180
4
2
4
150
3
100
Time
NOTE
• Since the analog output corresponding to speed is made
for the calculated speed, there may be little difference
from the actual operating speed of the manipulator.
• When a posture speed is specified, the analog output corresponding to speed is made for the operating speed at
the tool center point with the posture speed.
6-141
6
Convenient Functions
6.15 Analog Output Function Corresponding to Speed
DX100
6.15.4
Filter Process
In the analog output function corresponding to speed, the output analog
signal can be filtered by setting a filter constant at the parameters.
6.15.4.1
When Parameter is Set to “0”
The analog signal according to the speed reference (the speed
determined by a path operation) is output.
Analog output signal
Manipulator actual speed
Voltage Speed
Time
6.15.4.2
When Parameter is Set to Values Other Than “0”
The analog signal according to the speed of filtered speed reference is
output. By the filter process, the output signal can be close to the
manipulator’s actual speed.
Analog output signal
Manipulator actual speed
Voltage Speed
Time
6.15.4.3
Parameter Setting
Adjust the settings of parameters during actual operations.
Table 6-4: Parameter (Sheet 1 of 3)
Parameter
Number
Analog Output
Content
Unit
S3C1111
S3C1112
Analog output No.1
Analog output No.1
Primary filter constant
Secondary filter constant
[msec]
[msec]
S3C1113
S3C1114
Analog output No.2
Analog output No.2
Primary filter constant
Secondary filter constant
[msec]
[msec]
S3C1115
S3C1116
Analog output No.3
Analog output No.3
Primary filter constant
Secondary filter constant
[msec]
[msec]
S3C1117
S3C1118
Analog output No.4
Analog output No.4
Primary filter constant
Secondary filter constant
[msec]
[msec]
S3C1119
S3C1120
Analog output No.5
Analog output No.5
Primary filter constant
Secondary filter constant
[msec]
[msec]
S3C1121
S3C1122
Analog output No.6
Analog output No.6
Primary filter constant
Secondary filter constant
[msec]
[msec]
S3C1123
S3C1124
Analog output No.7
Analog output No.7
Primary filter constant
Secondary filter constant
[msec]
[msec]
S3C1125
S3C1126
Analog output No.8
Analog output No.8
Primary filter constant
Secondary filter constant
[msec]
[msec]
6-142
DX100
6
Convenient Functions
6.15 Analog Output Function Corresponding to Speed
Table 6-4: Parameter (Sheet 2 of 3)
Parameter
Number
Analog Output
Content
Unit
S3C1127
S3C1128
Analog output No.9
Analog output No.9
Primary filter constant
Secondary filter constant
[msec]
[msec]
S3C1129
S3C1130
Analog output No.10
Analog output No.10
Primary filter constant
Secondary filter constant
[msec]
[msec]
S3C1131
S3C1132
Analog output No.11
Analog output No.11
Primary filter constant
Secondary filter constant
[msec]
[msec]
S3C1133
S3C1134
Analog output No.12
Analog output No.12
Primary filter constant
Secondary filter constant
[msec]
[msec]
S3C1135
S3C1136
Analog output No.13
Analog output No.13
Primary filter constant
Secondary filter constant
[msec]
[msec]
S3C1137
S3C1138
Analog output No.14
Analog output No.14
Primary filter constant
Secondary filter constant
[msec]
[msec]
S3C1139
S3C1140
Analog output No.15
Analog output No.15
Primary filter constant
Secondary filter constant
[msec]
[msec]
S3C1141
S3C1142
Analog output No.16
Analog output No.16
Primary filter constant
Secondary filter constant
[msec]
[msec]
S3C1143
S3C1144
Analog output No.17
Analog output No.17
Primary filter constant
Secondary filter constant
[msec]
[msec]
S3C1145
S3C1146
Analog output No.18
Analog output No.18
Primary filter constant
Secondary filter constant
[msec]
[msec]
S3C1147
S3C1148
Analog output No.19
Analog output No.19
Primary filter constant
Secondary filter constant
[msec]
[msec]
S3C1149
S3C1150
Analog output No.20
Analog output No.20
Primary filter constant
Secondary filter constant
[msec]
[msec]
S3C1151
S3C1152
Analog output No.21
Analog output No.21
Primary filter constant
Secondary filter constant
[msec]
[msec]
S3C1153
S3C1154
Analog output No.22
Analog output No.22
Primary filter constant
Secondary filter constant
[msec]
[msec]
S3C1155
S3C1156
Analog output No.23
Analog output No.23
Primary filter constant
Secondary filter constant
[msec]
[msec]
S3C1157
S3C1158
Analog output No.24
Analog output No.24
Primary filter constant
Secondary filter constant
[msec]
[msec]
S3C1159
S3C1160
Analog output No.25
Analog output No.25
Primary filter constant
Secondary filter constant
[msec]
[msec]
S3C1161
S3C1162
Analog output No.26
Analog output No.26
Primary filter constant
Secondary filter constant
[msec]
[msec]
S3C1163
S3C1164
Analog output No.27
Analog output No.27
Primary filter constant
Secondary filter constant
[msec]
[msec]
S3C1165
S3C1166
Analog output No.28
Analog output No.28
Primary filter constant
Secondary filter constant
[msec]
[msec]
S3C1167
S3C1168
Analog output No.29
Analog output No.29
Primary filter constant
Secondary filter constant
[msec]
[msec]
S3C1169
S3C1170
Analog output No.30
Analog output No.30
Primary filter constant
Secondary filter constant
[msec]
[msec]
S3C1171
S3C1172
Analog output No.31
Analog output No.31
Primary filter constant
Secondary filter constant
[msec]
[msec]
S3C1173
S3C1174
Analog output No.32
Analog output No.32
Primary filter constant
Secondary filter constant
[msec]
[msec]
S3C1175
S3C1176
Analog output No.33
Analog output No.33
Primary filter constant
Secondary filter constant
[msec]
[msec]
6-143
DX100
6
Convenient Functions
6.15 Analog Output Function Corresponding to Speed
Table 6-4: Parameter (Sheet 3 of 3)
Parameter
Number
Analog Output
Content
Unit
S3C1177
S3C1178
Analog output No.34
Analog output No.34
Primary filter constant
Secondary filter constant
[msec]
[msec]
S3C1179
S3C1180
Analog output No.35
Analog output No.35
Primary filter constant
Secondary filter constant
[msec]
[msec]
S3C1181
S3C1182
Analog output No.36
Analog output No.36
Primary filter constant
Secondary filter constant
[msec]
[msec]
S3C1183
S3C1184
Analog output No.37
Analog output No.37
Primary filter constant
Secondary filter constant
[msec]
[msec]
S3C1185
S3C1186
Analog output No.38
Analog output No.38
Primary filter constant
Secondary filter constant
[msec]
[msec]
S3C1187
S3C1188
Analog output No.39
Analog output No.39
Primary filter constant
Secondary filter constant
[msec]
[msec]
S3C1189
S3C1190
Analog output No.40
Analog output No.40
Primary filter constant
Secondary filter constant
[msec]
[msec]
The standard parameter settings are as follows.
• For small capacity robot with a payload 6 kg and 16 kg
Primary filter constant : 50 msec
Secondary filter constant : 50 msec
• For large capacity robot with a payload 60 kg and 130 kg
Primary filter constant : 100 msec
Secondary filter constant : 100 msec
6-144
DX100
6
Convenient Functions
6.15 Analog Output Function Corresponding to Speed
6.15.5 Precautions
6.15.5.1 When Analog Output Corresponding to Speed is Interrupted
If the manipulator is stopped for some reason and the editing operation is
performed, the analog output corresponding to speed is interrupted. This
interruption is performed in all output terminals, and the analog voltage
fixed immediately before the interruption is output to each output terminal.
The analog output corresponding to speed is not interrupted in any other
cases.
6.15.5.2 When More than One Manipulator is Used
The attribute of the job where the instruction is executed determines the
manipulator where the analog output corresponding to speed is
performed.
For a coordinated job, the analog output corresponding to speed is
performed at the operating speed of the manipulator at the slave side.
6-145
7
7.1
DX100
7
External Memory Devices
Memory Devices
External Memory Devices
7.1
Memory Devices
The following memory devices can be used in the DX100 to save and load
data such as jobs and parameters.
Device
Function
Media (destination of
saved/ loaded data)
Optional function
requirement
CF: Pendant Standard
Compact Flash Card
(CF card)
No requirement.
Programming pendant is
equipped with a slot.
USB:
Pendant
Standard
USB Memory Stick
No requirement.
Programming pendant is
equipped with a slot.
FC1
Optional1)
2DD floppy disk,
personal computer
(FC1 emulator)
“FC1“or personal
computer with “FC1
emulator”
FC1 (DX)
Optional1)
Personal computer
(FC1 emulator)
Personal computer with
“FC1 emulator”
FC2
Optional1)
2DD floppy disk,
2HD floppy disk
“FC2”
PC
Optional1)
Personal computer
(MOTOCOM32 host)
Via RS-232C: “Data
transmission function“and
“MOTOCOM32”
Via Ethernet: “Ethernet
function” plus above two
requirements
FTP
Optional1)
FTP server such as
personal computer
“Data transmission
function”, “MOTOCOM32”,
and “FTP function”
1 For the operation, refer to instruction manuals for each optional function.
7-1
DX100
7.1.1
7
7.1
External Memory Devices
Memory Devices
Compact Flash (CF Cards)
The programming pendant is equipped with CF card slot. Use the FAT16
or FAT32 formatted Compact Flash.
7.1.1.1
Recommended Compact Flash Cards
Refer to “9.1.2 Device” in “DX100 INSTRUCTIONS (RE-CTO-A215)” for
the recommended products used for external memory of DX100. Model
numbers are subject to be updated due to termination of product and new
addition. Contact Yaskawa representative when necessary.
7.1.1.2
Notes on handling Compact Flash
• Do not drop or bend exerting any shock or strong force to the Compact Flash.
• Keep away from water, oil, organic solvent, dust, and dirt.
• Do not use or keep the Compact Flash in places where strong static
electricity or electronic noise may occur.
• Do not insert or remove the Compact Flash or turn OFF the power
when accessing the Compact Flash (writing-in or reading-out the
Compact Flash data).
• To protect the data, back up the data regularly on other media. Damages or loss of data due to operation errors or accidents can be minimized.
*Compact Flash has a limited life span.
The life span differs depending on products or status of use. However,
normal use of Compact Flash as an external memory device for the
DX100 does not adversely affect the Compact Flash. For details, refer to
instruction manuals for each medium.
7-2
DX100
7.1.1.3
7
7.1
External Memory Devices
Memory Devices
Inserting a Compact Flash
When inserting a Compact Flash, take note of insertion direction.
With the notch and clip of the Compact Flash downward, insert the
Compact Flash slowly into the slot of the programming pendant of which
display faces up.
Forcible insertion may result in damage to the Compact Flash or CF card
slot.
After inserting the card, be sure to close the cover of the slot before
starting operation.
Fig. 7-1: Using a Compact Flash Card
START
REMOTE
PLAY
HOLD
TEACH
JOB
EDIT
DISPLAY
JOB CONTENT
TEST01
CONTROL GROUP:R1
0000 NOP
0001 SET B000 1
0002 SET B001 0
0003 MOVJ VJ=80.00
0004 MOVJ VJ=80.00
0005 DOUT OT#(10) ON
0006 TIMER T=3.00
0007 MOVJ VJ=80.00
0008 MOVJ VJ=100.00
0009 MOVJ VJ=100.00
0010 MOVJ VJ=100.00
0011 MOVJ VJ=100.00
UTILITY
S:0000
TOOL:
Insertion slot for
the Compact Flash
Insertion direction
MOVJ VJ=0.78
Main Menu
Turn on servo power
Short Cut
top surface
TOOL SEL
LAYOUT
GO BACK
DIRECT
OPEN
COORD
PAGE
Multi
ENTRY
MAIN
MENU
X-
S-
S+
Y-
Y+
Z-
Z+
L-
CANCEL
ASSIST
SERVO ON
X+
AREA
SELECT
SERVO
ON
READY
SIMPLE
MENU
HIGH
SPEED
L+
X-
X+
R-
R+
Y-
Y+
Z-
Z+
B-
B+
FAST
U-
MANUAL SPEED
U+
T-
T+
8-
8+
SLOW
E-
E+
SHIFT
INTER
LOCK
7
8
9
TEST
START
SHIFT
ROBOT
INFORM
LIST
4
5
6
BWD
FWD
EX.AXIS
WELD
ON/OFF
1
2
3
DELETE
INSERT
AUX
MOTION
TYPE
0
.
-
MODIFY
ENTER
7-3
Notch
Click
7
7.1
DX100
7.1.2
External Memory Devices
Memory Devices
USB Memory Stick
The programming pendant is equipped with a USB connector. Use the
FAT16 or FAT32 formatted USB memory stick.
7.1.2.1
Recommended USB Memory Stick
Refer to “9.1.2 Device” in “DX100 INSTRUCTIONS (RE-CTO-A215)” for
the recommended products used for external memory of DX100. Model
numbers are subject to be updated due to termination of product and new
addition. Contact Yaskawa representative when necessary.
7.1.2.2
Notes on handling USB Memory Stick
• Do not drop or bend exerting any shock or strong force to the Compact Flash.
• Keep away from water, oil, organic solvent, dust, and dirt.
• Do not use or keep the Compact Flash in places where strong static
electricity or electronic noise may occur.
• Do not insert or remove the Compact Flash or turn OFF the power
when accessing the Compact Flash (writing-in or reading-out the
Compact Flash data).
• To protect the data, back up the data regularly on other media. Damages or loss of data due to operation errors or accidents can be minimized.
*USB memory stick has a limited life span.
The life span differs depending on products or status of use. However,
normal use of USB memory stick as an external memory device for the
DX100 does not adversely affect the USB memory stick. For details, refer
to instruction manuals for each medium.
7-4
DX100
7.1.2.3
7
7.1
External Memory Devices
Memory Devices
Inserting a USB Memory Stick
When inserting a USB memory stick, take note of insertion direction.
With the USB memory stick face-up and the connector upwards, insert the
stick slowly into the slot of the programming pendant of which display
face-down.
Forcible insertion may result in damage to the USB memory stick or USB
connector.
After inserting the stick, be sure to close the cover of the connector before
starting operation.
Fig. 7-2: Using a USB Memory Stick
USB Connector
Insertion position
Top surface
USB memory stick
When a USB memory stick is used, the waterproofing of
programming pendant cannot be maintained.
NOTE
If the USB memory stick is always set in the programming
pendant, the stick may fall out of the pendant.
If it is impossible to maintain the waterproofing of programming pendant or to prevent the USB memory stick from falling out of the programming pendant, use a Compact Flash
card instead.
7-5
7
7.2
DX100
7.2
7.2.1
External Memory Devices
Handling Data
Handling Data
Data Classification
For the DX100, data that can be saved online are classified into eight
categories.
1. JOB
2. FILE/GENERAL DATA
3. BATCH USER MEMORY*1
4. PARAMETER*2
5. SYSTEM DATA
6. I/O DATA
7. BATCH CMOS*3
8. ALL CMOS AREA*4
Data saved on the external memory device can be loaded again into the
DX100.
Each data in the eight categories varies depending on applications or
options.
When the device is set to “PC” and “FTP”, data cannot be handled other
than “1. JOB” and “2. FILE/GENERAL DATA”.
Also, the “1. JOB” whose name consists of more than nine letters cannot
be handled at “FC1” and “FC2”.
*1: “3. BATCH USER MEMORY” includes “1. JOB” and “2. FILE/
GENERAL DATA”.
*2: “PARAMETER BATCH” includes all “P4. PARAMETER”.
*3: “7. BATCH CMOS” includes “3. BATCH USER MEMORY”,
“4. PARAMETER”, “5. SYSTEM DATA”, and “6. I/O DATA”.
*4:“ALL CMOS AREA” data cannot be loaded in edit mode and
management mode.
PARAMETER, I/O DATA, SYSTEM DATA, PARAMETER
BATCH, BATCH CMOS, and ALL CMOS AREA are used
for backup.
If those data are loaded by other controllers, unintended
data overwriting, unexpected operation, or abnormal system startup may occur.
Do not load those backup data into other controllers.
NOTE
If two controllers are loaded with the same job, paths of the
two manipulators are different due to the home positions or
mechanical error of the component parts.
Be sure to check the operation instruction before operation.
The data such as variable data, user coordinate data, job
data, parameter data and each condition file data should not
be changed during saving the ALL CMOS AREA, SYSTME
DATA and BATCH USER MEMORY.
Changing the those data may cause incorrect saving as
well as during the playback.
7-6
7
7.2
DX100
External Memory Devices
Handling Data
Table 7-1: Data List (Sheet 1 of 2)
Data Classification
File Name
(Saved Data)
Save
Load
OPN EDIT MAN OPN EDIT MAN
8. ALL CMOS AREA
ALCMSxx.HEX



X
X
X
7. BATCH CMOS
CMOSxx.HEX



X
X

JOBxx.HEX



X


Single job
JOBNAME.JBI



X


Related job
(Job+Condition)
JOBNAME.JBR



X


Tool data
TOOL.CND



X


Weaving data
WEAV.CND



X


User coordinate data
UFRAME.CND



X


Variable data
VAR.DAT



X


Arc start condition data ARCSRT.CND



X


Arc end condition data
ARCEND.CND



X


Welding condition
auxiliary data
ARCSUP.DAT



X


Power source
characteristic data
WELDER.DAT



X


Power source
WELDUDEF.DAT
characteristic definition
data



X


Shock detection level
data
SHOCKLVL.CND



X


Motor gun pressure
power data
SPRESS.CND



X


Motor gun dry spot
pressure data
SPRESSCL.CND



X


Spot gun characteristic SGUN.DAT
data



X


Spot welding power
source characteristic
data
SWELDER.DAT



X


Short/Full open
position data
STROKE.DAT



X


Spot I/O allocation data SPOTIO.DAT



X


Airgun condition data
AIRGUN.DAT



X


Spot welding condition
data
SPOTWELD.DAT



X


Clearance data
CLEARANCE.DAT



X


Interference area file
CUBEINTF.CND



X


ALL.PRM



X
X

Robot matching
parameter
RC.PRM



X
X

System definition
parameter
SD.PRM



X
X

3. BATCH USER MEMORY
1. JOB
2 FILE/
GENERAL
DATA
4. PARAMETER BATCH
4. PARAMETER
7-7
7
7.2
DX100
External Memory Devices
Handling Data
Table 7-1: Data List (Sheet 2 of 2)
Data Classification
8. 7. 4. 4. PARAMETER
5. I/O DATA
6. SYSTEM
DATA
File Name
(Saved Data)
Save
Load
OPN EDIT MAN OPN EDIT MAN
Coordinate home
position parameter
RO.PRM



X
X

System matching
parameter
SC.PRM



X
X

ClO parameter
CIO.PRM



X
X

Function definition
parameter
FD.PRM



X
X

Application parameter
AP.PRM



X
X

Transmission (general) RS.PRM
parameter



X
X

Sensor parameter
SE.PRM



X
X

Servo parameter
SV.PRM



X
X

Servomotor parameter
SVM.PRM



X
X

Operation control
parameter
AMC.PRM



X
X

Servo power block
parameter
SVP.PRM



X
X

Motion function
parameter
MF.PRM



X
X

SERVOPACK
parameter
SVS.PRM



X
X

Converter parameter
SVC.PRM



X
X

Robot control expand
parameter
RE.PRM



X
X

CIO program
CIOPRG.LST



X
X

I/O name data
IONAME.DAT



X
X

Pseudo input signals
PSEUDOIN.DAT



X
X

External I/O name data EXIONAME.DAT



X
X

Register name data
IOMNAME.DAT



X
X

User word register
name
UWORD.DAT



X
X

SV monitor signals
SVMON.DAT



X
X

Variable name
VARNAME.DAT



X
X

Second home position
HOME2.DAT



X
X

Alarm history data
ALMHIST.DAT



X
X
X
Home position
calibrating data
ABSO.DAT



X
X

System information
SYSTEM.SYS



X
X
X
Work home position
data
OPEORG.DAT



X
X

I/O message history
data
IOMSGHST.DAT



X
X
X
Function key allocation KEYALLOC.DAT
data



X
X

Arc monitor data



X
X
X
ARCMON.DAT
* OPN: Operation Mode, EDIT: Edit Mode, MAN: Management Mode
 : Can be done, X : Cannot be done
7-8
7
7.2
DX100
7.2.2
External Memory Devices
Handling Data
File Existence
The following data categories show whether the same file name as a file
that is going to be saved is in the external memory device or not.
• JOB
No mark appears when the selected folder has the file of the same
name.
The asterisk (*) appears when the folder does not have the same
name file.
• FILE/GENERAL DATA, PARAMETER, SYSTEM DATA, I/O DATA
Black circle (
) appears when the selected folder has the file of
the same name.
White circle (
) appears when the folder does not have the same
name file.
SUPPLEMENT
Whether the job after editing is saved or not can be judged
by checking “TO SAVE TO FD” in the JOB HEADER window. However, the status of “TO SAVE TO FD” does not
change after saving “3. BATCH USER MEMORY” and “7.
BATCH CMOS”.
Fig. 7-3: Example of JOB
Fig. 7-4: Example of FILE/GENERAL DATA
7-9
DX100
7
7.2
7.2.2.1
Saving by Overwriting
External Memory Devices
Handling Data
“3. BATCH USER MEMORY”, “7. BATCH CMOS”, and “8. ALL CMOS
AREA” can be overwritten.
As for “1. JOB”, “2. FILE/GENERAL DATA”, “4. PARAMETER”, “5.
SYSTEM DATA”, and “6. I/O DATA”, those data cannot be overwritten.
Delete the target file in the device before the saving operation. If Compact
Flash is used as the device, the file does not need to be deleted because
another folder can be created to save the data.
7-10
7
7.3
DX100
7.3
External Memory Devices
Operation Flow
Operation Flow
The following description is the operation flow for external memory
devices.
• SELECT DEVICE
Select {FD/PC CARD} --> {DEVICE}, and the destination device for
saving.
The device selected is valid after turning the power supply ON again.
*1: Sub menu {FORMAT} appears when selecting FC1 or FC2.
• SELECT FOLDER
Select {FD/PC CARD} --> {DEVICE}, and the destination folder for
saving.
The folder selected is invalid after turning the power supply ON
again.
*2: {FOLDER} appears when using the Compact Flash as a device.
*3 The settings of {CREATE NEW FOLDER}, {DELETE FOLDER},
and {ROOT FOLDER} can be set.
• SELECT SUB MENU
Select an operation to be performed from {LOAD}, {SAVE}, {VERIFY}, and {DELETE}.
• SELECT DATA CATEGORY
Select the target data category.
• SELECT DATA
Select the target data.
“3. BATCH USER MEMORY”, “7. BATCH CMOS”, and “8. ALL
CMOS AREA” do not require this operation.
*4 Individual selection, batch selection, marker (*) selection, and
canceling selection can be performed.
• EXECUTE
Select [ENTER] or {EXECUTE}.
Main Menu
{FD/PC CARD}
Sub Menu
{LOAD}
{SAVE}
{VERIFY}
*1
{FORMAT}
{DEVICE}
*2
{FOLDER}
Select Floppy Type
Select Size
Select
Device
*3
Operate Folder
{DELETE}
Select Data Category
{EXECUTE}
Select Data*4
Select [ENTER] or {EXECUTE}
7-11
Select Folder
7
7.3
DX100
7.3.0.1
External Memory Devices
Operation Flow
Operating a Folder
Folders can be used in order to classify and sort out the data such as jobs
and condition files when using the Compact Flash. The folders can be
created in hierarchical structure positioning a root folder at the top.

Restrictions
Folder name: Up to 8 one-byte characters + 3 characters for extension
*Long folder names cannot be used such as the name that exceeds the
restricted number of characters mentioned above as created in PC, etc.
Maximum path length: 42 one-byte characters
*“ERROR 3360: INVALID FOLDER” appears when selecting the folder of
which name exceeds the maximum path length.

Selecting a Folder
1. Select {FD/PC CARD} under the main menu.
2. Select {FOLDER}.
– The FOLDER LIST window appears.
3. Move the cursor to a folder and press [SELECT].
– A folder can be selected.
4. To move the hierarchy from a child folder to a parent folder, move the
cursor to [..] and press [SELECT].

Creating a Folder
1. Change the security to management mode. Select {FD/PC CARD}
under the main menu.
2. Select {FOLDER}.
– The FOLDER LIST window appears.
7-12
7
7.3
DX100
External Memory Devices
Operation Flow
3. Move the cursor to a folder and press [SELECT].
– Select the higher-level folder where a new folder to be created
should be contained.
– When creating a folder in top-level, this step is unnecessary.
4. Select {DATA} --> {CREATE NEW FOLDER} under the pull-down
menu. Input folder name using the keyboard on the screen and press
[ENTER].
– A folder is created.

Deleting a Folder
1. Change the security to management mode. Select {FD/PC CARD}
under the main menu.
2. Select {FOLDER}.
– The FOLDER LIST window appears.
3. Move the cursor to a folder and press [SELECT].
– Select the higher-level folder where a folder to be deleted is
contained.
– When deleting a folder in top-level, this step is unnecessary.
4. Delete the files and subfolders beforehand inside the folder that is to
be deleted.
– A folder cannot be deleted if the folder contains files or subfolders
inside.
Move the cursor to the folder to be deleted.
5. Select {DATA} --> {DELETE FOLDER} under the pull-down menu.
7-13
7
7.3
DX100

External Memory Devices
Operation Flow
Initial Folder Setting
The folder that is contained in a deep hierarchy can be selected in a
shortened operation.
When selecting {LOAD}, {SAVE}, {VERIFY}, or {DELETE} from the sub
menu of {FD/PC CARD}, the folder that has been set as an initial folder
becomes a current folder.
1. Change the security to management mode. Select {FD/PC CARD}
under the main menu.
2. Select {FOLDER}.
– The FOLDER LIST window appears.
3. Move the cursor to a folder and press [SELECT].
– Select a folder that is to be set as a root folder.
4. Select {DISPLAY} --> {ROOT FOLDER} under the pull-down menu.
– The INITIAL FOLDER SETTING window appears.
– A folder currently selected appears in “CURRENT FOLDER” and the
initial folder appears in “ROOT FOLDER”.
7-14
DX100
7
7.3
External Memory Devices
Operation Flow
5. Select {EDIT} --> {SETUP FOLDER} under the pull-down menu. Move
the cursor to “AUTO CHANGE” and press [SELECT].
– The initial folder is set in “ROOT FOLDER”.
– “AUTO CHANGE” shows “ON” and the initial folder setting becomes
valid. Subsequently, every time {FD/PC CARD} --> {FOLDER} is
selected, the initial folder that has been set becomes a current
folder.
SUPPLEMENT
When the initial folder is missing due to exchange of the
Compact Flash, etc., “ERROR 3360: INVALID FOLDER”
appears when selecting {LOAD}, {SAVE}, {VERIFY},
{DELETE} or {FOLDER} menu from {FD/PC CARD}, and
simultaneously the initial folder becomes invalid. Set “ON”
in “AUTO CHANGE” when the initial folder setting needs to
be valid.
7-15
7
7.3
DX100
7.3.0.2
External Memory Devices
Operation Flow
Saving Data
To download data from the memory of the DX100 to the external memory
device, perform the following procedure.
Data such as PARAMETER, SYSTEM DATA, I/O DATA,
and the batch data such as PARAMETER BATCH, BATCH
CMOS, ALL CMOS AREA, that include PARAMETER,
SYSTEM DATA, I/O DATA, contain the information specific
to each robot controller.
NOTE
Those data are prepared as backup data for reloading into
the controller used for saving.
Loading the data from other controller may result in destruction or loss of critical system information.
Take extra care for the saved data.

Saving a Job
1. Select {FD/PC CARD} under the main menu.
2. Select {SAVE}.
– The following window appears.
3. Select {JOB}.
– The JOB LIST window appears.
7-16
DX100
7
7.3
External Memory Devices
Operation Flow
4. Select a job to be saved.
– The selected job is marked with “”.
5. Press [ENTER].
– The confirmation dialog box appears.
6. Select “YES”.
– The selected job is saved.
7-17
7
7.3
DX100

External Memory Devices
Operation Flow
Saving a Condition File or General Data
1. Select {FD/PC CARD} under the main menu.
2. Select {SAVE}.
– The following window appears.
3. Move the cursor to {FILE/GENERAL DATA} and select.
– The selection window appears.
– The content of the display varies in accordance with applications
and options.
7-18
DX100
7
7.3
External Memory Devices
Operation Flow
4. Select condition files or general data to be saved.
– The selected files are marked with “”.
5. Press [ENTER].
– The confirmation dialog box appears.
6. Select “YES”.
– The selected files are saved.
7-19
7
7.3
DX100

External Memory Devices
Operation Flow
Saving a Parameter
1. Select {FD/PC CARD} under the main menu.
2. Select {SAVE}.
– The following window appears.
3. Move the cursor to {PARAMETER} and select.
– The selection window for parameters appears.
4. Select parameters to be saved.
– The selected parameters are marked with “”.
7-20
DX100
7
7.3
External Memory Devices
Operation Flow
5. Press [ENTER].
– The confirmation dialog box appears.
6. Select “YES”.
– The selected parameters are saved.
7-21
7
7.3
DX100

External Memory Devices
Operation Flow
Saving I/O Data
1. Select {FD/PC CARD} under the main menu.
2. Select {SAVE}.
– The following window appears.
3. Move the cursor to {I/O DATA} and select.
– The selection window for I/O data appears.
4. Select I/O data to be saved.
– The selected I/O data are marked with “”.
5. Press [ENTER].
– The confirmation dialog box appears.
6. Select “YES”.
– The selected I/O data are saved.
7-22
7
7.3
DX100

External Memory Devices
Operation Flow
Saving System Data
1. Select {FD/PC CARD} under the main menu.
2. Select {SAVE}.
– The following window appears.
3. Move the cursor to {SYSTEM DATA} and select.
– The selection window for system data appears.
7-23
DX100
7
7.3
External Memory Devices
Operation Flow
4. Select system data to be saved.
– The selected system data are marked with “”.
5. Press [ENTER].
– The confirmation dialog box appears.
6. Select “YES”.
– The selected system data are saved.
“BATCH USER MEMORY”, “BATCH CMOS”, and “ALL
CMOS AREA” can be overwritten.
SUPPLEMENT
As for “JOB”, “FILE/GENERAL DATA”, “PARAMETER”,
“SYSTEM DATA”, and “I/O DATA”, the data cannot be overwritten. In this case, delete the file of the same name in the
folder beforehand or create a new folder so that the data can
be stored inside.
7-24
7
7.3
DX100

External Memory Devices
Operation Flow
Saving All User’s Programs
1. Select {FD/PC CARD} under the main menu.
2. Select {SAVE}.
– The following window appears.
3. Move the cursor to {BATCH USER MEMORY} and select.
4. Select “EXECUTE”.
– The confirmation dialog box appears.
5. Select “YES”.
– All user’s programs are saved.
7-25
7
7.3
DX100

External Memory Devices
Operation Flow
Saving All CMOS Data
1. Select {FD/PC CARD} under the main menu.
2. Select {SAVE}.
– The following window appears.
3. Move the cursor to {BATCH CMOS} and select.
4. Select “EXECUTE”.
– The confirmation dialog box appears.
5. Select “YES”.
– All CMOS data are saved.
7-26
7
7.3
DX100

External Memory Devices
Operation Flow
Saving All Data in CMOS Area
1. Select {FD/PC CARD} under the main menu.
2. Select {SAVE}.
– The following window appears.
3. Move the cursor to {ALL CMOS AREA} and select.
4. Select “EXECUTE”.
– The confirmation dialog box appears.
5. Select “YES”.
– All data in CMOS area are saved.
7-27
7
7.3
DX100
7.3.0.3
External Memory Devices
Operation Flow
Loading Data
To upload data from the external memory device to the memory of the
DX100, follow the procedure in the following.
Data such as PARAMETER, SYSTEM DATA, I/O DATA,
and the batch data such as PARAMETER BATCH, BATCH
CMOS, ALL CMOS AREA, that include PARAMETER,
SYSTEM DATA, I/O DATA, contain the information specific
to each robot controller.
NOTE
Those data are prepared as backup data for reloading into
the controller used for saving.
Loading the data from other controller may result in destruction or loss of critical system information.
Take extra care for the saved data.

Loading a Job
1. Select {FD/PC CARD} under the main menu.
2. Select {LOAD}.
– The following window appears.
3. Select {JOB}.
– The job selection window appears.
7-28
DX100
7
7.3
External Memory Devices
Operation Flow
4. Select a job to be loaded.
– The selected jobs are marked with “”.
5. Press [ENTER].
– The confirmation dialog box appears.
6. Select “YES”.
– The selected jobs are loaded.
7-29
7
7.3
DX100

External Memory Devices
Operation Flow
Loading a Condition File or General Data
1. Select {FD/PC CARD} under the main menu.
2. Select {LOAD}.
– The following window appears.
3. Move the cursor to {FILE/GENERAL DATA} and select.
– The selection window for condition file or general data appears.
4. Select a condition file or general data to be loaded.
– The selected files are marked with “”.
7-30
7
7.3
DX100
External Memory Devices
Operation Flow
5. Press [ENTER].
– The confirmation dialog box appears.
6. Select “YES”.
– The selected files are loaded.

Loading a Parameter
1. Select {FD/PC CARD} under the main menu.
2. Select {LOAD}.
– The following window appears.
3. Move the cursor to {PARAMETER} and select.
– The selection window for parameters appears.
7-31
DX100
7
7.3
External Memory Devices
Operation Flow
4. Select parameters to be loaded.
– The selected parameters are marked with “”.
5. Press [ENTER].
– The confirmation dialog box appears.
6. Select “YES”.
– The selected parameters are loaded.
7-32
7
7.3
DX100

External Memory Devices
Operation Flow
Loading I/O Data
1. Select {FD/PC CARD} under the main menu.
2. Select {LOAD}.
– The following window appears.
3. Move the cursor to {I/O DATA} and select.
– The selection window for I/O data appears.
4. Select I/O data to be loaded.
– The selected I/O data are marked with “”.
5. Press [ENTER].
– The confirmation dialog box appears.
6. Select “YES”.
– The selected I/O data are loaded.
7-33
7
7.3
DX100

External Memory Devices
Operation Flow
Loading System Data
1. Select {FD/PC CARD} under the main menu.
2. Select {LOAD}.
– The following window appears.
3. Move the cursor to {SYSTEM DATA} and select.
– The selection window for system data appears.
4. Select system data to be loaded.
– The selected system data are marked with “”.
7-34
DX100
7
7.3
External Memory Devices
Operation Flow
5. Press [ENTER].
– The confirmation dialog box appears.
6. Select “YES”.
– The selected system data are loaded.
7-35
7
7.3
DX100

External Memory Devices
Operation Flow
Loading All User’s Programs
1. Select {FD/PC CARD} under the main menu.
2. Select {LOAD}.
– The following window appears.
3. Move the cursor to {BATCH USER MEMORY} and select.
4. Select “EXECUTE”.
– The confirmation dialog box appears.
5. Select “YES”.
– All user’s programs are loaded.
7-36
7
7.3
DX100

External Memory Devices
Operation Flow
Loading All CMOS Data
1. Select {FD/PC CARD} under the main menu.
2. Select {LOAD}.
– The following window appears.
3. Move the cursor to {BATCH CMOS} and select.
4. The confirmation dialog box appears.
5. Select “YES”.
– All CMOS data are loaded.
7-37
7
7.3
DX100
7.3.0.4
External Memory Devices
Operation Flow
Verifying Data
Follow the procedure below to verify data in the memory of the DX100
with data saved in the external memory device.
NOTE

This function cannot be executed with “BATCH USER
MEMORY”, “BATCH CMOS”, or “ALL CMOS AREA” specified.
Verifying a Job
1. Select {FD/PC CARD} under the main menu.
2. Select {VERIFY}.
– The following window appears.
3. Select {JOB}.
– The job selection window appears.
7-38
DX100
7
7.3
External Memory Devices
Operation Flow
4. Select a job to be verified.
– The selected jobs are marked with “”.
5. Press [ENTER].
– The confirmation dialog box appears.
6. Select “YES”.
– The selected jobs are verified.
7-39
7
7.3
DX100

External Memory Devices
Operation Flow
Verifying a File
1. Select {FD/PC CARD} under the main menu.
2. Select {VERIFY}.
– The following window appears.
3. Select the group of the file to be verified.
4. Select a file to be verified.
– The selected files are marked with “”.
5. Press [ENTER].
– The confirmation dialog box appears.
6. Select “YES”.
– The selected files are verified.
7-40
7
7.3
DX100
7.3.0.5
External Memory Devices
Operation Flow
Deleting Data
Follow the procedure below to delete a file or files on an external memory
device.

Deleting a Job
1. Select {FD/PC CARD} under the main menu.
2. Select {DELETE}.
– The following window appears.
3. Select {JOB}.
– The job selection window appears.
4. Select a job to be deleted.
– The selected jobs are marked with “”.
5. Press [ENTER].
– The confirmation dialog box appears.
6. Select “YES”.
– The selected jobs are deleted.
7-41
7
7.3
DX100

External Memory Devices
Operation Flow
Deleting a File
1. Select {FD/PC CARD} under the main menu.
2. Select {DELETE}.
– The following window appears.
3. Select the group of the file to be deleted.
4. Select a file to be deleted.
– The selected files are marked with “”.
5. Press [ENTER].
– The confirmation dialog box appears.
6. Select “YES”.
– The selected files are deleted.
7-42
7
7.3
DX100
7.3.0.6
External Memory Devices
Operation Flow
Job Selection Mode
The method of selecting a job and various data files when loading, saving,
verifying, and deleting are described in the following:
• Individual Selection
Jobs and data files are selected individually one at a time.
• Batch Selection
Jobs and data files are selected all at one time.
• Marker (*) Selection
Loading: selects the files in the external memory device.
Saving: selects the files in the memory of the DX100.
Verifying: selects both the files in the external memory device and in
the memory of the DX100.

Using Individual Selection
1. In either the external memory JOB LIST window or the file selection
window, move the cursor to a job or a file to be selected.
2. Press [SELECT].
Move the cursor to a file needed and press [SELECT] again.
*To cancel the selected items, select {EDIT} and then {CANCEL
SELECT}.
– The selected jobs are marked with “”.
7-43
7
7.3
DX100

External Memory Devices
Operation Flow
Using Batch Selection
1. In either the external memory JOB LIST window or the file selection
window, select {EDIT} under the menu.
– The pull-down menu appears.
2. Select {SELECT ALL}.
*To cancel the selected items, select {EDIT} and then {CANCEL
SELECT}.
– All jobs are selected.
7-44
7
7.3
DX100

External Memory Devices
Operation Flow
Using Marker (*) Selection
1. In either the external memory JOB LIST window or the file selection
window, select {EDIT} under the menu.
– The pull-down menu appears.
2. Select {SELECT MARKER (*)}.
*To cancel the selected items, select {EDIT} and then {CANCEL
SELECT}.
7-45
8
8.1
DX100
8
Parameter
Parameter Configuration
Parameter
8.1
Parameter Configuration
The parameters of DX100 can be classified into the following seven:
Motion Speed Setting Parameter
Determines the manipulator motion speed for jog operation at teaching,
test operation, or playback operation.
Mode Operation Setting Parameter
Makes the setting for various operations in the teach mode or remote
mode.
Parameter according to Interference Area
Limits the P-point maximum envelope of the manipulator or sets the
interference area for axis interference or cubic interference.
Parameter according to Status I/O
Sets the parity check or I/O setting for user input/output signals.
Parameter according to Coordinated or Synchronized Operation
Makes the settings for coordinated or synchronized operations between
manipulators or between manipulators and stations.
Parameter for Other Functions or Applications
Makes the settings for other functions or applications.
Hardware Control Parameter
Makes the hardware settings for fan alarm or relay operation, etc.
S1CxG Parameters
SUPPLEMENT
The initial setting of S1CxG parameters depends on the
manipulator model.
For a system in which two manipulators are controlled, the
following two types of parameters are used: S1C1G type
and S1C2G type.
8-1
8
8.2
DX100
8.2
Parameter
Motion Speed Setting Parameters
Motion Speed Setting Parameters
These parameters set the manipulator motion speed for jog operation at
teaching, test operation, or playback operation.
8.2.0.1
S1CxG000: IN-GUARD SAFE OPERATION MAX. SPEED
Units: 0.01%
The upper speed limit is set for in-guard safe operation. While the inguard safe operation command signal is being input, the TCP speed is
limited to the TCPmax speed.
8.2.0.2
S1CxG001: DRY-RUN SPEED
Units: 0.01%
This is a dry-run operation speed setting value used when checking the
path. Take safety into consideration when setting changes are
unnecessary.
Normal playback operation speed
In-guard safe
operation speed
limit
Operation speed under in-guard
safe operation
Teach-speed
Dry-run speed
Operation speed
when dry-run is
specified.
8.2.0.3
S1CxG002 to S1CxG009: JOINT SPEED FOR REGISTRATION
Units: 0.01%
The value set in these parameters is registered as the joint speed for each
speed level when teaching the position data with the programming
pendant. The percentage corresponding to the set value at each level is
registered as 100% of the value set in the playback speed limit. Values
greater than those set as speed limit values cannot be set.
S1CxG002: Level 1
S1CxG003: Level 2
·
·
·
S1CxG009: Level 8
8-2
DX100
8.2.0.4
8
8.2
Parameter
Motion Speed Setting Parameters
S1CxG010 to S1CxG017: LINEAR SPEED FOR REGISTRATION
Units: 0.1mm/s
The value set in these parameters is registered as the linear speed for
each speed level when teaching the position data with the programming
pendant. Values greater than those set as playback speed limit values
cannot be set.
S1CxG010: Level 1
S1CxG011: Level 2
·
·
·
S1CxG017: Level 8
8.2.0.5
S1CxG018 to S1CxG025: POSITION ANGLE SPEED
Units: 0.1°/s
The value set in these parameters is registered as the position angle
speed for each speed level when teaching the position data with the
programming pendant. Values greater than those set as playback speed
limit cannot be set.
S1CxG018: Level 1
S1CxG019: Level 2
·
·
·
S1CxG025: Level 8
8.2.0.6
S1CxG026 to S1CxG029: JOG OPERATION ABSOLUTE VALUE SPEED
Units: 0.1mm/s
These are setting values of jog operation speed set by the programming
pendant. Values greater than those set as jog operation speed limit value
cannot be set.
S1CxG026 Low level
: Jog operation speed when “LOW” manual
speed is specified.
S1CxG027 Medium level
: Jog operation speed when “MEDIUM” manual
speed is specified.
S1CxG028 High level
: Jog operation speed when “HIGH” manual
speed is specified.
S1CxG029 High-speed-level
: Jog operation speed when [HIGH SPEED] is
pressed.
8-3
DX100
8.2.0.7
8
8.2
Parameter
Motion Speed Setting Parameters
S1CxG030 to S1CxG032: INCHING MOVE AMOUNT
These parameters specify the amount per move at inching operation by
the programming pendant. The referenced parameter differs according to
the operation mode at inching operation.
S1CxG030
: Joint Operation (Unit: 1 pulse)
S1CxG031
: Cartesian/cylindrical (Unit: 0.001 mm)
S1CxG032
: Motion about TCP (Unit: 0.001 degree)
SUPPLEMENT
NOTE
8.2.0.8
If the value set for S1CxG031 or S1CxG032 is too small, the
inching operation does not proceed.
Note that the units of S1CxG031 and S1CxG032 are
smaller than those for the NX100.
S1CxG033 to S1CxG040: POSITIONING ZONE
This parameter value will be referenced when positioning is specified with
the “MOVE” instruction: MOVJ (joint movement) or MOVL (linear
movement).
<Example> MOVL V=100.0 PL=1
Positioning level
Positioning specification
The value set in this parameter specifies the range to enter in relation to
the teaching point for that step positioning. After entering the specified
positioning zone, the manipulator starts moving to the next step. The
system is also set up so inward turning operation is carried out in the
moving section when moving to the next path; speed changeover is
smooth.
S1CxG033: Positioning level 1
S1CxG034: Positioning level 2
·
·
·
S1CxG040: Positioning level 8
8-4
8
8.2
DX100
Parameter
Motion Speed Setting Parameters
Since operation will be turning inward during playback, as shown in the
following diagram, use setting values taking safety aspects into
consideration.
P1
P1
l1
l2
l
P1
l4
l3
l8
P1
NOTE
This process becomes effective when change in direction of
steps is between 25° and 155°.
Position Level
Position levels are divided into nine stages of 0 to 8 with the
“MOV” instruction.
e.g. MOVL V=500 PL=1 (PL:Position Level)
The functions at each level are as follows:
0: Complete positioning to the target point
1 to 8: Inward turning operation
Following are explanations of the respective processing
details and their relations with the parameter.
SUPPLEMENT
• Level 0
Determines positioning completion when the amount of
deviation (number of pulses) to the target point of each
axis comes within the position set zone specified by the
parameter.
After the positioning completes, the instruction system
starts instruction to the next target point.
• Level 1 to 8
Recognizes virtual positioning before the target point. The
distance of the virtual target position from the target point is
specified at the positioning level.
Distance data corresponding to each level are set in the
parameter. Determination of the virtual target position is
carried out in the instruction system.
Set zone: The zone of each positioning level set in the
parameter. (μm)
8-5
DX100
8.2.0.9
8
8.2
Parameter
Motion Speed Setting Parameters
S1CxG044: LOW-SPEED START
Units: 0.01%
This parameter specifies max. speed at low speed start. Specify the
starting method for “initial operation speed of manipulator” (S2C217).
8.2.0.10
S1CxG045 to S1CxG048: JOG OPERATION LINK SPEED
Units: 0.01%
These parameters prescribe the link speed at jog operation by the
programming pendant. Specify the percentage (%) for the jog operation
speed limit, the joint max. speed.
S1CxG045: Jog operation link speed at level “LOW”
S1CxG046: Jog operation link speed at level “MEDIUM”
S1CxG047: Jog operation link speed at level “HIGH”
S1CxG048: Jog operation link speed at level “HIGH SPEED”
8.2.0.11
S1CxG056: WORK HOME POSITION RETURN SPEED
Units: 0.01%
This parameter specifies the speed for returning to work home position
against the maximum speed.
8.2.0.12
S1CxG057: SEARCH MAX. SPEED
Units: 0.1mm/s
This parameter specifies the max. speed for searching.
8.2.0.13
S2C201: POSTURE CONTROL AT CARTESIAN OPERATION OF JOG
This parameter specifies whether or not posture control is performed at
cartesian operation of “JOG” by the programming pendant. Use posture
control unless a special manipulator model is used.
8.2.0.14
0
: With posture control
1
: Without posture control
S2C202: OPERATION IN USER COORDINATE SYSTEM (WHEN EXTERNAL
REFERENCE POINT CONTROL FUNCTION USED)
This parameter specifies the TCP or reference point of motion about TCP
when the external reference point control function is used and the user
coordinate system is selected by the programming pendant.
Fig. 8-1: 0: When manipulator TCP is selected
Manipulator TCP
8-6
DX100
8
8.2
Parameter
Motion Speed Setting Parameters
Fig. 8-2: 1: When external reference point is selected
External
reference
point
8.2.0.15 S2C320: CONTROLLED GROUP JOB TEACHING POSITION CHANGE
This parameter is used to change only the job teaching position of
controlled group axis.
0
: Not changed
1
: Changed
8.2.0.16 S2C422: OPERATION AFTER RESET FROM PATH DEVIATION
8.2.0.17 S2C423: OPERATION AFTER JOB
These parameters specify the method of restarting the manipulator that
has deviated from the normal path such as an emergency stop or jog
operation.
0
: Move to the indicated step (initial setting).
1
: After moving back to the deviated position, move to the indicated step.
2
: Move back to the deviated position and stop.
Table 8-1: S2C422
Parameter
Setting
Value
Movement When Restarting
Move to next step.
Emergency stop
0
Movement
when restarting
Move to next step.
After moving back to the deviated position, move to the indicated
step.
Emergency stop
1
Move back to the deviated
position and stop.
When restarting, move to
the indicated step.
Emergency stop (Servo OFF)
2
Move back the the deviated
position and then move to
the indicated step.
8-7
DX100
8
8.2
Parameter
Motion Speed Setting Parameters
Table 8-2: S2C423
Parameter
Setting
Value
Movement When Restarting
Move to the next step.
0
Movement
when restarting
JOG
Move to next step.
After moving back to the deviated position, move to the indicated
step.
Emergency stop (Servo OFF)
1
Move back to the deviated
position and then move to
the indicated step.
JOG
Emergency stop (Servo OFF)
2
JOG
NOTE
Move back to the deviated
position and stop. When
restarting, move to the
indicated step.
• To the path deviated position, the manipulator moves in a
straight line at low speed operation (SICxG044).
It is linear movement. After resetting from deviation, the
speed becomes the same as taught speed.
• The initial setting (prior to shipping) is 0: The manipulator
moves in a straight line from the present position to the
indicated step.
8.2.0.18
S2C424: DEVIATED POSITION
This parameter specifies whether deviated position is to be robot current
(reference) position or feedback position.
0
: Return to the feedback position.
1
: Return to the current value (reference) position.
8-8
DX100
8
8.2
Parameter
Motion Speed Setting Parameters
When emergency stop is applied during high-speed motion, the deviated
position differs from the robot current value (reference) position and
feedback position as shown in the following.
Current value
(reference) position
Feedback position
Emergency stop
8.2.0.19 S2C425: CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION TOOL POSITION CONTROL
This parameter selects tool position control methods at circular
interpolation operation.
0
: Fixed angle position
Interpolation is performed depending on the position change viewed from
the base coordinate.
As the figure below (left) shows, when tool position viewed from outside is
not significantly changed and that position is mainly taught at teaching, this
setting is required.
1
: Rotating position by circular arc path
Interpolation is performed depending on the position change
corresponding to circular arc path.
As the figure below (right) shows, when tool position corresponding to
circular arc path (tool position viewed from the center of the circular arc) is
not significantly changed, and that position is mainly taught at teaching,
this setting is required.
0: Fixed angle position
1: Rotating position by circular arc path
P1
P1
P0
P2
P2
P0
8.2.0.20 S2C653: EMERGENCY STOP CURSOR ADVANCE CONTROL FUNCTION
This parameter specifies whether to use the cursor advance control
function or not.
0: Not use
1: Use
8-9
DX100
8.2.0.21
8
8.2
Parameter
Motion Speed Setting Parameters
S2C654: EMERGENCY STOP CURSOR ADVANCE CONTROL FUNCTION CONT
PROCESS COMPLETION POSITION
Units: %
When the manipulator stops during moving inner corner by CONT
process, this parameter specifies which position of the inner corner should
be considered as the end of step.
Step 4
100%
When 50% is set, moves to Step 3
if the manipulator stops in A section,
and to Step 4 if the manipulator stops
in B section.
B
50%
A
Step 3
0%
8.2.0.22
S2C655: EMERGENCY STOP ADVANCE CONTROL FUNCTION WORK START
INSTRUCTION STEP MOTION COMPLETION DELAY TIME
Units: ms
In order to recognize securely the completion of motion to the step of work
start instruction (such as ARCON instruction), this parameter specifies the
delay time for motion completion of the work start instruction step only.
8.2.0.23
S2C698: BASE AXIS OPERATION KEY ALLOCATION SETTING
Table 8-3: Parameter Setting and Jog Operation Key Allocation
Coordinates/Parameter
S2C698= “0”
S2C698= “1”
Joint
Axis number order
Specified
Cylindrical
Axis number order
Specified
Cartesian
Specified
Specified
Tool
Specified
Specified
User
Specified
Specified
Axis number order: X: First axis, Y: Second axis, Z: Third axis
Specified: X: X-direction (RECT-X), Y: Y-direction (RECT-Y), Z: Z-direction
(RECT-Z)
8-10
DX100
8
8.2
Parameter
Motion Speed Setting Parameters
8.2.0.24 S3C1098 to S3C1102: POSITION CORRECTING FUNCTION DURING PLAYBACK
These parameters specify the necessary data for position correcting
function (PAM) during playback operation.
S3C1098
Specifies the limit of position correcting range (Units: μm)
S3C1099
Specifies the limit of speed correcting range (Units: 0.01%)
S3C1100
Specifies the correcting coordinates
0 : Base
1 : Robot
2 : Tool
3 : User 1
to
26:User 24
S3C1102
Specifies the limit of posture angle adjustment range (Units: 0.01°)
8-11
8
8.3
DX100
8.3
Parameter
Mode Operation Setting Parameters
Mode Operation Setting Parameters
These parameters set various operations in the teach mode or remote
mode.
Some parameters can be set through {SETUP}  {TEACHING COND} or
{OPERATE COND}.
8.3.0.1
S2C195: SECURITY MODE WHEN CONTROL POWER SUPPLY IS TURNED ON
The operation level when the control power supply is turned ON is set.
8.3.0.2
0
: Operation Mode
1
: Editing Mode
2
: Management Mode
S2C196: SELECTION OF CARTESIAN/CYLINDRICAL
This parameter specifies whether the cartesian mode or cylindrical mode
is affected when cartesian/cylindrical mode is selected by operation
(coordinate) mode selection at axis operation of programming pendant.
This specification can be done on the TEACHING CONDITION window.
8.3.0.3
0
: Cylindrical mode
1
: Cartesian mode
S2C197: COORDINATE SWITCHING PROHIBITED
This parameter prohibits switching coordinates during JOG operation by
the programming pendant.
8.3.0.4
0
: Switching permitted for tool coordinates and user coordinates
1
: Switching prohibited for tool coordinates
2
: Switching prohibited for user coordinates
3
: Switching prohibited for tool coordinates and user coordinates
S2C198: EXECUTION UNITS AT “FORWARD” OPERATION
This parameter specifies the execution units at step mode of “FORWARD”
operation by the programming pendant.
Parameter Setting
Value
Operation Units
Stops at every instruction
0
MOVL
DOUT
TIMER
DOUT
MOVL
Stops at move instruction
1
MOVL
DOUT
TIMER
DOUT
MOVL
8-12
DX100
8.3.0.5
8
8.3
Parameter
Mode Operation Setting Parameters
S2C199: INSTRUCTION (EXCEPT FOR MOVE) EXECUTION AT “FORWARD” OPERATION
This parameter specifies the method of instruction (except for move)
execution at “FORWARD” operation by the programming pendant.
8.3.0.6
0
: Executed by pressing [FWD] + [INTERLOCK]
1
: Executed by pressing [FWD] only
2
: Instruction not executed
S2C203: CHANGING STEP ONLY
This parameter specifies whether to permit only step changes in an
editing-prohibited job. When permitted, only position data can be changed
but additional data such as speed cannot be changed. This specification
can be done on the TEACHING CONDITION window.
8.3.0.7
0
: Permitted
1
: Prohibited
S2C204: MANUAL SPEED STORING FOR EACH COORDINATE
This parameter specifies whether to assign different manual speeds for
the joint coordinates and other coordinates. If “NOT STORED” is
selected, manual speed is not affected by changing the coordinates. If
“STORED” is selected, manual speeds can be selected separately for the
joint coordinates and other coordinates.
8.3.0.8
0
: Not stored
1
: Stored
S2C206: ADDITIONAL STEP POSITION
This parameter designates either “before next step” or “after the cursor
position (between instructions)” as additional step position. This
specification can be done on the TEACHING CONDITION window.
Fig. 8-3: <Example>
Line
Instruction
10
MOVL V=100
11
TIMER T=1.00
12
DOUT OT# (1) ON
13
MOVL V=50
Cursor position
Fig. 8-4: S2C206-0 (Before the Next Step)
Line
Instruction
10
MOVL V=100
11
TIMER T=1.00
12
DOUT OT#(1) ON
13
MOVL V=100
14
MOVL V=50
Added step
8-13
DX100
8
8.3
Parameter
Mode Operation Setting Parameters
Fig. 8-5: S2C206-1 (Between Instructions)
Line
Instruction
10
MOVL V=100
11
TIMER T=1.00
12
MOVL V=100
13
DOUT OT# (1) ON
14
MOVL V=50
Added step
8.3.0.9
S2C207: MASTER JOB CHANGING OPERATION
This parameter specifies whether to permit or prohibit master job changing
operation. If “PROHIBIT” is specified, the master job cannot be changed
(or registered) easily. The specification can be done on the OPERATING
CONDITION window.
8.3.0.10
0
: Permitted
1
: Prohibited
S2C208: CHECK AND MACHINE-LOCK KEY OPERATION IN PLAY MODE
This parameter specifies whether to permit or prohibit in play mode to
change the operation that changes the operation condition. Even if an
error occurs because of the operation with the keys, the manipulator does
not stop. The specification can be done on the OPERATING CONDITION
window.
8.3.0.11
0
: Permitted
1
: Prohibited
S2C209: RESERVED WORK JOB CHANGING OPERATION
This parameter specifies whether to permit reserved work job changing
operation.
The designation can be done on the OPERATING CONDITION window.
8.3.0.12
0
: Permitted
1
: Prohibited
S2C210: MASTER OR SUBMASTER CALL OPERATION IN PLAY MODE
This parameter specifies whether the master or submaster call operation
in play mode is permitted or not. When the independent control function is
valid, the master job for sub-task is specified at the same time. The
specification can be done on the OPERATING CONDITION window.
0
: Permitted
1
: Prohibited
8-14
DX100
8
8.3
Parameter
Mode Operation Setting Parameters
8.3.0.13 S2C211: LANGUAGE LEVEL
This parameter specifies the level of the robot language (INFORM III).
The levels simplify the instruction registering operation. With the DX100,
all robot instructions can be executed regardless of specification of
instruction sets. The specification can be done on the TEACHING
CONDITION window.
0: Contracted Level
Only frequently used robot instructions are selected to reduce the number
of instructions to be registered. Robot instructions displayed on the
instruction dialog box are also reduced so that specification is simplified.
1: Standard Level
2: Expanded Level
All the robot instructions are available in standard and expanded levels.
The two levels are distinguished by the number of additional information
items (tags) that can be used with robot instructions. At the expanded
level, the flowing functions are available.
• Local Variables and Array Variables
• Use of Variables for Tags (Example: MOVJ VJ=I000)
The above functions are not available at the standard level, however,
which reduces the number of data required to register instructions,
thereby simplifying the operation.
8.3.0.14 S2C214: INSTRUCTION INPUT LEARNING FUNCTION
This parameter specifies whether to set a line of instructions that has been
input on the input buffer line when pressing the first soft key for each
instruction. If “PROVIDED” is selected, the instructions are set.
0
: Without learning function
1
: With learning function
8.3.0.15 S2C215: ADDRESS SETTING WHEN CONTROL POWER IS TURNED ON
This parameter specifies the processing of the job name, step No., and
line No. that are set when the control power supply is turned ON.
0
: Reproduces the address when power supply is turned ON.
1
: Lead address (Line”0”) of the master job.
8.3.0.16 S2C216: JOB LIST DISPLAY METHOD AT JOB SELECTION
These parameters specify the displaying method on the JOB LIST window
at job selection.
0
: Order of Names
1
: Order of Date
8-15
DX100
8.3.0.17
8
8.3
Parameter
Mode Operation Setting Parameters
S2C217: INITIAL OPERATION OF MANIPULATOR
This parameter specifies the operation speed level of the first section
when starting. Specify the operation speed with the low-speed start
(S1CxG044). When starting at low-speed, the manipulator stops after
reaching the indicated step regardless of the cycle setting. Once the
manipulator is paused during the low-speed operation, it moves at
teaching speed when restarted.
8.3.0.18
0
: Specified on the SPECIAL PLAY window. Operates at low speed only
when low speed start is set. Operates at taught speed when not instructed.
1
: Starts at low speed after editing regardless of soft key instructions.
S2C218: PLAYBACK EXECUTION AT CYCLE MODE “1- STEP”
Parameter Setting
Value
NOTE
8.3.0.19
Operation Units
Stops at every instruction
0
MOVL
DOUT
TIMER
DOUT
MOVL
Stops at move instruction
1
MOVL
DOUT
TIMER
DOUT
MOVL
When operating “FORWARD” by the programming pendant,
the units for execution are set in another parameter
(S2C198).
S2C219: EXTERNAL START
This parameter specifies whether a start instruction from external input is
accepted or not. The specification can be done on the OPERATING
CONDITION window.
8.3.0.20
0
: Permitted
1
: Prohibited
S2C220: PROGRAMMING PENDANT START
This parameter specifies whether a start instruction from the programming
pendant is accepted or not.
0
: Permitted
1
: Prohibited
8-16
DX100
8
8.3
Parameter
Mode Operation Setting Parameters
8.3.0.21 S2C221: SPEED DATA INPUT FORM
This parameter specifies the units for speed data input and display.
mm/s : in units of 0.1 mm/s
cm/min : in units of 1cm/min
inch/min : in units of 1 inch/min
mm/min : in units of 1 mm/min
The specification can be done on the OPERATING CONDITION window.
0
: mm/sec
1
: cm/min
2
: inch/min
3
: mm/min
8.3.0.22 S2C222: RESERVED START
This parameter specifies whether a reserved start instruction from the
programming pendant is accepted or not. The specification can be done
on the OPERATING CONDITION window.
0
: Permitted
1
: Prohibited
8.3.0.23 S2C224: JOB SELECTION AT REMOTE FUNCTION (PLAY MODE)
This parameter specifies whether a job selection in play mode at remote
function is prohibited or not.
0
: Permitted
1
: Prohibited
8.3.0.24 S2C225: EXTERNAL MODE SWITCH
This parameter specifies whether mode switching from the outside is
accepted or not. The specification can be done on the OPERATING
CONDITION window.
0
: Permitted
1
: Prohibited
8.3.0.25 S2C227: EXTERNAL CYCLE SWITCHING
This parameter specifies whether cycle switching from the outside is
accepted or not. The specification can be done on the OPERATING
CONDITION window.
0
: Permitted
1
: Prohibited
8-17
DX100
8.3.0.26
8
8.3
Parameter
Mode Operation Setting Parameters
S2C228: PROGRAMMING PENDANT CYCLE SWITCHING
This parameter specifies whether cycle switching from the programming
pendant is accepted or not. The specification can be done on the
OPERATING CONDITION window.
8.3.0.27
0
: Permitted
1
: Prohibited
S2C229: SERVO ON FROM EXTERNAL PP PROHIBITION
This parameter specifies whether a servo ON instruction is accepted or
not. More than one instruction can be specified. For example, to permit
the servo ON instruction from an external input only, set “2”. In this case,
servo ON instruction from the programming pendant is not accepted. The
specification can be done on the OPERATING CONDITION window.
d7
d0
External input prohibited : 1 (VALID)
8.3.0.28
Programming pendant
: 2 (VALID)
DSW
: 4 (VALID)
S2C230: PROGRAMMING PENDANT OPERATION WHEN “IO” IS SELECTED FOR
REMOTE MODE
This parameter specifies whether each operation of the following is valid
when “IO” is selected for remote function selection. IO and command are
available for remote function selection: “IO” is set prior to shipping.
“Command” is valid when transmission function (optional) is specified.
d7
d0
Programming pendant ([SERVO ON READY] key)
: 1 (VALID)
valid/invalid
: 2 (VALID)
Programming pendant (Enable switch)
Mode switching valid/invalid
: 4 (VALID)
Master call valid/invalid
: 8 (VALID)
Cycle switching valid/invalid
Start valid/invalid
8-18
: 16 (VALID)
: 32 (VALID)
DX100
8
8.3
Parameter
Mode Operation Setting Parameters
8.3.0.29 S2C234: STEP REGISTRATION AT TOOL NO. CHANGE
The registration of the step when the tool number is changed allows the
setting to be made as prohibited.
If this parameter is set to “1” (prohibited), the following operations are
prohibited.
0
: Permitted
1
: Prohibited
• Modification of a step
When the tool number of the teaching step differs from the currentlyselected tool number, the step cannot be modified.
• Deletion of a step
Even if the teaching step position coincides with the current position,
the step cannot be deleted when the tool number of the teaching
step differs from the currently-selected tool number.
• Addition of a step
When the tool number of the teaching step indicated by the cursor
differs from the currently-selected tool number, the step cannot be
added.
8.3.0.30 S2C293: REMOTE FIRST CYCLE MODE
This parameter sets the cycle that changes from the local mode to the
remote mode.
The setting can be made on the OPERATING CONDITION window.
0
: Step
1
: 1 cycle
2
: Continuous
3
: Setting retained
8.3.0.31 S2C294: LOCAL FIRST CYCLE MODE
This parameter sets the cycle that changes from the remote mode to the
local mode.
The setting can be made on the OPERATING CONDITION window.
0
: Step
1
: 1 cycle
2
: Continuous
3
: Setting retained
8.3.0.32 S2C312: POWER ON FIRST CYCLE MODE
This parameter sets the first cycle mode for when the power is turned ON.
The setting can be made on the OPERATING CONDITION window.
0
: Step
1
: 1 cycle
2
: Continuous
3
: Setting retained
8-19
DX100
8.3.0.33
8
8.3
Parameter
Mode Operation Setting Parameters
S2C313: TEACH MODE FIRST CYCLE MODE
This parameter sets the cycle that changes from the play mode to the
teach mode.
The setting can be made on the OPERATING CONDITION window.
8.3.0.34
0
: Step
1
: 1 cycle
2
: Continuous
3
: Setting retained
S2C314: PLAY MODE FIRST CYCLE MODE
This parameter sets the cycle that changes from the teach mode to the
play mode.
The setting can be made on the OPERATING CONDITION window.
8.3.0.35
0
: Step
1
: 1 cycle
2
: Continuous
3
: Setting retained
S2C316: START CONDITION AFTER ALARM-4107 (“OUT OF RANGE (ABSO DATA)”)
This parameter specifies the activating method after the alarm 4107
(“OUT OF RANGE (ABSO DATA)”) occurs.
0
: Position check operation required
1
: Low-speed start up
8-20
DX100
8
8.3
Parameter
Mode Operation Setting Parameters
8.3.0.36 S2C395: SIGNAL NAME ALIAS FUNCTION
On the JOB CONTENT window, the name registered to the user input/
output signal number can be displayed as alias instead of the signal
number itself.
Table 8-4: S2C395
Parameter Setting Value
Valid/Invalid
0
Function invalid
1
Function valid
1. With this function valid, the confirmation dialog box “Register by name
(alias)?” is displayed when a signal (IN#(), OT#(), IG#(), OG#(),
IGH#(), OGH#()) is selected on the DETAIL EDIT window.
2. Select “YES” and the signal select window appears. Then select the
target signal of number and press [ENTER], and the registered name
is displayed instead of the signal number. However, if the signal
number’s name is not yet registered, it is displayed by number as
usual.
<Example> Registration of the name of user output OUT#0001 as
“OUTPUT 1”
In the case of DOUT instruction:
S2C395=0 : DOUT OT#(1) ON
S2C395=1 : DOUT OT#(OUTPUT 1) ON
Select {IN/OUT}  {UNIVERSAL INPUT/OUTPUT} to edit
signal names on the window. Up to 16 characters can be
entered as a signal name. However, when this function is
valid, if the content below is entered, the error message
shows and the name cannot be registered.
• The name already registered
• Letters beginning with a number
• Letters including the signs below:
( , ) , [ , ] , = , < , > , space, comma
SUPPLEMENT
• Letters beginning with “alphabets representing variables” +
“number”
<Example> B0..., I0..., BP1..., LEX2...
Alphabets representing variables: B, I, D, R,
S, P, BP, EX, PX, LB, LI LD, LR, LS, LP, LBP,
LEX, LPX
When the name begins with “ ‘ ”, it is regarded as a comment
and the same comment can be registered for two or more
signals. In this case, although this function is valid, the number is displayed on the JOB CONTENT window instead of
the name.
<Example> Registration of the name of user output
OUT#0002 as “ ‘OUTPUT 2”
S2C395=0 : DOUT OT#(2) ON
S2C395=1 : DOUT OT#(2) ON
8-21
DX100
8.3.0.37
8
8.3
Parameter
Mode Operation Setting Parameters
S2C396: VARIABLE NAME ALIAS FUNCTION
On the JOB CONTENT window, the name registered to the variable
(including local variables) can be displayed as alias instead of the variable
number.
Table 8-5: S2C396
Parameter Setting Value
Valid/Invalid
0
Function invalid
1
Function valid
1. With this function valid, the confirmation dialog box “Register by name
(alias) ?” is displayed when you select the variable on the DETAIL
EDIT window.
2. Select “YES” and the variable select window appears. Then select the
target variable of number and press [ENTER], and the registered
name is displayed instead of the variable number. However, if the
variable number’s name is not yet registered, it is displayed by number
as usual.
<Example> Registration of the byte type variable B000 as “WORK KIND”
In the case of SET instruction
S2C396=0 : SET B000 128
S2C396=1 : SET WORK KIND 128
Select {VARIABLE} from the menu to select each variable
and edit the variable name. Up to 16 characters can be
entered as a variable name. However, when this function is
valid, if the content below is entered, the error message
shows and the name cannot be registered.
• The name already registered
• Letters beginning with a number
• Letters including the signs below:
( , ) , [ , ] , = , < , > , space, comma
SUPPLEMENT
• Letters beginning with “alphabets representing variables” +
“number”
<Example> B0..., I0..., BP1..., LEX2...
Alphabets representing variables: B, I, D, R,
S, P, BP, EX, PX, LB, LI LD, LR, LS, LP, LBP,
LEX, LPX
When the name begins with “ ‘ ”, it is regarded as a comment
and the same comment can be registered for two or more
variables. In this case, although this function is valid, the
number is displayed on the JOB CONTENT window instead
of the name.
<Example> Registration of the byte type variable B001 as
“WORKNUM”
S2C396=0 : SET B001 10
S2C396=1 : SET B001 10
8-22
DX100
8
8.3
Parameter
Mode Operation Setting Parameters
8.3.0.38 S2C397: I/O VARIABLE CUSTOMIZE FUNCTION
This function enables registration of any particular input/output signal/
variable. Reference and editing of signals/variables are possible on the
same window.
Table 8-6: S2C397
Parameter Setting Value
Valid/Invalid
0
Function Invalid
1
Function Valid
With this function valid, the sub-menu {I/O-VARIABLE CUSTOMIZE}
opens under the main menu {ARC WELDING}, {SPOT WELDING},
{GENERAL}, {HANDLING} (differs by application). Select {I/O-VARIABLE
CUSTOMIZE}, and the I/O-VARIABLE CUSTOMIZE window appears as
follows.
Fig. 8-6: I/O VARIABLE CUSTOMIZE Window
On the I/O-VARIABLE CUSTOMIZE window, any of the input/output
signals/variables can be selected and registered (up to 32 items).
Registrable signals/variables are as follows:
Table 8-7: Registrable Items on the I/O-VARIABLE CUSTOMIZE Window
Input/Output
Signals
USER INPUT SIGNAL
USER OUTPUT SIGNAL
PSEUDO INPUT SIGNAL
Variables
BYTE TYPE VARIABLE (B VARIABLE)
INTEGER TYPE VARIABLE (I VARIABLE)
DOUBLE-PRECISION INTEGER TYPE VARIABLE (D
VARIABLE)
The contents and names of the registered signals/variables can be
checked and edited on this window.
In addition, the data list of registered signals/variables can be loaded,
saved, verified or deleted with an external memory unit.
Only when this function is valid, “I/O-VARIABLE CUSTOMIZE (file name:
USRIOVAR.DAT)” is displayed and can be selected. To display the “I/OVARIABLE CUSTOMIZE (file name: USRIOVAR.DAT)”, select {FD/CF} 
{LOAD} {SAVE} {VERIFY} {DELETE}  {SYSTEM DATA}.
8-23
DX100
8.3.0.39
8
8.3
Parameter
Mode Operation Setting Parameters
S2C410: WORD REGISTRATION FUNCTION / WORD EDITING FUNCTION
SPECIFICATION
Specifies the valid or invalid to edit the words while inputting the
characters.
0
: Invalid
1
: Vaild
*It is able to edit the words when the security mode is the edit mode or the
management mode.
8.3.0.40
S2C413: JOB UNDELETE FUNCTION
This function doesn’t completely delete a job from its memory when
deleting the job, but saves the data so that the job can be restored as
needed.
This parameter can be set on {TEACHING CONDITION} window.
If a job is deleted while this function is valid, the job disappears from the
JOB LIST window. In this case, {TRASH JOB LIST} is newly displayed to
{JOB} on the main menu and the deleted job is listed on it.
NOTE
The job will not be listed on the trash job list and will not be
restored if it is deleted when this function is invalid.
8-24
8
8.3
DX100
Parameter
Mode Operation Setting Parameters
On the trash job list, the deleted jobs are displayed.
On this window, the following operations are available with the same
operations as job list window.
• Batch selection / canceling selection of the jobs
( {EDIT} {SELECT ALL} {CANCEL SELECT})
• Job search ({EDIT} {JOB SEARCH COND} )
• Rearrange of the jobs in the order of date / order of name
( {DISPLAY} {DATE} {NAME})
• Job detailed information display ( {DISPLAY} {DETAIL} )

Restoring the Job
Choose a job to be restored and select {UNDELETE JOB} from {JOB} on
the pull down menu.
A dialog box to confirm restoring the selected job.
Select
[YES] to restore the job. The restored job is deleted from the trash job list
and newly listed to the job list.
[NO} to cancel restoring the job.
8-25
8
8.3
DX100

Parameter
Mode Operation Setting Parameters
Deleting the Job Completely
Delete a job from the memory. The job will not be restored after this
operation.
Choose a job to be completely deleted, then select {DELETE JOB} from
{JOB} on the pull down menu.
A dialog box to confirm deleting the selected job.
Select
[YES] to delete the job completely. The deleted job is deleted from the
trash job list.
[NO} to cancel deleting the job.
NOTE
8.3.0.41
The job data remains until it is completely deleted and the
capacity of the memory becomes less as long as this function is valid. Delete unnecessary data to keep enough job
capacity.
S2C415 to S2C419: TIME RESET
These parameters specify whether resetting operation of the specified
times is permitted or not.
S2C415
: CONTROL POWER ON TIME
S2C416
: SERVO POWER ON TIME
S2C417
: PLAYBACK TIME
S2C418
: WORK TIME
S2C419
: WEAVING TIME
0
: Prohibit Resetting
1
: Permit Resetting
“PERMIT” is set as the initial value for the work time and motion time.
8-26
DX100
8
8.3
Parameter
Mode Operation Setting Parameters
8.3.0.42 S2C431: TOOL NO. SWITCHING
This parameter specifies whether tool number switching is permitted or
not.
0
: Prohibited (Only number “0” can be used.)
1
: Permitted (64 type of tools from number “0” to “63” can be used.)
8.3.0.43 S2C433: POSITION TEACHING BUZZER
This parameter specifies whether the buzzer sound at position teaching is
used or not.
0
: With buzzer
1
: Without buzzer
8.3.0.44 S2C434: JOB LINKING DESIGNATION (When Twin Synchronous Function Used)
This parameter specifies whether the manipulator at the synchronizing
side is to be linked when the manipulator and the station at the
synchronized side are performing FWD/BWD or test run, by using the twin
synchronous function.
0
: Not operating
1
: Linking
Fig. 8-7: 0 : Does not operate the synchronizing side while teaching the
synchronized side.
Synchronizing side
Fig. 8-8: 1 : Links the synchronizing side while teaching the synchronized
side.
Synchronizing side
8-27
DX100
8.3.0.45
8
8.3
Parameter
Mode Operation Setting Parameters
S2C437: PLAYBACK OPERATION CONTINUATION FUNCTION
This function is used to decide where to resume the playback on the start
operation after suspending the playback and moving the cursor or
selecting other jobs.
0: Starts operation where the cursor is located in the job displayed at
the moment.
1: The playback continuation window appears. Select “YES” and the
playback resumes where the cursor has been located when the
playback suspended. If “NO” is selected, the playback resumes
where the cursor is located in the job displayed at the moment.
Table 8-8: S2C437
Parameter Setting
Value
0
Where the Playback Resumes
Resumes where the cursor is located in the job displayed
at the moment.
Resumes where the cursor has been located when the
playback suspended OR where the cursor is located in the
job displayed at the moment.
<Example>
Suspended at step 0003 during the playback of job A

Displays job B

1
Starts operation

On the playback operation continuation window
• When “YES” selected, the playback resumes from
step 0003 of job A
• When “NO” selected, the playback resumes from the
current position in job B
* When this function is valid (S2C437=1), a light blue cursor is displayed
at the instruction section of step where the playback has been stopped.
When “YES” is selected, the playback resumes where this cursor is
located.
MOVJ VJ=0.78
NOTE
If a job has been edited or FWD/BWD/TEST RUN operation(s) have been executed, the playback cannot resume
where it has suspended. Also this function is invalid if the
reserved start function is set valid (S2C222=0).
8-28
DX100
8
8.3
Parameter
Mode Operation Setting Parameters
8.3.0.46 S2C544: I/O NAME DISPLAY FUNCTION FOR JOB
When a user input/output signal, whose name is already set, is used as a
job, this function displays the signal name in the form of a comment.
NOTE
When the specification of the signal is group specification
(IG#, IGH#, OG#, OGH#), the name will not be displayed.
Also, the name will not be displayed when the job is saved
at external memory devices.
This parameter can be set on {FUNCTION ENABLE}.window.
0
: Invalid
1
: Valid
8.3.0.47 S2C684:ALL AXES ANGLE DISPLAY FUNCTION
This function enables to change the display of manipulator position from
pulse-formed to angle-formed on the specific window.
This function is valid in the following windows.
• Current value (however, it is invalid if the present displayed coordinate systems are “base”, “robot” or “user”.)
• Command position
• Work home position
• Second work home position
d7
d0
Function Valid/Invalid
Cordinated sytem Pulse/Angle
Data system when angle is specified
Absolute/Ground
:1:(Valid)
:2(Angle)
:4(Ground)
This function can be valid/invalid on {FUNCTION ENABLE} window.
Select {DISPLAY} on the pull down menu while this function is valid, then
{PUSLE}, {ABSOLUTE ANGLE} and {GROUND ANGLE} appear. Select
one so that the presently displayed data can be changed to the selected
data type.
8-29
DX100
8
8.3
Parameter
Mode Operation Setting Parameters
PULSE
Indicates the pulse data of each axis.
ABSOLUTE ANGLE
Indicates the independent angle at every axes on the basis that the
absolute value is 0[deg] when the pulse is 0.
GROUND ANGLE
Indicates the L- and U-axes angle according to the manipulator installation
direction. The value of unoperated axes may vary depending on the
manipulator’s posture.
NOTE
8.3.0.48
As for the servo track, angle is not indicated but distance
(unit [mm]).
S2C713: CONTROL POINT OPERATION SETTING ON THE SERVO TRACK
This parameter specifies a motion system by which the manipulator’s
control point is fixed while the servo track is in operation.
However, it is valid only when the selected control group is specified as a
servo track and the servo track is operated by jog keys in the cartesian
coordinates.
0
: Normal operation
1
: Control point operation setting on the servo track
8-30
8
8.4
DX100
8.4
Parameter
Parameters According to Interference Area
Parameters According to Interference Area
These parameters limit the P-point maximum envelope of the manipulator
or set the interference area for axis interference or cubic interference.
8.4.0.1
S1CxG400 to S1CxG415: PULSE SOFT LIMIT
Soft limit is set independently for each axis by pulse value setting. Set
current value (pulse value) of the axis at the soft limit set up position.
Operation area
Soft limit
Limit switch
Mechanical
operation limit
8.4.0.2
S2C001: CUBE SOFT LIMIT CHECK
This parameter specifies whether to check the cube soft limit. More than
one soft limit can be specified.
0 : No check
1 : With check
d7
d0
Cube 1 soft limit: Robot 1
Cube 2 soft limit: Robot 2
Cube 3 soft limit: Robot 3
Cube 4 soft limit: Robot 4
Cube 5 soft limit: Robot 5
Cube 6 soft limit: Robot 6
Cube 7 soft limit: Robot 7
Cube 8 soft limit: Robot 8
If “WITH CHECK” is selected, set up the following parameters.
Units: μm
8-31
DX100
8
8.4
Parameter
Parameters According to Interference Area
Cube Soft Limit (Base Coordinates of Robot TCP)
S3C000: Robot 1: + side: X
S3C001: Robot 1: + side: Y
S3C002: Robot 1: + side: Z
S3C003: Robot 1: - side: X
S3C004: Robot 1: - side: Y
S3C005: Robot 1: - side: Z
S3C007: Robot 2: + side: X
S3C008: Robot 2: + side: Y
S3C009: Robot 2: + side: Z
S3C010: Robot 2: - side: X
S3C011: Robot 2: - side: Y
S3C012: Robot 2: - side: Z
•
•
•
S3C042: Robot 8: + side: X
S3C043: Robot 8: + side: Y
S3C044: Robot 8: + side: Z
S3C045: Robot 8: - side: X
S3C046: Robot 8: - side: Y
S3C047: Robot 8: - side: Z
Soft Limit
Soft limit is a software-type function to limit the range of
movement of the manipulator.
If the TCP reaches the soft limit during operation, the manipulator automatically stops and no longer moves in that same
direction. An alarm occurs if this soft limit is exceeded
during playback. This soft limit is classified into two types.
• Cube Soft Limit
Soft limit is set with the absolute value on the base coordinates.
SUPPLEMENT
z
x
Y
• Pulse Soft Limit (Independent Axis Soft Limit)
Refer to chapter 8.4.0.1 "S1CxG400 to S1CxG415:
PULSE SOFT LIMIT" at page 8-31.
8-32
DX100
8
8.4
Parameter
Parameters According to Interference Area
8.4.0.3
S2C002: S-AXIS INTERFERENCE CHECK
This parameter specifies whether to check for interference with each
manipulator. If “WITH CHECK” is selected, set up the following
parameters.
Units: Pulse
S3C048: S-axis Interference Area Robot 1 (+)
S3C049: S-axis Interference Area Robot 1 (-)
S3C050: S-axis Interference Area Robot 2 (+)
S3C051: S-axis Interference Area Robot 2 (-)
·
·
·
S3C063: S-axis Interference Area Robot 8 (-)
8-33
DX100
8.4.0.4
8
8.4
Parameter
Parameters According to Interference Area
S2C003 to S2C066: CUBE/AXIS INTERFERENCE CHECK
1. Designation of checking
These parameters specify the cube/axis interference to be used by bit.
0
: Cube Interference/Axis Interference Not
Used
1
: Robot 1
2
: Robot 2
......
8
: Robot 8
9
: Base Axis 1
10
: Base Axis 2
......
16
: Base Axis 8
17
: Station Axis 1
18
: Station Axis 2
......
40
: Station Axis 24
2. Checking method
Designates whether checking is performed by command or feedback.
Designation of checking (data setting)
0: Not used
1: Robot 1,
, 40: Station axis 24
Checking method (bit setting)
0: Command, 1: Feedback
Checking method
The checking method differs according to ON/OFF status of
servo power supply.
SUPPLEMENT
Checking Method Designation Servo Power Supply ON Servo Power Supply OFF
Command
Command
Feedback
Feedback
Feedback
Feedback
During the servo float function operation, checking is performed by feedback regardless of the checking method designation.
8-34
8
8.4
Parameter
Parameters According to Interference Area
Interference Area
It is possible to output whether the TCP during operation is
inside or outside as a status signal, and to set the area to
control the position by parameters S2C003 to S2C194.
When the manipulator attempts to enter this area, the corresponding input signal (e.g. an “entrance prohibit signal”) is
detected. The manipulator stops immediately if there is an
input signal and goes into waiting status until this signal is
cleared. This signal is processed in the I/O section. Three
methods of interference area settings are prepared for
manipulators and stations. For a system with one manipulator, use robot 1.
• S-axis Interference Area
Position is controlled by the pulse value of the S-axis.
(-) side
(+) side
In left area
SUPPLEMENT
In right area
• Cubic Interference Area
Up to 64 cubic areas can be set. The edges of the cubes
are set parallel to the robot coordinates or the user coordinates.
Cube Setting Method
Z
Base coordinates S2C003-S2C066
(robot coordinates,
user coordinates)
S2C067-S2C194
Use cube
intrf. check?
No
Yes
Decide the using
method
S3C064-S3C1087
X
Y
Up to 64 cubic areas can be set,
each cube is set parallel to
the set coordinates.
Set the area
Complete
• Axis Interference Area
Up to 64 areas can be set. Each operation area maximum
and minimum value are set for the robot, base axis, and
station axis plus and minus side.
0
Max value
Min value
positive side (+)
negative side (-)
ON
OF F
DX100
8-35
DX100
8
8.4
Parameter
Parameters According to Interference Area
8.4.0.5
S2C067 to S2C194: CUBE USING METHOD
These parameters specify the coordinates for defining the cube. If the
user coordinates are selected, also specify the user coordinate system
numbers. Set cubic area referring to the cubic interference areas shown
below.
Coordinate specification
0
: Pulse (axis interference)
1
: Base coordinates
2
: Robot coordinates
3
: User coordinates
Coordinate No.: Specify the user coordinate number when selecting “3:
User Coordinates”.
Units: 1μm
Precaution When Setting the Interference Area
It will be necessary to consider the following when setting
the cubic interference and S-axis interference areas. The
manipulator is processed to decelerate to stop from the point
where it enters in the area. Therefore, set the areas in consideration of the amount of the manipulator movement in the
deceleration section shown in the figure below.
Interference area
Deceleration
SUPPLEMENT
Stop
Speed
Movement
Speed reduction section
The move amount in the speed reduction section is dependent on the moving speed of the manipulator at that time:
V = 1500mm/s  approx. 300mm
(Max.)
V = 1000mm/s  approx. 160mm
V = 30mm/s  approx. 3 to 4 mm
V = 20mm/s  approx. 2mm
8-36
DX100
8
8.4
Parameter
Parameters According to Interference Area
Interference Prevention in Interference Area
Processing to prevent interference is executed in the I/O
processing section. The relation between the DX100 I/O
signal and manipulator operation is shown below.
Start
Is the TCP within
the cube?
Yes
No
Is the "CUBE
ENTRANCE PROHIBIT"
signal ON?
Yes
No
Outputs "WAIT" signal.
"WAIT" reset
Manipulator stops.
"OPERATING IN CUBE"
signal output
Has it left the check
cube?
No
Yes
In wait status with the entrance prohibit signal, the manipulator just barely enters the area for speed reduction processing and then stops.
SUPPLEMENT
Fig. 8-9: Connection Example Where Two Manipulators are
Operated in the Same Area
DX100
Operating inside
CUBE1
Output in cube during
operation.
Operating inside
CUBE2
Output during waiting by
entrance prohibit signal.
Interference waiting
Inside CUBE1
entrance prohibit
These signals are checked
when entering the cube.
Inside CUBE2
entrance prohibit
Manipulator A
Manipulator B
Operating inside
CUBE1
Inside CUBE1
entrance prohibit
Operating inside
CUBE2
Inside CUBE2
entrance prohibit
Inside CUBE1
entrance prohibit
Operating inside
CUBE1
Inside CUBE2
entrance prohibit
Operating inside
CUBE2
Interference waiting
Interference waiting
Alarm signal
8-37
DX100
8
8.4
Parameter
Parameters According to Interference Area
8.4.0.6
S3C000 to S3C047: CUBE SOFT LIMIT
These parameters specify auxiliary functions of S2C001 parameter. For
details, see chapter 8.4.0.2 "S2C001: CUBE SOFT LIMIT CHECK" at
page 8-31.
8.4.0.7
S3C048 to S3C063: S-AXIS INTERFERENCE AREA
These parameters specify auxiliary functions of S2C002 parameter. For
details, see chapter 8.4.0.3 "S2C002: S-AXIS INTERFERENCE
CHECK" at page 8-33.
8.4.0.8
S3C064 to S3C1087: CUBIC INTERFERENCE AREA
These parameters specify auxiliary functions of S2C003 to S2C066
parameters. For details, see chapter 8.4.0.4 "S2C003 to S2C066:
CUBE/AXIS INTERFERENCE CHECK" at page 8-34.
8.4.0.9
S3C1089 to S3C1096: ROBOT INTERFERENCE AREA
These parameters specify auxiliary functions of S2C236 to S2C263
parameters. For details, see chapter 8.4.0.6 "S3C000 to S3C047:
CUBE SOFT LIMIT" at page 8-38.
8.4.0.10
S3C1097: A SIDE LENGTH OF WORK-HOME-POSITION CUBE
Units: 1μm
This parameter specifies a side length of the cube for the work home
position.
8-38
8
8.5
DX100
8.5
Parameter
Parameters according to Status I/O
Parameters according to Status I/O
These parameters set the parity check or I/O setting for user input/output
signals.
8.5.0.1
S2C235: USER OUTPUT RELAY WHEN CONTROL POWER IS ON
This parameter specifies the state of the user output relays when the
control power is turned ON. Since the power OFF state, including
peripheral devices, cannot be completely reproduced, take note when
restarting.
8.5.0.2
0
: Reset to the power OFF state
1
: Initialized (all user relays OFF)
S4C000 to S4C015: PARITY OF USER INPUT GROUPS
These parameters specify whether to execute priority checks with
parameters when instructions covering the input group (1G#) are
executed. The instructions covering the input groups are as shown below.
• IF Sentence (JUMP, CALL, RET, PAUSE)
• Pattern Jump, Pattern Job Call
• DIN
• WAIT
d15
d0
d15
S4C000
d0
S4C001
d15
IG#01
IG#17
IG#02
IG#18
IG#03
IG#19
IG#04
IG#20
IG#05
IG#21
IG#06
IG#22
IG#07
IG#23
IG#08
IG#09
IG#24
IG#25
IG#10
IG#26
IG#11
IG#27
IG#12
IG#28
IG#13
IG#29
IG#14
IG#30
IG#15
IG#16
IG#31
IG#32
d0
S4C002
IG#33
IG#34
IG#35
IG#36
IG#37
IG#38
IG#39
IG#40
IG#41

IG#42
IG#43
IG#44
IG#45
IG#46
IG#47
IG#48
Parity bits are set as the highest level bits of each input group and are
written in even parity. If an error is detected during parity check, an alarm
occurs and the manipulator stops. Remains unchanged if no parity check
is specified.
8-39
8
8.5
DX100
8.5.0.3
Parameter
Parameters according to Status I/O
S4C016 to S4C031: PARITY OF USER OUTPUT GROUPS
These parameters specify whether the output group instruction is
executed with parity check (even parity).
d15
d0
d15
S4C016
d0
S4C017
d15
OG#01
OG#17
OG#02
OG#18
OG#03
OG#19
OG#04
OG#20
OG#05
OG#21
OG#06
OG#22
OG#07
OG#23
OG#08
OG#09
OG#24
OG#25
OG#10
OG#26
OG#11
OG#27
OG#12
OG#28
OG#13
OG#29
OG#14
OG#30
OG#15
OG#16
OG#31
OG#32
d0
S4C018
OG#33
OG#34
OG#35
OG#36
OG#37
OG#38
OG#39
OG#40
OG#41

OG#42
OG#43
OG#44
OG#45
OG#46
OG#47
OG#48
Parity bits are set as the highest level bits of each output group. For
example, if OG#01 is specified with parity and DOUT OG# (1) 2 is
executed, the result will be 00000010 if 2 is binary converted. Since there
will be only one bit (odd) ON at this time, the parity bit (highest level bit)
will be set to ON and 10000010 (130) will be output to OG# (1).
As in the case of a variable such as DOUT OG# (1) B003 parity bits are
added to the contents of the variable data. However, if the contents of the
variable exceed 127, as in the case of DOUT OG# (1) 128, an alarm will
occur. Remains unchanged if no parity check is specified.
8-40
8
8.5
DX100
8.5.0.4
Parameter
Parameters according to Status I/O
S4C032 to S4C047: DATA OF USER INPUT GROUPS
These parameters specify whether to handle the input group data as
binary data or as BCD data when an instruction for the input group (1G#)
is executed. The instructions covering the input groups are as shown
below.
• IF Sentence (JUMP, CALL, RET, PAUSE)
• Pattern Jump, Pattern Job Call
• DIN
• WAIT
d15
d0
d15
S4C032
d0
S4C033
d15
IG#01
IG#17
IG#02
IG#18
IG#03
IG#19
IG#04
IG#20
IG#05
IG#21
IG#06
IG#22
IG#07
IG#23
IG#08
IG#09
IG#24
IG#25
IG#10
IG#26
IG#11
IG#27
IG#12
IG#28
IG#13
IG#29
IG#14
IG#30
IG#15
IG#16
IG#31
IG#32
d0
S4C034
IG#33
IG#34
IG#35
IG#36
IG#37
IG#38
IG#39
IG#40
IG#41
IG#42
IG#43
IG#44
IG#45
IG#46
IG#47
IG#48
8-41

8
8.5
DX100
8.5.0.5
Parameter
Parameters according to Status I/O
S4C048 to S4C063: DATA OF USER OUTPUT GROUPS
These parameters specify whether the output group instruction is
executed with binary data or BCD data.
d15
d0
d15
S4C048
d0
S4C049
d15
OG#01
OG#17
OG#02
OG#18
OG#03
OG#19
OG#04
OG#20
OG#05
OG#21
OG#06
OG#22
OG#07
OG#23
OG#08
OG#09
OG#24
OG#25
OG#10
OG#26
OG#11
OG#27
OG#12
OG#28
OG#13
OG#29
OG#14
OG#30
OG#15
OG#16
OG#31
OG#32
d0
S4C050
OG#33
OG#34
OG#35
OG#36
OG#37
OG#38

OG#39
OG#40
OG#41
OG#42
OG#43
OG#44
OG#45
OG#46
OG#47
OG#48
Differences Between Binary Data and BCD Data
For the input group and output group, the result will depend
on whether the binary or BCD formula is used.
<Example> When the input function is [01010101]
DATA
EDIT
USER INPUT
GROUP
SUPPLEMENT
IN#0001
IN#0002
IN#0003
IN#0004
IN#0005
IN#0006
IN#0007
IN#0008
DISPLAY
IG#01
#10010
#10011
#10012
#10013
#10014
#10015
#10016
#10017
State
0:10 00:161
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
Binary
20 = 1
21 = 2
22 = 4
23 = 8
24 = 16
25 = 32
26 = 64
27 = 128
BCD
Case
1
0
4
0
16
0
64
0
85
Case
20 = 1
21 = 2
22 = 4
23 = 8
20 = 1
21 = 2
22 = 4
23 = 8
Binary data value
Total
is in
ones.
Total
is in
tens.
1
0
4
0
1
0
4
0
5
5
55
BCD data value
!
However, in the case of BCD data, because the upper bound
value is 99, it is not possible to use any value which exceeds
nine in the one or ten digit place.
8-42
8
8.5
DX100
8.5.0.6
Parameter
Parameters according to Status I/O
S4C064 to S4C079: USER OUTPUT GROUP TO BE INITIALIZED AT SWITCHING MODE
Set the user output group with bit to be initialized at switching mode. Use
these parameters when using user output signals as work instructions for
peripheral devices.
d15
d0
d15
S4C064
d0
S4C066
d15
OG#01
OG#17
OG#02
OG#18
OG#03
OG#19
OG#04
OG#20
OG#05
OG#21
OG#06
OG#22
OG#07
OG#23
OG#08
OG#09
OG#24
OG#25
OG#10
OG#26
OG#11
OG#27
OG#12
OG#28
OG#13
OG#29
OG#14
OG#30
OG#15
OG#16
OG#31
OG#32
d0
S4C066
OG#33
OG#34
OG#35
OG#36
OG#37
OG#38
OG#39
OG#40
OG#41
OG#42

OG#43
OG#44
OG#45
OG#46
OG#47
OG#48
8.5.0.7
S4C240: USER OUTPUT NO. WHEN MANIPULATOR DROP ALLOWABLE RANGE ERROR
OCCURS
This parameter specifies the user output number to output the manipulator
drop allowable range error alarm occurrence externally.
When this function is not used, set “0”.
8-43
8
8.6
DX100
8.6
Parameter
Parameters according to Coordinated or Synchronized Operation
Parameters according to Coordinated or Synchronized
Operation
These parameters make the settings for coordinated or synchronized
operations between manipulators or between manipulators and stations.
8.6.0.1
S2C212: +MOV or +SMOV INSTRUCTION SPEED INPUT
This parameter specifies whether the speed inputting for move
instructions of the master robot in a coordinated job is permitted or not.
<Example> 0: Not Provided
SMOVL
V=100
← Master side
Speed specification not
provided
+MOVL
<Example> 1: Provided
8.6.0.2
SMOV L
V=100
+MOV L
V=100
← Master side
Speed specification
provided
S2C213: +MOV INSTRUCTION INTERPOLATION INPUT
This parameter specifies which interpolation is permitted for move
instructions for the master robot in a coordinated job. More than one
instruction can be specified.
d7
d0
+ MOVJ : 1(VALID)
+ MOVL: 2(VALID)
+ MOVC : 4(VALID)
+ MOVS: 8(VALID)
8.6.0.3
S2C231: OPERATION METHOD AT FWD/BWD OPERATION OR TEST RUN BY
INDEPENDENT CONTROL
This parameter specifies the operation method at FWD/BWD operation or
test run by independent control.
0
: The job of the task that is currently displayed operates.
1
: Jobs of all the tasks operate.
8-44
DX100
8
8.6
Parameter
Parameters according to Coordinated or Synchronized Operation
1 When master task is currently displayed:
: Not operating
Sub task 1
Master
task
: Operating
Sub task 2
2 When sub task 1 is currently displayed:
Sub task 1
Master
task
Sub task 2
Sub task 1
Master
task
Sub task 2
3 When sub task 2 is currently displayed:
Sub task 1
Master
task
Sub task 2
0: One of the task jobs that are currently
displayed operates.
8.6.0.4
1: All task jobs operate.
S2C232: JOB AT CALLING MASTER OF SUBTASK BY INDEPENDENT CONTROL
This parameter specifies the job which is called up when the master of the
subtask is called up by independent control.
0
: Master job
1
: Root job
Master Job: Job registered in the master control window
Root Job: Job activated by PSTART instruction
8.6.0.5
S2C264: STATION AXIS CURRENT VALUE DISPLAY FUNCTION
This parameter specifies whether the function to display the current value
of the station axis in the following units is valid/invalid.
0
: Invalid
1
: Valid
Rotary axis : Angle (deg)
Servo track : Distance (mm)
Regarding whether to specify the rotary axis or the servo track, refer to
chapter 8.6.0.6 "S2C265 to S2C288: STATION AXIS DISPLAYED
UNIT".
8.6.0.6
S2C265 to S2C288: STATION AXIS DISPLAYED UNIT
This parameter specifies the station axis displayed unit (bit specification).
0
: Display angle (deg)
1
: Display in distance (mm)
8-45
8
8.6
DX100

Parameter
Parameters according to Coordinated or Synchronized Operation
Setting Method
Set a numerical value (decimal) where the bit of the axis to be displayed in
the units of distance becomes 1.
d7
d6
d4
d3
d2
d1
d0
(32) (16)
(8)
(4)
(2)
(1)
d5
Decimal
Station 1st axis
Station 2nd axis
Station 3rd axis
Station 4th axis
Station 5th axis
Station 6th axis
<Example> When 1st and 3rd axes of station 1 are displayed in the
units of distance:
d7
d6
d5
d4
d3
d2
d1
d0
0
0
0
1
(4)
0
1
(1)
4
+
1
Set 1 to axis displayed in
distance.
=
5
Therefore, set parameter S2C265 of station 1 to 5.
8.6.0.7
S2C420: POSTURE CONTROL OF SYNCHRONIZED MANIPULATOR (When Twin
Synchronous Function Used)
This parameter specifies the posture control method for synchronized
manipulator performing compensation during playback by using the twin
synchronous function.
0
: Change posture according to station movement
1
: Fixed in relation to the ground
0 : Change posture according to staion movement
1 : Fixed in relation to the ground
8.6.0.8
S2C421: POSTURE CONTROL OF MANIPULATOR IN MULTI-JOB (When Twin
Synchronous Function Used)
This parameter specifies the posture control method for manipulator
executing compensation at the linking side when job linking is performed
during FWD/BWD operation by the twin synchronous function.
0
: Change posture according to station movement
1
: Fixed in relation to the ground
8-46
8
8.6
DX100
8.6.0.9
Parameter
Parameters according to Coordinated or Synchronized Operation
S2C687: OPERATION OF JOB WITHOUT CONTROL GROUP SPECIFICATION
When the servo power supply is individually turned OFF where jobs in
multiple number of tasks are operated using the independent control
function, the job execution of the control group whose servo power supply
is turned OFF is interrupted. The jobs of other control groups continue
their execution.
For the jobs without control group specification such as master job, the
conditions for execution can be set by the parameter.
0
: Execution possible only when servo power supply to all the axes have
been turned ON.
1
: Execution possible when servo power supply to any axis is turned ON.
8.6.0.10 S2C688: EXECUTION OF “BWD” OPERATION
This parameter prohibits step-back operation of a job without a step.
d7
d0
"BWD" operation for a job without a group axis. 0: Enabled 1: Disabled
"BWD" operation for concurrent job. 0: Enabled 1: Disabled
8.6.0.11
S3C1101: MAXIMUM DEVIATION ANGLE OF CURRENT STATION POSITION (When Twin
Synchronous Function Used)
Used when the twin synchronous function is used. This parameter
specifies the maximum deviation between the teaching position and the
current station position.
0
: No deviation check
Other than 0 : Deviation angle (units : 0.1°)
Manipulator at
synchronizing side
Sub-task1
Sub-task2
R1
R2
Conpensation
Position set when
teaching synchronizing side
Deviation made
at playback
Station S1
Station
In the above figure on the left, the follower R2 executes the job of subtask
2 in synchronization with the motion of the station axis which is moved by
the R1 job. In this procedure, the job of subtask 2 controls only the R2
robot axis.
If the teaching position of the station in the subtask 2 differs from the
station current position (controlled by the subtask 1 job), the difference is
automatically offset so that R2 keeps the taught position in relation to the
station.
Difference between the taught and the station current positions is always
monitored. If the difference exceeds a set value of the parameter, the
message “PULSE LIMIT (TWIN COORDINATED)” appears.
8-47
8
8.7
DX100
8.7
Parameter
Parameters for Other Functions or Applications
Parameters for Other Functions or Applications
These parameters make the settings for other functions or applications.
8.7.0.1
S1CxG049 to S1CxG051: SMALL CIRCLE CUTTING
These parameters prescribe cutting operation at small circle cutting.
S1CxG049
(Minimum diameter)
: Set the minimum diameter of a figure in the units of μm
that can be processed by small-circle cutting machine.
: Set the maximum diameter of a figure in the units of μm
S1CxG050
(Maximum diameter)
that can be processed by small-circle cutting machine.
S1CxG051
(Maximum speed)
8.7.0.2
: Set the maximum cutting speed at operation by CUT
instruction in the units of 0.1mm/s.
S1CxG052 to S1CxG053: SMALL CIRCLE CUTTING DIRECTION LIMIT VALUE
These parameters set the cutting direction limits at small circle cutting.
8.7.0.3
S1CxG052
(+ direction)
: Set the limit value in the positive direction of cutting
angle DIR set by CUT instruction, in the units of 0.01°.
S1CxG053
(- direction)
: Set the limit value in the negative direction of cutting
angle DIR set by CUT instruction, in the units of 0.01°.
S1CxG054 to S1CxG055: SMALL CIRCLE CUTTING OVERLAP VALUE
These parameters set the overlapped value at small circle cutting.
8.7.0.4
S1CxG054
(Operation radius)
: Set the operation radius at inner rotation in the units of 1
μm after overlapping by CUT instruction.
S1CxG055
(Rotation angle)
: Set the rotation angle at inner rotation in the units of 0.1°
after overlapping by CUT instruction.
S1CxG063, S1CxG064: PATTERN CUTTING DIMENSION
These parameters set the minimum diameter (S1CxG063) and the
maximum diameter (S1CxG064) for the pattern cutting in units of μm.
8.7.0.5
S1CxG065: MIRROR SHIFT SIGN INVERSION
This parameter sets which axis to be shifted (mirror-shift: invert the sign).
1st axis (0: Not invert, 1: Invert)
7th axis
8.7.0.6
S2C430: RELATIVE JOB OPERATION METHOD
This parameter specifies how to operate a relative job. A method to
convert a relative job into a standard job (pulse), and a conversion method
to calculate the aimed position (pulse position) when a relative job is
operated can be specified.
0
: Previous step with priority (B-axis moving distance minimized.)
1
: Form with priority
2
Previous step with priority (R-axis moving distance minimized.)
8-48
DX100
8.7.0.7
8
8.7
Parameter
Parameters for Other Functions or Applications
S3C1111 to S3C1190: ANALOG OUTPUT FILTER CONSTANT (When analog output
corresponding to speed function is used)
By setting a constant to filter, a filter processing can be performed for the
output analog signal.
8.7.0.8
S3C1191: CUT WIDTH CORRECTION VALUE (When form cutting function is used)
This parameter specifies the path correction value for pattern cutting
operation. A value 1/2 of the cut width is set in units of μm.
8-49
8
8.8
DX100
8.8
Parameter
Hardware Control Parameters
Hardware Control Parameters
These parameters make the hardware settings for fan alarm or relay
operation, etc.
8.8.0.1
S2C646: ANTICIPATOR FUNCTION
This parameter specifies anticipation output.
0
: Invalid
1
: Valid
The anticipator function is a function to quicken or slow the ON/OFF timing
of four user output signals and two user output groups. Using this
function, signal output can be carried out before or after the step is
reached. As a result, timing deviation due to delayed motion of peripheral
devices and robot motion can be adjusted.
Setting the time to a negative value (-) advances the signal output.
This setting is effective when adjusting timing deviation due to delayed
motion of peripheral devices.
Setting the time to a positive value (+) delays the signal output.
This setting is effective when adjusting timing deviation due to delayed
robot motion.
<Advanced Signal Output>
Signal output is carried out before the step is reached.
Step
Instructions
:
n-1
n
:
MOVL
MOVL NWAIT
ANTOUT AT#(1) ON
MOVL
n+1
n-1
n
Step
User output
n+1
ON
OFF
Setting time for advanced output
<Delayed Signal Output>
Signal output is carried out after the step is reached.
Step
:
n-1
n
n+1
Instructions
Step
:
MOVL
MOVL NWAIT
ANTOUT AT#(2) ON
ON
MOVL
User output
OFF
n-1
n
n+1
Setting time for delayed output
8-50
DX100
8.8.0.2
8
8.8
Parameter
Hardware Control Parameters
S4C327 to S4C390: SETTING OF OPERATING RELAY NO.
Up to 64 output signals can be turned ON/OFF with the programming
pendant. The object relay No. is set in these parameters. Although it is
possible to set optional values for output No. 1 to 1024 in the parameters,
the following must be taken into consideration.
• Avoid setting duplicate numbers.
• The signal turned ON or OFF with the programming pendant is operated again or remains unchanged until the instruction is executed.
8.8.0.3
S4C391 to S4C454: OPERATING METHOD OF RELAYS
These parameters specify the operating method of output signals by the
programming pendant. The operating method can be specified for each
output signal.
Parameter Setting
Value
0
Operation of Output Signal
+ON
ON
-OFF
OFF
+ON
1
8.8.0.4
ON/OFF with the key
ON while the key
is pressed
OFF if the key is
not pressed
ON
OFF
S2C786 to S2C788: COOLING FAN ALARM DETECTION
This parameter specifies a detection for cooling fan 1 to 3 with alarm
sensor, connected to power ON unit.
0
: No detection
1
: Detected with message display
2
: Detected with message and alarm display
8-51
DX100
8
8.8
Parameter
Hardware Control Parameters
8.8.0.5
S2C789 to S2C792: COOLING FAN ALARM 1 OPERATION
8.8.0.6
S2C793 to S2C796: COOLING FAN ALARM 2 OPERATION
8.8.0.7
S2C797 to S2C800: COOLING FAN ALARM 3 OPERATION
These parameters specify the operation of cooling fan 1 to 3 with alarm
sensor, connected to power ON unit.
Each bit specifies the power ON unit to which the detecting sensor is
connected.
d7
d0
S2C789,S2C793,S2C797
SERVOPACK#1
SERVOPACK#2
d7
d0
S2C790,S2C794,S2C798
SERVOPACK#3
SERVOPACK#4
d7
d0
S2C791,S2C795,S2C799
SERVOPACK#5
SERVOPACK#6
d7
d0
S2C792,S2C796,S2C800
SERVOPACK#7
SERVOPACK#8
8.8.0.8
S2C801 to S2C804: FAN ALARM 1 POWER SOURCE STATUS
8.8.0.9
S2C805 to S2C808: FAN ALARM 2 POWER SOURCE STATUS
8-52
DX100
8
8.8
Parameter
Hardware Control Parameters
8.8.0.10 S2C809 to S2C812: FAN ALARM 3 POWER SOURCE STATUS
d7
d0
S2C801,S2C805,S2C809
SERVOPACK#1
SERVOPACK#2
d7
d0
S2C802,S2C806,S2C810
SERVOPACK#3
SERVOPACK#4
d7
d0
S2C803,S2C807,S2C811
SERVOPACK#5
SERVOPACK#6
d7
d0
S2C804,S2C808,S2C812
SERVOPACK#7
SERVOPACK#8
8-53
8
8.9
DX100
8.9
Parameter
TRANSMISSION PARAMETERS
TRANSMISSION PARAMETERS
These parameters are used when the optional FC1, FC2, or data
transmission function is used.
For details, refer to the optional manual “DX100 DATA TRANSMISSION
FUNCTION”.
8.10
8.10.1
8.10.1.1
Application Parameters
Arc Welding
AxP000: APPLICATION
This parameter specifies the application. Set “0” for arc welding.
8.10.1.2
AxP003: WELDING ASSIGNMENT OF WELDING START CONDITION FILE
This parameter specifies the beginning condition number in the welding
start condition file to be assigned to Power Source 2. Condition files of a
lower number are automatically assigned to Power Source 1. For a
system with one Power Source, set “49” (maximum value).
Condition file
Power
Source 1
Power
Source 2
8.10.1.3
AxP004: WELDING ASSIGNMENT OF WELDING END CONDITION FILES
This parameter specifies the beginning condition number in the welding
END condition file to be assigned to Power Source 2. Condition files of a
lower number are automatically assigned to Power Source 1. For a
system with one Power Source, set “13” (maximum value).
Power
Source 1
Power
Source 2
8.10.1.4
AxP005: WELDING SPEED PRIORITY
This parameter specifies whether the welding speed is specified by the
“ARCON” instruction, by the welding start condition file, or by the
additional times of the “MOV” instruction.
8.10.1.5
AxP009: WORK CONTINUING
This parameter specifies whether to output an “ARCON” instruction to
restart after the manipulator stopped while the “ARCON” instruction is
being output.
8-54
8
Parameter
8.10 Application Parameters
DX100
8.10.1.6 AxP010: WELDING INSTRUCTION OUTPUT
This parameter specifies the beginning number (0 to 12) of the analog
output channel to the Power Source. “0” indicates that no Power Source
exists.
8.10.1.7 AxP011, AxP012: MANUAL WIRE OPERATION SPEED
These parameters specify the manual wire operation speed as a
percentage of the maximum instruction value. Instruction polarity is
determined by the current instruction in the Power Source characteristic
file. The setting range is from 0 to 100.
8.10.1.8 AxP013, AxP014: WELDING CONTROL TIME
These parameters specify the welding control time in units of minutes.
The setting range is from 0 to 999.
8.10.1.9 AxP015 to AxP017: NUMBER OF WELDING CONTROL
These parameters specify the number of welding controls. The setting
range is from 0 to 99.
8.10.1.10
AxP026 to AxP029: TOOL ON/OFF USER OUTPUT NO. (Jigless system)
These parameters specify the user output number for the tool open/close
operation by specific keys.
8.10.2 Handling Application
8.10.2.1 AxP002, AxP004: f1 KEY FUNCTION
These parameters set the output signal to assign for f1 key.
0: Not specified
1 to 4: Specific outputs for HAND-1 to HAND4-1
5: User output (No. is specified by AxP004).
8.10.2.2 AxP003, AxP005: f2 KEY FUNCTION
These parameters set the output signal to assign for f2 key.
0: Not specified
1 to 4: Specific outputs for HAND-2 to HAND4-2
5: User output (No. is specified by AxP005)
8.10.3 Spot Welding
8.10.3.1 AxP003: MAXIMUM NUMBER OF CONNECTED POWER SOURCES
This parameter specify the maximum number of power sources which are
to be used. The value is automatically set at start-up. No modification is
needed.
8.10.3.2 AxP004: GUN FULL OPEN STROKE ON/OFF SIGNAL
This parameter specifies which stroke switching signal is output ON or
OFF to make the gun fully-opened for each gun.
Bit specification (1 for 01) for 8 guns. The initial setting is “0”.
8-55
DX100
8
Parameter
8.10 Application Parameters
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
| | | | | | | |
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8.10.3.3
Gun number
AxP005: STROKE CHANGE ANSWER TIME LIMIT
When using the X2 gear mechanical stopper gun and switching gun
stroke, this parameter sets the time from the stroke-switching-sequence
start until the pressure instruction end.
The initial setting is “0”, with which the switching signal is output for the
“stopper-type stroke switching time” set in the file, and then the gun
pressure instruction is turned OFF.
8.10.3.4
AxP006: PARITY SPECIFICATION FOR WELDING CONDITIONS
When adding the parity signal to the welding condition signal with the
Power Source connected to each welding gun, this parameter specifies
odd or even parity.
Bit specification for 4 Power Sources. (0 : odd number, 1 : even number)
The initial setting is “0”.
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
| | | |
4 3 2 1
8.10.3.5
Power Source number
AxP007: ANTICIPATE TIME
When executing the GUNCL or SPOT instruction with NWAIT specified in
the previous move instruction but the time is not specified by ATT in the
GUNCL or SPOT instruction, this parameter specifies the anticipate
condition (time). The initial setting is “0”, with which the each instruction is
executed as soon as the taught position of the previous move instruction
is reached, as normal operation.
8.10.3.6
AxP015: WELDING ERROR RESET OUTPUT TIME
This parameter sets the output time of the welding error reset signal to the
Power Source when the alarm reset signal is input.
If the setting is "0", the welding error reset signal is not output to the Power
Source even if the alarm reset signal is input.
8.10.3.7
AxP016, AxP017: ELECTRODE WEAR AMOUNT ALARM VALUE
These parameters set the electrode wear amount alarm values (AxP016:
movable side, AxP017: fixed side) at the wear detection.
8.10.4
8.10.4.1
General-purpose Application
AxP009: WORK CONTINUE PROHIBIT
This parameter specifies whether to output TOOLON instruction or not at
restarting when the work is stopped for some reasons during the output of
TOOLON instruction.
8-56
9
9.1
DX100
9
Spot Welding Application Using a Motor Gun
System Overview
Spot Welding Application Using a Motor Gun
9.1
System Overview
An I/O signal diagram of a typical system is shown below.
Fig. 9-1: Spot Welding System I/O Signal Diagram
NX100
WELDING
CONDITION
(8 bits max.)
Power
Source
WELDING
COMMAND
WELD
COMPLETE
WELDING
ERROR
WELDING
ERROR RESET
WELD ON/OFF
Welding motor gun
9-1
DX100
9
9.1
Spot Welding Application Using a Motor Gun
System Overview
• Welding conditions (level signals)
• Sets the welding conditions for the Power Source.
• The output format can be set as binary or discrete.
• Can handle up to 255 conditions in binary.
8 bits
128
(8)
64 32
(7) (6)
16 8
(5) (4)
4
(3)
2
(2)
1
(1)
The numbers in parentheses are for discrete.
• WELDING COMMAND (level/pulse)
Outputs the start instruction to the Power Source.
• WELDING ERROR RESET (level)
Resets the welding alarm status of the Power Source.
SUPPLEMENT
For details on signal contents, refer to chapter 9.9.2
page 9-116 .
9-2
at
9
9.2
DX100
9.2
Spot Welding Application Using a Motor Gun
Function Keys
Function Keys
Each function used for spot welding is allocated on the Numeric keys of
the programming pendant.
7SYNCHRO
8
SINGLE
4
5
1
WELD
COMPLETE
MANUAL
SPOT
REFP
TOUCH
MOTION
ARCOFF
2
TIMER
0
9
.
RELEASE
FEED
ARCON
SMOV
WELD
ON/OFF
PRESSURE
6
WELD
ALMRST
RETRACT
GUN
CLOSE
3
GAS
CUR/VCL
SPOT
-
FULL
OPEN
SHORT
OPEN
CUR/VCL
Displays the MANUAL SPOT window.
0
MANUAL
SPOT
REFP
[INTERLOCK] + [WELD COMPLETE]
1
WELD
COMPLETE
TIMER
.
Forcibly release WAIT instruction.
(only when specifying of force release for WAIT instruction
is valid (S2C317 d1 bit =1))
Displays the SVSPOT instruction in the input buffer line in
order to register spot welding operation.
SPOT
[INTERLOCK] + [SPOT]
With the MANUAL SPOT window, press these keys to
execute manual spot welding.
Displays the SVGUNCL instruction in the input buffer line in
order to register dry spot welding operation.
2
GUN
CLOSE
GAS
[INTERLOCK] + [GUN CLOSE]
With the MANUAL SPOT window, press these keys to
execute manual dry spot welding.
[INTERLOCK] + [WELD ON/OFF]
Turns the welding ON/OFF signal ON or OFF.
WELD
ON/OFF
-
SHORT
OPEN
CUR/VCL
The SHORT OPEN POSITION SETTING window appears
the first time this key is pressed.
The selection No. for the short open position is replaced by
pressing this key while the SHORT OPEN POSITION
SETTING window is appeared.
[INTERLOCK] + [SHORT OPEN]
The movable side electrode moves to the selected short
open position.
9-3
DX100
9
9.2
Spot Welding Application Using a Motor Gun
Function Keys
3
FULL
OPEN
CUR/VCL
The FULL OPEN POSITION SETTING window appears the
first time the key is pressed.
The selection No. for the full open position is replaced by
pressing this key while the FULL OPEN POSITION
SETTING window is appeared.
[INTERLOCK] + [FULL OPEN]
The movable side electrode moves to the selected full open
position.
Selects either a coordinated or an individual interpolation
when teaching a coordinated job.
Each time this key is pressed, the operation type changes.
4
SMOV
6
WELD
ALMRST
Coordinated: All the move instructions that are registered in
this mode become coordinated instructions.
Individual:
The master-slave relationship is cancelled.
Each manipulator and station moves
independently.
[INTERLOCK] + [WELD ALM RESET]
A Power Source alarm reset signal is output to the Power
Source while these keys are held down.
RETRACT
7SYNCHRO
SINGLE
8
PRESSURE
Changes the type of movement for the manipulator when
teaching a coordinated job.
Each time this key is pressed, the movement type changes.
SYNCRO: The mark for “synchronized” appears in the
status display area. When the master side is
moved, the slave side will follow the movement
of the master.
SINGLE: Only the selected group axis moves.
[INTERLOCK] +[PRESSURE]
With the MANUAL SPOT window or the JOB window, press
these keys to execute pressurizing.
ARCON
[INTERLOCK] +[RELEASE]
Releases the electrode.
9
RELEASE
FEED
9-4
9
9.2
DX100
9.2.1
Spot Welding Application Using a Motor Gun
Function Keys
Switching of the Function Key
Function keys can be switched between for spot welding (motor gun) use
and for arc welding use by following the procedures below:
9.2.1.1
Two-Robot System
1. Select a robot job for SPOT welding (motor gun).
(CONTROL GROUP: R1 + S1)
– Keys change for spot welding (motor gun) use automatically.
{ARC/SPOT} icon on the main menu changes to {SPOT}.
2. Select a robot job for ARC welding.
(CONTROL GROUP: R2)
– Keys change for arc welding use automatically.
{ARC/SPOT} icon on the main menu changes to {ARC}.
9-5
DX100
9.2.1.2
9
9.2
Spot Welding Application Using a Motor Gun
Function Keys
Single-Robot System
Function keys can be switched between for spot welding (motor gun) use
and for arc welding use on APPLI SELECT window.
1. Select {ARC/SPOT} under main menu.
2. Select {APPLI SELECT}.
– APPLI SELECT window appears.
This window also appears by selecting [INTERLOCK]+[ROBOT].
3. Select {MOTOR GUN}.
– Move the cursor to {MOTOR GUN} and press [SELECT], then the
function keys become valid for SPOT welding (motor gun) use.
{ARC/SPOT} icon on the main menu changes to {SPOT}.
9-6
DX100
9
9.2
Spot Welding Application Using a Motor Gun
Function Keys
4. Select {ARC WELD}.
Move the cursor to {ARC WELD} and press [SELECT], then the
function keys become valid for ARC welding use.
{ARC/SPOT} icon on the main menu changes to {ARC}.
9-7
9
9.3
DX100
9.3
Spot Welding Application Using a Motor Gun
Before Teaching
Before Teaching
Before using the motor gun, execute the following operation instructions.
9.3.1
Manual Welding
For manual welding, perform the following operations.
1. Press [0/MANUAL SPOT] of the Numeric keys.
0
MANUAL
SPOT
REFP
2. Press [INTERLOCK] + [./SPOT].
INTER
LOCK
.
SPOT
Manual welding is executed while these keys are held down when the
MANUAL SPOT window is displayed.
Manual welding uses the conditions that are set in the MANUAL SPOT
window.
SUPPLEMENT
9.3.2
Refer to chapter 9.4.1 "Setting of MANUAL SPOT Window" at page 9-15 for the condition settings.
Manual Dry Spotting
For manual dry spotting, perform the following operations.
1. Press [0/MANUAL SPOT] of the Numeric keys.
0
MANUAL
SPOT
REFP
2. Press [INTERLOCK] + [2/GUN CLOSE].
INTER
LOCK
2
GUN
CLOSE
GAS
Manual dry spotting is executed when pressing the above mentioned keys
while the MANUAL SPOT window is displayed.
The conditions that are set in the MANUAL SPOT window are applied to
Manual dry spotting.
SUPPLEMENT
Refer to chapter 9.4.1 "Setting of MANUAL SPOT Window" at page 9-15 for the condition settings.
9-8
DX100
9.3.3
9
9.3
Spot Welding Application Using a Motor Gun
Before Teaching
Open/Close of a Motor Gun
Open and close the motor gun in the following operations.
1. Press [EX. AXIS].
EX.AXIS
– The LED on [EX. AXIS] is lit.
2. Choose the control group of the gun-axis
– Each time [EX.AXIS] is pressed, the objective external axis
alternates.
3. Press [FAST] or [SLOW] keys to set the axis manual speed.
FAST
MANUAL SPEED
SLOW
– Refer to chapter 2.2 "General Operations" at page 2-3 for the
details.
4. Press [S+] or [S-].
X-
S-
X+
S+
– The motor gun performs an “open motion” or a “close motion”.
• The opening and closing direction of the motor gun differs
depending on the gun type.
NOTE
• When setting the manual speed, be sure to select “slow
speed” to check the opening and closing direction of the
gun.
9-9
DX100
9.3.4
9
9.3
Spot Welding Application Using a Motor Gun
Before Teaching
Mounting Electrodes
Mount the electrodes in a dry spotting motion.
For dry spotting, refer to chapter 9.3.2
8.
NOTE
9.3.5
"Manual Dry Spotting" at page 9-
For teaching, be sure to use a new electrode.
Registering the Operation Tool
The registration method of operation tool differs depending on whether it
is a single gun or a double gun.
Considering the following cases, refer to “8.3 Tool Data Setting” of “DX
100 INSTRUCTIONS” (RE-CTO-A215) for the tool coordinate value and
tool data setting.
9.3.5.1
When Using a Single Gun
Register the tool coordinate value of the fixed side electrode tip position
as TCP.
Set the tool posture data so that the direction from the fixed side electrode
to the movable side electrode is positive (+) side of Z-axis.
Movable side electrode
Tool Z-axis direction
TCP
Fixed side electrode
NOTE
Be sure to set the direction of tool Z-axis facing the movable
side electrode.
If the Z-axis is not set in the correct direction, wear of the
electrode cannot be properly compensated for.
9-10
DX100
9.3.5.2
9
9.3
Spot Welding Application Using a Motor Gun
Before Teaching
When Using a Double Gun
Register the tool coordinate value of the both fixed side and movable side
electrode contact position of as TCP.
Set the tool posture data so that the direction from the lower side
electrode to the upper side electrode is positive (+) side of Z-axis.
Upper side electrode
Tool Z-axis direction
TCP
Lower side electrode
NOTE
Be sure to set the tool Z-axis in the direction from the lower
side electrode to the upper side electrode. If the Z-axis is
not set in the correct direction, wear of the electrode cannot
be properly compensated for.
9-11
9
9.3
DX100
9.3.6
Spot Welding Application Using a Motor Gun
Before Teaching
Teaching
This section explains how to prepare a job with a robot axis and a gun axis
to use the motor gun.
9.3.6.1
Preparing a Pressure Instruction Job
1. Select {JOB} from the main menu.
2. Select {CREATE NEW JOB}.
3. Enter a job name.
4. Set a control group.
– Set a control group which includes a gun-axis.
– The gun-axis is registered as a station.
– When the gun is preparing for a robot, be sure to register “Robot +
Station (gun-axis)” control group.
– The pressure compensation function doesn’t work properly when
the job is for a control group of gun-axis only.
(Example Case) Robot: R1, Gun-Axis: S
Select “R1+S1” for a control group
– Refer to chapter 9.8.8 "Gun Pressure Compensation Function" at
page 9-63 for the details of gun pressure compensation.
5. Press [ENTER]
– Refer to chapter 3.1.3
9-12
"Registering a Job" at page 3-2 for details.
9
9.3
DX100
9.3.6.2
Spot Welding Application Using a Motor Gun
Before Teaching
Registering Steps
Register the steps in the following operations
Electrode on the movable side
D
E
Workpiece
D
C
F
I
G
A
H
B
Electrode on the fixed side
1. Register the positions from A to D as steps 1 to 4.
2. Close the gun until position E, and then register it as step 5 in the job.
3. Open the gun until position F, and then register it as step 6 in the job.
4. Register the positions from G to I as steps 7 to 9.
• Position E should not touch the workpiece. Keep 5 to 10
millimeters between the workpiece and the electrode.
NOTE
• By registering a SVSPOT (Spot Welding Execution)
instruction after step 5, the tool end touches the workpiece
in the touch motion.
• For double-gun control, teach positions D and E in the
same step, and also positions F and G in the same step.
9-13
9
9.3
DX100
9.3.6.3
Spot Welding Application Using a Motor Gun
Before Teaching
Registering the SVSPOT Instruction
Register a SVSPOT instruction by pressing [./SPOT].
SVSPOT GUN#(1) PRESS#(1) WTM=1 WST=1
A
B
C
D
A. Gun No.
Specifies the gun No. to be used for welding.
B. Gun pressure file No.
Specifies the file No. to which the pressure is set.
C. Welding condition No.
Specifies the welding condition No. set for the Power Source.
D. Power Source start signal output timing
Specifies the timing to start the Power Source.
Choose from the following three settings.
• WST=0 : The Power Source starts at the same time as the SVSPOT
instruction.
As the Power Source starts before pressure is applied, a squeeze
time for the Power Source is required.
• WST=1 : The Power Source starts at the same time as pressure is
applied for the first time.
• WST=2 : The Power Source starts at the same time as pressure is
applied for the second time.

Power Source Start Signal Output Timing
Open
Gun motio n
Close
t
Pressure
t
Power Source start
signal for touch motion
(WST = 0)
t
Power Source start
signal when applying
pressure first time
(WST = 1)
t
Power Source start
signal when applying
pressure second time
(WST = 2)
t
9-14
9
9.4
DX100
9.4
9.4.1
Spot Welding Application Using a Motor Gun
Setting Welding Conditions
Setting Welding Conditions
Setting of MANUAL SPOT Window

Manual Setting window
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
Simple Menu
A. TWO GUN CONTROL
For two gun control, selects “ON” or “OFF” of synchronous control.
B. GUN NO.
Set the gun No. for pressurizing.
C. WELDING COND (WTM)
Set the welding condition No. which applies to the welding.
D. GUN PRESS. MOTION SET
Select “FILE” to specify settings.
E. GUN PRESSURE FILE NO.
Set the gun pressure file No. used for the welding.
F. OUTPUT TIMING (WST)
Shows the timing to start the Power Source. It can be selected from the
following three.
• TOUCH: Starts the Power Source at the same time as the SVSPOT
instruction is carried out. Since the Power Source starts operation
before pressure is applied, a squeeze time for the Power Source is
required.
• 1ST PRESS: Starts the Power Source at the same time as pressure
is applied for the first time.
• 2ND PRESS: Starts the Power Source at the same time as pressure
is applied for the second time.
G. PRESS CONDITION
Shows the pressurizing method in a dry spotting. It can be selected
from the following two methods.
• FILE: The pressure is applied according to the settings in the dry
spotting pressure file.
• FIXED: Dry spotting is done with the pressure specified in “CONST
PRESSURE”.
H. PRESSURE NO. or CONST PRESSURE
PRESSURE NO.: Set the dry spotting pressure file No. for pressurizing
CONST PRESSURE: Shows the pressure for the dry spotting.
9-15
9
9.4
DX100

Spot Welding Application Using a Motor Gun
Setting Welding Conditions
Operation
1. Press [0/MANUAL SPOT] of the Numeric keys.
0
MANUAL
SPOT
REFP
– Manual spot window appears.
2. Select the item to be set.
3. Enter a numerical value and press [ENTER].
– When selecting “OUTPUT TIMING (WST)”, “TOUCH”, “1ST
PRESS” or “2ND PRESS” appear alternately after pressing
“SELECT”.
– When selecting “PRESS CONDITION”, “FILE” or “CST PRESS”
appear alternately after pressing “SELECT”.
9-16
9
9.4
DX100
9.4.2
Spot Welding Application Using a Motor Gun
Setting Welding Conditions
Pressure Setting
The pressure used for welding is specified by the gun pressure file
selected for the SVSPOT.

Gun Pressure Display
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
Simple Menu
A. CONDITION NO.
Expresses the No. of the gun pressure file.
GO BACK
Select the file No. by pressing the page key
.
B. SETTING
Shows whether the values are entered in the gun pressure file or not.
For a file where the values are not entered, “NOT DONE” appears and “
DONE” appears for the files with the values are entered.
C. TOUCH SPEED
Shows the electrode speed when the gun closes.
It is shown as a ratio (%) to the gun motor rated speed.
D. TOUCH PRESS
Shows the pressure when electrode touches a workpiece.
When the pressure reaches the touch pressure value after the electrode
touches the workpiece, the first pressure that is set in E is applied.
E. 1ST to 4TH PRESS
Shows the pressure at each speed.
F. 1ST to 4TH END CONDITION
Shows the condition needed to end application for each pressure. “PRS
TIME (pressure time)” or “END WAIT (welding end wait)” can be
chosen.
PRS TIME: The gun applies a pressure for the time specified in the next
item G.
END WAIT: The gun’s application of pressure ends when a welding end
signal comes from the Power Source.
When “END WAIT” is selected for 1ST to 3ED PRESS, the conditions
required by the gun to apply pressure for the further steps are not displayed.
G. 1ST to 4TH PRS TIME
Shows the pressure time of each pressure. When “END WAIT” is
selected as the END CONDITION, the pressure time is not displayed.
PAGE
9-17
9
9.4
DX100

Spot Welding Application Using a Motor Gun
Setting Welding Conditions
Operation
1. Select {SPOT WELDING} from the main menu.
2. Select {GUN PRESSURE}.
– Gun pressure display appears.
GO BACK
3. Select the file No. by pressing the page key
PAGE
.
4. Select the item to be set.
5. Enter a numerical value and press [ENTER].
– When selecting “END CONDITION”, press [SELECT] to display
“PRS TIME (pressure time)” and “END WAIT (welding end wait)”
alternately.
9-18
9
9.4
DX100
Spot Welding Application Using a Motor Gun
Setting Welding Conditions
6. Select “SETTING”.
– The display for “SETTING” changes from “NOT DONE” to “DONE”.
For C : Yaskawa recommends the setting to 5%.
For D and E : Request settings so that the touch pressure is
less than or equal to the 1st pressure.
NOTE
The actual pressure relative to the specified pressure may
not be ensured if the above conditions are not satisfied.
Table 9-1: <Example>
Pressure (N)
End Condition
TOUCH PRESS
1000
1ST PRESS
200.0
PRS TIME
0.20 s
2ND PRESS
150.0
PRS TIME
0.10 s
3RD PRESS
220.0
PRS TIME
0.20 s
4TH PRESS
180.0
END WAIT
0.2
0.1
0.2
Pressure
220
200
150
180
100
t
Welding
end signal
t
9-19
DX100
9
9.4
Spot Welding Application Using a Motor Gun
Setting Welding Conditions
NOTE
• For pressure setting, Yaskawa recommends 5% or less for
the touch speed (C), and a value greater than the friction
torque (generally 1000N or more) for the touch pressure
(D).
• If the touch speed is too fast or the touch pressure is too
low, the gun axis may bounce.
9.4.3
Welding Current and Welding Time Settings
The welding current and the welding time are set according to the Power
Source.
Refer to the Operator’s manual of the Power Source.
NOTE
The welding condition No. set to the Power Source should
be the same as the welding condition No. specified in the
SVSPOT instruction.
9-20
9
9.5
DX100
9.5
Spot Welding Application Using a Motor Gun
Playback (Motor Gun)
Playback (Motor Gun)
This section explains the check run and the actual welding.
9.5.1
Check Run
Confirm the taught path in a check run. The check run is a dry run, so
welding instructions such as SVSPOT are not carried out.
1. Set the mode switch to “PLAY” on the programming pendant.
2. Select {UTILITY} under the menu.
3. Select {SETUP SPECIAL RUN}.
4. Select “CHECK-RUN” to set to “VALID”.
9.5.2
Actual Welding
After having confirmed the taught path, start welding.
To start the SVSPOT instruction, select “CHECK-RUN” on the SPECIAL
PLAY window to set to “INVALID”.
9-21
9
9.6
DX100
9.6
Spot Welding Application Using a Motor Gun
Dry Spotting (Motor Gun)
Dry Spotting (Motor Gun)
For dressing a tip and mounting an electrode, a gun motion to apply
pressure without welding (dry spotting) is required.
Dry spotting can be also registered in a job to be executed.
9.6.1
SVGUNCL (Dry Spotting Motion) Instruction
Register the SVGUNCL instruction by pressing [2/GUN CLOSE].
SVGUNCL GUN#(1) PRESSCL#(1)
A
B
A. Gun No.
Specifies the gun No. to start dry spotting.
It is used with the SVSPOT instruction in the same manner.
B. Pressure file No.
Specifies the file No. where the pressure for dry spotting is set.
9.6.2
Dry Spotting Pressure Setting
The pressure for dry spotting is specified by the pressure file selected for
the SVGUNCL instruction

PRESSURE window
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
J
I
H
Simple Menu
A. FILE NO.
Shows the dry spotting pressure file No.
GO BACK
Select a number by pressing the page key
PAGE
.
B. PRE CUT TIME
Shows the time from when the tip dresser rotating signal is output to the
moment the gun starts applying pressure.
C. END CUT TIME
Shows the time from when the application of pressure stops to the
moment the output signal to the tip dresser is turned OFF.
D. TOUCH SPEED
Shows the electrode speed when the gun closes. It is shown as a ratio
(%) to the gun motor rated speed.
9-22
DX100
9
9.6
Spot Welding Application Using a Motor Gun
Dry Spotting (Motor Gun)
E. PRESS UNIT
Shows the units for dry spotting pressure. Select “N” or “% (TORQUE)”.
F. TOUCH PRESS
Shows the pressure when electrode touches a workpiece. When the
pressure reaches the touch pressure value after the electrode touched
the workpiece, the first pressure that is set in G is applied.
G. 1ST to 4TH PRESS
Shows the dry spotting pressure at each step.
H.1ST to 4TH PRESS TIME
Shows the pressure time of each dry spotting pressure.
I. 1ST to 4TH PRESS OUT (ON/OFF status of 1st to 4th pressure synchronizing output signal)
Shows the ON/OFF status of the user output signal which is output in
synchronization with each dry spotting pressure.
When a synchronizing signal is output to a tip dresser, etc., select “ON”.
J. 1ST to 4TH PRESS SIGNAL (1st to 4th pressure synchronizing output signal)
Shows the No. of the user output signal which is output in synchronization with each dry spotting pressure.
9-23
9
9.6
DX100

Spot Welding Application Using a Motor Gun
Dry Spotting (Motor Gun)
Operation
1. Select {SPOT WELDING} from the main menu.
2. Select {PRESSURE}.
– Gun pressure display appears.
3. Select a file No. by pressing the page key.
4. Select the item to be set.
5. Enter a numerical value, and press [ENTER].
For “PRESS UNIT”, press [SELECT] to display “N” and “% (TORQUE)”
alternately.
For “OUT”, press [SELECT] to display “ON” and “OFF” alternately.
For D : Yaskawa recommends the setting to 5%.
NOTE
For F and G : Request the settings so that the touch pressure is less than or equal to the 1st pressure.
The actual pressure relative to the specified pressure may
not be ensured if the above conditions are not satisfied.
9-24
9
9.6
DX100
Spot Welding Application Using a Motor Gun
Dry Spotting (Motor Gun)
Table 9-2: <Example>
PRESS
TIME (s)
OUT
TOUCH PRESS
100.0
1ST PRESS
200.0
0.50
ON
2ND PRESS
220.0
0.50
ON
3RD PRESS
0.0
0.00
OFF
4TH PRESS
0.0
0.00
OFF
Tip dresser rotating signal
PRE CUT TIME = 1.0 (s) and END CUT TIME = 1.0 (s)
0.5
0.5
200
220
Dry spotting pressure
100
t
Synchronizing signal
(DOUT1)
t
Synchronizing signal
(DOUT2)
t
Tip dresser
synchronizing signal
(DOUT3)
t
1.0
NOTE
NOTE
1.0
For a tip dresser synchronizing signal, select the No. in the
output allocation window.
• For pressure setting, Yaskawa recommends 5% or less for
the touch speed (D), and a value greater than the friction
torque (generally 1000N or more) for the touch pressure
(G).
• If the touch speed is too fast or the touch pressure is too
low, the gun axis may bounce.
9-25
9
9.7
DX100
9.7
9.7.1
Spot Welding Application Using a Motor Gun
Electrode Wear Detection and Wear Compensation
Electrode Wear Detection and Wear Compensation
Wear Detection and Wear Compensation Operation Flow Chart
Mount a new tip.
Teach the manipulator moving positions.
Clear the reference position.
(See chapter 9.10.3. "Clearing Reference Position Pulse
for Wear Amount Detection" at page 9-87.)
Register the reference position of the fixed tip by dry-spotting
touch motion.
(See chapter 9.7.2.1 "Dry Spotting Touch Motion" at page 9-18.)
Register the reference position of the movable tip by sensor
detection.
(See chapter 9.7.2.2 "Sensor Detection" at page 9-18.)
Perform welding
Tip dressing
Read the position by dry-spotting touch motion.
(See chapter 9.7.2.1 "Dry Spotting Touch Motion" at page 9-18.)
Read the position by sensor detection.
(See chapter 9.7.2.2 "Sensor Detection" at page 9-18.)
Calculate the wear amount for movable and fixed tips.
When the wear
amount is less than
the allowable value.
Output a signal to request tip replacement (only when specified.)
Replace the tip.
9-26
9
9.7
DX100
9.7.2
Spot Welding Application Using a Motor Gun
Electrode Wear Detection and Wear Compensation
Wear Detection
This section explains the method to detect the amount of the electrode
wear by dry spotting touch motion and sensor detection.
9.7.2.1
Dry Spotting Touch Motion
Read the position where the movable side (upper) electrode touches the
fixed side (lower) electrode, and then calculate the total amount of
electrode wear on both sides.
Touching during dry spotting is done by carrying out a SVGUNCL (dry
spotting) instruction.
<Example>
SVGUNCL GUN#(1) PRESSCL#(1) TWC-A
A
B
C
A. Gun No.
B. Dry spotting pressure file No.
C. Dry spotting touch motion designation
9.7.2.2
Sensor Detection
Move the movable side (upper) electrode to the sensor detectable
position, and read the position to calculate the amount of electrode wear
on the movable side.
Detect the electrode position using a sensor by carrying out a SVGUNCL
(dry spotting) instruction.
<Example>
SVGUNCL GUN#(1) PRESSCL#(1) TWC-B
A
B
C
A. Gun No.
B. Dry spotting pressure file No.
C. Sensor detection designation
9-27
DX100
9.7.2.3
9
9.7
Spot Welding Application Using a Motor Gun
Electrode Wear Detection and Wear Compensation
Example of Wear Detection
Touching during dry spotting
Movable side
electrode
A
Sensor detection
Sensor
(Light emitting side) D
C
F
Sensor
(Light receiving side)
E
B
Fixed side
electrode
<Job Example>
A. MOVJ
B. SVGUNCL GUN#(1) PRESSCL#(1) TWC-A (Dry spotting
touch motion)
C. MOVJ
D. MOVJ
E. SVGUNCL GUN#(1) PRESSCL#(1) TWC-B (Sensor detection)
F. MOVJ
For double-gun control, teach a job so that the upper side
electrode passes the sensor detecting zone while using the
sensor detection.
NOTE
Also, set the polarity of the signal that is output from the
sensor, by the setting item “WEAR DETECT SENSOR
POLARITY” in the GUN CONDITION window. (Refer to
chapter 9.10.1 "Gun Condition File" at page 9-118.)
9-28
9
9.7
DX100
9.7.3
Spot Welding Application Using a Motor Gun
Electrode Wear Detection and Wear Compensation
SPOT WELD DIAGNOSIS
The amount of electrode wear is displayed. The allowable wear amount
can also be set.

Welding Diagnosis Window
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
Simple Menu
A. GUN NO.
GO BACK
Shows the gun No. Select a number by pressing the page key
PAGE
.
B. TIP HIT COUNT (CURRENT, TOLERANCE)
“CURRENT” shows the number of times the SVSPOT instruction was
carried out. When the current value exceeds the allowable value (TOLERANCE,) a signal to request tip replacement is output.
C. WEAR (MOVABLE SIDE) (CURRENT, TOLERANCE)
“CURRENT” shows the current amount of electrode wear on the movable side. When the current value exceeds the allowable value (TOLERANCE,) a signal to request tip replacement is output.
D. WEAR (FIXED SIDE) (CURRENT, TOLERANCE)
“CURRENT” shows the current amount of electrode wear on the fixed
side. When the current value exceeds the allowable value (TOLERANCE,) a signal to request tip replacement is output.
E. TCP ADJUSTMENT VALUE
Shows the amount of shift from the TCP.
F. GUN STROKE ADJUSTMENT
Shows the adjusted amount of gun stroke.
G. BASE POS (MOVABLE SIDE)
Registers the first detected position (position where the signal from the
sensor is input) after the reference data is cleared. For the second
detection or later, calculates the difference from the reference position
as the wear amount.
H. BASE POS (FIXED SIDE)
Registers the first detected position (position at dry spotting) after the
reference data is cleared.
For the second detection or later, calculates the difference from the
reference position as the wear amount.
9-29
9
9.7
DX100

Spot Welding Application Using a Motor Gun
Electrode Wear Detection and Wear Compensation
Operation
1. Select {SPOT WELDING} from the main menu.
2. Select {WELDING DIAGNOSIS}.
– The SPOT WELD DIAGNOSIS window appears.
GO BACK
3. Select a gun No. by pressing the page key
PAGE
4. Select the item to be set.
5. Enter a numerical value, and press [ENTER].
9-30
.
9
9.7
DX100

Spot Welding Application Using a Motor Gun
Electrode Wear Detection and Wear Compensation
Clearing Operation of Each Current Value
1. Select {DATA} from the menu.
2. Select {CLEAR CURRENT POS}.
3. Select “YES”.
9-31
DX100
9.7.4
9
9.7
Spot Welding Application Using a Motor Gun
Electrode Wear Detection and Wear Compensation
Wear Compensation
The manipulator motion and the gun stroke are adjusted according to the
amount of electrode wear.
The step registered immediately before the SVSPOT instruction
compensates for the amount of wear.
<Example of Wear Compensation>
For a single gun, the amount of wear on the movable side = 3mm; the
amount of wear on the fixed side = 5mm.
Movable side
electrode
3mm
Workpiece
5mm
Fixed side
electrode
Shift the fixed side
electrode 5mm in the
Z-axis + direction on the
tool coordinates.
Adjust the gun stroke
for 8 (=5+3) mm.
<Job Example>
MOVJ
MOVJ ← In this position, wear compensation is done.
SVSPOT GUN#(1) PRESS#(1) WTM=1 WST=1
MOVJ
MOVJ
NOTE
The fixed side electrode is always shifted in the Z-axis +
direction on the tool coordinates. Therefore, be sure to register the tool position and direction correctly. (Refer to
chapter 9.3.5 "Registering the Operation Tool" at page 910.)
9-32
DX100
9
9.7
Spot Welding Application Using a Motor Gun
Electrode Wear Detection and Wear Compensation
9.7.5
Teaching Positions with a Worn Electrode
When teaching positions with a worn electrode, the position is registered
according to the electrode wear amount.
9.7.5.1
Teaching Example
Workpiece
Electrode with
5-mm wear
NOTE
9.7.5.2
The position is
taught by the
electrode with
5-mm wear.
New electrode
After the electrode is replaced,
operation is done so that the relative
positions of the workpiece and the
end of the electrode are the same as
when taught with the worn electrode.
This effect occurs only with the move instruction immediately before the SVSPOT instruction. The wear amount is
ignored when registering positions with other move instructions.
Parameters
AxP010: Teaching with compensation enabled value for wear (units: μm)
Sets the reference value of the wear amount where compensation
becomes enabled. Compensation is carried out when the wear amount
exceeds the reference value.
<Example>
In the case of AxP010 = 1000:
Wear amount ≥ 1mm : The taught position is registered according to the
wear amount.
Wear amount < 1mm : The taught position is registered disregarding the
wear amount.
AxP014: Selection of compensation execution and display
0: A message “Compensated position”. appears when the position is
registered.
1: The dialog box appears before the position is registered with a
message “Compensate? YES/NO”.
9-33
DX100
9.7.6
9
9.7
Spot Welding Application Using a Motor Gun
Electrode Wear Detection and Wear Compensation
Wear Amount Loading
Detected wear amount can be loaded in a job.
The wear amount is stored in the system D variable ($D). Use the GETS
instruction and load the wear amount.
<Example>
GETS D000 $D030
The wear amount of Gun 1 (movable side) is stored in D000.
(Unit: μm)
$D30
Gun 1 movable side (upper) wear amount
$D31
Gun 1 fixed side (lower) wear amount
$D32
Gun 2 movable side (upper) wear amount
$D33
Gun 2 fixed side (lower) wear amount
$D34
Gun 3 movable side (upper) wear amount
$D35
Gun 3 fixed side (lower) wear amount
$D36
Gun 4 movable side (upper) wear amount
$D37
Gun 4 fixed side (lower) wear amount
$D38
Gun 5 movable side (upper) wear amount
$D39
Gun 5 fixed side (lower) wear amount
$D40
Gun 6 movable side (upper) wear amount
$D41
Gun 6 fixed side (lower) wear amount
$D42
Gun 7 movable side (upper) wear amount
$D43
Gun 7 fixed side (lower) wear amount
$D44
Gun 8 movable side (upper) wear amount
$D45
Gun 8 fixed side (lower) wear amount
$D46
Gun 9 movable side (upper) wear amount
$D47
Gun 9 fixed side (lower) wear amount
$D48
Gun 10 movable side (upper) wear amount
$D49
Gun 10 fixed side (lower) wear amount
$D50
Gun 11 movable side (upper) wear amount
$D51
Gun 11 fixed side (lower) wear amount
$D52
Gun 12 movable side (upper) wear amount
$D53
Gun 12 fixed side (lower) wear amount
9-34
9
9.8
DX100
9.8
9.8.1
Spot Welding Application Using a Motor Gun
Other Functions Using a Motor Gun
Other Functions Using a Motor Gun
Motor Gun Stroke
The motor gun stroke is classified into two; full open and short open.
9.8.1.1
Registering the Full-open/Short-open Position
Eight positions can be registered for each for the gun strokes, full open
and short open.

Full Open Registering
A
B
C
Simple Menu
A. GUN NO.
Shows the gun for position setting.
GO BACK
Select a gun No. by pressing the page key
PAGE
B. SEL
The mark “” moves to the currently selected position.
C. POSITION
Shows the gun stroke.
9-35
DX100
9.8.1.2
9
9.8
Spot Welding Application Using a Motor Gun
Other Functions Using a Motor Gun
Registering the current position
1. Press [3/FULL OPEN] or [-/SHORT OPEN] of the Numeric keys.
– The FULL OPEN POS SET window (or the SHORT OPEN POS
SET window) appears.
GO BACK
2. Select a gun No. by pressing the page key
PAGE
.
3. Select a position to register a gun stroke and press [MODIFY] +
[ENTER].
9.8.1.3
Registering by entering a numerical value
1. Press [3/FULL OPEN] or [-/SHORT OPEN] of the Numeric keys.
– The FULL OPEN POS SET window (or the SHORT OPEN POS
SET window) appears.
2. Select a position to register a gun stroke.
3. Enter a numerical value, and press [ENTER].
9-36
DX100
9
9.8
Spot Welding Application Using a Motor Gun
Other Functions Using a Motor Gun
9.8.1.4
Moving to Full-open/Short-open Position
1. Press [3/FULL OPEN] or [-/SHORT OPEN] of the Numeric keys.
– The FULL OPEN POS SET window (or the SHORT OPEN POS
SET window) appears.
GO BACK
2. Select a gun No. by pressing the page key
PAGE
.
3. Change the position by pressing repeatedly [3/FULL OPEN] or
[-/SHORT OPEN].
4. Press [INTERLOCK] + [3/FULL OPEN] or [INTERLOCK] + [-/SHORT
OPEN].
– While the SHOR OPEN POS SET window (or the FULL OPEN POS
SET window) appears, the cursor moves each time [NEXT] is
pressed.
9.8.1.5
Moving to Full-open/Short-open Position While Other Window is Displayed
By pressing [INTERLOCK] + [3/FULL OPEN] or [INTERLOCK] + [-/
SHORTOPEN] while the control group of the gun axis is selected by the
operation of pressing [SHIFT] + [EX. AXIS], the gun axis of the selected
group moves to FULL OPEN or SHORT OPEN position.
9-37
9
9.8
DX100
9.8.2
Spot Welding Application Using a Motor Gun
Other Functions Using a Motor Gun
Gun Change
This section explains the gun change function.
9.8.2.1
Gun Change Instruction
Remove or mount a gun with the GUNCHG (gun change) instruction.
<Example>
GUNCHG GUN#(1) PICK
A
B
A. Gun No.
B. Designation of mounting or removing a gun
When “PICK (gun mounted)” is selected, the power supply of the gun
motor is turned ON.
When “PLACE (gun removed)” is selected, the power supply of the gun
motor is turned OFF.
9.8.2.2
Signal Status to Execute a GUNCHG Instruction
The signals must be in the status shown in the following table when
executing a GUNCHG instruction.
Signal Name
Input/
Output
Explanation
Signal
Status
Gun
Identification
Signal
Input
(3 bits)
A binary signal to identify the gun
number.
Agree
with Gun
No. 1)
Gun
Connection
(PICK)
Confirmation
Signal
Input
The signal to confirm that the gun is
connected.
Normally, a chucking confirmation signal
of ATC is allocated.
ON
Gun
Disconnection
(PLACE)
Confirmation
Signal
Input
The signal to confirm that the gun is
disconnected.
Normally, an unchucking confirmation
signal of ATC is allocated.
OFF
Gun
Connection
(PICK) Signal
Output
The signal to connect the gun.
Normally, a chucking signal of ATC is
allocated. (CHUCK = OFF, UNCHUCK =
ON)
OFF
1 The signal must agree with the gun number as shown in the following example.
<When the gun identification signal (Start) is IN10, and the gun identification signal (End) is IN12:>
Gun No.
IN10
IN11
IN12
GUN# (1)
ON
OFF
OFF
GUN# (2)
OFF
ON
OFF
GUN# (3)
ON
ON
OFF
GUN# (4)
OFF
OFF
ON
GUN# (5)
ON
OFF
ON
GUN# (6)
OFF
ON
ON
9-38
DX100
9
9.8
Spot Welding Application Using a Motor Gun
Other Functions Using a Motor Gun
The signals listed in the table above are confirmed when the DX100
control power supply is turned ON.
If the gun is connected, the servo power supply for the gun motor turns
ON when the servo is turned ON.
If the gun is not connected, the servo power supply for the robot motor
turns ON when the servo is turned ON, but the servo power supply for the
gun motor does not turn ON.
9-39
9
9.8
DX100
9.8.2.3
Spot Welding Application Using a Motor Gun
Other Functions Using a Motor Gun
Gun Change Job
The following example explains the gun change job.
<Example of I/O Allocation>
Input Signal
Output Signal
Chucking confirmation
IN1
Gun PICK/PLACE SOL
Unchucking confirmation
IN2
Gun 1 cover open/close SOL OUT2
OUT1
Coupling confirmation
IN3
Gun 1 presence LS
IN4
Gun 1 cover open limit
IN5
Gun 1 cover close limit
IN6
Gun identification signal
(start)
IN21
Gun identification signal
(end)
IN23
<Example of Mounting a Gun>
Job name: GUN 1 PICK
Control group: R1
NOP
MOVJ VJ=30
Moves to the standby position.
WAIT IN#(3)=OFF
Confirms ATC uncoupling.
WAIT IN#(2)=ON
Confirms ATC unchucking.
WAIT IN#(4)=ON
Confirms Gun 1 presence.
DOUT OT#(2)=ON
Opens Gun 1 cover.
WAIT IN#(5)=ON
Confirms Gun 1 cover opened.
:
MOVL V=500
Moves to the position which is just above the
Gun 1’s placing table.
MOVL V=100 PL=0
Moves to the ATC coupling position.
WAIT IN#(3)=ON
Confirms ATC coupling.
DOUT OT#(1)=OFF
ATC chucking
WAIT IN#(1)=ON
Confirms ATC chucking.
GUNCHG GUN#(1) PICK
Turns ON the gun motor power.
TIMER T=0.2
Waits for 0.2 seconds.
MOVL V=1000
Lifts the Gun 1.
:
WAIT IN#(4)=OFF
Confirms Gun 1 absence.
DOUT OT#(2)=OFF
Closes Gun 1 cover.
WAIT IN#(6)=ON
Confirms Gun 1 cover closed.
:
MOVJ VJ=30
Moves to the standby position.
END
9-40
DX100
9
9.8
Spot Welding Application Using a Motor Gun
Other Functions Using a Motor Gun
<Example of Removing a Gun>
Job name: GUN 1 PLACE
Control group: R1
NOP
MOVJ VJ=30
Moves to the standby position.
WAIT IN#(3)=ON
Confirms ATC coupling.
WAIT IN#(4)=OFF
Confirms Gun 1 absence.
DOUT OT#(2)=ON
Opens Gun 1 cover.
WAIT IN#(5)=ON
Confirms Gun 1 cover opened.
:
MOVL V=500
Moves to the position which is just above
the Gun 1’s placing table.
MOVL V=100 PL=0
Moves to Gun 1 placing position.
WAIT IN#(4)=ON
Confirms Gun 1 presence.
GUNCHG GUN#(1) PLACE
Turns OFF gun motor power.
TIMER T=0.2
Waits for 0.2 seconds.
DOUT OT#(1)=ON
ATC unchucking
WAIT IN#(2)=ON
Confirms ATC unchucking.
MOVL V=1000
Disconnects the gun.
:
WAIT IN#(4)=ON
Confirms Gun 1 presence.
DOUT OT#(2)=OFF
Closes Gun 1 cover.
WAIT IN#(6)=ON
Confirms Gun 1 cover closed.
:
MOVJ VJ=30
Moves to the standby position.
END
NOTE
Be sure to confirm the unchucked status when moving an
automatic tool changer to the chuck position.
9-41
DX100
9
9.8
9.8.2.4
Gun Changing Timing
Spot Welding Application Using a Motor Gun
Other Functions Using a Motor Gun
The timing to change a gun is illustrated below.
PLACE
Gun status
PICK
ON
Coupling confirmation
OFF
Gun identification signal
ON
OFF
CHUCK
PICK/PLACE SOL
UNCHUCK
Chucking confirmation
ON
OFF
Unchucking confirmation
ON
OFF
Gun-axis servo
ON
OFF
GUNCHG PICK
9-42
GUNCHG PLACE
DX100
9
9.8
Spot Welding Application Using a Motor Gun
Other Functions Using a Motor Gun
9.8.3
Electrode Touch Position Teaching Function
If the fixed electrode position cannot be visually confirmed at teaching,
register the position where the fixed electrode touches the workplace by
moving the movable electrode to touch the workpiece.
Workpiece
thickness: d mm
Distance beween
electrodes: s mm
Correction in the Tool
Z+ direction for (s-d) mm
9.8.3.1
Setting the Workpiece Thickness

Welding Diagnosis Window (Workpiece Thickness Setting)
A
B
C
Simple Menu
A. STROKE
Shows the distance between electrodes at the touch position teaching.
Pressing [SHIFT] + [ENTER] on the JOB window changes the value.
B. THICKNESS
Enter the thickness of workpiece to be welded.
C. TCP ADJUSTMENT STROKE
Shows the corrected distance of fixed electrode at the touch position
teaching.
9-43
9
9.8
DX100

Spot Welding Application Using a Motor Gun
Other Functions Using a Motor Gun
Operation
1. Select {SPOT WELDING} from the main menu.
2. Select {WELDING DIAGNOSIS}.
– The SPOT WELD DIAGNOSIS window appears.
3. Select a gun No. by pressing the page key
4. Select “THICKNESS”.
9-44
GO BACK
PAGE
.
DX100
9
9.8
Spot Welding Application Using a Motor Gun
Other Functions Using a Motor Gun
5. Enter a numerical value, and press [ENTER].
9-45
9
9.8
DX100
9.8.3.2
Spot Welding Application Using a Motor Gun
Other Functions Using a Motor Gun
Registering and Confirming Positions by Touch Motion Teaching
1. Select {JOB} from the main menu.
2. Select {JOB}.
3. Move the manipulator to the welding position.
4. Move the movable electrode to touch the workpiece.
5. Press [SHIFT] + [ENTER].
Workpiece
thickness: d mm
Distance between
electrodes: s mm
Correction in the Tool
Z+ direction for (s-d) mm
Corrected position
(Move the manipulator by pressing [FWD].)
Teaching position
(Press [SHIFT] + [ENTER] to register.)
– Press [SHIFT] + [ENTER] on the JOB window to make a correction
in the tool coordinates Z+ axis direction.
– Press [FWD] to move the manipulator to confirm the corrected
position that is actually registered.
– After having taught the position by pressing [SHIFT] + [ENTER], the
manipulator correction amount can be confirmed on the SPOT
WELD DIAGNOSIS window.
9-46
DX100
9.8.4
9
9.8
Spot Welding Application Using a Motor Gun
Other Functions Using a Motor Gun
Forced Gun-pressurizing Function
Gun-pressure can be applied by inputting an external signal.
NOTE
Gun-pressure can be applied by an external signal for dry
spotting only.
Welding cannot be carried out by an external signal.
9.8.4.1
Setting an Input Signal Number
1. Select {SPOT WELDING} from the main menu.
2. Select {GUN CONDITION}.
– The GUN CONDITION window appears.
3. Select a signal number to be set.
9-47
9
9.8
DX100
Spot Welding Application Using a Motor Gun
Other Functions Using a Motor Gun
NOTE

When the signal number “0” is selected, the forced gunpressurizing function for dry spotting is disabled.
DRY SPOT(FILE)
• After the signal is input, pressurizing is started.
• Pressure is applied according to the settings in the dry spotting pressure file specified by “Forced Pressure File No”.
• The gun stops applying pressure after a specified time period.

DRY SPOT(CONTINUE)
• The signal input and pressurizing is started as well as the above, but
pressurizing is continued during the signal input.
• When the signal is turned OFF, the gun stops applying pressure.
9-48
DX100
9
9.8
Spot Welding Application Using a Motor Gun
Other Functions Using a Motor Gun
9.8.5
Electrode Wear Compensation for Fixed Gun
The electrode wear for the fixed gun (the gun that is not mounted on the
manipulator) can be detected and compensated in the following manner.
NOTE
The wear amount of electrode for the fixed gun cannot be
detected by the fixed sensor.
Build a system so that the sensor can move into the fixed
gun’s motion range to detect the electrode wear.
9.8.5.1
Setting the User Coordinates
Set the user coordinate system with its zero-point located on the fixed
electrode end.
The + direction of the Z-axis must be towards the movable electrode.
User coordinates
Z
X
Y
The DX100 has the External Reference Point Control Function (the function to execute teaching or playback operation
with the manipulator TCP set to a point in space).
NOTE
If the direction of coordinates used for such External Reference Point Control Function is the same as that of the
above coordinates, resetting the user coordinates is not
required. (The coordinates set for the External Reference
Point Control Function can be used.)
9-49
9
9.8
DX100
9.8.5.2
Spot Welding Application Using a Motor Gun
Other Functions Using a Motor Gun
Parameters
Assign the numbers of user coordinates set for the guns.
For the gun mounted on the manipulator, set “0”. (Initial value: 0)
As for the wear-compensation user coordinates number for fixed gun (Gun 1),
setting is possible with “WEAR COMPENSATION USER CORDINATE(FIXED
GUN 1)” on the relevant window to the application.
When using 2 or more fixed guns, set the following parameters for setting the
user coordinates.
Parameters
S2C338: Wear-compensation user coordinates number for fixed gun (Gun 1)
S2C339: Wear-compensation user coordinates number for fixed gun (Gun 2)
S2C340: Wear-compensation user coordinates number for fixed gun (Gun 3)
S2C341 Wear-compensation user coordinates number for fixed gun (Gun 4)
S2C342: Wear-compensation user coordinates number for fixed gun (Gun 5)
S2C343: Wear-compensation user coordinates number for fixed gun (Gun 6)
S2C344: Wear-compensation user coordinates number for fixed gun (Gun 7)
S2C345: Wear-compensation user coordinates number for fixed gun (Gun 8)
S2C346: Wear-compensation user coordinates number for fixed gun (Gun 9)
S2C347: Wear-compensation user coordinates number for fixed gun (Gun 10)
S2C348: Wear-compensation user coordinates number for fixed gun (Gun 11)
S2C349: Wear-compensation user coordinates number for fixed gun (Gun 12)
<Example>
Gun 1: Fixed gun, using the user coordinates #3
S2C338=3
Gun 2: Fixed gun, using the user coordinates #5
S2C339=5
9-50
DX100
9.8.5.3
9
9.8
Spot Welding Application Using a Motor Gun
Other Functions Using a Motor Gun
Example of Wear Compensation
The workpiece and the gun stroke are adjusted according to the amount
of electrode wear.
The step registered immediately before the SVSPOT instruction
compensates for the amount of wear.
<Job Example>
MOVJ
MOVJ←In this position, wear compensation is done.
SVSPOT GUN#(1) PRESS#(1) WTM=1 WST=1
MOVJ
MOVJ
Movable side
electrode
3mm
Workpiece
5mm
Fixed side
electrode
Adjust the gun stroke
for 8 (=5+3) mm.
NOTE
The workpiece is always shifted in the Z-axis − direction on
the specified user coordinates. Therefore, be sure to register the position and direction of the user coordinates correctly. (Refer to chapter 9.8.5.1 "Setting the User
Coordinates" at page 9-49.)
9-51
DX100
9.8.6
9.8.6.1
9
9.8
Spot Welding Application Using a Motor Gun
Other Functions Using a Motor Gun
Clearance Teaching Function
Operation Flow Chart
With the clearance teaching function, by specifying the clearance for the
upper tip or the lower tip of the motor gun, the position taught at the
welding point is automatically offset for the clearance and registered.
The following shows the operation flow chart for the clearance teaching.
Start
Select one of the followings:
 Teaching type 1: Lower-tip teaching
Select the teaching type.
 Teaching type 2: Upper-tip teaching
 Teaching type 3: Gun-close teaching
Set the clearance data of the
followings:
 Upper-tip clearance distance
 Lower-tip clearance distance
 Board thickness (for the teaching
types 1 and 2)
Set the clearance file.
Set the teaching data of the followings:
 Teaching position (Teaching)
 Moving speed
 Clearance file number
 Gun pressure conditions/
Welding conditions
Teach the welding point.
End
9-52
9
9.8
DX100
9.8.6.2
Spot Welding Application Using a Motor Gun
Other Functions Using a Motor Gun
Setting the Teaching Type
The following three types of settings are available; the lower-tip teaching,
the upper-tip teaching, and the gun-close teaching.
Follow the procedure to select one of the three types before teaching the
welding point.
 Lower-tip teaching
(inputting board thickness
necessary)
 Upper-tip teaching
(inputting board thickness
necessary)
 Gun-close teaching
(inputting board thickness
unnecessary)
Movable side
Fixed side
1. Select {SETUP} from the main menu.
2. Select {TEACHING COND.}.
– The TEACHING CONDITION SETTING window appears
9-53
DX100
9
9.8
Spot Welding Application Using a Motor Gun
Other Functions Using a Motor Gun
3. Select {CLEARENCE TEACHING METHOD}.
– Move the cursor to the lowest line “CLEARENCE TEACHING
METHOD” and press {SELECT} to display the selection dialog box
for the teaching methods to appear.
– Three teaching methods are available.
• UPPER TIP : Teaching with the upper tip contacting the workpiece
• LOWER TIP : Teaching with the lower tip contacting the workpiece
• GUN CLOSE : Teaching with both tips contacting the workpiece
4. Select the desired teaching method.
– Press {SELECT} to change the method.
9-54
DX100
9.8.6.3
9
9.8
Spot Welding Application Using a Motor Gun
Other Functions Using a Motor Gun
Setting the Clearance Files
In this section, setting procedures of various data for clearance files are
explained.
• Set the board thickness in the clearance file before teaching the
welding point when selecting “UPPER TIP” or “LOWER TIP” for the
clearance teaching method.
• No need to set the board thickness in the clearance file before teaching the welding point in when selecting “GUN CLOSE” for the clearance teaching method.
• Up to 32 clearance files can be used.
1. Select {SPOT WELDING} from the main menu.
2. Select {CLEARANCE FSETTING}.
– The following CLEARANCE SETTING window appears.
– Clearance teaching and operation condition can be set.
– There are three operation conditions.
• MOVE&CLOSE
• SQUARE
• MOVE&OPEN
9-55
DX100
9
9.8
Spot Welding Application Using a Motor Gun
Other Functions Using a Motor Gun
– This file is a file to be specified by the clearance tag of move
instruction.(Up to 32 conditions ca be set.)
3. Select the desired item.
– {DISTANCE TO UPPER TIP}, {DISTANCE TO LOWER TIP}, and
{THICKNESS} can be set by 1/10mm.
4. Input the value and press [ENTER].
– Position the cursor and press [SELECT] to enter the value.
– After entering each value, press [ENTER] to set the value.
9-56
DX100
9
9.8
Spot Welding Application Using a Motor Gun
Other Functions Using a Motor Gun
9.8.6.4
Operations for Teaching Welding Points
The following describes the outline of the procedure for teaching the
welding point.
1. Select {JOB} from the main menu.
2. Select {JOB}.
– The JOB CONTENT window appears.
SUPPLEMENT
When registering pressure instruction
(SVSOPT,SVGUNCL,SVSPOTMOV),create a job which
include the control group of the gun axis.
3. Press [SHIFT] + [MOTION TYPE] to display SVSPOTMOV.
– When executing clearance teaching and register it, display
SVSPOTMOV by modification of interpolation type ([SHIFT] +
[MOTION TYPE]).
– This can be done only while the manipulator is operating (while the
robot switch LED indicator is lit.).
4. Edit the tag item of the instruction.
9-57
DX100
9
9.8
Spot Welding Application Using a Motor Gun
Other Functions Using a Motor Gun
5. Press [INSERT], then press [ENTER].
– The move instruction for clearance has been registered.
9.8.6.5
Move Instruction for Clearance
The following describes the move instruction for clearance.
<Example>
SVSPOTMOV V=1000.0 PLIN=1 PLOUT=1 CLF#(1) GUN#(1)
PRESS#(1) WTM=1 WST=1 WGO=1
SVSPOTMOV
: Move instruction for clearance
V=1000.0
: Linear moving speed for clearance (1000.0mm/s for this
example)
PLIN=1
: Position level at the clearance position before hit
PLOUT=1
: Position level at the clearance position after hit
CLF#(1)
: Clearance file number (file 1 for this example)
GUN#(1)
: Motor gun number (Motor gun 1 is used for this example.)
PRESS#(1)
: Pressure condition file number (Pressure condition file 1
is used for this example.)
WTM=1
: Welding condition number (Welding condition 1 is used
for this example.)
WST=1
: Power Source start-up timing
WGO=1
: Welding condition group output (Refer to chapter 9.8
"Other Functions Using a Motor Gun" at page 9-35 )
9-58
DX100
9
9.8
9.8.6.6
Moving for Clearance
Spot Welding Application Using a Motor Gun
Other Functions Using a Motor Gun
The following describes moving operation for clearance.

When moving with positioning specified using PLIN
Table 9-3: Job Example: Work 1
0000
NOP
0001
MOVJ VJ=100.0
→A
0002
SVSPOTMOV V=1000.0 PLIN=0 CLF#(1) GUN#(1)
PRESS#(1) WTM=1 WST=1
→B
0003
SVSPOTMOV V=1000.0 PLIN=0 CLF#(1) GUN#(1)
PRESS#(1) WTM=1 WST=1
→C
0004
SVSPOTMOV V=1000.0 PLIN=0 CLF#(1) GUN#(1)
PRESS#(1) WTM=1 WST=1
→D
0005
SVSPOTMOV V=1000.0 PLIN=0 CLF#(1) GUN#(1)
PRESS#(1) WTM=1 WST=1
→E
0006
SVSPOTMOV V=1000.0 PLIN=0 CLF#(1) GUN#(1)
PRESS#(1) WTM=1 WST=1
→F
0007
MOVL V=1000.0
→G
0008
END
Note: The alphabet letters on the right correspond to the ones in the following
figure.
Clearance file setting: 1
PLIN = 0
Distance to upper tip: 20.0mm
Distance to lower tip: 10.0mm
Board thickness:
2.0mm
A
G
Clearance for
upper tip:
20.0mm
B
C
Hit
D
Hit
E
Hit
F
Hit
Hit
Clearance for
lower tip:
10.0mm
A
G
9-59
9
9.8
DX100

Spot Welding Application Using a Motor Gun
Other Functions Using a Motor Gun
When moving with positioning specified using PLOUT
Table 9-4: Job Example: Work 1
0000
NOP
0001
MOVJ VJ=100.0
→A
0002
SVSPOTMOV V=1000.0 PLOUT=0 CLF#(1) GUN#(1)
PRESS#(1) WTM=1 WST=1
→B
0003
SVSPOTMOV V=1000.0 PLOUT=0 CLF#(1) GUN#(1)
PRESS#(1) WTM=1 WST=1
→C
0004
SVSPOTMOV V=1000.0 PLOUT=0 CLF#(1) GUN#(1)
PRESS#(1) WTM=1 WST=1
→D
0005
SVSPOTMOV V=1000.0 PLOUT=0 CLF#(1) GUN#(1)
PRESS#(1) WTM=1 WST=1
→E
0006
SVSPOTMOV V=1000.0 PLOUT=0 CLF#(1) GUN#(1)
PRESS#(1) WTM=1 WST=1
→F
0007
MOVL V=1000.0
→G
0008
END
Note: The alphabet letters on the right correspond to the ones in the following
figure.
Clearance file setting: 1
PLOUT = 0
Distance to upper tip : 20.0mm
Distance to lower tip : 10.0mm
Board thickness:
2.0mm
A
G
Clearance for
upper tip:
20.0mm
B
C
Hit
D
Hit
E
Hit
F
Hit
Hit
Clearance for
lower tip:
10.0mm
A
G
9-60
DX100
9.8.7
9
9.8
Spot Welding Application Using a Motor Gun
Other Functions Using a Motor Gun
Teaching with Gun Pressure
With the teaching with gun pressure, the position is registered with
pressure applied by the motor gun when teaching the position. This
function is included in the clearance teaching function and valid only when
“gun-close teaching” is selected for the clearance teaching type.
9.8.7.1
Operation Flow Chart
The following shows the operation flow chart for the gun pressure
teaching.
Start
Select "Gun-close
teaching" for clearance
teaching type of teaching
condition.
Set pressure conditions.
Move the manipulator
to the welding point.
Apply pressure.
Register the position of the
welding point.
Stop applying the
pressure.
End
9-61
Refer to chapter 9.8.6 "Clearance
Teaching Function" at page 9-49.
DX100
9.8.7.2
9
9.8
Spot Welding Application Using a Motor Gun
Other Functions Using a Motor Gun
Procedure for Registering the Position
The following describes the procedure for registering the position.
Note that this function is a part of the clearance teaching function, and is
available only when the clearance teaching type is the gun-close teaching.
1. Move the fixed tip until it contacts the workpiece and apply the
pressure.
– To apply the pressure, press [8] + [INTERLOCK].
– For pressure conditions, the file number specified at “PRESS NO.”
of the MANUAL SPOT window is used.
2. Confirm the pressure status and register the position.
– SVSPOTMOV instruction appears in the input buffer line of the job
input display while it is pressurized.
In case it doesn’t appear, press [8] to change the indication.
– The taught position is to be registered adding the compensation
amount of wear of the gun axis. Yaskawa recommends that the
pressure be applied with the gun axis not bent when teaching.
3. Stop applying the pressure.
– Press [INTERLOCK] + [9] to release the gun axis.
9.8.7.3
Setting the Pressure Conditions
The following describes settings for the pressure conditions.
The pressure condition is set with the following file No. of {GUN
PRESSURE FILE NO.}
Specify “FILE” at {PRESS CONDITION}
The following window can be displayed by pressing [0].
Simple Menu
9-62
DX100
9.8.8
9.8.8.1
9
9.8
Spot Welding Application Using a Motor Gun
Other Functions Using a Motor Gun
Gun Pressure Compensation Function
Operation Flow Chart
With the gun pressure compensation function, the gun pressure can be
kept stable even when the motor gun posture changes.
The following shows the operation flow chart for the gun pressure
compensation.
Start
Register the data for applying pressure
downwards to the GUN CONDITION
Set the pressure-to-torque
conversion value (for applying
pressure downwards).
file.
Set the pressure
compensation value (for
applying pressure upwards).
Register the data for applying
pressure upwards to the GUN
COND.AUXILIARY file.
Teach the welding point.
End
9-63
9
9.8
DX100
9.8.8.2
Spot Welding Application Using a Motor Gun
Other Functions Using a Motor Gun
Overview
The following describes outline of the gun pressure compensation
function.
The pattern 1 is shown in the fig. 9-2; applying pressure downwards, and
the pattern 2 is shown in the fig. 9-3; applying pressure upwards.
In the pattern 1, set the points (maximum twelve points) for the pressureto-torque conversion value (see fig. 9-5 "Pressure-to-torque Conversion
(For Pattern 1)" at page 9-65) of GUN CONDITION file. With this twelve
points data, the specified pressure is calculated by interpolation, and the
motor torque for motor gun is calculated.
Fig. 9-2: Pattern 1 (Applying Pressure Downwards)
Z-axis + direction
on the tool coordinates
Fig. 9-3: Pattern 2 (Applying Pressure Upwards)
Z-axis + direction
on the tool coordinates
9-64
DX100
9
9.8
Spot Welding Application Using a Motor Gun
Other Functions Using a Motor Gun
Fig. 9-4: GUN CONDITION File (For Pattern 1)
Fig. 9-5: Pressure-to-torque Conversion (For Pattern 1)
Torque
(%)
Mesaured values
Calculated by interpolation
Pressure (kgf)
For the pattern 2 shown in fig. 9-3 "Pattern 2 (Applying Pressure
Upwards)" at page 9-64, the weight of the motor gun itself may cause
deviation of pressure.
9-65
9
9.8
DX100
Spot Welding Application Using a Motor Gun
Other Functions Using a Motor Gun
Using the gun pressure compensation function, by setting one pressure
compensation value (see fig. 9-6), the motor torque for motor gun is
calculated using the pressure-to-torque conversion value of pattern 1 and
the inclination of the Z-axis + on the tool coordinates at welding so that the
pressure can be kept stable even when the welding posture changes.
(See fig. 9-7.)
Fig. 9-6: Pressure Compensation (For Pattern 2)
Pattern 2
Pressure
compensation value
Mesured value
Torque
(%)
Pattern 1
Pressure (kgf)
Fig. 9-7: Welding Posture
Z-axis + direction
on the tool coordinates
Upper tip
Inclin
on the tool coordinates
Inclin
-
on the tool coordinates
Lower tip
Z-axis +
on the tool coordinates
9-66
DX100
9
9.8
Spot Welding Application Using a Motor Gun
Other Functions Using a Motor Gun
9.8.8.3
Setting the Pressure Compensation Value
The following describes settings for pressure compensation value of
pattern 2.
For details on the data registration of pattern 1; applying pressure
downwards (settings for pressure-to-torque conversion value), refer to
chapter 9.10 "System Setting" at page 9-118.
1. Select {SPOT WELDING} from the main menu.
2. Select {GUN CONDITION}.
– The GUN CONDITION window appears.
3. Select {PRESSURE COMPENSATION}.
– By Specifying the pressure for compensation (0 to 9999N) at
PRESSURE COMPENSATION, the pressure is compensated when
the robot changes its posture.
9-67
DX100
9
9.8
Spot Welding Application Using a Motor Gun
Other Functions Using a Motor Gun
– Press [SELECT} to input the value for compensation.
4. Press [ENTER] after inputting the value.
9-68
DX100
9.8.9
9.8.9.1
9
9.8
Spot Welding Application Using a Motor Gun
Other Functions Using a Motor Gun
Workpiece Transfer Function Using a Motor Gun
Operation Flow Chart
With the workpiece transfer function, workpieces can be transferred using
a motor gun.
While this function is used, the force control for grasping a workpiece and
the tip wear compensation are available so that workpieces can be stably
handled using a motor gun.
The following shows the operation flow chart for the workpiece transfer
function.
Start
Set the conditions for
grasping/releasing
workpieces.
Teach the position.
Register workpiece
grasping and releasing
instructions.
End
9-69
Set pressure for
grasping workpiece.
DX100
9.8.9.2
9
9.8
Spot Welding Application Using a Motor Gun
Other Functions Using a Motor Gun
Setting the Conditions for Grasping/Releasing Workpieces
The PRESSURE file is used to set the conditions for grasping/releasing
workpieces.
The following describes how to set the pressure to grasp a workpiece. Up
to fifteen PRESSURE files can be used.
1. Select {SPOT WELDING} from the main menu.
2. Select {PRESSURE}.
– The PRESSURE window appears.
9-70
DX100
9
9.8
Spot Welding Application Using a Motor Gun
Other Functions Using a Motor Gun
– <Setting items>
• TOUCH SPEED
Moving speed for dry spotting.
Ratio to rated motor speed: 0 to 100%
• PRESS UNIT
Specifies the dry spotting pressure in “N” or “%” (torque).
When torque is specified, pressure is applied at the set torque value,
and the torque-to-pressure conversion table is not referred to.
• TOUCH PRESS, PRESS (1ST TO 4TH)
Sets the pressure (N) in each step.
For conversion from the pressure (N) to the reference torque (%),
the torque-to-pressure conversion table of the GUN CONDITION file
is referred to. When “0” is set for the pressure, the pressure that has
been set in the previous stage is applied to grasp the workpiece.
• TOUCH PRESS, TIME (1ST TO 4TH)
Sets the time for applying pressure in each step.
Setting range : 0.00 to 9.99 seconds
Initial value : 0.00 seconds
When “0.00” is set, this setting is ignored.
3. Select the desired item.
4. Input the value and press [ENTER].
9-71
DX100
9.8.9.3
9
9.8
Spot Welding Application Using a Motor Gun
Other Functions Using a Motor Gun
Instruction for Grasping/Releasing Workpieces
<Example>
SVGUNCL
A
GUN#(1) PRESSCL#(1) ON
B
C
D
A. Instruction for grasping/releasing workpieces
B. GUN#(1)
Specifies the gun number to grasp the workpiece.
C. PRESSCL#(1)
Specifies dry spotting condition file (setting pressure for grasping workpiece) number.
D. ON
Specifies whether the workpiece is grasped (ON) or released (OFF).
1. Select {JOB} from the main menu.
2. Select {JOB}.
– Job content window appears.
3. Press [INFORM LIST].
4. Select {DEVICE}.
– Select [SVGUNCL] for the instruction of grasping.
9-72
DX100
9
9.8
Spot Welding Application Using a Motor Gun
Other Functions Using a Motor Gun
5. Select {SVGUNCL} and press it twice.
– The following DETAIL window appears.
For transferring workpieces, adding the transfer tag is required.
– When selecting “UNUSED” for {WEAR DETECT}, the following
dialog box appears.
6. Edit the tag item of the instruction.
– Select {CONSTANT} from the dialog box.
• ON : Grasps the workpiece
• OFF: Release the workplace
9-73
DX100
9
9.8
Spot Welding Application Using a Motor Gun
Other Functions Using a Motor Gun
7. Press [INSERT} and then press [ENTER].
(1) The window returns to the JOB CONTENT window after pressing
[ENTER].
(2) The instruction can be inserted while LED indicator is lit by pressing [INSERT].
9-74
DX100
9.8.9.4
9
9.8
Spot Welding Application Using a Motor Gun
Other Functions Using a Motor Gun
Manual Operation for Grasping/Releasing Workpieces
This section describes how to grasp/release workpiece by manual
operation on the programming pendant.
With this operation, the workpiece can be easily grasped/released when
teaching the position for transferring workpieces.
This operation can be performed only in the teach mode.
1. Make the fixed tip contact the workpiece to let the manipulator grasp
the workpiece.
– Press [8] + [INTERLOCK] to apply pressure.
To set the pressure conditions, use the file number specified in
{PRESS NO.} in the MANUAL SPOT window.
2. Releasing the Workpiece
– Press [9] + [INTERLOCK] to release the gun axis.
9-75
DX100
9
9.8
9.8.10
Individual Reset Function for Wear Amount
9.8.10.1
Spot Welding Application Using a Motor Gun
Other Functions Using a Motor Gun
Operation Flow Chart
With the individual reset function, the wear amount of the motor gun’s
fixed/movable tip can be reset.
The following shows the operation flow chart for the individual resetting.
Start
Assign the reset signal for
wear amount.
End
9.8.10.2
Procedure for Signal Assignment
The following describes the setting method of each signal so that the wear
amounts on the fixed side and movable side can be reset individually.
I/O can be allocated in the GUN CONDITION window.
1. Select {SPOT WELDING} from the main menu.
2. Select {GUN CONDITION}.
– The GUN CONDITION window appears.
9-76
DX100
9
9.8
Spot Welding Application Using a Motor Gun
Other Functions Using a Motor Gun
3. Select {RESET WEAR OF LOWER TIP}.
– Set the user input signal for clearing the wear amount.
– When “0” is entered, “***” appears and the wear amount cannot be
cleared by inputting the signal.
The initial value is “0.
Simple Menu
4. Enter the desired value.
9-77
DX100
9
9.8
9.8.11
Welding Conditions Group Output Function
9.8.11.1
Spot Welding Application Using a Motor Gun
Other Functions Using a Motor Gun
Operation Flow Chart
With the welding conditions group output function, a group signal is output
to the Power Source during welding.
The following shows the operation flow chart for the welding conditions
group output function.
Start
Assign the user signal for
the group output.
Set the group output tag.
End
9.8.11.2
Procedure for Assigning the Group Output Relay
The following describes how to assign the signal number for group output
when executing the SVSPOT instruction.
1. Select {SPOT WELDING} from the main menu.
2. Select {I/O ALLOCATION}.
– The INPUT ALLOCATION window appears.
9-78
DX100
9
9.8
3.
Spot Welding Application Using a Motor Gun
Other Functions Using a Motor Gun
Select [DISPLAY] from the menu select and [ALLOCATE OUTPUT]
– The OUTPUT ALLOCATION window appears.
4. Select the desired item.
– Set {GROUP OUTPUT (START)} / {GROUP OUTPUT (END)}.
Enter the LSB output number to start and MSB output number to
end.
Simple Menu
5. Input the numerical value and press [ENTER].
9-79
DX100
9.8.11.3
9
9.8
Spot Welding Application Using a Motor Gun
Other Functions Using a Motor Gun
Setting the Group Output Tag
The following describes the settings for the pressure conditions.
When the job contents are displayed, by pressing [MOTION TYPE] +
[SHIFT], the instruction in the input line can be switched from the normal
motion interpolation (MOVJ, MOVL, MOVC, MOVS) to the clearance
motion interpolation.
1. Select {JOB} from the main menu.
2. Select {JOB}.
– The JOB CONTENT window is displayed.
3. Press [MOTION TYPE] + [SHIFT] to display “SVSPOTMOV” or
“SVSPOT”.
– The group output can be set either the following two instructions.
• SVSPOTMOV
• SVSPOT
4. Press [SELECT].
– The cursor moves to “SVSPOTMOV” or “SVSPOT”
5. Press [SELECT] again.
– The DETAIL EDIT window appears.
9-80
DX100
9
9.8
Spot Welding Application Using a Motor Gun
Other Functions Using a Motor Gun
6. Select {WELD GRP OUT}.
– Press [SELECT] to display the selection dialog box . (The initial
value is “UNUSED”.)
(1) Select {WGO=}.
(2) Set the output value.
7. Press [ENTER].
8. Press [ENTER] again.
9-81
9
9.8
DX100
9.8.11.4
Spot Welding Application Using a Motor Gun
Other Functions Using a Motor Gun
Group Output
“0” can be used as the initial number for group output.
Set AP parameter.
AxP031 (group output number setting)
AxP031=0 : group number range is from 1 to 16
AxP031=1 : group number range is from 0 to 15
9-82
DX100
9
9.8
Spot Welding Application Using a Motor Gun
Other Functions Using a Motor Gun
9.8.12 Compensation of Gun Arm Bend for C-Gun and X-Gun (SINGLE ARM MOTION)
The gun arm bend at pressurizing can be compensated by the corrective
manipulator motion.
Compensation motion in the
tool Z+ direction for (K × F ÷ 1000) mm
Specify each compensation value (X, Y, Z directions of the tool coordinate)
for the gun arm bent with the pressure of 1000N.
When K is the gun bend compensation coefficient (mm/1000N) and F is
the gun pressure (N), the robot position is corrected in each coordinate
direction of the tool for (K × F ÷ 1000) mm in synchronization with gun
pressure.
9.8.12.1 Setting the Gun Bend Compensation Coefficient
1. Select {SPOT WELDING} from the main menu.
2. Select {GUN CONDITION}.
– The GUN CONDITION window appears.
GO BACK
3. Select a gun No. by pressing the page key
9-83
PAGE
.
DX100
9
9.8
Spot Welding Application Using a Motor Gun
Other Functions Using a Motor Gun
4. Select “COEF. FOR GUN ARM BEND”.
– COEF. FOR GUN ARM BEND
Sets the compensation amount for gun arm bend per 1000N
pressure.
Simple Menu
5. Enter a numerical value, and press [ENTER].
NOTE
9.8.12.2
If “0” is entered, the gun bend compensation function will
not be effective.
Compensation Example
The gun bend compensation operation is done by the robot
when SVSPOT instruction is executed.
NOTE
In case the robot is not included in the job control group, the
gun bend compensation operation will not be executed.
<Example>
R1+S1 : Gun bend compensation executed
S1R1+ : Gun bend compensation unexecuted
When 2.0 (mm/1000N) is specified for the gun bend compensation
coefficient:
Gun Pressure (N)
Gun Bend Compensation Amount
(mm)
0
0.0
1000
2.0
2000
4.0
3000
6.0
9-84
DX100
9
9.8
Spot Welding Application Using a Motor Gun
Other Functions Using a Motor Gun
9.8.13 Gun Stroke Setting for Welding Start
At the execution of SVSPOT instruction, the gun can once be opened to a
specified position before the touch motion starts.
Without gun stroke setting
With gun stroke setting
Touch motion
Stroke motion
Touch motion
9.8.13.1 Setting the Gun Stroke Position
SVSPOT GUN#(1) PRESS#(1) WTM=1 WST=1 BWS=10.0
A
A. Gun Stroke Value for Welding Start
At the execution of SVSPOT instruction, the gun is opened to a specified position. Then, the touch motion starts and the gun is closed to the
pressurizing position.
When this item is omitted, the touch motion starts immediately at the
SVSPOT instruction.
9-85
DX100
9
9.8
Spot Welding Application Using a Motor Gun
Other Functions Using a Motor Gun
9.8.13.2
Setting the Gun Stroke Motion Speed
1. Select {SPOT WELDING} from the main menu.
2. Select {GUN CONDITION}.
– The GUN CONDITION window appears.
GO BACK
3. Select a gun No. by pressing the page key
PAGE
.
4. Select “STROKE MOVING VELOCITY”.
– STROKE MOVING VELOCITY
Sets the gun stroke motion speed under the SVSPOT instruction.
Simple Menu
5. Enter a numerical value, and press [ENTER].
9-86
9
9.8
DX100
Spot Welding Application Using a Motor Gun
Other Functions Using a Motor Gun
9.8.13.3 Motion Example
The below diagram shows an example of gun stroke motion in the
following conditions:
The gun stroke position when the welding start is 10.0 mm; the gun stroke
motion speed is 100.0%; and the touch motion speed is 20%.
10mm
Stroke motion
Motion speed: 100%
Touch motion
Motion speed: 20%
9.8.14 Setting the Gun Pushing Coefficient
This setting is regarded as a part of clearance teaching function and it is
available only when the clearance teaching method is “GUN CLOSE”.
By setting a value to the gun pushing coefficient, the position is registered
after subtracting the pressure pushing value when teaching the pressure
under “GUN CLOSE” setting.
By setting the gun pushing coefficient correctly, the contact point of the tip
and the work can be registered as a teaching point regardless of the
pressure during pressure teaching operation.
Releasing
position
Teaching
position
Registering
position
Pressure
teaching
Gun axis pushing Gun axis pushing
coefficient unset
coefficient set
Movable
side
9-87
DX100
9.8.14.1
9
9.8
Spot Welding Application Using a Motor Gun
Other Functions Using a Motor Gun
Setting of gun pushing coefficient
1. Select [SPOT WELDING] from the main menu.
2. Select [GUN CONDITION].
– The GUN CONDITION window appears.
3. Set the value to [GUN PUSHING COEF.]
– Set the value (0 to 10.0 [mm/1000N]) to the gun pushing coefficient
to compensate the registering position when pressure is taught.
– Press [SELECT] to input the numerical value.
Simple Menu
4. Press [ENTER].
9-88
DX100
9
9.8
Spot Welding Application Using a Motor Gun
Other Functions Using a Motor Gun
9.8.14.2 Calculation of Gun Pushing Coefficient
Set a pressure per 1000N [mm] to GUN PUSHING COEFFICIENT.
Gun axis position (mm)
Fig. 9-8: Relation Between Pressure and Gun Axis Position [mm]
Pressure directio
Pressure (N)
Following the relation mentioned above, calculate the change of gun axis
position per 1000N pressure and set it to the GUN PUSHING COEF.
The GUN PUSHING COEFF. is set with [mm] unit.
9-89
DX100
9.8.15
9
9.8
Spot Welding Application Using a Motor Gun
Other Functions Using a Motor Gun
tip Mounting Control Function
The cause of the pressure position error when pressure is applied can be
sorted to two causes; tip wear and tip mounting error.
By handling the cause separately, the real wear volume of tip itself can be
handled to decide the ideal replacing timing.
WELD DIAGNOSIS window
Wear
Edit separately
Tip MOUNTIN EDITING window
Tip Mounting Error
Tip mounting Tip wear
error
9-90
DX100
9
9.8
Spot Welding Application Using a Motor Gun
Other Functions Using a Motor Gun
9.8.15.1 tip Mounting Error Detection Flow Chart
Mount a new tip
Teach the manipulator moving positions
Clear the reference position.(See 9.10.3)
Register the reference position of the fixed
tip by dry-spotting touch motion.
(See "Dry Spotting Touch Motion" in 9.7.2.1)
Register the reference position of the
movable tip by sensor detection.
(See "Sensor Detection" in 9.7.2.2)
Execute TWC-AE and TWC-BE
Calculation of tip mounting
error compensation.
Clear the wear 0.
Execute welding
Tip dressing
Execute TWC-A and TWC-B
Calculate the wear amount for movable
and fixed tips.
When the wear amount is less
than the allowable value
Output a signal to request tip replacement
(only when specified)
Replace the tip.
9-91
9
9.8
DX100
Spot Welding Application Using a Motor Gun
Other Functions Using a Motor Gun
NOTE
9.8.15.2
This function is available while wear detection tag TWC-A
and TWC-B, but not available while TWC-C is executed.
Tip Installation
The error for electrode mounting is displayed.
MEASURE MODE which switches wear detection and tip mounting error
detection operations can be set.
When MEASURE MODE is ON, the difference from the reference position
is calculated as a tip mounting error.

Tip Installation Window
A
B
C
D
E
F
A. GUN NO.
Shows the number of the gun.
GO BACK
Select a gun number by pressing the page key
PAGE
.
B. TOUCH POS (NEW TIP)
The touch position while TWC-AE is executed (TWC-A is executed in
MEASURE MODE) is indicated.
C. TOUCH POS (NOW TIP)
The touch position of TWC-A or TWC-AE (TWC-A is executed regardless of MEASURE MODE is ON or OFF) is indicated.
D. INSTALLATION COEF. (LOWER TIP)
Shows the current mounting error of fixed electrode.
F. INSTALLATION COEF. (UPPER TIP)
Shows the current mounting error of movable electrode.
G. MEASURE MODE
This mode is used for specifying the wear detection operation (TWC-C
or TWC-B).
9-92
9
9.8
DX100

Spot Welding Application Using a Motor Gun
Other Functions Using a Motor Gun
Operation
1. Select [SPOT WELDING] from the main menu.
2. Select [TIP INSTALLATION].
– TIP INSTALLATION window appears.
GO BACK
3. Select the gun number by pressing the [PAGE] key
PAGE
.
4. Set [MEASURE MODE].
– Move the cursor to ON or OFF. The ON/OFF mode alternate each
time pressing the select button.
• MEASURE MODE ON: The function is set for tip mounting error
detection (TWC-AE or TWC-BE).
• MEASURE MODE OFF: The function is set for wear detection
(TWC-A or TWC-B).
– Tip mounting error detection (TWC-AE or TWC-BE) functions when
executing wear detection (TWC-A or TWC-B) at ON status.
Accordingly, the difference from reference position which is
indicated on the welding diagnosis window is calculated as a tip
mounting error.
The wear is 0 cleared at this time.
9-93
9
9.8
DX100
Spot Welding Application Using a Motor Gun
Other Functions Using a Motor Gun
• Right after mounting the tip, be sure to OFF the MEASURE MODE when executing wear detection job while
MEASURE MODE is ON.
NOTE
9.8.15.3
• The wear is handled as tip mounting error while MEASURE MODE is ON. So the wear is always regarded as 0
and the signals on wear (signal to request tip replacement,
etc.) will not be output properly.
Tip Mounting Error Detection
The method to execute the tip mounting error detection operation by dry
spotting touch motion and by plate touch motion is described here.
The following two methods are for detecting the tip mounting error.
This operation must be performed after the tip is mounted.
NOTE

If this operation is executed with the worn tip, signals on
wear (signal to request tip replacement, etc.) will not be output properly since the wear itself is regarded as the tip
mounting error.
ON the MEASURE MODE on Tip Mounting Control Display
Apply this method when wear detection and tip mounting error detection
are to be executed in the common job.
• Dry spotting touch motion (TWC-A)
Touch the fixed side and then, the movable side of the electrode to
read the position.
Execute SVGUNCL. instruction for dry spotting touch motion operation.
<Example>
MEASURE MODE:ON (Tip Mounting Control Display)
SVGUNCL GUN#(1) PRESSCL# (1)TWC-A
• Plate touch motion (TWC-B)
Bring the movable side of the electrode into contact with a plate and
read its position.
Execute SVGUNCL. instruction for dry spotting touch motion operation.
<Example>
MEASURE MODE:ON (Tip Mounting Control Display)
SVGUNCL GUN#(1) PRESSCL# (1)TWC-B

Use the Specific Tag for Tip Mounting Error
• Dry spotting touch motion (TWC-A)
Touch the fixed side and then, the movable side of the electrode to
9-94
9
9.8
DX100
Spot Welding Application Using a Motor Gun
Other Functions Using a Motor Gun
read the position.
Execute SVGUNCL. instruction for dry spotting touch motion operation.
<Example>
SVGUNCL GUN#(1) PRESSCL# (1)TWC-AE
• Plate touch motion (TWC-B)
Bring the movable side of the electrode into contact with a plate and
read its position.
Execute SVGUNCL. instruction for dry spotting touch motion operation.
<Example>
SVGUNCL GUN#(1) PRESSCL# (1)TWC-BE
9.8.15.4 Job Examples
Dry-spotting touch motion
Movable side of
the electrode
A
C
Fixed side of B
the electrode
Plate touch motion
Plate
D
F
E
<Job Example: (ON the MEASURE MODE)>

Tip Mounting Error Detection
A. MOVJ
ON the MEASURE MODE on the TIP INSTALLATION window.
B. SVGUNCL GUN#(1) PRESSCL#(1) TWC-A (Dry spotting
Touch Motion)
C. MOVJ
D. MOVJ
E. SVGUNCL GUN#(1) PRESSCL#(1) TWC-B (Against Plate
Touch Motion)
OFF the MEASURE MODE on the TIP INSTALLATION window.
F. MOVJ
Welding operation

Wear Detection
A’. MOVJ
B’. SVGUNCL GUN#(1) PRESSCL#(1) TWC-A (Dry spotting
Touch Motion)
9-95
9
9.8
DX100
Spot Welding Application Using a Motor Gun
Other Functions Using a Motor Gun
C’. MOVJ
D’. MOVJ
E’. SVGUNCL GUN#(1) PRESSCL#(1) TWC-B (Against Plate
Touch Motion)
F’. MOVJ
<Job Example (Not in MEASURE MODE >

9.8.15.5
A. MOVJ
B. SVGUNCL GUN#(1) PRESSCL#(1) TWC-AE (Dry spotting
Touch Motion)
C. MOVJ
D. MOVJ
E. SVGUNCL GUN#(1) PRESSCL#(1) TWC-BE (Against Plate
Touch Motion)
F. MOVJ
Repeat the same series of operation after this.
Monitoring tip Mounting Errors
The following parameters can monitor the tip mounting error.
A1P56 : Electrode mounting error (absolute value) general output signal
allocation
A1P57 : Absolute value threshold of electrode mounting error
(movable side) [μm]
A1P58 : Absolute value threshold of electrode mounting error
(fixed side) [μm]
<Example>
A case when the value of the parameters are as follows.
AIP56=5, AIP57=1000 and AIP58=2000
The general output signal 5 is output when either of the following condition
meets.
The absolute value of movable electrode mounting compensation
>= 1mm
The absolute value of fixed electrode mounting compensation
>= 2mm
NOTE
The signal is not output when the value of the general signal
allocation parameter (A1P56) and both AIP57 and AIP58
are 0.
9-96
9
9.8
DX100
Spot Welding Application Using a Motor Gun
Other Functions Using a Motor Gun
9.8.16 Workpiece Thickness Detection Function
9.8.16.1 Outline
The workpiece thickness detection function monitors the thickness of
workpiece to be welded every welding spot (hit point) at the SVSPOT
instruction. This function does not, however, monitor the workpiece
thickness when executing the SVGUNCL instruction.
An alarm occurs if the workpiece is missing.
Movable side electrode
Workpiece
Partial workpiece
Fixed side electrode
[Normal operation]
9-97
[Error]
9
9.8
DX100
9.8.16.2
Spot Welding Application Using a Motor Gun
Other Functions Using a Motor Gun
Instruction
SUPPLEMENT

The workpiece thickness detection function is only available
in the SVSPOT instruction but unavailable in the SVSPOTMOV instruction.
SVSPOT (Spot Welding Instruction)
The SVSPOT instruction applies pressure to the gun and performs
welding according to the specified welding condition number.
SVSPOT
GUN# ( )
PRESS# ( )
WTM=
WST=
1
2
3
4
BWS=
TH=
THA=
5
6
7
THM=
8
1
2
3
4
GUN# ( )
Gun condition file number
PRESS# ( )
Gun pressure file number
WTM=
Welding condition number
• Specifies the welding condition number which is output to the power
source.
WST=
Power source start signal output timing
• Specifies the timing of output signal to start the power source.
• Choose from the following three settings:
1) Touch motion (WST=0)
2) Pressure first time (WST=1)
3) Pressure second time (WST=2)
5
BWS=
Welding start gun stroke position
• Specifies the stroke position to which the gun is opened at the execution of SVSPOT instruction.
• Moves the gun to the position that has been adjusted according to
the amount of electrode wear.
• If the stroke position is not specified, starts the operation with speed
control at the touch speed.
• The gun operation speed is set by the gun condition file.
9-98
DX100
9
9.8
6
Spot Welding Application Using a Motor Gun
Other Functions Using a Motor Gun
TH=
Workpiece thickness (unit: mm) (Can be set by constant numbers:
-999.9 to 999.9 (the first decimal place is displayed).)
• In the thickness measure mode: the thickness value that has been
measured at playback is written.
• In the monitoring mode: At playback, the “TH” value is compared with
the measured workpiece thickness.
7
THA=
Allowable ratio of workpiece thickness (unit: %, 0 to 100)
• In the thickness measure mode: this condition is not used at the execution of SVSPOT instruction.
• In the monitoring mode: this condition is used for the calculation of
workpiece thickness comparison, and allows for variations in % for
the specified workpiece thickness “TH”.
8
THM=
Allowable workpiece thickness (unit: mm, 0.0 to 10.0)
• In the thickness measure mode: this condition is not used at the execution of SVSPOT instruction.
• In the monitoring mode: this condition is used for the calculation of
workpiece thickness comparison, and allows for variations (from
-THM to +THM) for the specified workpiece thickness “TH”.
9-99
DX100
9
9.8
9.8.16.3
Operational Procedure

Spot Welding Application Using a Motor Gun
Other Functions Using a Motor Gun
Setting of Workpiece Thickness Monitoring
• Set the mode switch of programming pendant to the Teach
mode.
SUPPLEMENT
• Set the security mode to the Edit mode or Management
mode to set job data.
• In the Operation mode, only error contents reference is
allowed.
1. Select {JOB}, then {JOB CONTENT} under the main menu.
– The JOB CONTENT window appears.
9-100
DX100
9
9.8
Spot Welding Application Using a Motor Gun
Other Functions Using a Motor Gun
2. Set SVSPOT instruction.
– Move the cursor to the “SVSPOT” data and press [SELECT].
– Press [ENTER] again to display the DETAIL EDIT window.
– Move the cursor to “THICKNESS” and press [SELECT]. Then,
select “TH=” and press [ENTER].
– Press [ENTER] again.
* Returns to the JOB CONTENT window.
9-101
DX100
9
9.8
Spot Welding Application Using a Motor Gun
Other Functions Using a Motor Gun
3. Set the workpiece thickness (TH).
– Move the cursor to “THICKNESS”, and press [SELECT].
– Enter a value (numeric value= 0.0), and press [ENTER].
9-102
DX100
9
9.8
Spot Welding Application Using a Motor Gun
Other Functions Using a Motor Gun
4. Set the allowable workpiece thickness (THA, THM).
– Set THA= 0 to 100 [%]
(THA: Specifies the allowable range for the detected
workpiece thickness by using a percentage.)
or THM= 0.0 to 10.0 [mm]
(THM: Specifies the allowable range for the detected
workpiece thickness by using an absolute value).
Move the cursor to “THICK RATIO”, and press [SELECT].
– Enter a value, and press [ENTER].
(Value: Specify by a numeric value or I variable.)
– Press [ENTER] again.
* Returns to the JOB CONTENT window.
9-103
9
9.8
DX100

Spot Welding Application Using a Motor Gun
Other Functions Using a Motor Gun
Setting of Workpiece Thickness Measurement
SUPPLEMENT
Set the mode switch of programming pendant to the Play
mode.
1. Set the mode switch of programming pendant to the Play mode.
2. Select {JOB}, then {JOB CONTENT} under the main menu.
– The JOB CONTENT window appears.
9-104
DX100
9
9.8
Spot Welding Application Using a Motor Gun
Other Functions Using a Motor Gun
3. Select {THICKNESS MEASURE} under {UTILITY}.
– “Thickness measure mode” appears in the message display area.
The [THICKNESS MEASURE] key is displayed with an asterisk.
• General signal can be used to switch to the thickness
measure mode.
NOTE
• When using the general signal to switch to the thickness
measure mode, set the following parameter.
S4C522: Specifies the general input signal to switch to the
thickness measure mode
0: Switches to the thickness measure mode by using the
programming pendant.
1 to 2048: Switches to the thickness measure mode while
the specified general signal is input.
• Note that when S4C522 is not 0, it is impossible to switch
to the thickness measure mode by using the programming
pendant.
• While above general signal is input, to switch again to the
thickness measure mode after the mode is canceled by
one of the operations described in "How to Cancel Thickness Measure Mode "at page 9-109, turn off then on the
general signal.
9-105
DX100
9
9.8
Spot Welding Application Using a Motor Gun
Other Functions Using a Motor Gun
4. Execute the job.
– The “TH” tag value of SVSPOT instruction will be rewritten with the
workpiece thickness, the value when the pressure reaches the touch
pressure, at each hit point.
The following formula is used to calculate the “TH” value.
TH= Touch pressure position (Pulse-to-stroke conversion value, mm) *1
+ DMF (Fixed side wear amount + Movable side wear amount, mm)
+ BZ (Gun bending compensation coefficient (Z-direction)
× Touch pressure, mm) *1
*1: Refer to the gun condition file.
NOTE
• The following parameter can decide whether to consider
the gun bending compensation coefficient or not when
measuring or monitoring workpiece thickness.
A1P59: Whether to consider the gun bend compensation
coefficient or not when detecting workpiece thickness
0: Not consider
1: Consider
• Do not change the above parameter between when measuring and when monitoring. Detection cannot be performed properly.
9-106
9
9.8
DX100

Spot Welding Application Using a Motor Gun
Other Functions Using a Motor Gun
Execution of Workpiece Thickness Monitoring
• Set the mode switch of programming pendant to the Play
mode.
SUPPLEMENT
• Cancel the thickness measure mode.
* Refer to "How to Cancel Thickness Measure Mode "at
page 9-109.
If playback of a job is performed with the thickness measure mode
canceled, the workpiece thickness measured at each hit point is
compared with the value of “TH”, “THA”, or “THM” tag.
If the comparison result is not acceptable, the alarm “Thickness Error”
occurs.
Use the following formula for comparison.
For THM tag:
[Acceptable Result]
TH - THM ≤ Touch pressure position + DMF + BZ ≤ TH + THM
[Not-Acceptable Result]
TH - THM > Touch pressure position + DMF + BZ
Or
Touch pressure position + DMF + BZ > TH + THM
For THA tag:
[Acceptable Result]
TH - (TH  THA / 100) ≤ Touch pressure position + DMF + BZ ≤
TH + (TH  THA / 100)
[Not-Acceptable Result]
TH - (TH  THA / 100) > Touch pressure position + DMF + BZ
Or
Touch pressure position + DMF + BZ > TH + (TH  THA / 100)
9-107
9
9.8
DX100
9.8.16.4
Spot Welding Application Using a Motor Gun
Other Functions Using a Motor Gun
Related Functions

I/O Output at Thickness Measure Mode
In the thickness measure mode, “1” is output to the general output that
has been stored in the parameter “S4C168”. For example, if the
parameter S4C168 is 20 (S4C168=20), “1” is output to “OUT20”.
This parameter can be used to stop welding in the thickness measure
mode.

Canceling Thickness Monitoring
While the general input signal specified to the following parameter is input,
the workpiece thickness monitoring function is canceled, and the same
operation is performed as when the TH tag is unused.
S4C523: Cancels workpiece thickness monitoring
0: Not used
1 to 2048: When the specified general signal is input, the workpiece
thickness monitoring function is canceled.

Display of Measured Thickness
• The measured thickness is displayed in mm on the “SPOT
WELD DIAGNOSIS” window.
SUPPLEMENT
• The latest measured thickness is always displayed on the
window.
• Even if the power to the controller is turned OFF, the measured thickness value will remain.
1. Select {SPOT WELDING} under the main menu, then select {WELD
DIAGNOSIS}.
9-108
9
9.8
DX100
Spot Welding Application Using a Motor Gun
Other Functions Using a Motor Gun
– The SPOT WELD DIAGNOSIS window appears.

How to Cancel Thickness Measure Mode
1. Cancel the thickness measure mode, then switch to the monitoring
mode.
– Performing one of the following operations cancels the thickness
measure mode and switches to the monitoring mode:
1) END operation at Playback
2) Switching to Teach Mode
3) Canceling [THICKNESS MEASURE] from the menu
9-109
9
9.8
DX100
9.8.16.5
Spot Welding Application Using a Motor Gun
Other Functions Using a Motor Gun
Notes
1. After a series of teaching operations, it is recommended that the “TH”
tag of SVSPOT instruction be specified immediately before thickness
measurement.
If the “TH” tag is specified before that, the alarm “Thickness Error” may
occur during test operation, which results in less operating efficiency.
2. The value of measured workpiece thickness is affected by the delay of
measurement timing and gun bend at the touch motion. Therefore, an
absolute accuracy cannot be guaranteed.
The faster the touch speed becomes and the more the touch pressure
increases, the bigger the error will be. If the pressure specified in the
thickness measure mode is equal to that of the monitoring mode, the
absolute accuracy will be approximately 1 mm or less.
3. The value of measured workpiece thickness is calculated as follows:
finding the touch motion position by using the pulse value at touch
motion according to the pulse-to-stroke conversion table registered in
the gun condition file, then adding the total wear amount to the touch
motion position.
Thus, the value is affected by the previous information registered in
the gun condition file.
Value of measured workpiece thickness
= Touch motion position + Total wear amount
+ Gun bending compensation coefficient (Z-direction)
× Touch pressure
9-110
9
9.9
DX100
9.9
9.9.1
Spot Welding Application Using a Motor Gun
I/O Signals for a Motor Gun
I/O Signals for a Motor Gun
I/O Allocation
The I/Os necessary for welding for each type of Power Source can be
allocated to user I/O signals.
The validity of the following signals can be validated in the PSEUDO
INPUT SIGNAL window.
• TMR COOL WTR ERR (timer cooling water error)
• GUN COOL WTR ERR (gun cooling water error)
• TRANSTHERMO ERR (transformer thermostat error)
• WELD ON/OFF (welding ON/OFF)
9.9.1.1
INPUT ALLOCATION Window
1. Select {SPOT WELDING} from the main menu.
2. Select {I/O ALLOCATION}.
– The INPUT ALLOCATION window appears.
9-111
DX100
9
9.9
Spot Welding Application Using a Motor Gun
I/O Signals for a Motor Gun
3. Select the signal No. to be set.
– The number can now be entered.
4. Enter the numerical value and press [ENTER].
9-112
DX100
9.9.1.2
9
9.9
Spot Welding Application Using a Motor Gun
I/O Signals for a Motor Gun
OUTPUT ALLOCATION Window
1. Select {SPOT WELD} from the main menu.
2. Select {I/O ALLOCATION}.
– The INPUT ALLOCATION window appears.
3. Select {ALLOCATE INPUT} on the INPUT ALLOCATION window.
– The OUTPUT ALLOCATION window appears.
9-113
DX100
9
9.9
Spot Welding Application Using a Motor Gun
I/O Signals for a Motor Gun
4. Select the operation to be set.
– The number can now be entered.
5. Enter the numerical value and press [ENTER].
NOTE
• Be sure that the allocated user signals are not used in the
job. If the duplicated signals are used in the job, malfunctions will result.
• If the WELDING CONDITION PARITY is set, the parity
signal is automatically output when the welding conditions
are output. The odd/even parity is set with a parameter.
9-114
DX100
9.9.1.3
9
9.9
Spot Welding Application Using a Motor Gun
I/O Signals for a Motor Gun
PSEUDO INPUT SIGNAL Window
1. Select {IN/OUT} from the main menu.
2. Select {PSEUDO INPUT STG}.
– The PSEUDO INPUT SIGNAL window appears.
3. Move the cursor to the signal whose validity/invalidity is to be set, and
press [INTERLOCK] + [SELECT].
– Each time [INTERLOCK] + [SELECT] are pressed, “ (invalid)” and
“ (valid)” alternately appear.
9-115
9
9.9
DX100
9.9.2
Spot Welding Application Using a Motor Gun
I/O Signals for a Motor Gun
Allocated Signals
Table 9-5: Input Signals to DX100
Signal
Contents
To
Standard
Setting
WELD COMPLETE Shows that the Power Source completed the welding
normally. Used as a confirmation signal for welding
instruction and manual spot welding. After this signal
is input, the welding sequence is completed, and the
operation moves to the next step.
Power Source
IN13
TMR COOL WTR
ERR
Monitors an abnormal state of the cooling water for the
timer Power Source. When this signal is input, an
alarm occurs to stop the manipulator. The servo power
supply stays ON.
Cooling water
flow switch
IN9
GUN COOL WTR
ERR
Monitors an abnormal state of the cooling water for the
gun. When this signal is input, an alarm occurs to stop
the manipulator. The servo power supply stays ON.
Cooling water
flow switch
IN10
TRANS-THERMO
ERR
This alarm signal from the gun transformer is input
directly into the DX100. This signal is normally ON
(normally closed) and when it is OFF, an alarm occurs.
The servo power supply stays ON.
Gun
transformer
IN11
WELD ON/OFF
(from PLC)
Inputs the WELD ON/OFF selector switch status from a
PLC such as the interlock board. The WELD ON/OFF
signal is output to the Power Source according to this
signal and the manipulator status. When this signal is
input (ON), the Power Source is turned OFF, and spot
welding is not done.
Interlock board,
etc.
CN12-B6
9-116
9
9.9
DX100
Spot Welding Application Using a Motor Gun
I/O Signals for a Motor Gun
Table 9-6: Output Signals from DX100
Signal
Contents
To
Standard
Setting
WELDING
CONDITION
(LEVEL signals)
1
(1)
2
(2)
4
(3)
8
(4)
16 (5)
32 (6)
64 (7)
128 (8)
Sets the welding conditions for the Power Source.
Power Source
4 bits from
OUT11
•
The output format can be set as binary or
discrete (bit number.)
•
Can handle up to 255 conditions. The most
significant bit is the parity bit when specified.
OUT19
OUT20
OUT21
OUT21
WELDING
CONDITION
PARITY
Not used
WELDING
COMMAND
Outputs the start command to the Power Source. This
command is NOT necessary for the Power Sources
which use the WELDING CONDITION signal as a start
signal.
Power Source
Not used
WELDING ERROR
RESET
Resets the error status in the Power Source. Outputs
by programming pendant operation.
Power Source
OUT18
WELD ON/OFF
Outputs the robot status added to the status of signals
input from the interlock board.
Power Source
OUT17
9-117
9
Spot Welding Application Using a Motor Gun
9.10 System Setting
DX100
9.10
System Setting
The items to be determined at the system setting, such as the gun and the
Power Source, are specified in the system setting files.
9.10.1
Gun Condition File
The gun characteristics are specified in the gun condition file.

Operation
1. Select {SPOT WELDING} from the main menu.
2. Select {GUN CONDITION}.
– GUN CONDITION window appears.
GO BACK
3. Select a gun No. by pressing the page key
9-118
PAGE
.
DX100
9
Spot Welding Application Using a Motor Gun
9.10 System Setting
4. Select the item to be set.
– For “GUN TYPE”, pressing [SELECT] displays “C-GUN”, “X-GUN
(SINGLE ARM MOVE)” and “X-GUN (DOUBLE ARM MOVE)”
alternately.
5. Enter the numerical value, and press [ENTER].
9-119
9
Spot Welding Application Using a Motor Gun
9.10 System Setting
DX100

Gun Condition Window
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
a
b
c
d
e
Simple Menu
A. GUN NO.
Shows the No. of the gun to be used.
When using two guns or more, select the No. by pressing the page key
GO BACK
.
B. SETTING
Shows whether the gun condition file has been set or not. For the file
where the values have not been entered, “NOT DONE” appears, while
for the file where the values have already been entered, “DONE”
appears.
C. GUN TYPE
Shows the gun type. Select from “C-GUN”, “X-GUN (SINGLE ARM
MOVE)” and “X-GUN (DOUBLE ARM MOVE)”.
D. POWER SOURCE NO.
Shows the No. of the connected Power Source.
E. TORQUE DIR
Specifies the pressure direction of the gun axis motor. When the direction to increment the motor encoder value and the pressure direction of
the gun are the same, select “+”. When they are different, select “-”.
F. PULSE, STROKE
Shows the relationship between the encoder pulse value of the gun axis
PAGE
9-120
DX100
9
Spot Welding Application Using a Motor Gun
9.10 System Setting
motor and the gun stroke. The pulse value for the specified gun stroke
can be calculated by interpolation of these values.
G. TORQUE, PRESSURE
Shows the relationship between the gun axis motor torque and the electrode pressure. The torque value for the specified pressure can be calculated by interpolation of these values.
H. MAX PRESSURE
Enter the maximum pressure that the gun can apply.
If the value specified by the pressure file exceeds it, an alarm occurs
when accelerated.
I. TOUCH DETECTIVE DELAY TIME
Shows the delay time from the start of the touch motion to the start of
the touch motion detection for the SVSPOT and SVGUNCL instruction.
J. TOUCH SPEED THRESHOLD
Shows the gun axis motor speed to detect that the pressure reaches the
touch pressure for SVSPOT and SVGUNCL instruction.
K. WEAR DETECTIVE SENSOR DIN NO.
Shows the direct IN No. where the signal from the sensor to be used for
wear detection is input.
L. WEAR RATIO (FIXED SIDE)
Shows the fixed side electrode wear ratio to the total wear amount
detected in the wear detection operation.
M. FIXED OFFSET
Shows the fixed side electrode shift amount executed at the time of the
wear compensation. Substitute the value when the fixed side electrode
is to be shifted in one direction at spot welding.
N. WEAR DETECT SENSOR POLARITY
Shows the polarity of the signal from the sensor used for the wear
detection.
“ON → OFF”: Normally ON. OFF when the electrode reaches the sensor.
“OFF → ON”: Normally OFF. ON when the electrode reaches the sensor.
O. MOVEMENT RATIO AFTER CLOSE (LOW) (displayed only
when “X-GUN (DOUBLE ARM MOVE)” is selected)
Shows the lower electrode movement ratio when the gun closes more
by the electrode wear. Enter 60% when the ratio of upper electrode
movement: the lower electrode movement = 4:6.
P. MOVEMENT RATIO IN SENSING (UP) (displayed only when
“X-GUN (DOUBLE ARM MOVE)” is selected)
Shows the ratio when the upper side electrode passes the sensor, for
detecting the upper side electrode wear using a sensor. Enter 70%
when the ratio of the upper side electrode movement: the lower side
electrode movement = 7:3.
Q. STROKE MOVING VELOCITY
Specify the motion velocity of welding start stroke, etc (BWS specified
value) when welding instruction (SVSPOT instruction) is executed.
Refer to chapter 9.8.14 "Setting the Gun Pushing Coefficient" at
page 9-87 for the details.
R. GUN ARM BEND COEF.
Set the gun arm bend compensation volume over the pressure of
1000N.
Refer to chapter 9.8.13 "Gun Stroke Setting for Welding Start" at
page 9-85 for the details.
9-121
DX100
9
Spot Welding Application Using a Motor Gun
9.10 System Setting
S. PRESSURE COMPENSATION
When applying pressure upwards, set the difference of pressure
between that of downwards.
Refer to chapter 9.8.8 "Gun Pressure Compensation Function" at
page 9-63 for the details.
T. RESET WEAR OF LOWER TIP
Set “WEAR(FIXED SIDE) CURRENT VALUE” on SPOT WELD DIAGNOSYS window to 0 by the specified user input.
U. RESET WEAR OF UPPER TIP
Set “WEAR(MOVABLE SIDE) CURRENT VALUE” on SPOT WELD
DIAGNOSYS window to 0 by the specified user input.
V. GUN PUSHING COEF
Set the gun axis pushing volume per 1000N.
Refer to chapter 9.8.15 "tip Mounting Control Function" at page 9-90
for the details.
W. LIMIT OF TOUCH (LOWER TIP)
Set the fixed electrode allowable range for touch motion detection position when pressurizing.
X. LIMIT OF TOUCH (UPPER TIP)
Set the movable electrode allowable range for touch motion detection
position when pressurizing.
Y. DRY SPOT (FILE)
Execute dry spotting by the specified user input.
Pressure is released after pressurized at the pressure position which is
specified by a file in accordance with the dry spotting pressure file
Z. DRY SPOT (CONTINUE)
Execute dry spotting by the specified user input.
Pressure follows the dry spotting pressure file which is specified by the
DRY SPOT FILE NO.
Pressurizes when the signal is ON and releases when it is OFF.
a. DRY SPOT FILE NO.
Specifies the dry spotting file no. used when forced gun-pressurizing.
b. TIP HIT COUNT RESET
Clears the tip hit count by the specified user input.
c. WEAR VOLUME OVER (FIXED)
ON the specified user input when “WEAR(FIXED SIDE) CURRENT
VALUE” exceeds the “FIXED ELECTRODE ALLOWABLE RANGE”
after the measurement of wear.
d. WEAR VOLUME OVER (MOVABLE)
ON the specified user input when “WEAR(MOVABLE SIDE) CURRENT
VALUE” exceeds the “MOVABLE ELECTRODE ALLOWABLE” RANGE
after the measurement of wear.
e. HIT POINT COUNT OVER
By the SVSPOT instruction, ON the specified user input when “HIT
POINT CURRENT VALUE” exceeds the “HIT POINT ALLOWABLE”
RANGE.
9-122
DX100
9
Spot Welding Application Using a Motor Gun
9.10 System Setting
9.10.1.1 Entering Pulse to Stroke Conversion Data
To specify the gun stroke in mm, enter data about the relationship
between the gun axis motor encoder pulse value and the gun stroke
(mm).
Follow the procedures explained below.
Up to 8 items of data can be entered.
1. Set the applicable gun stroke by a jog operation with the programming
pendant.
– Read the pulse value of the gun axis motor encoder on the
programming pendant.
2. Repeat the steps 1 for 8 points in total.
– When the relationship between two values are known from the
machine drawing, calculate the data for the 8 points.
3. Enter the obtained data of 8 points in “PULSE” and “STROKE” in the
gun condition file.
9.10.1.2 Entering Torque to Pressure Conversion Data
To specify the pressure in N, enter data about the relationship between the
gun axis motor torque (%) and the pressure (N).
Follow the procedures explained below.
Up to 8 items of data can be entered.
1. Set the pressure in the dry spotting pressure file.
– Specify the pressure units as “Torque (%)”.
2. Register SVGUNCL instruction in a job.
– Specify the dry spotting pressure file set in step 1.
3. Execute the job and measure the gun pressure with a pressure gauge.
4. Repeat steps 1. to 3. with a different pressure each time to obtain 8
items of data for the torque and the pressure.
5. Enter the obtained data of 8 points in “TORQUE” and “PRESSURE” in
the gun condition file.
NOTE
When the gun condition file has not been set, the pressure
cannot be applied.
When applying the pressure for the first time, set any value
in the gun condition file.
9-123
DX100
9.10.2
9
Spot Welding Application Using a Motor Gun
9.10 System Setting
Power Source Condition File
Specify the Power Source characteristics in the Power Source condition
file.
1. Select {SPOT WELDING} from the main menu.
2. Select {SPOT POWER SOURCE COND.}.
– The WELDER CONDITION window appears.
GO BACK
3. Select a Power Source No. by pressing the page key
4. Select the item to be set.
5. Enter a numerical value, and press [ENTER].
9-124
PAGE
.
9
Spot Welding Application Using a Motor Gun
9.10 System Setting
DX100

Open
Power Source Start Timing
• When the welding instruction output type is set to “LEVEL”:
1st pressurization 2nd pressurization
Speed command
Torque command
Speed commnad
& Torque command
Close
t
Welding
completion
t
When WST=0
Welding timer
condition
t
Welding
instruction
t
When WST=1
Welding timer
condition
t
Welding
instruction
t
When WST=2
Welding timer
condition
t
Welding
instruction
t
9-125
9
Spot Welding Application Using a Motor Gun
9.10 System Setting
DX100
• When the welding instruction output type is set to “PULSE”:
1st pressurization
Open
2nd pressurization
Speed command
Torque command
Speed commnad
& Torque command
Close
t
Welding
completion
When WST=0
t
Welding instruction
output time
Welding timer
condition
t
Welding
instruction
t
Welding instruction
output time
When WST=1
Welding timer
condition
t
Welding
instruction
t
Welding instruction
output time
When WST=2
Welding timer
condition
t
Welding
instruction
t
9-126
9
Spot Welding Application Using a Motor Gun
9.10 System Setting
DX100
• When the welding instruction output type is set to “START SIGNAL”:
1st pressurization
Open
2nd pressurization
Speed command
Torque command
Speed commnad
& Torque command
Close
t
Welding
completion
When WST=0
Welding instruction
output time
t
Welding timer
condition
t
Welding
instruction
t
When WST=1
Welding timer
condition
t
Welding
instruction
t
When WST=2
Welding timer
condition
t
Welding
instruction
t
9-127
DX100
9.10.3
9
Spot Welding Application Using a Motor Gun
9.10 System Setting
Clearing Reference Position Pulse for Wear Detection
The reference position pulse to be used for wear amount detection is
registered as internal data.
When the motion for wear detection is changed, this value should be
cleared.
1. Select {SPOT WELDING} from the main menu.
2. Select {WELD DIAGNOSIS}.
– The WELD DIAGNOSIS window appears.
GO BACK
3. Select a gun No. by pressing the page key
4. Select {CLEAR ORG POS} in {DATA} menu.
9-128
PAGE
.
DX100
9
Spot Welding Application Using a Motor Gun
9.10 System Setting
5. Select “YES”.
9-129
DX100
9.10.4
9
Spot Welding Application Using a Motor Gun
9.10 System Setting
Setting the Software Limit Value
For motor guns, the position where the new electrodes touch each other is
set as the zero-point (pulse = 0), and the pulse software limit is set on this
zero-point position.
When correcting the position for the compensation of the detected amount
of electrode wear, modifying the pulse soft limit value is necessary
because the gun is closed more than the zero-position.
<Setting Example>
When electrodes are
worn out, they do not
reach the touch
position (zero-point.)
The touch position of
new electrodes is set
as the zero-point.
Modify the software
limit value so that
the electrodes
reach the touch
position.
Parameters
S1CxG400: Pulse software limit (+ side)
S1CxG408: Pulse software limit (- side)
<Example>
When S1CxG400=50000 and S1CxG408=0:
The motor gun moves in the range 0 to 50,000 pulses.
To move the electrodes to the touch position when the electrodes are
worn out, set -3,000 for S1CxG408 so that the motor gun moves in the
range -3,000 to 50,000 pulses.
When setting the value for S1CxG408, consider the pulse amount
equivalent to the total of maximum wear amounts of two electrodes and
the gun axis bend when maximum gun pressure is applied.
9-130
DX100
9
Spot Welding Application Using a Motor Gun
9.10 System Setting
9.10.5 Setting the Lost-electrode Detection Value
The gun-axis pulse can be monitored to output the signal when an
electrode of motor gun is detached.
<Setting Example>
Shank motion range
under normal condition
Shank
0
10000
Electrode
3000
Shank motion range
when an electrode
is worn out
Shank motion range
when an electrode
is detached
The signal is output when the shank moves out of its normal motion range
because an electrode is detached.
Parameters
S2C003=10 (S1 (gun-axis) uses Interference 1.)
S2C067=0 (Monitors pulses.)
S3C664=3000, S3C072=10000 (The signal is output in the range of 3000
to 10000.)
9-131
9
Spot Welding Application Using a Motor Gun
9.11 Instruction List
DX100
9.11
Instruction List
< > indicates numeric or alphabetical data.
If multiple items are shown in one section, select one of the items.
SVSPOT
SVGUNCL
Function
Applies gun pressure and executes welding.
Additional Items GUN#
(<Gun 1 condition file No.>)
1 to 12
PRESS#
(<Gun 1 pressure file No.>)
1 to 255
WTM= <Gun 1 welding conditions>
1 to 255
WST= <Power Source start timing>
0 to 2
GUN#
(<Gun 2 condition file No.>)
1 to 12
PRESS#
(<Gun 2 pressure file No.>)
1 to 255
WTM= <Gun 2 welding conditions>
1 to 255
WST= <Power Source start timing>
0 to 2
Example
MOVL V=1000
SVSPOT GUN#(1) PRESS#(1) WTM=1 WST=1
MOVL V=1000
Function
Applies gun pressure.
Additional Items GUN#
(<Gun 1 condition file No.>)
PRESSCL#
(<Dry spotting pressure file No.>)
1 to 12
1 to 15
TWC-A
TWC-B
TWC-C
GUNCHG
Example
MOVL V=1000
SVGUNCL GUN#(1) PRESSCL#(1)
MOVL V=1000
Function
Mounts or removes a gun.
Additional Items GUN#
(<Gun condition file No.>)
PICK
PLACE
Example
GUNCHG GUN#(1) PICK
9-132
1 to 12
10
Arc Welding Application
10.1 System Structure Example of Arc Welding System
DX100
10 Arc Welding Application
10.1
System Structure Example of Arc Welding System
Fig. 10-1: System Structure of Welding Robot
Cable Stand
Cable Reel Unit
Conduit Cable
Gas Hose
ER
Y
S
Manipulator
MOTOMAN-VA1400
Torch
T O P
ED
TRIPP
OFF
DX100
Programming Pendant
PROGRAMMING PENDANT
MOTOWELD-EL350
Positioner
(MOTOPOS)
-
Power Cable (-)
DX100
ON
RESET
Internal User I/O
Wiring Harness
(Base Side)
GE N
C
EM
Welding Instruction Cable
+
Power Source
(MOTOWELD)
Power Cable (+)
Manipulator Cable
10-1
10
Arc Welding Application
10.2 General Descriptions of Instructions and Functions
DX100
10.2
10.2.1
General Descriptions of Instructions and Functions
Setup
Connect peripheral devices.
• Wire inching function (See chapter 10.3 "Function Keys" at page 105.).
• Gas flow control function (See chapter 10.3 "Function Keys" at
page 10-5.).
Setup the Power Source.
See chapter 10.4 "Power Source Condition File" at page 10-11.
10.2.2
Teaching Operation
Teach a welding line.
000
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
NOP
MOVJ VJ=10.00
MOVJ VJ=80.00
MOVL V=800
MOVL V=50
MOVL V=50
MOVL V=800
MOVJ VJ=50.00
END
Standby position
Approach position
Welding start point
Welding end point
Retract position
Standby position
Register work instructions.
• ARCON chapter 10.5.1 "ARCON" at page 10-22
• ARCOF chapter 10.5.2
"ARCOF" at page 10-34
• ARCSET chapter 10.5.3
"ARCSET" at page 10-47
000
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009
010
011
NOP
MOVJ VJ=10.00
MOVJ VJ=80.00
MOVL V=800
ARCON ASF#(1)
MOVL V=50
ARCSET AC=200 AVP=100
MOVL V=50
ARCOF AEF#(1)
MOVL V=800
MOVJ VJ=50.00
END
10-2
Standby position
Approach position
Welding start point
Welding start
Welding condition change
Welding end point
Welding end
Retract position
Standby position
DX100
10
Arc Welding Application
10.2 General Descriptions of Instructions and Functions
Set welding conditions.
• Arc welding start condition chapter 10.5.1
"ARCON" at page 10-22
• Arc welding end condition chapter 10.5.2
"ARCOF" at page 10-34
000
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009
010
011
NOP
MOVJ VJ=10.00
MOVJ VJ=80.00
MOVL V=800
ARCON ASF#(1)
MOVL V=50
ARCSET AC=200 AVP=100
MOVL V=50
ARCOF AEF#(1)
MOVL V=800
MOVJ VJ=50.00
END
Set other welding functions.
• Weaving chapter 10.12 "Weaving Condition File" at page 10-100
• Arc retry function chapter 10.6 "Arc Retry Function" at page 10-73
• Arc restart function chapter 10.7 "Arc Restart Function" at page 1075
• Wire-stick check function chapter 10.9 "Wire-stick Check Function"
at page 10-81
• Automatic wire-stick release function chapter 10.8 "Automatic Wirestick Release Function" at page 10-79
• Slope up/down function chapter 10.10 "Slope Up/Down Function" at
page 10-82
10-3
10
Arc Welding Application
10.2 General Descriptions of Instructions and Functions
DX100
000
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009
010
011
012
013
NOP
MOVJ VJ=10.00
MOVJ VJ=80.00
MOVL V=800
WVON WEV#(1)
ARCON ASF#(1)
MOVL V=50
ARCSET AC=200 AVP=100
MOVL V=50
ARCOF AEF#(1)
WVOF
MOVL V=800
MOVJ VJ=50.00
END
Standby position
Approach position
Welding start point
Weaving start
Welding start
Welding condition change
Welding end point
Welding end
Weaving end
Retract position
Standby position
Check the operation.
• Test operations (See chapter 3.8 "Test Operations" at page 3-70.).
• Welding execution function during teach mode chapter 10.5.7
"Welding Execution Function During Teach Mode" at page 10-71
10.2.3
Playback
Fine-control the welding conditions.
• Changing welding conditions during playback chapter 10.13 "Changing Welding Conditions During Playback" at page 10-121
• Arc monitor function chapter 10.16 "Arc Monitor Function" at
page 10-131
10.2.4
Production (Automatic Operation)
Control the arc welding operation.
• Check for welding errors chapter 10.14 "Displaying Welding Alarm
History" at page 10-126
• Arc welding management and maintenance chapter 10.15 "Arc
Welding Management and Maintenance" at page 10-128
• Welding condition check chapter 10.16 "Arc Monitor Function" at
page 10-131
10-4
10
Arc Welding Application
10.3 Function Keys
DX100
10.3
Function Keys
Each function used for spot welding is allocated on the Numeric keys of
the programming pendant.
7SYNCHRO
8
SINGLE
4
5
1
WELD
COMPLETE
MANUAL
SPOT
REFP
TOUCH
MOTION
ARCOFF
2
TIMER
0
9
.
RELEASE
FEED
ARCON
SMOV
WELD
ON/OFF
PRESSURE
6
WELD
ALMRST
RETRACT
GUN
CLOSE
3
GAS
CUR/VCL
SPOT
-
FULL
OPEN
SHORT
OPEN
CUR/VCL
Registers a timer instruction “TIMER” in a job.
1
WELD
COMPLETE
TIMER
0
MANUAL
SPOT
REFP
Registers a reference point “REFP” in a job, or modifies
the registered reference point.
[REFP] + [FWD]
Moves the manipulator to the registered reference
point.
Registers a welding start instruction “ARCON”.
8
PRESSURE
ARCON
Registers a welding end instruction “ARCOFF”.
5
TOUCH
MOTION
ARCOFF
2
GUN
CLOSE
GAS
Use this key to control the gas flow.
Gas is fed only while [GAS] is pressed.
(Refer to chapter 10.3.3 "Gas Flow Control Function"
at page 10-10.)
10-5
DX100
10
Arc Welding Application
10.3 Function Keys
9
RELEASE
FEED
6
WELD
ALMRST
RETRACT
3
FULL
OPEN
CUR/VCL
-
SHORT
OPEN
Used for wire inching. Press [FEED] to feed the wire,
and press [RETRACT] to retract the wire.
While these keys are pressed, the wire feed motor
operates.
Three speed levels are available for wire feeding:
[FEED]: Slow
[FEED] + [FAST]: Medium
[FEED] + [HIGH SPEED]: Fast
Two speed levels are available for wire retraction:
[RETRACT]: Slow
[RETRACT] + [HIGH SPEED]: Fast
(Refer to chapter 10.3.2 "Wire Inching Function" at
page 10-10.)
Modifies the welding current/voltage while welding
during the play mode.
Press [3/CUR/VOL] to increase the current/voltage
value, and press [−/CUR/VOL] to decrease the current/
voltage value.
(Refer to chapter 10.13 "Changing Welding Conditions
During Playback" at page 10-121.)
CUR/VCL
4
SMOV
7SYNCHRO
SINGLE
When the security mode is the management mode,
press this key to light the LED and welding can be
performed during the test run.
Use this key for welding check during teaching.
* When [WELD ON/OFF] is pressed and the LED is lit,
a beep is sounded.
Changes the type of movement for the manipulator
when teaching a coordinated job.
Each time this key is pressed, the movement type
changes.
SYNCRO: The mark for “synchronized” appears in the
status display area. When the master side is
moved, the slave side will follow the
movement
of the master.
SINGLE: Only the selected group axis moves.
• Wire retraction, high-speed inching, or high-speed retraction cannot be performed depending on the Power Source.
SUPPLEMENT
• The function key is not available if the window (subject of
key operation) is active while arc start cond. or arc end
cond.window is displayed.
10-6
DX100
10
Arc Welding Application
10.3 Function Keys
10.3.1 Switching of the Function Key
Function keys can be switched between for spot welding (motor gun) use
and for arc welding use by following the procedures below:
10.3.1.1 Two-Robot System
1. Select a robot job for SPOT welding (motor gun).
(CONTROL GROUP: R1 + S1)
– Keys change for spot welding (motor gun) use automatically.
{ARC/SPOT} icon on the main menu changes to {SPOT}.
2. Select a robot job for ARC welding.
(CONTROL GROUP: R2)
– Keys change for arc welding use automatically.
{ARC/SPOT} icon on the main menu changes to {ARC}.
10-7
DX100
10.3.1.2
10
Arc Welding Application
10.3 Function Keys
Single-Robot System
Function keys can be switched between for spot welding (motor gun) use
and for arc welding use on APPLI SELECT window.
1. Select {ARC/SPOT} under main menu.
2. Select {APPLI SELECT}.
– APPLI SELECT window appears.
This window also appears by selecting [INTERLOCK]+[ROBOT].
3. Select {MOTOR GUN}.
– Move the cursor to {MOTOR GUN} and press [SELECT], then the
function keys become valid for SPOT welding (motor gun) use.
{ARC/SPOT} icon on the main menu changes to {SPOT}.
10-8
DX100
10
Arc Welding Application
10.3 Function Keys
4. Select {ARC WELD}.
Move the cursor to {ARC WELD} and press [SELECT], then the
function keys become valid for ARC welding use.
{ARC/SPOT} icon on the main menu changes to {ARC}.
10-9
DX100
10.3.2
10
Arc Welding Application
10.3 Function Keys
Wire Inching Function
Wire Inching
6
WELD
ALMRST
RETRACT
The term wire inching refers to gradually feeding or
retracting the welding wire through the torch. [FEED]
and [RETRACT] are used to perform wire inching. The
wire inching simply feeds or retracts the wire, it has
nothing to do with the job procedure being taught. The
wire inching is performed only in the teach mode when
the arc does not occur.
Wire Feeding
The wire is fed only while [FEED] is pressed.
Three speed levels are available for wire feeding:
[FEED]: Slow
[FEED] + [FAST]: Medium
[FEED] + [HIGH SPEED]: Fast
Wire Retraction
The wire is retracted only while [RETRACT] is pressed.
Two speed levels are available for wire retraction:
[RETRACT]: Slow
[RETRACT] + [HIGH SPEED]: Fast
SUPPLEMENT
10.3.3
Wire retraction, high-speed inching, or high-speed retraction
cannot be performed depending on the Power Source.
Gas Flow Control Function
Gas Flow Control
The Gas Flow Control function is used to adjust the flow amount of
shielding gas by opening or closing the solenoid valve.
The solenoid valve can be opened or closed by pressing [GAS].
This function simply opens or closes the solenoid valve for shielding gas.
Therefore, the operation does not cause any changes in the job contents.
The Gas Flow Control function is enabled in the teach mode only.
10-10
10
Arc Welding Application
10.4 Power Source Condition File
DX100
10.4
Power Source Condition File
10.4.1 About Power Source Condition File
This is the file where the Power Source characteristics: voltage
characteristic, etc., is registered. This file contains the information for
Power Source control.
For precise control of the welding current and voltage, the control signals
sent from the controller to the Power Source must be properly adjusted.
The voltage of the current control signal is called the welding current
reference value; the voltage of the voltage control signal is called the
welding voltage reference value. A reference value is in the range
between 0 and 14V (or between 0 and -14 depending on Power Sources).
How the output of the welding current or voltage changes with the
reference value depends on the Power Source model, and this
relationship between the reference value and output value is called an
output characteristics. Each Power Source condition data file contains the
output values (measured values) associated with several reference
values. The figure below is an example of the welding current output
characteristic curve.
Fig. 10-2: Welding Current Output Characteristics (Example)
Welding current
output value
The inclination between the last
two points is extended beyond
( A)
the last point
Correction value = 1.2
Welding current output characteristics
230
Correction value = 0.8
200
170
140
100
: Data point
0
1
2.2
3
4
5
(V)
Welding current reference value
Note that the data points (points of measurement) are automatically
connected by straight lines, which define the output values of any points
off these data points.
The inclination between the last two data points is extended as a straight
line beyond the last point until it reaches the end of the measuring range.
If the intended welding current or voltage is not output due to a fluctuation
in the Power Source’s power supply voltage, adjust the output by
specifying a correction value. The figure (fig. 10-2 "Welding Current
Output Characteristics (Example)") shows how a correction value works.
10-11
DX100
10
Arc Welding Application
10.4 Power Source Condition File
The following are the three types of the Power Source condition files.
Each file consists of two windows.
Fig. 10-3: Power Source Condition Files
Execution File
(4 files: for Connectable Power Source)
User Registered File (64 files)
Power Source Characteristics
Power Source Characteristics
Power Source Characteristics
Power Source Characteristics
<Current> <Voltage>
<Current> <Voltage>
Initial Value File (24 files: Maker Offer)
Power Source Characteristics
Power Source Characteristics
<Current> <Voltage>
• The execution file is used to set the condition file of the Power
Source being used.
• The user registered file is used by the user to save the Power Source
condition files, and the data for 64 models can be registered.
• Yaskawa also offers initial value files which contain common Power
Source characteristics. Data for 24 models have already been registered.
A Power Source condition file can be set only by reading from either the
user registered file or initial value file to the execution file.
When it is necessary to make adjustments to the data, refer to
chapter 10.4.4 "Editing the Power Source Condition Files" at page 1016.
10.4.2
Specifying Welding Voltage when Synergic Power Supply is Used
When a synergic power supply is used, the DX100 requests the user to
specify the welding voltage by a ratio against the proper output value (not
by the output value as conventionally done).
For that, the voltage characteristics associated with a certain welding
current output value must be determined by measurement, and the results
should be stored in the Power Source condition data file as representative
values.
The welding current output value for the measurement should be a value
that is assumed relatively often in actual situations.
Each of the provided Power Source condition data files already contains
the representative values for the associated Power Source model.
<Example>
An example is shown with the ARCON instruction.
If the welding current output is 250A, the welding voltage can be specified
as follows:
ARCON
AC=250
AVP=100
Welding
current
250A
100% of proper output,
assuming the use of synergic
power supply.
10-12
10
Arc Welding Application
10.4 Power Source Condition File
DX100
With the voltage characteristics with the following Figure A, the above
instruction causes the output of 7.5V control signal to the Power Source
If the welding current output value is changed to 220A, a minor correction
to the ARCON instruction causes the output of the control signal
associated with 100% of the proper output value at 220A. (Fig.B)
ARCON
AC=220
AVP=100
······100% output
Also note that a minor adjustment of the welding voltage can be instructed
easily. (Fig.C)
e.g. The control signal is output 110% of the proper output value at 220A.
ARCON
AC=220
AVP=110
······110% output
or
e.g. The control signal is output 94% of the proper output value at 220A.
ARCON
AC=220
AVP=94
Welding voltage
output value
Welding voltage
output value
(%)
······94% output
Welding voltage
output value
(%)
(%)
100
110
100
94
100
Voltage characteristics
at 250A
0
7.5
(V)
Voltage characteristics
at 220A
0
Welding voltage reference value
Figure A
7.5
(V)
Welding voltage reference value
Figure B
0
7.5
(V)
Welding voltage reference value
Figure C
This setting method enables easy adjustment without calculating the
voltage output.
This method can be also applied to condition data files and instructions
other than ARCON.
Another advantage is that a single welding job can be used with more than
one Power Source with a synergic power supply by changing the welder
condition data file.
NOTE
If welding current output is significantly different from the
voltage characteristics measurement used, voltage output
may vary. Write the welding current value used for the voltage characteristics measurement as a comment for reference.
10-13
DX100
10.4.3
10
Arc Welding Application
10.4 Power Source Condition File
POWER SOURCE CONDITION File
A Power Source condition data file has the following two windows:
• POWER SOURCE CONDITION Window
• POWER SOURCE CONDITION Window (for current/voltage output)
10.4.3.1
POWER SOURCE CONDITION Window
DATA
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
POWER SOURCE CONDITION
POWER SOURCE NO.: 1/1
SETTING
POWER SOURCE NAME
COMM.
POWER SUPPLY
SHIELDING GAS
WIRE DIA.
WIRE STICKOUT
WIRE ANTI-STICKING
ARC FAILURE STOP
Main Menu
Simple Menu
: DONE
: MOTOWELD-E350
: STC CONTROL NONE
: A/%
: CO2
: 0.1 mm
: 15 mm
: 0.1 sec
: 1.50 sec
!Turn on servo power
A. POWER SOURCE NO. (1 to 8)
Displays a Power Source number between 1 and 8 (for each welder).
B. SETTING
If this file is modified, the status automatically changes to “NONE,” indicating that the modification is not saved yet. To save the modification to
the file, move the cursor to “SETTING” and press [SELECT]. Then the
status changes to “DONE”.
C. POWER SOURCE NAME
Displays a Power Source name of 16 characters or less.
D. COMM. (COMMENT)
Displays a comment of 32 characters or less.
E. POWER SUPPLY (A/V, A/%)
• When “A/%” is displayed: Measured values of voltage can be input
by the unit of “%” for “D. MEASURE” in
the POWER SOURCE CONDITION window for current/voltage output shown in
the next page.
• When “A/V” is displayed: Measured values of voltage can be input by
the unit of “V” for “D. MEASURE” in the
POWER SOURCE CONDITION window for
current/voltage output shown in the next
page.
*To switch between “A/%” and “A/V” in the POWER SOURCE CONDITION window, select [DATA] -> [READING] to read the initial value file (maker offer) or
user registered file once again.
*This function is available for the standard software version NS4.00.00A ()-00
or later.
F. SHIELDING GAS (CO2,MAG)
Specifies the shielding gas type.
G. WIRE DIA. (0 to 9.9mmΦ)
Specifies the wire diameter.
10-14
DX100
10
Arc Welding Application
10.4 Power Source Condition File
H. WIRE STICKOUT (0 to 99mm)
Specifies the length of the welding wire protruding from the torch tip.
I. WIRE ANTI-STICKING (0 to 9.9 seconds)
Specifies the duration of the wire anti-stick process at the end of welding.
J. ARC FAILURE STOP (0 to 2.55 seconds)
Specifies the time between the detection of arc failure and the stopping
of the manipulator movement.
10.4.3.2 POWER SOURCE CONDITION Window for Current/Voltage Output
DATA
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
POWER SOURCE CONDITION
POWER SOURCE NO.: 1/1
A
B
C
<CURRENT OUTPUT CHAR.> <WELDING VOLTAGE OUTPUT CHAR.>
RANGE: +
+
ADJUST: 1.00
1.00
NO.
REF.(V) MEASURE (A) REF.(V) MEASURE (%)
01
0.00
30
0.00
50
02
1.35
62
7.20
99
03
2.70
94
7.50
100
04
10.80
286
7.80
101
05
12.15
318
14.00
150
06
13.50
350
0.00
0
07
0.00
0
0.00
0
08
0.00
0
0.00
0
Main Menu
Simple Menu
D
!Turn on servo power
A. RANGE
Indicates the polarity of the reference value for the welding current and
voltage. If the range is positive(+), the reference value is in the range
between 0 and 14.00V. If the range is negative(-), the reference value is
in the range between 0 and -14.00V.
B. ADJUST (0.80 to 1.20)
A correction value to adjust the welding current/voltage output.
C. REF. (V) (0 to 14.00V)
Welding current/voltage reference values.
D. MEASURE (0 to 999A, 0 to 50.0V, or 50 to 150%)
The welding current/voltage output values measured at the reference
values as given under C.
10-15
DX100
10.4.4
10
Arc Welding Application
10.4 Power Source Condition File
Editing the Power Source Condition Files
NOTE
10.4.4.1
When the Power Source condition file is modified or the file
is read in, the SETTING status in the POWER SOURCE
CONDITION window changes from “DONE” to “NONE”.
After editing, move the cursor to SETTING then press
[SELECT] to save the modification. Then the SETTING status changes from “NONE” to “DONE”.
Displaying a Power Source Condition File
1. Select {ARC WELDING} under the main menu.
2. Select {POWER SOURCE CONDITION}.
– The POWER SOURCE CONDITION window appears.
DATA
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
POWER SOURCE CONDITION
POWER SOURCE NO.: 1/1
: DONE
: MOTOWELD-E350
: STC CONTROL NONE
: A/%
: CO2
: 0.1 mm
: 15 mm
: 0.1 sec
: 1.50 sec
SETTING
POWER SOURCE NAME
COMM.
POWER SUPPLY
SHIELDING GAS
WIRE DIA.
WIRE STICKOUT
WIRE ANTI-STICKING
ARC FAILURE STOP
<CURRENT OUTPUT CHAR.> <WELDING VOLTAGE OUTPUT CHAR.>
RANGE: +
+
ADJUST: 1.00
1.00
NO.
REF.(V) MEASURE (A) REF.(V) MEASURE (%)
01
0.00
30
0.00
50
Main Menu
10.4.4.2
Simple Menu
!Turn on servo power
Reading a Power Source Condition File
1. Select {DATA} from the menu.
2. Select {READING}.
DATA
READING
WRITING
10-16
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
DX100
10
Arc Welding Application
10.4 Power Source Condition File
3. Select the Power Source condition file number of the data to be read.
GO BACK
– Each time the page key
PAGE
is pressed, the window alternates
between MAKER INITIAL VALUE window and USER INITIAL
VALUE window.
– On the MAKER INITIAL VALUE window, the registered initial value
file list (1 to 24) appears.
DATA
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
MAKER INITIAL VALUE
NO.
NAME
POWER DIA. GAS
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
MOTOWELD-E350
MOTOWELD-E350
MOTOWELD-S350
MOTOWELD-S350
MOTOWELD-S350
MOTOWELD-S350
MOTOWELD-S350
MOTOWELD-S350
MOTOWELD-S350
MOTOWELD-S350
MOTOWELD-S350
MOTOWELD-S350
MOTOWELD-S350
MOTOWELD-S350
2 A/%
2 A/V
A/%
A/%
A/V
A/V
A/%
A/%
A/V
A/V
A/%
A/V
A/%
A/V
1.2
1.2
1.2
1.2
1.2
1.2
0.9
0.9
0.9
0.9
1.2
1.2
0.9
0.9
MAG
MAG
CO2
MAG
CO2
MAG
CO2
MAG
CO2
MAG
CO2
CO2
CO2
CO2
DIRECT PAGE
Main Menu
Simple Menu
!Tun on servo power
– On the USER INITIAL VALUE window, the registered user
registration file list (1 to 4) appears.
DATA
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
USER INITIAL VALUE
NO.
NAME
POWER DIA. GAS
01
02
03
04
1.2
1.2
1.2
1.2
USER-1
USER-2
USER-3
USER-4
Main Menu
Simple Menu
CO2
MAG
CO2
MAG
!Turn on servo power
4. Select “YES”.
– The confirmation dialog box appears. Select “NO” to return to the
POWER SOURCE CONDITION window without the read-in.
DATA
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
MAKER INITIAL VALUE
NO.
NAME
POWER DIA. GAS
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
A/% 1.2 CO2
MOTOWELD-E350
A/V
1.2 CO2
MOTOWELD-E350
MOTOWELD-S350AJ2 A/% 1.2 CO2
MOTOWELD-S350AJ2 A/% 1.2 MAG
1.2 CO2
MOTOWELD-S350AJ2
Read1.2
data?
MAG
MOTOWELD-S350AJ2
0.9 CO2
MOTOWELD-S350AJ2
01 MOTOWELD-E350
0.9 MAG
MOTOWELD-S350AJ2
0.9 CO2
MOTOWELD-S350AJ2
YES
NO
0.9 MAG
MOTOWELD-S350AJ2
1.2 CO2
MOTOWELD-S350AJ2
1.2 CO2
MOTOWELD-S350AJ2 A/V
MOTOWELD-S350AJ2 A/% 0.9 CO2
A/V
0.9 CO2
MOTOWELD-S350AJ2
DIRECT PAGE
Main Menu
Simple Menu
10-17
!Turn on servo power
10
Arc Welding Application
10.4 Power Source Condition File
DX100
10.4.4.3
Editing a Power Source Condition File

Editing the “WELDER NAME” or “COMMENT”
1. Select “POWER SOURCE NAME” or “COMMENT”.
2. Input characters.

SETTING
POWER SOURCE NAME
COMM.
POWER SUPPLY
: DONE
: MOTOWELD-E350
: STC CONTROL NONE
: A/%
SETTING
POWER SOURCE NAME
COMM.
POWER SUPPLY
: DONE
: MOTOWELD-E350
: STC CONTROL NONE
: A/%
Editing Other Items
1. Select the item to be edited.
2. Input the number using the Numeric keys.
SETTING
POWER SOURCE NAME
COMM.
POWER SUPPLY
SHIELDING GAS
WIRE DIA.
WIRE STICKOUT
ANTI-STICKING
ARC FAILURE STOP
10-18
: DONE
: MOTOWELD-E350
: STC CONTROL NONE
: A/%
: CO2
: 0.1 mm
: 15 mm
: 0.1 sec
: 1.50 sec
10
Arc Welding Application
10.4 Power Source Condition File
DX100
10.4.4.4 Editing a Power Source Condition File for Current/Voltage Output

Editing the “RANGE”
1. Select “RANGE”.
– Each time [SELECT] is pressed, the indication alternates between
“+” (positive) and “−” (negative).
<CURRENT OUTPUT CHAR.> <WELDING VOLTAGE OUTPUT CHAR.>
RANGE: +
+
ADJUST: 1.00
1.00
SELECT
<CURRENT OUTPUT CHAR.> <WELDING VOLTAGE OUTPUT CHAR.>
RANGE: −
+
ADJUST: 1.00
1.00

Editing “ADJ”, “REF”, or “MEASURE”
1. Select {ADJ}, {REF}, or {MEASURE}.
2. Input the number using the Numeric keys.
– When some data is modified, the SETTING status is changed to
“NONE”.
NO.
01
02
03
04
REF.(V) MEASURE (A) REF.(V) MEASURE (%)
30
0.00
0.00
50
62
7.20
1.35
99
94
7.50
2.70
100
286
7.80
10.80
101
3. After the modification, move the cursor to “SETTING” and press
[SELECT].
– The setting is completed.
SETTING
POWER SOURCE NAME
COMM.
: DONE
: MOTOWELD-E350
: STC CONTROL NONE
Notes on Power Source Data Condition File Modification:
NOTE
When changing “POWER SUPPLY” in Power Source condition file, the welding condition files (Arc Welding Start Condition File, Arc Welding End Condition File, and Arc
Auxiliary Condition File) are formatted.
10-19
DX100
10.4.4.5
10
Arc Welding Application
10.4 Power Source Condition File
Registering the Power Source Condition File Data
Other than the 24 types of initial value data that Yaskawa has provided, 4
types of Power Source condition files can be registered. The data partially
modified using the initial value file can also be registered.
1. Select {ARC WELDING} under the main menu.
JOB
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
PARAMETER
JOB
DOUT
MOVE
END
ARC START COND.
ARC WELDING
ARC END COND.
VARIABLE
B001
ARC AUX COND.
IN/OUT
In
Out
POWER SOURCE
COND.
ROBOT
ARC WELD DIAG.
SYSTEM INFO
WEAVING
Simple Menu
Main Menu
Set tool mass data
2. Select {POWER SOURCE COND.}.
DATA
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
READING
1/1
WRITING
: DONE
: MOTOWELD-E350
: STC CONTROL NONE
: A/%
: CO2
: 0.1 mm
: 15 mm
: 0.1 sec
: 1.50 sec
SETTING
POWER SOURCE NAME
COMM.
POWER SUPPLY
SHIELDING GAS
WIRE DIA.
WIRE STICKOUT
ANTI-STICKING
ARC FAILURE STOP
<CURRENT OUTPUT CHAR.> <WELDING VOLTAGE OUTPUT CHAR.>
RANGE: +
+
ADJUST: 1.00
1.00
NO.
REF.(V) MEASURE (A) REF.(V) MEASURE (%)
01
0.00
30
0.00
50
Main Menu
Simple Menu
!Turn on servo power
3. Select {WRITING} from {DATA} in the menu.
– The user registered file list appears.
DATA
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
USER INITIAL VALUE
NO.
NAME
POWER DIA. GAS
01
02
03
04
USER-1
USER-2
USER-3
USER-4
Main Menu
Simple Menu
10-20
A/%
A/%
A/V
A/V
1.2
1.2
1.2
1.2
CO2
MAG
CO2
MAG
!Turn on servo power
DX100
10
Arc Welding Application
10.4 Power Source Condition File
4. Select the Power Source condition file number of the data to be
written.
– The confirmation dialog box appears.
DATA
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
USER INITIAL VALUE
NO.
NAME
POWER DIA. GAS
01
02
03
04
A/%
A/%
A/V
A/V
USER-1
USER-2
USER-3
USER-4
1.2
1.2
1.2
1.2
CO2
MAG
CO2
MAG
Write data?
01 USER-1
YES
Main Menu
Simple Menu
NO
!Turn on servo power
5. Select “YES”.
– Select “YES” to register the Power Source condition file data. Select
“NO” to return to the POWER SOURCE CONDITION window.
10-21
10
Arc Welding Application
10.5 Basic Functions
DX100
10.5
10.5.1
10.5.1.1
Basic Functions
ARCON
Function
This instruction outputs an arc start command.
The arc start signal to the Power Source is turned ON to start welding by
this instruction.
The function key [ARCON] can be used for registration.
8
PRESSURE
Function key to register the welding start instruction (ARCON)
ARCON
SUPPLEMENT
10.5.1.2
To register the ARCON instruction using [INFORM LIST],
select “DEVICE” from the instruction group list.
Syntax
ARCON
END
1
A
WELDn
Arc welding start
condition file
number
2
ASF#
(
3
AC=
Current output
value (A)
4
AV=
Voltage output
value (V)
5
AVP=
Percentage
against the proper
voltage output
value (%)
)
A
B
C
B
6
T=
Time (seconds)
B
C
7
V=
10-22
Welding speed
8
RETRY
9
REPLAY
10
Arc Welding Application
10.5 Basic Functions
DX100
10.5.1.3 Explanation

WELDn [1]
Choose one of the following tags.
These tags are enabled only when multiple applications are in use and
two or more applications are set as arc welding application.
When there is only one application, these tags are not displayed.

Tag
Explanation
WELDn
Selects the Power Source
1 to 8.
ASF# (Arc welding start condition file number) [2] /AC = Current
output value [3]
Be sure to choose either of the following.
Tag
Explanation
Note
ASF#
(Arc welding
start
condition
file number)
Specifies the arc welding start
condition file number.
Conditions to start welding are
registered in the arc welding
start condition file.
No. 1 to 1000
The number can be
specified by B/I/D/LB/LI/
LD variable.
AC =
Specifies the output value of
Current
welding current.
output value

Note
Current value: 1 to 999 A
The current output value
can be specified by B/I/D/
B[ ]/I[ ]/D[ ]/LB/LI/LD/LB[ ]/
LI[ ]/LD[ ] variable.
AV = Voltage output value /AVP [4] = Percentage against the proper
voltage output value [5]
Only when “AC = Current output value” is selected in the above "ASF#
(Arc welding start condition file number) [2] /AC = Current output value
[3]", be sure to choose either of the following.
Tag
Explanation
Note
AV =
Specifies the output value of
Voltage
welding voltage.
output value The output value of welding
voltage is specified when the
power supply is independent.
Voltage value: 0.1 to 50.0 V
The voltage output value
can be specified by B/I/D/
B[ ]/I[ ]/D[ ]/LB/LI/LD/LB[ ]/
LI[ ]/LD[ ] variable.
(Unit: 0.1 V)
AVP =
Percentage
against the
proper
voltage
output value
Percentage: 50 to 150%
The voltage output value
can be specified by B/I/D/
B[ ]/I[ ]/D[ ]/LB/LI/LD/LB[ ]/
LI[ ]/LD[ ] variable.
Specifies the percentage
against the proper output
value of welding voltage.
The percentage against the
proper voltage output value is
specified when the power
supply is synergic.
10-23
10
Arc Welding Application
10.5 Basic Functions
DX100




T = Time [6]
This tag is added or omitted only when “AC = Current output value” is
selected in the above "ASF# (Arc welding start condition file number) [2] /
AC = Current output value [3]".
Tag
Explanation
Note
T =Time
Specifies the timer value at
the start of welding.
Unit: seconds
The time can be specified
by I/LI/I[ ]/LI[ ] variable.
(Unit: 0.01 sec.)
V = Welding speed [7]
This tag is added or omitted only when “AC = Current output value” is
selected in the aforementioned "ASF# (Arc welding start condition file
number) [2] /AC = Current output value [3]".
Tag
Explanation
Note
V = Welding
speed
Specifies the welding speed.
Speed: 0.1 to
1500.0 mm/sec.
The unit displayed can be
changed by the setting of
the parameter (S2C101).
The speed can be specified
by B/B[ ]/LB/LB[ ]/I/I[ ]/LI/LI[
]/D/D[ ]/LD/LD[ ] variable.
(Unit: 0.1 mm/sec.)
RETRY [8]
This tag is added or omitted only when “AC = Current output value” is
selected in the aforementioned "ASF# (Arc welding start condition file
number) [2] /AC = Current output value [3]".
Tag
Explanation
Note
RETRY
Specifies the retry function.
The retry function works to
prevent the interruption of
operation when an arc start
failure occurs.
Refer to chapter 10.6 "Arc
Retry Function" at page 1073.
REPLAY [9]
Only when RETRY is added in the above "RETRY [8]", be sure to add this
tag.
Tag
Explanation
Note
REPLAY
Specifies the replay mode.
The replay mode is one of the
modes to repeat the ARCON
process when the retry
function is enabled.
Refer to chapter 10.6 "Arc
Retry Function" at page 1073.
10-24
10
Arc Welding Application
10.5 Basic Functions
DX100
10.5.1.4 Registering the ARCON Instruction
1. Press [ARCON].
2. Press [ENTER].
ARCON instruction cannot be modified after it is registered
to the job.
SUPPLEMENT
(Refer to chapter 3.6.4
"Modifying Instructions" at page 3-55.)
If the ARCON instruction needs to be modified, delete it and
then, add the necessary instruction.
10.5.1.5 Setting Welding Start Conditions
The ARCON instruction can be registered in any of the following three
ways:
• With additional items to specify conditions
ARCON AC=200 AVP=100 T=0.50 V=60 RETRY
• With an arc welding start condition file
ARCON ASF# (1)
In this case, the welding condition is set using the arc welding start
condition file. (Refer to chapter 10.5.4 "Arc Start Condition File" at
page 10-56.)
• Without additional items
ARCON
In this case, the welding condition must be set using the welding
condition set instruction (ARCSET) before the ARCON instruction is
executed. (Refer tochapter 10.5.3 "ARCSET" at page 10-47.)

With Additional Items to Specify Conditions
1. Select the ARCON instruction in the instruction area.
– The ARCON instruction appears in the input buffer line.
EDIT
JOB
DISPLAY
UTILITY
JOB CONTENT
JOB NAME: WORK A
CONTROL GROUP: R1
0000
0001
0002
0003
STEP NO: 0003
TOOL: 00
NOP
MOVJ VJ=80.00
MOVL V=800
END
ARCON
Main Menu
Simple Menu
! Turn on servo power
2. Press [SELECT].
– The DETAIL EDIT window appears.
10-25
DX100
10
Arc Welding Application
10.5 Basic Functions
3. Select “UNUSED”.
EDIT
DATA
DISPLAY
UTILITY
DETAIL EDIT
ARCON
SET METHOD
: UNUSED
ARCON
Main Menu
Simple Menu
! Turn on servo power
4. Press [SELECT] and select “AC=” from the selection dialog.
EDIT
DATA
DISPLAY
UTILITY
DETAIL EDIT
ARCON
SET METHOD
: ASF#()
AC=
UNUSED
ARCON
Main Menu
Simple Menu
! Turn on servo power
– If the arc welding start condition file has already been set in the
ARCON instruction additional items, the DETAIL EDIT window
appears.
EDIT
DATA
DISPLAY
UTILITY
DETAIL EDIT
ARCON
SET METHOD
: ASF#()
1
ARCON
Main Menu
Simple Menu
10-26
! Turn on servo power
DX100
10
Arc Welding Application
10.5 Basic Functions
5. Place the cursor on “ASF#( )” and press [SELECT], then select “AC=”
from the selection dialog.
EDIT
DATA
DISPLAY
UTILITY
DETAIL EDIT
ARCON
SET METHOD
: ASF#()
AC=
UNUSED
ARCON
Main Menu
Simple Menu
! Turn on servo power
6. Input the welding condition.
– Set each welding condition.
EDIT
DATA
UTILITY
DISPLAY
DETAIL EDIT
ARCON
: AC= 180
: AVP= 100
: T= 0.30
: V= 80
: RETRY
: REPLAY
WELDING CURR
WELDING VOLT
TIMER
SPEED
RETRY
MODE
ARCON AC=180 AVP=100 V=80 RETRY REPLAY
Main Menu
Simple Menu
EDIT
JOB
! Turn on servo power
DISPLAY
UTILITY
DETAIL EDIT
ARCON
WELDING CURR
WELDING VOLT
TIMER
SPEED
RETRY
REPLAY
: AC= 200
: AVP= 100
: T= 0.30
: V= 80
: RETRY
: REPLAY
: FLY:T= 0.23
: SCR:L= 3.1
ARCON AC=180 AVP=100 V=80 RETRY REPLAY FLY:T=0.23 SCR:L=3.1
Main Menu
Simple Menu
! Turn on servo power
7. Press [ENTER].
– The set contents are displayed in the input buffer line.
ARCON AC=200 AVP=100 V=80 RETRY REPLAY
8. Press [ENTER].
10-27
DX100
10
Arc Welding Application
10.5 Basic Functions
– The set contents are registered in the job.
EDIT
JOB
DISPLAY
UTILITY
JOB CONTENT
JOB NAME: WORK A
STEP NO: 0003
CONTROL GROUP: R1
TOOL: 00
0000
NOP
0001
MOVJ VJ=80.00
0002
MOVL V=800
ARCON AC=200 AVP=100 V=80 RETRY REPLAY
0003
0004
MOVL V=50
0005
MOVL V=50
0006
MOVL V=50
0007
ARCOF
0008
MOVL V=800
0009
MOVJ VJ=80.00
0010
END
ARCON AC=200 AVP=100 V=80 RETRY REPLAY
Main Menu
Simple Menu
! Turn on servo power
– Press [CANCEL] to return to the JOB CONTENT window if the set
contents are not to be registered.
EDIT
JOB
DISPLAY
JOB CONTENT
JOB NAME: WORK A
CONTROL GROUP: R1
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
0008
0009
0010
UTILITY
STEP NO: 0003
TOOL: 00
NOP
MOVJ VJ=80.00
MOVL V=800
ARCON
MOVL V=50
MOVL V=50
MOVL V=50
ARCOF
MOVL V=800
MOVJ VJ=80.00
END
ARCON
Main Menu
Simple Menu
10-28
! Turn on servo power
10
Arc Welding Application
10.5 Basic Functions
DX100

With an Arc Welding Start Condition File
1. Select the ARCON instruction in the instruction area.
– The ARCON instruction appears in the input buffer line.
EDIT
JOB
DISPLAY
UTILITY
JOB CONTENT
JOB NAME: WORK A
CONTROL GROUP: R1
0000
0001
0002
0003
STEP NO: 0003
TOOL: 00
NOP
MOVJ VJ=80.00
MOVL V=800
END
ARCON
Main Menu
Simple Menu
! Turn on servo power
2. Press [SELECT].
– The DETAIL EDIT window appears.
3. Place the cursor on “UNUSED”.
EDIT
DATA
DISPLAY
UTILITY
DETAIL EDIT
ARCON
SET METHOD
: UNUSED
ARCON
Main Menu
Simple Menu
! Turn on servo power
4. Press [SELECT] and select “ASF#( )” from the selection dialog.
EDIT
DATA
DISPLAY
UTILITY
DETAIL EDIT
ARCON
SET METHOD
: ASF#()
AC=
UNUSED
ARCON
Main Menu
Simple Menu
10-29
! Turn on servo power
DX100
10
Arc Welding Application
10.5 Basic Functions
– If the welding conditions have already been set in the ARCON
instruction additional items, the DETAIL EDIT window appears.
EDIT
DATA
DISPLAY
UTILITY
DETAIL EDIT
ARCON
: AC= 180
: AVP= 100
: T= 0.30
: V= 80
: RETRY
: REPLAY
WELDING CURR
WELDING VOLT
TIMER
SPEED
RETRY
MODE
ARCON AC=180 AVP=100 V=80 RETRY REPLAY
Main Menu
Simple Menu
! Turn on servo power
5. Place the cursor on “AC=” and press [SELECT], then select “ASF#( )”
from the selection dialog.
EDIT
DATA
DISPLAY
UTILITY
DETAIL EDIT
ARCON
: AC=
180
ASF#()
: AVP=
AC= 100
: T=
0.30
UNUSED
: V= 80
: RETRY
: REPLAY
: FLY:T= 0.23
: SCR:L= 3.1
WELDING CURR
WELDING VOLT
TIMER
SPEED
RETRY
REPLAY
ARCON AC=180 AVP=100 V=80 RETRY REPLAY FLY:T=0.23 SCR:L=3.1
Main Menu
Simple Menu
! Turn on servo power
6. Set the file number.
– Specify the file number (1 to 64).
(1) Move the cursor to the file number and press [SELECT].
EDIT
DATA
DISPLAY
UTILITY
DETAIL EDIT
ARCON
SET METHOD
: ASF#()
1
ARCON
Main Menu
Simple Menu
10-30
! Turn on servo power
DX100
10
Arc Welding Application
10.5 Basic Functions
(2) Type the file number using the numeric keys and press [ENTER].
EDIT
DATA
DISPLAY
UTILITY
DETAIL EDIT
ARCON
SET METHOD
: ASF#() 10
ARCON
Main Menu
Simple Menu
! Turn on servo power
7. Press [ENTER].
– The set contents are displayed in the input buffer line.
ARCON ASF# (10)
8. Press [ENTER].
– The set contents are registered in the job.
EDIT
JOB
DISPLAY
UTILITY
JOB CONTENT
JOB NAME: WORK A
CONTROL GROUP: R1
0000
NOP
0001
MOVJ VJ=80.00
0002
MOVL V=800
0003
ARCON ASF# (10)
0004
MOVL V=50
0005
MOVL V=50
0006
MOVL V=50
0007
ARCOF
0008
MOVL V=800
0009
MOVJ VJ=80.00
0010
END
STEP NO: 0003
TOOL: 00
ARCON ASF# (10)
Main Menu
Simple Menu
! Turn on servo power
– Press [CANCEL] to return to the JOB CONTENT window if the set
contents are not to be registered.
EDIT
JOB
DISPLAY
JOB CONTENT
JOB NAME: WORK A
CONTROL GROUP: R1
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
0008
0009
0010
UTILITY
STEP NO: 0003
TOOL: 00
NOP
MOVJ VJ=80.00
MOVL V=800
ARCON
MOVL V=50
MOVL V=50
MOVL V=50
ARCOF
MOVL V=800
MOVJ VJ=80.00
END
ARCON
Main Menu
Simple Menu
10-31
! Turn on servo power
10
Arc Welding Application
10.5 Basic Functions
DX100

Without Additional Items
NOTE
When an additional item is not provided for the ARCON
instruction, set the welding conditions in advance with the
welding condition setting instruction (ARCSET) before executing the ARCON instruction. (Refer to chapter 10.5.3
"ARCSET" at page 10-47.)
1. Select the ARCON instruction in the instruction area.
– The ARCON instruction appears in the input buffer line.
EDIT
JOB
DISPLAY
UTILITY
JOB CONTENT
JOB NAME: WORK A
STEP NO: 0003
CONTROL GROUP: R1
TOOL: 00
0000
NOP
0001
MOVJ VJ=80.00
0002
MOVL V=800
ARCON ASF#(10) T=0.30 RETRY REPLAY
0003
0004
MOVL V=50
0005
MOVL V=50
0006
MOVL V=50
0007
ARCOF
0008
MOVL V=800
0009
MOVJ VJ=80.00
0010
END
ARCON ASF#(10) T=0.30 RETRY REPLAY
Main Menu
Simple Menu
! Turn on servo power
2. Press [SELECT].
– The DETAIL EDIT window appears.
3. Place the cursor on “ASF#( )” or “AC=”.
EDIT
DATA
DISPLAY
UTILITY
DETAIL EDIT
ARCON
SET METHOD
: ASF#()
1
ARCON
Main Menu
Simple Menu
10-32
! Turn on servo power
DX100
10
Arc Welding Application
10.5 Basic Functions
EDIT
DATA
DISPLAY
UTILITY
DETAIL EDIT
ARCON
: AC= 180
: AVP= 100
: T= 0.30
: V= 80
: RETRY
: REPLAY
: FLY:T= 0.23
: SCR:L= 3.1
WELDING CURR
WELDING VOLT
TIMER
SPEED
RETRY
REPLAY
ARCON AC=180 AVP=100 V=80 RETRY REPLAY FLY:T=0.23 SCR:L=3.1
Main Menu
Simple Menu
! Turn on servo power
4. Press [SELECT] and select “UNUSED” from the selection dialog.
ASF#()
AC=
UNUSED
5. Press [ENTER].
– The set contents are displayed in the input buffer line.
ARCON
6. Press [ENTER].
– The set contents are registered in the job.
EDIT
JOB
DISPLAY
JOB CONTENT
JOB NAME: WORK A
CONTROL GROUP: R1
0000
NOP
0001
MOVJ VJ=80.00
0002
MOVL V=800
0003
ARCON
0004
MOVL V=50
0005
MOVL V=50
0006
MOVL V=50
0007
ARCOF
0008
MOVL V=800
0009
MOVJ VJ=80.00
0010
END
UTILITY
STEP NO: 0003
TOOL: 00
ARCON
Main Menu
Simple Menu
! Turn on servo power
– Press [CANCEL] to return to the JOB CONTENT window if the set
contents are not to be registered.
10-33
10
Arc Welding Application
10.5 Basic Functions
DX100
10.5.2
10.5.2.1
ARCOF
Function
This instruction outputs an arc end command.
The arc start signal to the Power Source is turned OFF to end welding by
this instruction.
The function key [ARCOF] can be used for registration.
5
TOUCH
MOTION
Function key to register the welding end instruction (ARCOF)
ARCOFF
To register the ARCOF instruction using [INFORM LIST],
select “DEVICE” from the instruction group list.
SUPPLEMENT
10.5.2.2
Syntax
ARCOF
END
1
A
WELDn
2
AEF#
3
AC=
4
AV=
Voltage output
value (V)
5
AVP=
Percentage against
the proper voltage
output value (%)
(
Arc welding end
condition file number
Current output
value (A)
)
A
B
B
6
10-34
T=
Time (seconds)
7
ANTSTK
10
Arc Welding Application
10.5 Basic Functions
DX100
10.5.2.3 Explanation

WELDn [1]
Choose one of the following tags.
These tags are enabled only when multiple applications are in use and
two or more applications are set as arc welding application.
When there is only one application, these tags are not displayed.


Tag
Explanation
WELDn
Selects the Power Source
1 to 8.
Note
AEF# (Arc welding end condition file number) [2] /AC = Current
output value [3]
Be sure to choose either of the following.
Tag
Explanation
Note
AEF#
(Arc welding
end
condition
file number)
Specifies the arc welding end
condition file number.
Conditions to end welding are
registered in the arc welding
end condition file.
No. 1 to 1000
The number can be
specified by B/I/D/LB/LI/
LD variable.
AC =
Specifies the output value of
Current
welding current.
output value
Current value: 1 to 999 A
The current output value
can be specified by B/I/D/
B[]/I[]/D[]/LB/LI/LD/LB[]/
LI[]/LD[] variable.
AV = Voltage output value /AVP [4] = Percentage against the proper
voltage output value [5]
Only when “AC = Current output value” is selected in the above "AEF#
(Arc welding end condition file number) [2] /AC = Current output value [3]",
be sure to choose either of the following.
Tag
Explanation
Note
AV =
Specifies the output value of
Voltage
welding voltage.
output value The output value of welding
voltage is specified when the
power supply is independent.
Voltage value: 0.1 to 50.0 V
The voltage output value
can be specified by B/I/D/
B[]/I[]/D[]/LB/LI/LD/LB[]/
LI[]/LD[] variable.
(Unit: 0.1 V)
AVP =
Percentage
against the
proper
voltage
output value
Percentage: 50 to 150%
The voltage output value
can be specified by B/I/D/
B[]/I[]/D[]/LB/LI/LD/LB[]/
LI[]/LD[] variable.
Specifies the percentage
against the proper output
value of welding voltage.
The percentage against the
proper voltage output value is
specified when the power
supply is synergic.
10-35
10
Arc Welding Application
10.5 Basic Functions
DX100


T = Time [6]
This tag is added or omitted only when “AC = Current output value” is
selected in the above "AEF# (Arc welding end condition file number) [2] /
AC = Current output value [3]".
Tag
Explanation
Note
T =Time
Specifies the timer value at
the end of welding.
Unit: seconds
The time can be specified
by I/LI/I[]/LI[] variable.
(Unit: 0.01 sec.)
ANTSTK [7]
This tag is added or omitted only when “AC = Current output value” is
selected in the aforementioned "AEF# (Arc welding end condition file
number) [2] /AC = Current output value [3]".
Tag
Explanation
Note
ANTSTK
Specifies the automatic wirestick release function.
When the automatic wire-stick
release function is used, the
manipulator does not
immediately output the wire
sticking signal upon detecting
a wire stick, but automatically
attempts to release the
sticking by applying a certain
voltage.
Refer to chapter 10.8
"Automatic Wire-stick
Release Function" at
page 10-79.
10-36
DX100
10
Arc Welding Application
10.5 Basic Functions
10.5.2.4 Registering the ARCOF Instruction
1. Press [ARCOF].
DATA
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
DETAIL EDIT
ARCOF
SET METHOD
: UNUSED
ARCOF
Main Menu
Simple Menu
!Turn on servo power
2. Press [ENTER].
JOB
EDIT
DISPLAY
JOB CONTENT
JOB NAME: WORK A
CONTROL GROUP: R1
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
0008
0009
0010
UTILITY
STEP NO: 0003
TOOL: 00
NOP
MOVJ VJ=80.00
MOVL V=800
ARCON
MOVL V=50
MOVL V=50
MOVL V=50
ARCOF
MOVL V=800
MOVJ VJ=80.00
END
ARCOF
Main Menu
Simple Menu
!Turn on servo power
ARCOF instruction cannot be modified after it is registered
to the job.
SUPPLEMENT
(Refer to chapter 3.6.4
"Modifying Instructions" at page 3-55.)
If the ARCOF instruction needs to be modified, delete it and
then, add the neccesary instruction.
10-37
DX100
10.5.2.5
10
Arc Welding Application
10.5 Basic Functions
Setting Arc Welding End Conditions (Crater Processing)
The ARCOF instruction can be registered in any of the following four
ways:
• With additional items to specify conditions
ARCOF AC=160 AVP=70 T=0.50 ANTSTK
• With an arc welding end condition file
ARCOF AEF#(1)
In this case, the welding condition is set using the arc welding end
condition file. (Refer to chapter 10.5.5 "Arc End Condition File" at
page 10-63.)
• Without additional items
ARCOF
When the crater process is performed by changing the welding condition when welding is completed, before the ARCOF instruction is
executed, the welding condition needs to be set using the welding
condition setting instruction. (Refer to chapter 10.5.3 "ARCSET"
at page 10-47.)
10-38
10
Arc Welding Application
10.5 Basic Functions
DX100

With Additional Items to Specify Conditions
1. Select the ARCOF instruction in the instruction area.
– The ARCOF instruction appears in the input buffer line.
EDIT
JOB
DISPLAY
UTILITY
JOB CONTENT
JOB NAME: WORK A
CONTROL GROUP: R1
0000
NOP
0001
MOVJ VJ=80.00
0002
MOVL V=800
0003
ARCON
0004
MOVL V=50
0005
MOVL V=50
0006
MOVL V=50
0007
END
STEP NO: 0003
TOOL: 00
ARCOF
Main Menu
Simple Menu
! Turn on servo power
2. Press [SELECT].
– The DETAIL EDIT window appears.
3. Place the cursor on “UNUSED”.
EDIT
DATA
DISPLAY
UTILITY
DETAIL EDIT
ARCOF
SET METHOD
: UNUSED
ARCOF
Main Menu
Simple Menu
! Turn on servo power
4. Press [SELECT] and select “AC=” from the selection dialog.
EDIT
DATA
DISPLAY
UTILITY
DETAIL EDIT
ARCOF
SET METHOD
: AEF#()
AC=
UNUSED
– If the arc welding end condition file has already been set in the
ARCOF instruction additional items, the DETAIL EDIT window
appears.
DATA
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
DETAIL EDIT
ARCOF
SET METHOD
10-39
: AEF#()
1
DX100
10
Arc Welding Application
10.5 Basic Functions
5. Place the cursor on “AEF#( )” and press [SELECT], then select “AC=”
from the selection dialog.
EDIT
DATA
DISPLAY
UTILITY
DETAIL EDIT
ARCOF
SET METHOD
: AEF#()
AC=
UNUSED
6. Input the welding condition.
– Set each welding condition.
EDIT
DATA
DISPLAY
UTILITY
DETAIL EDIT
ARCOF
: AC= 180
: AVP= 100
: T= 0.30
: ANTSTK
WELDING CURR
WELDING VOLT
TIMER
ANTI-STICKING
ARCOF AC=180 AVP=100 T=0.30 ANTSTK
Main Menu
DATA
Simple Menu
EDIT
DISPLAY
! Turn on servo power
UTILITY
DETAIL EDIT
ARCOF
WELDING CURR
WELDING VOLT
TIMER
: AC= 200
: AVP= 100
: T= 0.30
ANTSTK
7. Press [ENTER].
– The set contents are displayed in the input buffer line.
ARCOF AC=200 AVP=100 T=0.30 ANTSTK
10-40
DX100
10
Arc Welding Application
10.5 Basic Functions
8. Press [ENTER].
– The set contents are registered in the job.
EDIT
JOB
DISPLAY
UTILITY
JOB CONTENT
JOB NAME: WORK A
STEP NO: 0003
CONTROL GROUP: R1
TOOL: 00
0000
NOP
0001
MOVJ VJ=80.00
0002
MOVL V=800
0003
ARCON
0004
MOVL V=50
0005
MOVL V=50
0006
MOVL V=50
0007
ARCOF AC=200 AVP=100 T=0.30 ANTSTK
0008
MOVL V=800
0009
MOVJ VJ=80.00
0010
END
ARCOF AC=200 AVP=100 T=0.30 ANTSTK
Main Menu
Simple Menu
! Turn on servo power
– Press [CANCEL] to return to the JOB CONTENT window if the set
contents are not to be registered.
EDIT
JOB
DISPLAY
JOB CONTENT
JOB NAME: WORK A
CONTROL GROUP: R1
0000
NOP
0001
MOVJ VJ=80.00
0002
MOVL V=800
0003
ARCON
0004
MOVL V=50
0005
MOVL V=50
0006
MOVL V=50
0007
ARCOF
0008
MOVL V=800
0009
MOVJ VJ=80.00
0010
END
UTILITY
STEP NO: 0003
TOOL: 00
ARCOF
Main Menu
Simple Menu
10-41
! Turn on servo power
10
Arc Welding Application
10.5 Basic Functions
DX100

With an Arc Welding End Condition File
1. Select the ARCOF instruction in the instruction area.
– The ARCOF instruction appears in the input buffer line.
EDIT
JOB
DISPLAY
UTILITY
JOB CONTENT
JOB NAME: WORK A
CONTROL GROUP: R1
0000
NOP
0001
MOVJ VJ=80.00
0002
MOVL V=800
0003
ARCON
0004
MOVL V=50
0005
MOVL V=50
0006
MOVL V=50
0007
END
STEP NO: 0003
TOOL: 00
ARCOF
Main Menu
Simple Menu
! Turn on servo power
2. Press [SELECT].
– The DETAIL EDIT window appears.
3. Place the cursor on “UNUSED”.
EDIT
DATA
DISPLAY
UTILITY
DETAIL EDIT
ARCOF
SET METHOD
: UNUSED
ARCOF
Main Menu
Simple Menu
! Turn on servo power
4. Press [SELECT] and select “AEF#( )” from the selection dialog.
DATA
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
DETAIL EDIT
ARCOF
SET METHOD
10-42
: AEF#()
AC=
UNUSED
DX100
10
Arc Welding Application
10.5 Basic Functions
– If the welding conditions have already been set in the ARCOF
instruction additional items, the DETAIL EDIT window appears.
EDIT
DATA
DISPLAY
UTILITY
DETAIL EDIT
ARCOF
: AC= 180
: AVP= 100
: T= 0.30
: ANTSTK
WELDING CURR
WELDING VOLT
TIMER
ANTI-STICKING
ARCOF AC=180 AVP=100 T=0.30 ANTSTK
Main Menu
Simple Menu
! Turn on servo power
5. Place the cursor on “AC=” and press [SELECT], then select “AEF#()”
from the selection dialog.
EDIT
DATA
DISPLAY
UTILITY
DETAIL EDIT
ARCOF
WELDING CURR
WELDING VOLT
TIMER
ANTI-STICKING
: AC=
180
AEF#()
: AVP=
AC= 100
: T=
0.30
UNUSED
: ANTSTK
6. Set the file number.
– Specify the file number (1 to 1000).
(1) Move the cursor to the file number and press [SELECT].
DATA
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
DETAIL EDIT
ARCOF
SET METHOD
: AEF#()
1
(2) Type the file number using the numeric keys and press [ENTER].
DATA
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
DETAIL EDIT
ARCOF
SET METHOD
: AEF#() 10
7. Press [ENTER].
– The set contents are displayed in the input buffer line.
ARCOF AEF# (10)
8. Press [ENTER].
10-43
DX100
10
Arc Welding Application
10.5 Basic Functions
– The set contents are registered in the job.
EDIT
JOB
DISPLAY
UTILITY
JOB CONTENT
JOB NAME: WORK A
CONTROL GROUP: R1
0000
NOP
0001
MOVJ VJ=80.00
0002
MOVL V=800
0003
ARCON
0004
MOVL V=50
0005
MOVL V=50
0006
MOVL V=50
0007
ARCOF AEF# (10)
0008
MOVL V=800
0009
MOVJ VJ=80.00
0010
END
STEP NO: 0003
TOOL: 00
ARCOF AEF# (10)
Main Menu
Simple Menu
! Turn on servo power
– Press [CANCEL] to return to the JOB CONTENT window if the set
contents are not to be registered.
EDIT
JOB
DISPLAY
JOB CONTENT
JOB NAME: WORK A
CONTROL GROUP: R1
0000
NOP
0001
MOVJ VJ=80.00
0002
MOVL V=800
0003
ARCON
0004
MOVL V=50
0005
MOVL V=50
0006
MOVL V=50
0007
ARCOF
0008
MOVL V=800
0009
MOVJ VJ=80.00
0010
END
UTILITY
STEP NO: 0003
TOOL: 00
ARCOF
Main Menu
Simple Menu
10-44
! Turn on servo power
10
Arc Welding Application
10.5 Basic Functions
DX100

Without Additional Items
1. Select the ARCOF instruction in the instruction area.
– The ARCOF instruction appears in the input buffer line.
EDIT
JOB
DISPLAY
UTILITY
JOB CONTENT
JOB NAME: WORK A
CONTROL GROUP: R1
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
0008
0009
0010
STEP NO: 0003
TOOL: 00
NOP
MOVJ VJ=80.00
MOVL V=800
ARCON
MOVL V=50
MOVL V=50
MOVL V=50
ARCOF AC=200 AVP=100 T=0.30 ANTSTK
MOVL V=800
MOVJ VJ=80.00
END
ARCOF AC=200 AVP=100 T=0.30 ANTSTK
Main Menu
Simple Menu
! Turn on servo power
2. Press [SELECT].
– The DETAIL EDIT window appears.
3. Place the cursor on “AEF#()” or “AC=”.
EDIT
DATA
DISPLAY
UTILITY
DETAIL EDIT
ARCOF
SET METHOD
EDIT
DATA
: AEF#()
DISPLAY
1
UTILITY
JOB CONTENT
DETAIL
EDIT
A
ARCOF
WELDING CURR
WELDING VOLT
TIMER
: AC= 180
: AVP= 100
: T= 0.30
ANTSTK
4. Press [SELECT] and select “UNUSED” from the selection dialog.
AEF#()
AC=
UNUSED
5. Press [SELECT].
– The set contents are displayed in the input buffer line.
ARCOF
10-45
DX100
10
Arc Welding Application
10.5 Basic Functions
6. Press [ENTER].
– The set contents are registered in the job.
EDIT
JOB
DISPLAY
UTILITY
JOB CONTENT
JOB NAME: WORK A
CONTROL GROUP: R1
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
0008
0009
0010
STEP NO: 0003
TOOL: 00
NOP
MOVJ VJ=80.00
MOVL V=800
ARCON
MOVL V=50
MOVL V=50
MOVL V=50
ARCOF
MOVL V=800
MOVJ VJ=80.00
END
ARCOF
Main Menu
Simple Menu
! Turn on servo power
– Press [CANCEL] to return to the JOB CONTENT window if the set
contents are not to be registered.
EDIT
JOB
DISPLAY
UTILITY
JOB CONTENT
JOB NAME: WORK A
CONTROL GROUP: R1
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
0008
0009
0010
STEP NO: 0003
TOOL: 00
NOP
MOVJ VJ=80.00
MOVL V=800
ARCON
MOVL V=50
MOVL V=50
MOVL V=50
ARCOF AC=200 AVP=100 T=0.30 ANTSTK
MOVL V=800
MOVJ VJ=80.00
END
ARCOF AC=200 AVP=100 T=0.30 ANTSTK
Main Menu
Simple Menu
10-46
! Turn on servo power
10
Arc Welding Application
10.5 Basic Functions
DX100
10.5.3 ARCSET
10.5.3.1 Function
This is the instruction to set the welding conditions (current, voltage, etc.)
individually.
The ARCSET instruction can be registered in any of the following two
ways:
• With additional items to specify conditions
ARCSET AC=200 AVP=100
• With an arc welding start condition file
ARCSET ASF# (1)
In this case, the welding condition is set using the arc start condition
file.
(Refer to chapter 10.5.4 "Arc Start Condition File" at page 10-56.)
10.5.3.2 Syntax
ARCSET
B
A
1
WELDn
2
AC=
Current output
value (A)
3
ASF#
(
Arc welding start
condition file
number
C
)
A
B
4
AV=
Voltage output
value (V)
5
AVP=
Percentage against
the proper voltage
output value (%)
6
V=
Welding speed
C
B
7
AN3=
Voltage target
value (V)
10-47
8
AN4=
Voltage target
value (V)
END
10
Arc Welding Application
10.5 Basic Functions
DX100
10.5.3.3
Explanation

WELDn [1]
Choose one of the following tags.
These tags are enabled only when multiple applications are in use and
two or more applications are set as arc welding application.
When there is only one application, these tags are not displayed.

Tag
Explanation
WELDn
Selects the Power Source
1 to 8.
AC = Current output value [2]/ASF# (Arc welding start condition file
number) [3]
This tag can be added or omitted.
Tag

Note
Explanation
Note
AC =
Specifies the output value of
Current
welding current.
output value
Current value: 1 to 999 A
The current output value
can be specified by B/I/D/
B[]/I[]/D[]/LB/LI/LD/LB[]/
LI[]/LD[] variable.
ASF#
(Arc welding
start
condition
file number)
No. 1 to 1000
The number can be
specified by B/I/D/LB/LI/
LD variable.
Specifies the arc welding start
condition file number.
Conditions to start welding are
registered in the arc welding
start condition file.
AV = Voltage output value /AVP [4]= Percentage against the proper
voltage output value [5]
Be sure to choose either of the following.
Tag
Explanation
Note
AV =
Specifies the output value of
Voltage
welding voltage.
output value The output value of welding
voltage is specified when the
power supply is independent.
Voltage value: 0.1 to 50.0 V
The voltage output value
can be specified by B/I/D/
B[ ]/I[ ]/D[ ]/LB/LI/LD/LB[ ]/
LI[ ]/LD[ ] variable.
(Unit: 0.1 V)
AVP =
Percentage
against the
proper
voltage
output value
Percentage: 50 to 150%
The voltage output value
can be specified by B/I/D/
B[ ]/I[ ]/D[ ]/LB/LI/LD/LB[ ]/
LI[ ]/LD[ ] variable.
Specifies the percentage
against the proper output
value of welding voltage.
The percentage against the
proper voltage output value is
specified when the power
supply is synergic.
10-48
10
Arc Welding Application
10.5 Basic Functions
DX100



V = Welding speed [6]
This tag can be added or omitted.
Tag
Explanation
Note
V = Welding
speed
Specifies the welding speed.
Speed: 0.1 to
1500.0 mm/sec.
The unit displayed can be
changed by the setting of
the parameter (S2C101).
The speed can be specified
by B/B[ ]/LB/LB[ ]/I/I[ ]/LI/LI[
]/D/D[ ]/LD/LD[ ] variable.
(Unit: 0.1 mm/sec.)
AN3 = Voltage target value [7]
This tag can be added or omitted.
Tag
Explanation
Note
AN3 =
Voltage
target value
Specifies the voltage target
value for the analog output 3.
Target value: -14.00 to
+14.00 V
The voltage target value
can be specified by I/LI/I[ ]/
LI[ ] variable.
(Unit: 0.01 V)
AN4 = Voltage target value [8]
This tag can be added or omitted.
Tag
Explanation
Note
AN4 =
Voltage
target value
Specifies the voltage target
value for the analog output 4.
Target value: -14.00 to
+14.00 V
The voltage target value
can be specified by I/LI/I[ ]/
LI[ ] variable.
(Unit: 0.01 V)
10-49
10
Arc Welding Application
10.5 Basic Functions
DX100
10.5.3.4
Registering the ARCSET Instruction

With Additional Items to Specify Conditions
1. Press [INFORM LIST].
– The instruction list dialog box appears.
IN/OUT
ARCCTE
ARCON
ARCOF
CONTROL
DEVICE
VWELD
MOTION
AWELD
ARITH
ARCSET
WVON
SHIFT
WVOF
OTHER
SAME
ARCCTS
PRIOR
2. Select the ARCSET instruction.
– The ARCSET instruction appears in the input buffer line.
EDIT
JOB
DISPLAY
UTILITY
JOB CONTENT1
JOB NAME: WORK A
CONTROL GROUP: R1
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
IN/OUT
STEP
NO: 0003
ARCCTE
CONTROL
TOOL: 00
ARCON
ARCOF
NOP
MOVJ VJ=80.00
MOVL V=800
ARCON
MOVL V=50
END
VWELD
AWELD
ARCSET
DEVICE
MOTION
ARITH
WVON
SHIFT
WVOF
OTHER
ARCCTS
SAME
PRIOR
ARCSET AC=200 AVP=100
Main Menu Simple Menu
! Turn on servo power
3. Press [SELECT] and set the welding condition on the DETAIL EDIT
window.
– The DETAIL EDIT window appears.
ARCSET AC=200 AVP=100
EDIT
DATA
DISPLAY
UTILITY
DETAIL EDIT
ARCSET
WELDING CURR
WELDING VOLT
SPEED
ANALOG OUTPUT3
ANALOG OUTPUT4
: AC= 200
: AVP= 100
: UNUSED
: UNUSED
: UNUSED
ARCCTS AC=200 AVP=100
Main Menu
Simple Menu
! Turn on servo power
(1) Move the cursor to the item to be set, and press [SELECT].
(2) Type the welding conditions using the numeric keys, and press
[ENTER].
10-50
DX100
10
Arc Welding Application
10.5 Basic Functions
EDIT
DATA
UTILITY
DISPLAY
DETAIL EDIT
ARCSET
: AC= 134
: AVP= 100
: UNUSED
: UNUSED
: UNUSED
WELDING CURR
WELDING VOLT
SPEED
ANALOG OUTPUT3
ANALOG OUTPUT4
(3) To add the additional items, place the cursor on the item with the
“UNUSED” status and press [SELECT], then the selection dialog
appears.
(4) To delete the additional items, line up the cursor with the additional
items and press [SELECT] to select “UNUSED”.
EDIT
DATA
DISPLAY
UTILITY
DETAIL EDIT
ARCSET
: AC=
AC=134
: AVP=
100
UNUSED
: UNUSED
: UNUSED
WELDING CURR
WELDING VOLT
SPEED
ANALOG OUTPUT3
ANALOG OUTPUT4
4. Press [ENTER].
– The set contents are displayed in the input buffer line.
EDIT
JOB
DISPLAY
UTILITY
JOB CONTENT
JOB NAME: WORK A
CONTROL GROUP: R1
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
STEP NO: 0003
TOOL: 00
NOP
MOVJ VJ=80.00
MOVL V=800
ARCON
MOVL V=50
END
ARCSET AC=134 AVP=100
Main Menu
Simple Menu
! Turn on servo power
5. Press [ENTER].
– The set contents are registered in the job.
EDIT
JOB
DISPLAY
UTILITY
JOB CONTENT
JOB NAME: WORK A
CONTROL GROUP: R1
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
STEP NO: 0003
TOOL: 00
NOP
MOVJ VJ=80.00
MOVL V=800
ARCON
MOVL V=50
ARCCTS AC=134 AVP=100
END
ARCSET AC=134 AVP=100
Main Menu
Simple Menu
10-51
! Turn on servo power
DX100
10
Arc Welding Application
10.5 Basic Functions
– Press [CANCEL] to return to the JOB CONTENT window if the set
contents are not to be registered.
EDIT
JOB
DISPLAY
JOB CONTENT
JOB NAME: WORK A
CONTROL GROUP: R1
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
UTILITY
STEP NO: 0003
TOOL: 00
NOP
MOVJ VJ=80.00
MOVL V=800
ARCON
MOVL V=50
END
ARCSET AC=200 AVP=100
Main Menu
Simple Menu
10-52
! Turn on servo power
10
Arc Welding Application
10.5 Basic Functions
DX100

With an Arc Start Condition File
1. Select the ARCSET instruction in the instruction area.
– The ARCSET instruction appears in the input buffer line.
EDIT
JOB
DISPLAY
UTILITY
JOB CONTENT
JOB NAME: WORK A
CONTROL GROUP: R1
0007
0008
0009
0010
0011
0012
0013
0014
STEP NO: 0003
TOOL: 00
MOVL V=100
ARCSET
MOVL V=100
ARCOF AC=100 AVP=100 ANTSTK
MOVJ VJ=5.00
MOVJ VJ=5.00
MOVJ VJ=5.00
END
ARCSET
Main Menu
Simple Menu
! Turn on servo power
2. Press [SELECT].
– The DETAIL EDIT window appears.
(1) Place the cursor on “UNUSED”.
EDIT
DATA
DISPLAY
UTILITY
DETAIL EDIT
ARCSET
: UNUSED
: UNUSED
: UNUSED
: UNUSED
: UNUSED
WELDING CURR
WELDING VOLT
SPEED
ANALOG OUTPUT3
ANALOG OUTPUT4
(2) Press [SELECT] and select “ASF#()” from the selection dialog.
EDIT
DATA
DISPLAY
UTILITY
DETAIL EDIT
ARCSET
WELDING CURR
WELDING VOLT
SPEED
ANALOG OUTPUT3
ANALOG OUTPUT4
10-53
: UNUSED
AC=
: UNUSED
ASF#()
: UNUSED
: UNUSED
: UNUSED
DX100
10
Arc Welding Application
10.5 Basic Functions
3. Set the file number.
– Specify the file number (1 to 396).
(1) Move the cursor to the file number and press [SELECT].
EDIT
DATA
DISPLAY
UTILITY
DETAIL EDIT
ARCSET
SET METHOD
CONDITION SET
: ASF#() 1
: ACOND=0
ARCON
Simple Menu
Main Menu
! Turn on servo power
(2) Type the file number using the numeric keys and press [ENTER].
EDIT
DATA
DISPLAY
UTILITY
DETAIL EDIT
ARCSET
SET METHOD
CONDITION SET
: ASF#() 10
: ACOND=0
ARCON
Main Menu
Simple Menu
! Turn on servo power
4. Specify the condition set.
• When the welding condition file is the enhanced type
– Specify the number for the condition set (0 or 1).
(1) Move the cursor to the ACOND number at the condition set, and
press [SELECT].
EDIT
DATA
DISPLAY
UTILITY
DETAIL EDIT
ARCSET
SET METHOD
CONDITION SET
: ASF#() 10
: ACOND=1
ARCON
Main Menu
Simple Menu
10-54
! Turn on servo power
DX100
10
Arc Welding Application
10.5 Basic Functions
(2) Type the file number using the numeric keys and press [ENTER].
– *By selecting the condition set number, either one of the “start
condition” or “main condition” in the condition file can be specified.
– ACOND=0 : Sets the welding current and voltage which are
specified in the “start condition”.
– ACOND=1 : Sets the welding current and voltage which are
specified in the “main condition”.
5. Press [ENTER].
– The set contents are displayed in the input buffer line.
ARCSET ASF# (10) ACOND=1
6. Press [ENTER].
– Press [ENTER]. The set contents are registered in the job.
EDIT
JOB
DISPLAY
UTILITY
JOB CONTENT
JOB NAME: WORK A
CONTROL GROUP: R1
0006
0007
0008
0009
0010
0011
0012
0013
0014
STEP NO: 0003
TOOL: 00
MOVL V=100
MOVL V=100
ARCSET ASF#(10) ACOND=1
MOVL V=100
ARCOF AC=100 AVP=100 ANTSTK
MOVJ VJ=5.00
MOVJ VJ=5.00
MOVJ VJ=5.00
END
ARCSET ASF# (10) ACOND=1
Simple Menu
Main Menu
! Turn on servo power
– Press [CANCEL] to return to the JOB CONTENT window if the set
contents are not to be registered.
EDIT
JOB
DISPLAY
UTILITY
JOB CONTENT
JOB NAME: WORK A
CONTROL GROUP: R1
0006
0007
0008
0009
0010
0011
0012
0013
0014
STEP NO: 0003
TOOL: 00
MOVL V=100
MOVL V=100
ARCSET
MOVL V=100
ARCOF AC=100 AVP=100 ANTSTK
MOVJ VJ=5.00
MOVJ VJ=5.00
MOVJ VJ=5.00
END
ARCSET
Main Menu
Simple Menu
10-55
! Turn on servo power
10
Arc Welding Application
10.5 Basic Functions
DX100
10.5.4
Arc Start Condition File
10.5.4.1
Displayed File Numbers
Two types of file numbers are displayed: The sequential serial number of
all welding files and the file number allocated for each power source.
Either number can be entered.
When specifying the condition file number for the ARCON or the ARCSET
command of a job, set the number shown in the sequential serial number
field.
10.5.4.2
Tabs
Conditions of the arc start condition file are divided into the tabs:
“PREFLOW”, “START”, “MAIN COND.”, and “OTHER”
To switch tabs, use the cursor key (left and right).

“Main Condition” Tab Window
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
A. START COND. ON
Check this box to enable the start condition.
B. CURRENT (30 to 500 A)
Welding current output value.
C. VOLTAGE (12.0 to 45.0 V, 50 to 150%)
Welding voltage output value.
D. ANALOG OUTPUT 3 (-14.00 to 14.00)
Displayed when the enhanced welding condition file function is enabled.
This is the reference value to the Power Source through the analog output 3.
To use this, YEW board or XEW02 board, etc. with analog output ports
must be added.
E. ANALOG OUTPUT 4 (-14.00 to 14.00)
Displayed when the enhanced welding condition file function is enabled.
This is the reference value to the Power Source through the analog output 4.
To use this, YEW board or XEW02 board, etc. with analog output ports
must be added.
F. ROBOT PAUSE TIME (0 to 10.00 seconds)
The length of time when the manipulator pauses at the beginning of
welding.
If the start condition is enabled, the robot pause time is specified in the
“START” tab and is not displayed in the “MAIN COND.” tab.
10-56
10
Arc Welding Application
10.5 Basic Functions
DX100
G. ROBOT SPEED (1 to 600 cm/min)
Set the travel speed of the torch tip during welding.
However, if the move instruction specifies a particular speed in the welding section, this particular speed is given priority.

“START” Tab Window
Check the box of “SLOPE ON” to specify whether the conditions set in
“START” tab should be changed stepwisely or gradually to the conditions
set in “MAIN COND.” tab when starting welding.
The setting window switches as shown in the following.
Fig. 10-4: With “SLOPE ON” Checked
A
B
D
E
D
A
B
10-57
E
DX100
10
Arc Welding Application
10.5 Basic Functions
Fig. 10-5: With “SLOPE ON” Unchecked
A
B
C
A
B
C
A. The values of CURRENT, VOLTAGE, ANALOG OUTPUT 3,
and ANALOG OUTPUT 4 of the start condition at the
beginning of welding
Check the box of “START COND. ON” in the “MAIN COND.” tab to set
the values.
To use the analog output 3 and 4, YEW board or XEW02 board, etc.
with analog output ports must be added.
B. ROBOT PAUSE TIME (0 to 10.00 seconds)
The length of time when the manipulator pauses at the beginning of
welding.
C. ROBOT MOVE DIST (DISTANCE)
Displayed only when the slope function is OFF.
The distance which the manipulator moves along the welding line with
the conditions set in “START” tab.
The manipulator moves at the speed specified in the “MAIN COND.”
D. ROBOT SPEED (1 to 600 cm/min)
Displayed only when the slope function is ON.
Specifies the initial velocity when the manipulator starts moving after the
robot pause time (specified in B. above).
Then, the speed gradually increases to the speed specified in the “MAIN
COND.” .
E. SLOPE DIST : Distance Specification
Displayed only when the slope function is ON.
The interval where the conditions are gradually changed from the ones
set in the “START” tab to the ones set in the “MAIN COND.” tab can be
specified by millimeter.
10-58
10
Arc Welding Application
10.5 Basic Functions
DX100

“PREFLOW” Tab Window
Specifies the process before the beginning of welding.
A
A
A. GAS: PREFLOW TIME
When the manipulator moves to the welding start point, feeding of the
shielding gas can be started before the manipulator reaches the welding
start point.
When to start feeding the shielding gas before the manipulator reaches
the welding start point can be specified by seconds.
NOTE
If the manipulator’s traveling time from the preceding step to
the welding start point step becomes shorter than the gas
preflow time due to the job teaching, the shielding gas is fed
when the manipulator starts traveling to the welding start
point, thus the preflow time becomes shorter than the time
specified.
10-59
10
Arc Welding Application
10.5 Basic Functions
DX100

“OTHER” Tab Window
A
B
C
A. RETRY ON
Specifies whether the retry function is ON or OFF.
Check this box to turn the retry function ON.
B. ARC FAILURE RESTART
Regarding the ON/OFF status of the restart function, select whether to
turn OFF the restart function or to follow the settings in the Arc Auxiliary
Condition File.
C. PZ: POSITION SET ZONE
Specifies the distance from the actual position of the manipulator (the
position fed back from the encoder of each axis of the manipulator) to
the welding start point, where the manipulator is regarded to have
reached the welding start point.
When the position set zone is set to “UNUSED”, the welding start signal
is output to the Power Source immediately after the move instruction to
the welding start point is output.
When the position set zone is set to 1, the welding start signal is output
to the Power Source after the manipulator completely reaches the welding start point and stops.
When a bigger number is selected (2, 3, or 4), the timing of the output of
the welding start signal becomes earlier, i.e., the time from the output of
the welding start signal to the welding start point becomes longer.
10-60
10
Arc Welding Application
10.5 Basic Functions
DX100
10.5.4.3 Comment
Comment can be added to every ARC START COND. file number.
It is input or displayed with the arc start cond. window.
A
A. COMMENT
The comment added to each file number is displayed in this box. Up to
32 characters can be input for the comment.

Inputting Comment
1. Move the cursor to the comment displaying box.
2. Press [ENTER].
– The software keypad window appears.
10-61
DX100
10
Arc Welding Application
10.5 Basic Functions
3. Input the comment and press [ENTER].
– The window returns to the arc start cond. window and the input
comment is displayed.
10-62
10
Arc Welding Application
10.5 Basic Functions
DX100
10.5.5 Arc End Condition File
10.5.5.1 Displayed File Numbers
Two types of file numbers are displayed: The serial number of all welding
files (Serial No) and the file number allocated for each welder.
Either number can be entered.
When specifying the condition file number for the ARCOF instruction of a
job, set the number shown in the “Serial No” field.
10.5.5.2 Tabs
Conditions of the arc end condition file are divided into the tabs: “CRATER
COND. 1”, “CRATER COND. 2”, and “OTHER”.
To switch tabs, use the cursor key (left and right).

“CRATER COND. 1” Tab Window
Check the box of “SLOPE ON” to specify whether the welding conditions
should be gradually changed to the crater condition before the
manipulator reaches to the welding end point, or should be changed to the
crater condition immediately after the manipulator reaches the welding
end point.
The setting window switches as shown in the following.
Fig. 10-6: With “SLOPE ON” Checked
A
B
C
D
B
A
D
10-63
C
DX100
10
Arc Welding Application
10.5 Basic Functions
Fig. 10-7: With “SLOPE ON” Unchecked
A
C
A
C
A. The values of CURRENT, VOLTAGE, ANALOG OUTPUT 3,
and ANALOG OUTPUT 4 of the crater condition 1 at the
beginning of welding
The analog output 3 and 4 are displayed when the enhanced welding
condition file function is enabled.
To use the analog output 3 and 4, YEW board or XEW02 board, etc.
with analog output ports must be added.
B. ROBOT SPEED (1 to 600 cm/min)
Displayed only when the slope function is ON.
This is the manipulator’s travel speed at the welding end point.
The manipulator’s travel speed changes from the speed specified with
the move instruction of a job or the speed specified by the welding start
condition file to the speed specified above.
C. ROBOT PAUSE TIME (0 to 10.00 seconds)
The length of time when the manipulator continues welding while the
manipulator is stopped at the welding end point.
D. SLOPE DIST : Distance Specification
Displayed only when the slope function is ON.
The interval where the conditions are gradually changed from the ones
set in the “MAIN COND.” tab to the ones set in the “CRATER COND. 1”
tab can be specified by millimeter.
10-64
10
Arc Welding Application
10.5 Basic Functions
DX100

“CRATER COND. 2” Tab Window
Check the box of “CRATER2 ON” to set the condition to either of the
following:
• Check “CRATER2 ON” to change the crater condition stepwisely
after the manipulator reaches the welding end point
• Uncheck “CRATER2 ON” to continue welding with the crater condition 1
The setting window switches as shown in the following.
Fig. 10-8: With “CRATER2 ON” Checked
A
B
A
B
Fig. 10-9: With “CRATER2 ON” Unchecked
A. The values of CURRENT, VOLTAGE, ANALOG OUTPUT 3,
and ANALOG OUTPUT 4 of the start condition at the
beginning of welding
Check the box of “CRATER2 ON” to set the value.
The analog output 3 and 4 are displayed when the enhanced welding
condition file function is enabled.
To use the analog output 3 and 4, YEW board or XEW02 board, etc.
with analog output ports must be added.
B. ROBOT PAUSE TIME (0 to 10.00 seconds)
The length of time when the manipulator continues welding while the
manipulator is stopped at the welding end point.
10-65
10
Arc Welding Application
10.5 Basic Functions
DX100

“OTHER” Tab Window
Fig. 10-10: With “AST: ANTI-STICK ON” Checked
A
B
C
Wire Anti-Stick Process Time
D
A
C
B
D
Fig. 10-11: With “AST: ANTI-STICK ON” Unchecked
Fig. 10-12: Timing of Each Process Time of Arc End Process
Manipulator Operating Time
Welding Condition Output Time
Wire Anti-Stick Process Time
Wire-Stick Check Time
Gas Afterflow Time
10-66
DX100
10
Arc Welding Application
10.5 Basic Functions
A. PZ: POSITION SET ZONE
Specifies the distance from the actual position of the manipulator (the
position fed back from the encoder of each axis of the manipulator) to
the welding end point, where the manipulator is regarded to have
reached the welding end point.
When the position set zone is set to 1, the condition switches to the crater condition after the manipulator completely reaches the welding end
point and stops.
Crater at the end of the weld bead
If the timings of the manipulator’s stop and the switch of the
crater condition are not right, there may be rare occasions
when the crater part becomes longer as shown below.
In this case, it is effective to set the position set zone to 0 in
order to synchronize precisely the timings of the manipulator’s stop and the switch of the crater condition.
SUPPLEMENT
NOTE
When the position set zone is set to 1, the cycle time
extends by 0.1 to 0.2 seconds, because the judgment that
the manipulator has reached the welding end point is
delayed, compared with when the position set zone is set to
other than 0.
Set the appropriate position set zone depending on the
shape of crater.
B. MTS: MONITORING TIME
Wire stick monitoring time at the end of welding.
C. AST: ANTI-STICK ON
Check this box so that the process of automatic wire-stick release will
be performed if wire-stick is detected at the end of welding.
When the anti-stick function is ON, the cycle time becomes
longer than when it is OFF.
NOTE
• When the anti-stick is ON:
After the wire stick monitoring of the step B above, the
manipulator starts to move.
• When the anti-stick is OFF:
Simultaneously with the start of the wire stick monitoring
of the step B above, the manipulator starts to move.
D. GAS: AFTERFLOW TIME
Specifies with the length of time to feed the shielding gas while the
manipulator is moving from the end of welding to the next step.
10-67
10
Arc Welding Application
10.5 Basic Functions
DX100
10.5.5.3
Comment
Comment can be added to every ARC END COND. file number.
It is input or displayed with the arc start cond. window.
A
A. COMMENT
The comment added to each file number is displayed in this box. Up to
32 characters can be input for the comment.

Inputting Comment
1. Move the cursor to the comment displaying box.
2. Press [ENTER].
– The software keypad window appears.
10-68
DX100
10
Arc Welding Application
10.5 Basic Functions
3. Input the comment and press [ENTER].
4. The window returns to the arc end cond. window and the input
comment is displayed.
10-69
DX100
10.5.6
10
Arc Welding Application
10.5 Basic Functions
Welding Speed Specifications
The welding speed is determined by one of the following:
• Welding speed specified by the play speed of the move instruction
• Welding speed specified by the ARCON instruction or the arc start
condition file
When the move instruction does not specify a speed
Welding is performed at the welding speed of the ARCON instruction.
When the move instruction and ARCON instruction specify different
speeds
Priority is given to one according to the parameter values described
below. To switch the priorities, change the parameter setting.
Parameter
Contents
Initial Value
AxP005
x: Application number
Move instruction speed is priority : 0
ARCON instruction speed is priority : 1
0
10-70
DX100
10
Arc Welding Application
10.5 Basic Functions
10.5.7 Welding Execution Function During Teach Mode
When the [INTERLOCK] + [WELD ON/OFF] keys are pressed
simultaneously, the LED is lit with a beep sound, turning ON the system
output signal "#50065: PERMISSIBLE WORK IN TEST RUN”.
When pressing these keys once again, the LED goes out and the beep
sound stops, then the system output signal "#50065: PERMISSIBLE
WORK IN TEST RUN" turns OFF.
The standard ladder program of arc welding application supports the
function that welding can be performed during the teach mode by the
signal "#50065: PERMISSIBLE WORK IN TEST RUN".
*Welding can be performed during a test run only when the security mode
is the management mode.
*Welding cannot be performed during a test run even while the LED is lit
unless the security mode is the management mode.
NOTE
During a test run of the teach mode, the manipulator may
not move at the actual welding speed due to the speed limit
in some cases. (e.g. at a welding position/point where the
manipulator significantly changes its posture during a coordinated motion with a station)
In these cases, weld bead may be thicker compared with
the bead that is formed during the playback operation, or
burn through may occur as the speed of the welding is different from the speed that is appropriate for the welding
conditions (current and voltage).
10-71
DX100
10
Arc Welding Application
10.5 Basic Functions
10.5.8
Notes on Arc Welding
10.5.8.1
Notes on Restarting
If the manipulator stops during welding, the arc is automatically turned
OFF. When restarted, the arc is automatically turned ON, and the
manipulator starts welding towards the step where the cursor is located on
the screen. The welding current and voltage when arc is turned ON again
are the same as those before stopping.
P1
Arc ON
Manipulator stops.
Welding
P2
Arc OFF
Welding
Arc OFF as manipulator stops.
Arc ON as manipulator restarts.
If the manipulator is moved from the stopped position using
the axis keys, return the manipulator to the stopped position
before restarting for safe operation.
It is possible to move the manipulator to the stopped position automatically at restarting and start welding again by
the parameter setting (S2C422, S2C423).
[FWD] or [BWD] can be used for moving to the stopped
position.
NOTE
S2C422: Restart Operation after E-Stop (Set 2).
S2C423: Restart Operation after Jog Operation (Set 2).
Refer to “DX100 Concurrent IO·Parameter” for details of the
parameter setting.
P1
Arc ON
Arc OFF as
manipulator stops.
Manipulator
Stops
t
en
em
ov
m
is
Ax
Welding
P2
Arc OFF
Arc ON as manipulator restarts.
10-72
DANGER!
10
Arc Welding Application
10.6 Arc Retry Function
DX100
10.6
Arc Retry Function
An attachment to the welding start position of a non-conductive material,
such as rust, soot, and oil, may cause an arc start failure during arc start.
An arc start failure stops the manipulator and interrupts work. This is
prevented by using the arc retry function.
When an arc start failure occurs and this arc retry function is performed,
the ARCON process is repeated according to the retry condition defined in
the Arc Auxiliary Condition File. The manipulator repeats the ARCON
procedure as it slightly shifts its position near the arc starting point. After
that, the manipulator returns to the starting point when an arc starts and
continues working.
Fig. 10-13: Retry Function Example
1. Arc Start Failure
2. The Retry Procedure
– Returns toward the previous step and performs a retract inching,
then returns to the teaching starting point and repeats the ARCON
procedure.
3. After a successful arc start, the manipulator continues to weld.
10-73
DX100
10.6.1
10
Arc Welding Application
10.6 Arc Retry Function
Arc Retry Function Setting
DATA
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
ARC AUXILIARY COND
COND NO.: 1
A
B
C
D
E
F
<RETRY FUNCTION SET>
NO.
RETRACT TIME
REPLAY DISTANCE
SPEED
CURRENT
VOLTAGE
Main Menu
Simple Menu
: 1 times
: 1.50 sec
: 10.0 mm
: 30 cm/min
: 100 A
: 100 %
! Turn on servo power
A. NO. (0 to 9 times)
Maximum repetition count for the arc retry process.
B. RETRACT TIME (0 to 2.50 seconds)
Wire retracting time in the arc retry process.
C. REPLAY DISTANCE (0 to 99.9 mm)
Manipulator moving distance for an arc retry process at the replay
mode.
D. SPEED (1 to 600 cm/min)
Speed of the manipulator when it returns to the welding start point at arc
retry.
E. CURRENT (1 to 999A)
Welding current output when the manipulator returns to the welding start
point at arc retry.
F. VOLTAGE (0 to 50.0V, 50 to 150%)
Welding voltage output when the manipulator returns to the welding
start point at arc retry.
SUPPLEMENT
When the twin synchronous function, etc. is used, the arc
retry function cannot be used.
10-74
10
Arc Welding Application
10.7 Arc Restart Function
DX100
10.7
Arc Restart Function
When the manipulator stops because of an arc failure, a simple start
would leave a break in the welding line. This is prevented by using the arc
restart function.
When the arc restart function is executed, the manipulator is restarted
using the method specified in the Arc Auxiliary Condition File*1.
There are three methods to restart the manipulator after an arc failure:
• With the arc OFF the controller outputs an error signal and the message “RESTARTING FOR ARC”, but continues manipulator’s movement. After exiting the arc section, the controller outputs the
message “END OF ARC RESTARTING”, and continues the operation.
• With the arc ON trial, the manipulator automatically returns for the
specified overlap length*2, and then continues welding.
• The manipulator stops and waits for a manual intervention. After
intervention (A), the operator should return the manipulator to the
original stop position (B). And then press [START] again. The manipulator returns for the specified overlap length*2 (C) and continues the
work.
B
C
A
*1 The arc auxiliary condition file defines the following: current, voltage and speed
at restart; method of restart after a gas shortage or wire shortage.
Overlap length
10-75
DX100
10
Arc Welding Application
10.7 Arc Restart Function
*2 The overlap length (the length of the section where welding is repeated after a
restart) can be set as desired (0 to 99.9mm).
NOTE
A cursor operation resets the “restarting” status. Therefore,
the arc restart function cannot be executed after the cursor
operation.
10-76
DX100
10
Arc Welding Application
10.7 Arc Restart Function
10.7.1 Arc Auxiliary Condition File
10.7.1.1 Arc Restart Function Setting
DATA
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
ARC AUXILIARY COND
COND NO.: 1
A
B
C
D
E
F
<RESTART FUNCTION SET>
NO.
LAP DISTANCE
SPEED
CURRENT
VOLTAGE
: 1 times
: 10.0 mm
: 30 cm/min
: 100 A
: 100 %
RESTART MODE
1.ARC FAILURE
2.GAS FAILURE
3.WIRE FAILURE
: NO RESTART
: NO RESTART
: NO RESTART
Main Menu
Simple Menu
! Turn on servo power
A. NO. (0 to 9 times)
Maximum repetition count for the arc restart process regarding the
same welding section.
B. LAP DISTANCE (0 to 99.9mm)
Overlapped welding distance in a restart process.
C. SPEED (1 to 600 cm/min)
Speed of the manipulator as it moves backward in an arc restart process.
D. CURRENT (1 to 999A)
Welding current output when the manipulator moves backward in an arc
restart process.
E. VOLTAGE (0 to 50.0V, 50 to 150%)
Welding voltage output when the manipulator moves backward in an arc
restart process.
F. RESTART MODE
1. ARC FAILURE
(1) NO RESTART :
– Arc restart function is not used. The manipulator stops with the arc
failure alarm.
(2) ARCOF CONTINUE :
– With the arc OFF, the controller outputs the “Restarting for Arc”
message and the manipulator keeps moving.
– After moving through the arc section, the controller outputs the “End
of Arc Restarting” message and resumes a normal welding
operation.
– The message is reset when OUT #2045 is turned ON and OFF.
(3) AUTO RESTART :
– The manipulator automatically restarts.
(4) SEMI-AUTO RESTART :
– The manipulator stops and waits for manual intervention.
– The manipulator restarts as the operator presses [START] again.
– The restart status is reset when OUT #2046 is turned ON and OFF.
10-77
DX100
10
Arc Welding Application
10.7 Arc Restart Function
2. GAS FAILURE
(1) NO RESTART :
– Arc restart function is not used. The manipulator moves with the gas
shortage alarm.
(2) ALARM AT ARC END :
– The manipulator continues the welding operation until it reaches the
welding end point, where it stops with an alarm.
(3) SEMI-AUTO RESTART :
– The manipulator stops and waits for manual intervention.
– The manipulator restarts as the operator presses [START] again.
– The restart status is reset when OUT #2046 is turned ON and OFF.
3. WIRE FAILURE
(1) NO RESTART:
– Arc restart function is not used. The manipulator moves with the
wire shortage alarm.
(2) ALARM AT ARC END :
– The manipulator continues the welding operation until it reaches the
welding end point, where it stops with an alarm.
(3) SEMI-AUTO RESTART :
– The manipulator stops and waits for manual intervention.
– The manipulator restarts as the operator presses [START] again.
– The restart status is reset when OUT #2046 is turned ON and OFF.
SUPPLEMENT
When the complete synchronization of the twin synchronous
function is used, the arc restart function cannot be used.
10-78
10
Arc Welding Application
10.8 Automatic Wire-stick Release Function
DX100
10.8

Automatic Wire-stick Release Function
Automatic Wire-stick Release Function
The automatic wire-stick release function can be used if wire stick is
detected in spite of the anti-stick process.
When this function is used, the manipulator does not immediately output
the wire sticking signal upon detecting a wire stick, but automatically
attempts to release the sticking by applying a certain voltage.
Only when the stick release process has failed for a specified number of
times, the manipulator stops and outputs the wire stick signal.
This function is specified in the arc end condition file or the ARCOF
instruction’s additional items. When it is used, the voltage and number of
attempts are set in the arc auxiliary condition file.
Automatic Wire-stick Release
Even if a single attempt has failed, the process is repeated
up to the specified maximum repetition count.

Manipulator Stopped by Wire Stick
If a wire stick occurs at the end of welding, the manipulator immediately
stops in the hold status. While the manipulator remains in the hold status,
the [HOLD] lamp lights and the external system output signal “Wire
Sticking” is output.
DX100
ON
Sticking
Wire stick occurs
10-79
External output signal is turned ON.
DX100
10.8.1
10.8.1.1
10
Arc Welding Application
10.8 Automatic Wire-stick Release Function
Arc Auxiliary Condition File
Automatic Wire Anti-stick Function Setting
DATA
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
ARC AUXILIARY COND
COND NO.; 1
A
B
C
D
<WIRE ANTI-STICKING FUNCTION SET>
: 1 times
NO.
: 110 A
CURRENT
: 120 %
VOLTAGE
: 0.30 sec
CLOCK
Main Menu
Simple Menu
! Turn on servo power
A. NO. (0 to 9 times)
Maximum repetition count for the wire-sticking release process.
B. CURRENT (1 to 999A)
The welding current output in the wire-sticking release process.
C. VOLTAGE (0 to 50.0V, 50 to 150%)
The welding voltage output in the wire-sticking release process.
D. CLOCK (0 to 2.00 seconds)
Sticking release process duration.
10-80
10
Arc Welding Application
10.9 Wire-stick Check Function
DX100
10.9

Wire-stick Check Function
Anti-Stick Function
The wire may stick to the workpiece after welding is completed (1).
As an anti-stick process, the Power Source temporarily increases the
voltage at the end of welding (2).
After the anti-stick process, a wire stick check is performed (3).
If the anti-stick process failed and a wire stick is detected, the manipulator
enters a hold status or performs the automatic sticking release process,
depending on the anti-stick condition specified.
Time required for the anti-stick process differs depending on the Power
Sources.
The anti-stick process times for different Power Sources is registered in
the Power Source characteristic file.
The wire check is performed after the anti-stick process time has elapsed.
Wire stick
SUPPLEMENT
“Wire stick” refers to the contact of the wire to the workpiece
as observed after the arc-OFF.
1. Welding End (Wire Stick Occurrence)
Wire stick to workpiece
2. Anti-stick Process
Voltage increased temporarily
as anti-stick process
3. Wire Stick Check
– Wire stick check is performed after elapsing of the anti-stick process
time defined in the Power Source characteristic file.
Wire stick to workpiece
10-81
10
Arc Welding Application
10.10 Slope Up/Down Function
DX100
10.10
Slope Up/Down Function
The slope up/down function is used during welding to gradually change
the welding condition.
This function is extremely effective in conducting heat for such operations
on workpieces such as the one shown below.
During the welding of a workpiece as shown below, especially during the
period before the end of welding, the tearing or dropping of metal can
occur quite frequently due to heat conduction.
However, even in this example, if the welding condition is gradually
decreased before the end of welding, tearing and dropping of metal can
be prevented.
Welding start point (P1) and welding
end point (Pn) must be the same.
Reference Job
NOP
·
MOVL V=500
ARCON AC=210 AVP=100
MOVC V=80
MOVC V=80
MOVC V=80
MOVC V=80
ARCCTE AC=180 AVP=100 DIS=20.0
MOVC V=80
ARCOF AC=160 AVP=80 T=0.30
·
END
Current
Moves to welding start point P1.
Arc starts.
Moves to taught point Pn-1.
Gradually decreases the current from the point
20mm short of the welding end point.
Moves to welding end point Pn.
Arc ends.
Welding condition
gradually decreases.
(Slope Up/Down Func.)
Main condition
210
End condition
180
160
Manipulator
stop (0.3s)
20mm
P1
P2
10-82
Pn-1
Pn
10
Arc Welding Application
10.10 Slope Up/Down Function
DX100
10.10.1
ARCCTS
10.10.1.1
Function
The ARCCTS instruction is used with a move instruction to gradually
change the welding current and voltage during welding.
A gradual change in the current or voltage is specified by an aimed value
and the length of the slope up/down section. The length of the slope up/
down section is set from the move start point (DIS).
If no length is specified, the entire section of the move instruction is used.
10.10.1.2
Syntax
ARCCTS
A
1
WELDn
2
Current output
value (A)
AC=
A
B
3
AV=
Voltage output
value (V)
4
AVP=
Percentage
against the proper
voltage output
value (%)
5
AN3=
Voltage target
value (V)
C
B
6
AN4 =
Voltage target
value (V)
7
AMP=
Weaving halfamplitude
C
END
8
V=
TCP speed
9
ASF=
File number
10-83
9
DIS=
Slope up/down
section length (mm)
10
Arc Welding Application
10.10 Slope Up/Down Function
DX100
10.10.1.3
Explanation

WELD1/WELD2/WELD3/WELD4/WELD5/WELD6/WELD7/WELD8 [1]
Choose one of the following tags.
These tags are enabled only when multiple applications are in use and
two or more applications are set as arc welding application.
When there is only one application, these tags are not displayed.

Tag
Explanation
WELDn
Selects the Power Source
1 to8.
AC = Current output value [2]
This tag can be added or omitted.
Tag
Explanation
AC =
Specifies the target value of
Current
welding current.
output value

Note
Note
Current value: 1 to 999 A
The current output value
can be specified by B/I/D/
B[]/I[]/D[]/LB/LI/LD/LB[]/
LI[]/LD[] variable.
AV = Voltage output value /AVP [3] = Percentage against the proper
voltage output value [4]
Be sure to choose either of the following.
Tag
Explanation
Note
AV =
Specifies the target value of
Voltage
welding voltage.
output value
Voltage value: 0.1 to 50.0 V
The voltage output value
can be specified by B/I/D/
B[ ]/I[ ]/D[ ]/LB/LI/LD/LB[ ]/
LI[ ]/LD[ ] variable.
(Unit: 0.1 V)
AVP =
Percentage
against the
proper
voltage
output value
Percentage: 50 to 150%
The voltage output value
can be specified by B/I/D/
B[ ]/I[ ]/D[ ]/LB/LI/LD/LB[ ]/
LI[ ]/LD[ ] variable.
Specifies the target value of
welding voltage by the
percentage against the proper
output value of welding
voltage.
10-84
10
Arc Welding Application
10.10 Slope Up/Down Function
DX100



AN3 = Voltage target value [5]
This tag can be added or omitted.
Tag
Explanation
Note
AN3 =
Voltage
target value
Specifies the voltage target
value for the analog output 3.
Target value: -14.00 to
+14.00 V
The voltage target value
can be specified by I/LI/I[ ]/
LI[ ] variable.
(Unit: 0.01 V)
AN4 = Voltage target value [6]
This tag can be added or omitted.
Tag
Explanation
Note
AN4 =
Voltage
target value
Specifies the voltage target
value for the analog output 4.
Target value: -14.00 to
+14.00 V
The voltage target value
can be specified by I/LI/I[ ]/
LI[ ] variable.
(Unit: 0.01 V)
DIS = Slope up/down section length [9]
This tag can be added or omitted.
Tag
Explanation
Note
DIS = Slope
up/down
section
length
Specifies the slope up/down
section length where the
current and voltage are
gradually changed.
The length is set as the
distance from the move start
point.
If no length is specified, the
entire section of the move
instruction is used.
Length: 0.1 to 6553.5 mm
The slope up/down section
length can be specified by
B/I/D/B[ ]/I[ ]/D[ ]/LB/LI/LD/
LB[ ]/LI[ ]/LD[ ] variable.
(Unit: 0.1 mm)
<Example>
The current and voltage are gradually changed as the manipulator moves
toward the move end point specified by the move instruction. The aimed
current and voltage values are 150A and 16.0V respectively. The slope
up/down section length is 100mm from the move start point.
ARCCTS
AC=150
Target value of
welding current
MOVL
V=80
10-85
AV=16.0
DIS=100.0
Target value of Slope up/down section length
welding voltage (distance from move start point)
DX100
10
Arc Welding Application
10.10 Slope Up/Down Function
Gradually Decreasing Current or Voltage
Val ue immedi ately before executi on
of move instructi on
ARCCTS target val ue
ARCCTS executed
DIS =xxx
Move secti on specified
by move instructi on
Welding c ontinues
Gradually Increasing Current or Voltage
ARCCTS target val ue
Value im m ediatel y before
ex ec ution of move i nstructi on
ARCCTS executed
DIS=xxx
Move secti on specified
by move instructi on
Welding conti nues
• The ARCCTS or ARCCTE instruction is valid for only one
step.
• If the move section specified by the move instruction is
shorter than the distance specified by the slope up/down
section length (DIS=XXX), the change is performed
equally in the entire section of the move instruction.
NOTE
• If the ARCCTS or ARCCTE instruction specifies the distance as zero (DIS=0.00), the change is performed
equally in the entire section of the move instruction.
• A pair of ARCCTS and ARCCTE instructions can be used
on one move instruction. In this case, the ARCCTS
instruction is executed first, then the ARCCTE instruction
is executed in the remaining part of the move section. If
the remaining part of the move section is 0mm, the value
instantly changes to the value specified in the ARCCTE
instruction.
10-86
DX100
10.10.1.4
10
Arc Welding Application
10.10 Slope Up/Down Function
Registering the ARCCTS Instruction
1. Press [INFORM LIST].
– The instruction list dialog box appears.
IN/OUT
ARCCTE
ARCON
CONTROL
ARCOF
DEVICE
VWELD
MOTION
AWELD
ARITH
ARCSET
WVON
SHIFT
WVOF
OTHER
SAME
ARCCTS
PRIOR
2. Select the ARCCTS instruction.
– The ARCCTS instruction appears in the input buffer line.
EDIT
JOB
UTILITY
DISPLAY
JOB CONTENT
JOB NAME: WORK A
CONTROL GROUP: R1
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
IN/OUT
STEP NO: 0003
ARCCTE
TOOL: 00
CONTROL
ARCON
ARCOF
NOP
MOVJ VJ=80.00
MOVL V=800
ARCON
MOVL V=50
END
VWELD
AWELD
ARCSET
DEVICE
MOTION
ARITH
WVON
SHIFT
WVOF
OTHER
ARCCTS
SAME
PRIOR
ARCCTS AC=200 AVP=100
Main Menu
Simple Menu
! Turn on servo power
3. Press [SELECT] and set the welding condition in the DETAIL EDIT
window.
– The DETAIL EDIT window appears.
ARCCTS AC=200 AVP=100
EDIT
DATA
DISPLAY
UTILITY
DETAIL EDIT
ARCCTS
WELDING CURR
WELDING VOLT
SPEED
ANALOG OUTPUT3
ANALOG OUTPUT4
: AC= 200
: AVP= 100
: UNUSED
: UNUSED
: UNUSED
ARCCTS AC=200 AVP=100
Main Menu
Simple Menu
10-87
! Turn on servo power
DX100
10
Arc Welding Application
10.10 Slope Up/Down Function
(1) Move the cursor to the item to be set and press [SELECT].
(2) Type the welding conditions using the numeric keys and press
[ENTER].
EDIT
DATA
UTILITY
DISPLAY
DEITAL EDIT
ARCCTS
: AC= 134
: AVP= 100
: UNUSED
: UNUSED
: UNUSED
WELDING CURR
WELDING VOLT
SPEED
ANALOG OUTPUT3
ANALOG OUTPUT4
(3) To add the additional items, place the cursor on the item with the
“UNUSED” condition and press [SELECT]. The selection dialog
box appears.
To delete the additional items, line up the cursor with the additional
items and select “UNUSED”.
EDIT
DATA
DISPLAY
UTILITY
DETAIL EDIT
ARCCTS
WELDING CURR
WELDING VOLT
SPEED
ANALOG OUTPUT3
ANALOG OUTPUT4 DATA
: AC=
AC=134
: AVP=
100
UNUSED
: UNUSED
: UNUSED
EDIT
DISPLAY
: UNUSED
UTILITY
AC=
UNUSED
ARCCTS AC=200 AVP=100
Main Menu
Simple Menu
! Turn on servo power
4. Press [ENTER].
– The set contents are displayed in the input buffer line.
EDIT
JOB
DISPLAY
JOB CONTENT
JOB NAME: WORK A
CONTROL GROUP: R1
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
UTILITY
STEP NO: 0003
TOOL: 00
NOP
MOVJ VJ=80.00
MOVL V=800
ARCON
MOVL V=50
END
ARCCTS AC=134 AVP=100
Main Menu
Simple Menu
10-88
! Turn on servo power
DX100
10
Arc Welding Application
10.10 Slope Up/Down Function
5. Press [ENTER].
– The set contents are registered in the job.
EDIT
JOB
DISPLAY
UTILITY
JOB CONTENT
JOB NAME: WORK A
CONTROL GROUP: R1
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
STEP NO: 0003
TOOL: 00
NOP
MOVJ VJ=80.00
MOVL V=800
ARCON
MOVL V=50
ARCCTS AC=134 AVP=100
END
ARCCTS AC=134 AVP=100
Main Menu
Simple Menu
! Turn on servo power
– Press [CANCEL] to return to the JOB CONTENT window when the
set contents are not to be registered.
EDIT
JOB
DISPLAY
JOB CONTENT
JOB NAME: WORK A
CONTROL GROUP: R1
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
UTILITY
STEP NO: 0003
TOOL: 00
NOP
MOVJ VJ=80.00
MOVL V=800
ARCON
MOVL V=50
END
ARCCTS AC=200 AVP=100
Main Menu
Simple Menu
10-89
! Turn on servo power
10
Arc Welding Application
10.10 Slope Up/Down Function
DX100
10.10.2
ARCCTE
10.10.2.1
Function
The ARCCTE instruction is used with a move instruction to gradually
change the welding current and voltage during welding.
A gradual change in the current or voltage is specified by an aimed value
and the length of the slope up/down section. The length of the slope up/
down section is measured from the move end point (DIS).
If no length is specified, the entire section of the move instruction is used.
10.10.2.2
Syntax
ARCCTE
A
1
WELDn
2
Current output
value (A)
AC=
A
B
3
4
AV=
Voltage output
value (V)
AVP=
Percentage
against the proper
voltage output
value (%)
5
AN3=
Voltage target
value (V)
C
B
6
AN4=
Voltage target
value (V)
C
END
9
7
DIS=
Slope up/down
section length (mm)
AEF=
File number
8
10-90
10
Arc Welding Application
10.10 Slope Up/Down Function
DX100
10.10.2.3
Explanation

WELDn [1]
Choose one of the following tags.
These tags are enabled only when multiple applications are in use and
two or more applications are set as arc welding application.
When there is only one application, these tags are not displayed.

Tag
Explanation
WELDn
Selects the Power Source
1 to 8.
AC = Current output value [2]
This tag can be added or omitted.
Tag
Explanation
AC =
Specifies the target value of
Current
welding current.
output value

Note
Note
Current value: 1 to 999 A
The current output value
can be specified by B/I/D/
B[]/I[]/D[]/LB/LI/LD/LB[]/
LI[]/LD[] variable.
AV = Voltage output value /AVP [3] = Percentage against the proper
voltage output value [4]
Be sure to choose either of the following.
Tag
Explanation
Note
AV =
Specifies the target value of
Voltage
welding voltage.
output value
Voltage value: 0.1 to 50.0 V
The voltage output value
can be specified by B/I/D/
B[ ]/I[ ]/D[ ]/LB/LI/LD/LB[ ]/
LI[ ]/LD[ ] variable.
(Unit: 0.1 V)
AVP =
Percentage
against the
proper
voltage
output value
Percentage: 50 to 150%
The voltage output value
can be specified by B/I/D/
B[ ]/I[ ]/D[ ]/LB/LI/LD/LB[ ]/
LI[ ]/LD[ ] variable.
Specifies the target value of
welding voltage by the
percentage against the proper
output value of welding
voltage.
10-91
10
Arc Welding Application
10.10 Slope Up/Down Function
DX100



AN3 = Voltage target value [5]
This tag can be added or omitted.
Tag
Explanation
Note
AN3 =
Voltage
target value
Specifies the voltage target
value for the analog output 3.
Target value: -14.00 to
+14.00 V
The voltage target value
can be specified by I/LI/I[ ]/
LI[ ] variable.
(Unit: 0.01 V)
AN4 = Voltage target value [6]
This tag can be added or omitted.
Tag
Explanation
Note
AN4 =
Voltage
target value
Specifies the voltage target
value for the analog output 4.
Target value: -14.00 to
+14.00 V
The voltage target value
can be specified by I/LI/I[ ]/
LI[ ] variable.
(Unit: 0.01 V)
DIS = Slope up/down section length [7]
This tag can be added or omitted.
Tag
Explanation
Note
DIS = Slope
up/down
section
length
Specifies the slope up/down
section length where the
current and voltage are
gradually changed.
The length is set as the
distance from the move start
point.
If no length is specified, the
entire section of the move
instruction is used.
Length: 0.1 to 6553.5 mm
The slope up/down section
length can be specified by
B/I/D/B[ ]/I[ ]/D[ ]/LB/LI/LD/
LB[ ]/LI[ ]/LD[ ] variable.
(Unit: 0.1 mm)
AEF#
(Arc welding
end
condition
file number)
Specifies the arc welding end
condition file number.
Conditions to end welding are
registered in the arc welding
end condition file.
No. 1 to 1000
The number can be
specified by B/I/D/LB/LI/
LD variable.
<Example>
The current and voltage are gradually changed as the manipulator moves
toward the move end point specified by the move instruction. The aimed
current and voltage values are 150A and 16.0V respectively. The slope
up/down section length is 100mm from the move end point.
ARCCTE
AC=150
Target value of
welding current
MOVL
V=80
10-92
AV=16.0
DIS=100.0
Target value of Slope up/down section length
welding voltage (distance from move end point)
DX100
10
Arc Welding Application
10.10 Slope Up/Down Function
Gradually Decreasing Current or Voltage
Value immediately before execution of move instruction
ARCCTE target value
ARCCTE executed
DIS=xxx
Move secti on specified
by move instructi on
Welding c ontinues
Gradually Increasing Current or Voltage
ARCCTE target val ue
Value immediately before
execution of move instruction
ARCCTE executed
DIS=xxx
Move section specified
by move i nstructi on
Welding conti nues
• The ARCCTS or ARCCTE instruction is valid for only one
step.
• If the move section specified by the move instruction is
shorter than the distance specified by the slope up/down
section length (DIS=XXX), the change is performed
equally in the entire section of the move instruction.
NOTE
• If the ARCCTS or ARCCTE instruction specifies the distance as zero (DIS=0.00), the change is performed
equally in the entire section of the move instruction.
• A pair of ARCCTS and ARCCTE instructions can be used
on one move instruction. In this case, the ARCCTS
instruction is executed first, then the ARCCTE instruction
is executed in the remaining part of the move section. If
the remaining part of the move section is 0mm, the value
instantly changes to the value specified in the ARCCTE
instruction.
10-93
DX100
10.10.2.4
10
Arc Welding Application
10.10 Slope Up/Down Function
Registering the ARCCTE Instruction
1. Press [INFORM LIST].
– The instruction list dialog box appears.
IN/OUT
ARCCTE
ARCON
ARCOF
CONTROL
DEVICE
VWELD
MOTION
AWELD
ARITH
ARCSET
WVON
SHIFT
WVOF
OTHER
SAME
ARCCTS
PRIOR
2. Select the ARCCTE instruction.
– The ARCCTE instruction appears in the input buffer line.
EDIT
JOB
UTILITY
DISPLAY
JOB CONTENT
JOB NAME: WORK A
CONTROL GROUP: R1
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
IN/OUT
STEP NO: 0003
ARCCTE
TOOL: 00
CONTROL
ARCON
ARCOF
NOP
MOVJ VJ=80.00
MOVL V=800
ARCON
MOVL V=50
END
VWELD
AWELD
ARCSET
DEVICE
MOTION
ARITH
WVON
SHIFT
WVOF
OTHER
ARCCTS
SAME
PRIOR
ARCCTE AC=200 AVP=100
Main Menu
Simple Menu
! Turn on servo power
3. Press [SELECT] and set the welding condition in the DETAIL EDIT
window.
– The DETAIL EDIT window appears.
ARCCTE AC=200 AVP=100
EDIT
DATA
DISPLAY
UTILITY
DEITAL EDIT
ARCCTE
WELDING CURR
WELDING VOLT
SPEED
ANALOG OUTPUT3
ANALOG OUTPUT4
: AC= 200
: AVP= 100
: UNUSED
: UNUSED
: UNUSED
ARCCTE AC=200 AVP=100
Main Menu
Simple Menu
10-94
! Turn on servo power
DX100
10
Arc Welding Application
10.10 Slope Up/Down Function
(1) Move the cursor to the item to be set and press [SELECT].
(2) Type the welding conditions using the numeric keys and press
[ENTER].
EDIT
DATA
DISPLAY
UTILITY
DEITAL EDIT
ARCCTE
WELDING CURR
WELDING VOLT
SPEED
ANALOG OUTPUT3
ANALOG OUTPUT4
: AC= 134
: AVP= 100
: UNUSED
: UNUSED
: UNUSED
(3) To add the additional items, place the cursor on the item with the
“UNUSED” condition and press [SELECT]. The selection dialog
box appears.
To delete the additional items, line up the cursor with the additional
items and select “UNUSED”.
EDIT
DATA
DISPLAY
UTILITY
DETAIL EDIT
ARCCTE
: AC=
AC=134
: AVP=
100
UNUSED
: UNUSED
: UNUSED
: UNUSED
WELDING CURR
WELDING VOLT
SPEED
ANALOG OUTPUT3
ANALOG OUTPUT4
ARCCTE AC=200 AVP=100
Main Menu
Simple Menu
! Turn on servo power
4. Press [ENTER].
– The set contents are displayed in the input buffer line.
EDIT
JOB
DISPLAY
JOB CONTENT
JOB NAME: WORK A
CONTROL GROUP: R1
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
UTILITY
STEP NO: 0003
TOOL: 00
NOP
MOVJ VJ=80.00
MOVL V=800
ARCON
MOVL V=50
END
ARCCTE AC=134 AVP=100
Main Menu
Simple Menu
10-95
! Turn on servo power
DX100
10
Arc Welding Application
10.10 Slope Up/Down Function
5. Press [ENTER].
– The set contents are registered in the job.
EDIT
JOB
DISPLAY
UTILITY
JOB CONTENT
JOB NAME: WORK A
CONTROL GROUP: R1
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
STEP NO: 0003
TOOL: 00
NOP
MOVJ VJ=80.00
MOVL V=800
ARCON
MOVL V=50
ARCCTE AC=134 AVP=100
END
ARCCTE AC=134 AVP=100
Main Menu
Simple Menu
! Turn on servo power
– Press [CANCEL] to return to the JOB CONTENT window when the
set contents are not to be registered.
EDIT
JOB
DISPLAY
JOB CONTENT
JOB NAME: WORK A
CONTROL GROUP: R1
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
UTILITY
STEP NO: 0003
TOOL: 00
NOP
MOVJ VJ=80.00
MOVL V=800
ARCON
MOVL V=50
END
ARCCTE AC=200 AVP=100
Main Menu
Simple Menu
10-96
! Turn on servo power
10
Arc Welding Application
10.11 Enhanced Welding Condition File Function
DX100
10.11
Enhanced Welding Condition File Function
The enhanced welding condition file function improves the method of
setting the welding condition file. This function can be used as follows:
• Analog output to the Power Source increases by 2 channels. Therefore, Power Sources with polarity ratio control can be used.
When the type of the file changes, the welding start/end
condition file is initialized.
NOTE
To load a welding condition file that has been saved on an
external memory device, files that are different type from
those being used cannot be loaded. Load files of the same
type.
10-97
10
Arc Welding Application
10.11 Enhanced Welding Condition File Function
DX100
10.11.1
Function Setting
To change the type of the welding condition file, set as described below.
SUPPLEMENT
Change the setting of the welding condition files in the management mode.
In the operation mode or editing mode, the setting status can
only be referred to.
1. While pressing [MAIN MENU], turn ON the power. Then change the
security mode to the management mode.
2. Select {SYSTEM} from the main menu and select {SETUP}.
SECURITY
SYSTEM
SETUP
FILE
VERSION
TOOL
SECURITY
CF
DISPLAY SETUP
Aa
Main Menu
Simple Menu
! Turn on servo power
– The SETUP window appears.
EDIT
DATA
DISPLAY
UTILITY
SETUP
LANGUAGE
CONTROL GROUP
APPLICATION
IO MODULE
OPTION BOARD
CMOS MEMORY
DATE/TIME
OPTION FUNCTION
Main Menu
Simple Menu
! Turn on servo power
3. Select “OPTION FUNCTION”.
– The OPTION FUNCTION window appears.
EDIT
DATA
DISPLAY
UTILITY
OPTION FUNCTION
ARC WELDING
Main Menu
Simple Menu
10-98
STANDARD
! Turn on servo power
DX100
10
Arc Welding Application
10.11 Enhanced Welding Condition File Function
4. Select “ARC WELDING”, then select either “STANDARD” or
“ENHANCED”.
– The selection dialog box appears.
EDIT
DATA
DISPLAY
UTILITY
OPTION FUNCTION
ARC WELDING
Main Menu
STANDARD
ENHANCED
Simple Menu
! Turn on servo power
– The confirmation dialog box appears. Selecting “YES” changes the
file type and initializes the related files (welding start/end condition
files).
EDIT
DATA
DISPLAY
UTILITY
OPTION FUNCTION
ARC WELDING
STANDARD
Modify?
YES
Main Menu
Simple Menu
NO
! Turn on servo power
– Selecting “NO” does not change the file type or initialize the related
files.
5. Turn ON the power supply again.
10-99
10
Arc Welding Application
10.12 Weaving Condition File
DX100
10.12
10.12.1
Weaving Condition File
Weaving Basic Coordinate System
Weaving is performed based on the following coordinate system. This
coordinate system is automatically generated when weaving is executed.
Wall direction
Direction of travel
Horizontal direction
Weaving Basic Coordinate System
Wall Direction:
Z-direction of the robot axis
Horizontal Direction:
The direction to the approach point from the wall
Direction of Travel:
The direction in which the manipulator moves from the
weaving start point to the end point
SUPPLEMENT
The approach point is a point indicated by a step immediately before the step where weaving starts.
Z-axis
Wall direction
Approach point
Horizontal
direction
NOTE
Depending on the mounting status and shape of the workpiece, a definition of the above coordinate system may not
be sufficient to generate a weaving pattern. In this case,
register the reference point REFP 1 or REFP 2.
For details, refer to chapter 10.12.4.2
tion Data" at page 10-117.
10-100
"Editing the Condi-
DX100
10.12.1.1
10
Arc Welding Application
10.12 Weaving Condition File
Cases that Require the Registration of Reference Points
The registration of the reference point REFP1 or REFP2 is not usually
required. They are required only with a special workpiece condition, etc.
The REFP1, that defines the wall direction, is a point on the wall surface
or its expansion plane. The REFP2, which defines the horizontal
direction, is a point at the right or left side of the wall.
REFP1
REFP2
On the wall surface or
its expansion plane
At the right or left side of the wall
Wall
Wall
REFP2
REFP1
Wall direction
Wall direction
REFP2
REFP1
Direction
of travel
Direction
of travel
Horizontal
direction
For information on registering REFP, refer to
chapter 3.2.3.2 "Registering Reference Point Instructions"
at page 3-18.
SUPPLEMENT
< Example 1 > REFP1 is registered because the wall direction is not
parallel to the Z-axis of the robot coordinates.
Z-axis
Example
Wall direction
0003 MOVL V=120
0004 WVON WEV#(1)
0005 REFP 1
0006 MOVL V=50
0007 WVOF
REFP1
< Example 2 > REFP2 is registered because the approach point is at
another side of the wall.
Example
Wall
Approach point
Approach point
REFP2
10-101
0009 MOVJ VJ=25.00
0010 MOVL V=120
0011 WVON WEV#(1)
0012 REFP 2
0013 MOVL V=50
0014 WVOF
10
Arc Welding Application
10.12 Weaving Condition File
DX100
10.12.2
10.12.2.1
WVON
Function
This is the weaving start operation.
10.12.2.2
Syntax
The tag to be used varies according to the control group of job.
WVON
A
1
RBn
4
FREQ=
Weaving condition
file number
2
WEV#
(
3
AMP=
Weaving halfamplitude (mm)
A
)
B
Weaving
frequency
B
5
C
ANGL=
Weaving angle
(degree)
END
6
Starting direction
of weaving
DIR=
Table 10-1: Job Type and Control Group
Type
Control Group of Job
Note
Independent
Job with one manipulator (Standard)
Coordinated
Job with two manipulators
Option
Table 10-2: Tag Usage Limitation
Tag
Control Group of Job
1
2
RB1
X
O
RB2
X
O
RB3
X
O
WEV#( )
O
O
AMP=
O
O
FREQ=
O
O
ANGL=
O
O
DIR=
O
O
O: Available
X: Not available
10-102
C
Note
10
Arc Welding Application
10.12 Weaving Condition File
DX100
10.12.2.3
Explanation


RBn [1]
Be sure to choose one of the following tags.
Tag
Explanation
RBn
Specifies the weaving motion
of robot 1 to 8.
Note
WEV# (Weaving condition file number)/AMP [2] = Weaving halfamplitude [3]
Be sure to choose one of the following tags.
Tag
Explanation
Note
WEV#
(Weaving
condition
file number)
Specifies the weaving
condition file number.
Conditions for the weaving
motion are registered in the
weaving condition file.
No. 1 to 16
The number can be
specified by B/I/D/LB/LI/
LD variable.
AMP =
Weaving
halfamplitude
Specifies the half-amplitude of Half-amplitude: 0.1 to 99.9
weaving.
mm
The half-amplitude can be
specified by B/B[ ]/LB/LB[
]/I/I[ ]/LI/LI[ ]/D/D[ ]/LD/LD[
] variable.
(Unit: 0.1 mm)
10-103
10
Arc Welding Application
10.12 Weaving Condition File
DX100



FREQ = Weaving frequency [4]
Only when “AMP = Weaving half-amplitude” is selected in the above
"WEV# (Weaving condition file number)/AMP [2] = Weaving halfamplitude [3]" at page 10-103, be sure to add the following tag.
Tag
Explanation
Note
FREQ =
Weaving
frequency
Specifies the weaving
frequency.
Frequency: 1.0 to 5.0 Hz
The frequency can be
specified by B/I/D/B[ ]/I[ ]/
D[ ]/LB/LI/LD/LB[ ]/LI[ ]/LD[
] variable.
(Unit: 0.1 Hz)
ANGL = Weaving angle [5]
Only when “AMP = Weaving half-amplitude” is selected in the above
"WEV# (Weaving condition file number)/AMP [2] = Weaving halfamplitude [3]" at page 10-103, this tag is added or omitted after "FREQ =
Weaving frequency [4]" at page 10-104
Tag
Explanation
Note
ANGL =
Weaving
angle
Specifies the weaving angle.
Angle: 0.1 to 180.0 degree
The degree can be
specified by B/I/D/B[ ]/I[ ]/D[
]/LB/LI/LD/LB[ ]/LI[ ]/LD[ ]
variable.
(Unit: 0.1 )
DIR = Starting direction of weaving [6]
This tag can be added or omitted.
Tag
Explanation
Note
DIR =
Starting
direction of
weaving
Specifies the starting direction
of weaving.
Direction: 0 to 1
0: Forward
1: Backward
The direction can be
specified by B/I/D/B[]/I[]/
D[]/LB/LI/LD/LB[]/LI[]/LD[]
variable.
10-104
10
Arc Welding Application
10.12 Weaving Condition File
DX100
Setting conditions for weaving
• Weaving half-amplitude
Specifies the amplitude size of weaving motion.
Half-amplitude
• Weaving angle
Specifies the angle of weaving motion.
Wall direction
Wall direction
Angle: 0.1 to 180.0°
Vertical/horizontal distance:
1.0 to 25.0mm
Angle
Vertical
distance
Vertical
distance
Horizontal direction
Horizontal
distance
Horizontal direction
Horizontal
distance
MODE : TRI A NGLE , L- TY P E
M OD E: TR IAN GLE, L- TY P E
• Starting direction of weaving
Specifies the starting direction of weaving motion.
Wall direction
Wall direction
SUPPLEMENT
Forward

SINGLE



Backward




Horizontal
direction
Wall direction
Wall direction
Forward
TRIA NGLE



Backward



Horizontal
direction
Wall direction




Horizontal
direction
Wall direction
Forward
L-TY PE
Horizontal
direction
Backward

Horizontal
direction
10-105



Horizontal
direction
DX100
10.12.2.4
10
Arc Welding Application
10.12 Weaving Condition File
Registering the WVON instruction
This is the instruction to start the weaving operation.
1. Move the cursor to the address area.
2. Press [INFORM LIST].
– The instruction list dialog box appears.
IN/OUT
CONTROL
DEVICE
MOTION
ARITH
SHIFT
OTHER
SAME
PRIOR
3. Select “DEVICE”.
IN/OUT
ARCON
ARCCTE
ARCOF
CONTROL
DEVICE
VWELD
MOTION
AWELD
ARITH
ARCSET
WVON
SHIFT
WVOF
OTHER
SAME
ARCCTS
PRIOR
4. Select the WVON instruction.
– The “WVON” instruction appears in the input buffer line.
JOB
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
JOB CONTENT
JOB NAME: WORK A
CONTROL GROUP: R1
0000 NOP
0001 MOVJ VJ=80.00
0002 MOVL V=800
0003 ARCON
0004 MOVL V=50
0005 MOVL V=50
0006 ARCOF
0007 END
IN/OUT
STEP NO: 0003
ARCCTE
CONTROL
TOOL: 00
ARCON
ARCOF
VWELD
AWELD
ARCSET
DEVICE
MOTION
ARITH
WVON
SHIFT
WVOF
OTHER
ARCCTS
SAME
PRIOR
WVON WEV#(1)
Main Menu
Simple Menu
!Turn on servo power
5. Press [SELECT], and set the file number in the DETAIL EDIT window.
– Select the file number (1 to 16).
(1) Move the cursor to the file number and press [SELECT].
10-106
DX100
10
Arc Welding Application
10.12 Weaving Condition File
(2) Input the file number using the numeric keys and press [ENTER].
WVON WEV#(1)
DATA
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
DETAIL EDIT
WVON
: WEV#() 1
: WEV#(1)
: UNUSED
WEAVING FILE
SET METHOD
DIRECTION
WVON WEV#(1)
Main Menu
Simple Menu
!Turn on servo power
6. Press [ENTER].
– The set contents are displayed in the input buffer line.
7. Press [ENTER] again.
– The set contents are registered in the job.
JOB
EDIT
DISPLAY
JOB CONTENT
JOB NAME: WORK A
CONTROL GROUP: R1
0000 NOP
0001 MOVJ VJ=80.00
0002 MOVL V=800
0003 ARCON
0004 WVON WEV#(1)
0005 MOVL V=50
0006 MOVL V=50
0007 ARCOF
0008 END
UTILITY
IN/OUT
ARCON
ARCOF
VWELD
AWELD
ARCSET
ARCCTE
CONTROL
DEVICE
MOTION
ARITH
WVON
SHIFT
WVOF
OTHER
ARCCTS
SAME
PRIOR
WVON WEV#(1)
Main Menu
Simple Menu
!Turn on servo power
– When the set contents are not to be registered, press [CANCEL] to
return to the JOB CONTENT window.
10-107
10
Arc Welding Application
10.12 Weaving Condition File
DX100
10.12.3
10.12.3.1
WVOF Instruction
Function
This is the weaving end instruction.
10.12.3.2
Syntax
The control group of job limits the tag usage.
WVOF
END
1
RBn
Table 10-3: Job Type and Control Group
Type
Control Group of Job
Independent
Job with one manipulator (Standard)
Note
Coordinated
Job with two manipulators
Option
Table 10-4: Tag Usage Limitation
Tag
Control Group of Job
1
2
RB1
X
O
RB2
X
O
RB3
X
O
RB4
X
O
O: Available
X: Not available
10-108
Note
10
Arc Welding Application
10.12 Weaving Condition File
DX100
10.12.3.3
Explanation

RB1/RB2/RB3/RB4/RB5/RB6/RB7/RB8 [1]
Be sure to choose one of the following tags.
Tag
Explanation
RBn
Specifies the weaving motion
of robot 1 to 8.
Note
<Example>
NOP
MOVJ VJ=50.00
MOVL V=220
MOVL V=200
WVON WEV#(2)
ARCON AC=220 AVP=100 T=0.50
MOVL V=138
ARCOF AC=160 AVP=90 T=0.50
WVOF
MOVL V=200
MOVJ VJ=50.00
END
10-109
···
···
···
···
···
···
···
···
···
···
···
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Weaving start
Welding start
Step 4
Welding end
Weaving end
Step 5
Step 6
DX100
10.12.3.4
10
Arc Welding Application
10.12 Weaving Condition File
Registering WVOF instruction
This is the instruction to end the weaving operation.
1. Move the cursor to the address area.
2. Press [INFORM LIST].
– The instruction list dialog box appears.
IN/OUT
CONTROL
DEVICE
MOTION
ARITH
SHIFT
OTHER
SAME
PRIOR
3. Select “DEVICE”.
IN/OUT
ARCON
ARCCTE
ARCOF
CONTROL
DEVICE
VWELD
MOTION
AWELD
ARITH
ARCSET
WVON
SHIFT
WVOF
OTHER
SAME
ARCCTS
PRIOR
4. Select the “WVOF” instruction.
JOB
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
JOB CONTENT
JOB NAME: WORK A
CONTROL GROUP: R1
0000 NOP
0001 MOVJ VJ=80.00
0002 MOVL V=800
0003 ARCON
0004 MOVL V=50
0005 MOVL V=50
0006 ARCOF
0007 END
IN/OUT
ARCON
ARCCTE
ARCOF
CONTROL
DEVICE
VWELD
MOTION
AWELD
ARITH
ARCSET
WVON
SHIFT
WVOF
OTHER
SAME
ARCCTS
PRIOR
WVOF
Main Menu
Simple Menu
!Turn on servo power
5. Press [ENTER].
– The set contents are registered in the job.
JOB
EDIT
DISPLAY
JOB CONTENT
JOB NAME: WORK A
CONTROL GROUP: R1
0000 NOP
0001 MOVJ VJ=80.00
0002 MOVL V=800
0003 ARCON
0004 WVON WEV#(1)
0005 MOVL V=50
0006 MOVL V=50
0007 ARCOF
0008 END
UTILITY
IN/OUT
ARCON
ARCOF
VWELD
AWELD
ARCSET
ARCCTE
CONTROL
DEVICE
MOTION
ARITH
WVON
SHIFT
WVOF
OTHER
ARCCTS
SAME
PRIOR
WVOF
Main Menu
Simple Menu
10-110
!Turn on servo power
DX100
10.12.4
10
Arc Welding Application
10.12 Weaving Condition File
WEAVING CONDITION Window
DATA
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
WEAVING CONDITION
COND NO. 1/255
MODE
: SINGLE
SMOOTH
: ON
SPEED TYPE
: MOVING TIME
FREQUENCY
: 3.5 Hz
<PATTERN>
AMPLITUDE
: 2.000 mm
VERTICAL
: 10.000 mm
HORIZONTAL
: 10.000 mm
ANGLE
: 45.00 deg.
TRAVEL ANGLE
: 5.00 deg.
<TIMER MODE>
POINT1
: WEAV STOP
POINT2
: WEAV STOP
POINT3
: WEAV STOP
POINT4
: WEAV STOP
<MOTION TIME>
SECTION1
: 0.1 sec
SECTION2
: 0.1 sec
SECTION3
: 0.1 sec
SECTION4
: 0.1 sec
<STOP TIMER>
POINT1
: 0.0 sec
POINT2
: 0.0 sec
POINT3
: 0.0 sec
POINT4
: 0.0 sec
<HOVER WEAVING COND.>
SET
: OFF
TIMER
: 0.0 sec
INPUT SIGNAL
: IN#000
DIRECT PAGE
Main Menu
Simple Menu
!Turn on servo power
A. COND NO. (1 to 255)
Displays a weaving condition file number between 1 and 255.
B. MODE, C. SMOOTH
There are three weaving modes: single, triangle, and L-type. Each
mode can be specified with or without smoothing.
0:With smoothing
Single
Triangle
Weaving Modes
L-type
1:Without smoothing
Smoothing
D. SPEED TYPE (FREQUENCY, MOTION TIME)
Specifies the setting type of the weaving motion speed.
Two types are available: setting by frequency and setting by the weaving time in each weaving section.
10-111
DX100
10
Arc Welding Application
10.12 Weaving Condition File
E. FREQUENCY
Specifies the weaving frequency if “SPEED TYPE” is set to “FREQUENCY”. Note that the maximum frequency is determined by the
amplitude as illustrated in the graph below. Specify a frequency within
the allowable range.
A m pl i tude
(mm)
60
50
40
30
20
10
0
1
2
3
4
5
Frequency(Hz)
Maxi mum Frequencies for Di fferent Ampli tudes
F. PATTERN
• AMPLITUDE
Specifies the amplitude size at weaving when “MODE” is set to “SINGLE”.
Half-amplitude
• VERTICAL, HORIZONTAL
If “MODE” is set to “TRIANGLE” or “L-TYPE”, the data for the triangle must be set to define the weaving pattern.
Wall direction
Vertical/horizontal distance:
1.0 to 25.0mm
Vertical
distance
Horizontal direction
Horizontal
distance
MODE : TRI A NGLE , L- TY P E
10-112
DX100
10
Arc Welding Application
10.12 Weaving Condition File
• ANGLE
Specifies the angle of weaving motion.
Wall direction
Angle : 0.1 to 180.0°
Angle
Horizontal
direction
M O D E : S I N G LE
Wall direction
Angle: 0.1 to 180.0°
Angle
Vertical
distance
Horizontal direction
Horizontal
distance
M OD E: T R I AN GLE, L-T YPE
• TRAVEL ANGLE
Specifies the travel angle of weaving motion.
Direction of travel
View A
Travel angle
+
0
Travel angle
-
View A
10-113
10
Arc Welding Application
10.12 Weaving Condition File
DX100
G. TIMER (MODE)
As shown below, a single weaving cycle is divided into three or four sections. The timer mode can be specified for each section.
Wall direction
Wall direction
Wall direction



S i ngl e




Horizontal
direction




Horizontal
direction
T ri a n g l e
Horizontal
direction
L-type
Set one of the following timer modes:
WEAV STOP : Weaving stops but manipulator moves.
ROBOT STOP : Manipulator stops.
WEAV STOP: Weaving stops but manipulator moves.
ROBOT STOP: Manipulator pauses.
H. MOTION TIME
If “SPEED TYPE” is set to “MOTION TIME”, the weaving time specified
here determines the moving speed in each of the weaving sections
(explained in “TIMER (MODE)” above).
I. STOP TIMER
Specifies the timer to determine weaving stop or manipulator stop for
each section (explained in “TIMER (MODE)” above).
10-114
DX100
10
Arc Welding Application
10.12 Weaving Condition File
J. HOVER WEAVING COND. (option)
• SET (ON/OFF)
Specifies whether hover weaving is used or not.
• TIMER
Finishes hover weaving when the time specified here ends.
• INPUT SIGNAL
Finishes hover weaving when the input signal specified here is input.
Reference Job
NOP
MOVJ VJ=10.00
MOVJ VJ=25.00
REFP 3
ARCON ASF#(1)
WVON WEV#(1)
MOVL V=60
Welding start point.
Reference point for defining the direction of travel.
*Teaching by interpolation instruction, not by joint
interpolation.
The same point with the welding start point.
WVOF
ARCOF
MOVJ VJ=25.00
MOVJ VJ=25.00
END
NOTE
In hover weaving, the start and end points are the same.
Therefore, the weaving direction cannot be determined.
For this reason, the user needs to register a reference point
(REFP 3) to define the direction of travel.
Wall direction
REFP 3
Direction of Travel
Weaving start point
Weaving end point
Horizontal direction
Hover W eaving
Wall Direction:
Robot axis Z+ direction
Horizontal Direction:
Direction from the wall to approach point
Direction of Travel:
Direction from weaving start point to REFP3
NOTE
In hover weaving, the start and end points are the same.
Therefore, the arc retry function and arc restart function are
not available.
10-115
DX100
10.12.4.1
10
Arc Welding Application
10.12 Weaving Condition File
Displaying a Weaving File
1. Select {ARC WELDING} under the main menu.
JOB
EDIT
UTILITY
DISPLAY
PARAMETER
JOB
DOUT
MOVE
END
ARC START COND.
ARC WELDING
ARC END COND.
VARIABLE
B001
ARC AUX COND.
IN/OUT
In
Out
POWER SOURCE
COND.
ROBOT
ARC WELD DIAG.
SYSTEM INFO
WEAVING
Main Menu
Simple Menu
Set tool mass data
2. Select {WEAVING}.
DATA
EDIT
UTILITY
DISPLAY
WEAVING CONDITION
COND NO. 1/255
MODE
SMOOTH
SPEED TYPE
FREQUENCY
<PATTERN>
AMPLITUDE
VERTICAL
HORIZONTAL
ANGLE
TRAVEL ANGLE
<TIMER MODE>
POINT1
POINT2
POINT3
: SINGLE
: ON
: FREQUENCY
: 3.5 Hz
: 2.000 mm
: 10.000 mm
: 10.000 mm
: 45.00 deg.
:
5.00 deg.
: WEAV STOP
: WEAV STOP
: WEAV STOP
DIRECT PAGE
Main Menu
Simple Menu
!Turn on servo power
3. Display the desired file number.
GO BACK
(1) The desired file can be called up by using the page key
GO BACK
(2) Press the page key
PAGE
to call the next file.
GO BACK
(3) Press [SHIFT]+ page key
10-116
PAGE
to call the previous file.
PAGE
.
DX100
10.12.4.2
10
Arc Welding Application
10.12 Weaving Condition File
Editing the Condition Data
1. Select the item to be edited.
DATA
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
WEAVING CONDITION
COND NO. 1/255
MODE
SMOOTH
SPEED TYPE
FREQUENCY
<PATTERN>
AMPLITUDE
VERTICAL
HORIZONTAL
ANGLE
TRAVEL ANGLE
<TIMER MODE>
POINT1
POINT2
POINT3
Main Menu
: SINGLE
: ON
: FREQUENCY
: 3.5 Hz
: 2.000 mm
: 10.000 mm
: 10.000 mm
: 45.00 deg.
: 5.00 deg.
: WEAV STOP
: WEAV STOP
: WEAV STOP
Simple Menu
!Turn on servo power
2. Input the value using the numeric keys.
DATA
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
WEAVING CONDITION
COND NO. 1/255
MODE
SMOOTH
SPEED TYPE
FREQUENCY
<PATTERN>
AMPLITUDE
VERTICAL
HORIZONTAL
ANGLE
TRAVEL ANGLE
<TIMER MODE>
POINT1
POINT2
POINT3
Main Menu
Simple Menu
10-117
: SINGLE
: ON
: FREQUENCY
: 5.0 Hz
: 2.000 mm
: 10.000 mm
: 10.000 mm
: 45.00 deg.
: 5.00 deg.
: WEAV STOP
: WEAV STOP
: WEAV STOP
!Turn on servo power
DX100
10.12.5
10
Arc Welding Application
10.12 Weaving Condition File
Prohibiting Weaving
If the weaving instruction is registered during the “CHECK” operation in
the play mode or “TEST RUN” or [FWD] key operation in the teach mode,
weaving is performed as well as other move instructions.
However, in the cases when weaving should not be performed because
the manipulator collides with a workpiece, etc., follow the procedure below
to prohibit weaving.
10.12.5.1
Method to Prohibit Weaving During a “CHECK” operation
1. Press [AREA]
on the PLAYBACK window.
AREA
2. Select {UTILITY}.
UTILITY
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
SETUP SPECIAL
RUN
PARALLEL SHIFT
JOB
MIRROR SHIFT
PAM
3. Select {SETUP SPECIAL RUN}.
– The SPECIAL PLAY window appears.
DATA
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
SPECIAL PLAY
LOW SPEED START
SPEED LIMIT
DRY-RUN SPEED
MACHINE LOCK
CHECK-RUN
WEAV PROHIBIT IN CHK-RUN
: INVALID
: INVALID
: INVALID
: INVALID
: INVALID
: INVALID
COMPLETE
Main Menu
Simple Menu
!Turn on servo power
4. Select “WEAV PROHIBIT IN CHK-RUN”.
– Each time [SELECT] is pressed, “VALID” and “INVALID” alternate.
DATA
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
SPECIAL PLAY
LOW SPEED START
SPEED LIMIT
DRY-RUN SPEED
MACHINE LOCK
CHECK-RUN
WEAV PROHIBIT IN CHK-RUN
: INVALID
: INVALID
: INVALID
: INVALID
: INVALID
: VALID
COMPLETE
Main Menu
Simple Menu
10-118
!Turn on servo power
DX100
10.12.5.2
10
Arc Welding Application
10.12 Weaving Condition File
Method to Prohibit Weaving During the “TEST RUN” or FWD Operation
1. Press [AREA]
mode.
AREA
on the JOB CONTENT window in the TEACH
2. Select {UTILITY}.
UTILITY
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
SETUP SPECIAL
RUN
PARALLEL SHIFT
JOB
MIRROR SHIFT
PAM
3. Select {SETUP SPECIAL RUN}.
– The SPECIAL TEACH window appears.
DATA
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
SPECIAL TEACH
WEAV PROHIBIT IN TEST RUN/NEXT
: INVALID
COMPLETE
Main Menu
Simple Menu
!Turn on servo power
4. Select “WEAV PROHIBIT IN TEST RUN/NEXT”.
DATA
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
SPECIAL TEACH
WEAV PROHIBIT IN TEST RUN/NEXT
Main Menu
Simple Menu
10-119
: VALID
!Turn on servo power
DX100
10
Arc Welding Application
10.12 Weaving Condition File
10.12.5.3
Method to Prohibit Weaving by Means of a System Input Signal
The system input signal 40047 is used.
The system input signal can prohibit weaving at any time during a play
operation, regardless of whether or not it is a check operation.
10-120
10
Arc Welding Application
10.13 Changing Welding Conditions During Playback
DX100
10.13
10.13.1
Changing Welding Conditions During Playback
ARC COND ADJUSTMENT Window
While the ARC COND ADJUSTMENT window is displayed in the play
mode, the welding current and voltage can be changed using the function
keys.
The arc welding performance during playback changes with the welding
current and voltage. The adjusted data of the current and voltage values
can be reflected in the associated instructions or welding condition files.
DATA
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
ARC COND ADJUSTMENT
CURR(A)
VOLT(%)
: 200 INST : ARCON
: 100 INST : ARCON
DATA
: No change data
Main Menu
Simple Menu
! Turn on servo power
A. CURR (A)/VOLT (%)
The welding current value and welding voltage value are displayed.
B. DATA (Change data or No change data)
Specifies whether or not to rewrite the data of condition file or additional
item.
The data are rewritten when the execution of the instruction which
includes the changed condition data ends.
C. INST
The last instruction that sets the welding current or voltage is displayed.
The instruction includes the following:
• ARCON
• ARCSET
NOTE
Changing the welding conditions during playback is enabled
only when the command condition is analog type.
10-121
10
Arc Welding Application
10.13 Changing Welding Conditions During Playback
DX100
10.13.1.1
Displaying the ARC COND ADJUSTMENT Window
1. Press [AREA] on the PLAYBACK window.
2. Select {UTILITY}.
3. Select {WELD COND. ADJUST.}.

Changing the Welding Conditions
1. Line up the cursor with the current or voltage condition to be adjusted.
– The current and voltage can be independently changed.
DATA
EDIT
UTILITY
DISPLAY
ARC COND ADJUSTMENT
CURR(A)
VOLT(%)
DATA
: 200 INST : ARCON
: 100 INST : ARCON
EDIT
UTILITY
DISPLAY
ARC COND ADJUSTMENT
CURR(A)
VOLT(%)
: 200 INST : ARCON
: 100 INST : ARCON
DATA
: No change data
Main Menu
Simple Menu
! Turn on servo power
2. Select {WELD COND. ADJUST.}.
– Press the key [CUR/VOL ] to increase the welding current and the
welding voltage.
– Press the key [CUR/VOL] to decrease the welding current and the
welding voltage.
– Each time the key is pressed, the current value changes in
increments of 1A, and the voltage value changes in increments of
1% or 0.1V.
3
FULL
OPEN
CUR/VCL
-
SHORT
OPEN
CUR/VCL
10-122
10
Arc Welding Application
10.13 Changing Welding Conditions During Playback
DX100

Editing “DATA”
1. Select “DATA”.
– Each time [SELECT] is pressed, the setting alternates between “No
change data” and “Change data”.
DATA
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
ARC COND ADJUSTMENT
CURR(A)
VOLT(%)
: 200 INST : ARCON
: 100 INST : ARCON
DATA
: No change data
SELECT
DATA
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
ARC COND ADJUSTMENT
CURR(A)
VOLT(%)
: 200 INST : ARCON
: 100 INST : ARCON
DATA
: Change data
Main Menu
NOTE
Simple Menu
! Turn on servo power
Even if control jumps from one job to another job, rewriting
of the arc condition for the former job is performed.
10-123
10
Arc Welding Application
10.13 Changing Welding Conditions During Playback
DX100
10.13.2
Notes on Modification of Welding Conditions
10.13.2.1
When Condition Data cannot be Modified
In the following cases, the window returns to the previous window of the
ARC COND ADJUSTMENT window. Even if the function keys are
pressed, current and voltage cannot be modified.
• When the mode is switched (to the teach mode, etc).
• When the emergency stop is activated.
The maximum current and voltage values are determined
according to the voltage and current characteristics of the
Power Source.
< Example >
NOTE
When using a Power Source with the current characteristics
as shown in the following table:
When the data points are interpolated on the graph, it can
be observed that the maximum reference value (14.00V) is
reached when the welding current specified by the ARCON
instruction is 395 A. This becomes the maximum value.
Fig. 10-14: Welding Current Output Characteristics
Measured value
(A)
400
300
200
100
0
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
Max
16 (V)
Reference
value
10-124
Reference
Value
Measured
Value
(V)
(A)
1.80
4.40
6.40
8.30
10.50
0
0
0
110
165
220
265
315
0
0
0
DX100
10.13.2.2
10
Arc Welding Application
10.13 Changing Welding Conditions During Playback
ARCON Instruction
The ARCON instruction without an additional item is not subject to arc
condition rewriting.
• ARCON ASF#(1)
: Current and voltage values can be
rewritten.
• ARCON AC=220 AVP=100: Current and voltage values can be
rewritten.
• ARCON
10.13.2.3
: Conditions cannot be rewritten.
ARCOF Instruction
The conditions of the ARCOF instruction cannot be rewritten.
10.13.2.4
ARCCTS and ARCCTE Instructions
The arc condition adjustment operation is invalid while the slope up/down
instruction ARCCTS or ARCCTE is executed.
Even if “Change data” is set on the ARC COND ADJUSTMENT window,
rewriting cannot be done after the ARCCTS or ARCCTE instruction.
:
ARCON
ASF#(1)
ARCCTE AC=150
No Rewriting
AVP=100
MOVL
ARCSET AC=200
MOVL
:
SUPPLEMENT
Refer to chapter 10.8.1 "Arc Auxiliary Condition File" at
page 10-80 for details regarding the ARCCTS and ARCCTE
instructions.
10-125
10
Arc Welding Application
10.14 Displaying Welding Alarm History
DX100
10.14
Displaying Welding Alarm History
The historical records of welding-related alarms can be viewed on the
user alarm (system section) window.
To view the detailed information about alarm occurrence, use the alarm
detailed window.
10.14.1
Alarm History Windows
There are 5 types of alarm history windows :
• MAJOR ALARM
• MINOR ALARM
• USER ALARM (SYSTEM)
• USER ALARM (USER)
• OFF-LINE ALARM
In each window, the alarm code, occurrence date, time, and detailed
information are displayed.
1. Select {SYSTEM INFO} under the main menu.
– The sub-menu for the system information appears.
JOB
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
FD/PC CARD
JOB
DOUT
MOVE
END
CF
ARC WELDING
PARAMETER
VERSION
VARIABLE
B001
MONITORING TIME
IN/OUT
In
Out
ALARM HISTORY
ROBOT
IO MSG HISTORY
SYSTEM INFO
SECURITY
Main Menu
Simple Menu
Set tool mass data
2. Select {ALARM HISTORY}.
– The alarm history window appears.
DATA
EDIT
DISPLAY
MAJOR ALARM
CODE
DATE
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
UTILITY
CLOCK
1030 1998/05/12 12:00
0060 1998/06/15 15:25
Memory error (Parameter file)
[5]
JOB: TEST0001 Line: 0010 STEP: 010
Main Menu
Simple Menu
10-126
!Turn on servo power
DX100
10
Arc Welding Application
10.14 Displaying Welding Alarm History
GO BACK
3. Using the page key
to change the window.
PAGE
GO BACK
– Each time the page key
PAGE
is pressed, the window alternates
between “MAJOR ALARM”, “MINOR ALARM”, “USER ALARM
(SYSTEM)”, “USER ALARM (USER)”, and “OFF-LINE ALARM”.
DATA
EDIT
DISPLAY
USER ALARM (USER)
CODE
DATE
UTILITY
CLOCK
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
Main Menu
Simple Menu
10-127
!Turn on servo power
10
Arc Welding Application
10.15 Arc Welding Management and Maintenance
DX100
10.15
10.15.1
Arc Welding Management and Maintenance
ARC WELD DIAGNOSIS Window
An optimum arc welding requires timely contact-tip replacement and
nozzle cleaning.
It is also recommended that the user check how often such functions as
arc retry, arc restart, and automatic anti-stick have been used and adjust
the operating environment and work conditions accordingly.
The usage of the above-mentioned functions can be controlled or
confirmed on the ARC WELD DIAGNOSIS window.
For example, contact-tip replacement is initially set at 180 minutes. When
the welding time reaches 180 minutes, an external output signal (system
output) is output. The operator can then replace the tip or adjust as
necessary.
DATA
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
ARC WELD DIAGNOSIS
NO.: 1/1
A
B
C
WORK CONTINUE
TIP REPLACE
NOZZLE CLEAN
RETRY
RESTART (ARC)
ANTI-STICK
Main Menu
: CONT
<ACCUM.>
: 72 min
: 12 min
:
5 times
:
2 times
:
0 times
Simple Menu
<SETTING>
180 min
30 min
10 times
10 times
10 times
In this example, an external output
signal (system output) is output
when the accumulated welding time
reaches 180 minutes.
!Turn on servo power
A. WORK CONTINUE(CONT, STOP)
When the manipulator is restarted after it stops in the middle of a work
section, the manipulator either performs welding over the remaining part
of the section or moves without performing welding.
B. TIP REPLACE, NOZZLE CLEAN (0 to 999 minutes)
In the “SETTING” fields, specify the optimum timings for contact-tip
replacement and nozzle cleaning. The initial values are 180 minutes for
contact-tip replacement; 30 minutes for nozzle cleaning. The “ACCUM”.
fields display an accumulated service duration.
C. RETRY, RESTART (ARC), ANTI-STICK
In each of the “SETTING” fields, specify a reference value for the number
of times each function is used. As an initial setting, 10 is specified for
each function. Each of the “ACCUM”. fields displays the accumulated
count, showing how many times the function has been used.
ARC RETRY, ARC RESTART, and ANTI-STICK counts:
SUPPLEMENT
These counts are different from the maximum repetition
counts specified in the arc auxiliary condition file. These
counts show how many times these functions have actually
been used.
10-128
DX100
10.15.2
10
Arc Welding Application
10.15 Arc Welding Management and Maintenance
Editing the ARC WELD DIAGNOSIS Window
1. Select {ARC WELDING} under the main menu.
PARAMETER
JOB
DOUT
MOVE
END
SETUP
ARC WELDING
VARIABLE
B001
IN/OUT
In
Out
ROBOT
SYSTEM INFO
2. Select {ARC WELD DIAG.}.
JOB
EDIT
DIPSLAY
UTILITY
PARAMETER
JOB
DOUT
MOVE
END
ARC START COND.
ARC WELDING
ARC END COND.
VARIABLE
B001
ARC AUX COND.
IN/OUT
In
Out
POWER SOURCE
COND.
ROBOT
ARC WELD DIAG.
SYSTEM INFO
WEAVING
Main Menu
Simple Menu
Set tool mass data
3. Line up the cursor with each set item and press [SELECT] to edit it.
4. Set the work continue specification.
– Each time [SELECT] is pressed, the setting alternates between
“CONT” and “STOP”.
DATA
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
ARC WELD DIAGNOSIS
NO.: 1/1
WORK CONTINUE
TIP REPLACE
NOZZLE CLEAN
DATA
EDIT
: CONT
<ACCUM.>
: 72 min
: 12 min
5
2
0 SELECT
DISPLAY
<SETTING>
180 min
30 min
10
10
10
UTILITY
ARC WELD DIAGNOSIS
NO.: 1/1
WORK CONTINUE
TIP REPLACE
NOZZLE CLEAN
RETRY
RESTART (ARC)
ANTI-STICK
: STOP
<ACCUM.>
: 72 min
: 12 min
: 5 times
: 2 times
: 0 times
Main Menu Simple Menu
10-129
<SETTING>
180 min
30 min
10 times
10 times
10 times
! Turn on servo power
DX100
10
Arc Welding Application
10.15 Arc Welding Management and Maintenance
5. Set the control value.
– Move the cursor to the setting value to be changed and press
[SELECT].
6. Input the desired value using the numeric keys and press [ENTER].
DATA
EDIT
DISPLAY
UTILITY
ARC WELD DIAGNOSIS
NO.: 1/1
WORK CONTINUE
TIP REPLACE
NOZZLE CLEAN
RETRY
RESTART (ARC)
ANTI-STICK
Main Menu
: CONT
<ACCUM.>
: 72 min
: 12 min
:
5 times
:
2 times
:
0 times
Simple Menu
<SETTING>
180 min
30 min
10 times
10 times
10 times
!Turn on servo power
The accumulated value can be cleared by either of the following:
SUPPLEMENT
• ARC WELD DIAGNOSIS window
• External input signal (system input signal)
10-130
10
Arc Welding Application
10.16 Arc Monitor Function
DX100
10.16
Arc Monitor Function
The arc monitor function is used to monitor, analyze and control the
welding conditions (welding current and welding voltage) of the specified
welding section.
• Samples the welding conditions and show them on the display.
• Calculates the average and deviation and detects an error.
• Saves the results of measurement and analysis in the file.
ARCON
ARCMONON
ARCMONOF
000 NOP
001 MOVJ VJ=10.00
002 MOVJ VJ=80.00
003 MOVL V=800
004 ARCON ASF#(1)
005 ARCMONON AMF#(1)
006 MOVL V=50
007 ARCMONOF
008 ARCOF AEF#(1)
009 MOVL V=800
010 MOVJ VJ=50.00
011 END
10-131
ARCOF
Welding start
Arc monitor start
Arc monitor end
Welding end
10
Arc Welding Application
10.16 Arc Monitor Function
DX100
10.16.1
Hardware Specification
For the arc monitor function, the following board is needed.
• Welding I/F board: JANCD-YEW02
10.16.1.1
10.16.1.2
10.16.2
Signal Specifications of JANCD-YEW02 Board (Analog Input/Output)
Item
Specification
Channel Number
(Analog Input/Output)
Output: 2ch (1ch: Voltage, 2ch: Current)
Input: 2ch (1ch: Voltage, 2ch: Current)
Analog Voltage
Output: -14.00 to 14.00
Input: 0 to +5 V
Voltage/Current
Converted Value
10.0 V/V, 100 A/V
(can be modified by the parameter)
Monitor Minimum Unit
Voltage: 0.1 V, Current: 1 A
Connection
Signal
Connection Channel
Connector
Welding Voltage Input
Analog Input (CH1)
CN03-11 (Voltage Input)
CN03-12 (GND)
Welding Current Input
Analog Input (CH2)
CN03-8 (Current Input)
CN03-28 (GND)
Arc Monitor (Sampling) Window
The following data is always displayed whether or not welding is being
done.
• Welding Current Reference Value
• Welding Voltage Value
• Welding Current Measured Value
• Welding Voltage Measured Value
• Due to the variation, etc. in the electric resistance of welding power cable and the detectors, the values displayed in
the sampling window may be different from the actual
welding current value and welding voltage value.
NOTE
• In order to monitor the exact value, measure the actual
welding current value and welding voltage value with calibrated measuring instruments and adjust the magnification and offset. (See chapter 10.16.7 "Parameter" at
page 10-142.)
10-132
10
Arc Welding Application
10.16 Arc Monitor Function
DX100
10.16.3
ARCMONON
10.16.3.1
Function
This is the instruction to start sampling the welding condition data.
10.16.3.2
Syntax
5
ARCMONON
10.16.3.3
1
WELD1
2
WELD2
3
WELD3
4
WELD4
5
WELD5
6
WELD6
7
WELD7
8
WELD8
AMF#
(
Arc monitor
file number
)
END
Explanation

WELD[1]/WELD[2]/WELD[3]/WELD[4]/WELD[5]/WELD[6]/WELD[7]/
WELD[8]
Choose one of the following tags.
These tags are enabled only when multiple applications are in use and
two or more applications are set as arc welding application.
When there is only one application, these tags are not displayed.
Tag
Explanation
WELD1
Selects the Power Source 1.
WELD2
Selects the Power Source 2.
WELD3
Selects the Power Source 3.
WELD4
Selects the Power Source 4.
WELD5
Selects the Power Source 5.
WELD6
Selects the Power Source 6.
WELD7
Selects the Power Source 7.
WELD8
Selects the Power Source 8.
10-133
Note
10
Arc Welding Application
10.16 Arc Monitor Function
DX100

AMF# (Arc monitor file number) [9]
Tag
Explanation
Note
AMF#
Specifies the arc monitor file
(Arc monitor number.
file number) The sampling results and
statistical data are recorded in
the arc monitor file.
10.16.4
ARCMONOF
10.16.4.1
Function
No.: 1 to 100
The number can be
specified by B/I/D/LB/LI/
LD variable.
This is the instruction to end sampling the welding condition data.
10.16.4.2
Syntax
ARCMONOF
10.16.4.3
END
1
WELD1
2
WELD2
3
WELD3
4
WELD4
5
WELD5
6
WELD6
7
WELD7
8
WELD8
Explanation

WELD1/WELD2/WELD3/WELD4/WELD5/WELD6/WELD7/WELD8
Choose one of the following tags.
These tags are enabled only when multiple applications are in use and
two or more applications are set as arc welding application.
When there is only one application, these tags are not displayed.
Tag
Explanation
WELD1
Selects the Power Source 1.
WELD2
Selects the Power Source 2.
WELD3
Selects the Power Source 3.
WELD4
Selects the Power Source 4.
WELD5
Selects the Power Source 5.
WELD6
Selects the Power Source 6.
WELD7
Selects the Power Source 7.
WELD8
Selects the Power Source 8.
10-134
Note
10
Arc Welding Application
10.16 Arc Monitor Function
DX100
10.16.5
GETFILE
10.16.5.1
Function
Retrieves the data of arc monitor file into the variable (D variable).
10.16.5.2
Syntax
GETFILE<DATA 1> Condition file specification (element number)
D/LD/
D[]/LD[]
1
GETFILE
A
6
(
Variable
number
Element
number
2
SPR#
(
Application quantity
correcting condition
file number
)
3
UDC#
(
Application quantity
correcting condition
file number
)
4
WEV#
(
Weaving condition
file number
)
5
AMF#
(
Arc monitor
file number
)
)
10-135
END
A
10
Arc Welding Application
10.16 Arc Monitor Function
DX100
10.16.5.3
Explanation


D Variable Number/LD Variable Number/D [Element Number]/LD
[Element Number] [1]
Be sure to add the following tag.
Tag
Explanation
D Variable
Number/
LD Variable
Number/
D [Element
Number]/
LD [Element
Number]
Specifies the double-precision <DATA 1>
integer type variable in which
the retrieved data is stored.
SPR# (Application quantity correcting condition file number) [2]/
UDC# (Application quantity correcting condition file number) [3]/
WEV# (Weaving condition file number) [4]/AMF# (Arc monitor file
number) [5]
Be sure to choose one of the following tags.
Tag
Explanation
Note
WEV#
(Weaving
condition
file number)
Specifies the weaving
condition file number.
No.: 1 to 16
The number can be
specified by B/I/D/LB/LI/
LD variable.
AMF#
Specifies the arc monitor file
(Arc monitor number.
file number)

Note
No.: 1 to 50
The number can be
specified by B/I/D/LB/LI/
LD variable.
Only the arc monitor
function (optional) is
available.
(Element number) [6]
Be sure to add the following tag.
Tag
Explanation
Note
(Element
number)
Specifies the element of the
condition file from which the
data are retrieved.
Element No.: 1 to 255
The number can be
specified by B/LB variable.
10-136
DX100
10.16.5.4
10
Arc Welding Application
10.16 Arc Monitor Function
Registering the GETFILE instruction
1. Move the cursor to the address area.
2. Press [INFORM LIST].
3. Select “ARITH”.
4. Select the GETFILE instruction.
– The instruction is displayed on the input buffer line with the same
additional items as registered previously.
5. Press [ENTER].
– The set contents are registered in the job.
10-137
DX100
10.16.5.5
10
Arc Welding Application
10.16 Arc Monitor Function
File Data and Element Number
The relation between the element numbers of GETFILE instruction and
the arc monitor file is shown as follows.
The numbers below denote the element numbers.
2
3
1
4, 5
6, 7
8, 9
1. STATUS
2. CURRENT
3. VOLTAGE
4. CURRENT AVERAGE
5. CURRENT DEVIATION
6. VOLTAGE AVERAGE
7. VOLTAGE DEVIATION
8. NUMBER OF DATA (NORMAL)
9. NUMBER OF DATA (ERROR)
10-138
10
Arc Welding Application
10.16 Arc Monitor Function
DX100
10.16.6
10.16.6.1
Arc Monitor File
Function
One hundred files for the arc monitor function are prepared.
The arc monitor file can be saved in an external memory device.
(Cannot be loaded.)
10.16.6.2
Arc Monitor File
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
A. FILE NUMBER (1 to 50)
Shows the file number.
B. CURRENT
Shows the average value of current data between the last-performed
ARCMONON and ARCMONOF.
C. VOLTAGE
Shows the average value of voltage data between the last-performed
ARCMONON and ARCMONOF.
D. STATUS
Shows the result (normal/error) of the last-performed arc monitor.
E. CURRENT AVERAGE/DEVIATION
Shows the average/standard deviation of the retrieved average current
value.
F. VOLTAGE AVERAGE/DEVIATION
Shows the average/standard deviation of the retrieved average current
value.
G. NUMBER OF DATA
Shows the number of retrieved data (normal/error).
10-139
10
Arc Welding Application
10.16 Arc Monitor Function
DX100
10.16.6.3
Displaying the File

Procedure 1
1. Place the cursor on the ARCMONON instruction.
2. Press the direct open key
DIRECT
OPEN
.
– The arc monitor file window is displayed.
GO BACK
– Press the page key
PAGE
to call the next file number.
GO BACK
– Press [SHIFT] + the page key

PAGE
to call the previous file number.
Procedure 2
1. Select {ARC WELDING} under the main menu.
2. Select {ARC MONITOR} under the sub menu.
– The arc monitor file window is displayed.
GO BACK
– Press the page key
PAGE
to call the next file number.
GO BACK
– Press [SHIFT] + the page key
10-140
PAGE
to call the previous file number.
10
Arc Welding Application
10.16 Arc Monitor Function
DX100
NOTE

The data of arc monitor file cannot be edited.
File Initialization
All the files become ‘0’ after file initialization.
1. Display the arc monitor file window.
2. Select {CLEAR DATA} from the pull-down menu {DATA}.
– Select {CLEAR DATA} and the confirmation dialog box appears.
– {CLEAR DATA} from the arc monitor file window initializes only the
displayed file number.
– To initialize all the files, perform the initialization in the maintenance
mode.
10-141
10
Arc Welding Application
10.16 Arc Monitor Function
DX100
10.16.7
Parameter
Table 10-5: Parameter
Parameter No.
Description
Initial
Value
S2C453
Current Conversion Ratio (Power Source 1)
200
S2C454
Current Conversion Offset (Power Source 1)
Unit: 1 A
0
S2C455
Voltage Conversion Ratio (Power Source 1)
200
S2C456
Voltage Conversion Offset (Power Source 1)
Unit: 0.1 V
0
S2C457
Current Conversion Ratio (Power Source 2)
200
S2C458
Current Conversion Offset (Power Source 2)
Unit: 1 A
0
S2C459
Voltage Conversion Ratio (Power Source 2)
200
S2C460
Voltage Conversion Offset (Power Source 2)
Unit: 0.1 V
0
S2C461
Current Conversion Ratio (Power Source 3)
200
S2C462
Current Conversion Offset (Power Source 3)
Unit: 1 A
0
S2C463
Voltage Conversion Ratio (Power Source 3)
200
S2C464
Voltage Conversion Offset (Power Source 3)
Unit: 0.1 V
0
S2C465
Current Conversion Ratio (Power Source 4)
200
S2C466
Current Conversion Offset (Power Source 4)
Unit: 1 A
0
S2C467
Voltage Conversion Ratio (Power Source 4)
200
S2C468
Voltage Conversion Offset (Power Source 4)
Unit: 0.1 V
0
S2C469
Current Conversion Ratio (Power Source 5)
200
S2C470
Current Conversion Offset (Power Source 5)
Unit: 1 A
0
S2C471
Voltage Conversion Ratio (Power Source 5)
200
S2C472
Voltage Conversion Offset (Power Source 5)
Unit: 0.1 V
0
S2C473
Current Conversion Ratio (Power Source 6)
200
S2C474
Current Conversion Offset (Power Source 6)
Unit: 1 A
0
S2C475
Voltage Conversion Ratio (Power Source 6)
200
S2C476
Voltage Conversion Offset (Power Source 6)
Unit: 0.1 V
0
S2C477
Current Conversion Ratio (Power Source 7)
200
S2C478
Current Conversion Offset (Power Source 7)
Unit: 1 A
0
S2C479
Voltage Conversion Ratio (Power Source 7)
200
S2C480
Voltage Conversion Offset (Power Source 7)
Unit: 0.1 V
0
S2C481
Current Conversion Ratio (Power Source 8)
200
S2C482
Current Conversion Offset (Power Source 8)
Unit: 1 A
0
S2C483
Voltage Conversion Ratio (Power Source 8)
200
S2C484
Voltage Conversion Offset (Power Source 8)
Unit: 0.1 V
0
10-142
DX100
10
Arc Welding Application
10.16 Arc Monitor Function
The conversion parameter (for conversion ratio and offset) to calculate the
current value and voltage value using the analog input value is available.
The input voltage is converted to the current value and voltage value
according to the following charts.
1050
Conversion ratio: 200, Offset: 50 A
1000
Conversion ratio: 200, Offset: 0 A
950
Conversion ratio: 190, Offset: 0 A
Current (A)
50
0
0
5
Input Voltage (0 to 5 V)
105.0
Conversion ratio: 200, Offset: 50.0 V
100.0
Conversion ratio: 200, Offset: 0.0 V
95.0
Conversion ratio: 190, Offset: 0.0 V
Voltage (V)
5.0
0.0
0
5
Input Voltage (0 to 5 V)
10-143
10
Arc Welding Application
10.17 Appendix 1
DX100
10.17
10.17.1
Appendix 1
Table of Work Instructions
• < > indicates alpha-numerical data.
• If multiple items are shown in one additional item section, select one.
Table 10-6: Arc Welding Instructions (Sheet 1 of 3)
ARCON
ARCOF
Function
Outputs arc start conditions and an arc start instruction for the Power Source.
Additional
Item
WELD1, WELD2, WELD3, WELD4
WELD5, WELD6, WELD7, WELD8
Displayed only when using
multiple manipulators.
AC = <welding current >
ASF#(<arc start condition file number>)
AC: 1 to 999A
ASF#(): 1 to 1000
AV = <welding voltage >
AVP = <percentage against proper welding
voltage>
AV: independent
0.1 to 50.0V
AVP: synergic
50 to 150%
T = <manipulator stopping time>
0.01 to 655.35 sec
V = <manipulator moving speed>
0.1 to 1500.0 mm/sec
1 to 9000 cm/min
RETRY
Specifies use of arc retry
function.
Example
ARCON AC=200 AVP=100 T=0.30 RETRY
ARCON AC=200 AV=22.0 T=0.30
ARCON ASF#(1)
ARCON
Function
Outputs arc end conditions and an arc end instruction for the Power Source.
Additional
Item
WELD1, WELD2, WELD3, WELD4
WELD5, WELD6, WELD7, WELD8
Displayed only when using
multiple manipulators.
AC = <welding current >
AEF#(<arc end condition file number>)
AC: 1 to 999A
AEF#(): 1 to 396
AV = <welding voltage >
AVP = <percentage against proper welding
voltage >
AV: independent
0.1 to 50.0V
AVP: synergic
50 to 150%
T = <manipulator stopping time>
0.01 to 655.35 sec
ANTSTK
Specifies use of wire anti-stick
function.
Example
ARCOF AC=180 AVP=80 T=0.30 ANTSTK
ARCOF AC=180 AV20.0 T=0.30
ARCOF AEF#(1)
ARCOF
10-144
10
Arc Welding Application
10.17 Appendix 1
DX100
Table 10-6: Arc Welding Instructions (Sheet 2 of 3)
ARCSET
ARCCTS
ARCCTE
AWELD
Function
Changes the welding conditions individually.
Additional
Item
WELD1, WELD2, WELD3, WELD4
WELD5, WELD6, WELD7, WELD8
Displayed only when using
multiple manipulators.
AC = <welding current >
ASF#(<arc start condition file number>)
1 to 999A
ASF#(): 1 to 1000
AV = <welding voltage >
AVP = <percentage against proper welding
voltage >
AV: independent
0.1 to 50.0V
AVP: synergic
50 to 150%
V = <manipulator moving speed>
0.1 to 1500.0 mm/sec
1 to 9000 cm/min
AN3 = <analog output 3>
-14.00 to 14.00V
AN4 = <analog output 4>
-14.00 to 14.00V
Example
ARCSET AC=200
ARCSET AV=20.0
ARCSET AVP=95
ARCSET V=80
ARCSET AN3=10.00
Function
Changes the welding conditions gradually during execution of welding.
Additional
Item
WELD1, WELD2, WELD3, WELD4
WELD5, WELD6, WELD7, WELD8
Displayed only when using
multiple manipulators.
AC = <welding current >
1 to 999A
AV = <welding voltage >
AVP = <percentage against proper welding
voltage >
AV: independent
0.1 to 50.0V
AVP: synergic
50 to 150%
AN 3 = <analog output 3>
-14.00 to 14.00V
AN4 = <analog output 4>
-14.00 to 14.00V
DIS = <distance from the movement’s start
position>
0.00 to 6553.5 mm
Example
ARCCTS AC=200 AVP=100 DIS=100.0
ARCCTS AC=200 AV=22.0 AN3=10.0 DIS=5.0
Function
Changes the welding conditions gradually during execution of welding.
Additional
Item
WELD1, WELD2, WELD3, WELD4
WELD5, WELD6, WELD7, WELD8
Displayed only when using
multiple manipulators.
AC = <welding current >
1 to 999A
AV = <welding voltage >
AVP = <percentage against proper welding
voltage >
AV: independent
0.1 to 50.0V
AVP: synergic
50 to 150%
AN 3 = <analog output 3>
-14.00 to 14.00V
AN4 = <analog output 4>
-14.00 to 14.00V
DIS = <distance from the movement’s end
position>
0.00 to 6553.5 mm
Example
ARCCTE AC=200 AVP=100 DIS=100.0
ARCCTE AC=200 AV=22.0 AN3=10.0 DIS=5.0
Function
Specifies welding current by current reference value.
Additional
Item
WELD1, WELD2, WELD3, WELD4
WELD5, WELD6, WELD7, WELD8
Displayed only when using
multiple manipulators.
<Current reference value>
-14.00 to 14.00V
Example
AWELD 12
10-145
10
Arc Welding Application
10.17 Appendix 1
DX100
Table 10-6: Arc Welding Instructions (Sheet 3 of 3)
VWELD
WVON
WVOF
Function
Specifies welding voltage by voltage value.
Additional
Item
WELD1, WELD2, WELD3, WELD4
WELD5, WELD6, WELD7, WELD8
Displayed only when using
multiple manipulators.
<voltage value>
-14.00 to 14.00V
Example
VWELD 2.5
Function
Starts weaving.
Additional
Item
RB1, RB2, RB3, RB4
Displayed only when using
multiple manipulators.
WEV#(<weaving condition file number>)
1 to 255
Example
WVON WEV#(1)
Function
Ends weaving.
Additional
Item
RB1, RB2, RB3, RB4
None
Example
WVOF
10-146
Displayed only when using
multiple manipulators.
10
Arc Welding Application
10.18 Appendix 2
DX100
10.18
10.18.1
Appendix 2
Power Source Condition File Initial Value
The initial value data for 24 Power Sources are prepared as follows:
Table 10-7: Welder Condition Data File
Power
Source No.
Power Source Name
1
MOTOWELD-E series 350A class
2
Power Supply
Shielding
Gas
Wire Diameter
Synergic
MAG
(or CO2)
1.2
(or any)
MOTOWELD-E series 350A class
Independent
MAG
(or CO2)
1.2
(or any)
3
MOTOWELD-E series 500A class
Synergic
MAG
(or CO2)
1.2
(or any)
4
MOTOWELD-E series 500A class
Independent
MAG
(or CO2)
1.2
(or any)
5
MOTOWELD-S350-AJ2/3 (without STC)
Synergic
CO2
1.2
6
MOTOWELD-S350-AJ2/3 (without STC)
Synergic
MAG
1.2
7
MOTOWELD-S350-AJ2/3 (without STC)
Independent
CO2
1.2
8
MOTOWELD-S350-AJ2/3 (without STC)
Independent
MAG
1.2
9
MOTOWELD-S350-AJ2/3 (without STC)
Synergic
CO2
0.9
(or 1.0)
10
MOTOWELD-S350-AJ2/3 (without STC)
Synergic
MAG
0.9
(or 1.0)
11
MOTOWELD-S350-AJ2/3 (without STC)
Independent
CO2
0.9
(or 1.0)
12
MOTOWELD-S350-AJ2/3 (without STC)
Independent
MAG
0.9
(or 1.0)
(mm)
13
MOTOWELD-S350-AJ2/3 (with STC)
Synergic
CO2
1.2
14
MOTOWELD-S350-AJ2/3 (with STC)
Synergic
MAG
1.2
15
MOTOWELD-S350-AJ2/3 (with STC)
Independent
CO2
1.2
16
MOTOWELD-S350-AJ2/3 (with STC)
Independent
MAG
1.2
17
MOTOWELD-S350-AJ2/3 (with STC)
Synergic
CO2
0.9
(or 1.0)
18
MOTOWELD-S350-AJ2/3 (with STC)
Synergic
MAG
0.9
(or 1.0)
19
MOTOWELD-S350-AJ2/3 (with STC)
Independent
CO2
0.9
(or 1.0)
20
MOTOWELD-S350-AJ2/3 (with STC)
Independent
MAG
0.9
(or 1.0)
21
SHINKO ES 350
Synergic
CO2
1.2
22
DAIHEN CPV 350
Synergic
CO2
1.2
23
MOTOWELD-S500 (without STC)
Synergic
CO2
1.2
24
MOTOWELD-S500 (without STC)
Synergic
MAG
1.2
10-147
10
Arc Welding Application
10.18 Appendix 2
DX100
10.18.2
Contents of 24 Welder Condition Files
The following tables give the original contents of the provided Power
Source condition files, that are associated with the Power Source
numbers 1 through 24:
POWER SOURCE NO.: 1
POWER SOURCE NAME:
MOTOWELD-E series 350A class
COMMENT: COMBINATION GAS AND WIRE
POWER SUPPLY: A (synergic)
SHIELDING GAS: MAG
WIRE DIA.: 1.2 mm
WIRE STICKOUT: 15 mm
WIRE ANTI-STICKING: 0.1 sec
ARC FAILURE STOP: 0.6 sec
POWER SOURCE NO.: 2
POWER SOURCE NAME:
MOTOWELD-E series 350A class
COMMENT: COMBINATION GAS AND WIRE
POWER SUPPLY: independent
SHIELDING GAS: MAG
WIRE DIA.: 1.2 mm
WIRE STICKOUT: 15 mm
WIRE ANTI-STICKING: 0.1 sec
ARC FAILURE STOP: 0.6 sec
CURRENT
VOLTAGE
CURRENT
VOLTAGE
RANGE: positive
ADJ.: 1.00
RANGE: positive
ADJ.: 1.00
RANGE: positive
ADJ.: 1.00
RANGE: positive
ADJ.: 1.00
REF. (V)
MEA. (A)
REF. (V)
MEA. (%)
REF. (V)
MEA. (A)
REF. (V)
MEA. (V)
0.00
30
0.00
50
0.00
30
0.00
12.0
1.35
62
7.20
99
1.35
62
2.25
16.0
2.70
94
7.50
100
2.70
94
4.50
20.0
10.80
286
7.80
101
10.80
286
6.75
24.0
12.15
318
14.00
150
12.15
318
9.00
28.0
13.50
350
0.00
0
13.50
350
11.25
32.0
0.00
0
0.00
0
0.00
0
13.50
36.0
0.00
0
0.00
0
0.00
0
0.00
0.0
POWER SOURCE NO.: 3
POWER SOURCE NAME:
MOTOWELD-E series 500A class
COMMENT: COMBINATION GAS AND WIRE
POWER SUPPLY: A (synergic)
SHIELDING GAS: MAG
WIRE DIA.: 1.2 mm
WIRE STICKOUT: 15 mm
WIRE ANTI-STICKING: 0.1 sec
ARC FAILURE STOP: 0.6 sec
POWER SOURCE NO.: 4
POWER SOURCE NAME:
MOTOWELD-E series 500A class
COMMENT: COMBINATION GAS AND WIRE
POWER SUPPLY: independent
SHIELDING GAS: MAG
WIRE DIA.: 1.2 mm
WIRE STICKOUT: 15 mm
WIRE ANTI-STICKING: 0.1 sec
ARC FAILURE STOP: 0.6 sec
CURRENT
VOLTAGE
CURRENT
VOLTAGE
RANGE: positive
ADJ.: 1.00
RANGE: positive
ADJ.: 1.00
RANGE: positive
ADJ.: 1.00
RANGE: positive
ADJ.: 1.00
REF. (V)
MEA. (A)
REF. (V)
MEA. (%)
REF. (V)
MEA. (A)
REF. (V)
MEA. (V)
0.00
30
0.00
50
0.00
30
0.00
12.0
1.35
77
7.20
99
1.35
77
2.25
17.5
2.70
124
7.50
100
2.70
124
4.50
23.0
10.80
406
7.80
101
10.80
406
6.75
28.5
12.15
453
14.00
150
12.15
453
9.00
34.0
13.50
500
0.00
0
13.50
500
11.25
39.5
0.00
0
0.00
0
0.00
0
13.50
45.0
0.00
0
0.00
0
0.00
0
0.00
0.0
10-148
10
Arc Welding Application
10.18 Appendix 2
DX100
POWER SOURCE NO.: 5
POWER SOURCE NAME:
MOTOWELD-S350-AJ2/3
COMMENT: STC NO-CONTROL
POWER SUPPLY: A (synergic)
SHIELDING GAS: CO2
WIRE DIA.: 1.2 mm
WIRE STICKOUT: 15 mm
WIRE ANTI-STICKING: 0.3 sec
ARC FAILURE STOP: 0.6 sec
POWER SOURCE NO.: 6
POWER SOURCE NAME:
MOTOWELD-S350-AJ2/3
COMMENT: STC NO-CONTROL
POWER SUPPLY: A (synergic)
SHIELDING GAS: MAG
WIRE DIA.: 1.2 mm
WIRE STICKOUT: 15 mm
WIRE ANTI-STICKING: 0.3 sec
ARC FAILURE STOP: 0.6 sec
CURRENT
VOLTAGE
CURRENT
VOLTAGE
RANGE: positive
ADJ.: 1.00
RANGE: positive
ADJ.: 1.00
RANGE: positive
ADJ.: 1.00
RANGE: positive
ADJ.: 1.00
REF. (V)
REF. (V)
REF. (V)
REF. (V)
MEA. (A)
MEA. (%)
MEA. (A)
MEA. (%)
1.00
100
3.00
85
1.00
95
3.00
85
2.00
145
5.00
95
2.00
150
5.00
95
3.50
185
7.00
100
3.50
200
7.00
100
5.00
230
9.00
105
5.00
240
9.00
105
7.00
270
10.00
110
7.00
280
10.00
110
10.00
350
0.00
0
10.00
350
0.00
0
0.00
0
0.00
0
0.00
0
0.00
0
0.00
0
0.00
0
0.00
0
0.00
0
POWER SOURCE NO.: 7
POWER SOURCE NAME:
MOTOWELD-S350-AJ2/3
COMMENT: STC NO-CONTROL
POWER SUPPLY: independent
SHIELDING GAS: CO2
WIRE DIA.: 1.2 mm
WIRE STICKOUT: 15 mm
WIRE ANTI-STICKING: 0.3 sec
ARC FAILURE STOP: 0.6 sec
POWER SOURCE NO.: 8
POWER SOURCE NAME:
MOTOWELD-S350-AJ2/3
COMMENT: STC NO-CONTROL
POWER SUPPLY: independent
SHIELDING GAS: MAG
WIRE DIA.: 1.2 mm
WIRE STICKOUT: 15 mm
WIRE ANTI-STICKING: 0.3 sec
ARC FAILURE STOP: 0.6 sec
CURRENT
VOLTAGE
CURRENT
VOLTAGE
RANGE: positive
ADJ.: 1.00
RANGE: positive
ADJ.: 1.00
RANGE: positive
ADJ.: 1.00
RANGE: positive
ADJ.: 1.00
REF. (V)
MEA. (A)
REF. (V)
MEA. (V)
REF. (V)
MEA. (A)
REF. (V)
MEA. (V)
1.00
100
2.00
18.0
1.00
95
1.20
16.0
2.00
145
3.10
20.0
2.00
150
2.00
18.0
3.50
185
4.90
23.0
3.50
200
3.60
21.0
5.00
230
7.00
26.5
5.00
240
6.30
26.0
7.00
270
10.70
33.0
7.00
280
10.00
32.5
10.00
350
0.00
0.0
10.00
350
0.00
0.0
0.00
0
0.00
0.0
0.00
0
0.00
0.0
0.00
0
0.00
0.0
0.00
0
0.00
0.0
10-149
10
Arc Welding Application
10.18 Appendix 2
DX100
POWER SOURCE NO.: 9
POWER SOURCE NAME:
MOTOWELD-S350-AJ2/3
COMMENT: STC NO-CONTROL
POWER SUPPLY: A (synergic)
SHIELDING GAS: CO2
WIRE DIA.: 0.9 mm
WIRE STICKOUT: 10 mm
WIRE ANTI-STICKING: 0.3 sec
ARC FAILURE STOP: 0.6 sec
POWER SOURCE NO.: 10
POWER SOURCE NAME:
MOTOWELD-S350-AJ2/3
COMMENT: STC NO-CONTROL
POWER SUPPLY: A (synergic)
SHIELDING GAS: MAG
WIRE DIA.: 0.9 mm
WIRE STICKOUT: 10 mm
WIRE ANTI-STICKING: 0.3 sec
ARC FAILURE STOP: 0.6 sec
CURRENT
VOLTAGE
CURRENT
VOLTAGE
RANGE: positive
ADJ: 1.00
RANGE: positive
ADJ: 1.00
RANGE: positive
ADJ: 1.00
RANGE: positive
ADJ: 1.00
REF. (V)
MEA. (A)
REF. (V)
MEA. (%)
REF. (V)
MEA. (A)
REF. (V)
MEA. (%)
1.00
60
3.00
85
1.00
55
3.00
85
2.00
80
5.00
95
2.00
80
5.00
95
3.00
100
7.00
100
3.50
110
7.00
100
5.00
125
9.00
105
5.00
130
9.00
105
7.00
150
10.00
110
7.00
170
10.00
110
10.00
190
0.00
0
10.00
190
0.00
0
11.00
200
0.00
0
11.00
200
0.00
0
0.00
0
0.00
0
0.00
0
0.00
0
POWER SOURCE NO.: 11
POWER SOURCE NAME:
MOTOWELD-S350-AJ2/3
COMMENT: STC NO-CONTROL
POWER SUPPLY: independent
SHIELDING GAS: CO2
WIRE DIA.: 0.9 mm
WIRE STICKOUT: 10 mm
WIRE ANTI-STICKING: 0.3 sec
ARC FAILURE STOP: 0.6 sec
POWER SOURCE NO.: 12
POWER SOURCE NAME:
MOTOWELD-S350-AJ2/3
COMMENT: STC NO-CONTROL
POWER SUPPLY: independent
SHIELDING GAS: MAG
WIRE DIA.: 0.9 mm
WIRE STICKOUT: 10 mm
WIRE ANTI-STICKING: 0.3 sec
ARC FAILURE STOP: 0.6 sec
CURRENT
VOLTAGE
CURRENT
VOLTAGE
RANGE: positive
ADJ.: 1.00
RANGE: positive
ADJ.: 1.00
RANGE: positive
ADJ.: 1.00
RANGE: positive
ADJ.: 1.00
REF. (V)
MEA. (A)
REF. (V)
MEA. (V)
REF. (V)
MEA. (A)
REF. (V)
MEA. (V)
1.00
60
2.50
19.0
1.00
55
1.90
17.5
2.00
80
3.50
21.0
2.00
80
2.10
18.0
3.00
100
4.50
23.0
3.50
110
3.20
20.0
5.00
125
5.70
25.5
5.00
130
3.90
21.5
7.00
150
0.00
0.0
7.00
170
4.80
23.0
10.00
190
0.00
0.0
10.00
190
0.00
0.0
11.00
200
0.00
0.0
11.00
200
0.00
0.0
0.00
0
0.00
0.0
0.00
0
0.00
0.0
10-150
10
Arc Welding Application
10.18 Appendix 2
DX100
POWER SOURCE NO.: 13
POWER SOURCE NAME:
MOTOWELD-S350-AJ2/3
COMMENT: STC CONTROL
POWER SUPPLY: A (synergic)
SHIELDING GAS: CO2
WIRE DIA.: 1.2 mm
WIRE STICKOUT: 15 mm
WIRE ANTI-STICKING: 0.3 sec
ARC FAILURE STOP: 0.6 sec
POWER SOURCE NO.: 14
POWER SOURCE NAME:
MOTOWELD-S350-AJ2/3
COMMENT: STC CONTROL
POWER SUPPLY: A (synergic)
SHIELDING GAS: MAG
WIRE DIA.: 1.2 mm
WIRE STICKOUT: 15 mm
WIRE ANTI-STICKING: 0.3 sec
ARC FAILURE STOP: 0.6 sec
CURRENT
VOLTAGE
CURRENT
VOLTAGE
RANGE: positive
ADJ.: 1.00
RANGE: positive
ADJ.: 1.00
RANGE: positive
ADJ.: 1.00
RANGE: positive
ADJ.: 1.00
REF. (V)
REF. (V)
REF. (V)
REF. (V)
MEA. (A)
MEA. (%)
MEA. (A)
MEA. (%)
1.00
100
3.00
85
1.00
95
3.00
85
2.00
140
5.00
95
2.00
150
5.00
95
3.50
190
7.00
100
3.50
190
7.00
100
5.00
230
9.00
105
5.00
240
9.00
105
7.00
270
10.00
110
7.00
270
10.00
110
10.00
350
0.00
0
9.00
350
0.00
0
0.00
0
0.00
0
0.00
0
0.00
0
0.00
0
0.00
0
0.00
0
0.00
0
POWER SOURCE NO.: 15
POWER SOURCE NAME:
MOTOWELD-S350-AJ2/3
COMMENT: STC CONTROL
POWER SUPPLY: independent
SHIELDING GAS: CO2
WIRE DIA.: 1.2 mm
WIRE STICKOUT: 15 mm
WIRE ANTI-STICKING: 0.3 sec
ARC FAILURE STOP: 0.6 sec
POWER SOURCE NO.: 16
POWER SOURCE NAME:
MOTOWELD-S350-AJ2/3
COMMENT: STC CONTROL
POWER SUPPLY: independent
SHIELDING GAS: MAG
WIRE DIA.: 1.2 mm
WIRE STICKOUT: 15 mm
WIRE ANTI-STICKING: 0.3 sec
ARC FAILURE STOP: 0.6 sec
CURRENT
VOLTAGE
CURRENT
VOLTAGE
RANGE: positive
ADJ.: 1.00
RANGE: positive
ADJ.: 1.00
RANGE: positive
ADJ.: 1.00
RANGE: positive
ADJ.: 1.00
REF. (V)
MEA. (A)
REF. (V)
MEA. (V)
REF. (V)
MEA. (A)
REF. (V)
MEA. (V)
1.00
100
2.10
18.0
1.00
95
1.30
16.0
2.00
140
3.20
20.0
2.00
150
2.10
18.0
3.50
190
5.00
23.0
3.50
190
3.70
21.0
5.00
230
7.10
26.5
5.00
240
6.40
26.0
7.00
270
10.80
33.0
7.00
270
10.10
32.5
10.00
350
0.00
0.0
9.00
350
0.00
0.0
0.00
0
0.00
0.0
0.00
0
0.00
0.0
0.00
0
0.00
0.0
0.00
0
0.00
0.0
10-151
10
Arc Welding Application
10.18 Appendix 2
DX100
POWER SOURCE NO.: 17
POWER SOURCE NAME:
MOTOWELD-S350-AJ2/3
COMMENT: STC CONTROL
POWER SUPPLY: A (synergic)
SHIELDING GAS: CO2
WIRE DIA.: 0.9 mm
WIRE STICKOUT: 10 mm
WIRE ANTI-STICKING: 0.3 sec
ARC FAILURE STOP: 0.6 sec
POWER SOURCE NO.: 18
POWER SOURCE NAME:
MOTOWELD-S350-AJ2/3
COMMENT: STC CONTROL
POWER SUPPLY: A (synergic)
SHIELDING GAS: MAG
WIRE DIA.: 0.9 mm
WIRE STICKOUT: 10 mm
WIRE ANTI-STICKING: 0.3 sec
ARC FAILURE STOP: 0.6 sec
CURRENT
VOLTAGE
CURRENT
VOLTAGE
RANGE: positive
ADJ.: 1.00
RANGE: positive
ADJ.: 1.00
RANGE: positive
ADJ.: 1.00
RANGE: positive
ADJ.: 1.00
REF. (V)
MEA. (A)
REF. (V)
MEA. (%)
REF. (V)
MEA. (A)
REF. (V)
MEA. (%)
1.00
60
3.00
85
1.00
60
3.00
85
2.00
80
5.00
95
2.00
75
5.00
95
3.50
105
7.00
100
3.50
110
7.00
100
5.00
125
9.00
105
5.00
130
9.00
105
7.00
145
10.00
110
7.00
160
10.00
110
10.00
180
0.00
0
10.00
190
0.00
0
11.00
200
0.00
0
11.00
200
0.00
0
0.00
0
0.00
0
0.00
0
0.00
0
POWER SOURCE NO.: 19
POWER SOURCE NAME:
MOTOWELD-S350-AJ2/3
COMMENT: STC CONTROL
POWER SUPPLY: independent
SHIELDING GAS: CO2
WIRE DIA.: 0.9 mm
WIRE STICKOUT: 10 mm
WIRE ANTI-STICKING: 0.3 sec
ARC FAILURE STOP: 0.6 sec
POWER SOURCE NO.: 20
POWER SOURCE NAME:
MOTOWELD-S350-AJ2/3
COMMENT: STC CONTROL
POWER SUPPLY: independent
SHIELDING GAS: MAG
WIRE DIA.: 0.9 mm
WIRE STICKOUT: 10 mm
WIRE ANTI-STICKING: 0.3 sec
ARC FAILURE STOP: 0.6 sec
CURRENT
VOLTAGE
CURRENT
VOLTAGE
RANGE: positive
ADJ.: 1.00
RANGE: positive
ADJ.: 1.00
RANGE: positive
ADJ.: 1.00
RANGE: positive
ADJ.: 1.00
REF. (V)
MEA. (A)
REF. (V)
MEA. (V)
REF. (V)
MEA. (A)
REF. (V)
MEA. (V)
1.00
60
2.80
19.0
1.00
60
2.10
17.5
2.00
80
3.80
21.0
2.00
75
2.30
18.0
3.50
105
4.80
23.0
3.50
110
3.40
20.0
5.00
125
6.00
25.5
5.00
130
4.10
21.5
7.00
145
0.00
0.0
7.00
160
5.00
23.0
10.00
180
0.00
0.0
10.00
190
0.00
0.0
11.00
200
0.00
0.0
11.00
200
0.00
0.0
0.00
0
0.00
0.0
0.00
0
0.00
0.0
10-152
10
Arc Welding Application
10.18 Appendix 2
DX100
POWER SOURCE NO.: 21
POWER SOURCE NAME:
SHINKO ES350
COMMENT:
POWER SUPPLY: A (synergic)
SHIELDING GAS: CO2
WIRE DIA.: 1.2 mm
WIRE STICKOUT: 15 mm
WIRE ANTI-STICKING: 0.3 sec
ARC FAILURE STOP: 0.6 sec
POWER SOURCE NO.: 22
POWER SOURCE NAME:
DAIHEN CPV350
COMMENT:
POWER SUPPLY: A (synergic)
SHIELDING GAS: CO2
WIRE DIA.: 1.2 mm
WIRE STICKOUT: 15 mm
WIRE ANTI-STICKING: 0.3 sec
ARC FAILURE STOP: 0.6 sec
CURRENT
VOLTAGE
CURRENT
VOLTAGE
RANGE: positive
ADJ.: 1.00
RANGE: positive
ADJ.: 1.00
RANGE: positive
ADJ.: 1.00
RANGE: positive
ADJ.: 1.00
REF. (V)
REF. (V)
MEA. (%)
REF. (V)
REF. (V)
MEA. (A)
MEA. (A)
MEA. (%)
2.80
100
4.80
88
1.40
50
5.00
75
3.90
150
7.00
100
2.80
100
7.50
100
5.80
200
9.20
112
4.30
150
10.00
125
7.60
250
0.00
0
5.70
200
0.00
0
8.90
300
0.00
0
7.80
250
0.00
0
0.00
0
0.00
0
9.50
300
0.00
0
0.00
0
0.00
0
12.60
350
0.00
0
0.00
0
0.00
0
0.00
0
0.00
0
POWER SOURCE NO.: 23
POWER SOURCE NAME:
MOTOWELD-S500
COMMENT: STC NO-CONTROL
POWER SUPPLY: A (synergic)
SHIELDING GAS: CO2
WIRE DIA.: 1.2 mm
WIRE STICKOUT: 15 mm
WIRE ANTI-STICKING: 0.3 sec
ARC FAILURE STOP: 1.5 sec
POWER SOURCE NO.: 24
POWER SOURCE NAME:
MOTOWELD-S500
COMMENT: STC NO-CONTROL
POWER SUPPLY: A (synergic)
SHIELDING GAS: MAG
WIRE DIA.: 1.2 mm
WIRE STICKOUT: 15 mm
WIRE ANTI-STICKING: 0.3 sec
ARC FAILURE STOP: 1.5 sec
CURRENT
VOLTAGE
CURRENT
VOLTAGE
RANGE: positive
ADJ.: 1.00
RANGE: positive
ADJ.: 1.00
RANGE: positive
ADJ.: 1.00
RANGE: positive
ADJ.: 1.00
REF. (V)
MEA. (A)
REF. (V)
MEA. (%)
REF. (V)
MEA. (A)
REF. (V)
1.40
100
3.00
85
1.70
100
3.00
85
3.10
160
7.00
100
2.80
160
7.00
100
4.00
200
11.00
115
3.70
200
11.00
115
5.90
280
0.00
0
5.00
250
0.00
0
8.00
340
0.00
0
6.40
300
0.00
0
9.00
380
0.00
0
7.50
360
0.00
0
10.00
400
0.00
0
8.00
390
0.00
0
11.00
440
0.00
0
9.00
430
0.00
0
10-153
MEA. (%)
11
Table of Basic Instructions
11.1 Move Instructions
DX100
11 Table of Basic Instructions
• <> indicates numerical or alphabetical data.
• If multiple items are shown in one section, select one of the items.
11.1
MOVJ
Move Instructions
Function
Moves to a taught point with joint interpolation type.
Additional
Item
Position data,
Base axis position data,
Station axis position data
These data do not
appear on the
screen.
VJ=<play speed>
VJ:
0.01 to 100.00%
PL=<position level>
PL:0 to 8
NWAIT
UNTIL statement
MOVL
ACC=(acceleration adjustment ratio)
ACC: 20 to 100%
DEC=(deceleration adjustment ratio)
DEC: 20 to 100%
Example
MOVJ VJ=50.00 PL=2 NWAIT UNTIL IN#(16)=ON
Function
Moves to a taught point with linear interpolation type.
Additional
Item
Position data,
Base axis position data,
Station axis position data
These data do not
appear on the
screen.
V=<play speed>,
VR=<play speed of the posture>,
VE=<play speed of external axis>
V:0.1 to 1500.0
mm/s
1 to 9000.0
cm/min
VR:0.1 to 180.0
deg/s
VE:0.01 to
100.00%
PL=<position level>
PL:0 to 8
CR=(corner radius)
CR: 1.0 to
6553.5mm
NWAIT
UNTIL statement
MOVC
ACC=(acceleration adjustment ratio)
ACC: 20 to 100%
DEC=(deceleration adjustment ratio)
DEC: 20 to 100%
Example
MOVL V=138 PL=0 NWAIT UNTIL IN#(16)=ON
Function
Moves to a taught point with circular interpolation type.
Additional
Item
Position data,
Base axis position data,
Station axis position data
These data do not
appear on the
screen.
V=<play speed>,
VR=<play speed of the posture>,
VE=<play speed of external axis>
Same as MOVL.
PL=<position level>
PL:0 to 8
NWAIT
Example
ACC=(acceleration adjustment ratio)
ACC: 20 to 100%
DEC=(deceleration adjustment ratio)
DEC: 20 to 100%
MOVC V=138 PL=0 NWAIT
11-1
11
Table of Basic Instructions
11.1 Move Instructions
DX100
MOVS
Function
Moves to a taught point with spline interpolation type.
Additional
Item
Position data,
Base axis position data,
Station axis position data
These data do not
appear on the
screen.
V=<play speed>,
VR=<play speed of the posture>,
VE=<play speed of external axis>
Same as MOVL.
PL=<position level>
PL:0 to 8
NWAIT
IMOV
ACC=(acceleration adjustment ratio)
ACC: 20 to 100%
DEC=(deceleration adjustment ratio)
DEC: 20 to 100%
Example
MOVS V=120 PL=0
Function
Moves the specified increment from the current position with linear
interpolation type.
Additional
Item
P<variable number>,
BP<variable number>,
EX<variable number>
V=<play speed>,
VR=<play speed of the posture>,
VE=<play speed of external axis>
Same as MOVL.
PL=<position level>
PL:0 to 8
NWAIT
BF,RF,TF,UF# (<user coordinate number>)
BF:
base coordinates
RF:
robot coordinates
TF:
tool coordinates
UF:
user coordinates
UNTIL statement
REFP
SPEED
ACC=(acceleration adjustment ratio)
ACC: 20 to 100%
DEC=(deceleration adjustment ratio)
DEC: 20 to 100%
Example
IMOV P000 V=138 PL=1 RF
Function
Defines a reference point (e.g. wall point for weaving).
Additional
Item
<reference point number>
wall point 1 for
weaving :1
wall point 2 for
weaving :2
Position data,
Base axis position data,
Station axis position data
These data do not
appear on the
screen.
Example
REFP 1
Function
Sets play speed.
Additional
Item
VJ=<joint speed>,
V=<TCP speed>,
VR=<play speed of the posture>,
VE=<play speed of external axis>
Example
SPEED VJ=50.00
11-2
VJ:Same as
MOVJ.
V,VR,VE:
Same as
MOVL.
11
Table of Basic Instructions
11.1 Move Instructions
DX100
CAUTION
When start IMOV instruction again after IMOV instruction was aborted
due to execute the following operations, the manipulator moves the
added values, which is set anew from the aborted position, in the linear
interpolation. The values become greater than the set added value.
Please do not execute the IMOV instruction when changing move
distance by the abort causes a problem.
•
External servo OFF signal 2 (#40066)
•
Turning OFF the servo power due to alarm occurring
•
Enable signal
•
Mode switch
•
Enable switch
11-3
11
Table of Basic Instructions
11.2 I/O Instructions
DX100
11.2
DOUT
I/O Instructions
Function
Turns the external output signals ON and OFF.
Additional
Item
OT# (<output number>),
OGH# (<output group number>),
OG# (<output group number>)
Number of addressed output signals:
OT#(xx)=1;OGH#(xx)=4(per group);
OG#(xx)=8(per group)
OGH#(xx) is not subject to parity check; only the binary
specification is allowed.
FINE
PULSE
With a high
degree of
accuracy
Example
DOUT OT#(12) ON
Function
Outputs a pulse signal as an external output signal.
Additional
Item
OT# (<output number>),
OGH# (<output group number>),
OG# (<output group number>)
T=<time (seconds)>
DIN
Example
PULSE OT# (10) T=0.60
Function
Sets input signals in variables.
Additional
Item
B<variable number>
IN# (<input number>),
IGH# (<input group number>),
IG# (<input group number>),
OT# (<output number>),
OGH# (<output group number>),
OG# (<output group number>),
SIN# (<system input number>),
SOUT# (<system output number>)
Number of addressed input signals:
IN#(xx)=1;IGH#(xx)=4(per group);
IG#(xx)=8(per group)
Number of addressed output signals:
OT#(xx)=1;OGH#(xx)=4(per group);
OG#(xx)=8(per group)
IGH#(xx) and OGH#(xx) are not subject to parity
check; only the binary specification is allowed.
Example
DIN B016 IN#(16)
DIN B002 IG#(2)
11-4
0.01 to
655.35 s
0.30 s unless
otherwise
specified
11
Table of Basic Instructions
11.2 I/O Instructions
DX100
WAIT
Function
Waits until the external input signal status matches the specified status.
Additional
Item
IN# (<input number>),
IGH# (<input group number>),
IG# (<input group number>),
OT# (<user output number>),
OGH# (<output group number>),
SIN# (<system input number>),
SOUT# (<system output number>)
<status>,B<variable number>
T=<time (seconds)>
AOUT
ARATION
ARATIOF
0.01 to
655.35 s
Example
WAIT IN# (12)=ON T=10.00
WAIT IN# (12)=B002
Function
Outputs the specified voltage to the general-purpose analog output port.
Additional
Item
AO# (<output port number>)
1 to 40
<output voltage(V)>
-14.0 to 14.0
Example
AOUT AO# (2) 12.7
Function
Starts the analog output corresponding to the speed.
Additional
Item
AO#(<output port number>)
1 to 40
BV = <basic voltage>
-14.00 to 14.00
V = <basic speed>
0.1 to
150.0 mm/s
1 to 9000 cm/min
OFV = <offset voltage>
-14.00 to 14.00
Example
ARATION AO#(1) BV=10.00 V=200.0 OFV=2.00
Function
Ends the analog output corresponding to the speed.
Additional
Item
AO#(<output port number>)
Example
ARATIOF AO#(1)
11-5
1 to 40
11
Table of Basic Instructions
11.3 Control Instructions
DX100
11.3
JUMP
Control Instructions
Function
Jumps to the specified label or job.
Additional
Item
* <label character string>,
JOB:<job name>,
IG# (<input group number>),
B<variable number>,
I<variable number>,
D<variable number>
UF# (user coordinates number)
IF statement
Example
JUMP JOB:TEST1 IF IN#(14)=OFF
*
Function
Indicates a jump destination.
(label)
Additional
Item
<jump destination>
Example
*123
Function
Calls the specified job.
Additional
Item
JOB:<job name>,
IG# (<input group number>),
B<variable number>,
I<variable number>,
D<variable number>
CALL
8 characters or
less
UF# (user coordinates number)
IF statement
RET
END
Example
CALL JOB:TEST1 IF IN# (24)=ON
CALL IG#(2)
(The job is called by the patterns of input signal. In this example, Job 0
cannot be called.)
Function
Returns to the call source job.
Additional
Item
IF statement
Example
RET IF IN#(12)=OFF
Function
Declares the end of a job.
Additional
Item
NOP
Example
END
Function
No operation.
Additional
Item
TIMER
IF
Example
NOP
Function
Stops for the specified time.
Additional
Item
T=<time (seconds)>
Example
TIMER T=12.50
Function
Evaluates the specified condition and makes a judgment accordingly.
Described after an instruction that specifies a certain action.
Format:<Item1>=,<>,<=,>=,<,><Item2>
Additional
Item
<Item1>
Example
JUMP *12 IF IN#(12)=OFF
statement
<Item2>
11-6
0.01 to
655.35 s
11
Table of Basic Instructions
11.3 Control Instructions
DX100
UNTIL
Function
Monitors the specified input signal during an action and stops the action
when the specified signal status is observed. Described after an instruction
that specifies a certain action.
Additional
Item
IN# (<input number>)
Example
MOVL V=300 UNTIL IN#(10)=ON
Function
Instructs a pause.
Additional
Item
IF statement
statement
PAUSE
<status>
Example
PAUSE IF IN#(12)=OFF
’
Function
Dispalys a comment.
(comment)
Additional
Item
<comment>
Example
’Draws 100mm size square.
Function
Waits for execution of the instruction on the next line.
Used with the NWAIT tag which is an additional item of a move instruction.
CWAIT
32 characters or
less
Additional
Item
ADVINIT
Example
MOVL V=100 NWAIT
DOUT OT#(1) ON
CWAIT
DOUT OT#(1) OFF
MOVL V=100
Function
Initializes the prereading instruction processing.
Used to adjust the access timing for variable data.
Additional
Item
ADVSTOP
Example
ADVINIT
Function
Stops the prereading instruction processing.
Used to adjust the access timing for variable data.
Additional
Item
Example
ADVINIT
11-7
11
Table of Basic Instructions
11.4 Shift Instructions
DX100
11.4
SFTON
SFTOF
Shift Instructions
Function
Starts a shift operation.
Additional
Item
P<variable number>,
BP<variable number>,
EX<variable number>,
BF,RF,TF,
UF#(<user coordinate number>)
Example
SFTON P001 UF#(1)
Function
Stops a shift operation.
BF:
base coordinates
RF:
robot coordinates
TF:
tool coordinates
UF:
user coordinates
Additional
Item
MSHIFT
Example
SFTOF
Function
Obtains the shift value in the specified coordinate system from Data 2 and
3, and stores the obtained element values in Data 1.
Format:MSHIFT <Data1><Coordinate><Data2><Data3>
Additional
Item
Data1
PX<variable number>
Coordinate
BF,RF,TF,
UF# (<user coordinate number>),
MTF
Data2
PX<variable number>
Data3
PX<variable number>
Example
MSHIFT PX000 RF PX001 PX002
11-8
BF:
base coordinates
RF:
robot coordinates
TF:
tool coordinates
UF:
user coordinates
MTF:
tool coordinates
for the master
11
Table of Basic Instructions
11.5 Operating Instructions
DX100
11.5
ADD
SUB
Operating Instructions
Function
Adds Data1 and Data2, and stores the result in Data1.
Format:ADD<Data1><Data2>
Additional
Item
Data1
B<variable number>,
I<variable number>,
D<variable number>,
R<variable number>,
P<variable number>,
BP<variable number>,
EX<variable number>
Data2
Constant,
B<variable number>,
I<variable number>,
D<variable number>,
R<variable number>,
P<variable number>,
BP<variable number>,
EX<variable number>
Data1 must
always be a
variable.
Example
ADD I012 I013
Function
Subtracts Data2 from Data1, and stores the result in Data1.
Format:SUB<Data1><Data2>
Additional
Item
Data1
B<variable number>,
I<variable number>,
D<variable number>,
R<variable number>,
P<variable number>,
BP<variable number>,
EX<variable number>
Data2
Constant,
B<variable number>,
I<variable number>,
D<variable number>,
R<variable number>,
P<variable number>,
BP<variable number>,
EX<variable number>
Example
SUB I012 I013
11-9
Data1 must
always be a
variable.
11
Table of Basic Instructions
11.5 Operating Instructions
DX100
MUL
Function
Multiplies Data1 by Data2, and stores the result in Data1.
Format:MUL<Data1><Data2>
Data1 can be an element in a position variable.
Pxxx(0):all axis data, Pxxx(1):X-axis data,
Pxxx(2):Y-axis data, Pxxx(3):Z-axis data,
Pxxx(4):Tx-axis data, Pxxx(5):Ty-axis data,
Pxxx(6):Tz-axis data
Additional
Item
DIV
Data1
B<variable number>,
I<variable number>,
D<variable number>,
R<variable number>,
P<variable number> (<element
number>),
BP<variable number> (<element
number>),
EX<variable number> (<element
number>)
Data2
Constant,
B<variable number>,
I<variable number>,
D<variable number>,
R<variable number>
Example
MUL I012 I013
MUL P000 (3) 2 (Multiply the Z-axis data by 2.)
Function
Divides Data1 by Data2, and stores the result in Data1.
Format:DIV<Data1><Data2>
Data1 must
always be a
variable.
Data1 can be an element in a position variable.
Pxxx(0):all axis data, Pxxx(1):X-axis data,
Pxxx(2):Y-axis data, Pxxx(3):Z-axis data,
Pxxx(4):Tx-axis data, Pxxx(5):Ty-axis data,
Pxxx(6):Tz-axis data
Additional
Item
INC
DEC
Data1
B<variable number>,
I<variable number>,
D<variable number>,
R<variable number>,
P<variable number> (<element
number>),
BP<variable number> (<element
number>),
EX<variable number> (<element
number>)
Data2
Constant,
B<variable number>,
I<variable number>,
D<variable number>,
R<variable number>
Example
DIV I012 I013
DIV P000 (3) 2 (Divide the Z-axis data by 2.)
Function
Increments the value of the specified variable by 1.
Additional
Item
B<variable number>,I<variable number>,
D<variable number>
Example
INC I043
Function
Decrements the value of the specified variable by 1.
Additional
Item
B<variable number>,I<variable number>,
D<variable number>
Example
DEC I043
11-10
Data1 must
always be a
variable.
11
Table of Basic Instructions
11.5 Operating Instructions
DX100
AND
OR
NOT
XOR
SET
SETE
Function
Obtains the AND of Data1 and Data2, and stores the result in Data1.
Format:AND<Data1><Data2>
Additional
Item
Data1
B<variable number>
Data2
B<variable number>, Constant
Example
AND B012 B020
Function
Obtains the OR of Data1 and Data2, and stores the result in Data1.
Format:OR<Data1><Data2>
Additional
Item
Data1
B<variable number>
Data2
B<variable number>, Constant
Example
OR B012 B020
Function
Obtains the NOT of Data2, and stores the result in Data1.
Format:NOT<Data1><Data2>
Additional
Item
Data1
B<variable number>
Data2
B<variable number>, Constant
Example
NOT B012 B020
Function
Obtains the exclusive OR of Data1 and Data2, and stores the result in
Data1.
Format:XOR<Data1><Data2>
Additional
Item
Data1
B<variable number>
Data2
B<variable number>, Constant
Example
XOR B012 B020
Function
Sets Data2 to Data1.
Format:SET<Data1><Data2>
Additional
Item
Data1
B<variable number>,
I<variable number>,
D<variable number>,
R<variable number>,
P<variable number>,
S<variable number>,
BP<variable number>,
EX<variable number>
Data2
Constant,
B<variable number>,
I<variable number>,
D<variable number>,
R<variable number>,
S<variable number>,
EXPRESS
Example
SET I012 I020
Function
Sets data to an element in a position variable.
Additional
Item
Data 1
P<variable number> (<element
number>),
BP<variable number> (<element
number>),
EX<variable number> (<element
number>)
Data 2
D<variable number>,
<double-precision integer type
constant>
Example
SETE P012 (3) D005
11-11
Data1 must
always be a
variable.
11
Table of Basic Instructions
11.5 Operating Instructions
DX100
GETE
GETS
Function
Extracts an element in a position variable.
Additional
Item
D<variable number>
Example
GETE D006 P012 (4)
Function
Sets a system variable to the specified variable.
Additional
Item
B<variable number>,
I<variable number>,
D<variable number>,
R<variable number>,
PX<variable number>
P<variable number> (<element number>),
BP<variable number> (<element number>),
EX<variable number> (<element number>)
$B<variable number>,
$I<variable number>,
$D<variable number>,
$R<variable number>,
$PX<variable number>, $ERRNO,
Constant, B<variable number>
CNVRT
System variable
Example
GETS B000 $B000
GETS I001 $I[1]
GETS PX003 $PX001
Function
Converts the position variable (Data2) into a position variable of the
specified coordinate system, and stores the converted variable in Data1.
Format:CNVRT<Data1><Data2><coordinate>
Additional
Item
Data1
PX<variable number>
Data2
PX<variable number>
BF,RF,TF,UF# (<user coordinate number>),MTF
Example
CNVRT PX000 PX001 BF
11-12
BF:
base coordinates
RF:
robot coordinates
TF:
tool coordinates
UF:
user coordinates
MTF:tool
coordinates for the
master
11
Table of Basic Instructions
11.5 Operating Instructions
DX100
CLEAR
SIN
COS
ATAN
SQRT
Function
Starting with the variable number in Data1, clears (sets to zero) as many
variables as specified by a number in Data2.
Format:CLEAR<Data1><Data2>
Additional
Item
Data1
B<variable number>,
I<variable number>,
D<variable number>,
R<variable number>,
$B<variable number>,
$I<variable number>,
$D<variable number>,
$R<variable number>,
Data2
<number of variables>, ALL,STACK
Example
CLEAR B000 ALL
CLEAR STACK
Function
Obtains the sine of Data2, and stores the result in Data1.
Format:SIN<Data1><Data2>
Additional
Item
Data1
R<variable number>
Data2
<constant>,
R<variable number>
ALL:Clears
variables of the
variable number in
Data1 and of all
the variable
numbers that
follow.
STACK:Clears all
variables in the job
call stack.
Data1 must
always be a real
type variable.
Example
SIN R000 R001 (Sets the sine of R001 to R000.)
Function
Obtains the cosine of Data2, and stores the result in Data1.
Format:COS<Data1><Data2>
Additional
Item
Data1
R<variable number>
Data2
<constant>,
R<variable number>
Data1 must
always be a real
type variable.
Example
COS R000 R001 (Sets the cosine of R001 to R000.)
Function
Obtains the arc tangent of Data2, and stores the result in Data1.
Format:ATAN<Data1><Data2>
Additional
Item
Data1
R<variable number>
Data2
<constant>,
R<variable number>
Data1 must
always be a real
type variable.
Example
ATAN R000 R001 (Sets the arc tangent of R001 to R000.)
Function
Obtains the square root of Data2, and stores the result in Data1.
Format:SQRT<Data1><Data2>
Additional
Item
Data1
R<variable number>
Data2
<constant>,
R<variable number>
Example
Data1 must
always be a real
type variable.
SQRT R000 R001 (Sets the square root of R001 to R000.)
11-13
11
Table of Basic Instructions
11.5 Operating Instructions
DX100
MFRAME
MULMAT
INVMAT
SETFILE
GETFILE
GETPOS
VAL
Function
Creates a user coordinate using the position data for the given three points
as definition points. <Data1> indicates the definition point ORG position
data, <Data2> the definition point XX position data, and <Data3> the
definition point XY position data.
Format: MFRAME <user coordinate> <Data1> <Data2> <Data3>
Additional
Item
UF#(<user coordinate number>)
Data1
PX <variable number>
Data2
PX <variable number>
Data3
PX <variable number>
1 to 24
Example
MFRAME UF#(1) PX000 PX001 PX002
Function
Obtains the matrix product of Data2 and Data3, and stores the result in
Data1.
Format: MULMAT <Data1> <Data2> <Data3>
Additional
Item
Data1
P <variable number>
Data2
P <variable number>
Data3
P <variable number>
Example
MULMAT P000 P001 P002
Function
Obtains the inverse matrix of Data2, and stores the result in Data1.
Format: INVMAT <Data1> <Data2>
Additional
Item
Data1
P <variable number>
Data2
P <variable number>
Example
INVMAT P000 P001
Function
Changes the contents data of a condition file into the numeric data of Data1.
The contents data of a condition file to be changed is specified by the
element number.
Additional
Item
Contents
data of a
condition file
WEV#(<condition file
number>)(<element number>)
Data1
Constant,
D<variable number>
Example
SETFILE WEV#(1)(1) D000
Function
Stores the contents data of a condition file in Data1. The contents data of a
condition file to be obtained is specified by the element number.
Additional
Item
Data1
D <variable number>
Contents
data of a
condition file
WEV#(<condition file
number>)(<element number>)
Example
GETFILE D000 WEV#(1)(1)
Function
Stores the position data of Data2 (step number) in Data1.
Additional
Item
Data1
PX <variable number>
Data2
STEP# (<step number>)
Example
GETPOS PX000 STEP#(1)
Function
Converts the numeric value of the character string (ASCII) of Data2 into the
real number, and stores the result in Data1.
Format: VAL <Data1> <Data2>
Additional
Item
Data1
B <variable number>,
I <variable number>,
D <variable number>,
R <variable number>
Data2
Character string,
S <variable number>
Example
VAL B000 “123”
11-14
11
Table of Basic Instructions
11.5 Operating Instructions
DX100
ASC
CHR$
MID$
LEN
CAT$
Function
Obtains the character code of the first letter of the character string (ASCII) of
Data2, and stores the result in Data1.
Format:ASC<Data1><Data2>
Additional
Item
Data1
B <variable number>,
I <variable number>,
D <variable number>
Data2
Character string,
S <variable number>
Example
ASC B000 “ABC”
Function
Obtains the character (ASCII) with the character code of Data2, and stores
the result in Data1.
Format:CHR$<Data1><Data2>
Additional
Item
Data1
S <variable number>
Data2
Constant,
B <variable number>
Example
CHR$ S000 65
Function
Obtains the character string (ASCII) of any length (Data 3, 4) from the
character string (ASCII) of Data2, and stores the result in Data1.
Format:MID$<Data1><Data2><Data3><Data4>
Additional
Item
Data1
S <variable number>
Data2
Character string,
S <variable number>
Data3
Constant,
B <variable number>,
I <variable number>,
D <variable number>
Data4
Constant,
B <variable number>,
I <variable number>,
D <variable number>
Example
MID$ S000 “123ABC456” 4 3
Function
Obtains the total number of bytes of the character string (ASCII) of Data2,
and stores the result in Data1.
Format:LEN<Data1><Data2>
Additional
Item
Data1
B <variable number>,
I <variable number>,
D <variable number>
Data2
Character string,
S <variable number>
Example
LEN B000 “ABCDEF”
Function
Combines the character string (ASCII) of Data2 and Data3, and stores the
result in Data1.
Format:CAT$<Data1><Data2><Data3>
Additional
Item
Data1
S <variable number>
Data2
Character string,
S <variable number>
Data3
Character string,
S <variable number>
Example
CAT$ S000 “ABC” “DEF”
11-15
DX100
Index
Symbols
’ (comment) ......................................................................................... 11-7
* (label) ............................................................................................... 11-6
Numerics
350A .............................................................................................. 10-147
500A .............................................................................................. 10-147
A
AC =................................................................. 10-25, 10-38, 10-47, 10-144
Actual Welding .................................................................................... 9-21
ADD ................................................................................................... 11-9
additional items ..................................................................................... 3-5
ADJUST ........................................................................................... 10-15
ADVINIT ............................................................................................. 11-7
ADVSTOP .......................................................................................... 11-7
AEF# .............................................................................................. 10-144
AEF#(1) ............................................................................................ 10-38
Airgun condition data ............................................................................. 7-7
AJ2/3.............................................................................................. 10-147
ALARM HISTORY ............................................................................... 1-32
alarm history data .................................................................................. 7-8
alarm history windows ...................................................................... 10-126
ALL CMOS AREA.................................................................................. 7-7
alphanumeric input .............................................................................. 1-19
amplitude size at weaving................................................................. 10-112
AN3 = ............................................................................................. 10-145
AN4 = ............................................................................................. 10-145
ANALOG MONITOR ............................................................................ 1-32
AND ................................................................................................. 11-11
angle of weaving motion ................................................................... 10-113
anti-stick process ............................................................................... 10-81
ANTSTK ............................................................................... 10-38, 10-144
AOUT ................................................................................................. 11-5
application parameter............................................................................. 7-8
approach point ..................................................................... 10-100, 10-101
ARATIOF ............................................................................................ 11-5
ARATION ........................................................................................... 11-5
arc auxiliary condition file ......................................................... 10-75, 10-79
arc end condition data ............................................................................ 7-7
arc end condition file ................................................................ 10-63, 10-79
ARC FAILURE .................................................................................. 10-77
arc failure.......................................................................................... 10-75
ARC FAILURE STOP......................................................................... 10-15
arc restart function ............................................................................. 10-75
arc retry function ................................................................................ 10-73
arc start condition data ........................................................................... 7-7
arc start condition file ......................................................................... 10-56
arc start failure .................................................................................. 10-73
ARC WELD DIAGNOSIS window ...................................................... 10-128
arc welding ......................................................................................... 10-1
Arc Welding Application ....................................................................... 10-1
arc welding start condition file ................................................... 10-25, 10-47
ARCCTE......................................................................................... 10-145
Index-1
DX100
Index
ARCCTS ............................................................................... 10-83, 10-145
ARCOF ................................................................................. 10-34, 10-144
ARCON ...................................................................... 10-22, 10-73, 10-144
ARCSET ........................................................... 10-25, 10-47, 10-53, 10-145
AREA ................................................................................................... 1-7
ARM CONTROL .................................................................................. 1-32
ASC.................................................................................................. 11-15
ASF# .................................................................................... 10-47, 10-144
ASF# (1) ........................................................................................... 10-25
ASSIST ................................................................................................. 1-6
ATAN................................................................................................ 11-13
automatic sticking release process ...................................................... 10-81
automatic wire-stick release function.................................................... 10-79
AV = ............................................................................................... 10-144
AVP = ................................................................................... 10-38, 10-144
AWELD ........................................................................................... 10-145
axis keys ...................................................................................... 1-2, 1-10
B
base axis ............................................................................................ 1-13
BATCH CMOS ...................................................................................... 7-7
batch selection .................................................................................... 7-43
BATCH USER MEMORY........................................................................ 7-7
BWD ..................................................................................................... 1-9
BWS ................................................................................................... 9-85
C
CALL .................................................................................................. 11-6
CANCEL ............................................................................................... 1-6
cartesian coordinates .............................................................. 1-14, 2-2, 2-6
CAT$ ................................................................................................ 11-15
Change data.................................................................................... 10-123
character input ..................................................................................... 1-18
check mode operation .......................................................................... 4-13
check run ............................................................................................ 9-21
CHR$ ............................................................................................... 11-15
CIO program ......................................................................................... 7-8
circular interpolation ............................................................................... 3-8
CLEAR ............................................................................................. 11-13
Clearance data ...................................................................................... 7-7
clearance file ....................................................................................... 9-55
clearance teaching function .................................................................. 9-52
clearing reference position pulse for wear detection .............................. 9-128
ClO parameter ....................................................................................... 7-8
CNVRT ............................................................................................. 11-12
CO2.................................................................................................. 10-14
COMMAND POSITION ........................................................................ 1-32
COMMAND POSITION window ............................................................. 3-44
comments ............................................................................................. 3-5
compensation of gun arm bend ............................................................. 9-83
contact of wire and workpiece ............................................................. 10-81
contact-tip replacement .................................................................... 10-128
Continuous (operation cycle) ................................................................. 1-14
continuous circular arcs .......................................................................... 3-8
control groups........................................................................................ 3-3
Converter parameter .............................................................................. 7-8
Index-2
DX100
Index
COORD ................................................................................................ 1-6
coordinate home position parameter........................................................ 7-8
copy ................................................................................................... 3-67
copying jobs .......................................................................................... 5-2
COS ................................................................................................. 11-13
crater processing ............................................................................... 10-38
CREATE NEW JOB ............................................................................. 1-31
CURRENT POSITION ......................................................................... 1-32
cursor ............................................................................................ 1-5, 3-5
cursor key ............................................................................................. 1-2
cut...................................................................................................... 3-67
CWAIT ............................................................................................... 11-7
Cycle (operation cycle) ......................................................................... 1-14
cylindrical coordinates ............................................................. 1-14, 2-2, 2-7
D
DATE/TIME......................................................................................... 1-33
DEC ................................................................................................. 11-10
DELETE ....................................................................................... 1-9, 1-32
Delete the Word .................................................................................. 1-24
deleting a file ....................................................................................... 7-42
deleting a job....................................................................................... 7-41
deleting additional items ....................................................................... 3-63
deleting instructions ............................................................................. 3-55
deleting jobs .......................................................................................... 5-6
designation of mounting or removing a gun ............................................ 9-38
DEVICE .............................................................................................. 1-32
DIN .................................................................................................... 11-4
DIRECT OPEN...................................................................................... 1-7
DIS......................................................................................... 10-83, 10-90
DIS = .......................................................................... 10-85, 10-92, 10-145
displaying a power source condition file ............................................... 10-16
DIV................................................................................................... 11-10
DONE............................................................................................... 10-16
double gun .......................................................................................... 9-11
DOUT ................................................................................................. 11-4
DROP AMOUNT ................................................................................. 1-32
dry spot (continue) ............................................................................. 9-122
dry spot (file) ..................................................................................... 9-122
dry spot file No. ................................................................................. 9-122
dry spotting ......................................................................................... 9-22
dry spotting pressure ........................................................................... 9-22
dry spotting touch motion ..................................................................... 9-27
dry spotting touch motion designation .................................................... 9-27
dry-run speed operations ...................................................................... 4-12
E
E. STOP Button ..................................................................................... 1-4
edit mode.................................................................................... 1-14, 1-30
editing comments ................................................................................ 5-12
editing condition files............................................................................ 3-76
editing interpolation type ...................................................................... 3-75
editing play speed................................................................................ 3-71
electrode touch position teaching function .............................................. 9-43
electrode wear detection ...................................................................... 9-26
emergency stop ................................................................................... 4-16
Index-3
DX100
Index
emergency stop button .................................................................... 1-2, 3-1
Enable Switch................................................................................. 1-2, 1-5
END ................................................................................................... 11-6
end cut time ........................................................................................ 9-22
END OF ARC RESTARTING .............................................................. 10-75
enhanced welding condition file function .............................................. 10-97
ENTER ................................................................................................. 1-9
ENTER key ........................................................................................... 1-2
entering pulse to stroke conversion data .............................................. 9-123
entering torque to pressure conversion data ......................................... 9-123
EX. AXIS ............................................................................................... 1-8
execution file ..................................................................................... 10-12
External Axis ....................................................................................... 2-14
External I/O name data ........................................................................... 7-8
external memory devices ........................................................................ 7-1
F
FD/CF ................................................................................................. 1-32
FILE/GENERAL DATA ........................................................................... 7-7
fixed gun ............................................................................................. 9-49
fixed offset ........................................................................................ 9-121
forced gun-pressurizing function ............................................................ 9-47
FREQUENCY .................................................................................. 10-111
FULL OPEN POSITION SETTING .......................................................... 9-4
function definition parameter ................................................................... 7-8
Function key allocation data .................................................................... 7-8
function keys .................................................................................. 1-2, 9-3
FWD ..................................................................................................... 1-9
G
GAS FAILURE ................................................................................... 10-78
gas flow control.................................................................................. 10-10
gas shortage ..................................................................................... 10-75
general-purpose display area ......................................................... 1-2, 1-11
GETE ............................................................................................... 11-12
GETFILE ........................................................................................... 11-14
GETPOS ........................................................................................... 11-14
GETS ............................................................................................... 11-12
gradually change the welding current and voltage ....................... 10-83, 10-90
gradually changing the welding condition ............................................. 10-82
grasping workpieces ............................................................................ 9-70
GRP COMBINATION ........................................................................... 1-33
GUN ................................................................................................... 9-14
gun arm bend coef. ............................................................................ 9-121
gun change ......................................................................................... 9-38
gun change instruction ......................................................................... 9-38
gun change job .................................................................................... 9-40
gun changing timing ............................................................................. 9-42
gun condition file ................................................................................ 9-118
gun connection (PICK) confirmation signal ............................................. 9-38
gun connection (PICK) signal ................................................................ 9-38
GUN COOL WTR ERR ....................................................................... 9-116
gun cooling water error ....................................................................... 9-111
gun disconnection (PLACE) confirmation signal ...................................... 9-38
gun identification signal ........................................................................ 9-38
gun No. ............................................................................................... 9-15
Index-4
DX100
Index
gun pressure compensation function ..................................................... 9-63
gun pressure file .................................................................................. 9-17
gun pressure file No. .................................................................... 9-14, 9-15
gun pushing coef ............................................................................... 9-122
gun stroke adjustment .......................................................................... 9-29
GUNCHG ........................................................................................... 9-38
gun-close teaching............................................................................... 9-53
H
HIGH SPEED ...................................................................................... 1-10
high speed .......................................................................................... 1-14
hit point count over ............................................................................ 9-122
Hold ............................................................................................. 1-4, 4-15
hold at the station ................................................................................ 4-35
hold button ............................................................................................ 1-2
hold by external input signal (system input) ............................................ 4-34
HOLD on the programming pendant ...................................................... 4-34
HOME POSITION................................................................................ 1-32
home position calibrating data ................................................................ 7-8
HOVER WEAVING .......................................................................... 10-115
human interface display area ........................................................ 1-11, 1-16
I
I/O allocation ..................................................................................... 9-111
I/O DATA .............................................................................................. 7-8
I/O message history data........................................................................ 7-8
I/O MSG HISTORY .............................................................................. 1-32
I/O name data ....................................................................................... 7-8
IF ....................................................................................................... 11-6
IMOV.................................................................................................. 11-2
IN/OUT ............................................................................................... 1-31
INC .................................................................................................. 11-10
inching ................................................................................................ 1-14
individual reset function for wear amount ............................................... 9-76
individual selection............................................................................... 7-43
INFORM LIST ....................................................................................... 1-8
initial folder setting ............................................................................... 7-14
initial value file ................................................................................... 10-12
INPUT ALLOCATION window ............................................................. 9-111
INSERT ................................................................................................ 1-9
inserting additional items ...................................................................... 3-61
inserting instructions ............................................................................ 3-52
insertion slot for compact flash ................................................................ 1-2
instruction for grasping/releasing workpieces ......................................... 9-72
instruction group .................................................................................. 3-51
instruction list dialog box .................................................................... 10-50
instruction search .............................................................................. 3-103
INTERFERENCE................................................................................. 1-32
Interference area file .............................................................................. 7-7
INTERLOCK ......................................................................................... 1-7
interpolation type ................................................................................... 3-6
INVMAT............................................................................................ 11-14
Index-5
DX100
Index
J
JOB ............................................................................................. 1-31, 7-7
JOB CAPACITY ................................................................................... 1-31
JOB CAPACITY window ....................................................................... 3-49
JOB CONTENT window ....................................................................... 3-43
JOB HEADER window.......................................................................... 3-42
joint coordinates ..................................................................... 1-14, 2-2, 2-5
joint interpolation.................................................................................... 3-6
JUMP ................................................................................................. 11-6
K
KEY ALLOCATION .............................................................................. 1-33
L
label search ....................................................................................... 3-101
LAP DISTANCE ................................................................................. 10-77
LEN .................................................................................................. 11-15
limit of touch (lower tip) ....................................................................... 9-122
limit of touch (upper tip) ...................................................................... 9-122
LIMIT RELEASE .................................................................................. 1-32
limited speed operations ....................................................................... 4-12
line numbers.......................................................................................... 3-5
line search .......................................................................................... 3-99
linear interpolation.................................................................................. 3-7
LOAD ................................................................................................. 1-32
loading a condition file or generel data ................................................... 7-30
loading a job ........................................................................................ 7-28
loading a parameter ............................................................................. 7-31
loading all CMOS data.......................................................................... 7-37
loading all user’s programs ................................................................... 7-36
loading I/O data ................................................................................... 7-33
loading system data ............................................................................. 7-34
local variables...................................................................................... 3-94
low speed............................................................................................ 1-14
low speed operation ............................................................................. 4-11
lower-tip teaching ................................................................................. 9-53
M
machine lock operation ......................................................................... 4-13
MAG ................................................................................................. 10-14
MAIN MENU.......................................................................................... 1-5
main menu area ........................................................................... 1-11, 1-13
major alarms ....................................................................................... 4-18
management mode ...................................................................... 1-14, 1-30
manipulator coordinate systems .............................................................. 2-1
MANIPULATOR TYPE ......................................................................... 1-32
manipulator types ................................................................................ 3-89
manual dry spotting ................................................................................ 9-8
manual operation for grasping/releasing workpieces ............................... 9-75
manual speed .............................................................................. 1-14, 3-26
Index-6
DX100
Index
MANUAL SPEED keys ................................................................... 1-2, 1-10
MANUAL SPOT..................................................................................... 9-3
manual welding ..................................................................................... 9-8
MASTER JOB ..................................................................................... 1-31
max pressure .................................................................................... 9-121
MEASURE ........................................................................................ 10-15
medium speed..................................................................................... 1-14
menu area ........................................................................... 1-2, 1-11, 1-16
MFRAME .......................................................................................... 11-14
MID$ ................................................................................................ 11-15
minor adjustment of the welding voltage .............................................. 10-13
minor alarms ....................................................................................... 4-18
mirror shift function .............................................................................. 6-55
MODE ...................................................................................... 1-4, 10-111
mode switch .......................................................................................... 1-2
modification of speed type .................................................................... 3-71
MODIFY ............................................................................................... 1-9
modifying additional items .................................................................... 3-60
modifying additional numeric data ......................................................... 3-59
modifying instructions........................................................................... 3-55
modifying job names .............................................................................. 5-8
MONITORING TIME ............................................................................ 1-32
motion function parameter ...................................................................... 7-8
MOTION TYPE ..................................................................................... 1-8
MOTION TYPE key ............................................................................... 1-2
motor gun dry spot pressure data ............................................................ 7-7
motor gun pressure power data .............................................................. 7-7
MOVC ................................................................................................ 11-1
move instruction for clearance .............................................................. 9-58
move instructions................................................................................. 3-11
movement ratio after close (low) ......................................................... 9-121
movement ratio in sensing (up) ........................................................... 9-121
MOVJ ................................................................................................. 11-1
MOVL ................................................................................................. 11-1
MOVS ................................................................................................ 11-2
MSHIFT .............................................................................................. 11-8
MUL ................................................................................................. 11-10
MULMAT .......................................................................................... 11-14
MULTI .................................................................................................. 1-6
N
No change data ............................................................................... 10-123
No. of the gun pressure file ................................................................... 9-17
NONE............................................................................................... 10-16
NOP ................................................................................................... 11-6
NOT ................................................................................................. 11-11
nozzle cleaning ............................................................................... 10-128
Numeric keys ................................................................................ 1-2, 1-10
O
open/close of a motor gun ...................................................................... 9-9
OPERATE COND ........................................................................ 1-33, 4-24
operating environment ..................................................................... 10-128
operation control parameter .................................................................... 7-8
operation cycle ...................................................................................... 4-7
operation mode ........................................................................... 1-14, 1-30
Index-7
DX100
Index
operations for teaching welding points ................................................... 9-57
OR ................................................................................................... 11-11
OUT #2045 ....................................................................................... 10-77
OUT #2046 ............................................................................. 10-77, 10-78
OUTPUT ALLOCATION window ......................................................... 9-113
output characteristic curve .................................................................. 10-11
overlap length .................................................................................... 10-75
OVERRUN&S-SENSOR ....................................................................... 1-32
P
PAGE ................................................................................................... 1-7
PAGE key ............................................................................................. 1-2
PAM function ....................................................................................... 6-47
parallel shift function ............................................................................ 6-13
parallel shift job conversion function ...................................................... 6-26
PARAMETER ......................................................................... 1-33, 7-7, 7-8
PARAMETER BATCH ............................................................................ 7-7
pasting ................................................................................................ 3-68
PAUSE ............................................................................................... 11-7
PICK ................................................................................................... 9-38
PICK (gun mounted) ............................................................................ 9-38
PLACE (gun removed) ......................................................................... 9-38
play mode ........................................................................................... 1-29
play speed ............................................................................................ 3-6
playback ............................................................................................... 4-1
position level ....................................................................................... 3-14
POWER ON/OFF POS ......................................................................... 1-32
Power Source characteristic data ............................................................ 7-7
Power Source characteristic definition data .............................................. 7-7
Power Source condition file ................................................................. 9-124
POWER SOURCE NAME ................................................................... 10-14
Power Source start signal output timing ................................................. 9-14
POWER SUPPLY .............................................................................. 10-14
pre cut time ......................................................................................... 9-22
PRESS ............................................................................................... 9-14
press unit ............................................................................................ 9-23
PRESSCL ........................................................................................... 9-22
pressure compensation ...................................................................... 9-122
pressure compensation value................................................................ 9-67
pressure file No. .................................................................................. 9-22
procedure for signal assignment ............................................................ 9-76
programming pendant ............................................................................ 1-2
programming pendant display ............................................................... 1-11
PSEUDO INPUT SIGNAL window ....................................................... 9-115
Pseudo input signals .............................................................................. 7-8
PULSE................................................................................................ 11-4
pulse mirror-shift function...................................................................... 6-55
R
RANGE ............................................................................................. 10-15
RB1 ................................................................................................ 10-146
RB2 ................................................................................................ 10-146
RB3 ................................................................................................ 10-146
RB4 ................................................................................................ 10-146
REF .................................................................................................. 10-15
reference point instructions ................................................................... 3-18
Index-8
DX100
Index
REFP ................................................................................................. 11-2
REFP1 ................................................................................ 10-100, 10-101
REFP2 ................................................................................ 10-100, 10-101
Register name data ............................................................................... 7-8
Register Word Function........................................................................ 1-21
registering a job ..................................................................................... 3-2
registering the full-open/short-open position ........................................... 9-35
Related job (Job+Condition) ................................................................... 7-7
relationship between the reference value and output value .................... 10-11
relative modification ............................................................................. 3-71
releasing workpieces ........................................................................... 9-70
remote mode ....................................................................................... 1-29
REPLAY DISTANCE.......................................................................... 10-74
RES. START (CNCT)........................................................................... 1-33
RES. START (JOB) ............................................................................. 1-31
RES. START(CNCT) ........................................................................... 4-26
RES. STATUS............................................................................. 1-31, 4-32
RESERVE JOB NAME ......................................................................... 1-33
reserved start ...................................................................................... 4-23
RESET RESERVATION ....................................................................... 4-33
reset wear of lower tip ........................................................................ 9-122
reset wear of upper tip ....................................................................... 9-122
restart ................................................................................................. 4-15
Restart Operation after E-Stop ............................................................ 10-72
Restart Operation after Jog Operation ................................................. 10-72
RESTARTING FOR ARC ................................................................... 10-75
RET ................................................................................................... 11-6
RETRACT TIME ................................................................................ 10-74
RETRY ................................................................................. 10-25, 10-144
reverse pasting.................................................................................... 3-69
ROBOT ........................................................................................ 1-8, 1-32
robot axis ............................................................................................ 1-13
robot matching parameter....................................................................... 7-7
robot-coordinates mirror-shift funciton.................................................... 6-55
S
S350 .............................................................................................. 10-147
SAVE ................................................................................................. 1-32
saving a condition file or general data .................................................... 7-18
saving a job................................................................................. 7-12, 7-16
saving a parameter .............................................................................. 7-20
saving all CMOS data .......................................................................... 7-26
saving all data in CMOS area ............................................................... 7-27
saving all user’s programs .................................................................... 7-25
saving I/O data .................................................................................... 7-22
saving system data .............................................................................. 7-23
SECOND HOME POS ......................................................................... 1-32
second home position ............................................................................ 7-8
security mode ...................................................................................... 1-30
SELECT ............................................................................................... 1-5
SELECT JOB ...................................................................................... 1-31
SELECT key ......................................................................................... 1-2
selecting a folder ................................................................................. 7-12
selecting the range .............................................................................. 3-66
sensor detection .................................................................................. 9-27
sensor detection designation ................................................................ 9-27
sensor parameter .................................................................................. 7-8
SERVO MONITOR .............................................................................. 1-32
SERVO ON READY............................................................................... 1-6
servo parameter .................................................................................... 7-8
Index-9
DX100
Index
servo power block parameter .................................................................. 7-8
servomotor parameter ............................................................................ 7-8
SERVOPACK parameter ........................................................................ 7-8
SET .................................................................................................. 11-11
SET SPEED ........................................................................................ 1-33
SETE ................................................................................................ 11-11
SETFILE ........................................................................................... 11-14
setting the group output tag .................................................................. 9-80
setting the gun stroke position ............................................................... 9-85
setting the lost-electrode detection value .............................................. 9-131
setting the pressure conditions .............................................................. 9-62
setting the software limit value ............................................................ 9-130
SETUP ............................................................................................... 1-33
SFTOF................................................................................................ 11-8
SFTON ............................................................................................... 11-8
SHIELDING GAS ............................................................................... 10-14
SHIFT ................................................................................................... 1-7
shock detection level data ....................................................................... 7-7
SHORT OPEN POSITION SETTING ................................................ 9-3, 9-4
short/full open position data .................................................................... 7-7
SIMPLE MENU ...................................................................................... 1-5
SIN ................................................................................................... 11-13
single circular arc ................................................................................... 3-8
single gun ........................................................................................... 9-10
Single job .............................................................................................. 7-7
single spline curve ................................................................................. 3-9
single weaving cycle ........................................................................ 10-114
SMOOTH ........................................................................................ 10-111
solenoid valve.................................................................................... 10-10
special playback operations .................................................................. 4-11
SPEED ............................................................................................... 11-2
speed override ..................................................................................... 4-20
spline interpolation ................................................................................. 3-9
Spor I/O allocation data .......................................................................... 7-7
spot gun characteristic data .................................................................... 7-7
SPOT WELD DIAGNOSIS .................................................................... 9-29
Spot welding condition data .................................................................... 7-7
spot welding Power Source characteristic data ......................................... 7-7
SQRT ............................................................................................... 11-13
START........................................................................................... 1-4, 3-1
start button ............................................................................................ 1-2
station axis .......................................................................................... 1-13
status display area ....................................................................... 1-11, 1-13
Step (operation cycle) .......................................................................... 1-14
step search ....................................................................................... 3-100
stop .................................................................................................... 4-15
stop by alarm ....................................................................................... 4-18
stroke ................................................................................................. 9-43
stroke moving velocity ........................................................................ 9-121
SUB.................................................................................................... 11-9
SV monitor signals ................................................................................. 7-8
SVGUNCL ................................................................................... 9-3, 9-22
SVSPOT ............................................................................................... 9-3
symbol input ........................................................................................ 1-20
synergic power supply ........................................................................ 10-12
SYSTEM DATA ..................................................................................... 7-8
system definition parameter .................................................................... 7-7
SYSTEM INFO .................................................................................... 1-32
system information ................................................................................. 7-8
system matching parameter .................................................................... 7-8
Index-10
DX100
Index
T
T = ................................................................................................. 10-144
tag search ......................................................................................... 3-105
TCP adjustment stroke ......................................................................... 9-43
TCP adjustment value .......................................................................... 9-29
teach lock ............................................................................................. 3-1
teach mode ......................................................................................... 1-29
teaching................................................................................................ 3-1
TEACHING COND............................................................................... 1-33
teaching with gun pressure ................................................................... 9-61
tearing and dropping of metal ............................................................. 10-82
test operations............................................................................. 3-27, 3-70
TEST START ........................................................................................ 1-8
thickness ............................................................................................ 9-43
TIMER ................................................................................................ 11-6
timer cooling water error ..................................................................... 9-111
timer instruction ................................................................................... 3-19
tip hit count ......................................................................................... 9-29
tip hit count reset ............................................................................... 9-122
TMR COOL WTR ERR....................................................................... 9-116
TOOL ................................................................................................. 1-32
tool coordinates ...................................................................... 1-14, 2-2, 2-9
tool data ............................................................................................... 7-7
tool number ......................................................................................... 2-11
torch tip ............................................................................................ 10-15
touch detective delay time .................................................................. 9-121
touch press ................................................................................. 9-17, 9-23
touch speed ................................................................................ 9-17, 9-22
touch speed threshold ........................................................................ 9-121
transformer thermostat error ............................................................... 9-111
transmission(general) parameter ............................................................. 7-8
TRANS-THERMO ERR ...................................................................... 9-116
travel speed of the torch tip during welding .......................................... 10-57
TRT (Traverse Time) ........................................................................... 3-73
TWC-A ............................................................................................... 9-27
TWC-B ............................................................................................... 9-27
U
undo ................................................................................................... 3-38
UNTIL................................................................................................. 11-7
upper-tip teaching ................................................................................ 9-53
Use of Words .............................................................................. 1-22, 1-24
USER COORDINATE .......................................................................... 1-32
user coordinate data .............................................................................. 7-7
user coordinates ........................................................... 1-14, 2-2, 2-12, 2-13
user ID ............................................................................................... 1-33
user registered file ............................................................................. 10-12
user variables...................................................................................... 3-77
user word registration............................................................................. 7-8
user-coordinates mirror-shift function ..................................................... 6-55
V
V = ................................................................................................. 10-144
VAL .................................................................................................. 11-14
Index-11
DX100
Index
VARIABLE .......................................................................................... 1-31
variable data.......................................................................................... 7-7
variable name ........................................................................................ 7-8
VERIFY .............................................................................................. 1-32
verifying a file ...................................................................................... 7-40
verifying a job ...................................................................................... 7-38
verifying data ....................................................................................... 7-38
VERSION............................................................................................ 1-32
VWELD ........................................................................................... 10-146
W
WAIT .................................................................................................. 11-5
wall direction ................................................................................... 10-101
wear (fixed side) .................................................................................. 9-29
wear (movable side) ............................................................................. 9-29
wear compensation ...................................................................... 9-26, 9-32
wear detect sensor polarity ................................................................. 9-121
wear detection ..................................................................................... 9-26
wear detective sensor DIN No. ............................................................ 9-121
wear ratio (fixed side) ......................................................................... 9-121
wear volume over (fixed) .................................................................... 9-122
wear volume over (movable) ............................................................... 9-122
WEAV STOP ................................................................................... 10-114
weaving basic coordinate system ...................................................... 10-100
weaving data ......................................................................................... 7-7
weaving file ..................................................................................... 10-116
weaving frequency ........................................................................... 10-112
weaving pattern ............................................................................... 10-112
weaving prohibit ................................................................................... 4-13
weaving stop ................................................................................... 10-114
WELD COMPLETE ............................................................................ 9-116
WELD ON/OFF............................................................................ 9-3, 9-117
WELD ON/OFF (from PLC) ................................................................. 9-116
WELD1 ................................................................... 10-144, 10-145, 10-146
WELD2 ................................................................... 10-144, 10-145, 10-146
WELD3 ................................................................... 10-144, 10-145, 10-146
WELD4 ................................................................... 10-144, 10-145, 10-146
WELD5 ............................................................................... 10-144, 10-145
WELD6 ............................................................................... 10-144, 10-145
WELD7 ............................................................................... 10-144, 10-145
WELD8 ............................................................................... 10-144, 10-145
welding alarm history........................................................................ 10-126
WELDING COMMAND ....................................................................... 9-117
WELDING COMMAND (level/pulse) ........................................................ 9-2
welding condition ............................................................................... 10-47
WELDING CONDITION (LEVEL signals) ............................................. 9-117
Welding condition auxiliary data .............................................................. 7-7
welding condition No. ........................................................................... 9-14
welding condition set instruction .......................................................... 10-25
welding conditions.................................................................................. 9-2
welding conditions group output function ................................................ 9-78
welding current .......................................................................... 9-20, 10-74
welding current/voltage output values .................................................. 10-15
welding current/voltage reference values.............................................. 10-15
welding end instruction ....................................................................... 10-34
WELDING ERROR RESET ................................................................ 9-117
Welding Execution Function During Teach Mode .................................. 10-71
welding ON/OFF ................................................................................ 9-111
welding speed ................................................................................... 10-70
welding start instruction ...................................................................... 10-22
Index-12
DX100
Index
welding time ........................................................................................ 9-20
welding voltage ................................................................................. 10-74
WIRE ANTI-STICKING....................................................................... 10-15
WIRE DIA. ........................................................................................ 10-14
WIRE FAILURE ................................................................................. 10-78
wire feeding ...................................................................................... 10-10
wire inching ............................................................................... 10-6, 10-10
wire retraction ........................................................................... 10-6, 10-10
wire shortage .................................................................................... 10-75
wire shortage alarm ........................................................................... 10-78
wire sticking signal ............................................................................. 10-79
WIRE STICKOUT .............................................................................. 10-15
Word Registration ................................................................................ 1-22
WORK HOME POS ............................................................................. 1-32
Work home position data ........................................................................ 7-8
workpiece transfer function ................................................................... 9-69
WST ................................................................................................... 9-14
WTM .................................................................................................. 9-14
WVOF ............................................................................................ 10-146
WVON ............................................................................................ 10-146
X
XOR ................................................................................................. 11-11
Z
Z-axis ................................................................................................... 2-7
Index-13
DX100
OPERATOR’S MANUAL
FOR SPOT AND ARC WELDING USING MOTOR GUN
For inquiries or after-sales service on this product, contact
your local YASKAWA representative as shown below.
YASKAWA ELECTRIC CORPORATION
2-1 Kurosakishiroishi, Yahatanishi-ku, Kitakyushu, 806-0004, Japan
Phone: +81-93-645-7703 Fax: +81-93-645-7802
www.yaskawa.co.jp
YASKAWA AMERICA, INC. (MOTOMAN ROBOTICS DIVISION)
100 Automation Way, Miamisburg, OH 45342, U.S.A.
Phone: +1-937-847-6200 Fax: +1-937-847-6277
www.motoman.com
YASKAWA EUROPE GmbH (ROBOTICS DIVISION)
Yaskawastrasse 1, 85391, Allershausen, Germany
Phone: +49-8166-90-0 Fax: +49-8166-90-103
www.yaskawa.eu.com
YASKAWA NORDIC AB
Verkstadsgatan 2, Box 504, SE-385 25 Torsas, Sweden
Phone: +46-480-417-800 Fax: +46-486-414-10
www.yaskawa.se
YASKAWA ELECTRIC (CHINA) CO., LTD.
22F, One Corporate Avenue, No.222 Hubin Road, Huangpu District, Shanghai 200021, China
Phone: +86-21-5385-2200 Fax: +86-21-5385-3299
www.yaskawa.com.cn
YASKAWA SHOUGANG ROBOT CO., LTD.
No.2 Building, No.6 Rongchang East Street, Beijing E&T Development Area, Beijing 100176, China
Phone: +86-10-6788-2858 Fax: +86-10-6788-2878
www.ysr-motoman.cn
YASKAWA ELECTRIC KOREA CORPORATION
6F, 112, LS-ro, Dongan-gu, Anyang-si, Gyeonggi-do, 14118, Korea
Phone: +82-31-8015-4224 Fax: +82-31-8015-5034
www.yaskawa.co.kr
YASKAWA ELECTRIC TAIWAN CORPORATION
12F, No.207, Sec. 3, Beishin Rd., Shindian District, New Taipei City 23143, Taiwan
Phone: +886-2-8913-1333 Fax: +886-2-8913-1513
www.yaskawa.com.tw
YASKAWA ASIA PACIFIC PTE. LTD.
30A Kallang Place, #06-01, 339213, Singapore
Phone: +65-6282-3003 Fax: +65-6289-3003
www.yaskawa.com.sg
YASKAWA ELECTRIC (THAILAND) CO., LTD.
59, 1st-5th Floor, Flourish Building, Soi Ratchadapisek 18, Ratchadapisek Road, Huaykwang,
Bangkok 10310, Thailand
Phone: +66-2-017-0099 Fax: +66-2-017-0199
www.yaskawa.co.th
PT. YASKAWA ELECTRIC INDONESIA
Secure Building-Gedung B Lantai Dasar & Lantai 1 Jl. Raya Protokol Halim Perdanakusuma,
Jakarta 13610, Indonesia
Phone: +62-21-2982-6470 Fax: +62-21-2982-6471
www.yaskawa.co.id
YASKAWA INDIA PRIVATE LIMITED (ROBOTICS DIVISION)
No.136, Sector-8, Industrial Estate, IMT Manesar, Gurugram, Haryana 122050, India
Phone: +91-124-475-8500
www.yaskawaindia.in
Specifications are subject to change without notice
for ongoing product modifications and improvements.
YASKAWA ELECTRIC CORPORATION
MANUAL NO. RE-CSO-A044 6
C Printed in Japan April 2024 12-06
">